FCR Xg-1: CR-IR346RU

0.
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY
FCR XG-1
CR-IR346RU
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

and µC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation,
is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 µC/kg
FCR® is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright© 2000-2004 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Miyanodai Technology Development
Center.
Document No. 010-051-08

1 st Edition - Oct. 10, 2000
Revised Edition - Sep. 25, 2004
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

Printed in Japan
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.1
09.01.2004 FM4338
0.2 0.3
■ Notation of Symbols
1. Getting Started
• Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the installa-
tion location when the part or component removed is to be
■ Scope reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts the
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR346RU. The ma-
chine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification.
CHECK procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant “■ Check/
■ Notation of Unit Symbols Adjustment Procedures.”
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI)
are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in • Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when
the SI, are used in some cases. installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for improv-
■ Notation of Warnings, Cautions, etc. ing ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
WARNING
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed. ■ Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
have been inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
CAUTION If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction is
not observed. Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or Inspection/calibration procedures should be performed in accordance with the inspection/
difficult-to-recover trouble). calibration manuals described in the ECN Information.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ ● Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration

Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if
Name Inspection Calibration Inspection/calibration manual No.
the instruction is not observed.
Dosimeter – ❍
◆ NOTE ◆
Steel rule (150mm) ❍ –
Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
Steel rule (300mm) ❍ – ECO NO. FCR-A014
REFERENCE Digital tester ❍ ❍
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
Calipers ❍(✻) –
Used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to. ✻ : A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration. TR2H0001.EPS
■ Notation in the Manual

In this Service Manual, the CR-IR346RU and CR-IR346CL are denoted by RU and CL,
respectively.
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.2 010-051-00

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM3058
08.30.2001 FM2887
0.4 0.5
■ Optical Parts
2. Safety Precautions
Observe the following rules when servicing the optical parts. Otherwise, the image quality
may be degraded.
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. ● Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV
switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective housings removed, the
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. photomultiplier will be damaged.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. ● Never remove the scanning optics unit covers. If the covers are removed, the image
quality may degrade.
2.1 Working Precautions ● For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the manual.
● Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently discharged
even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise due care to avoid
■ Power Supply
electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal carelessly).
● Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the
machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged,
you may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even
when the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing ■ Other Working Precautions
procedures, such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF ● Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered, because of
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary possible electric shock hazards.
damage due to short circuit, as instructed in this manual. ● When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise due care
● To restart or reboot the machine, power it OFF and wait more than five seconds before against electric shock or other hazards.
powering it ON again. If the machine is powered ON within five seconds, it may ● Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature because
automatically shut down for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage. you may suffer burns.
● When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to wear an
■ Drive Mechanism
antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body. Static electricity
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other drive may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled.
● Never remove the rubber belt of the subscanning unit, except for its replacement.
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF
● Secure the machine onto the floor in place by use of its adjustable feet or retainers.
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and
clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. ● Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number indications,
and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put another label over
■ Heavy Objects them.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and ● Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures, make sure
installation of heavy objects. that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed have been
reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
■ Safety Devices
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, panels, and covers)
should always be enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may
impair their safety features.
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.4 010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.5
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
0.6 0.7
2.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ■ Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, laser beams will never leak
As indicated by the Certification and Indication Label attached on the rear cover of the out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical
machine for overseas use, the machine complies with the U.S. Federal Regulations path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other
concerning laser safety. The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 50 people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you will not During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
be exposed to any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in this manual. instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the
protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
■ Precautions Against Laser Exposure
● Protective Housing of the Machine
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The four covers
● Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure.
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described
in this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the
removed protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent Upper rear cover
leakage of a laser beam out of the machine.
• Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit.
Left-hand side cover
• Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts.
● Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs
described in “Preventive Maintenance Volume” at intervals specified.
● Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. Right-hand side cover
• Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you
may be exposed to laser beam radiation.
• Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
• Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
• Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
Front cover
• Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.
HHS Label #2
Upper light protect plate

T
ON
FR FR6H0005.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
0.8 0.9
2.3 Safety Labels and Other Labels

2.3.1 Laser Precaution Labels
■ Precaution Label Attachment Locations

Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution
labels, as specified in Part 1-J, Federal Regulations Code “Title 21” issued by the FDA of the
U.S.
NT
● Machine FR
O
HHS Certification and

Identification Label
HHS Label #1
EN 60825-1: 1996
HHS Label #1
Class 1 Product Label
EN 60825-1: 1996 EN 60825-1: 1996
Class 3B Panel Label Class 3B Panel Label
HHS Label #2 FR6H0007.EPS

HHS Label #1
HHS Label #1 ● Scanning Optics Unit

EN 60825-1: 1996
Class 3B Panel Label
HHS Label #2
O NT
FR EN 60825-1: 1996 EN 60825-1: 1996
FR6H0006.EPS
Class 3B Panel Label Warning Label
FR6H0001.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
0.10 0.11
■ List of Precaution Labels ● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label
● HHS Certification and Identification Label
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

26-30, NISHIAZABU 2-CHOME, MINATO-KU,
TOKYO 106-8620, JAPAN
MODEL CR-IR 346RU

SERIAL No.
MANUFACTURED
FIT
This product complies with

21 CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J.
FR6H0022.EPS
● HHS Label #1
DANGER
Laser radiation when open
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
FR6H0008.EPS
● HHS Label #2
DANGER
Laser radiation
when open external cover
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
FR6H0015.EPS
FR6H0009.EPS
● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 1 Product Label ● EN 60825-1: 1996 Warning Label
FR6H0010.EPS
FR6H0014.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
0.12 0.13
2.3.2 Other Labels ■ List of Other Labels
● Ratings Indication Label

■ Label Attachment Locations
• For use in Japan
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

MADE IN JAPAN
FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

MODEL CR-IR 346RU
ELECTRICAL RATING
INPUT 1-PHASE 50-60Hz
Pharmaceutical Label 100V~
MAX. INPUT CURRENT 3A
SN
405N2887
FR6H0023.EPS
Ratings Indication Label • For use outside Japan
Manufacturer Label
FR6H0011.EPS
FR6H0024.EPS
● Pharmaceutical Label
405N2676A
FR6H0026.EPS
● Manufacturer Label
FR6H0025.EPS
010-051-01
08.30.2001
10.10.2000 FM3058
FM2887 08.30.2001
10.10.2000 FM3058
FM2887
0.14 0.15
3. Specifications of the Machine 3.2 List of Optional Components

Product abbreviations Items Qty. Remarks
3.1 Product Abbreviations
IR346 AC CORD RU power cable
1 Japan, U.S., Canada, etc.
100-120V UL #(E) (for use in Japan and the U.S.)
Product abbreviations Items Qty. Remarks
IR346 AC CORD RU power cable
CR IR346 RU# Machine-specific data FD 1 3.5-inch/1.44MB 1 Germany, France, Spain, Sweden, etc.
200-240V E (for use in Europe, excluding the U.K.)
(for use in Japan) CD-ROM (for RU) 1 For backup (installed prior to shipment)
Label 1 One set (RU exposure marker precaution labels) IR346 AC CORD RU power cable
Label 1 One set (inch and metric labels) 1 U.K.
200-240V UK E (for use in the U.K.)
Fuse set 1 Spare IR346 FLOOR FIX
Ferrite bead 1 E04SR301334 Retainer 1 For retaining the machine.
KIT #(E)
CR IR346 RU USA E Machine-specific data FD 1 3.5-inch/1.44MB CL/RU connection For direct connection without hub
(for use in the U.S.) CD-ROM (for RU) 1 For backup (installed prior to shipment) IR346 IIP CABLE #(E) 1
cable Category 5 cable (cross), 1.95 m
Label 1 One set (RU exposure marker precaution labels)
IR346 STAND #(E) Table 1
Label 1 One set (inch and metric labels)
Fuse set 1 Spare IR346 CASSETTE Table-attached
1
Ferrite bead 1 E04SR301334 POCKET #(E) cassette pocket
TR6H0003.EPS
CR IR346 RU E Machine-specific data FD 1 3.5-inch/1.44MB
(for use in Europe) CD-ROM (for RU) 1 For backup (installed prior to shipment)
Label 1 One set (RU exposure marker precaution labels)
Label 1 One set (inch and metric labels)
Fuse set 1 Spare
Ferrite bead 1 E04SR301334
TR6H0002.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
0.16 0.17
3.3 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity 3.4 Machine Moving and Fixing Means
■ Dimensions ■ Moving Means

W550xD515xH1065 (mm) • Four two-wheel casters (variable direction/no brake)
■ Fixing Means
• Four adjustable feet • One table (optional)
1065
550
515
Unit: mm
FR6H0002.EPS
■ Weight adjustable feet

155 kg approx.
• Two machine retainers (optional) • One table and two retainers (optional)
■ Center of Gravity Table
Height: 500 mm
From the right-hand side: 275 mm
From the rear: 242 mm
Retainer
FR6H0027.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000
08.20.2001
08.30.2001 FM3058
FM2887
0.18 0.19
3.5 Environmental Requirements 3.6 Electrical Specifications
■ Atmospheric Requirements ■ Frequency

50Hz/60Hz, single-phase, common specification
Operation Non-operation During transit
Temperature 15–30 °C 0–45 °C -10–50 °C ■ Line Voltage
Relative
40–80 %
10–90 % 10–90 % For use in Japan: 100 VAC ±10%
humidity Without condensation
For use in the U.S.: 100-120 VAC ±10%
Atmospheric
pressure
700–1,030 hPa 500–1,030 hPa For use in Europe: 200-240 VAC ±10%
The above environmental requirements during non-operation ■ Power Capacity

and during transit do not apply to IPs (Imaging Plates). TR6H0001.EPS
0.4 kVA
■ Floor (Installation Area) Vibration Requirements
■ Power Cord
Frequency: 10-55 Hz
3m, with 3P plug/connector
Amplitude: 0.0075 mm or less
■ Rated Amperage
■ Floor Levelness
100 VAC, 50/60Hz: 3A
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less for both front and rear and both right and left
120-240 VAC, 50/60Hz: 2.6A-1.3A
■ Floor Flatness
■ Overload Protection
10 mm or less
100 VAC, 50/60Hz: 10A
■ Variable Magnetic Field 120-240 VAC, 50/60Hz: 10A
0.3 gauss p-p or less
■ Power Consumption
Maximum operation: 230 W
Idling: 125 W
Standby: 100 W
■ Grounding (in Japan)

Use the power cable supplied with the machine, and securely insert the power plug into an
indoor polarized receptacle.
The grounding required is Class D (former Class 3).
■ Grounding (outside Japan)

Use an optional power cable, and securely insert the power plug into an indoor polarized
receptacle.
010-051-01
08.30.2001
10.10.2000 FM3058
FM2887 10.10.2000 FM3058
08.30.2001 FM2887
0.20 0.21
3.7 Other Specifications 3.8 Installation and Servicing Spaces

REFERENCE
■ Maximum Heat Generation
The machine may be placed with its right and left sides and its rear against the walls.
Standby: 125 wh However, the front of the machine requires a space of 1,000 mm or more, and it is
Operation: 230 wh necessary to secure sufficient space around the machine to rotate it.
■ Noise
Standby: 40 dB or less ■ Installation Space
Operation: 60 dB or less
● When the machine is secured by the adjustable feet
Single-shot noise: 70 dB or less
■ Warm-up Time
● Setup without power interlink Machine 515
(when the CR-IR346RU is booted in standalone fashion)
1 min approx.
Front
● Setup with RU power interlink 550
(when the CR-IR346RU is booted with the CR-IR346CL)
3 min approx.
1,000 or more
Unit: mm
FR6H0020.EPS
● When the machine is secured by the retainers
Machine 515
Front
664
200 or more 200 or more
1,000 or more
Unit: mm
FR6H0017.EPS
010-051-01
08.30.2001
10.10.2000 FM3058
FM2887 10.10.2000 FM3058
08.30.2001 FM2887
0.22 0.23
● When the machine is secured by the table and table retainers (without ■ Servicing Space
cassette pocket) Sufficient space should be secured for servicing, as indicated below
Space required for servicing

Table
Machine 500 800
Front
620
Rear
800
800 800
Machine
1,000 or more
Unit: mm
FR6H0018.EPS Front
800
● When the machine is secured by the table (full option) and table retainers Space required for rotation
(with cassette pocket) 1,000
REFERENCE
If the user uses small-size cassettes, the machine and table should be moved forward
until the cassette is readily accessible. Unit: mm
FR6H0004.EPS
Table
Cassette pocket REFERENCE
420
Machine If there is sufficient space to rotate the machine (800 mm around it), installation may be
performed with 1,000 mm or more space secured only on one side.
620
110 or more 110 or more
1,000 or more
Unit: mm
FR6H0019.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000 FM3058
08.30.2001 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM3058
08.30.2001 FM2887
0.24 0.25
CR-IR346RU Service Manual – Contents

Machine Description (MD)
1. Machine Overview ........................................................................................................... MD-2 4.2 Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their Operations ....................... MD-40
1.1 Features ..................................................................................................................... MD-2 4.2.1 Cassette Set Unit ........................................................................................ MD-42
1.2 System Configuration ............................................................................................... MD-2 4.2.2 Erasure Conveyor Unit ............................................................................... MD-44
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names ....................................... MD-4 4.2.3 Side-positioning Conveyor ........................................................................ MD-45
4.2.4 Subscanning Unit ....................................................................................... MD-48
1.4 Machine Components ............................................................................................... MD-6
5. Mechanical Control Flows ............................................................................................ MD-52
1.4.1 Unit Locations ............................................................................................... MD-6
5.1 Initialization Process Flow ..................................................................................... MD-52
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths ................................................... MD-7
5.1.1 Sensor ON ................................................................................................... MD-56
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ................................................ MD-8
5.1.2 Dust Removal Home Positioning .............................................................. MD-60
1.4.4 Board Locations ......................................................................................... MD-12
1.5 System Block Diagram ........................................................................................... MD-13 5.1.3 Side-Positioning Grip Home Positioning ................................................. MD-66
2. Descriptions of Software Control ................................................................................ MD-15 5.1.4 Subscanning Grip Confirmation ............................................................... MD-68
2.1 Relationship between RU and CL...................................................................... MD-15 5.1.5 Side-Positioning Home Positioning .......................................................... MD-72
2.1.1 RU Software and Data Flow ....................................................................... MD-15 5.1.6 IP Search ..................................................................................................... MD-74
2.1.2 Mechanism of Updating the RU FLASH ROM .......................................... MD-19 5.1.7 Suction Cup Home Positioning ................................................................. MD-78
2.1.3 Mechanism of Installing the RU Message File ......................................... MD-21 5.1.8 IP Position Information Confirmation ....................................................... MD-80
2.2 RU Error Handling............................................................................................... MD-23 5.1.9 Remaining IP Processing .......................................................................... MD-84
2.2.1 CPU12A Board Functions .......................................................................... MD-23 5.1.10 Subscanning Grip Home Positioning ....................................................... MD-88
2.2.2 Diagnostics Sequence upon RU Bootup .................................................. MD-24 5.1.11 IP Stopper Protrusion 2 ........................................................................... MD-100
2.2.3 RU Shutdown Process ............................................................................... MD-26 5.1.12 Stopper Retreat 2 ...................................................................................... MD-102
5.1.13 Checking IP within Cassette .................................................................... MD-104
3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations ......................................................................... MD-27
5.2 Routine Operation Flow ........................................................................................ MD-110
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function .............................................. MD-27
3.2 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................. MD-32 5.2.1 Cassette IN Detection ............................................................................... MD-112
3.3 LEDs on the SNS12A Board ................................................................................... MD-37 5.2.2 IP Feed ....................................................................................................... MD-116
5.2.3 Feed Conveyance ..................................................................................... MD-124
3.3.1 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) .............................................................. MD-37
5.2.4 Side-Positioning Operation ..................................................................... MD-128
3.3.2 Correspondence between LEDs and Sensors ......................................... MD-37
3.4 LEDs on the DRV12A Board................................................................................... MD-38 5.2.5 Reading ..................................................................................................... MD-140
5.2.6 After-Reading Conveyance ...................................................................... MD-146
3.4.1 Correspondence between LEDs and Loads ............................................. MD-38
5.2.7 Erasure Conveyance ................................................................................ MD-150
3.4.2 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) .............................................................. MD-39
5.2.8 Load Conveyance ..................................................................................... MD-154
4. Descriptions of Components and Their Operations .............................................. MD-39.1
5.2.9 IP Load ....................................................................................................... MD-156
4.1 Descriptions of Scanner Unit and Its Operations ............................................. MD-39.1
5.2.10 User Notification Item Judgment ............................................................ MD-162
4.1.1 Scanner Unit ............................................................................................. MD-39.1
5.2.11 IP Load Return (Without Cassette Ejection) .......................................... MD-164
4.1.2 Descriptions of Scanner Operations ..................................................... MD-39.2
4.1.3 RU Image Data Flow ................................................................................ MD-39.4 5.2.12 User Notification Item Confirmation ....................................................... MD-166
5.2.13 Cassette Ejection ...................................................................................... MD-170
5.2.14 Sensor Confirmation 1/Sensor Confirmation 2 ..................................... MD-174
5.2.15 Error Handling (Recovery IP Load) ......................................................... MD-176
5.2.16 Cassette Ejection (After Home Positioning) .......................................... MD-178
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.26 0.27
BLANK PAGE
5.3 Secondary Erasure Flow ...................................................................................... MD-180

5.3.1 Erasure Lamp Lighting ............................................................................ MD-181
5.4 User Utility Operation ........................................................................................... MD-182
5.4.1 Dust Removal ............................................................................................ MD-182
5.5 Shutdown Processing Flow ................................................................................. MD-186
Appendix 1 Mechanism of Automatic Updating ......................................................... Appx MD 1-1
1.1 Operation of Automatic Update Function.............................................. Appx MD 1-1
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.28 0.29
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... MT-2 11362 ............................................................................................................................... MT-80
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ MT-2 11363 ............................................................................................................................... MT-81
11371, 11372 , 11373, 14372, 14373 .............................................................................. MT-82
1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks .......................................................................... MT-3
11380 ............................................................................................................................... MT-83
1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"............................................. MT-3 11387 ............................................................................................................................... MT-84
1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log ........................................................................... MT-4 12313, 13314 ................................................................................................................... MT-85
1.4.1 Viewing the Error Log ................................................................................. MT-4 12345 ............................................................................................................................... MT-86
12324, 14324 ................................................................................................................... MT-87
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble ........................ MT-5
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated Analysis 5. Error Code Analysis Flow (Scanner) ............................................................................ MT-88
Flow ............................................................................................................... MT-6 10230 ............................................................................................................................... MT-88
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow ............ MT-7 10231 ............................................................................................................................... MT-89
2. Error Code Table ............................................................................................................... MT-9 10232 ............................................................................................................................... MT-90
3. Detail Code ..................................................................................................................... MT-52 10233 ............................................................................................................................... MT-91
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code ......................................................................... MT-52 10234 ............................................................................................................................... MT-92
3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors......................................................................... MT-54 10235 ............................................................................................................................... MT-93
10236 ............................................................................................................................... MT-94
4. Error Code Analysis Flow (Mechanism) ....................................................................... MT-55
10281, 12201, 12281, 13201, 14281 ............................................................................... MT-95
10300, 10302, 12302 ....................................................................................................... MT-55
10298, 14298 ................................................................................................................... MT-96
10301, 12301 ................................................................................................................... MT-56
11208, 11272, 11273, 12212, 12272, 12273, 13208, 13212, 14283 ................................ MT-97
10303, 10304, 10305, 11303, 12304, 12305 .................................................................... MT-57
12202, 12255, 13202 ....................................................................................................... MT-98
10306, 10307 ................................................................................................................... MT-59
12211, 12217, 12251, 12252, 13211, 13217, 14211, 14251 ............................................ MT-99
10318, 12318, 12326, 14315, 14316, 14317 .................................................................... MT-60
10261, 12213, 12262, 12263, 12264, 13210, 14261 ...................................................... MT-100
10334, 12334, 14331, 14332, 14333 ............................................................................... MT-61
12256 ............................................................................................................................. MT-101
10338, 12338, 14335, 14336, 14337 ............................................................................... MT-62
10271, 14271 ................................................................................................................. MT-102
10340, 10341, 11340, 11341, 14340, 14341 .................................................................... MT-63
10346, 10348, 10353, 10355, 12346, 12348, 12353, 13355, 14346, 14348, 14354, 6. Error Code Analysis Flow (Electrical) ........................................................................ MT-103
14355 ............................................................................................................................... MT-64 6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow between the CPU12A Board and CL .................... MT-103
10347, 10349, 10354, 10356, 10357, 12347, 12349, 12352, 12354, 12355, 12356, 6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow between the SNS12A Board and CPU12A
12357, 14347, 14349, 14356, 14357 ................................................................................ MT-66 Board ................................................................................................................... MT-103
10370, 10371 ................................................................................................................... MT-68 6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow between the SCN12A Board and CPU12A
10390, 10391, 10392, 10393, 12390, 12391, 12392, 12393, 12394, 12395, 13391, Board ................................................................................................................... MT-104
13392, 13395 ................................................................................................................... MT-69 6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow between the Erasure Unit and INV12B Board ..... MT-105
10394 ............................................................................................................................... MT-71 11731, 11751, 11781 ..................................................................................................... MT-105
11310, 11311, 14310, 14312 ........................................................................................... MT-72 11732, 11752, 11782 ..................................................................................................... MT-107
11312 ............................................................................................................................... MT-73 11737, 11757, 11767 ..................................................................................................... MT-108
11319, 11320, 11321, 11322, 14319, 14320, 14321, 14322 ............................................ MT-74 12730 ............................................................................................................................. MT-109
10360, 10361, 11323, 14323 ........................................................................................... MT-76 12733, 12743, 12753 ..................................................................................................... MT-109
11325, 12325 ................................................................................................................... MT-77 12735 ............................................................................................................................. MT-110
11342, 11343, 11344 ....................................................................................................... MT-78 12736, 12756, 12766, 18741 ......................................................................................... MT-111
11350 ............................................................................................................................... MT-79 12800 ............................................................................................................................. MT-112
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.30 0.31
7. Troubleshooting for Failure to Update Software Versions or Failure to Back Up 14. Checking the Scanner I/O ............................................................................................ MT-161
Machine Shipment Control Data ................................................................................. MT-113 14.1 Checking the Laser (LDD) ................................................................................. MT-161
7.1 Checking Connection between RU and CL ..................................................... MT-113 14.2 Checking the Polygonal Mirror (POL) .............................................................. MT-163
7.1.1 Procedure for Checking Connection between RU and CL ................... MT-113 14.3 Checking the Start-Point Sensor (SYN) ........................................................... MT-165
7.1.2 Procedures for Recovering Connection between RU and CL ............. MT-113 14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) ...................................................... MT-167
7.2 Checking the FTP Server .................................................................................. MT-114 14.5 Checking the Light-Collecting Unit (PMT) ....................................................... MT-169
7.3 Checking the Setting of the FTP Server .......................................................... MT-115
15. Bootup Failure Analysis Flow ..................................................................................... MT-171
7.3.1 Checking IIS ............................................................................................. MT-115
15.1 RU Bootup Failure ............................................................................................ MT-171
7.3.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server ............................... MT-116
15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board ....................................................... MT-172
7.4 Checking the IP Address of the FTP Server .................................................... MT-116
15.3 Checking the IP Address.................................................................................. MT-173
7.4.1 Checking the IP Address of the CL ........................................................ MT-116
15.4 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU ........................................... MT-174
7.4.2 Checking the IP Address of the RU........................................................ MT-117
15.4.1 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the RU ................................ MT-174
8. Board Tests in M-Utility ................................................................................................ MT-118 15.4.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL ................................. MT-174
9. Checking the Voltage ................................................................................................... MT-119 15.4.3 Procedures of Changing IP Address of the CL/RU to User Settings MT-175
9.1 Checking the Voltage on Board Test Pins (Connectors)................................. MT-119 15.5 Action to be Taken When the RU Application Software is Damaged .......... MT-176
9.2 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit ............................................. MT-122 15.6 Checking RU NAME .......................................................................................... MT-179
10. Checking the Fuses ..................................................................................................... MT-124 15.6.1 RU NAME on RU Memory ..................................................................... MT-179
10.1 Sensor-Related Fuses ....................................................................................... MT-124 15.6.2 RU NAME of CL Configuration ............................................................ MT-179
10.2 Motor-Related Fuses ......................................................................................... MT-126 15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server .................................................................. MT-180
10.3 Actuator-Related Fuses ..................................................................................... MT-128 15.6.4 Correcting RU NAME ............................................................................ MT-180
16. Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks in the IP Conveyance
10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses ..................................................................................... MT-130 Direction ........................................................................................................................ MT-181
10.5 Erasure Lamp and Cooling Fan Fuses ............................................................ MT-132 16.1 Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks on the IP Fluorescent
Face (White) ........................................................................................................ MT-181
10.6 LED12A Board and Barcode Fuses .................................................................. MT-134 16.2 Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks on the IP Back Face
10.7 Board Check Pin Fuses ..................................................................................... MT-136 (Black) ................................................................................................................. MT-184
11. Checking the Sensors ................................................................................................. MT-137 17. Image Troubleshooting Flow ....................................................................................... MT-187
11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, and SB1 ................................................. MT-137 17.1 Vertical Streaks .................................................................................................. MT-187
11.2 Checking SC1, SC2, SC3, and SC4 ................................................................... MT-140 17.2 Horizontal Streaks ............................................................................................. MT-188
11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3, SZ4, and SZ5 .................................................................... MT-143 17.3 Other Abnormal Image ...................................................................................... MT-189
12. Checking the Motors .................................................................................................... MT-146 18. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is Undetectable and Processing
Freezes .......................................................................................................................... MT-190
12.1 Checking MA1 and MB1 .................................................................................... MT-146
18.1 Processing Freezes Before IP Reading ........................................................... MT-190
12.2 Checking MC1, MC2, and MC3 .......................................................................... MT-149
19. Gathering Various Data When Trouble Occurs .......................................................... MT-191
12.3 Checking MZ2 and MZ3 ..................................................................................... MT-152
12.4 Checking MZ1 (FFM Motor) ............................................................................... MT-155 Appendix 1 Display Format of Older Versions ............................................................ Appx MT 1-1
13. Checking the Actuators ............................................................................................... MT-157 Appendix 2 Checking FTP Server (for PC-MUTL 1.1 or Earlier). ............................... Appx MT 2-1
Appendix 3 Countermeasure When RU Application Software Is Corrupted
(For PC-MUTL 1.1 or Earlier) .................................................................... Appx MT 3-1
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.32 0.33
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit ............................................................... MC-2 6. Removing and Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor .................................................... MC-60
2. Table of Contents ............................................................................................................ MC-4 6.1 Erasure Conveyor ............................................................................................... MC-60
3. Removing and Reinstalling the Covers......................................................................... MC-8 6.2 Lamp Assembly .................................................................................................. MC-62
6.3 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) ................................................................................... MC-66
3.1 Covers .................................................................................................................... MC-8
6.4 Lamp .................................................................................................................... MC-68
4. Removing and Reinstalling the Housings .................................................................. MC-10
6.5 Lamp Socket ........................................................................................................ MC-72
4.1 INV12B Board ...................................................................................................... MC-10
6.6 Thermistor ........................................................................................................... MC-76
4.2 Inverter Assembly ............................................................................................... MC-12
6.7 Duct Box .............................................................................................................. MC-78
4.3 Fan (FAN4) ........................................................................................................... MC-14
6.8 Cleaning Roller Assembly .................................................................................. MC-80
4.4 INV12A Board ...................................................................................................... MC-16
6.9 Timing Belt .......................................................................................................... MC-82
4.5 Fan (FAN3) ........................................................................................................... MC-18
6.10 Motor (MB1) ......................................................................................................... MC-84
5. Removing and Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit ..................................................... MC-20 6.11 Rubber Rollers A and B ...................................................................................... MC-86
5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly ........................................................................................ MC-20 6.12 Rubber Rollers C and D ...................................................................................... MC-88
5.2 Shutter ................................................................................................................. MC-22 6.13 Rubber Rollers E and F ...................................................................................... MC-90
5.3 Cassette Set Unit ................................................................................................ MC-24 6.14 Rubber Rollers G and H ..................................................................................... MC-94
5.4 Wrong-Insertion Prevention Bracket Assembly............................................... MC-26 6.15 Guides A and B ................................................................................................... MC-98
5.5 Solenoid (SolA1) ................................................................................................. MC-28 6.16 Guide C .............................................................................................................. MC-100
5.6 Hold Pin ............................................................................................................... MC-30 6.17 Guide D .............................................................................................................. MC-102
5.7 Inch/Metric Changeover Guide .......................................................................... MC-32 7. Removing and Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor ................................... MC-104
5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5) ......................................................................................... MC-34 7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor .............................................................................. MC-104
5.9 Suction Cup ......................................................................................................... MC-36 7.2 Timing Belt ........................................................................................................ MC-106
5.10 IP Removal Arm .................................................................................................. MC-40 7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side) ................................................................... MC-108
5.11 Motor (MA1) ......................................................................................................... MC-42 7.4 Grip Mechanism (Right-Hand Side) ................................................................. MC-110
5.12 Roller .................................................................................................................... MC-44 7.5 Upper Grip Roller .............................................................................................. MC-112
5.13 Guide Plate .......................................................................................................... MC-48 7.6 Lower Grip Roller .............................................................................................. MC-114
5.14 Stopper ................................................................................................................ MC-50 7.7 Motor (MC2) ....................................................................................................... MC-118
5.15 Actuator (Cassette IN Detection) ....................................................................... MC-52 7.8 Motor (MC3) ....................................................................................................... MC-119
5.16 Sensor (SA2) ....................................................................................................... MC-54 7.9 Latch Driver ....................................................................................................... MC-120
5.17 Roller Assembly .................................................................................................. MC-56 7.10 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) ........................................................................ MC-124
5.18 Movable Guide Assembly ................................................................................... MC-58 7.11 Latch Assembly (Right-Hand Side) ................................................................. MC-126
5.19 Sensor (SA3) .................................................................................................... MC-59.1 7.12 Movable Guide .................................................................................................. MC-128
7.13 Upper-Stage Guide ........................................................................................... MC-130
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.34 0.35
8. Removing and Reinstalling the Scanning Optics Unit ............................................ MC-132 12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations ................................................................ MC-242
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit........................................................................................ MC-132 12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses ....................................................................................... MC-244
9. Removing and Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Unit ............................................. MC-136 12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses ....................................................................................... MC-245
9.1 Light-Collecting Unit......................................................................................... MC-136 12.3 SNS12A Board Fuses ....................................................................................... MC-246
9.2 PMT12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-142 12.4 DRV12A Board Fuses ....................................................................................... MC-247
10. Removing and Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit .................................................. MC-144 13. Procedures of Updating Software Version................................................................ MC-248
10.1 Subscanning Unit ............................................................................................. MC-144 13.1 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for 1:1 Connection).................. MC-248
10.2 Kapton® Belt ..................................................................................................... MC-146 13.2 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for N:N Connection) ................ MC-252
10.3 Flywheel ............................................................................................................. MC-148 13.3 Procedures for Updating MAIN CPU (OS) Version ........................................ MC-260
10.4 Solenoid (SolZ1)................................................................................................ MC-150 13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL Software ................. MC-264
10.5 Motor (MZ1) ....................................................................................................... MC-154 13.4.1 Uninstallation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software............................... MC-264
10.6 Motor (MZ2) ....................................................................................................... MC-160 13.4.2 Installation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software ................................... MC-266
10.7 Motor (MZ3) ....................................................................................................... MC-164 14. Restore Procedures of FLASH ROM Application Software .................................... MC-268
10.8 Sensor (SZ5) ...................................................................................................... MC-168 15. Change of IP Address of CL and RU ......................................................................... MC-274
10.8.1 Removal Procedures (Sensor (SZ5)).................................................... MC-168 15.1 Procedures of Changing the IP Address of the CL and RU to a User-
10.8.2 Installing Procedures (Sensor (SZ5)) ................................................... MC-170 Specified Value ................................................................................................. MC-274
10.9 Driving-Shaft Grip Release Arm ...................................................................... MC-174 15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU .................................................................. MC-274
10.10 Driven-Shaft Grip Release Arm ....................................................................... MC-178 15.1.2 Changing the IP Address Using Service Utility of CL ........................ MC-277
10.11 Driving-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) .................................................................... MC-182 15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC ...................................................... MC-279
10.12 Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ..................................................................... MC-185 15.2 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU ........................................... MC-281
10.13 Light-Collecting Mirror ..................................................................................... MC-188 15.2.1 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the RU ................................. MC-281
10.14 Light-Collecting Shaft....................................................................................... MC-192 15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL .................................. MC-282
11. Removing and Reinstalling the Controller ............................................................... MC-194 16. Format Adjustment ..................................................................................................... MC-284
11.1 Controller ........................................................................................................... MC-194 16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment ........................................................................ MC-284
11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board .......................................................................... MC-198 16.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment ............................................................. MC-287
11.3 SCN12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-220 16.3 Optic Setting...................................................................................................... MC-290
11.4 SND12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-222
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction .................................................................................. MC-294
11.5 SNS12A Board................................................................................................... MC-224
17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction........................................................................ MC-294
11.6 DRV12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-225
17.2 Shading Correction........................................................................................... MC-297
11.7 MTH12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-226
17.3 Sensitivity Correction ....................................................................................... MC-299
11.8 Power Supply .................................................................................................... MC-228
18. Backing Up the Scanner Data .................................................................................... MC-302
11.9 Reset Switch...................................................................................................... MC-230
11.10 CNN12A Board .................................................................................................. MC-232 19. Checking the Image/Conveyance .............................................................................. MC-304
11.11 Power Supply Socket ....................................................................................... MC-234 19.1 Check Before Procedures ................................................................................ MC-304
11.12 Breaker............................................................................................................... MC-236 19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance .................................................................... MC-305
11.13 Fans (FAN1 and FAN2) ..................................................................................... MC-240
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.36 0.37
BLANK PAGE
20. Installing Procedure of RU Software ......................................................................... MC-308
21. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedures ................................................................................ MC-314

21.1 BACKUP Procedures ........................................................................................ MC-314
21.2 RESTORE Procedures ...................................................................................... MC-316
Appendix 1 Replacement of CPU12A Board (For PC-MUTL Versions 1.1 or
Earlier) ...................................................................................................... Appx MC 1-1
Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version Update (For PC-MUTL Software

Versions 1.1 or Earlier) ........................................................................... Appx MC 2-1
Appendix 3 Procedures for Restoring Application Software of FLASH ROM

(for PC-MUTL Software Versions 1.1 or Earlier) ................................... Appx MC 3-1
Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version ................................................................... Appx MC 4-1
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.38 0.39
Maintenance Utility (MU)

1. Overview of RU Service Utility ....................................................................................... MU-2 2.11 FTP Server Designation Window....................................................................... MU-46
1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. MU-2 2.12 Installing I/O Trace Log and Error DB Software............................................... MU-47
1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility ........................................................................ MU-3 2.13 Clear Backup Data .............................................................................................. MU-51
1.3 Maintenance Utility Command Tree Diagram..................................................... MU-6 2.14 Rescue APPL via Network (Soft Update) .......................................................... MU-52
2. Functions of the PC-MUTL ........................................................................................... MU-12 3. Details of M-Utility ......................................................................................................... MU-54

2.1 CONNECTION TEST............................................................................................ MU-14 [1] LOG ...................................................................................................................... MU-54
2.1.1 Procedures for Starting the M-Utility ....................................................... MU-14 [1-1] ERROR LOG ......................................................................................... MU-54
2.1.2 PING: Procedures for Confirming Network Connection ........................ MU-15 [1-1-1] DISPLAY ............................................................................................... MU-55
2.1.3 VER: Procedures for Checking the Software Version of the RU ........... MU-16 [1-1-2] SAVE TO FTP-SERV. ........................................................................... MU-57
2.1.4 FTP: Checking the FTP Server of the RU ................................................ MU-17 [1-1-3] CLEAR ................................................................................................... MU-58
2.1.5 RENAME: Changing RU NAME [1-2] TRACE LOGS ....................................................................................... MU-59
(Implemented with RU Software Version of A07 or Later, [1-2-1] DISPLAY ............................................................................................... MU-59
or PC-MUTL 1.2 or Later) .......................................................................... MU-18 [1-2-2] SAVE ALL TRACE LOGS TO FTP-SERV. ........................................... MU-59
2.1.6 Errors That May Occur during RENAME and Their Probable Causes .. MU-21 [1-2-3] CLEAR ALL TRACE LOGS .................................................................. MU-59
2.2 INSTALL ............................................................................................................... MU-22 [2] VERSION .............................................................................................................. MU-60
2.3 EDIT HISTORY ..................................................................................................... MU-24 [2-1] DISPLAY VERSION .............................................................................. MU-61
2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................... MU-25 [2-2] DETAIL .................................................................................................. MU-62
2.5 BACKUP............................................................................................................... MU-28 [2-2-1] LOAD SOFTWARE FROM FTP-SERV. ................................................ MU-62
2.5.1 Backup Items.............................................................................................. MU-28 [2-2-2] LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM FTP-SERV ....................................... MU-63
2.5.2 Procedures for BACKUP ........................................................................... MU-29 [2-2-3] COMPARE SOFTWARE WITH FTP-SERV .......................................... MU-63
2.5.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable Causes .. MU-29 [3] TEST ..................................................................................................................... MU-64
2.6 RESTORE............................................................................................................. MU-30 [3-1] ROUTINE ............................................................................................... MU-65
2.6.1 Restore Items ............................................................................................. MU-30 [3-1-1] READING & ERASURE ........................................................................ MU-65
2.6.2 Procedures for RESTORE ......................................................................... MU-30 [3-1-2] PRIMARY ERASURE ............................................................................ MU-66
2.6.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable Causes MU-31 [3-1-3] SECONDARY ERASURE ..................................................................... MU-66
2.7 UNINSTALL.......................................................................................................... MU-32 [3-1-4] MONITOR READING & ERASURE ...................................................... MU-67
2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/VERSION UP ................................................................... MU-34 [3-2] AUTO MODE ......................................................................................... MU-68
2.8.1 VERSION UP Procedures .......................................................................... MU-35 [3-2-1] READING & ERASURE ........................................................................ MU-68
2.8.2 PREVIOUS VERSION Procedures ............................................................ MU-35 [3-2-2] PRIMARY ERASURE ............................................................................ MU-69
2.8.3 Errors That May Occur during Version Up and Their Probable [3-2-3] SECONDARY ERASURE ..................................................................... MU-69
Causes ........................................................................................................ MU-37
[3-3] SCANNER CLEANING ......................................................................... MU-69
2.9 ERROR DB ........................................................................................................... MU-38
[3-4] NETWORK ............................................................................................ MU-70
2.9.1 Procedures for Starting ERROR DB......................................................... MU-38
[3-4-1] PING (AUTO) ......................................................................................... MU-70
2.9.2 ERROR-DB Window ................................................................................... MU-40
[3-4-2] PING (MANUAL) ................................................................................... MU-70
2.10 I/O TRACE EXPERT ............................................................................................ MU-42
[3-4-3] DISPLAY FTP-SERV ............................................................................. MU-70
2.10.1 PhaseChart Window ................................................................................ MU-42
2.10.2 TimingChart Window ............................................................................... MU-44
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.40 0.41
[4] ELECTRICAL UTILITY......................................................................................... MU-71 [5] SCANNER UTILITY.............................................................................................. MU-90

[4-1] AUTO MODE ......................................................................................... MU-72 [5-1] INITIALIZE ............................................................................................. MU-91
[4-1-1] ALL ........................................................................................................ MU-73 [5-2] POLYGON ............................................................................................. MU-92
[4-1-2] CPU12A ................................................................................................. MU-73 [5-3] LASER ................................................................................................... MU-93
[4-1-3] SCN12A ................................................................................................. MU-74 [5-4] SAVE INITIAL LDIF ............................................................................... MU-94
[4-1-4] INV12A .................................................................................................. MU-74 [5-4-1] GET DATA FROM SCN, SAVE TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV....... MU-94
[4-1-5] SND12A ................................................................................................. MU-75 [5-4-2] SAVE DEFAULT DATA TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV .................. MU-94
[4-1-6] SUB CPU ............................................................................................... MU-76 [5-5] HV STATUS ........................................................................................... MU-95
[4-2] BOARD TEST ........................................................................................ MU-77 [5-6] HV ON/OFF ........................................................................................... MU-96
[4-2-1] CPU12A ................................................................................................. MU-77 [5-7] HV DATA ............................................................................................... MU-97
[4-2-2] SCN12A ................................................................................................. MU-78 [5-8] FORMAT ................................................................................................ MU-98
[4-2-3] SND12A ................................................................................................. MU-78 [5-8-1] DEFAULT .............................................................................................. MU-99
[4-2-4] INV12A .................................................................................................. MU-79 [5-8-2] FREQ ADJUST .................................................................................... MU-100
[4-3] SUB CPU TEST ..................................................................................... MU-79 [5-8-3] PIXEL ADJUST ................................................................................... MU-101
[4-3-1] SDRAM TEST ........................................................................................ MU-79 [5-8-4] OPTIC FORMAT .................................................................................. MU-101
[4-3-2] FIFO TEST ............................................................................................. MU-79 [5-9] SHADING/SENSITIVITY ..................................................................... MU-102
[4-3-3] OUTPUT PATTERN IMAGE ................................................................. MU-80 [5-9-1] SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION ................................................ MU-102
[4-3-4] RE-OUTPUT IMAGE ............................................................................. MU-84 [5-9-2] CALCULATION ................................................................................... MU-103
[4-4] POWER SUPPLY MONITOR ................................................................ MU-85 [5-9-3] SENSITIVITY DATA ............................................................................ MU-104
[4-5] DISPLAY HARDWARE SWITCH .......................................................... MU-86 [5-9-4] HV DATA ............................................................................................. MU-105
[4-6] BARCODE TEST ................................................................................... MU-87 [5-9-5] PMT DATA .......................................................................................... MU-105
[4-6-1] COMMUNICATION ................................................................................ MU-87 [5-10] DATA MANAGEMENT ........................................................................ MU-106
[4-6-2] READ TEST ........................................................................................... MU-88 [5-10-1] SAVE SCN DATA FROM RAM TO FLASH & FTP-SERV ................. MU-106
[5-10-2] LOAD SCN DATA FROM FTP-SERV TO RAM & FLASH ................. MU-106
[5-10-3] DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC .................................................................. MU-106
[5-11] DIAGNOSTIC ...................................................................................... MU-107
[5-12] VIRTUAL IMAGE ................................................................................. MU-108
[5-12-1] LIGHT .................................................................................................. MU-111
[5-12-2] LOG AMP ............................................................................................ MU-111
[5-12-3] SCN12A INPUT .................................................................................... MU-111
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.42 0.43
[6] MECHANICAL UTILITY ..................................................................................... MU-112 Appendix 1 Outline of Older Software ......................................................................... Appx MU 1-1
[6-1] MOTOR ................................................................................................ MU-112 1.1 Timing of Updating Flash ROM of Configuration Information
[6-1-1] Motor Drive and Stop ......................................................................... MU-113 (for PC-MUTL Software Version 1.1 or Earlier) ..................................... Appx MU 1-1
[6-1-2] Parameter Setup ................................................................................ MU-114 1.2 Timing of Updating Flash ROM during Installation
[6-1-3] Parameter Initialization ...................................................................... MU-116 (for PC-MUTL Software Version 1.1 or Earlier) ..................................... Appx MU 1-2
[6-2] ACTUATOR ......................................................................................... MU-117 1.3 Image Display on EDIT CONFIGURATION ............................................. Appx MU 1-3
[6-2-1] Actuator drive ..................................................................................... MU-119 1.4 PC-MUTL Displayed Screen and Functions .......................................... Appx MU 1-5
[6-3] SENSOR .............................................................................................. MU-120 Appendix 2 Cautions for Each of PC-MUTL Versions ................................................. Appx MU 2-1
[6-3-1] Individual sensor monitoring ............................................................ MU-122 2.1 Combination of the PC-MUTL and the RU Software Programs ........... Appx MU 2-1
[6-3-2] Overall sensor monitoring ................................................................ MU-123 2.2 Cautions in Using the PC-MUTL Version 1.3 or Earlier ........................ Appx MU 2-1
[6-3-3] REAL-TIME MONITOR ALL ............................................................... MU-124 2.3 Combination of the PC-MUTL Version and the Windows OS .............. Appx MU 2-2
[6-4] UNIT ..................................................................................................... MU-125 Appendix 3 Details of the M-Utility of Older Version ................................................... Appx MU 3-1
[6-4-1] IP feed/load operation checkout ....................................................... MU-126
[1] LOG ........................................................................................................... Appx MU 3-2
[6-4-2] Side-positioning grip operation checkout ....................................... MU-127
[1-1-1] DISPLAY .................................................................................... Appx MU 3-2
[6-4-3] Side-positioning operation checkout ............................................... MU-128
[4] ELECTRICAL UTILITY.............................................................................. Appx MU 3-4
[6-4-4] Subscanning grip operation checkout ............................................ MU-129
[4-6-2] READ TEST ................................................................................ Appx MU 3-4
[6-4-5] Subscanning read operation checkout ............................................ MU-130
[5] SCANNER UTILITY................................................................................... Appx MU 3-5
[6-4-6] IP conveyance operation checkout .................................................. MU-131
[5-11] DIAGNOSTIC ............................................................................. Appx MU 3-5
[6-4-7] SCANNER CLEANING (MZ3) ............................................................. MU-133
[6] MECHANICAL UTILITY ............................................................................ Appx MU 3-6
[7] SOFTWARE UTILITY ......................................................................................... MU-135
[6-1] MOTOR ....................................................................................... Appx MU 3-6
[7-1] DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ............................................................. MU-135
[6-1-1] Parameter setup (For version A02 through A04) ................... Appx MU 3-6
[7-2] TEMPORARY SETTING ..................................................................... MU-136
[6-1-2] Motor drive (for version A02 through A04) ............................. Appx MU 3-8
[8] BACKUP MEMORY ........................................................................................... MU-138
[6-1-3] Motor stop (for version A02 through A04) .............................. Appx MU 3-9
[9] HV ON/HV OFF .................................................................................................. MU-139
[6-1-4] Parameter initialization (for version A02 through A04) ....... Appx MU 3-10
[6-4-6] IP conveyance operation checkout ....................................... Appx MU 3-11
[7] SOFTWARE UTILITY .............................................................................. Appx MU 3-12
[7-1] DISPLAY CONFIGURATION .................................................. Appx MU 3-12
[7-2] TEMPORARY SETTING .......................................................... Appx MU 3-13
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.44 0.45
BLANK PAGE
Service Parts List (SP)

How to Use the Service Parts List .............................................................................................. SP-2
01A COVER 1 ....................................................................................................................... SP-6
01B COVER 2 ....................................................................................................................... SP-8
02 FRAME .......................................................................................................................... SP-10
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1................................................................................................ SP-12
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2................................................................................................ SP-14
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3................................................................................................ SP-16
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4................................................................................................ SP-18
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5................................................................................................ SP-20
04A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ............................................................................................. SP-22
04B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ............................................................................................. SP-24
04C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ............................................................................................. SP-26
05A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 .............................................................................. SP-28
05B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 .............................................................................. SP-30
05C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 .............................................................................. SP-32
05D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 .............................................................................. SP-34
05E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 .............................................................................. SP-36
06 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ............................................................................................ SP-38
07A SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 ................................................................................................ SP-40
07B SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 ................................................................................................ SP-42
07C SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 ................................................................................................ SP-44
07D SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 ................................................................................................ SP-46
08 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT ........................................................................................... SP-48
09A CONTROLLER 1 ........................................................................................................... SP-50
09B CONTROLLER 2 ........................................................................................................... SP-52
10 CABLE ........................................................................................................................... SP-54
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....................................................................................................... SP-56
12 ARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ....................................................................................... SP-64
13 TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS ......................................... SP-68
14 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS .............................................................................. SP-69
15 OPTION ......................................................................................................................... SP-70
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.46 0.47
Preventive Maintenance (PM)

1. Preventive Maintenance Program ................................................................................. PM-2 10. Side-Positioning Conveyor........................................................................................... PM-33
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List ................................................................ PM-2 10.1 Removing the Side-positioning Conveyor ....................................................... PM-33
1.2 Notations of Intervals ........................................................................................... PM-3 10.2 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Removing the Shock Absorbers) ...................... PM-34
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Flow .............................................................................. PM-4 10.3 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Cleaning the Guides and Conveyance Rollers) PM-35
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures .............................................................................. PM-6 10.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor .................................................... PM-38
2.1 Opening the MAINTENANCE UTILITY Window .................................................. PM-6 11. Subscanning Unit .......................................................................................................... PM-40
2.2 Checking the Error Log ........................................................................................ PM-8 11.1 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Cleaning Brushes) ....................................... PM-40
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time ...................................................... PM-10 11.2 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driven-Shaft Side Guide/Roller) ................. PM-41
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance ................................................................................ PM-11 11.3 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Kapton® Belt/Flywheel) .............................. PM-42
11.4 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Mirror/Lower Rollers/
3.1 Check Before Procedures .................................................................................. PM-11
Guides)................................................................................................................. PM-44
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance ...................................................................... PM-12
11.4.1 Cleaning Procedures of the Light-Collecting Mirror/
3.3 Checking Nonuniformity/Sensitivity ................................................................. PM-14
Lower Rollers/Guides ........................................................................... PM-44
3.4 Checking the Format .......................................................................................... PM-14
11.4.2 Procedure of Installing Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)/
3.5 Checking the Output Characters ....................................................................... PM-15 Cleaning Brush ..................................................................................... PM-50
4. Pulling Out the Machine ............................................................................................... PM-16 11.5 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide) ............................... PM-53
4.1 Powering OFF...................................................................................................... PM-16 11.6 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Rubber Belt) ................................................. PM-56
4.2 Unlocking the Retainers ..................................................................................... PM-16 11.7 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driving-Shaft Side Guide/Rollers) .............. PM-57
4.3 Disconnecting the Cables .................................................................................. PM-19 11.8 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit.................................................................... PM-61
5. Removing the Covers ................................................................................................... PM-20 12. Cleaning Inside the Machine ........................................................................................ PM-63
6. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filters ............................................................................... PM-21 13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch ........................................................................... PM-63
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch ......................................................................... PM-22 14. Reinstalling and Cleaning the Covers ......................................................................... PM-63
8. Cassette Set Unit ........................................................................................................... PM-23 15. Securing the Machine ................................................................................................... PM-64
8.1 Removing the Cassette Set Unit........................................................................ PM-23 15.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value ...................... PM-64
8.2 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Suction Cups) ............................................... PM-24 15.2 Securing the Machine ......................................................................................... PM-65
8.3 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Rollers) .......................................................... PM-24 16. Checking the Image/Conveyance ................................................................................ PM-65
8.4 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit..................................................................... PM-24
17. Checking the Error Log ................................................................................................ PM-65
9. Erasure Conveyor ......................................................................................................... PM-25
18. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time ................................................................ PM-66
9.1 Removing the Erasure Conveyor ...................................................................... PM-25
9.2 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Reflection Guide) ........................................ PM-27
9.3 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Guide Roller Assembly).............................. PM-27
9.4 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Cleaning Rollers) ............... PM-28
9.5 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Erasure Lamps and Filter) PM-29
9.6 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Conveyance Rollers)................................... PM-30
9.7 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor ................................................................... PM-31
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.48 0.49
Installation (IN)
1. Specifications of Machine ................................................................................................ IN-2 Appendix 1. On-Site Relocation ...................................................................................... Appx IN 1-1
2. Installation Work Flowchart .............................................................................................. IN-4 1.1 Preparation Prior to Relocation ................................................................ Appx IN 1-2
3. Preparation for Installation .............................................................................................. IN-6 1.1.1 Securing the Light-Collecting Mirror ........................................... Appx IN 1-2
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation....................................................................... IN-6 1.1.2 Disconnecting the Cables ............................................................. Appx IN 1-2
3.2 Unloading ................................................................................................................ IN-7 1.2 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................. Appx IN 1-3
3.3 Transfer.................................................................................................................. IN-12 1.3 Installation After Relocation ..................................................................... Appx IN 1-3
3.4 Temporary Placement .......................................................................................... IN-13 1.3.1 Connecting the Cables .................................................................. Appx IN 1-3
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied ............................................................................... IN-14 1.3.2 Final Placement ............................................................................. Appx IN 1-3
1.3.3 Powering ON the CL/RU ................................................................ Appx IN 1-3
4. Installation Procedures .................................................................................................. IN-15
1.3.4 Checking the Image/Conveyance ................................................. Appx IN 1-3
4.1 Removing the Machine-Wrapping Packing Materials........................................ IN-15
1.3.5 Powering OFF the CL/RU .............................................................. Appx IN 1-3
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates ..................................................................... IN-16
1.3.6 Cleaning the CL/RU ....................................................................... Appx IN 1-3
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members ............................................................... IN-17
Appendix 2. Fixing the Machine with Anchor Nuts ....................................................... Appx IN 2-1
5. Installing the Options ..................................................................................................... IN-18
2.1 Securing the Machine with the Retainers ................................................ Appx IN 2-1
5.1 Assembling the Table ........................................................................................... IN-18
2.2 Securing the Machine with the Retainers and Table .............................. Appx IN 2-3
6. Setting the CPU12A Board ............................................................................................. IN-24
Appendix 3. Checking RU/CL Software Setting ............................................................ Appx IN 3-1
7. Connecting the Cables ................................................................................................... IN-26
3.1 Checking the CL Configuration (Network Information).......................... Appx IN 3-2
7.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value ........................ IN-26
3.2 Checking the CL Configuration (Machine Information) ......................... Appx IN 3-3
7.2 Connecting the Interface Cable ........................................................................... IN-27
3.3 Checking the CL Configuration (Connection Scheme) .......................... Appx IN 3-5
7.2.1 Direct Connection of the CL/RU .............................................................. IN-28
3.4 Checking the CL’s FTP (FTP Server Setting) .......................................... Appx IN 3-6
7.2.2 Network Connection ................................................................................. IN-29
3.5 Checking the CL’s FTP (User Name and Password) .............................. Appx IN 3-7
8. Installing the Cover ......................................................................................................... IN-30
3.6 Checking the RU Setting (EDIT CONFIGURATION) ................................ Appx IN 3-8
9. CL Installation Procedures ............................................................................................. IN-31 3.7 Checking the CL Configuration (Shared Patient Information)............... Appx IN 3-9
9.1 CL Installation ....................................................................................................... IN-31
9.2 Checking RU/CL Software Setting ...................................................................... IN-31
10. Final Placement ............................................................................................................... IN-32
10.1 Securing the Machine with the Adjustable Feet ................................................ IN-32
10.2 Securing the Table and Machine Together......................................................... IN-33
11. Powering ON the CL/RU ................................................................................................. IN-34
12. Checking the Image/Conveyance .................................................................................. IN-35
12.1 Check Before Procedures .................................................................................... IN-35
12.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance ........................................................................ IN-36
13. Powering OFF the CL/RU ................................................................................................ IN-39
14. Cleaning the CL/RU ......................................................................................................... IN-39
15. Attaching the Cassette Handling Precaution Label ..................................................... IN-40
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.50 0.51
BLANK PAGE
Performance Check (PC)

CR-IR 346 Performance Check List ............................................................................... PC-2
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
0.52 0.53
BLANK PAGE BLANK PAGE
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Machine Description (MD) Control Sheet MD - 1
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
10/10/2000 00 New release (FM2887) All pages
08/30/2001 01 Revisions associated with release of MD-1–3, 5, 9–11, 14–21,
version A05 (FM3058) 21.1–21.4, 32, 42, 43, 46, 47, 49,
50
02/20/2002 05 Revisions associated with release of MD-1–3, 13–39, 39.1–39.4, 52,
version A07 (FM3328) 56, 186
CR-IR346RU Service Manual 09/25/2004 08 Revised (FM4338) MD-1, 3, 13–26, 39.1

Appx MD 1-1–Appx MD 1-2
Machine Description (MD)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 2 MD - 3
■ System Configuration Example (2)

1. Machine Overview
The machine is connected to the CL via a network.
1.1 Features Image storage device
(LF-C1 etc.)
■ Features of the Machine

HUB
● The CR-IR346RU is built in a more compact body designed with smaller scanning
optics and light-collecting units.
Network
● The machine is network connectable via TCP/IP.
● A commonly available power source may be used to supply power to the machine.
Switching hub Switching hub HUB
Straight cable
1.2 System Configuration
Printer
CR-IR346RU CR-IR346CL
The CR-IR346RU may be configured in several combinations.
FR6H1302.EPS
Basic system configuration examples are described here.
■ System Configuration Example (1)

The machine is directly connected to the CL. ■ System Configuration Example (3)
In this case, the CL may be connected only to a printer. A plurality of the machines (up to three) are connected to a single CL via a network.
CR-IR346CL
Straight cable Image storage device

CR-IR346RU CR-IR346CL
(LF-C1 etc.)
E-I/F
Switching hub HUB
Cross cable
Printer Network
FR6H1301.EPS
Switching hub Switching hub HUB
Straight cable
ru1 ru2 Printer
CR-IR346RU CR-IR346RU
FR6H1421.EPS
010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 2 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 3

02.20.2002 FM3328 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 4 MD - 5
1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names ■ Display Panel Indicators
1. Cassette loading lamp
■ External View of Machine 2. Processing status lamp

3. Cassette eject lamp
4. CALL lamp
Top cover
Display panel
FUJI FUJI FILM
Right-hand
side cover 7. Power lamp
6. Erasure processing switch
5. Erasure processing indication display
Front cover FR6H1305.EPS
Power switch
No. Name Lighting Functional description
It is lit when the machine boots up normally. It also indicates that
1 Cassette loading lamp Lit in green
the cassette is loadable.
2 Processing status lamp Blink in green It indicates the processing status of the IP within the machine.
3 Cassette eject lamp Lit in green It indicates that the cassette processed may be ejected.
When the CALL lamp is lit, an audible alarm is generated, with
Reset switch a popup window displayed on the screen of the CR-IR346CL.
4 CALL lamp Lit in yellow
The message (instruction) given in the window should be
observed to perform the procedures as appropriate.
Erasure processing Lit in green It is lit when the primary erasure processing mode is selected.
FR6H1318.EPS 5
status display Lit in green It is lit when the secondary erasure processing mode is selected.
• This switch is used to execute erasure processing (either primary
or secondary erasure) on the IP within the cassette.
The switch toggles from read processing mode to primary
erasure processing mode to secondary erasure processing mode
6 Erasure processing switch ----------------------------
and back to read processing mode.
• By pressing this switch together with the power switch, the
network-related setting of the RU's configuration settings is
temporarily initialized. This initialization setup will be canceled by
Left-hand resetting the RU. (This feature is applicable to software version
Upper rear cover side cover A03 or later.)
7 POWER lamp Lit in green It is lit when power is turned ON.
TR6H1301.EPS
External device interface

(I/F cable)
Lower rear cover
Power plug
FR6H1319.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 6 MD - 7
1.4 Machine Components 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths

1.4.1 Unit Locations
Cassette set unit (A)
Cassette
Erasure conveyor (B)
Housing
Side-positioning
conveyor (C)
Light-collecting unit
Scanning optics unit M
Subscanning unit (Z)

Controller
FRONT
FRONT
: Grip roller
FR6H1312.EPS : Conveyance path
: IP conveyance sensor
FR6H1313.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MD - 8 MD - 9
1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ■ I/O List (Sensors and Thermistors)
■ I/O Locations (Sensors and Thermistors) ● Cassette set unit

Symbol Name Type Function
Cassette set unit
SA1 Cassette eject sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette is ejected.
SA2 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette is inserted.
SA5 SA3 Hold sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette is in the hold state.
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup arm is in its home position.
SA5 Suction sensor Detects that the suction cup sucks the IP.
TR6H1302.EPS
Erasure conveyor
SA4
● Erasure conveyor
SA2
SA1 SB1
SA3 Symbol Name Type Function
PI (19mm) Detects that the IP is present due to conveyance.

SB1 IP sensor
It also measures the elapsed time for the IP.
THB1 Lamp temparature sensor Thermistor Detects the temperature within the erasure lamp assembly.
TSWB1 Safety thermostat operation sensor Thermal switch Detects the temperature at the reflection plate of the erasure unit.
TR6H1303.EPS
TSWB1
THB1 ● Side-positioning conveyor
Side-positioning conveyor SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor PI (5mm)

Detects that the side-positioning mechanism is in its home
position.
Subscanning unit SC2 Grip HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the grip roller is in its home position.

SZ2 SC4 SC3 IP sensor
SZ3 It also detects IP positioning during side-positioning operation.
SZ5
SC4 IP sensor
SC2 It also detects IP positioning during erasure operation.
TR6H1304.EPS
SC1 ● Subscanning unit

SC3 SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light receptor Detects the leading edge of the IP during reading.
SZ2 Driving-side grip operation sensor PI (5mm) Detects the driving-side grip condition.
SZ3 Driven-side grip operation sensor PI (5mm) Detects the driven-side grip condition.
SZ4
SZ4 IP stopper HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the IP stopper is in its home position.
SZ1
FR6H1317.EPS SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the dust removal brush is in its home position.
TR6H1305.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 10 MD - 11
■ I/O Locations (Motors, Clutch, Solenoids, Pump, Valves, Solenoid Valve, Fans) ■ I/O List (Motors, Clutch, Solenoids, Pump, Valves, Solenoid Valve, Fans)
● Cassette set unit

Cassette set unit
SVA1
MA1 PA1 Drives the suction cup arm and ejects the
MA1 Suction cup drive motor Pulse motor
cassette when the clutch is turned ON.
PA1 Suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP.
Erasure conveyor
CLA1 SVA1 Leak valve Solenoid valve Leaks the IP.
SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid Power-down solenoid Holds/releases the hold pin.
MB1 Interlinks the motor and roller when the

FAN3 CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch
cassette is ejected.
SOLA1
TR6H1306.EPS
● Erasure conveyor

MB1 Transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
TR6H1307.EPS
● Side-positioning conveyor
Side-positioning conveyor
FAN4
MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism.
MC2 Grip motor Pulse motor Grips/releases the grip roller.
Subscanning unit
MZ3
MC3 Transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
MZ1 MZ2 TR6H1308.EPS
MC2
(FMM)
● Subscanning unit
MC3
MC1
MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP during reading.
DC motor Grips/releases the driven-side grip roller and

MZ2 Grip drive motor
Controller driving-side grip roller.
SOLZ1
Removes dust deposited on the light-collecting
FAN2 MZ3 Dust removal motor Brushless DC motor guide and mirror.
SOLZ1 IP stopper solenoid Power-down solenoid Stops/releases the IP conveyance.

TR6H1309.EPS
● Controller
FAN1 Symbol Name Type Function
FR6H1314.EPS
FAN1 Board cooling fan DC fan Cools the controller boards (outtake)
FAN2 Board cooling fan DC fan Cools the controller boards (intake)
TR6H1310.EPS
● Housing

FAN3 Erasure unit cooling fan DC fan Cools the erasure unit.
FAN4 Inverter cooling fan DC fan Cools the fluorescent lamp ballast and inverter board.
TR6H1311.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 12 MD - 13
1.4.4 Board Locations 1.5 System Block Diagram

LED board
(LED12A) ■ Power Supply System
Inverter board AC IN
(INV12B) (85V–265V) Network
or CL
Power supply unit
Connector board
CNN12A
+15V +24V +5V
CPU board
Fluorescent CPU12A
lamp ballast +24V Motherboard
Image processing
(INV12A) MTH12A frame memory
Scanning optics unit

+15V/24V
M
+15V Start-point
+24V Driver board Sensor board Scanner board detection board
SOL
DRV12A SNS12A SCN12A SYN12A
+24V
SV
+15V LD driver board
Photomultiplier board
(PMT12A) +24V LDD12A
CL
+24V
P +24V Polygon driver
board
+15V/5V POL12A
FFM
Leading-edge +15V Photomultiplier

board
detection board
PMT12A
(SED12A) A/D converter
Shading correction +5V Leading-edge

image clock control detection board
SED12A
+5V +5V +5V
SND12A S Symbol Name
Driver board (DRV12A)
LD board S Sensor
Sensor board (SNS12A)
LED12A M Motor
Scanner board (SCN12A) Connector board SOL Solenoid
BCR SV Solenoid valve
(CNN12A)
CL Clutch
P Pump
FFM Motor
Motherboard
Inverter board Fluorescent lamp ballast BCR Barcode reader
(MTH12A)
INV12B INV12A +24V
LAMB1–3
Fan control circuit Safety thermostat Open-circuit
CPU board (CPU12A) Inverter
Lamp forced-lighting circuit control circuit detection circuit +24V
FAN
FR6H1316.EPS
+5V +24V +24V

Thermistor FAN TSWB1 FR6H1303.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 14 MD - 15
■ Signal System
2. Descriptions of Software Control
AC IN
Network
(85V–265V) Functions in exchanging data between the CL and the RU depend on the PC-MUTL version.
or CL
Power supply unit Described here are the functions of the PC-MUTL versions 1.4 or later.
Connector board
CNN12A
+15V +24V +5V 2.1 Relationship between RU and CL
CPU board This chapter describes exchanging of data between CL and RU, which is implemented when
CPU12A the CL is connected to the RU.
+24V Motherboard
MTH12A
Image processing
frame memory
◆ NOTE ◆
In this chapter, “software”, “operating system”, and “RU configuration” are abbreviated as AP,
Scanning optics unit OS, and RU-Config, respectively.
M
Start-point
detection board
2.1.1 RU Software and Data Flow
SOL Driver board Sensor board Scanner board
DRV12A SNS12A SCN12A SYN12A
■ Data Flow in Installing the RU Software
SV The RU-AP CD-ROM stores the following four files.
LD driver board
LDD12A • PC-MUTL
CL
• RU message file
P Polygon driver • RU-OS
board
POL12A
• RU-AP
FFM Described here is the data flow of the RU message file, RU-OS, RU-AP and RU-Config
Scanned image data
between the CR and RU.
Photomultiplier CL RU
board
FLASH ROM
PMT12A
A/D converter
(A) RU-OS
Leading-edge RU message file
Shading correction
image clock control detection board RU-AP
SED12A RU-AP
+5V +5V +5V CD-ROM FTP server RU-Config
SND12A S Symbol Name
S Sensor COMMON
LD board
M Motor Backup memory
LED12A RU-OS
SOL Solenoid
BCR SV Solenoid valve (B) RU-Config default setting
RU-AP
CL Clutch → Cleared
P Pump
(B)
FFM Motor RU-Config Memory (SRAM)
BCR Barcode reader
Inverter board Fluorescent lamp ballast
RU-specific data
INV12B INV12A +24V
LAMB1–3
Fan control circuit Safety thermostat
Inverter FR6H1415.EPS
Lamp forced-lighting circuit control circuit +24V
FAN ● RU message file
When the RU-AP is installed or updated in version, the RU message file is copied into the
+5V +24V +24V CL-PC (arrow (A)).
Thermistor FAN TSWB1 “2.1.3 Mechanism of Installing the RU Message File”
FR6H1304.EPS
REFERENCE
The RU message file records the details of RU error information. This is used to display, on
the CL monitor, the error code and the details of the error information of an error which has
occurred in the RU.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 16 MD - 17
● RU-OS ■ Data Flow in Normal Process

The RU-OS is copied via the CL’s FTP server through the network into the RU FLASH ROM. CL RU
◆ NOTE ◆ Image data

FLASH ROM
Do not install the RU-OS during normal maintenance. The RU-OS can be installed only
during the manufacturing process. FTP server
Backup memory
COMMON Log data
● RU-AP and RU-Config Memory (SRAM)

RU-AP
Default data of the RU-AP and the RU-Config is copied via the CL’s FTP server through the Image data
network into the FLASH ROM (arrow (B)) RU-Config
RU-Config
“2.1.2 Mechanism of Updating the RU FLASH ROM” RU-OS
Log data Machine shipment
■ Data Flow in RU Boot RU-specific data control data
RU
FLASH ROM
FR6H1417.EPS
(1) (1)
RU-OS RU-Config
● Image data
(1) Machine shipment (1)
RU-AP control data
The image data scanned from the IP is temporarily stored in the SRAM, and then transferred
to the CL via the network.
Backup memory
(2)
RU-Config default ● Log data
setup data*
• The log data is written, upon shutdown processing or upon occurrence of a FATAL error,
Memory (SRAM)
from the RU BACKUP MEMORY (SRAM) to the FTP server.
RU-OS RU-Config
• The RU BACKUP MEMORY (SRAM) retains the log data that is logged while the RU is
powered ON.
Machine shipment
RU-AP
control data • The FTP server retains a certain amount of the log data, which is overwritten by newer
data on a first-in-first-out basis when a predetermined level is exceeded.
* It includes network setup items

(such as default IP addresses of the RU and CL, etc.).
FR6H1416.EPS
When the RU is booted, the data in the flash ROM is copied into the memory (SRAM) (arrow
(1)).
If the default setup data of the RU-Config resides in the backup memory, that data is used to
overwrite the RU-Config in the memory (arrow (2)).
REFERENCE
Normally, the backup memory does not contain the default setup data of the RU-Config. Only
when one of the following operations is performed, it is written into the backup memory.
• When the RU is powered ON while holding down the <erasure processing> switch.
• When “Temporary Setting” for the backup memory is performed in the RU’s Maintenance
Utility.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 18 MD - 19
■ Data Flow in Backup and Restore 2.1.2 Mechanism of Updating the RU FLASH ROM
To backup and restore various types of data for the RU, RU M-Utility should be used.
The mechanism of rewriting the RU FLASH ROM from the CL’s FTP server differs depending
CL RU on the version of the PC-MUTL.
FLASH ROM Described here is the mechanism of the PC-MUTL of versions 1.2 or later.
FTP server Machine shipment
Refer to the appendix for the mechanism of updating the FLASH ROM of the PC-MUTL of
control data versions 1.1 or earlier.
COMMON
RU-Config “Appendix 1 Mechanism of Automatic Updating”
Machine shipment
■ How to Write the Flash ROM of the RU
control data Backup memory The RU itself is not equipped with any input device that allows for directly overwriting the RU-
RU-Config Log data AP or RU-Config into the flash ROM of the RU. Thus, in order to overwrite the flash ROM of
Log data
the RU, a personal computer (PC) connected to the network should be used.
Backup FD
RU-specific data Basically, for CL-RU connection, the CL-PC should be employed.
Memory (SRAM)
REFERENCE
For data communication between the RU and CL, the FTP server (one of network protocols
FR6H1418.EPS
for exchanging files between terminals) is used.
● Log data
[1] Mechanism of Updating FLASH ROM upon Execution of the PC-MUTL Command
A set of log data stored in the backup memory is backed up to the FD in accordance with the
flow as illustrated above. When the PC-MUTL commands (INSTALL, VERSION UP and EDIT CONFIGURATION) are
executed, the RU-AP or RU-Config of the CL’s FTP server is first rewritten, and then the RU
Note, however, that the log data cannot be restored. FLASH ROM is rewritten.
● RU-Config “[2] PC-MUTL Command”
The RU-Config stored in the FTP server is backed up to the FD. For restore, the data in the
Example: Data flow in execution of the INSTALL command
FD is copied to the FTP server. CL RU
● Machine shipment control data FTP sever FLASH ROM

RU PC-MUTL
RU-AP (A01) RU-AP (A01)
The machine shipment control stored in the flash ROM is backed up to the FD in accordance
with the flow as illustrated above. RU-Config RU-Config
RU-AP
For restore, it is copied to the flash ROM via the FTP server. CD-ROM
••
•
FR6H2010.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
• Be sure to turn OFF the automatic update function when a PC-MUTL command
(INSTALL, VERSION UP or EDIT CONFIGURATION) is to be executed. The automatic
update function can be turned ON/OFF with “AUTO UPDATE” of the RU configuration.
• Terminate all of application software on the CL when a PC-MUTL command is to be
booted. The FLASH ROM of the CPU12A board may be corrupted if the RU FLASH ROM
is accessed with the CL application booted.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 20 MD - 21
[2] PC-MUTL Command 2.1.3 Mechanism of Installing the RU Message File

The following six PC-MUTL commands are available to access the CL’s FTP server and the
RU FLASH ROM. The RU message file is installed into the CL-PC when the RU-AP is installed or updated in
version.
• INSTAL
In the MC-MUTL of versions 1.4 (RU-AP09) and after, the date of the RU message file in the
• VERSION UP
CD-ROM is compared with that of the RU message file in the CL-PC, and the file is installed
• PREVIOUS VERSION only when the RU message file in the CD-ROM is newer.
• EDIT CONFIGURATION
● When the RU message file in the CD-ROM is newer: NEW RU MSG
• BACKUP
CD-ROM RU message file with a
• RESTORE newer data
PC-MUTL of versions NEW RU MSG NEW

RURU
MSG
MSG OLD RU MSG
■ Functions of Commands
1.4 or later RU message file with an
older date
● INSTALL command Install
or Comparison of files Installation
Installs the RU-AP and RU-Config from the RU-AP CD-ROM into the CL’s FTP server. VersionUP
Then, writes the RU-AP and RU-Config from the FTP server into the RU FLASH ROM.
● VERSION UP command
OLD RU MSG NEW RU MSG
Installs the RU-AP from the RU-AP CD-ROM into the CL’s FTP server.
Then, writes the RU-AP from the FTP server into the RU FLASH ROM.
CL-PC
● PREVIOUS VERSION command
Writes the RU-AP before the VERSION UP command is executed from the CL’s FTP server ● When the RU message file in the CD-ROM is newer:
into the RU FLASH ROM.
● EDIT CONFIGURATION command PC-MUTL of versions OLD RU MSG

1.4 or later
Writes the RU-Config from the CL’s FTP server into the RU FLASH ROM.
Install
or Comparison of files No installation
● BACKUP command
VersionUP
Copies the RU-Config from the RU FLASH ROM into the FTP server. Then writes it from the
FTP server into a floppy disk.
● RESTORE command NEW RU MSG NEW RU MSG

Copies contents of the RU-Config from a floppy disk into the FTP server. Then, writes them
from the FTP server into the RU FLASH ROM. FR6H2029.EPS
REFERENCE
The following three kinds of SCN-related data are written into the RU memory (SRAM)
instead of the RU FLASH ROM upon execution of the PC-MUTL RESTORE command.
• SCN ALL DATA: All scanner data
• SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA: Light collection system data
• SCN OPTICAL DATA: Optical system data

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 22 MD - 23
◆ NOTES ◆ 2.2 RU Error Handling

• In the case of the RU-MUTL of versions 1.3 (RU-AP A08) or earlier, the RU message file
in the CD-ROM is written over the RU message file in the FTP server and then installed When an I/O (mechanism, scanner, etc.) abnormality occurs on the preceding models, the
(no date comparison occurs). system used to shuts down handling then it as a fatal error.
The RU, however, performs a retry process except when it is inoperative.
PC-MUTL of versions OLD
RURU
MSG
MSG
1.3 or earlier
Install
● Retry operation
or Installation
• If an I/O (mechanism, scanner, etc.) abnormality occurs between cassette insertion and
VersionUP
IP read, the system returns the IP to the cassette.
• If a scanner unit I/O (mechanism, scanner, etc.) abnormality occurs at the beginning of
an IP read, the system continues processing as needed to achieve cassette ejection.
NEW RU MSG OLD RU MSG
FR6H2030.EPS
● State where the system is inoperative
• If the PC-MUTL of versions 1.3 or earlier is used and another device (CR-IR362/363/364) • When the CPU functions of the SCN12A board and CPU12A board become inoperative
is connected with the master CL, the RU-AP of the connected device (CR-IR362/363/364) • When power supply voltage output is stopped
need be installed or updated in version after the RU-AP of this machine is installed or
• When the communication between the RU and the CL is stopped
updated in version.
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for details of checking
procedures after the installation of version update of the RU-AP. 2.2.1 CPU12A Board Functions
“Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version” in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume • Two CPUs are incorporated: main CPU (RU control) and sub-CPU (image control).
After the RU-AP of this machine (CR-IR346RU) is

• This board consists of an IPL flash ROM, APPL flash ROM, backup memory, FIFO/
installed or updated in version, the RU-AP of the SRAM, image ROM, image SDRAM, main SRAM, and Ethernet section.
connected device (CR-IR362/363/364) need be
installed or updated in version. • The sub-CPU (image control) controls an image, which is transmitted from the Ethernet
section to the CL in several lines at a time.
Master CL CR-IR362 CR-IR364 CPU12A board Backup memory FIFO/SRAM
APPL flash ROM
Image ROM
CR-IR346RU CR-IR363
FR6H2031.EPS
IPL flash ROM
Image
SDRAM
Ethernet section Main SDRAM Main CPU Sub-CPU FR6H1414.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 24 MD - 25
2.2.2 Diagnostics Sequence upon RU Bootup ■ When Booted after the RU Shutdown Process
◆ NOTE ◆
There are two types of diagnostics processing upon RU bootup: “When booted by turning
ON the power switch of the RU” and “When booted after the RU shutdown process”. When the power switch of the RU is turned OFF and then back ON, the diagnostic sequence
in the case of “when booted by turning ON the power switch of the RU” is executed.
■ When Booted by Turning ON the Power Switch of the RU
(1) Load (a) and (b) from the flash ROM on the CPU12A board into the SRAM (1) Check communication with the CL.
memory. ➮ When it is completed normally, the date and time data is acquired from the CL.
(a) MAIN CPU IPL (OS)
(b) MAIN CPU APPL (2) Diagnose each of the boards.
(2) Diagnose each of the following boards (a) through (d). (3) Perform “barcode reader communication check” and “fuse check”.
(a) SNS12A board
(b) DRV12A board (4) Perform mechanical control diagnostics ( “5.1 “Initialization Process Flow”).
(c) SCN12A board
(d) Sub-CPU (image processing CPU) on the CPU12A board
(5) Perform scanner diagnostics (including communication checks for the CPU12A
➮ When the diagnostics on the sub-CPU are completed normally, the “Sub CPU LED”
and SCN12A boards).
segments on the CPU12A board flash right and left.
➮ When the scanner diagnostics are completed normally, the “Main CPU LED”
REFERENCES segments on the CPU12A board flash right and left.
• The diagnostics include checking the each board for availability (provided or not provided)
and canceling each of the internal reset conditions of the hardware.
• For the sub-CPU, its self diagnostics will be activated by canceling its internal reset (6) The RU becomes ready.
condition. ➮ When it is completed normally, READY is notified to the CL.
(3) Perform “barcode reader communication check” and “fuse check”.
(4) Perform mechanical control diagnostics ( “5.1 “Initialization Process Flow”).
(5) Verify communication with the CL.

➮ When it is completed normally, the date and time data is acquired from the CL.
REFERENCES
• When the mechanical control diagnostic “5.1.6 IP Search” is completed normally, “step (6)”
is initiated.
• Steps (4) and (5) proceed concurrently.
(6) Perform scanner diagnostics (including communication checks for the CPU12A
and SCN12A boards).
➮ When the scanner diagnostics are completed normally, the “Main CPU LED”
segments on the CPU12A board flash right and left.
REFERENCES
• The date and time for any error code that has occurred until the date and time data was
acquired from the CL is indicated as “0000.00.00.00.00:AA”.
• “AA” denotes a counter that counts time in seconds since power is turned ON.
(7) The RU becomes ready.

➮ When it is completed normally, READY is notified to the CL.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MD - 26 MD - 27
2.2.3 RU Shutdown Process 3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations

The RU shutdown process is such that the daily logs are saved into the FTP server, while
the control section of the RU is in standby mode where its power remains ON to constantly 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function
monitor the status of the CL.
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage
◆ NOTE ◆ output detection function, which offers the following features:
If the RU is powered OFF without performing the RU shutdown process, the logs will not be • Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that servers to isolate a fault.
saved into the FTP server.
• The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors
the power supply voltage output.
(1) Receive the shutdown process from the CL.
• The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection
(2) Save the logs into the FTP server. circuits (points) in which an error has occurred.
The logs saved are as follows. ● Fuses and detection points
(a) ERROR LOG Power Supply Board Name Fuse No. Target for Protection Detection Point
A11 CPU12A board LED on CPU12A
(b) TRACE LOGS A21 SCN12A board A21P
MTH12A
(c) HISTORY LOG A31 SNS12A board LEDPON on LED12A
A41 MTH12A None
(3) Load (a) and (b) from the flash ROM on the CPU12A board into the SRAM SLOT1 (+5V) SCN12A A21 A22 SZ1 (SED12A board) A22P
A31 A32 MZ1 (FFM12A), INV12A A32P
memory. A31 A33 LED12A board A33P
SNS12A
(a) MAIN CPU IPL (OS) A31 A34 BCR (option) A34P
A31 A35 Each sensor A35P
(b) MAIN CPU APPL B11 INV12A board (for LAMB1) B11P
B21 INV12A board (for LAMB2) B21P
(4) Start constant monitoring of the CL status. SLOT2 (+24V) MTH12A C11 INV12A board (for LAMB3) C11P
C21 INV12A/B board, FAN3/4, TSWB1, THB1S C21P
➮ It is checked to see that the CL has transitioned to the READY state, and the C31 FAN1, FAN2 C31P
diagnostics sequence in the case of “■ when booted after the RU shutdown process” D11 MA1 D11P
is initiated. D21 SolA1 D21P
D31 SVA1, PA1 D31P
D41 DRV12A board D41P
D51 MB1 D51P
SLOT3 (+24V) DRV12A
E11 MC1 E11P
E21 MC3 E21P
E31 SolZ1 E31P
E41 CLA1 E41P
E51 MC2 E51P
MTH12A H11 SCN12 board H11P
H11 H12 SYN12A & PMT12A boards H12P
SLOT4 (+15V)
SCN12A H11 H13 LDD12A board H13P
H11 H14 5V system SYN12A board H14P
MTH12A J11 SCN12A board J11P
SLOT4 (-15V)
SCN12A J11 J12 SYN12A, PMT12A & LDD12A boards J12P
SLOT5 (+24V) MTH12A K11 POL K11P
L11 MZ1 (FFM12A)+15V L11P
SLOT5 (+15V) DRV12A L11 MZ1 (FFM12A)+5V L12P
L31 MZ3 L31P
● Points detected with no fuses

Power Supply Position of Implementation Target for Detection Detection Method
SLOT2(+24V) MTH12A +24V for INV12A BP
SLOT3(+24V) DRV12A +24V for DRV12A DP
SLOT4(+15V) MTH12A +15V for SCN12A HP
SLOT4(-15V) MTH12A -15V for SCN12A JP
SLOT5(+24V) MTH12A +24V for POL KP
SLOT5(+15V) DRV12A +15V for DRV12A LP TR6H1313.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 28 MD - 29
● CCR overcurrent protection circuit block diagram ● 5 V power supply (slot 1): A
5AT CNN12A CL Detection Point

A11 Error Code Error Name
A21 A22 A32 A33 A34 A35
GND CPU12A 12810 1 1 1 1 1 1 Power supply A error
5AT
A41 TP1 12811 1 1 0 0 0 0 Power supply A21 error
+5V circuit
SCN12A 12812 0 1 0 0 0 0 Power supply A22 error
5AT A21P +5V 1.5AT A22P 12813 0 0 1 0 0 0 Power supply A32 error
A21 A22 SED12A 12814 0 0 0 1 0 0 Power supply A33 error
+15V 1.5AT H 12P
H 12 12815 0 0 0 0 1 0 Power supply A34 error
12816 0 0 0 0 0 1 Power supply A35 error
1.5AT H14P
12817 0 0 1 1 1 1 Power supply A3 error
H 14
1.5AT J12P 12818 1 0 Power supply A row abnormal detected
Power supply -15V J12
SYN12A 12819 Power supply A system error
SLOT1(+5V) *
A1 <Bit indication>
A A2 PM T12A
4AT B11P 1: Error
B11 1.5AT H13P
SLOT2(+24V) 0: Normal
B BP 4AT B21P FA N1 H 13
B21
B,C 4AT C11P
FA N2 L DD12A
When the error combination is other than from 12810 to 12818.
C
C11
* TR6H1315.EPS
+24V
SLOT3(+24V) D 3AT C21P
C21 POL
D,E E
3AT C31P ● 24 V power supply (slot 2): B and C
C31
SLOT4(+15V) H HP 5AT H11P GND_A GND_F
H11 Detection Point
H J11P TP2 Error Code Error Name
5AT
SLOT4(-15V) J JP B B11 B21 C11 C21
J J11
SLOT5(+24V) K KP 2AT K11P 12820 1 1 1 1 1 Power supply BC error
K K11 SNS12A
SLOT5(+15V) L
12823 0 1 0 0 0 Power supply B11 error
5AT 0.5A
L A31 A35 A35P 12824 0 0 1 0 0 Power supply B21 error
Sensor
1.5AT 12825 0 0 0 1 0 Power supply C11 error
A33P
A33 L ED12A
1AT A34P 12826 0 0 0 0 1 Power supply C21 error
A34 BCR
1.5AT 12821 0 0 0 1 1 Power supply C error
A32 A32P
MTH12A 12822 1 1 1 0 0 Power supply B error
2A 1 0 Power supply B row abnormal detected
L2 1 MZ2 12827
L3 1
3AT L 31P 1 0 Power supply B row abnormal detected
MZ3(+12V)
DP 12828 Power supply BC system error
3AT
D11
D11P
MA1 *
+24V 3AT D51P <Bit indication>
D51 MB1
+24V D41P
3AT
D41 3AT D21 D21P 1: Error
SolA1
TP4 +5V circuit 2A D31P 0: Normal
GND D31 SVA1,PA1
THB1S 3AT E11P
INV12B
E11 MC1 * When the error combination is other than from 12820 to 12827 and any bit is 1.
3AT E21 E21P TR6H1316.EPS
FA N3 MC3
FA N4,TSWB1 3AT E31P
E31 SolZ1
LA M P3
2A E41P
LA M P2 E41 CL A1
LA M P1 3AT E51 E51P
MC2
INV12A
LP +15V 2AT L11P +15V
L11
: For board operation +5V +5V
+5VFFM
: Regulator L 12P
: Current detection circuit MZ1(FFM12A)
: Fuse
GND DRV12A
TP3
: Voltage check connector
(TP1 to TP4) FR6H1353.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 30 MD - 31
● 24 V power supply (slot 3): D and E ● -15 V power supply (slot 4): J
Detection Point Detection Point

Error Code Error Name Error Code Error Name
D D11 D21 D31 D41 E11 E21 E31 E41 J J11 J12
12830 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Power supply DE error 12860 1 1 1 Power supply J error
12831 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Power supply D error 12861 0 1 1 Power supply J11 error
12832 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Power supply E error 12862 0 0 1 Power supply J12 error
12833 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Power supply D11 error 1 0 Power supply J row abnormal detected
12863
12834 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Power supply D21 error 1 0 Power supply J row abnormal detected
12835 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Power supply D31 error 12864 Power supply J system error
12836 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Power supply D41 error
<Bit indication>
12837 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Power supply E11 error
1: Error
0: Normal
12840 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Power supply E41 error * When the error combination is other than from 12860 to 12863.
TR6H1319.EPS
1 0 Power supply D row abnormal detected
1 0 Power supply D row abnormal detected ● 24 V power supply (slot 5): K
12841
1 0 Power supply D row abnormal detected
1 0 Power supply D row abnormal detected Detection Point
Error Code Error Name
12842 Power supply DE system error K K11
* 12870 1 1 Power supply K error
<Bit indication>
12871 0 1 Power supply K11 error
1: Error
12872 1 0 Power supply J row abnormal detected
0: Normal
<Bit indication>
* When the error combination is other than from 12830 to 12841 and any bit is 1. TR6H1317.EPS
1: Error
0: Normal
● 15 V power supply (slot 4): H TR6H1320.EPS
Error Code
Detection Point
Error Name ● 15 V power supply (slot 5): L
H H11 H12 H13 H14
12850 1 1 1 1 1 Power supply H error Detection Point
Error Code Error Name
12851 0 1 1 1 1 Power supply H11 error L L11 L12 L21 L31
12852 0 0 1 0 0 Power supply H12 error 12880 1 1 1 1 1 Power supply L error
12853 0 0 0 1 0 Power supply H13 error 12881 0 1 1 0 0 Power supply L11 error
12854 0 0 0 0 1 Power supply H14 error 12882 0 0 1 0 0 Power supply L12 error
1 0 Power supply H row abnormal detected 12883 0 0 0 1 1 Power supply L21 error
1 0 Power supply H row abnormal detected 12884 0 0 0 0 1 Power supply L31 error
12855
1 0 Power supply H row abnormal detected 1 0 Power supply L row abnormal detected
1 0 Power supply H row abnormal detected 1 0 Power supply L row abnormal detected
12856 Power supply H system error 12885 1 0 Power supply L row abnormal detected
* 1 0 Power supply L row abnormal detected
<Bit indication>
Power supply L row abnormal detected
1: Error
12886 Power supply L system error
0: Normal *
<Bit indication>
* When the error combination is other than from 12850 to 12855. TR6H1318.EPS
1: Error
0: Normal
* When the error combination is other than from 12880 to 12885. TR6H1321.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 32 MD - 33
3.2 Erasure Unit ■ Components
■ Overview
FAN3
The erasure unit provides idle illumination control, IP erasure control, and fan control.
CPU12A THB1
Feature: Erasure unit initialization is effected after verifying that the machine is emptied of FAN4
IPs. MTH12A
LAMP1
● Idle illumination control LAMP2
To obtain an adequate lamp light intensity for IP erasure after RU power ON, lamp SNS12A INV12B INV12A
LAMP3
(LAMP1-LAMP3) illumination and FAN3 operation are controlled so as to maintain a
constant temperature inside the erasure unit.
TSWB1
● IP erasure control FAN3: Erasure unit cooling fan
FAN4: Inverter cooling fan
To effect IP erasure, the erasure unit pass time is controlled in accordance with the dose TSWB1: Thermal switch
received by a processed IP. THB1: Temperature thermistor FR6H1356.EPS
● Fan control
Control is exercised so as to operate a fan when the internal temperature of the erasure
unit is high.
● Temperature adjustment control

• The heat generated during lamp (LAMP1-LAMP3) illumination is detected by the
temperature thermistor (THB1) and used to exercise FAN3 operation and lamp
illumination control.
• While the machine is idle and processing no IP, control is exercised to automatically
illuminate the lamps for temperature adjustment purposes.
• Before the lamps are illuminated, they are subjected to preheating.

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 34 MD - 35
■ Function descriptions ● INV12B board: This is a control PC board, which consists of a temperature
thermistor circuit, LED circuit, erasure unit control circuit, power
● INV12A board: This is a driver PC board, which consists of a safety thermostat supply, and cooling fan circuit.
circuit, inverter circuit, and illumination failure detection circuit.
INV12B board
INV12A board
LED circuit
Erasure
Temperature unit control
thermistor CN14 circuit
CN4
circuit D1 D3 D5 D13 D16 D15 CN5
CN11
D2 D4 D6 D10 D17 D14
CN12 TP4 1
D12 D7 D8 D11 D18 GND
Heat-radiation plate FRONT
CN13
Power
2 +24V(C)
supply
Cooling fan CN2
circuit
CN1 : GND
CN3
Safety thermostat circuit Inverter circuit Illumination failure

detection circuit
Test Pin TP4 Voltage Reference Voltage
Safety thermostat circuit: TP4 1-2 +24V Should be between +23.5 and 25.0.
Upon receipt of the OFF signal from the safety thermostat (TSWB1),
this circuit operates a relay to directly shut off the 24 V supply.
• Temperature thermistor circuit: Processes temperature thermistor (THB1)
Illumination failure detection circuit:
signals.
Each lamp is furnished with a detection circuit, which achieves
• LED circuit: Displays the states of various signals fed from the erasure unit.
illumination failure detection in accordance with the current.
• Erasure unit control circuit: Communicates with the SNS12A board and
Inverter circuit: controls the erasure unit.
Each lamp is provided with a lamp voltage output circuit. • Power supply: Functions as a 24 V/24 V-to-5 V regulator circuit.
FR6H1355.EPS • Cooling fan circuit: Processes fan operation signals.
FR6H1354.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 36 MD - 37
■ Erasure unit internal status 3.3 LEDs on the SNS12A Board

The erasure unit’s internal status is monitored and determined in accordance with various
signal combinations. By checking the illumination state of the LEDs on the SNS12A board, the status of each
sensor can be verified.
Board LED
Status in the Erasure Unit
TH HERR FA LT
3.3.1 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated)
0 0 0 1 Thermistor failure
1 0 0 1 Excessively high temperature The LEDs signify the status of the signal transmitted from the sensor to the board.
1 1 0 1 Fan operation
An LED segment ON (illuminated) means that its corresponding sensor is CLOSE.
1 1 1 1 Ready for use
1 1 1 0 Request for idle illumination ON
0 1 1 0 Thermistor failure
3.3.2 Correspondence between LEDs and Sensors
LED indication 1 - ON, 0 - OFF TR6H1323.EPS The 7-segment LEDs on the SNS12A board correspond to each of the following sensors as
listed in the table below.
LED Status
LED Silk Indication Meaning
OFF ON
D1 1PRE Pre-heating signal issued to LAMP1. GOOD NG
D2 1ON ON signal issued to LAMP1. GOOD NG
D12 1O LAMP 1 is ON. GOOD NG
SNS12A board
D10 FAN ON signal notified from the INV12A board to the SNS12A board. OFF ON
D11 HERR The INV12B board detected high temperature. Detected Not detected
LED position I/O No. Sensor name LED position I/O No. Sensor name
D13 LT The INV12B board detected low temperature. Detected Not detected
D16 FUS1 LAMP1 fuse on the INV12A board is blown. NG GOOD
D17 FUS2 LAMP2 fuse on the INV12A board is blown. NG GOOD Cassette ejection
SA1 SC4 IP sensor
sensor
D18 FUS3 LAMP3 fuse on the INV12A board is blown. NG GOOD
D15 TH Temperature thermistor (THB1) broken. NG GOOD
D14 VCC 5V output on the INV12A board. GOOD NG SA2 Cassette IN sensor SC3 IP sensor
TR6H1322.EPS
SA3 Hold sensor SC2 Grip HP sensor
Suction cup HP Side-positioning HP

SA4 SC1
sensor sensor
Driven-side grip
SA5 Suction sensor SZ3 operation sensor
Driving-side grip
SB1 IP sensor SZ2 operation sensor
Dust removal HP
SZ4 IP stopper HP sensor SZ5
sensor
TR6H2023.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 38 MD - 39
3.4 LEDs on the DRV12A Board 3.4.2 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated)
By checking the illumination state of the LEDs on the DRV12A board, the operating status of An LED segment ON (illuminated) means that its corresponding load is being driven.
the solenoid and motor can be verified. Note, however, that the signal for detecting whether it is being driven differs depending on
each load.
3.4.1 Correspondence between LEDs and Loads Signals marked by a circle are detected.
The 7-segment LEDs on the DRV12A board correspond to each of the following loads as
Load name Control signal in the board Drive signal to the load
listed in the table below.
SOLA1 ❍
PA1 ❍
MA1 ❍
SVA1 ❍
SOLZ1 ❍
MB1 ❍
MZ3 ❍
MC3 ❍
DRV12A board MC2 ❍
MC1 ❍
MZ2 ❍
FFM ❍
CLA1 ❍
LED position I/O No. Load name LED position I/O No. Load name
SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid MC3 Transport motor
PA1 Suction pump MC2 Grip motor
MA1 Suction cup drive motor MC1 Side-positioning motor
SVA1 Leak valve MZ2 Grip release motor
SOLZ1 IP stopper solenoid FFM FFM motor
CLA1 Cassette extrusion

MB1 Transport motor
clutch
MZ3 Dust removal motor
TR6H2025.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 39.1 MD - 39.2
4. Descriptions of Components and Their 4.1.2 Descriptions of Scanner Operations
Operations ■ I/O Components

4.1 Descriptions of Scanner Unit and Its Operations ● Optical unit
This unit consists of the laser (LDD: 50 mW), polygon (POL), start-point detector (SYN), f
CAUTIONS θ lens, and long lens.
• When servicing a PC board, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground your body. If you do not
ground your body, the buildup of static electricity on your body may damage electronic ● Sub-scanner unit
components on the PC board. This unit consists of the driven grip, driving grip, photomultiplier (PMT), and leading-edge
• Do not uncover the optical unit. detector (SED).
• Never remove screws painted red.
• When returning a replaced optical unit for repairs, be sure to use the same packing materials
that were used for initial shipment. Otherwise, the returned unit cannot be repaired. ■ Descriptions of Operations
The H8 CPU on the SCN12A board controls the optical unit and photomultiplier and
communicates with the main CPU on the CPU12A board.
4.1.1 Scanner Unit ● Features

• The control signal status of each I/O is indicated by the LEDs on the SCN12A board.
■ Components
• The scanner error code is formulated by combining an I/O control signal and PC board
Optical unit reference signal.
SCN12A board CPU12A board It is structured so as to facilitate problem cause identification.
• The polygon data, shading correction data, sensitivity data, and format data are stored
Start-point Shading in the backup memory on the CPU12A board. They are fed to the SCN12A board for
detector correction use in operations.
(SYN) Main CPU
H8
CPU Polygon ON
Quasi-reading
LED ON
Sub-CPU Quasi-reading
PMT data issue
Check
unnecessary
Polygon
POLLOCK
ON
LD11DLE
PMTD1G
(POL)
POLON
LD1ON
LD2ON
LD1OK
ZLCLK
LIGHT
HVOK
PCLK
FCLK
Blinking
SOH
SOS
OFF
Long lens
Laser
(LDD)
fθ2 Front of the controller
Image data
Long lens S1
HVON
PMT12A board CN5
CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CN4 S1
SCN12A
FR6H1285.EPS
Photomultiplier
Driving grip Driven grip
Leading-edge detector (SED)

FR6H1411.EPS
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 39.1 010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 39.2
09.25.2004 FM4338 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 39.3 MD - 39.4
● Meanings of SCN12A board LEDs 4.1.3 RU Image Data Flow

LED (1) Photoluminescence data is generated when the laser light emitted from the optical unit
LED Meaning LED OFF
ON/Blinking falls on an IP. It is read by the photomultiplier via the light-collection guide.
LD1 OK OK signal (laser power 50% or more) from the laser (LDD) GOOD NG
High-voltage power supply OK signal from the photomultiplier
HV OK GOOD NG (2) The PMT12A board (photomultiplier) sends the data, in analog form, to the SCN12A
(PMT)
FCLK,PCLCK Reference signal issued by the SCN12A board - - board.
GOOD
ZLCLK H8 CPU operation status signal NG
(blinking)
(3) The analog data thus sent is subjected to shading correction and other processes on
POL LOCK OK signal from the polygon (POL) GOOD NG the SCN12A board, and then converted to its digital data equivalent (A/D conversion).
Not
SOS Detection signal from the start-point detector (SYN) Detected
detected
SOH Detection signal from the leading-edge detector (SED) Detected

Not (4) The SCN12A board sends the data, in digital data form, to the CPU12A board via the
detected MTH12A board.
LD1 ON ON signal from the SCN12A board to the laser (LDD) ON OFF
LD2 ON Not used - -
(5) The sub-CPU on the CPU12A board subjects the data to 2/3 line reduction and then
Control signal from the SCN12A board to the laser (LDD)
ON: Output generation is in progress. transmits it to the CL via the network.
LD1 IDLE ON OFF
OFF: No output is being generated.
POL ON ON signal from the SCN12A board to the polygon (POL) ON OFF [Photomultiplier]
Quasi-data output signal with the PMT12A board LED PMT12A
LIGHT ON OFF
illuminated Optical unit
Quasi-data output signal generated by the LOG amplifier
PMT D1G ON OFF LOG amplifier
on the PMT12A board
High-voltage switch status signal
ON: The ON setting is selected by both the software and
HV ON the hardware. ON OFF HV
OFF: The OFF setting is selected by either the software or
the hardware.
TR6H1101.EPS
Laser light
Light-collection Light-collection
mirror guide
SCN12A
Shading
correction
IP
AD conversion
CPU12A
Sub-CPU
Printer
CL
MTH12A
Laser light and photoluminescence data

Analog data
Digital data
2/3 reduced data FR6H1410.EPS
010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 39.3 010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 39.4
02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MD - 40 MD - 41
4.2 Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their ● Photosensors

Operations In marked contrast to the previously used screw-on type, the currently employed
photosensors are to be claw-locked (for displacement prevention).
■ RU Common Parts
CAUTION
● E-ringless housings When removing or installing the photosensor, use a steel rule or the like and exercise
care not to damage the sensor claws.
The employed housings can be secured to side plates without E-rings.
Sensor
Steel rule
FR6H1281.EPS
● Snap-fit pinion gears

The employed pinion gears can be installed and removed without using retaining Claw
members or tools.
FR6H1283.EPS
CAUTION
When installing the pinion gear over the shaft, ensure that it is properly oriented. If you
install it over the shaft while it is reversed, its claws may become damaged.
Shaft Pinion gear
Pinion gear
Claws Shaft
Claws
GOOD NG
FR6H1282.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MD - 42 MD - 43
4.2.1 Cassette Set Unit ■ Suction Cup Home Position

The suction cup home position sensor (SA4) detects the suction cup home position. When
The IP inserted into the cassette is suctioned by the suction cups and transported to the the suction cup assembly is in the home position, the spur gear claw closes the suction cup
feed roller in the erasure conveyor unit. home position sensor (SA4) by blocking its light path.
The features of the RU cassette setting unit are summarized below:
• The suction cups have enhanced durability and need no replacement.
• The hose interconnecting the suction cups and suction pump is constructed of one piece
without joints. It differs from the previous type, which uses a branch pipe.
■ IP Feed Suction
• Switching between the inch and metric settings can be performed by repositioning the
The suction cup drive motor (MA1) rotates to move the suction arm toward the cassette
guides and changing the associated CPU board DIP switch settings.
cover. The moment the suction cup assembly reaches the IP suction position, the suction
• A rubber roller assembly is used to prevent the IP image read surface from being dam- pump (PA1) operates to suction the IP. If the suction sensor (SA5) does not close within a
aged. period of 1 second in this instance, a suction failure occurs.
Rubber roller assembly

Hose
■ IP Feed Leak
After the suction cup assembly is moved to the feed roller in the erasure conveyor unit, the
leak valve (SVA1) operates to separate the suctioned IP from the suction cup assembly.
Suction cup
assembly To verify the subsequent IP feed operation, the cassette inlet IP detection sensor (SB1)
detects the IP leading edge.
■ IP Load Suction
When the IP is loaded from the erasure conveyor unit into the cassette, the suction pump
(PA1) operates to suction the IP trailing edge.
In this instance, the suction cup assembly is in the home position.
FR6H1284.EPS
■ IP Load Leak
The suction cup drive motor (MA1) rotates to move the suction arm toward the cassette
cover, thereby loading the IP into the cassette. Once the IP loading is completed, the leak
valve (SVA1) operates to release the suction of the suction cup.
■ Cassette Ejection
After the IP suction is released, the solenoid (SOLA1) operates to release the cassette hold
pin that secures the cassette in place.
At this time, the extrusion clutch (CLA1) operates so that the driving force of the IP removal
arm is transmitted to the rubber roller. Thus, the moment the IP removal arm is moved to its
home position, the rubber roller rotates, so that the cassette is ejected.
Once the cassette ejection is completed, the extrusion clutch (CLA1) turns off, and the
processing status lamp goes off, while the cassette removal lamp lights up.

08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 44 MD - 45
4.2.2 Erasure Conveyor Unit 4.2.3 Side-positioning Conveyor

The IP transported from the cassette setting unit to the feed roller is forwarded to the side- The IP transported from the erasure conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor is side-
positioning conveyor. In this instance, the barcode is read and the brush roller removes dust positioned and forwarded to the sub-scanner unit. Note that a side-positioning operation is
from the IP surface. performed two times.
Further, the read image is erased from the IP and the IP is transported to the cassette The features of the RU side-positioning conveyor are summarized below:
setting unit. • On the preceding model, the side-positioning conveyor incorporates an IP stopper
The features of the RU erasure conveyor unit are summarized below: mechanism and side-positioning claw assembly to correct any IP skew and side-position
• Cleaning rollers are incorporated in the erasure conveyor unit to remove dust from IPs. the transported IP. Within the RU, however, the IP stopper mechanism
• The erasure conveyor unit has a barcode reader. (IP skew correction function) and side-positioning claw assembly (IP side-positioning
function) are separately incorporated in the sub-scanner unit and side-positioning
• Two functions are selectable for IP image erasure: primary erasure (IP image erasure after conveyor.
the completion of an image read operation) and secondary erasure (residual image/RI spot
erasure from IPs left unused for prolonged periods of time). • The preceding model uses a wire for grip roller release. However, the RU uses a plastic
cam instead.
■ IP Feed Conveyance (IP Length Measurement and Barcode Reading) • The preceding model furnishes the IP conveyance path with a shock absorber. However,
the RU uses plastic guides.
While the IP transported from the cassette setting unit to the feed roller is forwarded to the
side-positioning conveyor by the conveyance motor (MB1), it is detected by the cassette inlet
IP detection sensor (SB1). The length of the transported IP is then measured (by counting Left-side grip mechanism Right-side grip mechanism
the time required for the IP to pass through the SB1 sensor) to determine the IP size.
Cam
Further, the barcode reader operates to read the barcode information the moment the IP Guide
length measurement sequence starts.
■ IP Load Conveyance (Image Erasure)

After the completion of an image read process, the IP is transported by the conveyance
motor (MB1) to let the erasure lamps delete image data.
Cam
FR6H1400.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 46 MD - 47
■ IP Feed Conveyance ■ Grip Roller Release

The IP conveyance motor (MC3) operates to transport the IP to the IP stopper section in the When the transported IP is detected by the grip release home position sensor (SC2), the
sub-scanner unit. In this instance, the solenoid (SOLZ1) operates to raise the IP stoppers. grip release motor (MC2) operates to release the grip roller.
Further, the driven and driving shaft roller grips in the sub-scanner unit are released. Side-positioning
conveyor
Grip roller
Grip drive motor
(MZ2)
M Grip release HP
Sub-scanner M sensor (SC2)
M
Sub-scanner M
Side-positioning
conveyor
M Grip roller
IP conveyance
M motor (MC3) M
M
Driving shaft roller M
M FRONT
Grip release motor
FRONT (MC2)
FR6H1402.EPS
Driven shaft roller
View from rear

Solenoid
(SOLZ1)
IP stopper
■ Side-positioning Operation
FR6H1401.EPS When the side-positioning sensor (SC1) detects that the claw assembly is in its home posi-
tion, the side-positioning motor (MC1) drives to perform side-positioning operation twice.
The side-positioning operation causes the edge of the IP to align closely to the side guide of
the side-positioning conveyor, thereby determining the orientation and position of the IP.
After the side-positioning operation is completed, the claw assembly moves to its home
position and the IP is conveyed to the scanner unit.
Side-positioning
conveyor
M
Sub-Scanner M
Side-positioning HP
sensor (SC1)
M Side-positioning
motor (MC1)
M
M
FRONT
Claw assembly FR6H1403.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 48 MD - 49
4.2.4 Subscanning Unit ■ Driving Shaft Roller/Driven Shaft Roller

When the IP is transported to the IP stopper section, the image read process is started by
When the IP is transported from the side-positioning conveyor, the subscanning unit reads operating the sub-scanner motor (MZ1) to forward the IP with the aid of driving and driven
the image recorded on the IP. The subscanning unit also transmits image data to the CL as shaft rollers.
soon as the image read process starts.
The features of the RU subscanning unit are summarized below:
• The IP stopper mechanism for side-positioning is mounted in front of the light-collection
mirror assembly.
■ Driven Shaft Grip
IP stopper mechanism Once the side-positioning operation is completed, the solenoid (SOLZ1) operates to release
the IP stoppers. At this time, the grip drive motor (MZ2) operates so that the driven shaft
roller grips the IP, which is conveyed toward the reading position.
FR6H1404.EPS
Grip drive motor (MZ2)
• The dust removal mechanism is incorporated.

Dust removal is performed after RU power ON (during initialization) to clean the incidence
surface of the light-collection guide. It can also be initiated at any time by issuing a M
command in the user utility mode. Sub-scanner M
Side-positioning
Dust removal mechanism conveyor
M
M
M
FRONT
Driven shaft roller
View from rear Solenoid (SOLZ1)

IP stopper
FR6H1405.EPS
FR6H1406.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 08.30.2001 FM3058
MD - 50 MD - 51
■ Driving Shaft Grip ■ IP Load Conveyance

Once the side-positioning operation is completed, the IP stoppers are released, and the IP is After the completion of the image read process, the grip drive motor (MZ2) operates to grip
gripped by the rotating driven shaft roller to start its conveyance. the released driven shaft roller.
When the IP leading edge sensor (SZ1) transitions to CLOSE due to the IP conveyed, IP The moment the driven shaft roller is gripped, the sub-scanner motor (MZ1) operates to
image reading is initiated. transport the IP to the side-positioning conveyor.
When the driving shaft roller grips the IP, the grip drive motor (MZ2) operates, thereby
releasing the grip of the driven shaft roller.
Grip drive motor (MZ2)
Sub-scanner
Grip drive motor (MZ2) motor (MZ1)
M
Sub-scanner M
Side-positioning
M conveyor
Sub-scanner M
Side-positioning M
conveyor
M
M
M
Driving shaft roller M FRONT
M
Driven shaft roller FR6H1408.EPS
FRONT
Driven shaft roller FR6H1407.EPS

■ Driving/Driven Shaft Grip Release
When the IP is transported to the side-positioning conveyor, the driving and driven shaft
roller grips are released.
Further, when the driving and driven shaft roller grips are released, the IP conveyance motor
(MC3) in the side-positioning conveyor operates to transport the IP.
M
Sub-scanner M
Side-positioning
conveyor
IP conveyance motor
M (MC3)
M
M
FRONT
Driving shaft roller Driven shaft roller FR6H1409.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 52 MD - 53
5. Mechanical Control Flows A
5.1 Initialization Process Flow SA2: Close?

Open
<Fig. 1 Overall Summary Flow> Close

B
Control for RU software Control for RU software
START version A05 or later
version A04 or earlier NO
Any remaining
IP?
5.1.1, Fig. 1 Sensor ON 5.1.1, Fig. 1 Sensor ON
YES
C
5.1.2, Fig. 1 Dust removal home positioning Open
SZ5 : Open? NO
CMOS info
5.1.3, Fig. 1 Side-positioning grip Close CMOS clear ?
home positioning Dust removal
5.1.2, Fig. 1 CMOS info NO
home positioning YES Before reading?
5.1.4, Fig. 1 Subscanning grip confirmation
CMOS info NO
YES Before erasure?
5.1.5, Fig. 1 Side-positioning home positioning
YES
5.1.6, Fig. 1 IP search
Conveyance
13386 11387 Recovery IP processing
CMOS clear
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning 1
Message display
5.1.8, Fig. 1 IP position information confirmation
5.1.9, Fig. 1 Remaining IP processing

Suction cup movement (HP → feed suction)
5.1.10, Fig. 1 Subscanning grip home positioning [MA1: CCW2195P]: Drive
5.1.11, Fig. 1 IP stopper protrusion 2 Delay: 50ms
Delay: 100ms 5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection
5.1.12, Fig. 1 Stopper retreat 2 Solenoid (SolA1): OFF (Hold)
Timeout [TA18: within 2000 msec]

SA3: Open?
Open
A
FR6H1137.EPS
D
Delay: 100ms
5.2.1, Fig. 2 Cassette hold release
END
FR6H1278.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 54 MD - 55
B C
Open 5.1.13, Fig. 1 IP confirmation within cassette

SA1: Close? 1
No IP
NG
Close Suction cup movement (HP → feed suction)
[MA1: CCW2195P]: Drive
CMOS info NO
CMOS clear? Delay: 50ms
CMOS info NO
YES Before reading?
5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection
CMOS info NO
YES Before erasure?
YES
Conveyance CMOS Solenoid (SolA1): OFF (Hold)
13386 D 11387 Recovery IP processing
clear
Message display SA3: Open?
Open

Delay: 100ms FR6H1280.EPS
Process complete LED displayed

LEDOUT: ON
Close (Cassette removal not completed)

SA1: Open?
Open
(Cassette
removal
completed)
Call LED not-displayed
LEDCALL: OFF
Solenoid (SolA1): OFF (Hold)

SA3 : Open?
Open
D FR6H1279.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 56 MD - 57
5.1.1 Sensor ON <I/O Locations>

Cassette set unit
<Fig. 1 Sensor ON Flow> A unit
Suction cup HP sensor
Cassette ejection sensor SA4
START
SA1
Suction cup HP sensor (SA4): ON
Cassette inlet IP sensor (SB1): ON
Side-positioning HP sensor (SC1): ON
Grip release HP sensor (SC2): ON
Side-positioning IP sensor (SC3): ON
Erasure positioning IP sensor (SC4): ON Hold sensor Cassette IN sensor IP sensor
Driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2): ON SA3 SA2 SB1
Driven-side grip release HP sensor (SZ3): ON
Stopper HP sensor (SZ4): ON Erasure conveyor
Dust removal HP sensor (SZ5): ON FRONT
B unit
SA1: Open?
Open Close (With cassette)
(Without cassette) Driven-side grip release sensor
IP sensor
SZ3
5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 SC4
(SA1)
Driving-side grip release sensor
SZ2
SA2: Open? Side-positioning conveyor
Open Close (With cassette) C unit
(Without cassette)
Grip release HP sensor
5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 SC2
(SA2)
Side-positioning HP sensor
SC1
SA3: Open?
Close (With cassette) Dust removal sensor
Open
SZ5
(Without cassette)
5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1

(SA3)
Subscanning unit
Z unit IP stopper HP sensor IP sensor
Yes SZ4 SC3 FR6H1219.EPS
SA1open&SA2open&SA3close
NO 10300 IP sensor logical
inconsistency SA3 <I/O Table>
Yes
SA1open&SA2close&SA3open
NO IP sensor logical SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
10300 inconsistency SA2
Yes SA2 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been inserted.
SA3 Cassette hold sensor PI (5mm) Detects the cassette hold completion.
SA1open&SA2close&SA3close SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup is in its home position.
NO 10300 IP sensor logical
inconsistency SA2
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
END 10300 IP sensor logical SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the side-positioning home position.
inconsistency SA3
SC2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the grip release home position.
FR6H2024.EPS
SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
SC4 Erasure positioning IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode.
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driven side is in grip released mode.
SZ4 Stopper HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the IP stopper is in its home position.
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the dust removal brush is in its home position.
TR6H1079.EPS

02.20.2002 FM3328 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 58 MD - 59
<Sensor ON/OFF Status> BLANK PAGE

SA1/SA3/SA4/SC1/SC2/SZ2/SZ3/SZ4/SZ5
OFF: Open (not blocked) ON: Close (blocked)
SA2
OFF: Open (without cassette) ON: Close (with cassette)
SB1/SC3/SC4
OFF: Open (no IP) ON: Close (IP found)

FR6H1247.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 60 MD - 61
5.1.2 Dust Removal Home Positioning A
<Fig. 1 Dust Removal Home Positioning Flow> 2
START Dust removal driving

MZ3 [CCW]: Drive
1
Close (Blocked)
Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF (Retreat) Timeout [TZ57: within 10 sec]
SZ5: Open?
Open
Open (Retreat NG)
(Not blocked)
Timeout
[TZ42: within 2 sec] Elapsed time count timer stop
SZ4: Close?
Dust removal driving
Close
Stopper Within 5 times [NZ12] MZ3: OFF
(Retreat Retry?
retreat
OK)
Elapsed time count timer Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec]
6 times or more start
IP stopper IP stopper
10341 retreat failure 14341 13391 Dust removal mechanism lock 1
retreat retry Wait for MZ3CCW SZ5
Close → Open → Close
Delay [TZ44: 2sec] (Timer count)
B
1 Open (Not blocked)

Timeout [TZ53: within 1.8 sec]
SZ5: Close?
Open (Not blocked)
SZ5: Close? Close
Dust removal driving (Blocked)
Close MZ3 [CW]: Drive
(Blocked) Elapsed time count timer stop Elapsed time count timer stop
Open (Not blocked)
SZ5: Close?
Delay [TZ58: 0.2sec]
Close MZ3: OFF
(Blocked)
Wait for MZ3CW Dust removal driving Dust removal driving
SZ5 Close Delay [TZ58: 0.2sec] Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec]
MZ3: OFF MZ3: OFF
(preparation for
HP detection) Dust removal driving
MZ3: OFF 5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 (SZ5)
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] 10390 Dust removal operation failure 1 13392 Dust removal mechanism lock 2
[TZ60: Within 0.92 sec]
Timer?
D
[TZ60: 0.92 secor more]
FR6H1160.EPS
A
C 2
FR6H1161.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 62 MD - 63
C B

MZ3 [CW]: Drive
Close (Blocked)
Dust removal driving Timeout [TZ57: within 10 sec]
SZ5: Open?
MZ3 [CW]: Drive
Open Dust removal driving
(Not blocked) MZ3: OFF

Close (blocked)
Timeout [TZ57: within 10 sec]
SZ5: Open? Wait for MZ3CCW SZ5 10391 Dust removal mechanism lock 1
(preparation for HP Open (Not blocked)
Open Dust removal driving detection) Timeout [TZ53: within 1.8 sec]
(Not blocked) MZ3: OFF SZ5: Close?
Close Dust removal driving

(Blocked) MZ3: OFF
Wait for MZ3CW SZ5 Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec]
Close → Open → Close Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec]

5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 (SZ5)
10391 Dust removal mechanism lock 1 MZ3: OFF
Open (Not blocked) Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] 10392 Dust removal mechanism lock 2
SZ5: Close?
Close D
(Blocked)
Dust removal driving Dust removal driving
MZ3: OFF MZ3 [CW]: Drive
Open (Not blocked)

Dust removal driving Timeout [TZ53: within 1.8 sec]
MZ3: OFF Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] SZ5: Close?
Wait for MZ3CW
SZ5 Close Close
(Blocked)
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] 5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 (SZ5) Delay [TZ58: 0.2sec] MZ3: OFF

MZ3: OFF 5.2.14, Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 (SZ5)
10392 Dust removal mechanism lock 2
MZ3 [CCW]: Drive
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] 10390 Dust removal operation failure 1
Close (Not blocked)

SZ5: Open?
MZ3 [CW]: Drive
Open
(Blocked) Close (Blocked)
Wait for MZ3CCW
SZ5 Open Dust removal driving SZ5: Open?
(HP detection) MZ3: OFF Dust removal driving
Open
(Blocked) MZ3: OFF
Dust removal driving Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec]

10393 Dust removal operation failure 4
MZ3: OFF
Wait for MZ3CCW SZ5 10391 Dust removal mechanism lock 1
(preparation for HP Open (Not blocked)
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] Timeout [TZ53: within 1.8 sec]
detection)
SZ5: Close?

(Blocked) MZ3: OFF
END Delay [TZ58: 0.2sec]

FR6H1163.EPS
MZ3: OFF 5.2.14 , Fig. 1 Sensor confirmation 1 (SZ5)

10392 Dust removal mechanism lock 2
Within 1 time [NZ13]

Retry?
2 times or more
A
10394 Dust removal CCW driving error
FR6H1162.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 64 MD - 65
<I/O Locations> BLANK PAGE
FRONT
Dust removal motor

MZ3
Dust removal sensor
SZ5
Subscanning unit
Z unit IP stopper solenoid IP stopper HP sensor
SolZ1 SZ4
FR6H1220.EPS
<I/O Table>
SolZ1 Stopper driving SOL Power-down solenoid Protrudes the stopper when turned ON.
TR6H1072.EPS
<Sensor ON/OFF Status>

SZ4/SZ5

FR6H1248.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 66 MD - 67
5.1.3 Side-Positioning Grip Home Positioning <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Side-Positioning Grip Home Positioning Flow>
START SC2 home position
C unit
(SC2): ON
MC2 [PC60: CW1P]: Drive Grip release HP sensor

Side-positioning grip
HP confirmation SC2
1
SC2
Delay [TC61: 0.1sec]
Open
SC2: Close?
Close MC2 [PC63: CCW3400P]: Drive M

FRONT
Open FRONT
Timeout [TC63: within 8.8 sec]
SC2: Close? Grip release motor
HP detection Grip release motor MC2 FR6H1243.EPS
preparation Close MC2: OFF
positioning Grip release motor
MC2: OFF
<I/O Table>
Sensor confirmation
5.2.14, Fig. 1 (SC2) Symbol Name Type Function
SC2 Grip release HP sensor Pl (5mm) Detects that it is in the grip release home position.
Side-positioning grip MC2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Drives to release the grip.
MC2 [PC61: CW400P]: Drive 14335 HP detection preparation TR6H1091.EPS
positioning retry
Close
SC2: Close? SA1/SA3/SA4
HP detection Grip release motor
preparation return Open MC2: OFF
Grip release motor Side-positioning
MC2: OFF 14336 grip HP detection
preparation return
Delay [TC61: 0.1sec] retry
MC2 [PC62: CCW1P]: Drive

Open
Timeout [TC64: within 2.5 sec] SA2
SC2: Close?
2
Close
Within 3 times [NC61]
Delay [TC61: 0.1sec] Retry?
HP detection 4 times or more

MC2 [PC64: CCW19P]: Drive OFF: Open (without cassette) ON: Close (with cassette)
FR6H1268.EPS
Delay [TC61: 0.1sec] Side-positioning
10338 1
grip HP operation
error
Open
SC2: Close?
Close Sensor confirmation 2

5.2.14, Fig. 2
(SC2)
END Side-positioning grip

14337
HP detection retry
2
FR6H1216.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 68 MD - 69
5.1.4 Subscanning Grip Confirmation A
<Fig. 1 Subscanning Grip Confirmation Flow>

START
SZ2: Close? NO
SZ3: Open?
SZ2: Open? NO
SZ3: Close?
SZ2: Close
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Open
NO
SZ3: Close SZ2: Open?
(When both SZ3: Open? B SZ2: Close? NO
grips complete SZ3: Close?
normally) SZ2: Open
SZ3: Open
A SZ2: Close
2 SZ3: Close
1
Set speed data
MZ2: ON
DA value: 204
3 D
DA value: 204
Subscanning driven-shaft grip

Soft monitoring MZ2: ON
Timeout [TZ24: 5 sec] (Soft)
MZ2 stop? Soft monitoring
Stop Timeout [TZ34: within 15 sec] (Soft)

MZ2: OFF MZ2 stop?
MZ2: OFF (Hard)
Stop
Delay: 50ms MZ2: OFF Driven-shaft grip stop

(Hard) MZ2: OFF
SZ2: Open
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Open? (Not changed)
SZ3: Open? Delay: 50ms
SZ2: Close
NO 2 times or more
Retry? SZ3: Open
Register reset SZ2: Close? (Not changed)
Within 1 time
SZ3: Open?
[NZ13]
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] Initialization grip Initialization grip
14355 10355
movement 2 error movement 2 error
NO 2 times or more
Retry?
SZ2: Close
Register reset Register reset
SZ3: Open
(Both grips in released state) Within 1 time
Status of SZ2
D [NZ13]
and SZ3? Delay Delay Register reset
[TZ25: 0.1sec] [TZ25: 0.1sec]
SZ2: Open Initialization grip Initialization grip
SZ3: Close 14354 10354
(Both grips in
ejected state)
B
1 Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Register reset Register reset
NG
END
FR6H1151.EPS
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec]
2 NG
C
FR6H1152.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 70 MD - 71
C <I/O Locations>
4 Driven-side grip release HP sensor
SZ3
FRONT
Driving-side grip release HP sensor
Subscanning driving grip SZ2
MZ2: ON
DA value: 204
Grip driving motor
MZ2
Soft monitoring
Timeout [TZ21: within 10 sec] (Soft) M
MZ2 stop?
Stop Driving-shaft slow grip stop

MZ2: OFF
MZ2: OFF (Hard)
Driving-
shaft grip
Delay: 50ms
SZ2: Close
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Close? (Not changed) Subscanning unit
SZ3: Open? Z unit
FR6H1221.EPS
NO 2 times or more
Retry?
<I/O Table>
Within 1 time
[NZ13]
Register reset Symbol Name Type Function
14346 Driving-shaft grip error 10346 Driving-shaft grip error SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode.
MZ2 Grip driving DC motor Speed correction capability (equivalent to DPR).
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] TR6H1074.EPS
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] <Sensor ON/OFF Status>

SZ2/SZ3
D 4 NG
FR6H1153.EPS

FR6H1249.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 72 MD - 73
5.1.5 Side-Positioning Home Positioning <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Side-Positioning Home Positioning Flow>
START
Side-positioning HP sensor SC2 home position C unit
(SC1): ON
SC1 MC1
Side-positioning MC1 [PC50: CW1P]: Drive
HP confirmation
1
SC1
M
M Side-positioning motor
Open F MC1
SC1: Close? R
O
N
T FRONT
MC1 [PC53: CW4800 P]: Drive
Close FR6H1244.EPS
Open
SC1: Close? <I/O Table>
HP detection Side-positioning motor
Close MC1: OFF
preparation Symbol Name Type Function
positioning Side-positioning motor
MC1: OFF Sensor confirmation SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor Pl (5mm) Detects that it is in the side-positioning home position.
5.2.14, Fig. 1 (SC1) MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism.
Delay [TC51: 0.1sec] TR6H1092.EPS
Side-positioning HP detection <Sensor ON/OFF Status>

MC1 [PC51: CCW533P]: Drive 14331
preparation positioning retry
Close SC1
SC1: Close?
HP preparation Side-positioning motor
return Open MC1: OFF
Side-positioning motor
MC1: OFF Side-positioning HP
14332
detection preparation
return retry

MC1 [PC52: CW1P]: Drive FR6H1270.EPS
Open
Timeout [TC54: within 2.5 sec] 2
SC1: Close?
Close 3 times or less [NC51]

Retry?
Delay [TC51: 0.1sec] 4 times or more
HP detection MC1 [PC54: CW7P]: Drive Side-positioning

10334 1
HP operation error
Open
SC1: Close?
Close
Sensor confirmation 2
5.2.14, Fig. 2
(SC1)
END
Side-positioning HP
14333
detection retry
2 FR6H1217.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 74 MD - 75
5.1.6 IP Search A
SB1 and SC3 and SC4: Close
<Fig. 1 IP Search Flow> (IP found by all sensors)
SB1 or SC3 or SC4: Close
START SB1: Open? (IP found by either sensor)
SC3: Open?
SB1: Close SC4: Open?
(IP found by both sensors)
SB1: Open? SC4: Close
SC4: Open? SB1: Open
IP sensor logical
10300 SC3: Open
inconsistency SB1
SB1 and SC4: Open (No IP) B
SB1 or SC4: Open SC4: Open
IP sensor logical (No IP)
(IP found by either sensor) 10300
inconsistency SC4
SB1: Close Scanner unit search
SC3: Close MC3 [PC38: CW5000P]: Drive
SB1: Open? SC4: Close (IP found by all sensors)
MZ1 [V0: CCW212.8mm/s]: Drive
SC3: Open?
SC4: Open? IP sensor logical
10300
inconsistency SB1
SB1 and SC3 and SC4: Open (No IP) SC3: Open
(No IP)
SB1 or SC3 or SC4: Open IP sensor logical SC4: Open
10300
(IP found by either sensor) inconsistency SC3 Timeout [TC82: within 7.4 sec]
SC3: Close?
or
10300
IP sensor logical SC4: Close?
inconsistency SC4
SB1 and SC3 and SC4: Close
SC3: Close
(IP found by all sensors)
SB1 or SC3 or SC4: Close Scanner unit SC4: Close
SB1: Open? (IP found by either sensor) IP search (IP found by
SC3: Open? either sensor) Scanner unit search stop Scanner unit search stop
SC4: Open? MC3: OFF MC3: OFF
MZ1: OFF MZ1: OFF
SB1: Open
SC3: Open
SC4: Open IP found within
(No IP) No IP within machine
machine
Erasure conveyor/ B
side-positioning conveyor search
MB1 [PB27: CW2077P]: Drive
SB1: Open SB1 and SC3 and SC4: Close

(No IP)
SB1: Close SC4: Open
SB1: Close? Timeout [TC81: within 4.6 sec] (IP found by all sensors)
(IP found)
or SB1 or SC3 or SC4: Close
SC4: Close?
SB1: Close? (IP found by either sensor)
SC4: Close SC3: Close?
(IP found) Erasure conveyor/ Erasure conveyor/
IP search CMOS info SC4: Close?
at erasure conveyor/ side-positioning conveyor side-positioning conveyor
"No IP" is rewritten to search stop search stop
side-positioning "IP found within machine"
conveyor MB1: OFF MB1: OFF SB1: Open
Erasure conveyor/
side-positioning conveyor IP found within machine
SC3: Open
No IP within machine
search stop SC4: Open
MB1: OFF (No IP)
IP found within machine B
A
FR6H1175.EPS
END
FR6H1177.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 76 MD - 77
B <I/O Locations>
Close
M
(IP found)
SC3: Open? Transport motor
MB1
Open
(No IP) IP sensor
SB1
IP found within machine
Erasure conveyor/ Erasure conveyor
FRONT
side-positioning conveyor movement B unit
IP search MB1 [PB28: CW4861P]: Drive
at erasure conveyor/ MC3 [PC39: CW4048P]: Drive
side-positioning
conveyor Open (No IP) IP sensor
Timeout [TC71: within 6.6 sec] SC4
SC3: Close?
Close
(IP found)
Erasure conveyor/ Side-positioning conveyor
Erasure conveyor/
side-positioning conveyor
side-positioning conveyor movement stop C unit
movement stop
MB1: OFF
MB1: OFF
MC3: OFF Subscanning motor
MC3: OFF M
Initialization erasure conveyor/ MZ1
12305 side-positioning conveyor
IP movement failure
Transport motor
IP found within machine MC3
Scanner unit movement Subscanning unit M

MZ1 [V1: CW13.3mm/s]: Drive Z unit
MC3 [PC40: CW11294P]: Drive
IP sensor
Close (IP found) SC3 FR6H1222.EPS

SC3: Open? <I/O Table>
Scanner unit Open
IP movement (No IP) Symbol Name Type Function
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the presence of an IP.
Scanner unit movement stop Scanner unit movement stop
MZ1: OFF MZ1: OFF
MC3: OFF MC3: OFF SC4 Erasure positioning IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
MB1: OFF MB1: OFF MB1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
MC3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
Initialization scanner unit MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
12304 IP movement failure TR6H1081.EPS

C
FR6H1176.EPS SB1/SC3/SC4

FR6H1250.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 78 MD - 79
5.1.7 Suction Cup Home Positioning <I/O Locations>

Suction cup driving motor Suction cup HP sensor
<Fig. 1 Suction Cup Home Positioning Flow> MA1
Cassette set unit
SA4
A unit
START

M
Motor operator (initial driving)
MA1 [PA50: CW1P]: Drive
2
Delay [TA81: 0.1sec]
Open (HP position NG)

SA4: Close? FRONT
Close FR6H1245.EPS
(HP position OK) Motor operation (return driving)

MA1 [PA53: CW2163P]: Drive <I/O Table>
Timeout [TA83: within 6.3 sec] Symbol Name Type
HP detection SA4: Close? Function
preparation Close
Motor operation
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor Pl (5mm) Detects that the suction cup is in its home position.
positioning (HP position
OK) (positioning driving) stop MA1 Suction cup driving motor Pulse motor Opens the rear cover of the cassette and moves the roller.
MA1: OFF
Sensor confirmation 2 TR6H1093.EPS
Motor operation
5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SA4)
(positioning driving) stop
MA1: OFF
Delay [TA81: 0.1sec] 14315
Suction cup HP detection <Sensor ON/OFF Status>
SA1
Motor operation (return driving) 1
MA1 [PA51: CCW322P]: Drive
Close (HP position OK)

Timeout [TA82: within 2.7 sec]
SA4: Open?
HP confirmation
Open Motor operation (return driving) stop
(HP position NG) MA1: OFF
Suction cup HP detection

Motor operation (return driving) stop 14316
MA1: OFF
preparation return retry OFF: Open (not blocked) ON: Close (blocked)
FR6H1271.EPS
1
Motor operation (1-pulse driving)
Open
(HP position NG) Open (HP position NG)
Timeout [TA84: 5.5 sec]
SA4: Close?
Close
(HP position OK)
HP detection Delay [TA81: 0.1sec]

5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4)
Motor operation (HP movement)
14317 Suction cup HP detection retry
1
SA4: Close?
Close
(HP position OK) Within 3 times [NA51]
Retry?
4 times or more
Suction cup HP
END 10318 2
operation error FR6H1214.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 80 MD - 81
5.1.8 IP Position Information Confirmation A
<Fig. 1 IP Position Information Confirmation Flow>

START
Open
Open SC3: Close?
SB1 or SC3 or SC4: Close SB1: Close?
SB1: Open? (IP found by either sensor)
SC3: Open? Broken wire
SC4: Open? Close No sensor error
sensor Close No sensor error
SB1: Open CMOS indicates no IP,
Is CMOS while search result indicates
SC3: Open
info consistent IP found. Broken wire
SC4: Open Broken wire Open 10302
with IP position info of 10302 sensor
(No IP)
sensor SC4: Close?
Sensor confirmation 1 search result
5.2.14, Fig. 1 ?
(SB1)
CMOS is consistent Close
with search result. No sensor error
IP position information
detection 5.2.14, Fig. 1
(SC3)
Initialization IP 10302 Broken wire
10304 sensor
conveyance error 1 FR6H1183.EPS
5.2.14, Fig. 1
(SC4)
Cleared
CMOS cleared?
Not cleared Initialization IP

10305
conveyance error 2
CMOS is consistent Is CMOS CMOS indicates no IP, while search

with search result. info consistent result indicates IP found.
with IP position info of
search result
CMOS indicates ?
IP found, while
search result
indicates no IP.
Not cleared
11303 Initialization IP conveyance error CMOS cleared?
IP position information Cleared

12302 IP position
confirmation System down
User selection info logical error
Process
continued
Clear CMOS 10303 Initialization IP found as

IP search error search result
END
FR6H1182.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 82 MD - 83
IP sensor
SB1
FRONT Erasure conveyor

B unit
IP sensor
SC4
C unit
Subscanning unit IP sensor

Z unit SC3 FR6H1223.EPS
<I/O Table>
TR6H1077.EPS

SB1/SC3/SC4

FR6H1251.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 84 MD - 85
5.1.9 Remaining IP Processing A
<Fig. 1 Remaining IP Processing Flow>

5.1.11, Fig. 1 IP stopper protrusion 2
START
Side-positioning
Any MB1 [PB23: CW4535P]: Drive
No IP
remaining IP
?
Open (No IP)
IP found Timeout [TC31: within 2.8 sec]
Side-
SC3: Close?
Length measurement conveyance positioning
MZ1 [V0: CCW212.8mm/s]: Drive Close
C
MC3 [PC41: CCW2824P]: Drive (IP found)
MB1 [PB30: CCW3391P]: Drive Side-positioning stop Side-positioning stop
MC1: OFF MC1: OFF
Open (No IP) MB1: OFF MB1: OFF
SC3: Close?
Side-positioning Initialization side-positioning
Close 5.2.4, Fig. 1 10306
(secondary erasure) IP positioning failure
(IP found)
Cassette IN
SC3 elapsed time count start sensor
confirmation
Open (Without cassette)
SA2: Close?
Close (IP found)
Timeout [TC74: within 5.1 sec] Close
SC3: Open? (With cassette)
Open 5.2.1, Fig. 2 Cassette hold release
(No IP)
Length measurement conveyance stop
MZ1: OFF Message display
SC3 elapsed time count end MC3: OFF
MB1: OFF
11380 Maximum empty cassette setting
Delay [TC75: 0.5sec] Initialization length measurement
10307 conveyance failure
Length measurement
conveyance stop Close
MZ1: OFF SA2: Close?
MC3: OFF
MB1: OFF
Open
Measurement NO Message Cancel
time > 1.35 sec
[TB15] Not activated
Remove key:
YES
Measurement Activation
NO
IP = 14x17
time > 1.14 sec
[TB14] Activated
YES
IP Metric
IP = 14x14 IP type
determination
Inch NG
5.2.1, Fig. 1 Cassette IN detection
Measurement NO
time > 0.89 sec
Measurement NO [TB13]
time > 0.89 sec
[TB13] YES Suction cup movement (HP → load standby)
YES IP = 18-24
IP = 24-30
IP = 8x12 IP = 8x10
5.2.15, Fig. 1 Error handling (recovery IP load)
C Delay: 50ms
A
FR6H1197.EPS
END
FR6H1198.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 86 MD - 87
<I/O Locations> <I/O Table>

Suction cup driving motor Cassette set unit Cassette IN sensor Suction cup HP sensor Symbol Name Type Function
MA1 A unit SA2 SA4 SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
Cassette ejection clutch SA2 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been inserted.
CLA1
Cassette ejection sensor M SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup is in its home position.
SA1 SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
MA1 Suction cup driving motor Pulse motor Opens the rear cover of the cassette and moves the roller.
M
MB1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
Cassette hold solenoid Transport motor
SolA1 MB1 MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism.
Hold sensor SolA1 Cassette hold SOL Power-down solenoid Retreats the cassette hold pin when turned ON.
SA3 CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch
TR6H1087.EPS

B unit <Sensor ON/OFF Status>
SA1/SA3/SA4
C unit
SC2
SA2
MC1

SC3
Z unit SC3 FR6H1224.EPS

FR6H1252.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 88 MD - 89
5.1.10 Subscanning Grip Home Positioning A
<Fig. 1 Subscanning Grip Home Positioning Flow> 2
START MZ2: ON
DA value: 204
SZ2: Open? NO
Soft monitoring
NO
SZ3: Close?
Timeout [TZ24: within 5 sec] (Soft)
MZ2 stop?
SZ2: Open
SZ3: Close NO
SZ2: Open? Stop
(Status of both SZ3: Open?
grips when
normally SZ2: Open MZ2: OFF (Hard) MZ2: OFF
completed) SZ3: Open
SZ2: Close? NO
A SZ3: Open?
NO Delay: 50ms
1 SZ2: Close
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Close?
SZ2: Open
MZ2: ON G SZ3: Close?
SZ3: Open
DA value: 204
SZ2: Close SZ2: Open? (Not changed)
SZ3: Close
SZ3: Open?
I
Soft monitoring
Timeout [TZ31: within 10 sec] (Soft) NO 2 times or more
MZ2 stop? Retry?
Driven-shaft grip Stop Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec]

status confirmation Within 1 time
MZ2: OFF (Hard) [NZ13]
MZ2: OFF
Register reset
Initialization grip Initialization grip
14355 10355
Delay: 50ms SZ2: Close movement 2 error movement 2 error
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Open
(Both grips in released state) Register reset Register reset
SZ3: Close Status of
SZ2: Open? (Not changed) SZ2 and SZ3?
SZ3: Close?
SZ2: Open Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec]
SZ3: Close
NO (Both grips in
ejected state)
Register reset 2 NG
2 times or more
Retry?
B G
Within 1 time [NZ13] FR6H1144.EPS

Initialization grip Initialization grip
14354 10354

A NG
1 FR6H1143.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 90 MD - 91
G <I/O Locations>
FRONT
I 5.1.10, Fig. 4 Subscanning driven-shaft grip
Driven-side grip release HP sensor
SZ3
5.1.10, Fig. 8 Subscanning driving-shaft grip
SZ2
5.1.10, Fig. 6 Subscanning driven-shaft grip release
Grip driving motor
B MZ2
5.1.10, Fig. 7 Subscanning ejection grip
M
5.1.10, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running
5.1.10, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release
5.1.10, Fig. 4 Subscanning driven-shaft grip
Subscanning unit
5.1.10, Fig. 5 Subscanning driving-shaft correction grip Z unit FR6H1225.EPS

<I/O Table>
5.1.10, Fig. 7 Subscanning ejection grip Symbol Name Type Function
5.1.10, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driven side is in grip released mode.
5.1.10, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release TR6H1074.EPS

Logged
12352 or 12355 SC3/SB1
logged?
Not logged
END
FR6H1320.EPS

FR6H1255.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 92 MD - 93
<Fig. 2 Subscanning No-Load Running Flow> <Fig. 3 Subscanning Both-Grip Release Flow>
START
START
3
4
Set speed data
Set speed data
DA value: 204
DA value: 204
Subscanning no-load running
MZ2: ON
MZ2: ON
Soft monitoring
Soft monitoring
MZ2 stop? Timeout [TZ24: within 5 sec] (Soft)
MZ2 stop?
Stop
Stop
No-load running stop
MZ2: OFF (Hard) Both-grip release stop
MZ2: OFF MZ2: OFF (Hard)
MZ2: OFF
Delay : 50ms
Delay: 50ms
SZ2: Open
SZ3: Close SZ2: Open
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Open? (Stop by noise)
SZ2: Open? (Not changed)
SZ3: Close?
SZ3: Open?
NO
2 times or more NO 2 times or more
Retry?
Retry?
Register reset Within 1 time Register reset
Within 1 time
[NZ13]
[NZ13]
No-load running No-load running
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] 14357 10357 Both-grip release Both-grip release
failure failure 14348 10348
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] error error


END 3 NG 4
FR6H1321.EPS END NG
FR6H1322.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 94 MD - 95
<Fig. 4 Subscanning Driven-Shaft Grip Flow> <Fig. 5 Subscanning Driving-Shaft Correction Grip Flow>
START START
5
Set speed data
Set speed data
DA value: 204
Subscanning driven-shaft grip Subscanning driving-shaft slow grip

MZ2: ON MZ2: ON
TZ21: Start
Soft monitoring Timer: Start
MZ2 stop?
Stop Soft monitoring

Driven-shaft grip stop MZ2 stop? Driving-shaft slow grip
MZ2: OFF (Hard) MZ2: OFF stop
Stop MZ2: OFF
Delay: 50ms
Driving-shaft correction
MZ2: OFF (Hard) 10353
SZ2: Close grip error
SZ3: Open Register reset
SZ2: Close? (Not changed) Timer stop
SZ3: Open? Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec]
NG
(±3% deviation)
NO 4.39 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.67
2 times or more
Retry? Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec]
Within 1 time OK
Register reset
[NZ13] Close (noise stop)
SZ2: Close?
Driving-shaft grip error
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] 12352
stop Open
Driven-shaft grip 10347 Driven-shaft grip
14347
failure failure
rpm correction processing
Register reset Register reset Subscanning grip speed

13355
data update
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Speed data update
Yes (±6% deviation)

END 5 NG 4.26 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.80
FR6H1323.EPS
Driving-shaft grip
12355
disorder (large deviation)
No (±6% deviation)
Register reset
END
FR6H1324.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 96 MD - 97
<Fig. 6 Subscanning Driven-Shaft Grip Release Flow> <Fig. 7 Subscanning Ejection Grip Flow>
START START
7 7
Subscanning driven-shaft grip release Subscanning ejection grip

MZ2: ON MZ2: ON
DA value: 204 DA value: 204
Soft monitoring Soft monitoring

Timeout [TZ31: within 10 sec] (Soft) Timeout [TZ31: within 10 sec] (Soft)
MZ2 stop? MZ2 stop?
Stop Stop
Subscanning ejection
Driven-shaft grip stop MZ2: OFF (Hard) grip stop
MZ2: OFF (Hard) MZ2: OFF MZ2: OFF
Delay: 50ms Delay: 50ms
SZ2: Open SZ2: Open

SZ3: Close SZ3: Open
(Not changed) (Not changed)
SZ2: Open? SZ2: Open?
SZ3: Close? SZ3: Open?
NO 2 times or more
NO 2 times or more Retry?
Retry?
Register reset
Register reset Within 1 time
Within 1 time
[NZ13]
[NZ13]
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Driven-shaft grip Driven-shaft grip 14356 Ejection grip error 10356 Ejection grip failure
14349 10349
release error release error


END 7
END 7 FR6H1326.EPS
FR6H1325.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 98 MD - 99
<Fig. 8 Subscanning Driving-Shaft Grip Flow> BLANK PAGE
START
5
Set speed data
DA value: 204
Subscanning driving-shaft grip

MZ2: ON
Soft monitoring
MZ2 stop?
Stop
Driving-shaft grip stop

MZ2: OFF (Hard) MZ2: OFF
Delay: 50ms
SZ2: Close
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Close? (Not changed)
SZ3: Open?
NO 2 times or more
Retry?

[NZ13]

Driving-shaft grip 10346 Driving-shaft grip
14346
error error
END 5 NG
FR6H1327.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 100 MD - 101
5.1.11 IP Stopper Protrusion 2 <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 IP Stopper Protrusion 2 Flow> FRONT
START
Solenoid (SolZ1): ON (protrusion)
Close (Protrusion NG)

SZ4: Open?
Open
(Protrusion OK) Within 5 times [NZ11]
Retry?
6 times or more
Subscanning unit
Sensor confirmation 2 IP stopper
5.2.14, Fig. 2 14340 SZ4
(SZ4) protrusion retry SolZ1 FR6H1246.EPS
IP stopper protrusion Solenoid

10340
failure (SolZ1): OFF (retreat) <I/O Table>
END 1 SolZ1 Stopper driving SOL Power-down solenoid Protrudes the stopper when turned ON.
FR6H1198A.EPS
TR6H1072.EPS

SZ4

FR6H1272.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 102 MD - 103
5.1.12 Stopper Retreat 2 <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Stopper Retreat 2 Flow> FRONT
START
Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF (Retreat)
Stopper Open (Protrude)

retreat Timeout [TZ42: within 2 sec]
SZ4: Close?
Close
(Retreat) Within 5 times [NZ12]
Retry?
IP stopper
6 times or more 14341 retreat retry
END
IP stopper
10341 Delay [TZ44: 2sec]
retreat failure Subscanning unit
SolZ1 SZ4 FR6H1274.EPS
1 FR6H1215.EPS
<I/O Table>
SZ4 Stopper HP sensor Pl (5mm) Detects that the IP stopper is in its home position.
TR6H1094.EPS
SZ4

FR6H1272.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 104 MD - 105
5.1.13 Checking IP within Cassette <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Checking IP within Cassette Flow> Suction cup Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor
driving motor A unit SA4
Leak valve
MA1
START SVA1
Suction pump
M PA1
5.1.13, Fig. 2 Checking IP within cassette (2)
Suction sensor
SA5
5.2.9, Fig. 1 IP load M
Transport motor
MB1
Delay: 50ms
IP sensor
SB1
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1
(Without cassette ejection)
B unit
END
FR6H1341.EPS
C unit
Subscanning unit
Z unit
IP stopper solenoid
SolZ1 FR6H1346.EPS
<I/O Table>
PA1 IP suction DC pump Sucks when turned ON.
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup is in its home position.
SA5 Suction sensor Suction sensor Detects that it is sucked.
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
SVA1 IP leak Solenoid valve Leaks when turned ON.
TR6H1096.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 106 MD - 107
<Fig. 2 Checking IP within Cassette 2>
START A
Open (HP position NG) Suction cup movement

SA4: Close? Conveyance driving (Feed suction → feed leak)
MB1 [PB11: CW2888P]: Drive MA1 [PA12: CW2031P]: Drive
Close
(HP position OK) 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4)
(Synchronize)
Suction HP 12318 Suction cup HP return failure Open (Suction NG)

Suction SA5: Close?
confirmation sensor
confirmation Close
IP leak
Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] (Suction
Suction pump (PA1): OFF
OK)
Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open)
IP leak
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open) Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]
Suction cup movement

Close (Leak NG) (Load suction → HP)
Timeout [TA49: within 5 sec] MA1 [PA28: CW164P]: Drive
Wait for SA5: Open?
feed leak
Open
D (Leak 12325 Feed leak error Within 1 time [NA21]
OK) Retry?
Conveyance (Discharge)
2 times MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
or more
Open Leak valve (SVA1): Suction cup

5.1.7, Fig. 1 home positioning
Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close) (HP position NG) OFF (Close)
SA4: Close?
Suction cup movement (HP → feed suction) Sensor MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
14320 Feed IP drop retry
IP suction MA1 [PA11: CCW2195P]: Drive Close
confirmation 2
(HP 5.2.14, Fig. 2
position (SA4) Suction cup
Suction pump (PA1): ON OK) Suction cup HP D
12318 return error
11320 Feed IP drop
Suction HP Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]
Open (IP suction NG) confirmation
Timeout [TA41: within 1 sec] Message display
Suction cup
SA5: Close? 5.1.7, Fig. 1
home positioning
Close IP leak Suction cup movement
(IP suction OK) Suction pump (PA1): OFF (HP → feed leak) Cassette ejection
5.2.16, Fig. 1
MA1 (after home positioning)
Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open) [PA14: CCW164P]: Drive
Suction sensor Delay [TA42: 0.1sec]
confirmation Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1 B
(Without cassette ejection) FR6H1343.EPS
A
Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close)
No IP
FR6H1342.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 108 MD - 109
B C
Conveyance (Grip)
Conveyance driving Suction cup movement MB1 [PB16: 2559P] :Drive
MB1 [PB12: CW221P]: Drive (Feed leak → load standby)
Delay: 50ms
Leak valve (SVA1):
OFF (Close) Feed conveyance UP direction
MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]:Drive
(Synchronize)
Close (IP found)

Timeout [TB11: within 20 sec]
SB1: Open?
Feed conveyance UP direction stop
Close (IP found) Open
SB1: Close? MB1: OFF (Soft)
(No IP)
Conveyance driving
Open MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]: Drive Delay: 50ms
(No IP) Feed conveyance UP direction stop
Close (IP found) MB1: OFF (Soft)
Timeout [TB19: within 3000 sec] Conveyance (Discharge)
SB1: Open? MB1 [PB14: CCW2259P]: Drive
Open Suction cup movement (Load standby → HP)
(No IP) MA1 [PA19: CCW28P]: Drive
Conveyance driving stop
MB1: OFF Load IP drop
11371
Delay: 50ms
Cassette inlet
IP confirmation Message display
Conveyance driving
MB1 [PB13: CW2559P]
Cassette ejection
Open (No IP) END 5.2.16, Fig 1
Timeout [TA44: within 1 sec] (after home positioning)
SB1: Close? FR6H1345.EPS
Close Conveyance driving stop

(IP found) MB1: OFF
Conveyance driving stop Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]

MB1: OFF
Within 3 times [NA21]

CMOS: IP found within machine
Retry?
4 times or more
Conveyance (Discharge) Conveyance (Discharge)
MB1 MB1
[PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
Suction cup
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup 5.1.7, Fig. 1 home positioning
home positioning
11321 Feed IP grip failure

Feed IP grip
14321 failure retry
Sensor
Delay: 50ms 5.2.14, Fig. 2 confirmation 2
(SB1)
Message display
D
Cassette ejection
C 5.2.16, Fig. 1 (after home positioning) FR6H1344.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 110 MD - 111
5.2 Routine Operation Flow <Fig. 2 For Continuous Conveyance under M-Utility “TEST MODE”>
<Fig. 1 Overall Summary Flow>
START
START
B

CMOS: IP found before erasure
CMOS: IP found before erasure CMOS: IP found before reading
CMOS: IP found before reading

5.2.2, Fig. 1 IP feed
Retry
5.2.2, Fig. 1 IP feed 5.2.3, Fig. 1 Feed conveyance
Retry Retry
5.2.3, Fig. 1 Feed conveyance 5.2.4, Fig. 1 Side-positioning operation
Retry Retry
5.2.4, Fig. 1 Side-positioning operation 5.2.5, Fig. 1 Reading
Retry Progress 2-LED display

5.2.5, Fig. 1 Reading LED1: OFF
LED2: ON
Progress 2-LED display
LED1: OFF 5.2.6, Fig. 1 After-reading conveyance
LED2: ON
5.2.7, Fig. 1 Erasure conveyance
5.2.6, Fig. 1 After-reading conveyance
CMOS: No IP before erasure

Erasure lamp unlit
LampB1-3: OFF
5.2.8, Fig. 1 Load conveyance
Erasure lamp unlit
LampB1-3: OFF
5.2.9, Fig. 1 IP load
5.2.10, Fig. 1 User notification item judgment

Notified
5.2.10, Fig. 1 User notification item judgment Not notified

IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1
Notified
User notification item
5.2.12, Fig. 1
Not notified confirmation
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1
(Without cassette ejection) Continuous operation Continuous Continuous Continuous operation
User notification item operation? operation?
5.2.12, Fig. 1
confirmation
B
End End
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1
(Without cassette
ejection)
Cassette ejection Cassette ejection
5.2.16, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection 5.2.16, Fig. 1 (after home positioning) 5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection 5.2.16, Fig. 1
B (after home positioning)
END END
FR6H1140.EPS FR6H1328.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 112 MD - 113
5.2.1 Cassette IN Detection B
<Fig. 1 Cassette IN Detection Flow>

START 5 times or less [NA12]
1 Retry?
Cassette insertable LED display
LEDIN: ON
LED1: OFF
6 times or more
11310 Cassette setting error 1 14310 Cassette hold failure retry

Cassette
SA2: Close?
insertion
Close
(With cassette)
D
E
Delay [TA15: 2sec]
Solenoid (SolA1): OFF (Hold)
E
Close timeout FR6H1112.EPS
[TA14: within 0.5 sec]
SA3: Open?
Open
(Cassette
hold)

SA2: Close?
Cassette
Close
hold SA2: Close SA2: Close? Timeout [TA17: 1 sec]
(With cassette)
SA1: Open?
Open (Not blocked)

SA1: Close? SA1: Open?
Close Cassette detection

13314 logic failure
(Blocked)
12313 Cassette not detected 11311 Cassette setting error 2

Close (Cassette
hold NG)
SA3: Open?
5.2.1, Fig. 2 Cassette hold release 5.2.1, Fig. 2 Cassette hold release
Open
(Cassette
hold) Message display
C B
Open
SA1 : Open?
Cassette inserted status LED display
LEDIN: OFF
Close
LED1: ON
Message cancel
END
Open
SA2: Open?
Close Message cancel
Removal key: Not activated

Activation
Activated
Processing complete LED display
LEDOUT: ON
Close
SA1: Open?
Open
Call LED not-displayed
LEDCALL: OFF
1 FR6H1110.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 114 MD - 115
<I/O Locations> <Fig. 2 Cassette Hold Release Flow>

Suction cup driving motor Cassette set unit Cassette IN sensor
SA2 Suction cup HP sensor START
MA1 A unit F
SA4
Cassette ejection clutch
CLA1
Solenoid (SolA1): ON (Hold release)
Cassette ejection sensor M
SA1 Cassette
hold release Open (Not blocked)
SA3: Close?
Cassette hold solenoid Close
SolA1 (Blocked)
Hold sensor FRONT 5 times or less [NA11]

END
SA3 FR6H1227.EPS Retry?
6 times or more
<I/O Table>
Symbol Name Type Function Sensor confirmation 2
Cassette hold 5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SA3)
11312
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been ejected. release failure
SA2 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been inserted.
Message display Cassette hold
14312
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the suction cup is in its home position. release failure retry
SolA1 Cassette hold SOL Power-down solenoid Retreats the cassette hold pin when turned ON.
User
MA1 Suction cup driving motor Pulse motor Opens the rear cover of the cassette and moves the roller. selection
LEDIN Cassette insertable LED Indicates that the cassette can be inserted.
Hold release
LED1 Progress 1 LED Indicates that the progress is "1"
CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch Power connection for actuating cassette ejection operation. Solenoid (SolA1): OFF (Hold)
TR6H1005.EPS
Delay [TA12: 2sec]

SA1/SA3/SA4
F
FR6H1113.EPS
SA2

FR6H1268.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 116 MD - 117
5.2.2 IP Feed A
<Fig. 1 IP Feed Flow>

Conveyance driving
(Feed suction → feed leak)
START
(Synchronize)
SA4: Close? Open (Suction NG)
Suction SA5: Close?
sensor
Close IP leak
Close confirmation
(Suction
(HP position 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4) Suction pump (PA1): OFF
OK) Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open)
OK) IP leak
Suction cup 12318 Suction cup HP return failure Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open)
HP confirmation
Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] Close (Leak NG) (HP → feed leak)
Suction Timeout [TA49: within 5 sec] MA1 [PA28: CW164P]: Drive
SA5: Open?
sensor
confirmation Open
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning (Leak 12325 Feed leak error Within 1 time [NA21]
OK) Retry?
2 times or more MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
Open Leak valve (SVA1) : Suction cup

(HP position NG) OFF (Close)
D SA4: Close?
Close MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
(HP 5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SA4)
1 position 5.1.7, Fig. 1
Suction cup
Suction cup HP return home positioning
OK) 12318 D
Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close) failure
11320 Feed IP drop
Suction cup Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]
Suction cup movement (HP → feed suction) HP confirmation
IP suction MA1 [PA11: CCW2195P]: Drive Suction cup Message display
Suction pump (PA1): ON
Suction cup movement (Load standby → load suction)
(HP → feed leak) MA1 [PA11: CCW2195P]: Drive
Open (IP suction NG)
Timeout [TA41: within 1 sec] 5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection
SA5: Close?
Close IP leak
(IP suction Suction pump (PA1): OFF B
OK) Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open) FR6H1165.EPS
Delay [TA42: 0.1sec] Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning

A
Within 3 times [NA21]

Retry?
Suction sensor
Feed IP
confirmation 14319
4 times or more suction failure retry
11319 Feed IP suction failure

1
Message display

(Load standby → load suction)

FR6H1164.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 118 MD - 119
B C
Conveyance (grip)
Conveyance driving Suction cup movement
MB1 [PB12: CW221P]: Drive (Feed leak → load standby) MB1 [PB16: 2559P]: Drive
Leak valve Delay: 50ms

(SVA1): OFF (Close)
(Synchronize)
Feed conveyance UP direction
MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]: Drive
Stopper protrusion
Solenoid (SolZ1): ON (Protrusion)
Close (IP found)

Open (No IP)
SB1: Close? Timeout [TB11: within 20 sec]
Conveyance driving SB1: Open Feed conveyance UP
Close MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]: Drive ? direction stop
(IP found) Open
Close (IP found)
Timeout [TB19: within 3000 sec] (No IP) MB1: OFF (Soft)
SB1: Open? Feed conveyance UP Delay: 50ms
Open direction stop
(No IP)
Conveyance driving stop MB1: OFF (Soft) Conveyance (Discharge)
MB1: OFF MB1 [PB14: CCW2259P]: Drive
Delay: 50ms 5.2.9, Fig. 1 IP load Suction cup movement (Load standby → HP)
Cassette inlet MA1 [PA19: CW28P]: Drive
IP confirmation
Conveyance driving
MB1 [PB13: CW2559P] Delay: 50ms 11371 Load IP drop
Open (No IP)
Timeout [TA44: within 1 sec]
SB1: Close? IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1 Message display
Close Conveyance driving stop (Without cassette ejection)
(IP found) MB1: OFF
Conveyance driving stop Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] Message display (Load standby → load suction)
MB1: OFF
CMOS: IP found within machine Within 3 times [NA21]
Retry? Cassette ejection Cassette ejection
5.2.16, Fig. 1 5.2.16, Fig. 1
4 times or more
(after home positioning) (after home positioning)
FR6H1167.EPS
2 Conveyance (Discharge) Conveyance (Discharge)
MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
Suction cup Suction cup

5.1.7, Fig. 1 5.1.7, Fig. 1
home positioning home positioning
11321 IP grip failure

14321 IP grip failure retry
5.2.14, Fig. 2
(SB1)
Message display
D
Close (Stopper protrusion NG) (Load standby → load suction)
Timeout [TZ41: within 0.5 sec] MA1 [PA11: CCW2195P]: Drive
SZ4: Open?
IP stopper Open
protrusion (Stopper
confirmation protrusion
OK)
Within 1 time (NZ21)
Retry?
14340 IP stopper protrusion retry
2 times or more
END
Stopper retreat
5.2.14, Fig. 2
(SZ4)
Delay [TZ43: 2sec]
11340 IP stopper protrusion failure
Stopper protrusion
Solenoid (SolZ1): ON (Protrusion)
C 2
FR6H1166.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 120 MD - 121
<I/O Locations> <Sensor ON/OFF Status>

Suction cup driving motor Suction cup HP sensor SA4/SA5/SZ4
Cassette set unit
MA1 A unit SA4
Leak valve
SVA1
Suction pump
M PA1
Suction sensor
SA5 OFF: Open (not blocked) ON: Close (blocked)
M
Transport motor
MB1 SB1
IP sensor
SB1

B unit
FR6H1254.EPS
C unit
Subscanning unit
Z unit
IP stopper solenoid IP stopper HP sensor

<I/O Table>
PA1 IP suction DC pump Sucks when turned ON.
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) IP conveyance sensor
TR6H1088.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 122 MD - 123
<Fig. 2 Suction Cup Home Positioning Flow> E
START
Motor operation (Return driving)
Close (HP position OK)
Motor operation (Initial driving)
HP detection SA4: Open?
preparation
F return Open (HP Motor operation (return driving) stop
position NG) MA1: OFF

Motor operation (return driving) stop 14316
Delay [TA81: 0.1sec] preparation return retry
MA1: OFF

HP confirmation SA4: Close?
Close Motor operation (1-pulse driving) G
(HP position MA1 [PA52: CCW1P]: Drive
OK)
Motor operation (positioning driving)
MA1 [PA53: CW2163P]: Drive Open (HP position Open (HP position NG)
NG) Timeout [TA84: 5.5 sec]
SA4: Close?
Close
HP detection Timeout [TA83: within 6.3 sec] (HP position
preparation SA4: Close? OK)
positioning Close HP detection
(HP position Motor operation
OK) (positioning driving) stop 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4)
MA1: OFF Motor operation
Motor operation (HP movement)
(positioning driving) stop MA1 [PA54: CW28P]: Drive
MA1: OFF 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4) 14317 Suction cup HP detection retry
G
14315
SA4: Close?
G Close
(HP position Within 3 times [NA51]
Retry?
OK)
E
4 times or more
END
Suction cup HP
10318 F
operation error
FR6H1169.EPS
FR6H1168.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 124 MD - 125
5.2.3 Feed Conveyance A
<Fig. 1 Feed Conveyance Flow>

START
Available
High-speed conveyance driving No BCR?
NG
MB1 [PB17: CW5250P]: Drive Unavailable
MZ1 [V0: CCW212.8mm/s]: Drive BCR data (Not acquired)
acquired?
SB1 elapsed time count start
OK
(Acquired)
Available Other than V or VI type

No BCR? IP generation?
Unavailable
Delay [TB18: 0.4sec]
V or VI type IP with improper
12388
generation/type detected
BCR: ON
Open Open (No IP)

Close (IP found) (No IP) Timeout [TC31: within 2.8 sec]
Timeout [TB12: within 3.5 sec] SC3: Close?
SB1: Open?
Open Close
(No IP) B (IP found)
High-speed conveyance driving stop High-speed conveyance driving stop
SB1 elapsed time count end MC3: OFF MC3: OFF
MB1: OFF MB1: OFF
Measurement time NO Wait for MC3/MB1 stop Wait for MC3/MB1 stop
> 1.35 sec [TB15]
YES High-speed conveyance driving stop High-speed conveyance driving stop

Measurement time NO MZ1: OFF MZ1: OFF
IP = 14x17
> 1.14 sec [TB14]
D
YES
IP NO 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SC3)
Metric
determination IP = 14x14 IP type BCR data (Not acquired)
acquired?
Inch
YES C
Measurement time NO (Acquired)
> 0.89 [TB13] Within 3 times [NB11]
Measurement time NO Retry?
> 0.89 sec
YES
[TB13]
YES END 4 times or more
IP = 24-30 IP = 18-24
IP = 8x12 IP = 8x10
11322 Feed conveyance failure 14322 Feed conveyance retry
Error handling Error handling

5.2.15, Fig. 1 5.2.15, Fig. 1
(Recovery IP load) (Recovery IP load)
A
FR6H1179.EPS
Message display
Return to the start
of "IP feed" routine.
Cassette ejection
5.2.16, Fig. 1 (after home positioning)
FR6H1180.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 126 MD - 127
B <I/O Locations>
Conveyance (grip) M
MB1 [PB16: CCW2559P]: Drive Transport motor
MB1
IP sensor
Within 3 times [NB11] SB1
Retry?
4 times or more FRONT Erasure conveyor

B unit
11323 Length measurement conveyance failure 14323 Length measurement conveyance retry
Error handling Error handling

5.2.15, Fig. 1 5.2.15, Fig. 1 (Recovery IP load)
(Recovery IP load)
IP load return C unit
Message display 5.2.11, Fig. 1 (Without cassette ejection)
Subscanning motor M
MZ1
Returns to the start
of "IP feed" routine.
M
C
Transport motor
MC3
BCR : OFF
Subscanning unit
Z unit IP sensor
Within 3 times [NB11] SC3 FR6H1230.EPS
Retry?
<I/O Table>
4 times or more 14324 Barcode reading retry

12324 Barcode reading failure Error handling
5.2.15, Fig. 1 SC3 Side-positioning IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
(Recovery IP load)
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the IP.
Send barcode dummy data MB1 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
D Return to the start
to the CL. MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
of "IP feed" routine. FR6H1181.EPS
TR6H1076.EPS

SC3/SB1

FR6H1255.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 128 MD - 129
5.2.4 Side-Positioning Operation A
<Fig. 1 Side-Positioning Flow> Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF

(Retreat) IP conveyance plane
FRONT IP
Side-positioning
(Side-positioning 2 → HP)
Grip roller MC1 [PC14]: Drive
START Sol : OFF
Side-positioning grip release SC1: Close?
MC2 [PC21: CCW525P]: Drive SolZ1 SZ4
Close
Delay [0.01sec] (HP position Sensor confirmation 2
SC2 Side- OK) 5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SC1)
FFM reading conveyance driving M positioning
MZ1 [V1: CW13.3mm/s]: Drive HP Side-positioning
Stopper MC2 confirmation 12334
Delay [TC11: 0.8sec] MZ1 (FFM) operation failure
Side-positioning IP
(HP → side-positioning 1) Side-positioning
Side-position the IP 5.1.5, Fig. 1 home positioning
MC1 [PC11]: Drive
fed from the erasure
conveyor to the side- Delay [0.1sec]
positioning conveyor. MC1
FFM reading conveyance driving
MZ1: OFF
Perform side-
Side-positioning M 1
(Side-positioning 1 → back)
positioning MC1 [PC12]: Drive
operation twice. IP stopper Open (Retreat NG)
Delay [0.1sec] Timeout [TZ42: within 2 sec]
retreat
Side-positioning confirmation SZ4: Close?
(Back → side-positioning 2) Front view Close
MC1 [PC13]: Drive
Latch IP (Retreat Within 5 times [NZ12]
Delay [0.1sec] Latch OK) Retry?
IP stopper
6 times or more 14341
Reading or Secondary erasure retreat retry
Reference plane
secondary IP stopper
erasure? Not available 11341
D Side-positioning grip BCR available? retreat failure Delay [TZ44: 2sec]
Reading
Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF
Set speed data Open (Grip NG) Available (Retreat)
E
DA value: 204 SC2: Close?
Cassette removal
Subscanning driven-shaft grip timeout
MZ2: ON Sensor confirmation 2 CL determination 1
5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SC2)
Soft monitoring
Timeout [TZ34: within 15 sec] (Soft) Continue
MZ2 stop? Side-positioning grip Continue in the case
12338 E
operation failure of primary erasure
Stop
B Side-positioning grip
MZ2: OFF (Hard)
Delay: 50ms
Subscanning
driven-shaft grip END
FR6H1104.EPS
SZ2: Close
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Close? (Not changed)
SZ3: Open?
IP size
Symbol Operation Metric Metric
NO C 14x17 14x14 10x12 8x10 18x24 24x30
Register reset PC11 Side-positioning (HP → side-positioning 1) CCW177P CCW177P CCW617P CCW617P CCW730P CCW730P
PC12 Side-positioning (Side-positioning 1 → back) CW39P CW39P CW32P CW32P CW60P CW60P
PC13 Side-positioning (Back → side-positioning 2) CCW39P CCW39P CCW32P CCW32P CCW60P CCW60P
PC14 Side-positioning (Side-positioning 2 → HP) CW177P CW177P CW617P CW617P CW730P CW730P
A TR6H1055.EPS
FR6H1103.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 130 MD - 131
C B E
Driven-shaft grip stop

MZ2: OFF
Secondary erasure
Reading/secondary
2 times or more erasure
Retry?
Within 1 time
[NZ13]
Subscanning driving-shaft
5.2.4, Fig. 4 slow grip
Driven-shaft grip 12347 Driven-shaft grip
14347 Subscanning driven-shaft
failure failure 5.2.4, Fig. 5
slow grip release

5.2.4, Fig. 6 Ejection grip

NG
5.1.10, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running
D F
FR6H1329.EPS 5.1.10, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release
Error handling
5.2.15, Fig. 1 (recovery IP load)

5.2.12, Fig. 1 confirmation
2 times or less [NC11]

Retry?
3 times
or more
Message display
Cassette ejection Return to the start

5.2.16, Fig. 1 (after home positioning) of [IP Feed] routine
FR6H1350.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 132 MD - 133
<I/O Locations> <Fig. 2 Side-Positioning Grip Home Positioning Flow>

FRONT START SC2 home position
SZ3
Grip release HP detection sensor
Driving-side grip release HP sensor (SC2): ON
SZ2
Side-positioning conveyor MC2 [PC60: CW1P]: Drive
Grip driving motor Side-positioning grip
C unit HP confirmation
MZ2 2
SC2
Subscanning motor Grip release HP sensor Delay [TC61: 0.1sec]
M SC2
MZ1
M
Side-positioning HP sensor Open
SC1 SC2: Close?
Close MC2 [PC63: CCW3400P]: Drive

M Side-positioning motor FRONT
MC1 Open
M Timeout [TC63: within 8.8 sec]
SC2: Close?
HP detection Grip release motor
preparation Close MC2: OFF
Grip release motor
Subscanning unit positioning Grip release motor
MC2
Z unit MC2: OFF Sensor confirmation 1
IP stopper solenoid IP stopper HP sensor 5.2.14, Fig. 1 (SC2)
<I/O Table>
Side-positioning grip HP
MC2 [PC61: CW400P]: Drive 14335 detection preparation
positioning retry
SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the side-positioning home position. Close
SC2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the grip release home position. SC2: Close?
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode. HP detection Grip release motor
preparation return Open MC2: OFF
SZ4 IP stopper HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the IP stopper home position. Grip release motor Side-positioning
MC2: OFF 14336 grip HP detection
SolZ1 IP stopper driving SOL Power-down solenoid Protrudes the IP stopper when turned ON. preparation return
MC1 Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism. Delay [TC61: 0.1sec] retry
MC2 Grip release motor Pulse motor Drives to release the grip. E
MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Drives to convey the IP.
MZ2 Grip driving motor DC motor Drives the driven-shaft grip. D
TR6H1056.EPS Within 3 times [NC61]
Retry?
<Sensor ON/OFF Status> 4 times or more

2
SC1/SC2/SZ2/SZ3/SZ4
10338
HP operation error
FR6H1068.EPS

FR6H1067.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 134 MD - 135
D <Fig. 3 Side-Positioning Home Positioning Flow>

START
Side-positioning HP detection sensor SC2 home position
Open (SC1): ON
SC2: Close? SC1 MC1
Side-positioning MC1 [PC50: CW1P]: Drive
Close HP confirmation
3

HP detection
M
Open F
Delay [TC61: 0.1sec] SC1: Close? R
O
N
T
MC1 [PC53: CW4800 P]: Drive
Open Close
SC2: Close? Open
SC1: Close?
Close Sensor confirmation 2 Side-positioning motor
5.2.14, Fig. 2 HP detection
(SC2) Close MC1: OFF
preparation
END Side-positioning grip positioning Side-positioning motor
14337 MC1: OFF Sensor confirmation 1
HP detection retry 5.2.14, Fig. 1 (SC1)
E
FR6H1069.EPS
Side-positioning HP
MC1 [PC51: CCW533P]: Drive 14331
detection preparation retry
Close
SC1: Close?
HP preparation Side-positioning motor
return Open MC1: OFF
Side-positioning motor
MC1: OFF Side-positioning HP
14332
detection preparation
return retry
F
3 times or less [NC51]
Retry?
4 times or more
3
10334 Side-positioning HP
operation error
FR6H1070.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 136 MD - 137
F <Fig. 4 Subscanning Driving-shaft Slow Grip Flow>

START
Open
Set speed data
SC1 : Close?
Close Subscanning driving-shaft slow grip

MZ2: ON
TZ21: Start
Delay [TC51: 0.1sec] Timer start
HP detection MC1 [PC54: CW7P]: Drive Soft monitoring

MZ2 stop?
Driving-shaft slow grip stop
Stop
MZ2: OFF
Open
SC1: Close? MZ2: OFF (Hard)
12346 Driving-shaft grip error
Close Register reset
Sensor confirmation 2 Timer stop

5.2.14, Fig. 2
(SC1) Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec]
END
Side-positioning
14333
HP detection retry
NG
G
FR6H1071.EPS
NG (out of spec)
4.39 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.67
Driving-shaft
slow grip Delay: 50ms
OK
Close (noise stop)
SZ2: Close?
Driving-shaft
12352 Open
grip error stop
Yes (-6% deviation)

4.26 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.80
Driving-shaft grip
12355 disorder
(large deviation) NO
(-3% deviation)
12354 Driving-shaft grip disorder
Subscanning grip
13355
speed data update
Speed data update
Register reset
END
FR6H1330.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 138 MD - 139
<Fig. 5 Subscanning Driven-Shaft Slow Grip Release Flow> <Fig. 6 Ejection Grip Flow>
START
START
Set speed data 7 Side-positioning grip

Set speed data
DA value: 204
Subscanning driven-shaft slow grip release Open (Grip NG)
SC2 : Close?
MZ2: ON Sensor
Subscanning ejection grip
TZ31: Start MZ2: ON Close 5.2.14, Fig. 2 confirmation 2
(Grip OK) (SC2)
Soft HP confirmation Side-positioning
monitoring 12338 grip operation
Timeout [TZ34: within 15 sec] (Soft) failure
MZ2 stop?
Side-positioning
Soft monitoring 5.1.3, Fig. 1 grip home
Timeout [TZ31: within 10 sec] (Soft) Stop positioning
Driven-shaft MZ2 stop? MZ2: OFF
slow grip (Hard) MZ2: OFF
release Driven-shaft slow grip
Stop release stop Delay: 50ms
MZ2: OFF Ejection
grip
MZ2: OFF (Hard)
12349 Driven-shaft grip release error SZ2: Open? Yes (Not changed)
SZ3: Open?
Register reset
Register reset
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] 2 times
or more
Delay [TZ35: 0.1sec] Retry?
Within 1 time
[NZ13]
Ejection grip Ejection grip

14356 12356
failure failure
END
FR6H1331.EPS Register reset Register reset Register reset
Delay Delay Subscanning grip

[TZ35: 0.1sec] [TZ35: 0.1sec] 5.1.10, Fig. 1 home positioning
Subscanning
5.1.10, Fig. 4 driven-shaft grip
7
Subscanning
5.1.10, Fig. 5 driving-shaft
correction grip
Subscanning
5.1.10, Fig. 6 driven-shaft
grip release
Subscanning
5.1.10, Fig. 7 ejection grip
END
FR6H1332.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 140 MD - 141
5.2.5 Reading A
<Fig. 1 Reading Flow> Timer1 start
START Delay [TZ12: 2.71sec]
Image processing setup
IP size?
Image Setup NG
processing 14x17
ready? Subscanning driving-shaft
5.2.4, Fig. 4 slow grip IP size = 14x17
Ready E
Lamp preheat ON
NO Delay [TB50: 3sec]

IP size? Timer1 ≥ TZ13 Erasure lamp
Laser : ON lighting
Other than 14x17 Lamp preheat OFF
YES
IP size = 14x17
FFM reading conveyance driving Lamp fully lit
MZ1 [V1: CW13.3mm/s]: Drive Subscanning driven-shaft
Lamp preheat ON 5.2.4, Fig. 5 slow grip
Leading-edge
detection Open (No IP)
interrupt Timeout [TZ11: within 2.4sec] Erasure lamp lit Delay [TB50: 3sec]
SZ1: Close?
Lamp preheat OFF Timeout [TZ15]
Close End-of-image
(IP found) interrupt?
Lamp fully lit
Close (IP found) YES 11350 End-of-image timeout error
Timeout [TC32]
SC3: Open?
Timeout [TZ15]
CMOS
Open SC3: Open? Z Laser: OFF
No IP before reading
(No IP)
Read IP leading- Subscanning conveyance Open
11342 11343 1
edge detection failure 1
error
Laser: OFF
Subscanning FFM stop C

11344 MZ1: OFF
conveyance failure 2
E Delay [TZ14: 0.2sec]
1
5.2.4, Fig. 6 Ejection grip
MZ1NGCLR set
Timer start
END
FR6H1333.EPS
MZ1NG Abnormal
reading normal?
Timer data recording
Normal IP size
FFM driving Symbol Operation Metric Metric
12345
W.F. disorder 14x17 14x14 10x12 8x10 18x24 24x30
MZ1NGCLR set TC32 Read IP trailing-edge detection timeout 31.7 sec 26.0 sec 22.1 sec 14.5 sec 12.7 sec 21.8 sec
TZ13 Driven-shaft grip release start 26.27 sec 20.55 sec 16.72 sec 9.05 sec 7.32 sec 16.34 sec
TZ15 Image processing timeout 34.3 sec 28.6 sec 24.8 sec 17.1 sec 15.4 sec 24.4 sec
End-of- NO TR6H1090.EPS
image interrupt?
YES
A Z
FR6H1186.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 142 MD - 143
E C
Laser: OFF
Erasure lamp: OFF
Erasure lamp: OFF
FFM stop
FFM stop
MZ1: OFF
MZ1: OFF
Subscanning
5.2.4, Fig. 4 driving-shaft slow grip 5.2.4, Fig. 6 Ejection grip
Subscanning Error handling

5.2.4 , Fig. 5 driven-shaft slow grip release 5.2.15, Fig. 1
(Recovery IP load)
5.2.4, Fig. 6 Ejection grip 5.2.6, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running
Error handling
5.2.15, Fig. 1 5.2.6, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release
(Recovery IP load)

5.2.6, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running 5.2.12, Fig. 1 confirmation
5.2.6, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release Message display
5.2.12, Fig. 1 User notification item confirmation 5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection
FR6H1335.EPS
Message display

FR6H1334.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 144 MD - 145
FRONT
SZ3

SZ2
Grip driving motor
C unit
MZ2
Subscanning motor Grip release HP sensor

M SC2
MZ1
M
M
Subscanning unit
Z unit Transport motor
MC3
IP sensor
SC3 FR6H1232.EPS
<I/O Table>

MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
SC2 Grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that it is in the grip release home position.
TR6H1085.EPS

SZ2/SZ3/SC2
SC3

FR6H1256.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 146 MD - 147
5.2.6 After-Reading Conveyance <Fig. 2 Subscanning No-Load Running Flow>

<Fig. 1 After-Reading Conveyance Flow> START
START 3
Set speed data
After-reading conveyance driving DA value: 204
MZ2: ON
MZ1 [V0: CCW212.8mm/s]: Drive
Open (No IP) Soft monitoring
Timeout [TC41: within 4.3 sec] Timeout [TZ24: within 5 sec] (Soft)
SC4: Close? MZ2 stop?
Close After-reading conveyance driving stop Stop

(IP found) MB1: OFF
MC3: OFF No-load running stop
MZ1: OFF MZ2: OFF (Hard) MZ2: OFF
Delay [TC33 : 0.41sec] 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SC4)

Delay: 50ms
After-reading conveyance
driving stop 11362 After-reading conveyance failure SZ2: Open
MZ1: OFF SZ3: Close
After-reading conveyance SZ2: Open? (Stop by noise)
driving stop SZ3: Close?
MB1: OFF 5.2.15, Fig. 1 Error handling (Recovery IP load)
MC3: OFF
NO
2 times or more
Secondary erasure Reading or Retry?
secondary erasure
Reading [NZ13]
5.2.6, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] No-load running No-load running
14356 12357
failure failure
Subscanning both
5.2.6, Fig. 3 Register reset Register reset
grips release
5.2.12, Fig. 1 User notification

item confirmation END NG
3
FR6H1336.EPS
Message display
END
FR6H1178.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 148 MD - 149
<Fig. 3 Subscanning Both-Grip Release Flow> <I/O Locations>
START M
Transport motor
4 MB1
Set speed data IP sensor

DA value: 204 SB1
Subscanning no-load running Erasure conveyor

FRONT
MZ2: ON B unit
Soft monitoring
MZ2 stop? IP sensor
SC4
Stop
Both-grip release stop

MZ2: OFF (Hard) Side-positioning conveyor
MZ2: OFF
C unit
Delay: 50ms Subscanning motor M

MZ1
SZ2: Open
SZ3: Open
SZ2: Open? (not change)
SZ3: Open?
M
NO 2 times or more Transport motor
Retry? MC3
Register reset
Within 1 time
[NZ13] Subscanning unit
Z unit FR6H1233.EPS
Both-grip release Both-grip release
Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec] 14343 12348
error error
<I/O Table>
MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
END 4 NG
FR6H1337.EPS
TR6H1084.EPS

SC4

FR6H1257.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 150 MD - 151
5.2.7 Erasure Conveyance <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Erasure Conveyance Flow> M
Transport motor
MB1
START

Erasure unit High-temperature error B unit
condition?
Temporary erasure
Other 18742
disable mode Driven-side grip release HP sensor
SZ3 IP sensor
SC4
3 lamps lit Erasure unit 1 lamp unlit Driving-side grip release HP sensor
condition? SZ2
Primary/secondary Side-positioning conveyor
Routine or Grip driving motor
2 or more erasure C unit
primary/secondary MZ2
lamps unlit
erasure?
18740 No-erasure mode Routine

M
Erasure
18741
incomplete
M
Transport motor
MC3

Erasure conveyance driving Z unit SC3 FR6H1234.EPS
MB1 [PB25: xxP]: Drive
MC3 [PC37: xxP]: Drive
Delay: 20ms <I/O Table>

Close
(IP found) Reading Secondary erasure SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode.
SC4: Open? C or secondary SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driven side is in grip released mode.
Open erasure?
Erasure conveyance MZ2 Grip driving DC motor Speed correction capability (equivalent to DPR).
(No IP) 11363 Reading
failure LDSN Unlit lamp sensor
1 MB1 IP transport motor Conveys the IP.
Pulse motor
Error handling
5.2.15, Fig. 1 MC3 IP transport motor Pulse motor Conveys the IP.
(Recovery IP load) 5.2.6, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running
Message display
TR6H1080.EPS
D 5.2.6, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release
D
1
END
FR6H1184.EPS
IP size
Symbol Operation Metric Metric
14x17 14x14 10x12 8x10
18x24 24x30
PB25 Erasure conveyance driving CCW14568P CCW12624P CCW11316P CCW8706P CCW8118P CCW11190P
PC37 Erasure conveyance driving CCW12140P CCW10520P CCW9430P CCW7255P CCW6765P CCW9325P
TR6H1312.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 152 MD - 153

SZ2/SZ3
SC3/SC4

FR6H1258.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 154 MD - 155
5.2.8 Load Conveyance <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Load Conveyance Flow>
M
START Transport motor
MB1
IP sensor
SB1
After-erasure conveyance
B unit
Delay : 20 ms
Load conveyance
MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]: Drive FR6H1235.EPS
<I/O Table>
Open (No IP) Symbol Name Type Function
SB1: Close?
Close Open (No IP)
(IP SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) Detects the presence of an IP.
found) SB1: Close? TR6H1078.EPS
Load conveyance stop

Close
(IP found)
MB1: OFF (Magnetization also OFF) <Sensor ON/OFF Status>
SB1
5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SB1)
Suction cup movement (Load standby → HP)

5.1.13, Fig. 2 In-cassette IP confirmation

FR6H1259.EPS
No IP IP found
After-erasure After-erasure
10360 conveyance failure 12360
conveyance failure
1
Close (IP found)
SB1: Open?
Open
(No IP)

MB1: OFF
1
CMOS: No IP within machine
MB1: OFF (Magnetization also OFF)
END 10370 Load positioning failure

FR6H1172.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 156 MD - 157
5.2.9 IP Load A
<Fig. 1 IP Load Flow> Open (Leak)

Timeout [TA41: within 1 sec]
SA5: Close?
Suction sensor IP leak
confirmation Close Suction pump (PA1): OFF
START Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open)
(Suction)
Delay [TA45: 0.5sec] Delay [TA47: 0.1sec]

(HP → load standby)
Open (HP position NG) 3 times or less [NA22]

Retry?
SZ4: Close? Load IP suction failure
retry
Close Sensor confirmation 2 Conveyance (Discharge) Conveyance (Discharge)
(HP position 5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SA4) MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P] MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
: Drive
OK)
Suction cup home 5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning
5.1.7, Fig. 1 positioning
Suction cup 12318 Suction cup HP return failure
5.2.2, Fig. 1 IP feed
HP confirmation Leak valve
(SVA1): OFF (Close)
Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] Delay: 50ms
Load IP
11372
suction failure Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF
C 5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning

Conveyance (Grip)
Message display MB1 [PB16: CW2559P]: Drive
Suction cup movement Delay: 50ms

(HP → feed leak) Suction cup movement
(Load standby → load suction) Feed conveyance UP direction
MA1 [PA15: CCW192P]: Drive MB1 [PB19: CCW3342P]: Drive
Close (IP found)

5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection SB1: Open?
Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close) Open Feed conveyance UP
(No IP) Feed conveyance direction stop
UP direction stop MB1: OFF (Soft)
MB1: OFF (Soft)
Suction cup movement Delay: 50ms
IP suction (Load standby → load suction) Roller rotation (same speed as the arm)
MB1 [PB15: CCW192P]: Drive Conveyance (Discharge)
C
MA1 [PA15: CCW192P]: Drive MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]
Load the IP and Suction cup movement : Drive
feed it back to (Load suction → load leak)
the cassette MA1 [PA16: CCW2031P]: Drive MA1 [PA19: CCW200P]
Suction pump (PA1): ON : Drive
Roller rotation stop
MB1: OFF
Reload positioning
11371
failure
B
A Message display
FR6H1133.EPS

FR6H1134.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 158 MD - 159
B
D
Open (Leak)
Suction sensor
SA5: Close? Close (Suction)
confirmation
Timeout [TA49: 5 sec]: Drive
Close SA5: Open?
(Suction)
IP leak Suction sensor
Leak valve (SVA1)
Delay [TA50: 500sec]
confirmation Open
Leak the IP that : ON (Open)
was fed back to Suction pump (PA1)
(Leak)
the cassette : OFF Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close)

IP leak
Leak valve (SVA1): ON (Open)
Suction pump (PA1): OFF 11325 Load leak error

(HP → load standby) Message display
Within 3 times [NA22] (Load standby → load suction)
Retry?
Load IP
drop retry
Conveyance (Discharge) Conveyance (Discharge) 5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection

MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]: Drive
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning 5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning END
FR6H1136.EPS
Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close) 5.2.2, Fig. 1 IP feed
11373 Load IP drop Delay: 50ms
Conveyance (Grip)
Message display MB1 [PB16: CW2559P]: Drive

(Load standby → load suction) Delay: 50ms
Solenoid (SOLZ1): OFF
Feed conveyance UP direction
Close (IP found)
SB1: Open?
Feed conveyance UP
Open direction stop
(No IP) MB1: OFF (Soft)
Feed conveyance UP
direction stop
MB1: OFF (Soft) Delay: 50ms
C MB1 [PB14: CCW2559P]
: Drive
MA1 [PA19: CCW200P]

: Drive
11371 Load IP drop
Message display

FR6H1135.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 160 MD - 161

Suction cup HP sensor
Suction cup driving motor Cassette set unit SA4 SA1/SA4/SA5/SZ4
Leak valve
MA1 A unit SVA1
Suction pump
Cassette ejection sensor M PA1
SA1
Suction sensor
SA5
M
Transport motor
MB1
IP sensor SB1
SB1

B unit

FR6H1260.EPS
C unit
Subscanning unit
Z unit
IP stopper HP sensor
SZ4 FR6H1236.EPS
<I/O Table>
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
PA1 IP suction DC pump Sucks when turned ON
MA1 Suction cup driving motor Pulse motor Open the rear cover of the cassette and moves the roller.
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor PI (19mm) Sensor that detects the presence of an IP.
TR6H1065.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 162 MD - 163
5.2.10 User Notification Item Judgment <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 User Notification Item Judgment Flow> FRONT

SZ3
START

SZ2
No. of
2 lamps lit 1 or less lamp lit Grip driving motor
erasure lamps lit
MZ2
3 lamps lit
Routine or Primary/secondary erasure

M
primary/secondary
erasure
Routine
Overexposure
IP exposure?
Usual Subscanning unit

Z unit FR6H1276.EPS
Erasure
Disabled
<I/O Table>
temporarily disabled?
Normal
TR6H1095.EPS
Subscanning grip Abnormal

operation normal?
SZ2/SZ3
Normal
Driving-shaft grip Abnormal

operation normal?
Normal OFF: Open (not blocked) ON: Close (blocked)

FR6H1277.EPS
END (With notification) END END (With notification)

FR6H1275.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 164 MD - 165
5.2.11 IP Load Return (Without Cassette Ejection) <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 IP Load Return Flow> Suction cup driving motor Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor
MA1 A unit SA4
Leak valve
START
SVA1
Suction cup movement M

(Load leak → load suction)
Open (Suction cup HP NG)

SA4: Close?
Close 5.2.14, Fig. 2 (SA4) FRONT
(Suction cup FR6H1239.EPS
HP OK)
Suction cup movement 12318 Suction cup HP return failure
Suction cup HP (Load suction → HP) <I/O Table>
confirmation MA1 [PA28: CW164P]: Drive
Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] Symbol Name Type Function
5.1.7, Fig. 1 Suction cup home positioning SVA1 IP leak Solenoid valve Leaks when turned ON.
TR6H1063.EPS

SA4
END
FR6H1120.EPS

FR6H1263.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 166 MD - 167
5.2.12 User Notification Item Confirmation <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 User Notification Item Confirmation Flow> FRONT
START Driven-side grip release HP sensor

SZ3
No. of Driving-side grip release HP sensor

2 lamps lit 1 or less lamp lit
erasure lamps lit SZ2
Grip driving motor
Routine or 3 lamps lit
primary/secondary MZ2
Message display
erasure
Message display due to
Primary/ incomplete erasure
Routine secondary
erasure
M
Message display
Overexposure
IP exposure?
Usual 11366 Overexposed IP detection
Message display Subscanning unit

Z unit FR6H1237.EPS
<I/O Table>
Disabled
Erasure temporarily
disabled? Symbol Name Type Function
18742 Erasure temporarily disabled SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode.
Normal
Message display
TR6H1074.EPS
The following errors have occurred.
• Driven-shaft grip error (92347) <Sensor ON/OFF Status>
• Both grips release error (92348)
Subscanning grip • No-load running error (92357)
SZ2/SZ3
operation normal?
Normal
OK Subscanning grip

The following error has occurred.
FR6H1261.EPS
Driving-shaft grip • Driving-shaft grip disorder (92354)
operation normal?
Normal
OK Subscanning grip
5.2.12, Fig. 2 speed correction
END
FR6H1154.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 168 MD - 169
<Fig. 2 Subscanning Grip Speed Correction> <Fig. 3 Subscanning Driving-Shaft Correction Grip Flow>
START
START
Set speed data

5.1.10, Fig. 4 Subscanning driven-shaft grip
Subscanning driving-shaft slow grip
5.2.12, Fig. 3 Subscanning driving-shaft correction grip MZ2: ON
TZ21: Start
Timer start
Soft monitoring
MZ2 stop?
Driving-shaft slow grip stop
5.1.10, Fig. 2 Subscanning no-load running MZ2: OFF
Stop
Driving-shaft correction
5.1.10, Fig. 3 Subscanning both-grip release MZ2: OFF (Hard) 12353
grip error
Register reset
Timer stop
Logged Delay [TZ25: 0.1sec]
NG
12352 or 12355
(±3% deviation)
logged? 4.39 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.67
Not logged OK
Close (noise stop)
SZ2: Close?
Driving-shaft grip
12352
error stop Open
END
FR6H1338.EPS
Subscanning grip
13355
speed data update
Speed data update
Yes (±6% deviation)

4.26 ≤ Timer ≤ 4.80
Driving-shaft grip
12355
malfunction
No (±6% deviation)
Register reset
END
FR6H1352.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1)
MD - 170 MD - 171
5.2.13 Cassette Ejection A
<Fig. 1 Cassette Ejection Flow> Suction cup movement

(Load standby → load suction)
START
Delay: 20ms
Leak valve (SVA1): ON

Delay: 50ms SA4: Close?
Suction cup movement Close

(Load leak → push-out) (HP position 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SA4)
MA1 [PA22: CW1095P]: Drive OK)
Suction cup HP
Ejection clutch (CLA1): ON Suction cup movement 12326 Suction cup HP return failure
confirmation
(Load suction → HP)
Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] MA1 [PA28: 164P]: Drive

Cassette
ejection Processing complete LED display
LEDOUT: ON
LED2: OFF
Suction cup movement Leak valve (SVA1): OFF (Close)
(Ejection → load standby)
MA1 [PA23: CW1128P]: Drive Transport motor magnetization OFF
MB1: Magnetization OFF
MC3: Magnetization OFF
Ejection clutch (CLA1): OFF
Close (Cassette not removed)

Delay [TA47: 0.1sec] SA1: Open?
Open
(Cassette
removal
completed) CMOS: No IP before reading
Within 1 time [NA24]
Retry? CMOS: No IP before erasure
2 times or more Call LED not-displayed

LEDCALL: OFF
A END
FR6H1159.EPS
FR6H1158.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 172 MD - 173

Suction cup driving motor Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor SA1/SA4
MA1 A unit SA4
Cassette ejection clutch

CLA1
Cassette ejection sensor M

SA1
M OFF: Open (not blocked) ON: Close (blocked)

Transport motor FR6H1262.EPS
MB1

B unit
C unit
Transport motor
Subscanning unit MC3
Z unit
M
FR6H1238.EPS
<I/O Table>
LEDCALL CALL LED Indicates that the machine is in "CALL" state.
LEDOUT Processing complete LED Indicates that the processing has been completed.
LED2 Progress 2 LED Indicates that the progress is "2".
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI (5mm) Detects that the cassette has been ejected.
CLA1 Cassette ejection clutch Clutch Power connection for actuating cassette ejection operation.
TR6H1073.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 174 MD - 175
5.2.14 Sensor Confirmation 1/Sensor Confirmation 2 <Fig. 2 Sensor Confirmation 2 Flow>

<Fig. 1 Sensor Confirmation 1 Flow> A symbol, “S**”, used in the flow is applicable to the sensors listed in the table (Sensor List)
below.
A symbol, “S**”, used in the flow is applicable to the sensors listed in the table (Sensor List)
below. START
START
Sensor (S**): OFF
Sensor (S**): OFF Delay [TA16: 0.1sec]
Delay [TA16: 0.1sec] Open

S**: Close?
Open Close
S**: Close?
Sensor (S**): ON 12301 Sensor error
Close
Sensor (S**): ON 10301 Sensor error Delay [TA16: 0.1sec]

END
FR6H1119.EPS
END
FR6H1118.EPS
<Sensor List>
<Sensor List> The sensors listed below are covered by “S**”.
The sensors listed below are covered by “S**”. I/O No. Name Close status Open status
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor Blocked Not blocked
I/O No. Name Close status Open status SA2 Cassette IN sensor With cassette Without cassette
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor Blocked Not blocked
SA3 Cassette hold sensor Blocked Not blocked
SA2 Cassette IN sensor With cassette Without cassette
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SA3 Cassette hold sensor Blocked Not blocked
SA5 Suction sensor Sucked Leaked
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor IP found No IP
SA5 Suction sensor Sucked Leaked
SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SB1 Cassette inlet IP sensor IP found No IP
SC2 Grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SC3 Side-positioning HP sensor IP found No IP
SC2 Grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SC4 Erasure positioning IP sensor IP found No IP
SC3 Side-positioning HP sensor IP found No IP
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SC4 Erasure positioning IP sensor IP found No IP
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SZ4 Stopper HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
SZ4 Stopper HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
TR6H1070.EPS
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor Blocked Not blocked
TR6H1070.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 176 MD - 177
5.2.15 Error Handling (Recovery IP Load) <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Error Handling Flow>
M
Transport motor
START MB1
IP sensor
After-reading conveyance driving SB1
MC3 [PC42: CCW4995P]: Drive Erasure conveyor
MZ1 [V0: CCW212.8mm/s]: Drive FRONT
B unit
Open (No IP)

SB1: Close?
Close
(IP found) Open (No IP)
SB1: Close?
Load conveyance stop C unit
Close MB1: OFF (Magnetization also OFF)
(IP found) MC3: OFF (Magnetization also OFF)
Subscanning motor M
MZ1
5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SB1)
Recovery after-erasure
10361
conveyance failure
Close (IP found) M
SB1: Open? Transport motor
MC3
Open
(No IP)
Load conveyance stop Subscanning unit
Load conveyance stop Z unit
MB1: OFF (Magnetization also OFF) FR6H1240.EPS
MB1: OFF
MC3: OFF (Magnetization also OFF)
<I/O Table>
CMOS: No IP within machine 10371 Recovery load positioning failure
Delay: 50ms MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
TR6H1083.EPS
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1 (Without cassette ejection) <Sensor ON/OFF Status>
SB1
END
FR6H1171.EPS

FR6H1264.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 178 MD - 179
5.2.16 Cassette Ejection (After Home Positioning) <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Cassette Ejection (After Home Positioning) Flow>
Suction cup
driving motor Cassette set unit
START MA1 A unit
Suction cup movement (HP → feed suction)

M
Delay: 50ms
END FRONT
<I/O Table>
TR6H1097.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 180 MD - 181
5.3 Secondary Erasure Flow 5.3.1 Erasure Lamp Lighting

<Fig. 1 Overall Summary Flow> <Fig. 1 Erasure Lamp Lighting Flow>
START
START
B
5.2.1, Fig. 1 Cassette IN detection Lamp preheat ON
CMOS: IP found before erasure Delay [TB50: 3sec]
CMOS: IP found before reading

Lamp preheat OFF
5.2.2, Fig. 1 IP feed Lamp fully lit
Retry
5.2.3, Fig. 1 Feed conveyance
END
Retry FR6H1351.EPS
5.2.4, Fig. 1 Side-positioning operation
5.3.1, Fig. 1 Erasure lamp ON
Progress 2-LED display

LED1: OFF
LED2: ON
5.2.6, Fig. 1 After-reading conveyance
Erasure lamp OFF

LampB1-3: OFF
5.2.10, Fig. 1 User notification item judgment
Notified
Not notified
IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1
5.2.12, Fig. 1 User notification item confirmation
2 times or more Continuous Continuous 2 times or more

operation? operation?
Single operation Single operation B

IP load return
5.2.11, Fig. 1 (Without cassette
ejection)
Cassette ejection
5.2.13, Fig. 1 Cassette ejection 5.2.16, Fig. 1 (after home positioning)
B
END
FR6H1339.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 182 MD - 183
5.4 User Utility Operation A
5.4.1 Dust Removal

<Fig. 1 Dust Removal Flow> MZ3 [CCW]: Drive
Open
START
SZ5: Close?
Close Dust removal operation
12392
1 error 3
Open (Stopper retreat NG)
SZ4: Close? 5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 (SZ5)
Close
(Stopper Within 5 times [NZ12]
retreat Retry? 5.1.2, Fig. 1 Dust removal home positioning
B
OK)
6 times IP stopper retreat
14341
or more retry
Close
Dust removal driving IP stopper retreat Timeout [TZ54: within 10 sec]
11341 Delay [TZ44: 2sec]
MZ3 [CW]: Drive failure
SZ5: Open?
Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF (Retreat) Open Dust removal operation

12393
Open failure 4
SZ5: Close?
1 Delay [TZ55: 0.6sec] 5.1.2, Fig. 1 Dust removal home positioning
MZ3: OFF

5.2.14, Fig. 2 Sensor confirmation 2 MZ3: OFF
12390 Dust removal operation failure 1

Close
SZ5: Open?
END
FR6H1196.EPS
Open

Delay [TZ58: 0.2sec] MZ3: OFF
Dust removal driving 12391 Dust removal operation failure 2

MZ3: OFF
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] 5.1.2, Fig. 1 Dust removal home positioning
A
FR6H1195.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 184 MD - 185
FRONT
Dust removal motor

MZ3
Dust removal sensor
SZ5
Subscanning unit
<I/O Table>

MZ3 Dust removal Brushless DC motor Removes dust on the light-collecting guide and mirror.
TR6H1089.EPS

SZ4/SZ5

FR6H1265.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MD - 186 MD - 187
5.5 Shutdown Processing Flow <I/O Locations>

<Fig. 1 Shutdown Processing Flow> M
START
Solenoid (SolZ1): OFF (Retreat) Suction cup driving motor IP removal cassette set unit
MA1 A unit
Stopper Open (Protrusion)
retreat Timeout [TZ42: within 2sec]
SZ4: Close?
Close B unit
(Retreat) Within 5 times [NZ12]
2 Retry?
IP stopper
6 times 14341 SZ3
or more retreat retry
Subscanning IP stopper Driving-side grip release HP sensor

5.1.10, Fig. 4 10341 SZ2
driven-shaft grip retreat failure Delay [TZ44: 2sec]
Grip driving motor
Subscanning C unit
MZ2
5.1.10, Fig. 8 driving-shaft grip 1
Subscanning M
5.1.10, Fig. 6 driven-shaft grip release Dust removal motor
MZ3
Dust removal sensor
SZ5

MZ3 [CW]: Drive
Those steps enclosed by a box are skipped for RU software A07 or later. Subscanning unit
Z unit IP stopper HP sensor
IP stopper solenoid
SZ5: Close?
Close Dust removal driving <I/O Table>

MZ3: OFF
Delay [TZ56: 1sec]
12394 Dust removal
Dust removal driving operation failure 5 MZ2 Grip driving DC motor Speed correction capability (equivalent to DPR).
MZ3: OFF MZ3 Dust removal Brushless DC motor Removes dust on the light-collecting guide and mirror.
Delay [TZ52: 0.2sec] Driving-side grip release HP
SZ2 PI (5mm) Detects that the driving side is in grip released mode.
sensor
Driven-side grip release HP
SZ3 PI (5mm) Detects that the driven side is in grip released mode.
sensor
Suction cup movement (HP → shutdown)
END SolZ1 Stopper driving SOL Power-down solenoid Protrudes the stopper when turned ON.
FR6H2028.EPS
TR6H1062.EPS
010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 186 010-051-00

010-051-05 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MD - 187
02.20.2002 FM3328 10.10.2000
02.20.2002 FM2887
FM3328 (2)
MD - 188 MD - 189

SZ2/SZ3/SZ4/SZ5

FR6H1266.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
Appx MD 1 - 1 Appx MD 1 - 2
BLANK PAGE
Appendix 1 Mechanism of Automatic Updating
The automatic update function to be used in the PC-MUTL of versions 1.1 or earlier is
described.
Automatic updating is a function of comparing the dates of the RU-AP and RU FLASH ROM
files between the CL’s FTP server and the RU FLASH ROM at the time of bootup of the RU
and writing from the CL’s FTP server into the RU FLASH ROM when the dates are different.
1.1 Operation of Automatic Update Function

The file date in the CL’s FTP server is compared with the file date in the RU FLASH ROM
when booting up the RU, and contents in the FLASH ROM are replaced with those of the
FTP server if the dates are different.
CL RU
FTP server FLASH ROM

RU M-Utility
RU-Config RU-Config
CD-ROM
••
•
Reboot the RU
CL Comparison
RU
and
FTP server downloading FLASH ROM
RU M-Utility
RU-Config RU-Config
Comparison ••
only •
FR6H2008.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
Care should be exercised because, even when the FTP server contains files dated older
than those in the flash ROM, the data in the flash ROM is updated.
REFERENCES
The automatic update function is employed in the PC-MUTL version 1.1 or earlier. The
following troubles are likely to occur in this case.
• In geographical regions where the PC’s time zone is set for automatically adjusting
clock for daylight saving changes, the auto update feature is initiated upon daylight
saving change.
• When the user boots up the RU, he may be surprised at the blinking LED and alarm
sound, and consequently power it OFF while the flash ROM is being accessed.
• As the power is turned OFF while the flash ROM is being accessed, the contents of the
flash ROM will be damaged, resulting in the failure of the RU to boot up.
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MD 1 - 1 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MD 1 - 2
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Troubleshooting (MT) Control Sheet MT - 1
Control Sheet
08/30/2001 01 Corrections (FM3058) All pages
12/20/2001 03 Corrections (FM3277) MT-1, 132–140, 194
04/20/2002 06 Corrections (FM3386) All pages
09/25/2004 08 Corrections (FM4338) MT-1, 5, 52, 54, 70, 71, 113-117,
174-191,
CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MT 1-1,

Appx MT 2-1,
Appx MT 3-1–Appx MT 3-3
Troubleshooting (MT)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MT - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 2
■ Flow of Troubleshooting
1. Overview of Troubleshooting
The flow of RU troubleshooting greatly varies depending on whether the associated error log
exists.
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting
When you start a troubleshooting procedure, be sure to confirm the error log.
● When the error is logged
Trouble occurred
Note the error code table, analysis flow, and check flow to identify the cause of the error.
● When the error is not logged
Checking the Error Log Note the check flow to identify the cause of the error.
“1.4.1 Checking the Error Log”

■ How to Use the Analysis Flow
If many parts are in error, the checks to be performed and procedural reference sections (check
1. Errors causing the CL screen to display an error code
flow) are sequentially indicated in the flow.
“1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log”

■ Check Flow
The checks to be performed are sequentially indicated in the flow.
“2. Error Code Table”, “3. Detail Code”

Typical check flows are indicated below.
• “7. Error Code Analysis Flow”
• “15. Bootup Failure Analysis Flow”
“Analysis Flow”
• “16. Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks in the IP Conveyance Direction”
• “17. Image Troubleshooting Flow”
“Check Flow”
■ Error classifications
2. Errors preventing the RU from becoming ready RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
1. Errors causing the CL screen to display an error code
Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen to display an error
“15. Bootup Failure Analysis Flow” code upon error detection
3. Errors causing image abnormalities 2. Errors preventing the RU from becoming ready
CL-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
“16. Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks

in the IP Conveyance Direction Cassette Set Unit” 3. Errors causing image abnormalities
“17. Image Troubleshooting Flow” Errors that result in image abnormalities due to laser light blockage caused by a scratched IP or
dust or due to electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to detect an error code
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to detect an error code
“18. Troubleshooting the errors that interrupt the progress of a process and cause the inability
to detect an error code” Errors that occur when many interrupts are initiated by a barcode
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data 5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU12A board due to an improper
“7. Troubleshooting the errors that cause the inability to update the software or back up machine
shipment control data” FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting
FRMT0376.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 3
1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks 1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log"
In the Troubleshooting volume, troubleshooting procedures are described in the form of a flow. Each page consists of two vertical columns lying side by side. The left-hand side describes the
Various marks are used for flow simplification. "analysis procedure" and the right-hand side furnishes "detailed information".
When you read the Troubleshooting volume for the first time, you should read not only the left-hand
■ Marks Used in Flows side but also the "detailed information" on the right-hand side to understand the background,
objective, and other details of the troubleshooting procedure.
When performing a troubleshooting procedure, follow the steps indicated in the left-hand "analysis
: Indicates an operation item.
procedure" column.
The operation description is given next to a circle.
The flow of troubleshooting of individual This column furnishes detailed information,
N troubleshooting steps are described using including the background and objective.
: Indicates that the flow of operation branches off illustrations. Refer to this column when you When you read the Troubleshooting volume
Y in a specific direction depending on the check result. merely confirm the outline and flow of for the first time, you should read such
The mark is positioned at the right and below this troubleshooting. detailed information in addition to the
mark to indicate the reference section. left-hand illustrative instructions.
: Indicates the section you should refer to.
The section number and title are indicated to the right
of this mark. The reference section is variously MT- 6
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated Analysis Flow ■ Error Code Table Description
described depending on whether it is within the same Reference page or reference section number
The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence
conditions. It is also provided with the information (page number or section number) that
volume or not. Error
Code
Error Name Occurrence Condition
During bootup, the remaining IP is ejected, but the sensor

Analysis Detail
flow Code
MT- 30
indicates the most appropriate analysis flow you should refer to.
10300 IP sensor logical inconsistency having logical inconsistency for its IP sensor result is or
detected.
4
(When the reference section is within the same volume) ■ Viewing the Error Table to Locate the Reference Analysis Flow
[Section-number section-title] Analysis flow

you should refer to
(1) Search the error code table for the error code that is most likely to be responsible for
the encountered trouble.
(2) Note the page number or section number suggested in the "Analysis Flow" column for
the error code, and then see the suggested page.
(When the reference section is within another volume) Section number ● When a page number is indicated: See the page marked "MT-xx".
<Error Code Analysis Flow>

[Volume-title section-number section-title] 4. Error Code Analysis Flow (Mechanism)
■ Analysis Flow
Check the error log in M-Utility.

MT- 30 ● When a section number is indicated: See the page having a section number mark "x".
REFERENCE
10300, 10302, 12302 The indicated error is at the
beginning of the error log?
N Check the error code table again for the error
at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
The page number and section number are both marked at two locations to facilitate your
10300 IP Sensor Logical Inconsistency Y
"1.2 How to Understand Error Code"
"2. Error Code Table"
reference search.
During initialization, the remaining IP is ejected, but the sensor having Power supply error N
logical inconsistency for its IP sensor result is detected. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
10302 Broken sensor detected Check the error code table again
[Preparation procedures]
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
and troubleshoot.
During initialization, the result of IP search detects the presence of an "2. Error Code Table"
2. Remove the covers.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
IP, but the backup memory information indicates that there is no IP in
the machine. The backup memory has a record indicating that the IP
1
conveyance was performed before power recovery. N
Voltage on the CPU12A and Replace the power supply.
FRMT0415.EPS 12302 IP location information logical failure

During initialization, the result of IP search indicates the presence of an
DRV12A board normal?
Y
"9.1 Checking the Voltage
on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)"
"Check, Replacement, and Adjustment Volume:
11.8 Power Supply"
Reseat the error-causing board

the machine. Because there is no result of clearing the CMOS, it is CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N
boards tested in M-Utility normal?
and check if the error occurs N
1
again.
logically inconsistent.
Y "8. Board Tests in M-Utility" Y
Replace the error-causing board.
■ I/O Locations "Check, Replacement, and

Adjustment Volume"
Reference page
"11.2 CPU12A Board"
"11.6 DRV12A Board"
M "11.5 SNS12A Board"
■ Analysis/Check Flow Mark Usage Examples

Sensors SB1, SC3, and SC4 N Replace the sensor.
normal? "Service Parts List Volume"
IP sensor SB1
Y "11. Checking the Sensors"
N
FRONT Error recurs? 1
Erasure conveyor Y
B unit
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS12A
IP sensor SC4
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
"Check, Replacement, and Adjustment Volume"

Side-positioning conveyor "11.5 SNS12A Board"
C unit "11.6 DRV12A Board"
"11.2 CPU12A Board"
"11.7 MTH12A Board"
IP sensor SC3 Section number FR6H2418.EPS
M
M
M
FR6H2223.EPS
You must refer to Section 11.2,

[ 4. ]
010-051-00
10.15.2000 FM2887
CR-IR346RU Service Manual MT - 30
You must refer to Section 8,

FR6H2516.EPS
Board Tests in M-Utility. Replacing the CPU12A Board,

of the Checks, Replacement, 010-051-06 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MT - 6
04.20.2002 FM3385
and Adjustments of Parts volume.

CPU12A board N Reseat the CPU12A board and N
tested in M-Utility normal? check if the error occurs again. 1
Y Y
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Replace the CPU12A board.
"Check, Replacement,
and Adjustment Volume:
11.2 CPU12A Board”
N N Analysis procedure Detailed information FRMT0400.EPS
Error encountered? Startup error recurs? 1
Y Y
Since the check stated in this square can be readily

performed, no reference section is indicated. FRMT0416.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 4
1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log ■ Purpose of Viewing the Error Log
When an error occurs, it generally causes two or more additional errors. The error code displayed
1.4.1 Viewing the Error Log on the CL represents the last-encountered error. You must therefore view the error log to locate the
error code related to the encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
View the error log with M-Utility to obtain the information about the occurrence of an error indicated
by an error code.
■ Purpose of Exiting the CL Software
START
If you start PC-MUTL while the CL software is running, the CL may give erratic on-screen indica-
tions or fail to operate normally. Therefore, exit the CL software before starting PC-MUTL.
Exit the CL software.
Start the PC-MUTL.
Start M-Utility to display the error log.
END
FRMT0405.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 5
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble ■ Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error occurrence
(1) Group the errors that occurred. timing.
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that occurred first). ● When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL
(Example) Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time" indications.
• The errors can be divided into Groups A and B because their error occurrence time differ by
Occurrence Occurrence
14 minutes. Error code date time
• The first error in Group A is "12302". 10300 2000.10.07 13:12:19 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
------------------------------------------------------------------- Displayed when the power of the RU is
■ When an Error Occurred after "Time Data" Was Acquired from the CL 10302 2000.10.07 13:12:10 00258D tiphscan____ turned OFF.
Code of the error that occurred first.
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098
Perform troubleshooting with this error code.
Error codes displayed on the CL screen FR6H0406.EPS
Error code that occurred last ● When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the CL
Error code that The resulting occurrence date/time indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25". Note, however, that
A occurred second the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position (underlined) of the "occur-
Code of the error rence time" field.
that occurred first.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Perform troubleshooting The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
with this error code.
Occurrence Occurrence
B Error code date time
Displayed when the 10300 0000.00.00 00:00:19 00257D tiphscan____ Error code that occurred second
power of the RU is 3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
turned OFF. ------------------------------------------------------------------- Displayed when the power of the RU is
10302 0000.00.00 00:00:10 00258D tiphscan____ turned OFF.
FR6H2520.EPS
Code of the error that occurred first.
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098
Perform troubleshooting with this error code.
■ When an Error Occurred before "Time Data" Was Acquired from the CL FRMT0417.EPS
Error codes displayed on the CL screen

If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the error that
Error code that occurred last is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be accomplished. It is
therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that
Error code that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting.
A occurred second
Code of the error
that occurred first. ■ Error Log Display Format
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Perform troubleshooting The error log display format varies with the RU software version.
with this error code.
Refer to the appendix for the display of the software of versions A04 or earlier.
B “Appendix 1 Display Format of Older Versions”
Displayed when the
power of the RU is ● When the employed software version is A05 or later
turned OFF. *** ERROR LOG ALL ***CODE DATE
FR6H0407.EPS [13603] 2000/08/25 14:51:45 00DC05 <SR> T02:3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258
FR6H2566.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 6
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated Analysis Flow ■ Error Code Table Description
The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Reference page or reference section number
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence condi-
Error
Analysis Detail tions. It is also provided with the information (page number or section number) that indicates the
Code Flow Code most appropriate analysis flow you should refer to.
During bootup, the remaining IP is ejected, but the sensor MT- 30
10300 having logical inconsistency for its IP sensor result is
IP sensor logical inconsistency
detected.
or
4
■ Viewing the Error Table to Locate the Reference Analysis Flow

(1) Search the error code table for the error code that is most likely to be responsible for the
encountered trouble.
Analysis flow (2) Note the page number or section number suggested in the "Analysis Flow" column for the
you should refer to error code, and then see the suggested page.
● When a page number is indicated: See the page marked "MT-xx".
Section number
● When a section number is indicated: See the page having a section number mark "x".
<Error Code Analysis Flow> REFERENCE
MT- 30
■ Analysis Flow
4. Error Code Analysis Flow (Mechanism) The page number and section number are both marked at two locations to facilitate your
10300, 10302, 12302
The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
reference search.
beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y "2. Error Code Table"

10300 IP Sensor Logical Inconsistency "1.2 How to Understand Error Code"
During initialization, the remaining IP is ejected, but the sensor having Power supply error N
logical inconsistency for its IP sensor result is detected. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
10302 Broken sensor detected Check the error code table again
and troubleshoot.
During initialization, the result of IP search detects the presence of an "2. Error Code Table"
the machine. The backup memory has a record indicating that the IP
1
conveyance was performed before power recovery.
N
12302 IP location information logical failure DRV12A board normal? "Check, Replacement, and Adjustment Volume:
Y 11.8 Power Supply"
During initialization, the result of IP search indicates the presence of an "9.1 Checking the Voltage
on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)"
the machine. Because there is no result of clearing the CMOS, it is CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N
boards tested in M-Utility normal? 1
logically inconsistent. again.
Y "8. Board Tests in M-Utility" Y

Replace the error-causing board. Page
■ I/O Locations "Check, Replacement, and
Adjustment Volume"
"11.2 CPU12A Board"
"11.6 DRV12A Board"
number
M "11.5 SNS12A Board"

normal? "Service Parts List Volume"
IP sensor SB1
Y "11. Checking the Sensors"
N
FRONT Error recurs? 1
Erasure conveyor Y
B unit
1. SNS12A
IP sensor SC4 2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
"Check, Replacement, and Adjustment Volume"

Side-positioning conveyor "11.5 SNS12A Board"
C unit "11.6 DRV12A Board"
"11.2 CPU12A Board"
"11.7 MTH12A Board"
IP sensor SC3 Section number FR6H2418.EPS
M
M
M
FR6H2223.EPS
[ 4. ]
010-051-00
10.15.2000 FM2887
CR-IR346RU Service Manual MT - 30
FR6H2516.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 7
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow
<Analysis Flow> <Check Flow>

9.1 Checking the Voltage on Board ● Start with START of an analysis flow and perform the steps indicated within the
10300,10302,12302 Test Pins (Connectors)
marks. Continue to perform the suggested steps in accordance
START
START with the check results.
When you complete the steps (including those for recovery) indicated in a check flow,
return to the analysis flow.
N
● Check whether a power supply error (12810-12893) is encountered. If it is
Y Check procedure reference section encountered ("Y"), note the error code table to identify the error.
The example below shows how to read the illustration:
Power supply error (12810-12893)
Voltage on the CPU12A and N encountered?
Search the error
code table for the Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage
codes of the other on the Board Test Pins
encountered errors. (Connectors)”
N
CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N END
boards tested in M-Utility normal? If no power supply error is logged,
Y
branch to "N".
Y “8. Board Tests When you complete the steps indicated
in M-Utility” in the check flow, return to the analysis flow.
If a power supply error is logged,
Replace the boards in the order named. <Check Flow> branch to "Y".
1. DRV12A 8. Board Tests in M-Utility
2. CPU12A
3. MTH12A
END
“Check, Replacement,
START ● Check whether the check procedure reference section is suggested.
and Adjustment Volume”
“11.6 DRV12A Board” See the suggested section or page and perform the suggested check procedure.
“11.2 CPU12A Board”
“11.7 MTH12A Board”
● When you complete the steps in the "check flow", return to the "analysis flow" and
then continue to perform the remaining analysis steps.
Check procedure reference section
END
When you complete the steps indicated

in the check flow, return to the analysis flow.
FRMT0373.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 8
■ Error Code Detail ● Y: Error category

0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1XYZZ 1: Image processing CPU
2: Scanner control
00 to 99 : Reference number for each error category 3: Conveyance control
0 to 9 : Error category 4: Overall control
0 to 4 : Error level
5: Network control
1 : 1 for all RU errors
FR6H2519.EPS 6: Reserved
● X: Error level 7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
Error level notations
9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
FATAL error: 0 or 9 ● ZZ: Reference number

• The user is notified of an error occurrence.
It is managed according to each error category.
• Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
• It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
• An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
• Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
• It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
• The user is notified of an error occurrence.
• Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette or IP, etc.).
• If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is necessary to
troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
• Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
• If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time with another
level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
• Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.

04.20.2002 FM3386
2. Error Code Table MT-9
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup, the configuration file in the flash ROM on the CPU12A board is defective, so that installation is not
10026 Machine configuration error
automatically performed from the FTP server running on the CL.
6.1
When an attempt is made to initialize the image processing section of the CPU board during the machine initialization
10100 Image processing initialization error routine, either of the errors ranging from 12101 to 12108 is detected. 8
Because error, from 12101 to 12108, is detected three times or more, fatal error results.
During IP read processing, an attempt is made to activate the sub-CPU (image processing section) of the CPU board, but
10120 Image processing CPU sequence error error, from 12121 or 12125, is detected. 8
Because error, from 12101 to 12108, is detected three times or more, fatal error results.
During bootup, because the connector (CN1 on the PMT12A board, CNE1 on the scanning optics unit, CNE2 on the
scanning optics unit, CN1 on the SYN12A board, or CN1 on the LDD12A board) is disconnected, the laser (LDD), start-point
10230 Scanner functional error during bootup
detection (SYN), and photomultiplier (PMT) functions are disabled. Because the laser is not enabled, the leading-edge
MT-88
detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: D0F603). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is D0F403.
During bootup, because +15V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (H11 on the MTH board) or +15V
10231 Scanner power supply error during bootup (1) power supply error, most of the functions, except for the polygonal mirror (POL) and laser (LDD), are disabled (detail code: MT-89
A0DF03). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A0DD03.
During bootup, because the fuse (H12 on the SCN12A board) is blown, the photomultiplier (PMT) and start-point detection
10232 Scanner power supply error during bootup (2)
(SYN) functions are disabled (detail code: 809603). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 809403.
MT-90
During bootup, because the fuse (J11 on the MTH12A board) is blown or because -15V is not supplied to the SCN12A
10233 Scanner power supply error during bootup (3) board, the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. Because the laser MT-91
(LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: C1DD03).
010-051-06
04.20.2002 FM3386 CR-IR346RU Service Manual [2.] MT-9
Error Analysis
Code Flow
• During bootup, because the fuse (J12 on the SCN12A board) or the fuse (H12 on the SCN12A board) is blown, ±15V is not
supplied to the SCN12A board, and the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), laser (LDD), and SCN board
(PLL) functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be
performed (detail code: C0DC03).
• During bootup, because -15V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (J11 on the MTH12A board) or -
15V (SLOT4) power supply error, the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are
disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code:
MT-92
C0D400).
• During bootup, because ±15V is not supplied, except for the laser (LDD), due to blow of the fuse (J11 on the MTH12A
board, or J12, H12, or H14 on the SCN board), the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD)
functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed
(detail code: C0D603). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is C0D400.
• During bootup, because 24V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (K11 on the MTH12A board) or
24V (SLOT5) power supply error, the polygonal mirror (POL) function is disabled (detail code: D01403).
10235 Scanner power supply error during bootup (5) • During bootup, because the fuses (H14 and A22 on the SCN board) are blown or because 5V is not supplied to the MT-93
SYN12A board and SED12A board, the leading-edge detection (SED) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled
(detail code: C01403).
During bootup, because ±15V is not supplied to the SYN12A board, PMT12A board, and LDD12A board due to blow of the
fuses (J12 and H12 on the SCN board), the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are
disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code:
MT-94
819603). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 819403.
For self-diagnostic during bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error associated with polygon error is detected. Because the
10244 Scanner control board error (4)
PLL on the SCN12A does not oscillate, a polygon sync signal cannot be detected.
-
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror function is
10261 Polygon stop/rotation error (1) disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are also disabled (detail code: MT-100
D03403).
During routine processing, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse
10271 Laser unlit error (1)
(H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: 815403).
MT-102
During bootup, because the signal from the start-point detection (SYN) is faulty, the SCN12A board does not operate
10281 Start-point detection error during bootup (1)
normally (detail code: 801C03).
MT-95
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during routine processing, an SCN board diagnostic error (C05401 or C07403)
10283 Scanning optics unit board error (1) associated with polygon error is detected. The laser is unlit due to a disconnected connector at the scanning optics unit, etc., -
so that an error related to the polygon error occurs, as well.
<Service Procedure>
This error occurs when the version of the M-Utility is checked or error log backup is executed during RU bootup.
10298 Before-reading scanner retry error <Occurrence Condition> MT-96
During routine processing, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and the scanner
is initialized. The routine processing is retried again, but the scanner-related error recurs.
During bootup, the remaining IP is ejected, but sensors having physically inconsistent IP sensor results (the CLOSE state of
both SB1 and SC3, or the CLOSE state of SB1, SC3, and SC4) are detected.
10300 Sensor logical inconsistency
Alternatively, even though the cassette ejection is detected (the OPEN state of SA1), the cassette insertion is detected (the
MT-55
CLOSE state of SA2) or the cassette hold status (the CLOSE state of SA3) is detected.
During bootup, the sensor is turned OFF after the timeout of the mechanical operation is detected, but the sensor does not
10301 Sensor error
transition to CLOSE.
MT-56
During bootup, the result of IP search detects the presence of an IP, but the backup memory information indicates that there
10302 Broken wire sensor detected is no IP in the machine. The backup memory has a record indicating that the IP conveyance was performed before power MT-55
recovery.
During bootup, the result of location information confirmation for IP search indicates the absence of an IP, but the backup
10303 IP initialization search error
memory information indicates the presence of an IP in the machine. System shutdown is selected via user intervention.
MT-57
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup, the IP search detects the presence of an IP. The CLOSE state of the SB1, SC3, and SC4 is detected, and
10304 IP conveyance error during bootup (1) the MB1 and MC3 are driven, but any of the sensors does not transition to OPEN. The backup memory has a record MT-57
indicating the presence of an IP in the machine.
During bootup, the IP search detects that there is an IP in the machine that is difficult to convey. The backup memory has a
10305 IP conveyance error during bootup (2) record indicating the absence of an IP in the machine. IP conveyance is not performed before power-OFF. It is presumed MT-57
that the backup memory has been cleared.
IP positioning error at side-positioning conveyor During bootup, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform side-positioning operation for remaining IP processing,
10306 during bootup but the SC3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
MT-59
During bootup, the MZ1, MC3, and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to measure the IP size for remaining IP processing,
Length-measurement conveyance error during
10307 bootup
but the SC3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Alternatively, it transitions to CLOSE but not to MT-59
OPEN.
During bootup or routine processing, because error (14315, 14316, 14317) is detected, retries (four times or more) are
10318 Suction cup HP operation error
performed, but error (fatal error) results.
MT-60
10334 Side-positioning HP operation error
MT-61
10338 Side-positioning grip HP operation error
MT-62
During bootup, the SolZ1 is turned ON to protrude the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to OPEN within the specified
10340 IP stopper protrusion error
period of time. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-63
During bootup and shutdown processing, the SolZ1 is turned OFF to retreat the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to
10341 IP stopper retreat error
CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-63
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driving shaft, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period
10346 Driving shaft grip error
of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-64
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified
10347 Driven shaft grip error
period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-66
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period
10348 Both grip release error
of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-64
<Service Procedure>
This error occurs when the version of the RU application software is updated from any version earlier than A04 to version
A05 or later, but the backup memory/error log/trace log is not initialized.
10349 Driven shaft grip release error
<Occurrence Condition>
MT-66
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN within the
specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to correct the speed, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of
10353 Driving shaft correction grip error
time.
MT-64
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period
10354 Initialization grip movement (1) error
of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results
MT-66
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE or the SZ3 does not
transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-64
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified
10356 Ejection grip error
MT-66
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN within the specified
10357 No-load running error
MT-66
During routine processing, the SB1 cannot detect the IP leading edge for after-erasure conveyance (the MB1 is driven
10360 After-erasure conveyance error counterclockwise). The MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform load conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition to MT-76
CLOSE within the specified period of time (20 sec).
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During error handling, the SB1 cannot detect the IP leading edge. The MB1, MC1, and MZ1 are driven (counterclockwise)
10361 After-recovery-erasure conveyance error for load conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time (20 sec). (The SB1 is in MT-76
OPEN status.)
During routine processing, the MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform load conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition
10370 Load positioning error
to OPEN within the specified period of time.
MT-68
During error handling, the MB1, MC1, and MZ1 are driven (counterclockwise) for load conveyance after the IP leading edge
10371 Recovery load positioning error
is detected by the SB1, but the SB1 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time (20 sec).
MT-68
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ5 does not transition to CLOSE
10390 Dust removal operation error (1)
within the specified period of time (30 sec).
MT-69
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to measure the length of the hole
10391 Dust removal mechanism lock (1) (x2) of the drive gear, but a mechanism lock results. Subsequently, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ5 does not MT-69
transition from CLOSE to OPEN within the specified period of time (30 sec).
10392 Dust removal mechanism lock (2) (x2) of the drive gear, but a mechanism lock results. Subsequently, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ3 does not MT-69
transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified period of time (30 sec).
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform home positioning, but the
SZ5 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN within the specified period of time (30 sec).
MT-69
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise), but two or more retries occur.
10394 Dust removal CCW drive error
However, driving in the clockwise direction is normal.
MT-71
10400 Network board error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected on the Ethernet section on the CPU12A board of the RU. 6.1
During bootup, when the SDRAM, or the main memory of the CPU12A board, is tested, error is detected. The warning is
10700 SDRAM test error
recorded and retries (up to two times) are performed, but error is detected again.
8
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<Service Procedure>
10799 CPU bus error A05 or later, but the backup memory/error log/trace log is not initialized. 8
During bootup and routine processing, an unthinkable state is detected by the main CPU on the CPU12A board.
During bootup and routine processing, the driver used for conveyance-related software processing between the CPU12A
10900 Conveyance-related driver error
and SNS12A boards causes ERROR to be returned as a return value.
6.2
During bootup and routine processing, ERROR is returned as a return value for the common function used for conveyance-
10901 Conveyance-related common function error
related software processing between the CPU12A and SNS12A boards.
6.2
During bootup and routine processing, ERROR is returned as a return value for the standard function used for conveyance-
10902 Conveyance-related standard function error
related software processing between the CPU12A and SNS12A boards.
6.2
During bootup and routine processing, ERROR is returned as a return value for device OPEN used for conveyance-related
10903 Conveyance-related device OPEN error
software processing between the CPU12A and SNS12A boards.
6.2
10921 Watchdog error During bootup and routine processing, the watchdog timer on the CPU12A board times out. 8
10991 Device open error During bootup and routine processing, the device open error on the CPU12A board occurs. 8
Writing of the RU APPL software from the FTP server of the CL to the CPU12A board flash ROM of the RU is completed
11024 Machine application update
normally.
-
Writing of the RU configuration data from the FTP server of the CL to the CPU12A board flash ROM of the RU is completed
11025 Machine configuration update
normally.
-
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup, error related to socket communication is detected. Socket communication cannot be performed normally due
11094 Socket error
to software bugs.
-
11208 Laser drive current error During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. MT-97
11272 Insufficient laser light intensity During bootup, laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) error is detected. MT-97
11273 Laser life warning During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. MT-97
During bootup, the IP search determines that there is no IP. However, the conveyance backup memory has a record
indicating the presence of an IP in the machine for routine processing.
MT-57
Because the cassette is inserted into the RU while the CL is in "Unacceptable (cassette cannot be accepted)" condition, the
11309 Cassette setting error (3) cassette is fed once and ejected without reading; as a result, a message notifying that reading has not be done is displayed -
on the CL.
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted without being closely aligned to the reference plane or inserted aslant relative
to the reference plane.
11310 Cassette setting error (1)
MT-72
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned OFF, the SA3 does not transition to
OPEN. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error results.
<User Operation>
to the reference plane. Alternatively, this error occurs when the cassette is not inserted all the way.
MT-72
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned ON, the cassette is moved, but the
SA2 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. However, the SA1 is CLOSE.
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the hold pin does not lower due to the force exerted on the hold pin as the cassette is pulled in the
cassette hold non-released condition.
11312 Cassette hold release error
MT-73
During routine processing, the SolA1 is turned ON to release the cassette hold, but the SA3 does not transition to CLOSE
within the specified period of time. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error results.
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the cassette containing no IP is inserted.
11319 Feed IP suction error
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) and the PA1 is turned ON to perform IP feed leak, but the
MT-74
SA5 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error
results.
During bootup and routine processing, the MA1 and MB1 are driven (clockwise) to feed the IP from the cassette, but the SA5
11320 Feed IP drop transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is griped by the rollers. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error MT-74
results.
During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (clockwise) to perform IP feed leak and conveyance, but the SB1
11321 Feed IP grip error does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error MT-74
results.
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform IP high-speed conveyance, but the SC3
11322 Feed conveyance error
transitions to OPEN. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-74
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to determine the IP size, but the SB1 transitions to
11323 Length-measurement conveyance error
OPEN. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-76
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During routine processing, the SVA1 is turned ON and the PA1 is turned OFF to leak the IP after loading it into the cassette,
11325 Load leak error
but the SA5 does not transition to OPEN.
MT-77
During routine processing, the Solz1 is turned ON to protrude the IP stopper after IP feed leak, but the SZ4 transitions to
CLOSE. SZ4 checks are retried (two times or more), but error results.
MT-63
During routine processing and U-Utility dust removal operation, the SOLZ1 is turned OFF to retreat the IP stopper, but the
SZ4 transitions to OPEN. SZ4 checks are retried (six times or more), but error results.
MT-63
During routine processing, the MZ1 is driven (clockwise) to perform read processing, but the SZ1 transitions to OPEN.
11342 Reading IP leading-edge detection error Subsequently, the laser is turned OFF, and when IP conveyance is performed to isolate the error, the SC3 transitions to MT-78
OPEN.
During routine processing, the MZ1 is driven (clockwise) to perform read processing, but the SZ1 transitions to OPEN.
11343 Subscanning conveyance error (1) Subsequently, the laser is turned OFF, and when IP conveyance is performed to isolate the error, the SC3 transitions to MT-78
CLOSE.
During routine processing, the SC3 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time before the end-of-image
11344 Subscanning conveyance error (2)
interrupt after reading is initiated.
MT-78
During routine processing, the end-of-image interrupt from the scanner board is not processed within the specified period of
11350 End-of-image timeout
time after reading is initiated.
MT-79
During routine processing, the MZ1, MC3, and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to convey the IP to the erasure unit after
11362 After-reading conveyance error
reading is completed, but the SC4 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
MT-80
During routine processing, the MC3 and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to perform erasure conveyance of the IP after
11363 Erasure conveyance error
reading, but the SC4 does not transition to OPEN.
MT-81
11366 Overexposed IP detected During routine processing, an overexposed IP is detected. -
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to reload the IP due to the load IP drop retry
11371 Load IP drop
(14373) or load IP suction failure retry (14372), but the SB1 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
MT-82
During routine processing, the PA1 is turned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load the IP into the cassette,
11372 Load IP suction error but the SA5 transitions to OPEN within the specified period of time. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error MT-82
results.
11373 Load IP drop but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is released. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error MT-82
results.
11380 Maximum empty cassette setting During bootup, an attempt is made to eject (load) the remaining IP into the cassette, but the cassette has not been set. MT-83
11387 Recovery IP processing During bootup, the remaining IP that has not been erased is detected. MT-84
11400 Unread IP ejection (1) During routine processing, the IP is ejected, without being read, to the cassette for some reason on the CL side. -
11401 Unread IP ejection (2) During routine processing, the IP is ejected, without being read, to the cassette for some reason on the RU side. -
During routine processing, an attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data from the RU to the CL after
11402 Retransmission retry failure cassette ejection
communication down processing with the CL, the CL rejects it, so that the image data is lost, and the cassette is ejected.
6.1
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the user attempts to output a test image in M-Utility without barcode-based ID registration, while the
machine is used in the N-to-N connection setup. Alternatively, this error occurs when the DIP switch of the CPU12A board is
set to "no barcode".
11403 Barcode load request
-
The barcode cannot be read.
• The barcode attached on the IP is tarnished or soiled.
• The barcode reader is not working properly or the barcode reader installation position is improper.
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the menu is not selected only in the N-to-N connection setup while a test image is outputted in M-
Utility.
11404 Patient information not registered
-
The patient information corresponding to the barcode attached on the IP has not been registered. Alternatively, the barcode
cannot be read because, for example, the barcode attached on the IP is tarnished or soiled.
An inquiry is made from the RU to the CL as to the image data transfer destination, but the transfer destination is not notified
11405 Patient information search error from the CL. -
It is necessary to troubleshoot the CL.
Thermistor failure detection (during erasure During bootup, it is detected that temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled due to temperature thermistor (THB1)
11731 initialization) error.
6.4
Thermistor status error detection (during During bootup, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects an abnormal range. Temperature control of the erasure unit is
11732 erasure initialization) disabled.
6.4
Lamp unlit detection (during erasure During bootup, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L2) of the three
11737 initialization) erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit.
6.4
Thermistor failure detection (during IP

11751 processing)
During routine processing, error for the temperature thermistor (THB1) is detected. 6.4
Erasure unit temperature status inconsistency During routine processing, error for the temperature states (LED: D15, D11, D10, D13) in the erasure unit is detected.
11752 (during IP processing) Temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled.
6.4
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
Lamp unlit detection (during erasure idle During machine idle state, in order to perform erasure temperature control, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their
11757 temperature control) lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L2) of the three erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit.
6.4
During IP erasure, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L2) of the three
11767 Lamp unlit detection (during IP erasure lighting)
erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit.
6.4
11781 Thermistor failure detection (during idling) During idle state after machine bootup, error for the temperature thermistor (THB1) is detected. 6.4
Erasure unit temperature status inconsistency During bootup, error for the temperature states (LED: D15, D11, D10, D13) in the erasure unit is detected. Temperature
11782 (during idling) control of the erasure unit is disabled.
6.4
11890 Power supply C31 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse C31 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.5
12026 Image transfer timeout During routine processing, the image data is not sent from the sub-CPU of the CPU12A board to the CL. (Timeout error) 6.1
Initialization of the backup memory on the CPU12A board is executed.

• The machine that has been powered OFF for several months is booted up.
12028 Backup SRAM initialization warning
• The machine is booted up after the backup memory is cleared in M-Utility.
-
• The machine is booted up after erasure mode switching and resetting are performed and the backup memory is cleared.
12033 Barcode data reading error Because an attempt to read the barcode data on the CPU12A board, a retry is performed. 8
During bootup and routine processing, because the erasure lamps are turned on without preheating them, the erasure lamps
12035 Preheat warning during erasure lamp lighting
are not lit.
6.4
During bootup and routine processing, a timeout occurs for communication between the main CPU (CPU12A board) and
12036 Scanner communication timeout
scanner H8CPU (SCN12A board).
6.3
During bootup and routine processing, a checksum error occurs for communication between the main CPU (CPU12A board)
12037 Scanner communication checksum error
and scanner H8CPU (SCN12A board).
6.3
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, because an attempt to register the reset switch interrupt on the CPU12A board fails,
12040 Failure to register reset switch interrupt
the reset switch does not function.
8
Service job log

12062 HOST alternative function warning • The machine is booted up after erasure mode switching and resetting are performed and the backup memory is cleared. -
• The image output function is activated by using the M-Utility function on the RU side.
During routine processing, because the data sent from the sub-CPU of the CPU12A board has an insufficient or excess
12063 Image processing CPU error during operation number of pixels, the software performs processing to supplement or cut the insufficient or excess number of pixels in the 8
line direction.
During bootup and routine processing, an attempt to write to the backup memory (SRAM) fails. Or, a write to the backup
12070 Backup SRAM write error
SRAM is performed during backup memory test.
8
12071 Flash ROM write error An attempt to write the flash ROM on the CPU12A board fails. 8
During bootup and routine processing, the software executes an abnormal case. Although the process may be resumed as
12090 Software logic warning
is, its error log is generated.
-
During bootup and routine processing, the FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from the RU to the CL. Or,
12092 FTP server access error
the FTP server may be accessed, but a connection cannot be established.
6.1
During bootup and routine processing, the FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from the RU to the CL. Or,
12093 FTP server file acquisition error
the FTP server may be accessed, but a file cannot be obtained.
6.1
<Software error>
If the software version is A06 and the operation mode indicated by the detailed error information is "IR", this event is logged
due to a software bug. In this instance, no remedial action needs to be taken.
12094 ACK timeout
6.1
During bootup and routine processing, a FTP server connection timeout error occurs for communication from the RU to the
CL.
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
• A warning log indicating that dummy data was sent from the CPU12A board due to image data shortage.
12101 Image processing CPU data output shortage
• During routine processing, the image data sent from the SCN12A board to the CPU12A board is insufficient.
6.2
Image frame clock timeout during routine A timeout of the frame clock lock (information indicative of the beginning of the image data) from the SCN12A board is
12148 processing detected by the sub-CPU. (30 seconds)
6.3
An error is detected for the pixel clock from the sub-CPU to the SCN12A board.
12149 Image processing pixel clock excess error • The pixel clock that is larger than the parameter value is detected. 6.3
• The pixel clock, which is part of image data, denotes the number of pixels per one line of the image data.
During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN12A board is processed, an insufficient number of pixels for a
12150 Image processing pixel clock shortage error
certain line is detected by the sub-CPU.
6.3
During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN12A board is processed, an excess number of lines is
12151 Image processing line clock excess error
detected.
6.3
During routine processing, when the image data from the SCN12A board is processed, an insufficient number of lines is
12152 Image processing line clock shortage error detected, or even when five seconds have passed after the trailing edge of a certain line clock, the trailing edge of its 6.3
subsequent line clock cannot be detected.
During routine processing, when an image processing command is accepted from the SCN12A board to the sub-CPU, the
12153 Image processing frame clock error
sub-CPU have already received the frame clock from the SCN.
6.3
12154 Image processing overrun error During routine processing, the main CPU loses some of the image data from the sub-CPU. 8
During routine processing, the sub-CPU completes its processing normally, but the number of pixels received by the main
12164 FIFO data count shortage error
CPU via the FIFO is insufficient.
8
During routine processing, the sub-CPU completes its processing normally, but the number of pixels received by the main
12165 FIFO data count excess error
CPU via FIFO is excessive.
8
12201 Start-point detection error During bootup and routine processing, error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is detected. MT-95
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
12202 Leading-edge detection error During bootup and routine processing, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, SED2L) is detected. MT-98
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no main-scan sync signal is generated)
12203 SCN sync signal error
associated with polygon error occurs.
-
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no polygon index signal is generated)
12204 Polygon index signal error
associated with polygon error occurs.
-
12211 PMT analog power supply error During bootup and routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected. MT-99
12212 Laser light intensity error During bootup and routine processing, only error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is detected. MT-97
12213 Polygon lock error During bootup and routine processing, only error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is detected. MT-100
During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A
12214 Polygon rotation error
board.
14.2
12215 PLL function error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the PLL function on the SCN12A board. 14.2
14.2
12216 Start-point interval error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the start-point interval function on the SCN12A board.
14.3
12217 High-voltage power supply error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH/L). MT-99
During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the high-voltage command value diagnostics signal on the
12218 High-voltage command value error
SCN12A board.
8
12225 Reading status error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the VSYNC signal on the SCN12A board. 8
12226 Operation line status error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected only for the SEDTM/FCLKTM signal on the SCN12A board. 8
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function, polygon rotation function, start-point interval function on the 14.2
SCN12A board. 14.3
During routine processing, because the PMT high-voltage value is not set correctly on the SCN12A board, error is detected
for the high-voltage command diagnostics.
14.5
During bootup self-diagnostics, error is detected for the start-point mask signal generated from the SCN12A board and the
index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror (POL).
14.3
During routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected (detail code:
12251 Photomultiplier control board error (1)
008200). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000.
MT-99
12252 Photomultiplier control board error (2) During routine processing, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL) is detected. MT-99
12255 Leading-edge detection error During bootup, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, SED2L) is detected. MT-98
During routine processing, IP conveyance overrun occurs due to mechanical error or SCN12A board control error, and only
12256 Leading-edge detection timing error
error for the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals on the SCN12A board is detected.
MT-101
• During routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror (POL) and the start-point
interval function on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 003400).
12262 Polygon rotation error (2)
• During routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) and error for the start-point interval function and
MT-100
polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 003400).
During routine processing, only error for the lock signal (POKL, PONL) from the polygonal mirror (POL) is detected (detail
code: 002000). If error for the SEDTM or FCLKTM signal on the SCN12A board is detected, the detail code is 002003.
MT-100
During routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on
the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 001002). Alternatively, error for the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal
12264 Polygonal rotation error (4) mirror and the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 0010030). Alternatively, error MT-100
for the signals (POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on the SCN12A board is detected (error
code: 001002).
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During routine processing, the laser light intensity is less than 50%, and the laser light intensity error signal (LD1OKL,
12272 Insufficient laser light intensity (1) LD1OKH) is detected (detail code: 004000). Alternatively, the laser light intensity error signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) and laser MT-97
drive current value (LDIF) error are detected (detail code: 014000).
12273 Laser life warning During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. MT-97
During routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function and
polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 801C03). Alternatively, the disabled
12281 Start-point detection error (1) state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail MT-95
code: 800C03). Alternatively, during routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and
error for the PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 801401).
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the start-point interval function on the SCN12A board is detected (detail
12282 Start-point detection error (2) code: 000400). Alternatively, error for the start-point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A 14.3
board is detected (detail code: 001400).
During routine processing, error for the VSYNC signal on the SCN12A board is detected after IP reading is completed (detail
12291 Reading sequence error
code: 000002).
8
Reading is completed by any interrupt other than the leading-edge detection interrupt or end-of-screen interrupt. At the
12292 Reading sequence error during routine (2)
same time, an insufficient number of output lines and a too-early start of reading are detected.
-
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during routine processing, a combination of errors that should not have logically occurred
12299 Error for scanner, etc.
were generated.
-
During routine processing, the sensor is turned OFF after the timeout of the mechanical operation is detected, but the sensor
12301 Sensor error
does not transition to CLOSE.
MT-56
During bootup, the result of IP search indicates the presence of an IP, but the backup memory information indicates that
12302 IP location information logical failure
there is no IP in the machine. Because there is no result of clearing the CMOS, it is logically inconsistent.
MT-55
IP movement error at scanner unit during During bootup, the MB1, MC3, and MZ1 are driven (clockwise) for IP search, but the SC3 does not transition to OPEN within
12304 bootup the specified period of time.
MT-57
IP movement error at erasure conveyor/side- During bootup, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) for IP search, but the SB1 or SC4 do not transition to CLOSE within
12305 positioning conveyor during bootup the specified period of time.
MT-57
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted aslant relative to the reference plane and then pulled out immediately.
12313 Cassette not detected <Occurrence Condition> MT-85
During routine processing, while the SolA1 is tuned ON to hold the cassette, the cassette is pulled all the way out of the
shutter, and SA1 transitions to OPEN.
12318 Suction cup HP return error During bootup and routine processing, SA4 does not transition to CLOSE for suction cup HP check. MT-60
During routine processing, an attempt to read the barcode for feed conveyance fails. Retries (four times or more) are
12324 Barcode reading error
performed, but error results.
MT-87
During bootup and routine processing, the SVA1 is turned ON and the PA1 is turned OFF to perform IP feed leak, but the
12325 Feed leak error
SA5 does not transition to OPEN.
MT-77
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform suction cup home positioning after the cassette is
12326 HP return error during ejection
ejected, but the SA4 does not transition to CLOSE.
MT-60
During routine processing, the MC1 is driven (clockwise) to perform side-positioning home positioning, but the SC1 does not
12334 Side-positioning operation error
MT-61
During routine processing, the MC2 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform side-positioning grip home positioning, but the
12338 Side-positioning grip operation error
SC2 does not transition to CLOSE.
MT-62
12345 FFM drive W.F. disorder During routine processing, wow-flutter error (irregular revolutions) of the FFM motor (MZ1) is detected. MT-86
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft slow grip after driven-shaft grip is completed, but the
SZ2 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN.
MT-64
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft after side-positioning is completed, but the SZ3 does not
transition to CLOSE. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-66
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE.
Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-64
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft slow grip after reading, but the SZ3 does not
transition to OPEN.
MT-66
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates by ±3% relative to its specified value,
12352 Driving shaft grip error stop
but the SZ2 is CLOSE.
MT-66
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft correction grip, but the SZ2 does not transition to
OPEN.
MT-64
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft slow grip and the SZ2 transitions from CLOSE to
12354 Driving shaft grip disorder
OPEN, but the grip time deviates by ±3% relative to its specified value.
MT-66
During bootup and routine processing, because the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates by ±6% relative to its
12355 Driving shaft grip malfunction
specified value, speed correction processing and operation check are performed.
MT-66
During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE. Retries (two
times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-66
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3 does not transition to
OPEN. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
MT-66
During routine processing, the SB1 cannot detect the IP leading edge for after-erasure conveyance (the MB1 is driven
12360 After-erasure conveyance error counterclockwise). To perform load conveyance, the MB1 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SB1 does not transition to -
CLOSE within the specified period of time (20 sec). It is logged, with the operation continued.
12388 IP with improper generation or type detected During routine processing, the IP of the type that is not set in the configuration is detected from the barcode data. -
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5 does
not transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified time (30 sec).
MT-69
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5 does
not OPEN after its transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified time (30 sec).
MT-69
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified period of time (30 sec).
MT-69
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5
does not OPEN after its transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified time (30 sec).
MT-69
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During shutdown processing, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5 does not
transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
MT-69
During bootup, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN
12395 Dust removal operation in low speed to OPEN within the specified time (30 sec) in the low-speed operation mode (the actuator, from its large hole to smaller MT-69
hole).
12401 Software initialization timeout The initialization of the RU software is not completed within the specified period of time. 8
12402 User password setup failure Password setup that is defined in the configuration fails. 8
12403 FTP server registration failure The IP address of the FTP server cannot be registered in the table that manages the OS. 6.1
An attempt to create a device for accessing the FTP server fails. Software automatic version update, log uploading, etc.
12404 Failure to create device for FTP server access
cannot be done.
6.1
<Servicing operation>
If the error is logged each time a normal process is performed, bit 4 of the S1 switch on the CPU12A board is set to OFF (to
12406 Barcode data error indicate that the RU does not have a barcode reader). In this instance, set bit 4 to ON. 8
The data that is scanned by the barcode is inconsistent with the format (A********C: * denotes a numeral).
An image processing command is issued to the image processing unit (sub-CPU), but the status of the sub-CPU does not
12407 Status check error after SCPU command writing
become IDLE or BUSY.
-
After a command is sent, the status of the image processing CPU is not busy. Image reading is not performed, and the IP is
12408 Image processing CPU status error
ejected.
8
12409 IP size error An IP of out-of-range size was set by the conveyance subsystem. -
During bootup, the configuration file in the flash ROM on the CPU12A board causes a checksum error. Because the machine
12410 Configuration checksum error
is rebooted with its default configuration setup, it is necessary to perform configuration user setting.
-
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
Connection monitoring Com-Terminate The communication disabled state between the CL and RU is detected. The communication connection is disconnected
12502 detection once, and enters the connection wait state.
6.1
12700 CPU board initial diagnostics test error The machine is booted up with the SW S5 setting on the CPU12A board in the ON state. -
12701 Bus error detection function error During bootup and routine processing, error is found for the bus error detection. 8
During bootup and routine processing, an interrupt is sent from the main CPU of the CPU12A board to the H8CPU of the
12702 SCN-H8 microprocessor interrupt test error
SCN12A board, but the interrupt is not completed normally.
6.3
During bootup and routine processing, an interrupt is sent from the main CPU of the CPU12A board to the SNS12A board,
12703 Sensor board interrupt test error
but the interrupt is not completed normally.
6.2
Inverter cooling fan operation error (during

12730 erasure initialization)
During bootup, error for the FAN4 (inverter board cooling fan) is detected, but it is activated as usual. 6.4
High-temperature error detection (during

12733 erasure initialization)
During bootup, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects high-temperature error. 6.4
Erasure cooling fan diagnostics error (during During bootup, error for the FAN3 (erasure unit lamp house cooling fan) is detected, but only a warning is recorded, and fan
12735 erasure initialization) control continues as usual.
6.4
Single lamp unlit detection (during erasure During bootup, because one of the three lamps is unlit, the machine is booted up in the mode where the erasure time is
12736 initialization) extended.
6.4
During bootup and routine processing, 12733 or 12753 occurs and the temperature of the erasure unit lamp reaches an
abnormal level, so that the no-erasure mode is temporarily entered.
12743 Erasure unit high-temperature error cancel
Subsequently, because the erasure lamp temperature drops below the specified level (erasure-enabled temperature), it
6.4
returns to the normal mode.
12753 Erasure unit high-temperature error During routine processing and idling, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects high-temperature error. 6.4
Single lamp unlit detection (during erasure idle During idling, when the erasure lamps are turned on for erasure temperature control, a single lamp that is normally lit does
12756 temperature control) not turn on, so that it enters the erasure time extension mode.
6.4
Single lamp unlit detection (during IP erasure During bootup and routine processing, when the erasure lamps are turned on during IP erasure, a single lamp is unlit, so that
12766 lighting) it enters the erasure time extension mode.
6.4
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
An interrupt is received such that the main CPU has accessed the self-reset register that is usually accessed during
12799 Self-reset procedure error
shutdown processing, using improper procedure.
8
Erasure unit safety thermostat TSWB1 During bootup and routine processing, because the erasure unit lamp housing reaches an abnormally high temperature, the
12800 operation safety thermostat TSWB1 is activated.
6.4
During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses A21 on the MTH12A board, A22 on the SCN12A board, and
12810 Power supply A error
A32, A33, A34, and A35 on the SNS12A board is detected.
10.1-10.6
During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses A21 on the MTH12A board and A22 on the SCN12A board is
12811 Power supply A21 error
detected.
10.4
12812 Power supply A22 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse A22 on the SCN12A board is detected. 10.4
12813 Power supply A32 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse A32 on the SNS12A board is detected. 10.5
12817 Power supply A3 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses A32, A33, A34, and A35 on the SNS12A board is detected. 10.1-10.6
12818 Power supply A series detection error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse A21 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.4
During bootup and routine processing, it is detected that a combination of errors for software monitoring is other than a
12819 Power supply A system error
combination from 12810 to 12818.
10.1-10.6
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point B of SLOT2 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.5
12820 Power supply BC error
the blow of the fuses B11, B21, C11, and C21 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.7
12821 Power supply C error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses C11 and C21 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.5
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point B of SLOT2 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.5
12822 Power supply B error
the blow of the fuses B11 and B21 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.7
12823 Power supply B11 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse B11 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.5
12824 Power supply B21 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse B21 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.5
12827 Power supply B series detection error During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point B of SLOT2 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted. 10.7
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point B of SLOT2 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, or
10.5
12828 Power supply BC system error either of B11, B21, C11 or C21 on the MTH12A board is detected as defective, but a combination of errors for software
10.7
monitoring is other than a combination from 12820 to 12827.
10.2
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point D of SLOT3 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.3
12830 Power supply DE error
the blow of the fuses D11, D21, D31, D41, E11, E21, E31, and E41 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.6
10.7
10.2
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point D of SLOT3 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.3
12831 Power supply D error
the blow of the fuses D11, D21, D31, and D41 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.6
10.7
10.2
12832 Power supply E error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses E11, E21, E31, and E41 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.3
10.6
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
12833 Power supply D11 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse D11 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.2
12837 Power supply E11 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse E11 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.2
12841 Power supply D series detection error During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point D of SLOT3 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted. 10.7
During bootup and routine processing, the broken line detection circuit D or either D11, D21, D31, D41, E11, E21, E31, or 10.2
12842 Power supply DE system error E41 is detected as abnormal, but a combination of errors for software monitoring is other than a combination from 12830 to 10.3
12841. 10.6
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point H of SLOT4 (+15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.4
12850 Power supply H error
the blow of the fuses H11 on the MTH12A and H12, H13, and H14 on the SCN12A is detected. 10.7
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses H11 on the MTH12A board and H12, H13, and H14 on the
12851 Power supply H11 error
SCN12A board is detected.
10.4
12852 Power supply H12 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse H12 on the SCN12A board is detected. 10.4
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point H of SLOT4 (+15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, or 10.4
12855 Power supply H series detection error
the blow of the fuse H11 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.7
During bootup and routine processing, it is detected that a combination of error for software monitoring is other than a
12856 Power supply H system error
10.4
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point J of SLOT4 (-15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.4
12860 Power supply J error
the blow of the fuses J11 on the MTH12A and J12 on the SCN12A board is detected. 10.7
During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses J11 on the MTH12A board and J12 on the SCN12A board is
12861 Power supply J11 error
detected.
10.4
12862 Power supply J12 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse J12 on the SCN12A board is detected. 10.4
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point J of SLOT4 (-15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, or 10.4
12863 Power supply J series detection error
the blow of the fuse J11 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.7
12864 Power supply J system error
10.4
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point K of SLOT5 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and 10.4
12870 Power supply K error
the blow of the fuse K11 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.7
12871 Power supply K11 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse K11 on the MTH12A board is detected. 10.4
12872 Power supply K series detection error During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point K of SLOT5 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted. 10.7
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point L of SLOT5 (+15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and
10.3
12880 Power supply L error the error for the regulator L12 on the DRV12A board and the blow of the fuses L11, L21, and L31 on the DRV12A board are
10.7
detected.
During bootup and routine processing, the error for the regulator L12 on the DRV12A board and the blow of the fuse L11 on
12881 Power supply L11 error
the DRV12A board are detected.
10.3
12882 Power supply L12 error During bootup and routine processing, the error for the regulator L12 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.3
12883 Power supply L21 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuses L21 and L31 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.3
12884 Power supply L31 error During bootup and routine processing, the blow of the fuse L31 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.3
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point L of SLOT5 (+15V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, or 10.3
12885 Power supply L series detection error
the blow of the fuse L11 or L21 on the DRV12A board is detected. 10.7
12886 Power supply L system error
10.7
During bootup and routine processing, the voltage at point E of SLOT2 (+24V) on the power supply unit is not outputted, and
12891 Power supply C series detection error
the blow of the fuse C11, C21, or C31 on the MTH12A board is detected.
10.7
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
12921 Image processing CPU status error During routine processing, a status error occurs between the main CPU and sub-CPU on the CPU12A board. 8
12922 FTP server detection error During bootup and routine processing, the FTP server cannot be detected for communication from the RU to the CL 6.1
12923 Application download error An attempt to download an application from the FTP server of the CL to the CPU12A board of the RU fails. 6.1
12960 Message format error A message that is not defined in the FRUP protocol is received for communication from the RU to the CL. 6.1
12961 ACK timeout A timeout in connection with the FTP server is detected for communication from the RU to the CL. 6.1
12970 Backup memory write warning During bootup and routine processing, an attempt to write to the backup memory of the CPU12A board fails. 8
13010 Utility command concurrent execution error Bootup by use of the production tool and bootup in M-Utility from the CL are performed concurrently. -
13011 Utility command parameter error An entry that is out of range that may be inputted in M-Utility is made. -
The content of the file in the FTP server is different from the content of the file (IPL data, APPL data) in the flash ROM on the
13020 File comparison error
CPU12A board of the RU.
6.1
13092 Software logic warning After power ON, the machine is in condition that is not set in software. 8
13200 High-voltage OFF during bootup During bootup, the photomultiplier (PMT) high voltage is OFF. 14.5
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
13201 Start-point detection error During M-Utility operation, only error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is detected. MT-95
13202 Leading-edge detection error During M-Utility operation, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1L, SED2L) is detected. MT-98
13203 Start-point mask signal error During M-Utility operation, only error for the start-point mask signal on the SCN12A board is detected. 8
13204 Polygon index signal error During M-Utility operation, only error for the polygon index signal on the SCN12A board is detected. 8
13208 Laser drive current error During M-Utility operation, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. MT-97
During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not detected within 6 seconds after turn-ON of the polygonal
13210 Polygon lock timeout
mirror.
MT-100
13211 PMT analog power supply error During M-Utility operation, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected. MT-99
13212 Laser light intensity error During M-Utility operation, only error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is detected. MT-97
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
13213 Polygon lock error During M-Utility operation, only error for the polygon signal (POKL, PONL) is detected. -
13214 Polygon rotation error During M-Utility operation, only error for the polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board is detected. -
13215 PLL function error During M-Utility operation, only error for the PLL function on the SCN12A board is detected. -
13216 Start-point interval error During M-Utility operation, only error for the start-point interval function on the SCN12A board is detected. -
13217 High-voltage power supply error During M-Utility operation, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL) is detected. MT-99
During M-Utility operation, only error for the high-voltage command value diagnostics signal on the SCN12A board is
13218 High-voltage command value error
detected.
-
13225 Reading status error During M-Utility operation, only error for the VSYNC signal on the SCN12A board is detected. -
13226 Operation line status error During M-Utility operation, only error for the SEDTM/FCLKTMSED signal on the SCN12A board is detected. -
13227 Reading IP size error The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for shading correction of the M-Utility, so that error is detected. -
Shading correction/polygon correction data

13228 error
Error for the correction calculation is detected in shading correction of the M-Utility. -
13229 HVCNT value error During M-Utility operation, an out-of-spec HV is inputted. -
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
• The start-point mask signal issued from the SCN12A board varies by 0.02%, peak to peak.
13240 Start-point mask signal warning
• The detection of 12241 error is done with 2% variations.
-
• The FCLK signal issued from the SCN12A board varies by 0.05%, peak to peak.
13260 Main-scan interval warning
• The detection of 14261 or 14262 error is done with 0.2% variations.
-
This error occurs when the surrounding temperature around the machine changes drastically.
Note that with software version A06 or earlier, even if this error occurs only once, it will be logged every time the machine is
booted, due to its software bug.
13270 LDIF MAX update To reset this error, execute "INITIALIZE" of "[8-1] BACKUP MEMORY" in M-Utility. -
During bootup self-diagnostic checks, it is detected that the LD drive current value varies by more than 5 mA. In order to
adjust the insufficient amount of light due to degraded LD (to maintain the same amount of light), it is necessary to vary the
LD drive current by more than 5 mA.
13289 Format adjustment calculation result error In M-Utility, when image format adjustments are performed, the adjustment result is out of normal range. -
13314 Cassette detection logic error During routine processing, the SA2 is CLOSE (the cassette is detected), but the SA1 is OPEN (the shutter is closed). MT-85
During cassette ejection, because the status of the sensor SA4 changes upon demagnetization of the motor that drives the
13326 HP return error during ejection
IP removal unit, home-positioning of the IP removal unit is performed.
-
This error may occur during bootup, as the belt of the subscanning unit is stiffened because the machine is not in use for a
long time (e.g., the power remains OFF since the pervious day in the wintertime).
13355 Subscanning grip speed data update
During bootup and routine processing, the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates by ±3% relative to its specified value,
MT-64
and the SZ2 transitions to OPEN, so that speed correction processing is performed.
During bootup, when the conveyance-related backup memory information is checked, the result indicates that it has been
13386 Conveyance CMOS cleared
cleared.
-
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
13391 Dust removal mechanism lock (1)
(x2) of the drive gear, but the SZ5 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN within the specified period of time (30 sec).
MT-69
(x2) of the drive gear, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified period of time (30 sec).
MT-69
During bootup, SZ5 detects the transition from CLOSE to OPEN to CLOSE when the length of the hole (x2) of the drive gear
is measured, but the OPEN state cannot be detected.
Because the drive gear is engaged with the worm gear too tight, the locked condition occurs (MZ3 stops) before the dust
MT-69
removal operation is completed.
13405 Symbol table creation failure The table used to register the function to the OS on the CPU12A board cannot be created. 8
13411 Serviceman reading mode The erasure conveyance mode has been entered, or the erasure conveyance mode has been exited. -
13501 Connection monitoring Com-Break detection The communication between the CL and RU is disconnected. -
13502 Connection monitoring Com-Down detection Because no response is returned from the destination, the connection is disconnected once and connected again. -
13503 Network connection error Network connection is checked from the RU, but there is no response. -
13504 ping execution error In M-Utility, ping is executed, but an error results due to improper input value. -
13505 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL -
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
The main CPU has read the image data of the specified size, but the sub-CPU (image processing CPU) does not become
13506 Image data count mismatch idle, so that the image data is not transmitted. -
The RU software automatically broke the connection with the RU and then retransmitted the image.
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the RU, so that the image was retransmitted from the RU.
13507 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs due to hardware failure of the network, thereby causing frequent -
retries. It is therefore supposed that the receiving process of the CL is delayed.
<Software error>
When the software version is A07, this error may be detected under incorrect conditions. If no image abnormality exists
when software version A07 is used, no remedial action needs to be taken.
13508 Erasure lamp confirmation warning
During bootup or during routine processing, the erasure lamp that is lit is turned off, before the software instructs the end of
6.4
erasure, while in the IP erasure mode.
The erasure of the IP that was processed at that time is incomplete, so that if an exposure is performed using that IP, images
are overlapped.
IP loading before erasure initialization Log indicating the IP processing under condition where, during bootup, the mechanical/scanner/electrical diagnostics are
13738 completion completed, but initialization of the erasure unit is not completed.
-
13800 Backup SRAM test error An error is detected for the backup SRAM test in electrical utility. 8
13801 SDRAM test error An error is detected for the SDRAM test in electrical utility. 8
<Service Procedure>
This error occurs when a combination of main CPU APPL version of A05 or later and IPL version of A01 has been installed.
13802 Checksum error It also occurs when a combination of main CPU APPL version of A04 or earlier and IPL version of A02 has been installed. 8
The data in the flash ROM (IPL or APPL portion) of the RU is corrupted.
13803 Flash ROM read/write error An error is detected for the read/write test of the flash ROM in the electrical utility. 8
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<Service Procedure>
13804 CPU12A interrupt error A05 or later, but the backup memory/error log/trace log is not initialized. 8
An error is detected for the CPU12A interrupt test in electrical utility.
13805 Network register error An error is detected for the network register check in electrical utility. 8
13806 SCN12A register test error An error is detected for the register read/write test on the SCN12A. 8
13807 SCN12A interrupt error An error is detected for the SCN12A interrupt test in electrical utility. 8
13808 SCN12A H8 communication error An error is detected for the communication test with H8 of the SCN12A in electrical utility. 8
13809 SND12A board register error An error is detected for the SND12A register test in electrical utility. 8
13810 Sensor test error An error is detected for the sensor test in electrical utility. 8
13811 Panel LED error An error is detected for the panel LED test in electrical utility. 8
13812 Solenoid error An error is detected for the solenoid test in electrical utility. 8
13813 Pulse motor error An error is detected for the pulse motor test in electrical utility. 8
13814 SND12A board interrupt error An error is detected for the SND12A interrupt test in electrical utility. 8
13815 INV12A register error An error is detected for the INV12A register check in electrical utility. 8
13816 Erasure lamp test error An error is detected for the erasure lamp test in electrical utility. 8
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
13817 Image processing CPU SDRAM test error An error is detected for the image processing CPU SDRAM test in electrical utility. 8
13818 Image processing FIFO test error An error is detected for the image processing CPU FIFO test in electrical utility. 8
13819 Barcode communication error An error is detected for the barcode communication test in electrical utility. 8
13820 Barcode data read test error An error is detected for the barcode reading test in electrical utility. 8
13821 Power supply monitoring register error An error is detected for the power supply monitoring register check in electrical utility. 8
Reset cancel error during image processing During bootup, the reset state of the sub-CPU of the CPU12A board is canceled, but a timeout error occurs, still in the reset
14101 CPU initialization state.
8
Timeout error during image processing CPU During bootup, the reset state of the sub-CPU of the CPU12A board is canceled, but a timeout error occurs, still in the reset
14102 initialization state.
8
During bootup, the reset state of the sub-CPU of the CPU12A board is canceled, but a timeout error occurs in the control
Control program area error during image
14103 processing CPU initialization
program area error state (image processing APPL checksum error is detected), while waiting for a predetermined period of 8
time until the status of the sub-CPU becomes idle.
During bootup, because the sub-CPU on the CPU12A board is booted normally, a test command for FIFO (memory for
FIFO test error during image processing CPU
14104 initialization
transaction of image data from the sub-CPU) is sent to the sub-CPU to execute diagnostics, but an error is found in 32770 8
counts of data received by the main CPU.
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
Image memory test error during image During bootup, because the sub-CPU on the CPU12A board is booted normally, an image memory test command is sent to
14105 processing CPU initialization the sub-CPU to execute diagnostics, but an error results.
8
SCN bus test error during image processing During device initialization, the sub-CPU boots normally, but the sub-CPU detects an error as a result of performing an
14106 initialization (1) image data transfer test from the SCN12A board to the sub-CPU on the CPU12A board by use of the image data test path.
6.3
SCN bus test error during image processing During device initialization, the sub-CPU boots normally, but the sub-CPU detects an error as a result of performing an
14107 initialization (2) image data transfer test from the SCN12A board to the sub-CPU on the CPU12A board by use of the image data test path.
6.3
Abort error during image processing CPU During bootup, the sub-CPU that is in the reset state is reset-canceled by software, but the status of the sub-CPU times out
14108 initialization waiting for the idle state. Or, the status of the sub-CPU becomes uncontrollable.
8
During routine processing, in order to execute image processing, an image memory clear command, image processing
14122 Image processing CPU sequence error command, image reoutput command, etc. are sent to the sub-CPU on the CPU12A board, but a sequence error is detected 6.3
by the main CPU.
During routine processing, because an IP is loaded, an image processing command or image reoutput command is sent to
14123 Image processing CPU parameter error the image processing section to execute the processing, but the sub-CPU detects a parameter error. (The image processing 8
section detects an out-of-spec command.)
Image processing CPU out-of-spec command
14124 error
the image processing section to execute the processing, but the sub-CPU detects a parameter error. (The image processing 8
section detects an out-of-spec command.)
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
14125 Image processing CPU command reject error
the image processing section to execute the processing, but the sub-CPU reports the reject status.
8
14211 PMT analog power supply error during bootup During bootup and routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected. MT-99
During bootup, error is detected for the PLL function, polygon rotation function, and start-point interval function on the 14.2
14241 Scanner control board error during bootup (1)
SCN12A board. 14.3
During bootup, because the PMT high-voltage value is not set correctly on the SCN12A board, error is detected for the high-
14242 Scanner control board error during bootup (2)
voltage command diagnostics.
14.5
Photomultiplier control board error during During bootup, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected (detail code: 008200).
14251 bootup (1) Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000.
MT-99
During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror function is disabled.
The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) are also disabled (detail code: D03403).
MT-100
• During bootup, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse (H13 on the
SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: 815403).
• During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are disabled due to
14271 Laser unlit error during bootup
blow of the fuse (H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: C15403).
MT-102
• During bootup, error for the laser drive current value (LDIF) occurs and the start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge
detection (SED) functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse (H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: C04003).
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
• During bootup, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function and polygon
rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 801C03). Alternatively, the disabled state of the
start-point detection (SYN) function and error for the PLL function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 800C03).
14281 Start-point detection error during bootup (1) Alternatively, during routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point-detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL MT-95
function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 801401).
• During bootup, the start-point detection (SYN) function is disabled (detail code: 801402). Alternatively, the start-point
detection (SSH, SSL) cannot be performed (detail code: 800002).
During bootup, only error for the start-point interval function on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 000400).
14282 Start-point detection error during bootup (2) Alternatively, error for the start-point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board is 14.3
detected (detail code: 001400).
During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are disabled due to
14283 Scanning optics unit board error During bootup
laser failure or disconnected connector (detail code: C05401).
MT-97
<Service Procedure>
This error occurs when the version of the M-Utility is checked or error log backup is executed during RU bootup.
14295 Scanner send/receive error <Occurrence Condition> 6.3
During bootup, routine processing, or maintenance utility, control communication is conducted between the CPU12A board
and SCN12A board, but scanner unit error is detected, so that control communication is not completed normally.
During bootup, routine processing, or maintenance utility, communication between the CPU12A board and SCN12A board
14296 Scanner transmission sum check error
can be established, but sum check error from the SCN12A board is detected.
6.3
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup, routine processing, or maintenance utility, communication between the CPU12A board and SCN12A board
14297 Scanner receive size error
can be established, but data size error from the SCN12A board is detected.
6.3
During routine processing, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and the scanner
14298 Before-reading scanner retry error
is initialized.
MT-96
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during routine processing, a combination of errors that should not have logically occurred
14299 Error for scanner, etc.
were generated.
-
<User Operation>
to the reference plane.
14310 Cassette hold failure retry
MT-72
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned OFF, the SA3 transitions to CLOSE,
so that retries (within five times) are performed.
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the cassette is pulled in the cassette hold non-released condition.
14312 Cassette hold release failure retry <Occurrence Condition> MT-72
During routine processing, the SolA1 is turned ON to release the cassette hold, but the SA3 does not transition to CLOSE
within the specified period of time, so that retries (within five times) are performed.
Suction cup HP detection preparation During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (clockwise), but the SA4 does not transition to CLOSE within the
14315 positioning retry specified period of time.
MT-60
Suction cup HP detection preparation return During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SA4 does not transition to OPEN within
14316 retry the specified period of time.
MT-60
During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (one-pulse driving) for home positioning, but the SA4 does not
14317 Suction cup HP detection retry
transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
MT-60
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
<User Operation>
14319 Feed IP suction failure retry <Occurrence Condition> MT-74
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) and the PA1 is turned ON to perform IP feed leak, but the
SA5 transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
During bootup and routine processing, the MA1 and MB1 are driven (clockwise) to feed the IP from the cassette, but the SA5
transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is gripped by the rollers, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-74
During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (clockwise) to perform IP feed leak and conveyance, but the SB1
14321 Feed IP grip failure retry
transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
MT-74
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform IP high-speed conveyance, but the SC3
14322 Feed conveyance retry
transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
MT-74
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to determine the IP size, but the SB1 transitions to
14323 Length-measurement conveyance retry
OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
MT-76
During routine processing, because an attempt to read the barcode for feed conveyance fails, retries (within three times) are
14324 Barcode reading retry
performed.
MT-87
Side-positioning HP detection preparation

14331 positioning retry
During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (clockwise), but the SC1 does not transition to CLOSE. MT-61
Side-positioning HP detection preparation return

14332 retry
During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SC1 does not transition to OPEN. MT-61
During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (one-pulse driving) to perform home positioning, but the SC1 does
14333 Side-positioning HP detection retry
not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
MT-61
Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation

14335 positioning retry
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SC2 does not transition to CLOSE. MT-62
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation
14336 return retry
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (clockwise), but the SC2 does not transition to OPEN. MT-62
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (one-pulse driving) to perform home positioning, but the SC2 does
14337 Side-positioning grip HP detection retry
not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
MT-62
During bootup or routine processing, the SolZ1 is turned ON to protrude the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to
14340 IP stopper protrusion retry
OPEN, so that retries (within five times) are performed.
MT-63
During bootup, routine processing, U-Utility dust removal operation, and shutdown processing, the SolZ1 is turned OFF to
14341 IP stopper retreat retry
retreat the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to CLOSE, so that retries (within 5 times) are performed.
MT-63
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driving shaft, but the SZ2 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a
retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-64
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE,
so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-66
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE, so
that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-64
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN, so that a retry
(within one time) is performed.
MT-66
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN, so that a retry (within one
time) is performed.
MT-64
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE or the SZ3 does not
transition to CLOSE, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-64
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE,
so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-66
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3 does not transition to
OPEN, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
MT-66
During routine processing, the PA1 is tuned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load the IP into the cassette, but
14372 Load IP suction failure retry
the SA5 transitions to OPEN within the specified period of time, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
MT-82
14373 Load IP drop retry
but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is released, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
MT-82
Because 11731, 11732, 11737, 11751, 11757, or 11767 occurs so that temperature control is disabled, the mode shifts to
18740 Inerasable cassette ejection
the no-erasure mode with a message displayed. The IP that is read while in the no-erasure mode is not erased.
-
Because 12736, 12756, or 12766 occurs so that a single lamp is unlit, the mode shifts to the erasure time extension mode
18741 Incomplete erasure where the erasure time is extended twice. The IP that is read while in the erasure time extension mode is erased with the 6.4
extended erasure time.
12733 or 12753 occurs, and the temperature sensor (TSB1) detects an abnormal level of temperature.
18742 Erasure temporarily disabled mode • The mode temporarily shifts to the no-erasure mode. -
• The IP that is read while in the no-erasure mode is not erased.
19030 Driver registration error A driver cannot be registered to the OS on the CPU12A board. 8
19031 Driver unregistered During bootup, a device is created without registering its driver on the CPU12A board. 8
19032 Device creation error During bootup and routine processing, an OS system call fails. 8
During bootup and routine processing, a FPMC driver error status is detected for the communication from the SNS12A board
19034 FPMC error
to the CPU12A board.
6.2
19038 Image processing CPU status error During bootup and routine processing, the main CPU detects an error in the status of the sub-CPU. 8
010-051-06
Error Analysis
Code Flow
When an attempt is made to operate a motor or the like during bootup or routine processing, the specified device cannot be
19039 Device open error
opened.
8
19080 OS system call error (1) During bootup or maintenance utility bootup, an OS system call fails. 8
19090 Software logic error An abnormal case that is unthinkable for the RU software is encountered. 8
19091 Error returned by driver A return signal of the driver called by the application is an error. The detail of the error is notified within the driver software. 8
19094 Socket error A network connection between the RU and CL is established. Various types of error occur for the socket communication. 6.1
010-051-06
MT - 52
■ Meaning of Detail Code

3. Detail Code
● Operation mode
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code
Represents the RU operation status and CL-RU communication status upon occurrence of an
The error log contains the operation mode of the RU and detail code associated with the error that error.
occurred.
This section describes the detail code display format and meaning of each item. REFERENCE
The first and second letters represent the RU operation status and CL-RU communication status, respec-
■ Display of Detail Code tively.
The display of a detail code differs depending on the version of the RU software. Refer to the
appendix for the display of the software of versions A04 or earlier 
“Appendix 1 Display format of older versions, ■ Display Format of Error Log”
[13200] 2001/07/20 14 : 59 : 22 00129B T00 : 2430 ST5N a 075 00028c CL-RU communication status
Display W (Wait) R (Run) T (Terminate)
Error code Occurrence Checkout Log type Log type detail
date information Meaning An error occurred The connection has An error occurred during
Operation immediately after startup, been completed at the shutdown processing,
mode TR6H2542.EPS and the connection is time of error and the connection was
broken. occurrence. terminated.
RU operation status
Display S (Start) B (Busy) I (Idle)
Meaning An error occurred An error occurred An error occurred while
immediately after startup during IP conveyance the RU is in idle state.
of the RU. or during IP
processing.
TR6H2543.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 53
● Log type • T01: Scanner-related log

For the scanner-related log, the sub-error code is displayed.
Log types include the conveyance-related log, scanner-related log, and configuration-related log.
When the sub-error code is displayed, refer to the scanner error detail code and perform error log
The causes of error occurrence may be narrowed down by the log type.
analysis.
“3.2 Scanner Error Detail Code, ■ Meaning of the Six-Digit Detail Code”
T XX :
00: Conveyance-related log T01 : A0DF03

01: Scanner-related log
Sub-error code
02: Configuration-related log TR6H2546.EPS
TR6H2544.EPS
REFERENCE
• T00: Conveyance-related log If there is no sub-error code, the sub-error code field displays “– – – – –”.
For the conveyance-related log, the IP size, type (IP type), IP generation information, and
barcode information are displayed. • T02: Configuration-related log
IP generation
For the configuration-related log, the configuration error file name, error occurrence source line
information number, and detail data are displayed.
T02 : IRSET. CFG : 12 : ABC=“EDF” # Key ABC

T00 : 2430 ST 5N a 07500028c
Configuration error file name Error occurrence source line number Detail data
Type (IP type)
IP size information information Barcode information TR6H2547.EPS
Display IP size Display IP type Barcode reader Display Meaning

18x24cm 1824 ST ST a--------c The barcode could not be read.
8"x10"q 0810 HR HR a12345678c The barcode was read normally.
Available
24x30cm 2430 -- The type could a********c The barcode was read but
10"x12" 1012 not be identified. the data is defective.
14"x14" 1414 or 3535 ** BCR reading error Not available -------- No barcode was found.
14"x17" 1417 or 3543 — No BCR
Unread --------
-------- The size could
not be read.
TR6H2545.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 54
3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors ■ Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code
To each bit of a six-digit detail code is assigned an object to be checked during error check, so that
Scanner errors are detected by checking a plurality of scanner I/O states and finding a combination a bit value of “1” indicates that the object to checked is in error.
of defects and/or failures.
Six digits of detail code
Each I/O status at the time of error occurrence can be identified by checking the detail code in the
error log. 1 2 3 4 5 6 A 0 D F 0 3
■ Display of Detail Code (A04 or Earlier) A 0 D F 0 3 1010 0000 1101 1111 0000 0011
The display of a detail code of a scanner error differs depending on the version of the RU software. TR6H2023.EPS
Refer to the appendix for the display of the software of versions A04 or earlier.
“Appendix 1 Display format of older versions, ■ Display Format of Error Log” NO. Object to be checked Signal source
Hexadecimal
Value of bit
1 Start-point detection sensor SYN12A board 1 2 3 4
The detail code of a scanner error is displayed in the position shown below.
2 Leading-edge detection sensor SED12A board 0 0 0 0 0
1
[12256] 2001/07/20 14 : 59 : 22 00129B T01 : 3D0004 3 Start-point mask signal SCN12A board 1 0 0 0 1
4 Polygon index POL (polygon) 2 0 0 1 0
Error code Log type Detail code 1 – – 3 0 0 1 1
TR6H2560.EPS
2 – – 4 0 1 0 0
2
3 – – 5 0 1 0 1
4 LD drive current LDD12A board 6 0 1 1 0
1 PMT analog power supply PMT12A board 7 0 1 1 1
2 Laser light intensity error LDD12A board 8 1 0 0 0
3
3 Polygon lock POL (polygon) 9 1 0 0 1
4 Polygon rpm SCN12A board A 1 0 1 0
1 PLL function SCN12A board B 1 0 1 1
2 Start-point period SYN12A board C 1 1 0 0
4
3 High-voltage power supply PMT12A board D 1 1 0 1
4 High-voltage command value E 1 1 1 0

SCN12A board
diagnostics
F 1 1 1 1
1 – – TR6H2025.EPS
2 – –
5
3 – –
4 – –
1 – –
2 – –
6
3 Reading status error SCN12A board
4 Operation line status error SCN12A board
TR6H2024.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 55
■ Analysis Flow
4. Error Code Analysis Flow (Mechanism)
10300, 10302, 12302

10300 IP Sensor Logical Inconsistency Y “2. Error Code Table”
During bootup, the remaining IP is ejected, but sensors having physically inconsistent IP sensor “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
results (the CLOSE state of both SB1 and SC3, or the CLOSE state of SB1, SC3, and SC4) are Power supply error N
detected. Alternatively, even though the cassette ejection is detected (the OPEN state of SA1), the (12810-12893) occurs?
cassette insertion is detected (the CLOSE state of SA2) or the cassette hold status (the CLOSE Y
state of SA3) is detected. [Preparation procedures]
Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
10302 Broken wire sensor detected “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
During bootup, the result of IP search detects the presence of an IP, but the backup memory
information indicates that there is no IP in the machine. The backup memory has a record
indicating that the IP conveyance was performed before power recovery. 1
12302 IP location information logical failure Voltage on the CPU12A and

N
Replace the power supply.
During bootup, the result of IP search indicates the presence of an IP, but the backup memory DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Y Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”
information indicates that there is no IP in the machine. Because there is no result of clearing the
“9.1 Checking the Voltage
CMOS, it is logically inconsistent. on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
■ I/O Locations CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N

again.
1
Y “8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Y
M Replace the error-causing board.
“Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume:
IP sensor SB1 “11.2 CPU12A Board”
“11.6 DRV12A Board”
“11.5 SNS12A Board”
Sensors SA1, SA2, and SA3 N Replace the sensor.

FRONT normal? “Service Parts List” volume
Erasure conveyor Y “11. Checking the Sensors”
B unit
IP sensor SC4 Sensors SB1, SC3, and SC4 N Replace the sensor.
normal? “Service Parts List” volume
Y “11. Checking the Sensors”
Side-positioning conveyor N
C unit
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
IP sensor SC3 2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:

M
M “11.2 CPU12A Board”
M “11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2418.EPS
FR6H2223.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 56
10301, 12301 ■ Analysis Flow

10301 Sensor error
During bootup, the sensor is turned OFF after the timeout of the mechanical operation is detected,
but the sensor does not transition to CLOSE. The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
Y “2. Error Code Table”

12301 Sensor error
“1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During routine processing, the sensor is turned OFF after the timeout of the mechanical operation
is detected, but the sensor does not transition to CLOSE. Power supply error N
(12810-12893) occurs?
■ I/O Locations Y
Suction cup HP sensor Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
Cassette set unit
A unit SA4
IP sensor “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
Cassette ejection sensor SB1
SA1 M Barcode reader
1
M
N
Hold sensor Transport motor DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
SA3 MB1 Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage
Cassette IN sensor on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” 11.8 Power Supply”
SA2 Replace the sensor.
N
Each sensor normal?
“Service Parts List” volume and
Y “11. Checking the Sensors” “Checks, Replacement and
FRONT Erasure conveyor Adjustment of Parts” volume
B unit
N Reseat the error-causing board
CPU12A, and SNS12A boards N
and check if the error occurs
tested in M-Utility normal?
again.
1
Y Y
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility”
C unit Error recurs after M-Utility N “Checks, Replacement and
backup memory initialization? END Adjustment of Parts” volume:
M Y “11.5 SNS12A Board”
M “Maintenance Utility volume:
3. [8] BACKUP MEMORY”
N
Error recurs? 1
M Y
M
M Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
Subscanning unit
Z unit “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
FR6H2205.EPS
FR6H2419.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 57
10303, 10304, 10305, 11303, 12304, 12305

During bootup, the result of location information confirmation for IP search indicates the absence of
an IP, but the backup memory information indicates the presence of an IP in the machine. System
shutdown is selected via user intervention.
10304 IP conveyance error during bootup (1)

During bootup, the IP search detects the presence of an IP. The CLOSE state of the SB1, SC3,
and SC4 is detected, and the MB1 and MC3 are driven, but any of the sensors does not transition
to OPEN. The backup memory has a record indicating the presence of an IP in the machine.
10305 IP conveyance error during bootup (2)

During bootup, the IP search detects that there is an IP in the machine that is difficult to convey.
The backup memory has a record indicating the absence of an IP in the machine. IP conveyance
is not performed before power-OFF. It is presumed that the backup memory has been cleared.

During bootup, the IP search determines that there is no IP.
However, the conveyance backup memory has a record indicating the presence of an IP in the
machine for routine processing.
12304 IP movement error at scanner unit during bootup

During bootup, the MB1, MC3, and MZ1 are driven (clockwise) for IP search, but the SC3 does not
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
12305 IP movement error at erasure conveyor/side-positioning conveyor during bootup

During bootup, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) for IP search, but the SB1 or SC4 does
not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 58
■ I/O Locations ■ Analysis Flow

M
IP sensor Transport motor
MB1 Y “2. Error Code Table”
SB1
Power supply error N

FRONT (12810-12893) occurs?
Erasure conveyor Y
B unit [Preparation procedures]
IP sensor and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
SC4 “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
4. Remove the IP left in the machine.
1
C unit DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
Subscanning motor Adjustment of Parts volume:
MZ1 on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” 11.8 Power Supply”
M
M CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N
N
again.
1
Transport motor Replace the error-causing board.
M MC3 “Checks, Replacement and
M Adjustment of Parts” volume:
“11.6 DRV12A Board"
IP sensor
Subscanning unit Sensors SB1, SC3, and SC4 N Replace the sensor.
SC3 FR6H2222.EPS normal?
Z unit “Service Parts List volume”
N Replace the faulty motor.

Motors MB1 and MC3 normal?
Y “12. Checking the Motors” Adjustment of Parts” volume:
“6.10 Motor (MB1)”
“7.8 Motor (MC3)”
Error recurs after M-Utility N
backup memory initialization? END
Y
“Maintenance Utility volume
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

FR6H2420.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 59

10306 IP positioning error at side-positioning conveyor during bootup
During bootup, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform side-positioning operation for The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
remaining IP processing, but the SC3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
time. Y “2. Error Code Table”
10307 Length-measurement conveyance error during bootup N
Power supply error
During bootup, the MZ1, MC3, and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to measure the IP size for (12810-12893) occurs?
remaining IP processing, but the SC3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of Y
time. Alternatively, it transitions to CLOSE but not to OPEN. [Preparation procedures]
■ I/O Locations “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
4. Remove the LP left in the machine.
IP sensor
SB1
1

M normal? “Service Parts List” volume
Transport motor
MB1
N Replace the faulty motor.

MB1, MC3, and MZ1 normal?
Y “12. Checking the Motors” Adjustment of Parts” volume:
“6.10 Motor (MB1)”
FRONT “7.8 Motor (MC3)”
Erasure conveyor “10.5 Motor (MZ1)”
B unit Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.
DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
IP sensor Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”
SC4 on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”

CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N N
again.
1
C unit Y “8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Y
Subscanning motor
MZ1 Replace the error-causing board.
M Error recurs after M-Utility N “Checks, Replacement and
M backup memory initialization? END Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Y “11.6 DRV12A Board"
“Maintenance Utility volume “11.5 SNS12A Board”
Transport motor
M MC3 N
M Error recurs? 1
M Y
IP sensor Replace the boards in the order named.

Subscanning unit 1. SNS12A
SC3
Z unit 2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
FR6H2211.EPS
FR6H2421.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 60
10318, 12318, 12326, 14315, 14316, 14317 ■ Analysis Flow

10318 Suction cup HP operation error

During bootup or routine processing, because error (14315, 14316, 14317) is detected, retries (four The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
times or more) are performed, but error (fatal error) results. beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
12318 Suction cup HP return error “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During bootup and routine processing, SA4 does not transition to CLOSE for suction cup HP Power supply error N
check. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
12326 HP return error during ejection [Preparation procedures]
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform suction cup home and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
positioning after the cassette is ejected, but the SA4 does not transition to CLOSE. “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
14315 Suction cup HP detection preparation positioning retry 1

During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (clockwise), but the SA4 does not transition Voltage on the CPU12A and
N
to CLOSE within the specified period of time. DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage Adjustment of Parts volume:
14316 Suction cup HP detection preparation return retry on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” 11.8 Power Supply”
During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SA4 does not Reseat the error-causing board
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. boards tested in M-Utility normal?
1
again.
14317 Suction cup HP detection retry Y “8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Y
During bootup or routine processing, the MA1 is driven (one-pulse driving) for home positioning, Replace the error-causing board.
but the SA4 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE. Adjustment of Parts” volume:
■ I/O Locations “11.6 DRV12A Board"
Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor

A unit SA4
N Replace the sensor SA4.
Suction cup drive motor MA1 Sensor SA4 normal?
“Service Parts List volume:
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, 03C REF.6”
M SA4, SA5, and SB1”
N Replace the motor MA1.

Motor MA1 normal?
Y “12.1 Checking MA1 and MB1” Adjustment of Parts volume:
5.11 Motor (MA1)”
FRONT N
Error recurs? 1
Y
FR6H2206.EPS

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

“11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2422.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 61
10334, 12334, 14331, 14332, 14333 ■ Analysis Flow

10334 Side-positioning HP operation error
12334 Side-positioning operation error “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During routine processing, the MC1 is driven (clockwise) to perform side-positioning home Power supply error N
positioning, but the SC1 does not transition to CLOSE. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
14331 Side-positioning HP detection preparation positioning retry [Preparation procedures]
During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (clockwise), but the SC1 does not transition and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
to CLOSE. “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
14332 Side-positioning HP detection preparation return retry 1

During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SC1 does not
transition to OPEN. N Replace the power supply.
Voltage on the CPU12A and
14333 Side-positioning HP detection retry Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”
on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
During bootup or routine processing, the MC1 is driven (one-pulse driving) to perform home
positioning, but the SC1 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE. Reseat the error-causing board
CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N and check if the error occurs N
boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
■ I/O Locations
FRONT Replace the error-causing board.

Side-positioning conveyor “11.6 DRV12A Board"
C unit “11.5 SNS12A Board”
N Replace the sensor SC1.
Sensors SC1 normal?
“Service Parts List volume: 05C REF.28”
Y “11.2 Checking SC1,
SC2, SC3, and SC4”
N Replace the motor MC1.
SC1 Motor MC1 normal?
“Service Parts List volume: 05C REF.30”
Side-positioning motor Y “12.2 Checking MC1,
M MC1 MC2, and MC3”
M N
M Error recurs? 1
Y
FR6H2209.EPS

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

FR6H2423.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 62
10338, 12338, 14335, 14336, 14337 ■ Analysis Flow

10338 Side-positioning grip HP operation error

12338 Side-positioning grip operation error “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During routine processing, the MC2 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform side-positioning grip
home positioning, but the SC2 does not transition to CLOSE. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
14335 Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation positioning retry
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (counterclockwise), but the SC2 does not Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
“2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
14336 Side-positioning grip HP detection preparation return retry

1
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (clockwise), but the SC2 does not transition
to OPEN. N Replace the power supply.
DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
14337 Side-positioning grip HP detection retry Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage 11.8 Power Supply”
During bootup or routine processing, the MC2 is driven (one-pulse driving) to perform home on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
positioning, but the SC2 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
■ I/O Locations boards tested in M-Utility normal?
again.
1
FRONT
C unit
SC2 N Replace the sensor SC2.
Sensor SC2 normal?
Y “11.2 Checking SC1, SC2, 05D REF.10”
SC3, and SC4”
N Replace the motor MC2
M Motor MC2 normal?
M Y “12.2 Checking MC1, MC2, Adjustment of Parts volume:
M and MC3” 7.7 Motor (MC2)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Grip release motor
MC2 Y
FR6H2210.EPS
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 63
10340, 10341, 11340, 11341, 14340, 14341 ■ Analysis Flow

■ Error Occurrence Conditions
10340 IP stopper protrusion error beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
During bootup, the SolZ1 is turned ON to protrude the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to Y “2. Error Code Table”
OPEN within the specified period of time. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
results.
(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
During bootup and shutdown processing, the SolZ1 is turned OFF to retreat the stopper, but the [Preparation procedures]
SZ4 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (six times or more) Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
are performed, but error results.

1
During routine processing, the SOLZ1 is turned ON to protrude the IP stopper after IP feed leak,
but the SZ4 transitions to CLOSE. SZ4 checks are retried (two times or more), but error results. Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.
Adjustment of Parts volume:
11341 IP stopper retreat error Y “9.1 Checking the Voltage
11.8 Power Supply”
During routine processing and U-Utility dust removal operation, the SOLZ1 is turned OFF to retreat
the IP stopper, but the SZ4 transitions to OPEN. SZ4 checks are retried (six times or more), but Reseat the error-causing board
error results. boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
14340 IP stopper protrusion retry Y “8. Board Tests Y

in M-Utility”
During bootup or routine processing, the SolZ1 is turned ON to protrude the stopper, but the SZ4 Replace the error-causing board.
does not transition to OPEN, so that retries (within five times) are performed. “Checks, Replacement and
14341 IP stopper retreat retry “11.6 DRV12A Board”
During bootup, routine processing, U-Utility dust removal operation, and shutdown processing, the
SolZ1 is turned OFF to retreat the stopper, but the SZ4 does not transition to CLOSE, so that N Replace the sensor SZ4.
Sensors SZ4 normal?
retries (within 5 times) are performed. “Service Parts List volume:
Y “11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3, 07D REF.13”
SZ4, and SZ5”
■ I/O Locations
N Replace the solenoid SolZ1.
Solenoid SolZ1 normal?
FRONT Y “13. Checking the Actuators” Adjustment of Parts volume:
10.4 Solenoid (SolZ1)”
M Error recurs?
N
1
M
Y
Subscanning unit IP stopper HP sensor Replace the boards in the order named.
SZ4 1. SNS12A
Z unit
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
IP stopper solenoid 4. MTH12A
SolZ1
FR6H2204.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 64
10346, 10348, 10353, 10355, 12346, 12348, 12353, 13355, 14348 Both grip release error
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does
14346, 14348, 14354, 14355 not transition to CLOSE, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
10346 Driving shaft grip error 14354 Initialization grip movement (1) error
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driving shaft, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN,
within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results. so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
10348 Both grip release error 14355 Initialization grip movement (2) error
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE
within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results. or the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.

During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to correct the speed, but the SZ2 does not transition to OPEN
within the specified period of time.

During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ2 does not transition to CLOSE
or the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or
more) are performed, but error results.

During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft slow grip after driven-shaft
grip is completed, but the SZ2 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN.

During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release both grips, but the SZ2 does
not transition to CLOSE. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.

During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft correction grip, but the SZ2
does not transition to OPEN.
13355 Subscanning grip speed data update

This error may occur during bootup, as the belt of the subscanning unit is stiffened because the
machine is not in use for a long time (e.g., the power remains OFF since the pervious day in the
wintertime). During bootup and routine processing, the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates
by ±3% relative to its specified value, and the SZ2 transitions to OPEN, so that speed correction
processing is performed.

During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driving shaft, but the SZ2 does not transition from
CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 65

Driving-side grip release HP sensor FRONT
SZ2
Grip release motor MZ2
M
“2. Error Code Table”
M Y

(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
Subscanning unit
Z unit FR6H2427.EPS 1
Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.

on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” 11.8 Power Supply”

1
Y “8. Board Tests Y
in M-Utility”
N Replace the sensor SZ2.
Sensor SZ2 normal?
Y “11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3, 07B REF.10”
SZ4, and SZ5”
N Replace the motor MZ2.
Motor MZ2 normal?
Y “12.3 Checking MZ2 and MZ3” Adjustment of Parts volume:
10.6 Motor (MZ2)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

FR6H2426.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 66
10347, 10349, 10354, 10356, 10357, 12347, 12349, 12352, 12355 Driving shaft grip malfunction
During bootup and routine processing, because the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates by
12354, 12355, 12356, 12357, 14347, 14349, 14356, 14357 ±6% relative to its specified value, speed correction processing and operation check are
performed.
10347 Driven shaft grip error 12356 Ejection grip error
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does not
within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results. transition to CLOSE. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
<Service Procedure>
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3
This error occurs when the version of the RU application software is updated from any version
does not transition to OPEN. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results.
earlier than A04 to version A05 or later, but the backup memory/error log/trace log is not initialized.
<Occurrence Condition> 14347 Driven shaft grip error
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft, but the SZ3 does
OPEN within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error not transition to CLOSE, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
results.
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to check the grip state, but the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN OPEN, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results
10356 Ejection grip error 14356 Ejection grip error

During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does not transition to During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform ejection grip, but the SZ3 does
CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error not transition to CLOSE, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
results.
During bootup and routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3
During bootup, the MZ2 is driven to perform no-load running, but the SZ3 does not transition to does not transition to OPEN, so that a retry (within one time) is performed.
OPEN within the specified period of time. Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error
results.

During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to grip the driven shaft after side-positioning is
completed, but the SZ3 does not transition to CLOSE. Retries (two times or more) are performed,
but error results.

During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to release the driven shaft slow grip after reading, but
the SZ3 does not transition to OPEN.
12352 Driving shaft grip error stop

During bootup and routine processing, the grip time for the driving shaft grip deviates by ±3%
relative to its specified value, but the SZ2 is CLOSE.
12354 Driving shaft grip disorder

During routine processing, the MZ2 is driven to perform driving-shaft slow grip and the SZ2
transitions from CLOSE to OPEN, but the grip time deviates by ±3% relative to its specified value.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 67

Driven-side grip release HP sensor FRONT
SZ3
Grip release motor

MZ2 The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
M Y “2. Error Code Table”
M “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”

(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
Subscanning unit
Z unit FR6H2432.EPS
1
N Replace the power supply.


again.
1
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”

Sensor SZ3 normal?
Y “11.3 Checking SZ2, 07B REF.10”
SZ3, SZ4, and SZ5”
Motor MZ2 normal?
Y “12.3 Checking MZ2 Adjustment of Parts volume:
and MZ3” 10.6 Motor (MZ2)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

“11.5 SNS12A Board” FR6H2433.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 68

10370 Load positioning error

During routine processing, the MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform load conveyance, but beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
the SB1 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. “2. Error Code Table”
Y
10371 Recovery load positioning error
During error handling, the MB1, MC1, and MZ1 are driven (counterclockwise) for load conveyance
(12810-12893) occurs?
after the IP leading edge is detected by the SB1, but the SB1 does not transition to OPEN within
Y
the specified period of time (20 sec). [Preparation procedures]
■ I/O Locations “2. Error Code Table”
1
M
Transport motor Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.
MB1 DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
IP sensor
SB1
FRONT boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Erasure conveyor Y “8. Board Tests Y
B unit in M-Utility”
IP sensor “Checks, Replacement and
SC4 Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Side-positioning conveyor N Replace the sensor SB1.
Sensors SB1 normal?
C unit “Service Parts List volume:
Subscanning motor Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, 04B REF.25”
SA4, SA5, and SB1”
MZ1
M Motor MB1 normal?
N Replace the motor MB1.
M Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
“12.1 Checking MA1 and MB1”
6.10 Motor (MB1)”

Motor MC3 normal?
Transport motor
M Y “12.2 Checking MC1, MC2, Adjustment of Parts volume:
MC3 and MC3” 7.8 Motor (MC3)”
M
M Motor MZ1 normal?
Y “12.4 Checking the FFM12A Adjustment of Parts volume:
Board” 10.6 Motor (MZ1)”
N
Subscanning unit Error recurs? 1
Z unit Y
FR6H2212.EPS
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 69
10390, 10391, 10392, 10393, 12390, 12391, 12392, 12393, 12394 Dust removal operation error (5)
During shutdown processing, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but
12394, 12395, 13391, 13392, 13395 the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
10390 Dust removal operation error (1) 12395 Dust removal operation in low speed
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ5 does During bootup, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation, but the SZ5 does
not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. not transition from CLOSE to OPEN within the specified time (30 sec) in the low-speed operation
mode (from the large actuator hole to the small hole).
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to measure
the length of the hole (x2) of the drive gear, but a mechanism lock results. During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to measure
the length of the hole (x2) of the drive gear, but the SZ5 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN
Subsequently, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ5 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN
the length of the hole (x2) of the drive gear, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE
the length of the hole (x2) of the drive gear, but a mechanism lock results.
Subsequently, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise), but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE
within the specified period of time. 13395 Dust removal mechanism lock (3)
During bootup, SZ5 detects the transition from CLOSE to OPEN to CLOSE when the length of the
hole (x2) of the drive gear is measured, but the OPEN state cannot be detected.
During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform
Because the drive gear is engaged with the worm gear too tight, the locked condition occurs (MZ3
home positioning, but the SZ5 does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN within the specified period
stops) before the dust removal operation is completed.
of time.
■ I/O Locations
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal FRONT
operation, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.
Dust removal motor
12391 Dust removal operation error (2) MZ3
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal Dust removal sensor
M SZ5
operation, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified time (30 sec).
M
Sensor Drive gear
During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust (SZ5)
removal operation, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE.

During U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform dust
removal operation, but the SZ5 does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE within the specified time Large hole Small hole
Subscanning unit
(30 sec). Z unit
FR6H2203.EPS
010-051-06
04.20.2002 FM3386
FM3386 (1)
MT - 70
■ Analysis Flow

The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
Y “2. Error Code Table” 11.8 Power Supply”
Power supply error N CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N and check if the error occurs N
(12810-12893) occurs? boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Y 1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y “8. Board Tests Y
2. Remove the covers. in M-Utility”
Check the error code table 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. Replace the error-causing board.
again and troubleshoot.
“2. Error Code Table” Adjustment of Parts” volume:
"11.2 CPU12A Board”
"11.6 DRV12A Board”
1 "11.5 SNS12A Board”
N Apply Molykote to Sensor SZ5 normal?
Molykote applied to worm gear? “Checks, Replacement and
the worm gear. Y “11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3, Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y “11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ4, and SZ5” 10.8 Sensor (SZ5)”
10.8 Sensor (SZ5)” Motor M3 normal?
N Y “12.3 Checking MZ2 and MZ3” Adjustment of Parts volume:
Employed software version A07 Update the software to
10.7 Motor (MZ3)”
or later? version A07 or later.
N
Y “Maintenance Utility “Checks, Replacement and Error recurs? 1
volume: Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
[3-2] VERSION” 13. Procedures of Updating
Software Version”
A
FR6H2490.EPS
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 71
10394
A
10394 Dust removal CCW drive error

During bootup or U-Utility dust removal operation, the MZ3 is driven (counterclockwise), but two or Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.
more retries occur. However, driving in the clockwise direction is normal. DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
■ I/O Locations on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” 11.8 Power Supply”
FRONT
Dust removal motor CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N N
MZ3 boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Dust removal sensor
M
M
SZ5 Y “8. Board Tests Y
in M-Utility”
Subscanning unit
Z unit Sensor SZ5 normal?
FR6H2444.EPS “Checks, Replacement and
Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
■ Analysis Flow "11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3,
10.8 Sensor (SZ5)”
SZ4, and SZ5”
Motor MZ3 CCW operation
normal? “Checks, Replacement and
N Adjustment of Parts volume:
The indicated error is at the Check the error code table again for the error
beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Y “12.3 Checking MZ2 and MZ3” 10.7 Motor (MZ3)”

N
“1.2 How to Understand Error Log” Error recurs? 1
Power supply error N Y
(12810-12893) occurs?
Y 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers. Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. 1. SNS12A
again and troubleshoot. 2. DRV12A
“2. Error Code Table” 3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
1 “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:

N Apply Molykote to
Molykote applied to worm gear? “11.2 CPU12A Board”
the worm gear.
Y “11.3 Checking SZ2,
10.8 Sensor (SZ5)”
Employed software version A07 N Update the software to

or later? version A07 or later.
Y “Maintenance Utility “Checks, Replacement and

volume: Adjustment of Parts volume:
[3-2] VERSION” 13. Procedures of Updating
Software Version”
A

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 72
11310, 11311, 14310, 14312 ■ Analysis Flow

<User Operation> The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted without being closely aligned to the reference plane beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
or inserted aslant relative to the reference plane. Y “2. Error Code Table”
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned OFF, the Power supply error N
(12810-12893) occurs?
SA3 does not transition to OPEN. Retries (six times or more) are performed, but error results.
Y
11311 Cassette setting error (2) Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
<User Operation>
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted without being closely aligned to the reference plane
or inserted aslant relative to the reference plane. Alternatively, this error occurs when the cassette 1
is not inserted all the way.
<Occurrence Condition> Voltage on the CPU12A and
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned ON, the Adjustment of Parts volume:
cassette is moved, but the SA2 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
However, the SA1 is CLOSE.
14310 Cassette hold failure retry boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
<User Operation> Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted without being closely aligned to the reference plane Replace the error-causing board.
or inserted aslant relative to the reference plane. “Checks, Replacement and
<Occurrence Condition> “11.2 CPU12A Board”
During routine processing, the SA2 transitions to CLOSE, and after the SolA1 is turned OFF, the “11.6 DRV12A Board”
SA3 transitions to CLOSE, so that retries (within five times) are performed.
Sensor SA2 normal?
14312 Cassette hold release failure retry “Checks, Replacement and
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, Adjustment of Parts volume:
<User Operation> SA4, SA5, and SB1” 5.16 Sensor (SA2)”
This error occurs when the cassette is pulled in the cassette hold non-released condition. N Replace the sensor SA3.
Sensor SA3 normal?
<Occurrence Condition> Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, 03C REF.6”
During routine processing, the SolA1 is turned ON to release the cassette hold, but the SA3 does
N
not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, so that retries (within five times) are Solenoid SolA1 normal? Replace the solenoid SolA1.
performed. Y “13. Checking the Actuators”
5.5 Solenoid (SolA1)”
■ I/O Locations Error recurs?
N
1
Cassette set unit Y
A unit

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
Cassette hold solenoid “11.5 SNS12A Board”
FRONT
SolA1 “11.6 DRV12A Board”
Hold sensor “11.2 CPU12A Board”
SA3 FR6H2202.EPS “11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2446.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 73
11312 ■ Analysis Flow

11312 Cassette hold release error
<User Operation> N
This error occurs when the hold pin does not lower due to the force exerted on the hold pin as the beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
cassette is pulled in the cassette hold non-released condition. Y “2. Error Code Table”
<Occurrence Condition> “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During routine processing, the SolA1 is turned ON to release the cassette hold, but the SA3 does Power supply error N
not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries (six times or more) are per- (12810-12893) occurs?
formed, but error results. Y
Check the error code table again
■ I/O Locations and troubleshoot.
Cassette set unit
A unit 1
M N Replace the power supply.

Cassette hold solenoid Reseat the error-causing board

FRONT CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N and check if the error occurs N
SolA1 1
Hold sensor Y “8. Board Tests
SA3 FR6H2202.EPS Y
in M-Utility”
Sensor SA3 normal?
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, 03C REF.6”
N Replace the solenoid SolA1.
Solenoid SolA1 normal?
Y “13. Checking the Actuators” Adjustment of Parts volume:
5.5 Solenoid (SolA1)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 74
11319, 11320, 11321, 11322, 14319, 14320, 14321, 14322 ■ I/O Locations
Suction cup drive motor MA1

Cassette set unit
11319 Feed IP suction error A unit
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) and the PA1 is turned ON to Leak valve
perform IP feed leak, but the SA5 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. SVA1
Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results. Suction pump
M PA1
11320 Feed IP drop Suction sensor
During bootup and routine processing, the MA1 and MB1 are driven (clockwise) to feed the IP from SA5
M
the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is griped by the rollers. Transport motor
Retries (two times or more) are performed, but error results. MB1
Cassette IN sensor
SA2 IP sensor
11321 Feed IP grip error SB1
During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (clockwise) to perform IP feed leak and
conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. Retries FRONT Erasure conveyor
B unit
(four times or more) are performed, but error results.
11322 Feed conveyance error

During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform IP high-speed
conveyance, but the SC3 transitions to OPEN. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but
error results.
14319 Feed IP suction failure retry C unit
<User Operation>
During routine processing, the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) and the PA1 is turned ON to
perform IP feed leak, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are Transport motor
M MC3
performed.
M
M
During bootup and routine processing, the MA1 and MB1 are driven (clockwise) to feed the IP from
the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is gripped by the rollers, so
that a retry (within one time) is performed.
IP sensor
SC3
14321 Feed IP grip failure retry FR6H2448.EPS
During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (clockwise) to perform IP feed leak and
conveyance, but the SB1 transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.
14322 Feed conveyance retry

During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to perform IP high-speed
conveyance, but the SC3 transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 75
■ Analysis Flow A

N Sensor SA2 normal?
The indicated error is at the Check the error code table again for the error “Checks, Replacement and
beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3,
Y “2. Error Code Table” SA4, SA5, and SB1” 5.18 Sensor (SA2)”
Sensor SA5 normal?
(12810-12893) occurs?
[Preparation procedures] SA4, SA5, and SB1” 5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5)”
Y 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Remove the covers. N Replace the sensor SB1.
Check the error code table again 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. Sensor SB1 normal?
and troubleshoot. 04B REF.25”
1 Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3,
Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply. N Replace the sensor SC3.
DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Sensor SC3 normal?
11.8 Power Supply” Y “11.2 Checking SC1, SC2, SC3, 05D REF.8”
and SC4”
CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N

N
N Replace the pump PA1.
and check if the error occurs Pump PA1 normal?
again.
1 “Service Parts List volume:
Y “13 Checking the Actuators” 03D REF.9”
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”
N Replace the valve SVA1
“Checks, Replacement and Valve SVA1 normal?
“11.2 CPU12A Board” Y “13 Checking the Actuators” 03D REF.6”
Motor MB1 normal?
A “Checks, Replacement and
FR6H2449.EPS
6.10 Motor (MB1)”

Motor MA1 normal?
5.11 Motor (MA1)”
Motor MC3 normal?
Y “12.2 Checking MC1, MC2 Adjustment of Parts volume:
and MC3” 7.8 Motor (MC3)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 76
10360, 10361, 11323, 14323 ■ Analysis Flow

10360 After-erasure conveyance error
During routine processing, the SB1 cannot detect the IP leading edge for after-erasure conveyance The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
(the MB1 is driven counterclockwise). The MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to perform load beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time (20 sec). Y “2. Error Code Table”
10361 After-recovery-erasure conveyance error Power supply error N

During error handling, the SB1 cannot detect the IP leading edge. The MB1, MC1, and MZ1 are (12810-12893) occurs?
driven (counterclockwise) for load conveyance, but the SB1 does not transition to CLOSE within Y
the specified period of time (20 sec). (The SB1 is in OPEN status.) [Preparation procedures]
11323 Length-measurement conveyance error “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to determine the IP size, but 1
the SB1 transitions to OPEN. Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results.

14323 Length-measurement conveyance retry DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
During routine processing, the MB1 and MC3 are driven (clockwise) to determine the IP size, but Adjustment of Parts volume:
the SB1 transitions to OPEN, so that retries (within three times) are performed. on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”

■ I/O Locations CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N
1
again.
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”
M
Transport motor “Checks, Replacement and
MB1 Adjustmen t of Parts” volume:
IP sensor
SB1
N Replace the sensor SB1.
FRONT Sensor SB1 normal?
Erasure conveyor Y “11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, 04B REF.25”
B unit SA4, SA5, and SB1”
Motor MB1 normal?
6.10 Motor (MB1)”
N
Motor MC3 normal? Replace the motor MC3.
Side-positioning conveyor “Checks, Replacement and
Y "12.2 Checking MC1, MC2, Adjustment of Parts volume:
C unit and MC3” 7.8 Motor (MC3)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
Transport motor 3. CPU12A
M MC3 4. MTH12A
M “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
M
FR6H2219.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 77

11325 Load leak error

During routine processing, the SVA1 is turned ON and the PA1 is turned OFF to leak the IP after beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
loading it into the cassette, but the SA5 does not transition to OPEN. “2. Error Code Table”
Y
12325 Feed leak error
During bootup and routine processing, the SVA1 is turned ON and the PA1 is turned OFF to (12810-12893) occurs?
perform IP feed leak, but the SA5 does not transition to OPEN. Y
■ I/O Locations and troubleshoot.
Cassette set unit
A unit 1
Suction cup drive motor MA1 Suction pump
PA1
M Voltage on the CPU12A and N Replace the power supply.
Suction sensor
SA5 Reseat the error-causing board
Leak valve boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
FRONT SVA1
in M-Utility”
FR6H2216.EPS

Sensor SA5 normal?
SA4, SA5, and SB1” 5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5)”
N Replace the valve SVA1.

Valve SVA1 normal?
Y “13. Checking the Actuators” 03D REF.6”
N Replace the pump PA1.

Pump PA1 normal?
Y “13. Checking the Actuators” 03D REF.9”

Motor MA1 normal?
5.11 Motor (MA1)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 78
11342, 11343, 11344 ■ Analysis Flow

11342 Reading IP leading-edge detection error

During routine processing, the MZ1 is driven (clockwise) to perform read processing, but the SZ1 The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
transitions to OPEN. Subsequently, the laser is turned OFF, and when IP conveyance is performed
to isolate the error, the SC3 transitions to OPEN. Y
11343 Subscanning conveyance error (1) Power supply error N

(12810-12893) occurs?
During routine processing, the MZ1 is driven (clockwise) to perform read processing, but the SZ1
transitions to OPEN. Subsequently, the laser is turned OFF, and when IP conveyance is Y
performed to isolate the error, the SC3 transitions to CLOSE. [Preparation procedures]
11344 Subscanning conveyance error (2)
During routine processing, the SC3 does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time 1
before the end-of-image interrupt after reading is initiated.
■ I/O Locations DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
FRONT CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N Reseat the error-causing board

again.
1
Side-positioning conveyor Y “8. Board Tests
C unit in M-Utility” Y
Subscanning motor
MZ1 Replace the error-causing board.
M “Checks, Replacement and

M Sensors SC3 normal?
M Y “11.2 Checking SC1, SC2, SC3, 05D REF.8”
M and SC4”
Sensors SZ1 normal?
Leading-edge sensor IP sensor Y “14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge 07C REF.7”
Subscanning unit SC3 Sensor (SED)”
SZ1
Z unit
Motor MZ1 normal?
Y “12.4 Checking the FFM12A Board” Adjustment of Parts volume:
10.5 Motor (MZ1)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 79

11350 End-of-image timeout
During routine processing, the end-of-image interrupt from the scanner board is not processed The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
within the specified period of time after reading is initiated. beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.

■ I/O Locations “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
FRONT Power supply error N

(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
Subscanning motor Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
MZ1 and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
M “2. Error Code Table” 3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
M
1

SCN12A, CPU12A, DRV12A, Reseat the error-causing board

Leading-edge sensor and SNS12A boards tested N and check if the error occurs N
Subscanning unit
SZ1 in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Z unit FR6H2217.EPS

in M-Utility”
“11.3 SCN12A Board”

Sensors SZ1 normal?
Y “14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge 07C REF.7”
Sensor (SED)”
Motor MZ1 normal?
Y “12.4 Checking the FFM12A Board” Adjustment of Parts volume:
10.5 Motor (MZ1)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 80

11362 After-reading conveyance error
During routine processing, the MZ1, MC3, and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to convey the IP The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
to the erasure unit after reading is completed, but the SC4 does not transition to CLOSE within the
specified period of time.
■ I/O Locations Power supply error N

(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
M Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
and troubleshoot.
Transport motor 2. Remove the covers.
MB1

Erasure conveyor Voltage on the CPU12A and
FRONT DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
B unit Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”

IP sensor CPU12A, DRV12A, and SNS12A N and check if the error occurs N
SC4 boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”

C unit Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Subscanning motor M “11.5 SNS12A Board”
MZ1 N Replace the sensor SB1.
M Sensors SB1 normal?
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, 04B REF.25”
SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5,
and SB1”
M Sensors SA5 normal?
M Y “11.1 Checking SA1, Adjustment of Parts volume:
M SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, 5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5)”
and SB1”
Transport motor
MC3 N Replace the motor MA1.
Motor MA1 normal?
Y “12.1 Checking MA1 Adjustment of Parts volume:
Subscanning unit and MB1” 5.11 Motor (MA1)”
Z unit FR6H2454.EPS N Replace the motor MB1.
Motor MB1 normal?
and MB1” 6.10 Motor (MB1)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 81

11363 Erasure conveyance error

During routine processing, the MC3 and MB1 are driven (counterclockwise) to perform erasure The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
conveyance of the IP after reading, but the SC4 does not transition to OPEN. beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.

(12810-12893) occurs?
M Y
Transport motor [Preparation procedures]
MB1 Check the error code table again 1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
FRONT 1
Erasure conveyor
B unit Voltage on the CPU12A and
IP sensor Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”
SC4 on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”

Side-positioning conveyor boards tested in M-Utility normal?
again.
1
C unit Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”
Side-positioning motor “11.6 DRV12A Board”
MC1 “11.5 SNS12A Board”

M Sensor SC4 normal?
M Y “11.2 Checking SC1, 05D REF.8”
M SC2, SC3, and SC4”
Motor MB1 normal?
Motor MC1 normal?
Y “12.2 Checking MC1, 05C REF.30”
MC2, and MC3”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A

"11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2456.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 82
11371, 11372, 11373, 14372, 14373 ■ Analysis Flow
11371 Load IP drop

During bootup and routine processing, the MB1 is driven (counterclockwise) to reload the IP due to The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
the load IP drop retry (14373) or load IP suction failure retry (14372), but the SB1 does not
transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
N
11372 Load IP suction error Power supply error
(12810-12893) occurs?
During routine processing, the PA1 is turned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load Y
the IP into the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN within the specified period of time. [Preparation procedures]
Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results. and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
11373 Load IP drop

During routine processing, the PA1 is turned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load 1
the IP into the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is released. N Replace the power supply.
Retries (four times or more) are performed, but error results. Voltage on the CPU12A and
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts volume: 11.8 Power Supply”
14372 Load IP suction failure retry on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
During routine processing, the PA1 is tuned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load Reseat the error-causing board
the IP into the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN within the specified period of time, so that boards tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
retries (within three times) are performed. Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”
14373 Load IP drop retry Replace the error-causing board.

During routine processing, the PA1 is turned ON and the MA1 is driven (counterclockwise) to load Adjustment of Parts” volume:
the IP into the cassette, but the SA5 transitions to OPEN at the time when the IP is released, so “11.6 DRV12A Board”
that retries (within three times) are performed. “11.5 SNS12A Board”
N Replace the sensor SB1.
Sensors SB1 normal?
■ I/O Locations Y “11.1 Checking SA1, 04B REF.25”
SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5,
and SB1”
Cassette set unit
A unit N Replace the sensor SA5.
Sensors SA5 normal?
Suction cup drive motor MA1 “Checks, Replacement and
Suction pump Y “11.1 Checking SA1, Adjustment of Parts volume:
M PA1 SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, 5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5)”
and SB1”
Suction sensor Motor MA1 normal?
SA5 Adjustment of Parts volume:
M Y “12.1 Checking MA1
5.11 Motor (MA1)”
and MB1”
Transport motor
MB1 Motor MB1 normal?
IP sensor
SB1 N
Error recurs? 1
Y
Erasure conveyor Replace the boards in the order named.

FRONT 1. SNS12A
B unit 2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
FR6H2215.EPS 4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 83

11380 Maximum empty cassette setting
During bootup, an attempt is made to eject (load) the remaining IP into the cassette, but the The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
cassette has not been set. beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.

Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor Power supply error N

A unit SA4 (12810-12893) occurs?
IP sensor
SB1 Y
Cassette ejection sensor
SA1 M Barcode reader [Preparation procedures]
M
Hold sensor Transport motor 1
SA3 MB1
Cassette IN sensor Voltage on the CPU12A and
SA2 DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
B unit Reseat the error-causing board
1
in M-Utility”

M “11.5 SNS12A Board”
M
Sensor SA2 normal?
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, Adjustment of Parts volume:
SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, 5.16 Sensor (SA2)”
M and SB1”
M N
M Error recurs? 1
Y
Subscanning unit
Z unit Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SNS12A
FR6H2205.EPS
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 84

11387 Recovery IP processing
During bootup, the remaining IP that has not been erased is detected. N
■ I/O Locations Y “2. Error Code Table”
A unit SA4 Power supply error N
IP sensor (12810-12893) occurs?
Cassette ejection sensor SB1 Y
SA1 M Barcode reader
M
Hold sensor Transport motor
SA3 MB1 1
Cassette IN sensor
SA2 N Replace the power supply.
Erasure conveyor on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)”
FRONT
B unit
1
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”

M “11.5 SNS12A Board”
M
N Replace the faulty sensor.
Each sensor normal?
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
Y “11. Checking the “Service Parts List” volume
Sensors”
M
N
M Error recurs? 1
M
Y

1. SNS12A
Subscanning unit 2. DRV12A
Z unit 3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
FR6H2205.EPS


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 85

12313 Cassette not detected

<User Operation> beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
This error occurs when the cassette is inserted aslant relative to the reference plane and then Y “2. Error Code Table”
pulled out immediately. “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
<Occurrence Condition> Power supply error N

(12810-12893) occurs?
During routine processing, while the SolA1 is tuned ON to hold the cassette, the cassette is pulled
all the way out of the shutter, and SA1 transitions to OPEN. Y
and troubleshoot.
13314 Cassette detection logic error 2. Remove the covers.
During routine processing, the SA2 is CLOSE (the cassette is detected), but the SA1 is OPEN (the
shutter is closed).
N
Cassette set? Set the cassette and retry.
■ I/O Locations Y
Cassette set unit 1

A unit
N
Cassette ejection sensor
SA1 M “Checks, Replacement and
on the Board Test Pins 11.8 Power Supply”
(Connectors)”

1
in M-Utility”
Cassette IN sensor
SA2 FRONT Replace the error-causing board.

Sensor SA1 normal?
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, 03D REF.4”
SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5,
and SB1”
Sensor SA2 normal?
Y “11.1 Checking SA1, Adjustment of Parts volume:
SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, 5.16 Sensor (SA2)”
and SB1”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SNS12A
2. DRV12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 86

12345 FFM drive W.F. disorder
During routine processing, wow-flutter error (irregular revolutions) of the FFM motor is detected. N
■ I/O Locations Y “2. Error Code Table”
FRONT

(12810-12893) occurs?
Y
M Check the error code table again
M and troubleshoot. 2. Remove the covers.
Subscanning motor
MZ1

Subscanning unit Adjustment of Parts volume:
Z unit FR6H2466.EPS on the Board Test Pins
(Connectors)”

CPU12A and DRV12A boards N N
and check if the error occurs 1
again.
Y “8. Board Tests
Y
in M-Utility”

N
Replace the motor MZ1.
Motor MZ1 normal?
“12.4 Checking the 10.5 Motor (MZ1)”
FFM12A Board”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. DRV12A
2. CPU12A
3. MTH12A

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 87

12324 Barcode reading error
During routine processing, an attempt to read the barcode for feed conveyance fails. Retries (four The indicated error is at the N Check the error code table again for the error
times or more) are performed, but error results. beginning of the error log? at the beginning, and troubleshoot.

14324 Barcode reading retry “1.2 How to Understand Error Log”
During routine processing, because an attempt to read the barcode for feed conveyance fails, Power supply error N
retries (within three times) are performed. (12810-12893) occurs?
Y
■ I/O Locations [Preparation procedures]
A unit SA4
IP sensor
Cassette ejection sensor SB1 1
SA1 M
Barcode reader
Voltage on the CPU12A board N Replace the power supply.
M Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Hold sensor
Transport motor
SA3
MB1 CPU12A and SNS12A boards, Reseat the error-causing board
Cassette IN sensor as well as barcode, tested
N and check if the error occurs N
in M-Utility normal? again.
1
SA2
in M-Utility”
FRONT Erasure conveyor “Maintenance Utility volume:
B unit [4-6] BARCODE TEST” “Checks, Replacement and
Replace the barcode reader.
04B REF.11”
C unit IP type normal? Replace the IP.
M IP barcode free from scratch, N

Replace the IP.
M soil, or peeling?
Y
N
Error recurs? 1
M
Y
M
1. Barcode reader
2. SNS12A
3. CPU12A
4. MTH12A
Subscanning unit
Z unit FR6H2487.EPS
“Service Parts List volume: 04B REF.11”
FR6H2486.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 88
■ Analysis Flow
5. Error Code Analysis Flow (Scanner)
10230 Errors 10230-10236 logged?

N
Y
■ Error Occurrence Conditions and troubleshoot. 1
10230 Scanner functional error during bootup TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
During bootup, because the connector (CN1 on the PMT12A board, CNE1 on the scanning optics Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
unit, CNE2 on the scanning optics unit, CN1 on the SYN12A board, or CN1 on the LDD12A board) “9.1 Checking the Voltage
is disconnected, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and photomultiplier (PMT) functions on the Board Test Pins
(Connectors)”
are disabled.
CPU12A and SCN12A boards N Reseat the error-causing board N
Because the laser is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail tested in M-Utility normal? and check if the error occurs 1
code: D0F603). Y
again.
“8. Board Tests Y
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is D0F403. in M-Utility”
Replace the error-causing
board.
N
Connectors connected? Restore “11.3 SCN12A Board”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
N Replace the PMT12A board.

Photomultiplier (PMT) normal?
Y “14.5 Checking the Light-Collecting Adjustment of Parts volume:
Unit (PMT)” 9.2 PMT12A Board”
N Replace the SED12A board.
Leading-edge detection (SED)
normal? “Service Parts List volume:
07C REF.7”
Y “14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge
Sensor (SED)”
N
Polygonal mirror (POL) normal?
Y “14.2 Checking the Polygonal Mirror”

N
Laser (LDD) normal?
Y “14.1 Checking the Laser (LDD)”

N
Start-point detection (SYN)
normal?
Y “14.3 Checking the Start-Point Replace the scanning optics unit.
Sensor (SYN)”
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
Reseat the boards in the order named,
and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN12A board
2. Scanning optics unit
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board
“11.3 SCN12A Board"
“8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 89

N
Errors 10230-10236 logged?
10231 Scanner power supply error during bootup (1) Y 1
During bootup, because +15V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (H11 Check the error code table again
and troubleshoot.
on the MTH board) or +15V power supply error, most of the functions, except for the polygonal “2. Error Code Table” TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
mirror (POL) and laser (LDD), are disabled (detail code: A0DF03). board normal?
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A0DD03. Y
on the Board Test Pins
(Connectors)”
Fuse H11 on the MTH12A board N Replace the fuse.

normal?
Y
12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses”
“10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
CPU12A and SCN12A boards N and check if the error occurs N
tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Y Y

"11.3 SCN12A Board”

Laser (LDD) normal?

N
normal?
Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 90

■ Error Occurrence Conditions N

Y 1
10232 Scanner power supply error during bootup (2) Check the error code table again
and troubleshoot. TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
During bootup, because the fuse (H12 on the SCN12A board) is blown, the photomultiplier (PMT) “2. Error Code Table”
board normal?
and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail code: 809603). Y
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 809403. on the Board Test Pins
(Connectors)”
Fuses H12 and H13 on the N Replace the fuse.

SCN12A board normal?
Y
12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1
Y
Y
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Replace the error-causing board.
Detail code is C09603 or N

C09403?
Y
07C REF.7”
Sensor (SED)”
N Replace the scanning optics unit.

Y “14.3 Checking the Start-Point 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
Reseat the boards in the order named, and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 91


Check the error code table
During bootup, because the fuse (J11 on the MTH12A board) is blown or because -15V is not again and troubleshoot.
TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
supplied to the SCN12A board, the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser “2. Error Code Table” board normal?
(LDD) functions are disabled. Y
“9.1 Checking the Voltage 11.8 Power Supply”
Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed on the Board Test Pins
(Connectors)”
(detail code: C1DD03).
Fuse J11 on the MTH12A board N Replace the fuse.
normal?
Y
12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1
Y Y
normal? “Service Parts List Volume: 07C REF.7”

Sensor (SED)”
N
Laser (LDD) normal?

N
normal?
Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 92


• During bootup, because the fuse (J12 on the SCN12A board) or the fuse (H12 on the SCN12A again and troubleshoot. TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
board normal?
board) is blown, ±15V is not supplied to the SCN12A board, and the photomultiplier (PMT), start- “2. Error Code Table” “Checks, Replacement and
point detection (SYN), laser (LDD), and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled. Y
(Connectors)”
(detail code: C0DC03).
Fuses J12 and H13 on the N Replace the fuse.
• During bootup, because -15V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (J11 SCN12A board normal?
on the MTH12A board) or -15V (SLOT4) power supply error, the photomultiplier (PMT), start- Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. 12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses”
Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed N
Error recurs? 1
(detail code: C0D400).
Y
• During bootup, because ±15V is not supplied, except for the laser (LDD), due to blow of the fuse
(J11 on the MTH12A board, or J12, H12, or H14 on the SCN board), the photomultiplier (PMT), CPU12A and SCN12A boards N and check if the error occurs N
tested in M-Utility normal? 1
start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. again.
Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed Y Y
(detail code: C0D603). “Checks, Replacement and
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is C0D400. “11.2 CPU12A Board”
"11.3 SCN12A Board”

Y “14.5 Checking the Light- Adjustment of Parts volume:
Collecting Unit (PMT)” 9.2 PMT12A Board”
N Replace the SED12A board
07C REF.7”
Sensor (SED)”
N
Laser (LDD) normal?

N
normal?
Sensor (SYN)”
N 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 93


• During bootup, because 24V is not supplied to the SCN12A board due to blow of the fuse (K11 and troubleshoot.
on the MTH12A board) or 24V (SLOT5) power supply error, the polygonal mirror (POL) function “2. Error Code Table” board normal?
is disabled (detail code: D01403). Y
• During bootup, because the fuses (H14 and A22 on the SCN board) are blown or because 5V is on the Board Test Pins
not supplied to the SYN12A board and SED12A board, the leading-edge detection (SED) and (Connectors)”
start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail code: C01403). Fuse K11 on the MTH12A board N Replace the fuse.
and fuses H14 and A22 on the
SCN12A board normal?
12. Fuse Replacement and Fuse Locations”
Y
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
CPU12A, SCN12A, and MTH12A Reseat the error-causing board

N and check if the error occurs N
again.
1
Y
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Y Replace the error-causing board.
normal? "Service Parts List volume:
07C REF.7”
Y “14.4 Checking the Leading-
Edge Sensor (SED)”
N
Y “14.2 Checking the Polygonal

Mirror”
N
normal?
Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 94

N
During bootup, because ±15V is not supplied to the SYN12A board, PMT12A board, and LDD12A Check the error code table
again and troubleshoot. TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
board due to blow of the fuses (J12 and H12 on the SCN board), the photomultiplier (PMT), start- “2. Error Code Table”
board normal?
point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. Y
(detail code: 819603). (Connectors)”
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 819403. Fuse H12 on the SCN12A board N Replace the fuse.
and fuse J12 on the MTH12A
Y 12. Fuse Replacement and Fuse Locations”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
N Reseat the error-causing board

CPU12A and SCN12A boards and check if the error occurs N
1
Y Y
Collecting Unit (PMT)” 9.2 PMT12A Board”
N
Laser (LDD) normal?

N
normal?
Y “14.3 Checking the Start- Replace the scanning optics unit.
Point Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 95
10281, 12201, 12281, 13201, 14281 ■ Analysis Flow


N
10281 Start-point detection error during bootup (1) Y 1

During bootup, because the signal from the start-point detection (SYN) is faulty, the SCN12A board again and troubleshoot.
does not operate normally (detail code: 801C03). “2. Error Code Table” board normal?
12201 Start-point detection error “9.1 Checking the Voltage
During bootup and routine processing, error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is (Connectors)”
detected. Reseat the error-causing board
1
12281 Start-point detection error (1)
Y Y
During routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error “8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Replace the error-causing board.
for the PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected “Checks, Replacement and
(detail code: 801C03). “11.2 CPU12A Board”
Alternatively, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL
function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 800C03). N Replace the scanning optics unit.
Start-point detection (SYN) normal?
Alternatively, during routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) func- Y “14.3 Checking the Start-Point Adjustment of Parts volume:
tion, and error for the PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board Sensor (SYN)” 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
N
are detected (detail code: 801401). Error recurs? 1
Y
13201 Start-point detection error
During M-Utility operation, only error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is detected. and if the error is detected, replace the board.
1. SCN12A board
14281 Start-point detection error during bootup (1) 3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board
• During bootup, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the
PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
code: 801C03). “8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
Alternatively, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function and error for the PLL “11.2 CPU12A Board”
function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code: 800C03). Alternatively, during routine
processing, the disabled state of the start-point-detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL
function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected (detail code:
801401).
• During bootup, the start-point detection (SYN) function is disabled (detail code: 801402). Alterna-
tively, the start-point detection (SSH, SSL) cannot be performed (detail code: 800002).

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 96

N
10298 Before-reading scanner retry error
Y
<Service Procedure>
This error occurs when the version of the M-Utility is checked or error log backup is executed again and troubleshoot.
during RU bootup. “2. Error Code Table”
1
During routine processing, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the
cassette and the scanner is initialized. The routine processing is retried again, but the scanner-
Other software exited before RU N
related error recurs. startup? Exit the other software.
Y
14298 Before-reading scanner retry error “Maintenance Utility volume:
2.1.3 VER: Procedures for Checking the Software Version of the RU
During routine processing, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the (Implemented with RU Software Version of A07 or Later, or PCMUTL 1.2
cassette and the scanner is initialized. or Later)”

board normal?
Y
(Connectors)”
Fuses H11, H12, H13, and H14 N Replace the fuse.
on the SCN12A board normal?
Y
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
CPU12A and SCN12A boards Reseat the error-causing board

tested in M-Utility normal? N and check if the error occurs N
again.
1
Y
“8. Board Tests Y
in M-Utility”

N
Error recurs? 1 “11.3 SCN12A Board”

1. SCN12A board
2. CPU12A board
3. MTH12A board

“8.1 Scanning Optics Unit” FR6H2471.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 97
11208, 11272, 11273, 12212, 12272, 12273, 13208, 13212, ■ Analysis Flow
14283 Check the error log in M-Utility.

11208 Laser drive current error Y
During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times Check the error code table
the factory default value. again and troubleshoot.
11272 Insufficient laser light intensity
1
During bootup, laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) error is detected.
11273 Laser life warning board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
the factory default value. “9.1 Checking the Voltage
(Connectors)”
12212 Laser intensity error N
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is
Error recurs? 1
detected. Y

CPU12A and SCN12A boards N N
12272 Insufficient laser light intensity (1) tested in M-Utility normal?
1
again.
During routine processing, the laser light intensity is less than 50%, and the laser light intensity
Y
error signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) is detected (detail code: 004000). Y
Alternatively, the laser light intensity error signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) and laser drive current value
(LDIF) error are detected (detail code: 014000). Replace the error-causing board.
12273 Laser life warning Adjustment of Parts” volume:
During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times “11.3 SCN12A Board”
the factory default value.
N Replace the scanning optics unit.
Laser (LDD) normal?
13208 Laser drive current error “Checks, Replacement and
Y “14.1 Checking the Laser (LDD)” Adjustment of Parts volume:
During M-Utility operation, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
default value.
N
13212 Laser light intensity error Error recurs? 1
During M-Utility operation, only error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is detected. Y

14283 Scanning optics unit board error during bootup and if the error is detected, replace the board.
During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) 1. SCN12A board
functions are disabled due to laser failure or disconnected connector (detail code: C05401).
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 98
12202, 12255, 13202 ■ Analysis Flow

N
12202 Leading-edge detection error Y 1

During bootup and routine processing, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, again and troubleshoot.
SED2L) is detected. “2. Error Code Table” board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
Y
12255 Leading-edge detection error “9.1 Checking the Voltage
During bootup, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, SED2L) is detected. (Connectors)”

13202 Leading-edge detection error CPU12A and SCN12A boards N and check if the error occurs N
1
During M-Utility operation, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1, SED2L) is
detected. Y Y

07C REF.7”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SCN12A board
2. CPU12A board
3. MTH12A board
4. Leading-edge sensor (SED)

“Service Parts List volume: 07C REF.7” FR6H2473.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 99
12211, 12217, 12251, 12252, 13211, 13217, 14211, 14251 ■ Analysis Flow

N
12211 PMT analog power supply error
Y
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal 1
(+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected. Check the error code table
N
again and troubleshoot. TP2 voltage on the SCN12A Replace the power supply.
12217 High-voltage power supply error Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH/ “9.1 Checking the Voltage
L) is detected. (Connectors)”

12251 Photomultiplier control board error (1) CPU12A and SCN12A boards N and check if the error occurs N
1
During routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, Y
+15VOKL) is detected (detail code: 008200). Y
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000.
12252 Photomultiplier control board error (2) “11.2 CPU12A Board”
During routine processing, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL) is
detected. N Replace the Photomultiplier.
13211 PMT analog power supply error Collecting Unit (PMT)” 9.2 PMT12A Board”
During M-Utility operation, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, N
Error recurs? 1
+15VOKL) is detected.
Y
13217 High-voltage power supply error Reseat the boards in the order named,
During M-Utility operation, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH, HVOKL) is 1. PMT12A board
detected. 2. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board
14211 PMT analog power supply error during bootup “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
“9.2 PMT12A Board”
During bootup, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is de-
tected. “11.2 CPU12A Board”
FR6H2474.EPS
14251 Photomultiplier control board error during bootup (1)
During routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH,
+15VOKL) is detected (detail code: 008200).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 008000.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 100
10261, 12213, 12262, 12263, 12264, 13210, 14261 ■ Analysis Flow

N
10261 Polygon rotation error (1) Y 1
During routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the again and troubleshoot. TP2 voltage on the SCN12A N Replace the power supply.
polygonal mirror function is disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection “2. Error Code Table” board normal? “Checks, Replacement and
(SED) functions are also disabled (detail code: D03403). Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
12213 Polygon lock error (Connectors)”
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is CPU12A and SCN12A boards N
N
detected. tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
Y
Y
12262 Polygon rotation error (2) “8. Board Tests in M-Utility”
• During routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror “Checks, Replacement and
(POL) and the start-point interval function on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: Adjustment of Parts” volume:
003400). “11.3 SCN12A Board”
• During routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) and error for the start- N Replace the scanning optics unit.
point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN12A board are detected “Checks, Replacement and
(detail code: 003400). Y “14.2 Checking the Polygonal Mirror” Adjustment of Parts volume:
N
12263 Polygon rotation error (3) Error recurs? 1
During routine processing, only error for the lock signal (POKL, PONL) from the polygonal mirror Y
(POL) is detected (detail code: 002000). Reseat the boards in the order named,
If error for the SEDTM or FCLKTM signal on the SCN12A board is detected, the detail code is 1. SCN12A board
002003. 2. Scanning optics unit
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board
12264 Polygonal rotation error (4)
During routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror “11.3 SCN12A Board”
and the SEDTM signal on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 001002). “8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
Alternatively, error for the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM and “11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2475.EPS
FCLKTM signals on the SCN12A board is detected (detail code: 0010030).

Alternatively, error for the signals (POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM
signal on the SCN12A board is detected (error code: 001002).
13210 Polygon lock timeout

During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not detected within 6 seconds after
turn-ON of the polygonal mirror.

During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal
mirror function is disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) are
also disabled (detail code: D03403).

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 101

N
12256 Leading-edge detection timing error Errors 10230-10236 logged?
During routine processing, IP conveyance overrun occurs due to mechanical error or SCN12A Y
board control error, and only error for the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals on the SCN12A board is
detected. again and troubleshoot.

Y
(Connectors)”
Check the mechanism of the subscanning unit.
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume:
10. Removing and Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit”

CPU12A and SCN12A boards N N
and check if the error occurs 1
again.
Y
Y

07C REF.7”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 102

N
10271 Laser unlit error
Y 1
During routine processing, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled Check the error code table
due to blow of the fuse (H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: 815403). again and troubleshoot.
Fuse H13 on the SCN12A board N Replace the fuse.
normal?
Y
14271 Laser unlit error during bootup
N
• During bootup, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow Error recurs? 1
of the fuse (H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: 815403). Y
• During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) Reseat the error-causing board
functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse (H13 on the SCN board) or laser failure (detail tested in M-Utility normal? again.
1
code: C15403).
Y Y
• During bootup, error for the laser drive current value (LDIF) occurs and the start-point detection “8. Board Tests in M-Utility” Replace the error-causing board.
(SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are disabled due to blow of the fuse (H13 on “Checks, Replacement and
the SCN board) or laser failure (detail code: C04003). Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Detail code is C15403 or N
CD4003?
N
Leading-edge detection (SED) Replace the SED12A board.
normal?
Y “14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge 07C REF.7”
Sensor (SED)”
Laser (LDD) normal?

N
normal?
Sensor (SYN)”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y

1. SCN12A board
3. CPU12A board
4. MTH12A board


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 103
6. Error Code Analysis Flow (Electrical) 6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow between the SNS12A Board and
CPU12A Board
6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow between the CPU12A Board and CL Check the error log
in M-Utility.
Check the error log
in M-Utility. 1
1 Booted up normally?
N
If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
N Y
Booted up normally? If not, troubleshoot as appropriate. “15.1 RU Bootup Failure”
Y N If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.

LED on the CPU12A board normal?
“15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board”
“15.1 RU Bootup Failure”
Y
N If not, troubleshoot as appropriate. “15.2 Checking the LED
LED on the CPU12A board normal? on the CPU12A Board”
Y TP1 voltage on the CPU12A board N N Replace the power
Voltage on the power supply unit
“15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board” and TP2 voltage on the SCN12A normal? supply unit.
TP1 voltage on the CPU12A board N N Replace the power Y “9.2 Checking the Voltage
Voltage on the power supply unit 11.8 Power Supply”
normal? supply unit. “9.1 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit”
normal?
Y Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
“9.1 Checking the Voltage “9.2 Checking the Voltage 11.8 Power Supply” N Replace the fuse.
Fuse on each board normal?
on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” on the Power Supply Unit” “Checks, Replacement and
“10.7 Board Check 12. Fuse Replacement and
N Pin Fuses” Fuse Locations”
Fuse A11 on the CPU12A board Replace the fuse.
normal? “Checks, Replacement and Replace the boards in the order named.
Adjustment of Parts volume: 1. CPU12A
Y
12. Fuse Replacement 2. MTH12A
“10.7 Board Check Pin Fuses”
and Fuse Locations”
1. CPU12A
2. MTH12A CPU12A board, as well as barcode, N Reseat the CPU12A board and N
“11.2 CPU12A Board” Y Y
“11.7 MTH12A Board” “8. Board Tests in M-Utility”
Replace the CPU12A board.
Adjustment of Parts volume: 11.2 CPU12A Board”
CPU12A board, as well as barcode, N Reseat the CPU12A board and N
SCN12A board tested in M-Utility N Reseat the SCN12A board and N
Y Y normal? check if the error occurs again. 1
Replace the CPU12A board. Y Y
“Checks, Replacement and “8. Board Tests in M-Utility”
Replace the SCN12A board.
Adjustment of Parts volume: “Checks, Replacement and
11.2 CPU12A Board” Adjustment of Parts volume: 11.3 SCN12A Board”
Install the RU software and N
Reseat the SCN12A board and N
check if the error occurs again.
check if the error occurs again. 1
Y
Y
Replace the boards in the order named Replace the boards in the order named
1. CPU12A board END 1. CPU12A board
2. CNN12A board 2. SCN12A board
4. MTH12A board 4. MTH12A board
“11.2 CPU12A Board” “11.3 SCN12A Board”
“11.10 CNN12A Board” “11.7 MTH12A Board” FR6H2158.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 104
6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow between the SCN12A Board and
CPU12A Board
Check the error log
in M-Utility.
1
N
Booted up normally? If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
Y
“15.1 RU Bootup Failure”
N If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
LED on the CPU12A board normal?
Y
“15.2 Checking the LED
on the CPU12A Board”
TP1 voltage on the CPU12A board N N Replace the power

Voltage on the power supply unit
and TP2 voltage on the SCN12A normal? supply unit.
“9.1 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit”
N Replace the fuse.

“10.7 Board Check 12. Fuse Replacement and
Pin Fuses” Fuse Locations”

1. CPU12A
2. MTH12A
CPU12A board, as well as barcode, N Reseat the CPU12A board and N

Y Y
Adjustment of Parts volume: 11.2 CPU12A Board”
SCN12A board tested in M-Utility N Reseat the SCN12A board and N

normal? check if the error occurs again. 1
Y Y
Replace the SCN12A board.
Adjustment of Parts volume: 11.3 SCN12A Board”
Reseat the SCN12A board and N
Y
Replace the boards in the order named

1. CPU12A board
2. SCN12A board
4. MTH12A board

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 105
6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow between the Erasure Unit and ■ Analysis Flow
INV12B Board After checking the LED display on the INV12B board, analysis should be performed by using the
analysis flow that corresponds to the resulting LED display.
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15
11731, 11751, 11781 OFF: LED16, LED17, LED18
■ Error Occurrence Conditions Check the error log
in M-Utility.
11731 Thermistor failure detection (during erasure initialization)
N
During bootup, it is detected that temperature control of the erasure unit does not function due to Error 12820 logged?
temperature thermistor (THB1) error.
Y
11751 Thermistor failure detection (during IP processing) Adjustment of Parts volume:
During routine processing, error for the temperature thermistor (THB1) is detected. 11.8 Power Supply”
N
11781 Thermistor failure detection (during idling) Error 12823 logged?
During idling after machine bootup, error for the temperature thermistor (THB1) is detected. Y
Fuse B11 on the MTH12A N Replace the fuse.

“10.4 Scanner-Related 12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses”
Fuses”
N Check the error code table

Error 12800 logged? again and troubleshoot.
Continuity found between N

pins 1 and 2 of CN13 Replace the safety thermostat,
connected to the INV12A? and if the error persists, then
replace the INV12B board.
Y “Checks, Replacement and
Check for continuity for the 4.1 INV12B Board”
following harnesses, and if
there is no problem, then replace
the INV12B board.
• Between SNS12A and INV12B
• Between INV12A and INV12B
4.1 INV12B Board”
FR6H2546.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 106
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED16 ● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED17, LED18
OFF: LED17, LED18 OFF: LED16
Check the error log Check the error log

in M-Utility. in M-Utility.
N Continuity found between

Error 12824 logged? CN6 and CN8 of INV12A N Check the error code table
and between CN5 and again and troubleshoot.
Y CN15 of INV12B? “2. Error Code Table”
Replace the fuse.

B21 on the MTH12A N
“Checks, Replacement and Replace the INV12A board.
board normal?
Y 12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses” Adjustment of Parts volume: FR6H2560.EPS
“10.4 Scanner-Related
Fuses” 4.4 INV12A Board”
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED16, LED17, LED18

again and troubleshoot. OFF: LED15
“2. Error Code Table” FR6H2547.EPS
Check the error log
in M-Utility.
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED16, LED17
N Check the error code table
OFF: LED18 Error 11732, 11752, or
11782 logged?
Check the error log “2. Error Code Table”
in M-Utility. Y
N Measure the resistance

Error 12825 logged? value between the
CN14 thermistor pins.
Y
The thermistor’s resistance
value as indicated in the tem- N Replace the thermistor
perature characteristic table? “Checks, Replacement and
Replace the fuse. Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
C11 on the MTH12A N 6.6 Thermistor
board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Replace the INV12B board.
Y 12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses”
“10.4 Scanner-Related Adjustment of Parts volume: FR6H2561.EPS
Fuses” 4.1 INV12B Board”


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 107
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED16, LED17, LED18

11732, 11752, 11782
Check the error log
■ Error Occurrence Conditions in M-Utility.
11732 Thermistor status error detection (during erasure initialization) Harness between SNS12A N
and INV12B normal? Replace the harness.
During bootup, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects an abnormal range. Temperature control
of the erasure unit does not function. Y

11752 Erasure unit temperature status inconsistency (during IP processing) again and troubleshoot.
During routine processing, error for the temperature status (LED: D15, D11, D10, D13) in the “2. Error Code Table” FR6H2552.EPS
erasure unit is detected. Temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled.
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED16, LED17, LED18
OFF: LED14, LED15
11782 Erasure unit temperature status inconsistency (during idling)
During bootup, error for the temperature status (LED: D15, D11, D10, D13) in the erasure unit is Replace the INV12B board.
detected. Temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled. “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.1 INV12B Board”
● INV12B LED display - ON: LED16, LED18

■ Analysis Flow
OFF: LED14, LED15, LED17
After checking the LED display on the INV12B board, analysis should be performed by using the
analysis flow that corresponds to the resulting LED display. Replace the INV12A board.
● INV12B LED display - OFF: LED14, LED15, LED16, LED17, LED18 “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.4 INV12A Board”
Check the error log

in M-Utility. ● INV12B LED display - ON: LED16, LED17
OFF: LED14, LED15, LED18
N Check for harness
Error 12826 logged? Replace the INV12A board.
continuity between
INV12A and INV12B.
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.4 INV12A Board”
Y
C21 on the MTH12A board N Replace the fuse.

“10.4 Scanner-Related 12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses”
Fuses”


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 108
11737, 11757, 11767 ■ Analysis Flow
■ Error Occurrence Conditions ● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED16, LED17, LED18
11737 Lamp unlit detection (during erasure initialization) START

During bootup, the erasure lamps are tuned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp
(socket L2) of the three erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit.
Use M-Utility to turn on the Check the harness between
erasure lamps. N SNS12A and INV12B, and
11757 Lamp unlit detection (during erasure idle temperature control) LED1, 2, 3 on the INV12B if there is no problem, replace
During machine idle state, in order to perform erasure temperature control, the erasure lamps are indicate preheat, with LED4, the SNS12A board and INV12B
5, 6 lit normally? board in the order named.
turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L2) of the three erasure lamps is
unlit. Or, two or more erasure lamps are unlit. Y “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
“4.1 INV12B Board”
11767 Lamp unlit detection (during IP erasure lighting)
During IP erasure for routine processing, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting,
Check the harness between
but a single center lamp (socket L2) of the three erasure lamps is unlit. Or, two or more erasure Use M-Utility to turn on the
Y SNS12A and INV12B, and
lamps are unlit. erasure lamps.
if there is no problem, replace
LED12, 7, 8 on the
the SNS12A board and INV12B
INV12B lit?
board in the order named.
N “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Check the following harnesses.
1. Between INV12A and INV12B
2. Between MTH12A, relay connector, and INV12A
3. Between INV12A and lamp
Replace the unlit lamp(s)

(for this error, either L2 or
both L1 and L3)
If the error persists, check the

harness between SNS12A and INV12B.
If the harness is normal,
replace the INV12A board.
4.4 INV12A Board”
END
FR6H2553.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 109
12730 12733, 12743, 12753

■ Error Occurrence Conditions ■ Error Occurrence Conditions
12733 High-temperature error detection (during erasure initialization)
12730 Inverter cooling fa operation error (during erasure initialization)
During bootup, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects high-temperature error.
During bootup, error for the FAN4 (inverter board cooling fan) is detected, but it is activated as
usual 12743 Erasure unit high-temperature error cancel
During bootup and routine processing, 12733 or 12753 occurs and the temperature of the erasure
■ Analysis Flow unit lamp reaches an abnormal level, so that the no-erasure mode is temporarily entered.
Subsequently, because the erasure lamp temperature drops below the specified level (erasure-
enabled temperature), it returns to the normal mode.
START
12753 Erasure unit high-temperature error
During routine processing and idling, the temperature thermistor (THB1) detects high-temperature
FAN4 connector disconnected error.
Y Connect the FAN4
from the INV12A board?
connector. Or,
Fan (its blade) locked?
unlock the fan. ■ Analysis Flow
N START
Air filter of the erasure unit (intake

FAN4 harness, harness side) that is visible when the front
between INV12A and INV12B, Y Repair the cover is opened clogged?
or harness between SNS12A defective harness. Or, the ventilation of the erasure Y Clean the air filter.
and INV12B broken? unit (exhaust side) on the right- Or, secure proper
hand side of the machine ventilation.
N
completely blocked?
N
Replace the INV12B board.
FAN3 connector disconnected
from the INV12B board? Y Connect the FAN3
4.1 INV12B Board”
Fan (its blade) locked? connector. Or, unlock
END the fan.
FR6H2554.EPS
N
FAN3 harness or harness

between SNS12A and INV12B Y Repair the defective
broken? harness.
N
Disconnect CN14 and measure
the resistance value between
the thermistor pins.
The thermistor’s resistance N

Replace the thermistor.
value as indicated in the
temperature characteristic table?
Y
Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.1 INV12B Board”
END
FR6H2555.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 110
12735
12735 Erasure cooling fan diagnostics error (during erasure initialization)

During bootup, error for the FAN3 (erasure unit lamp house cooling fan) is detected, but only a
warning is recorded, and fan control continues as usual.
■ Analysis Flow
START
FAN3 connector disconnected Y Connect the FAN3

from the INV12B board? connector.
Fan (its blade) locked? Unlock the fan.
FAN3 harness or harness

Y Repair the defective
between SNS12A and
harness.
INV12B broken?
N

4.1 INV12B Board”
END
FR6H2556.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 111
12736, 12756, 12766, 18741 ■ Analysis Flow

● INV12B LED display - ON: LED14, LED15, LED16, LED17, LED18
START
12736 Single lamp unlit detection (during erasure initialization)
During bootup, because one of the three lamps is unlit, the machine is booted up in the mode N Check the harness between
Use M-Utility to turn on the
where the erasure time is extended. erasure lamps.
SNS12A and INV12B, and
if there is no problem, replace
LED1, 2, 3 on the INV12B
12756 Single lamp unlit detection(during erasure idle temperature control) the SNS12A board and INV12B
indicate preheat, with LED4,
board in the order named.
During idling, when the erasure lamps are turned on for erasure temperature control, a single lamp 5, 6 lit normally?
that is normally lit does not turn on, so that it enters the erasure time extension mode. Y Adjustment of Parts” volume:
12766 Single lamp unlit detection (during IP erasure lighting) “4.1 INV12B Board”
During bootup and routine processing, when the erasure lamps are turned on during IP erasure, a Use M-Utility to turn on the Check the harness between
single lamp is unlit, so that it enters the erasure time extension mode. erasure lamps. Y SNS12A and INV12B, and if
LED12, 7, 8 on the there is no problem, replace
18741 Incomplete erasure INV12B lit? the SNS12A board and INV12B
Because 12736, 12756, or 12766 occurs so that a single lamp is unlit, the mode shifts to the board in the order named.
N
erasure time extension mode where the erasure time is extended twice. The IP that is read while in “Checks, Replacement and
the erasure time extension mode is erased with the extended erasure time. Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Check the following harnesses.
1. Between INV12A and INV12B
2. Between MTH12A, relay connector, and INV12A
3. Between INV12A and lamp
If there is no problem, replace the INV12A board.
Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.4 INV12A Board”
END
FR6H2557.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 112
12800
12800 Erasure unit safety thermostat TSWB1 operation

During bootup and routine processing, because the erasure unit lamp housing reaches an
abnormally high temperature, the safety thermostat TSWB1 is activated.
■ Analysis Flow
START
Disconnect CN13A connected

to the INV12A. Continuity Y Check the harness between
found between pins 1 and 2 SNS12A and INV12B and the
of CN13 (harness side)? harness between INV12A and
INV12B. If there is no problem,
N replace the INV12A board.
After replacement of the
safety thermostat, if the
error persists, replace the
4.4 INV12A Board”
INV12B board.
Adjustment of Parts volume: 4.1 INV12B Board”
END FR6H2558.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 113
7.1.1 Procedure for Checking Connection between RU and CL

7. Troubleshooting for Failure to Update Software
Versions or Failure to Back Up Machine Shipment (1) Exit the CL software.
(2) Start the PC-MUTL.
Control Data (3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to check its connection.
This chapter summarizes troubleshooting procedures for failure to update software versions or
failure to back up machine shipment control data.
Troubleshooting should be performed in accordance with the checking procedures described in
each section.
■ Troubleshooting Procedure
◆ NOTE ◆
FR6H3321.EPS
Troubleshooting should be performed in accordance with the following procedures. If not, the
trouble may not be analyzed.
(4) Click the [PING] button.

(1) Check the connection between the RU and CL.
A DOS prompt window appears to display the test results.
“7.1 Checking Connection between RU and CL”
(5) Check the test results.
(2) Check to see if the FTP server can be accessed.
If the screen display is not as shown below, perform the procedures described in “7.1.2
“7.2 Checking the FTP Server”
Procedures for Recovering Connection between RU and CL” to restore the connection
If it can be accessed from both the CL and RU, this procedure is completed. between the RU and CL.
(3) Check the setting of the FTP server.
“7.3 Checking the Setting of the FTP Server” | Pinging 172.16.1.2 with 32 bytes of data: |
(4) Check the IP address of the FTP server. | |
“7.4 Checking the IP Address of the FTP Server” | Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255 |
| Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255 |
7.1 Checking Connection between RU and CL
If the RU and CL are not connected, it is not possible to update software versions and back up | |
machine shipment control data. | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.2: |
Using the PING command, check the connection between the RU and CL; if they are not | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
connected, restore their connection. | Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: |
| Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 10ms, Average = 2ms |
REFERENCE
Digits for XXX in TTL=”XXX” vary depending on the environment in which the command is
executed.
7.1.2 Procedures for Recovering Connection between RU and CL

If the connection between the RU and CL is faulty, refer to the CL Service Manual to recover the
connection between the RU and CL.
“CL Service Manual, Installation (IN-B)”

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 114
7.2 Checking the FTP Server (5) Make sure that the results of access to the FTP server on the CL and the results of access to
the FTP server from the RU are displayed.
The way of checking the FTP server differs depending on the version of the PC-MUTL. Refer to
the appendix for the way of checking the FTP server of versions 1.1 or earlier. ● Results of access to the FTP server on the CL
“Appendix 2 Checking FTP Server (For PC-MUTL 1.1 or Earlier)”
(1) Exit the CL software.
(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
FR6H3321.EPS
(4) Click the [FTP] button. FR6H3329.EPS
● Results of access to the FTP server from the RU
FR6H0446.EPS
(6) If either of them is not displayed, perform the procedures described in “7.3 Checking the
Setting of the FTP Server,” “7.4 Checking the IP Address of the FTP Server,” and “15.6
Checking RU NAME.”

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 115
7.3 Checking the Setting of the FTP Server 7.3.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server
7.3.1 Checking IIS
(2) Double-click “Administrative Tools” in “Control Panel”.
Unless IIS (“Internet Information Service”) is installed, the FTP server cannot be used.
Make sure that IIS has been installed on the CL that is used as the FTP server.
(2) Double-click “Administrative Tools” in “Control Panel”. FRMT0443.EPS
(3) Double-click “Internet Service Manager”.
FRMT0441.EPS
FRMT0444.EPS
(3) Make sure that “IIS (Internet Information Service)” has been installed in “Administrative
Tools”. (4) Make sure that “Default FTP Site” has been started (i.e., “Stopped” is not displayed).
If it has been started, this procedure is completed.
“Stopped” should not be

displayed here.
FRMT0440.EPS
FRMT0438.EPS
If IIS has not been installed, install IIS.
“RI: Reinstalling the Software, 15. Creation of FTP Server” in the “CR-IR346CL Service (5) If “Stopped” is displayed, select [Start] from the [Action] menu.
Manual”

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 116
7.4 Checking the IP Address of the FTP Server (6) Click .

➮ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
To establish the connection between the RU and CL, RU NAME of the RU, CL, and FTP server
must be matched. (7) Choose and then click .
If they are not matched, change the IP address as appropriate. ➮ The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
7.4.1 Checking the IP Address of the CL

FR6H2548.EPS
(8) Make sure that the IP address of the FTP server matches “FTP-SERVER IP ADDRESS” that
is set in the RU.
(2) Double-click on the desktop. If they are not matched, set the IP addresses of the RU and CL as appropriate.
“15.3 Checking the IP Address”
➮ The “My Computer” window opens.
(3) Double-click .
➮ The “Control Panel” window opens.
(4) Double-click .
➮ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.
(5) Double-click .
➮ The “Local Area Connection” window opens.

REFERENCE
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the display if your
PC is not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 117
7.4.2 Checking the IP Address of the RU

(3) Start the M-Utility.
(4) Type in [7][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to display the configuration information for the flash
memory of the CPU12A board.
(5) Check “FTP-SERVER IP ADDRESS”.
172.16.1.35
FRMT0447.EPS
(6) Make sure that the IP address of “FTP-SERVER IP ADDRESS” matches the IP address of
the FTP server.
If they are not matched, set the IP addresses of the RU and CL as appropriate.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 118
[2] Board Test

8. Board Tests in M-Utility
● Procedures
[1] Analysis Flow (1) Select the board to be tested.
START [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [*][ENT]

A prompt appears to ask you to enter the number of tests repeated.
Power OFF.
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Remove the front cover
For [*], enter the menu number for the board to be tested.
and lower light protect plate.
CPU12A: 2
SCN12A: 3
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch. INV12A: 4
SND12A: 5
SUB CPU: 6
Power ON.
1 (2) Enter “n” (number n of testes repeated).

Board tests are executed “n” times, and once they are completed normally, “RESULT: OK”
The result of board test N Reseat the error-causing N appears.
1
normal? board and check if the error
occurs again. To abort the processing in progress, hit [Ctrl]+[C] and then [ENT].
Y
[2] Y SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
For “n”, the number of tests repeated should be entered over a range from 1 to 99999.
Power OFF. Replace the error-causing board.

“Check, Replacement, and
Adjustment Volume: ● Display
11.1 Controller”
Turn ON the high-voltage switch.
| EU>AT>* ...................................................... (1) |

Reinstall the front cover | |
| INPUT REPEAT TIMES. |
| INPUT(0 - 99999):n ........................................... (2) |
END
| |
Return to the error code | COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS. |
analysis flow. FR6H2483.EPS
| INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY |
| |
| RESULT : OK |
[GOOD indication]
RESULT: OK
[NG indication]
RESULT: XXXXX
XXXXX denotes error code.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 119
[2] Checking the Voltage on the CPU12A Board Test Pin (TP1)
9. Checking the Voltage
WARNING
CPU12A board
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following precautions.
• Do not touch the power supply terminals.
• When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion) of a tester.
9.1 Checking the Voltage on Board Test Pins (Connectors)

[1] Analysis Flow
START
Power OFF
CN6 CN5 S1 TP1 S2
Remove the front cover
Voltage on the INV12B N TP1 2 GND

Remove the support plate (board retainer).
board checked?
F
“Checks, Replacement and R
Y O
Adjustment of Parts volume: N
Remove the left-hand side cover 11.1 Controller” : GND T
and light protect plate.
1
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of +5V(A)
Parts volume: 4.1 INV12B Board”
Test pin TP1 Voltage Reference voltage

Power ON. TP1 1-2 +5V Should be within a range from +4.95 to 5.20 V. FR6H2501.EPS
Test pin voltage on each N Voltage on the power supply N Replace the power
board normal? unit normal? supply unit.
Y Y “Checks, Replacement and

[2], [3], [4], [5] “9.2 Checking the Voltage Adjustment of Parts volume:
on the Power Supply Unit” 11.8 Power Supply”
N
Replace the fuse.
Y
“10.7 Board Check 12. Fuse Replacement
Pin Fuses” and Fuse Locations”
Reinstall the front cover

END “11.3 SCN12A Board”
Return to the error “11.4 DRV12A Board”
code analysis flow. FR6H2502.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 120
[3] Checking the Voltage on the INV12B Board Test Pin (TP4) [4] Checking the Voltage on the SCN12A Board Test Pin (TP2)
INV12B board SCN12A board
CN14
D1 D3 D5 D13 D16 D15 CN5
D2 D4 D6 D10 D17 D14
TP4 1
D12 D7 D8 D11 D18 GND
FRONT
2 +24V(C)
CN2
: GND TP2
CN3 CN1 CN5 CN4 S1
CN2 CN3
F
Test pin TP4 Voltage R
Reference voltage O
+24V(K) N
TP4 1-2 +24V Should be within a range from +23.5 to 25.0 V. +15V(H) T
FR6H2503.EPS
TP2 6 5 4
-15V(J)
3 2 1 : GND
GND

TP2 3-6 +24V Should be within a range from +23.0 to 25.0 V.
TP2 1-4 -15V Should be within a range from -14.4 to -15.5 V. FR6H2504.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 121
[5] Checking the Voltage on the DRV12A Board Test Pin (TP3)
DRV12A board
TP3
CN3 CN7 CN5
CN2 CN8 CN6 CN4
F
R +24V(D)
O TP3 +15V(L)
N 6 5 4
T +5V(D)
+5V
3 2 1 : GND
GND

TP3 3-1 +5V Should be within a range from +4.75 to 5.25 V. FR6H2505.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 122
9.2 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit [2] Connector Locations
[1] Analysis Flow
START
MTH12A board
Power OFF
Voltage on the DRV12A N Remove the controller.

board CN2 checked? “Check, Replacement, CN8
and Adjustment Volume: CN9
Y
11.1 Controller” Connector
Remove the front cover CN8 (MTH12A)
and lower light protect plate. Connect the power cable.
CN2
and Adjustment Volume:
11.1 Controller”
Connector
CN9 (MTH12A)
Power ON.
N Connector
Voltage on the power
Replace the power supply unit. CN2 (DRV12A)
supply unit normal?
Y and Adjustment Volume:
[2], [3] 11.8 Power Supply”
DRV12A board
END FR6H2481.EPS
Return to the error


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 123
[3] Checking the Voltage [4] Block Diagram

(1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Disconnect the connector to be measured. MTH12A CPU12A
(3) Check the voltage as illustrated below.
Power supply unit

SNS12A
α 400 A1
1 +5
+5V 2 +5V-GND
CN9
FR6H2484.EPS A2 1
AC IN 1 +5V 3
TB1 85–265V +5V 2 +5V-GND 2
● MTH12A board 1 4
B
2 1 +24V
CN9 (MTH12A) Measurement point Reference voltage SLOT No. 3 +24V 2 +24V-GND CN8
CN9 1-3 +4.95 to 5.20V SLOT1 (A1) 1
C 6
CN9 2-4 +4.95 to 5.20V SLOT1 (A2) 1 +24V
2
1 +24V 2 +24V-GND
7
H 3
4 FR6H2478.EPS 1 +15V 8
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4
9
CN8 (MTH12A) Measurement point Reference voltage SLOT No. J 5
1 -15V
CN8 1-6 +23.5 to 25.0V SLOT2 (B)
10
-15V 2 -15V-GND
6 CN8 2-7 +23.5 to 25.0V SLOT2 (C)
CN8 3-8 +14.4 to 15.5V SLOT4 (H)
K
1 1 +24V
CN8 4-9 -14.4 to -15.5V SLOT4 (J) +24V 2 +24-GND
10
CN8 5-10 +23.0 to 25.0V SLOT5 (K)
5 L
FR6H2479.EPS
1 +15V
+15V 2 +15V-GND DRV12A
● DRV12A board
E CN2
1 +24V 1
CN2 (DRV12A) Measurement point Reference voltage SLOT No. +24V 2 +24V-GND 2
CN2 5-6 +14.4 to 15.5V SLOT5 (L) 3
D 4
5 CN2 1-2 +23.5 to 25.0V SLOT3 (E) 1 +24V
5
CN2 3-4 +23.5 to 25.0V SLOT3 (D) +24V 2 +24V-GND
1 6
8
4 FR6H2480.EPS
FR6H2482.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 124
[4] Fuse Locations

10. Checking the Fuses
MTH12A board
10.1 Sensor-Related Fuses B11 A41
FUSE5 FUSE4
C11
[1] Analysis Flow FUSE7
B21
FUSE6
START C31 C21
FUSE12 FUSE8
Fuse to be checked N Replace the fuse. A31 J11

normal?
“Checks, Replacement and FUSE1 FUSE10
Y [2], [4] Adjustment of Parts volume:
12. Fuse Replacement
and Fuse Locations” K11 H11
FUSE11 FUSE9
Load protected by fuse N Restore the load. A21
normal? FUSE2
“11. Checking the Sensors”
Y [3], [5]
A11
END FUSE3
Return to the error

FUSE1-FUSE12: Marked numbers on the board

FR6H2507.EPS
[2] Checking the Fuse

Check for continuity as illustrated below.
SNS12A board
A35 A34
F1 F2
A33 A32
F3 F4
Fuse
FR6H2143.EPS
[3] Checking the Cable

Check the following between the portions <A and B> in the block diagram.
1. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater.
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2Ω or greater.
F1-F4: Marked number on the board
3. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. FR6H2509.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 125
[5] Block Diagram
A
CNA1
Power supply unit 1 +5VSA1 +5VSA1 1
SA1
2 SINSA1H SINSA1H 2
α 400 A1 MTH12A CPU12A 3 GND GND 3
1 +5 4 +5VSA2
+5V 2 +5V-GND 5 SINSA2H
CN9 5AT +5VSA2 1
6 GND SA2
1 SINSA2H 2
A2 A31 7 +5VSA3
1 +5V 3 GND 3
SNS12A CN4 8 SINSA3H
TB1 +5V 2 +5V-GND 2 1 +5VSA1 9 GND
1 4 0.5A 2 SINSA1H +5VSA3 1
SA3
2 A35 3 GND SINSA3H 2
3 4 +5VSA2 GND 3
5 SINSA2H
AC IN CNA2
6 GND
85–265V 1 +5VSA4 +5VSA4 1
7 +5VSA3 SA4
SINSA3H 2 SINSA4H SINSA4H 2
8
GND 3 GND GND 3
9
+5VSA4 4 N.C
10
SINSA4H 5 SINSA5H
11 SINSA5H 1 SA5
GND 6 GND
12 GND 2
13 NC(+5VSA5)
14 SINSA5H
GND CNB1
15
+5VSB1 1 +5VSB1 +5VSB1 1
16 SB1
SINSB1H 2 SINSB1H SINSB1H 2
17
GND 3 GND GND 3
18
19 +5VSC1
20 SINSC1H
21 GND
22 +5VSC2
23 SINSC2H
24 GND
25 +5VSC4
SINSC4H +5VSC1 1
26 SC1
GND SINSC1H 2
27
+5VSC3 CNC1 GND 3
28
29 SINSC3H 1 +5VSC1
30 GND 2 SINSC1H +5VSC2 1
CNZ1 SC2
31 +5VSZ2 3 GND SINSC2H 2
32 SINSZ2H 1 +5VSZ2 +5VSZ2 1 4 +5VSC2 GND 3
SZ2
33 GND 2 SINSZ2H SINSZ2H 2 5 SINSC2H
34 +5VSZ3 3 GND GND 3 6 GND +5VSC4 1
35 SINSZ3H 4 +5VSZ3 7 +5VSC4 SC4
SINSC4H 2
36 GND 5 SINSZ3H +5VSZ3 1 8 SINSC4H
SZ3 GND 3
37 +5VSZ5 6 GND SINSZ3H 2 9 GND
38 SINSZ5H 7 +5VSZ4 GND 3 10 +5VSC3
39 GND 8 SINSZ4H 11 SINSC3H +5VSC3 1
40 +5V OK 9 GND 12 GND SC3
+5VSZ4 1 SINSC3H 2
10 +5VSZ5 SZ4 GND
SINSZ4H 2 3
46 +5VSZ4 11 SINSZ5H
12 GND GND 3
47 SINSZ4H
48 GND 13
49 +5VSZ5 1
SZ5
50 N.C 22 SINSZ5H 2
GND 3 Check point: Pins linked to the fuse
of CN4 on the SNS12A board
B FR6H2144.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 126
10.2 Motor-Related Fuses [4] Fuse Locations
DRV12A board
[1] Analysis Flow
START
Fuse to be checked N Replace the fuse.

Y [2], [4] 12. Fuse Replacement
and Fuse Locations" E41 L31
F9 F14
N Restore the load. D51 D31
Load protected by fuse
F11 F10
normal? "12. Checking the Motors"
E11 L21
D41
Y [3], [5] F3 F13
F4 D11
D21
F1
F6
L11 E51 E31 E21
END F7 F12 F5 F2
Return to the error

F1-F7, F9-F14: Marked number on the board
FR6H2510.EPS

Fuse
FR6H2143.EPS

Check the following between the portions <A> in the block diagram.
3. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 127
[5] Block Diagram
Power supply unit A

α 400 MTH12A CPU12A CNA10 CNMA1
1 1 RED MC1A
4 4 BLU MC1B
2 2 BLK +24V
5 5 WHT +24V MA1
SNS12A 3 3 YEL MC1AL
6 6 ORG MC1BL
CNMB1
DRV12A
1 RED MC1A
CN3 4 BLU MC1B
1 MA1A 2 BLK +24V
7 MA1B 5 WHT +24V MB1
2 +24V 3 YEL MC1AL
AC IN D11
85–265V 8 +24V 6 ORG MC1BL
TB1
1 3 MA1AL
D MA1BL
2 9
1
3 +24V 4 MB1A
2
10 MB1B
CN2 5 +24V
D51
+24V 1 11 +24V
PGND 2 6 MB1AL
+24V 3 12 MB1BL
PGND 4
5 CNC10 CNMC1
E 6
1 1 1 RED MC1A
7 7 4 BLU MC1B
+24V 2 8 2 2 BLK +24V
CN5 8 5 WHT +24V MC1
1 MC1A
3 3 YEL MC1AL
7 MC1B
3AT
+24V 9 6 ORG MC1BL
2
E11 4
8 +24V
MC1AL 10 CNMC2
3
5 1 RED MC2A
9 MC1BL
MC2A 11 4 BLU MC2B
4
6 2 BLK +24V
10 MC2B
3AT
5 +24V 12 5 WHT +24V MC2
E51 3 YEL MC2AL
11 +24V
MC2AL 6 ORG MC2BL
6
12 MC2BL
CN4 CNMC3
1 MC3A 1 RED MC3A
4 MC3B 4 BLU MC3B
3AT
2 +24V 2 BLK +24V
E21
5 +24V 5 WHT +24V MC3
3 MC3AL 3 YEL MC3AL
6 MC3BL 6 ORG MC3BL
Check point: Pins linked to the fuses of CN3, CN4, and CN5 on the DRV12A board
FR6H2146.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 128
10.3 Actuator-Related Fuses [4] Fuse Locations
DRV12A board
[1] Analysis Flow
START
N Replace the fuse.

Fuse to be checked normal?
and Fuse Locations” E41 L31
Fuse load to be protected N Restore the load. F9 F14
normal? D51 D31
“13. Checking the Actuators” F10
F11
Y [3], [5] L21
D41 E11
F3 F13
F4 D11
D21
F1
F6
END L11 E51 E31 E21
F7 F12 F5 F2
Return to the error
F1-F7, F9-F14: Marked number on the board

[2] Checking the Fuse FR6H2510.EPS
Fuse
FR6H2143.EPS


04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 129
[5] Block Diagram
A Check point: Pins linked to the fuses

Power supply unit of CN6, CN7, and CN8
CNZ10 FFM12A
on the DRV12A board
α 400 MTH12A CPU12A 1 YEL 15V 1 CN2
2 YEL PGND 2 : +15V → +5V regulator
3 YEL +5V 3
4 YEL PGND 4
SNS12A
CNSOLA1
DRV12A
1 RED
3 YEL
CN8 BLK SOLA1
PGND 2
1
L12 +5V 4
2
AC IN
3 PGND
TB1 85–265V
4 +15V
1 L11 CNPA1
D
2 1 1 RED
3 +24V 2 3 BLK
2 PA1
E CN2 CN7 NC 4
1 +24V 1 1 +24V
+24V 2 PGND 2 3AT 6 +24VH
D21
+24V 3 2 NC CNSVA1
PGND 4 7 +24VL 1 RED
+15V 5 2A 3 +24VPA1 2 BLK SVA1
L PGND 6 D31 8 PGND
1 7 4 +24VSVA1
+15V 2 8 9 PGND CNCLA1
2A 5 +24VCLA1 1 RED
E41
10 PGND 2 BLK CLA1
CNMZ2
MZ2+15V 1 RED
PGND 2 BLK MZ2
CNZ11
1
4
2
5
3
6 CNMZ3
CN6 MZ3+15V1 1 RED
2A 1 MZ2+15V MZ3+15V2 2 BLK MZ3
L21
5 PGND
3AT 2 MZ3+15V1
L31
6 MZ3+15V2 CNSOLZ1
3 +24V 1 RED
E31
7 +24VH 3 YEL
4 NC 2 BLK SOLZ1
8 +24VL 4
FR6H2148.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 130
10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses [4] Fuse Locations
MTH12A board
[1] Analysis Flow
B11 A41
FUSE5 FUSE4
START C11
FUSE7
B21
FUSE6
Fuse to be checked N Replace the fuse. C31 C21
normal? FUSE12 FUSE8
and Fuse Locations” A31 J11
Load protected by fuse N FUSE1 FUSE10
Restore the load.
normal?
“14. Checking the Scanner I/O”
K11 H11
Y [3], [5]
FUSE11 FUSE9
A21
FUSE2
END
Return to the error

code analysis flow. FR6H2149.EPS A11
FUSE3

Check for continuity as illustrated below. FUSE1-FUSE12: Marked numbers on the board
FR6H2507.EPS
SCN12A board
Fuse
FR6H2143.EPS

Check the following between the portions <A, B, and C> in the block diagram. A22 H14 H12 J12 H13
F5 F6 F7 F10 F8
F5-8, F10: Marked number on the board

FR6H2508.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 131
[5] Block Diagram

A
For board operation: MTH12A

MTH12A SCN12A
CPU12A CNE1
4A
A11
1.6A SCN12A LDD/SYN Scanning optics unit
H13 CN1 1 +15AS 1 +15AS
CNG CN1
Signal name No. Signal name 2 AG
12 1 2 AG
1A 1
+15AS 1 2 AG +15AS 3 +15AS
2 Power supply unit A41 3 +15AS
+15AS 3 4 AG 2 LDD12A
4 AG AG 4 AG +15AS 1
+15AS 5 6 AG 3 CN1
α 400 1 +5 4A 5 +15AS +15AS 7 8 AG +15AS AG 2
A1 +5V A21 4
2 +5V-GND 7 -15AS 9 10 AG AG +15AS 3
1.6A
TB1 AC IN CN9 9 -15AS -15AS 11 12 AG LDD board 17 LD1OKH
J12 AG 4
LD1IDH 13 14 LD1IDL (CN-1)
1 85–265V 1 18 LD1OKL +15AS 5
1 +5V 3 NC 15 16 NC 24
2 4A 11 19 LDIFH AG 6
A2 +5V +5V-GND H11 LD1ONH 17 18 LD1ONL LDIFL
3 2 2 20 LDIFL
NC 19 20 NC +15AS 7
4 1.6A LD1OKH 21 22 LD1OKL AG
25 +15VAS 8
H14 LDIFH 23 24 LDIFL 1 -15AS
1 +24V 9
+15VAS 25 26 AG SSH
B +24V +24V-GND CN8 4A 2 AG
2 27 +5VAS 10
J11 +5VAS 27 28 AG SSL
1 29 -15VAS 3 -15AS 11
-15VAS 29 30 AG DG
6 31 +5VDS 31 32 GND SYN board AG 12
+5VDS
1 +24V (CN-1)
2 SSL 33 34 SSH LD1IDH 13
C +24V 2 +24V-GND 7 NC 35 36 NC LD1IDL
9 14
1.6A NC 37 38 NC AG
3 40 LD1ONH 15
H12 NC 39 40 NC 10
1 +15V 8 +15VAS LD1ONL 16
2 +15V-GND 4 LD1OKH 17
H +15V
9 LD1OKL 18
5 1.6A CNE1 LDIFH 19
1 -15V 10 A22
Signal name No. Signal name LDIFL 20
J -15V 2 -15V-GND
+15AS 1 2 AG
+15AS 3 4 AG
1 +24V +15AS 5 6 AG
+24-GND 2A +15AS 7 8 AG
K +24V 2
K11 -15AS 9 10 AG
-15AS 11 12 AG
LD1IDH 13 14 LD1IDL
LD1ONH 15 16 LD1ONL
C LD1OKH 17 18 LD1OKL
CN2 LDIFH 19 20 LDIFL
SED12A 1 GND 1 SSH 1 SYN12A
2 VCC 2 SSL 2
3 SED1L 3 DG 3 CN1
4 SED2L 4 +5VDS 4
AG 5
-15VAS 6
CN4
1 CN3 CNE2 AG 7
1 PIDXL 1 +24PS +5VAS 8
NC 7 2 GND_P 2 GND_P AG 9
3 PONL 3 POKL +15VAS 10
+15AS 9 4 POKL 4 PONL
SCN12A PMT-CN1 5 GND_P 5 GND_P

+15AS 11 6 +24PS 6 PIDXL
Signal name No. Signal name
+24PS 1 POL12A
HVVOKH 1 2 HVVOKL
PMT12A +15AS 13 GND_P 2
1 HVVOKH +15VOKH 3 4 +15VOKL
HVSH 5 6 HVSL POKL 3 CN1
2 HVVOKL
CN1 NC 7 8 NC +15AS 15 PONL 4
3 +15VOKH
+15AS 9 10 AG(HV) GND_P
4 +15VOKL 5
+15AS 11 12 AG(HV) NC 17
5 +15AS 13 14 AG(HV) PIDXL 6
+15AS 15 16 AG 7
NC 17 18 NC +15AS 19 NC 8
+15AS 19 20 AG
11
NC 21 22 NC NC 21
-15AS 23 24 AG
-15AS 25 26 AG
ERSH 27 28 ERSL -15AS 23
LEDSIGH 29 30 LEDSIGL
: Regulator
LEDONH 31 32 LEDONL -15AS 25
VIONH 33 34 VIONL
34
CN-2 CN-5
B FR6H2511.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 132
10.5 Erasure Lamp and Cooling Fan Fuses [4] Fuse Locations
MTH12A board
[1] Analysis Flow B11 A41
FUSE5 FUSE4
C11
START FUSE7
B21
FUSE6
Fuse to be checked N Replace the fuse. C31 C21
normal? FUSE12 FUSE8
A31 J11
and Fuse Locations”
FUSE1 FUSE10
Load protected by fuse N Restore the load.
normal?
“13.3 Checking the Lamps/Fans” K11 H11
Y [3], [5] FUSE11 FUSE9
A21
FUSE2
END
Return to the error A11

FUSE3

FR6H2507.EPS
SNS12A board
A35 A34
F1 F2
Fuse A33 A32

FR6H2143.EPS F3 F4

Check the following between the portions <A, B, C, and D> in the block diagram.

FR6H2509.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 133
[5] Block Diagram
A
For board operation: INV12A
MTH12A INV12A
CPU12A CN11
1 L1-1
CNG12 6 L1-2
1 4AT 2
2 Power supply unit B11 7
NC
3 L2-1
α 400 1 +5 4AT
A1 +5V 8 L2-2
2 +5V-GND B21
4
TB1 AC IN CN9 C 9 NC L1-1 L2-1 L3-1
1 85–265V 1 1 1 1
1 +5V CN7 CNG11 CN1 5 L3-1 L1-2 LAMP 1 L2-2 LAMP 2 L3-2 LAMP 3
2 3 2 2 2
A2 +5V +5V-GND 1 +24V RED 1 1 10 L3-2
3 2 2 L1-3 L2-3 L3-3
5 GND BLK 5 5 1 1 1
4 L1-4 L2-4 L3-4
2 +24V RED 2 2 2 2 2
CN12
1 +24V 6 GND BLK 6 6 1 L1-3 WHT
B +24V 2 +24V-GND CN8 4AT 3 +24V RED 3 3 4 L1-4 WHT
C11 INV12B
1 7 GND BLK 7 7 2 L2-3 WHT
6 4 +24V RED 4 4 5 L2-4 WHT CN5 CN3
1 +24V 2
3AT +5V 1 1 +24V RED
C21 8 GND BLK 8 8 3 L3-3 WHT
2 +24V-GND LAMP STB1 2 2 GND BLK FAN3
C +24V 7 6 L3-4 WHT
LAMP STB2 3
3
3AT
CN11 CN4 LAMP STB3 4
8 C31
1 +24V RED 1 +24V RED LAMP ON1 5
4
2 GND BLK FAN1 GND BLK FAN4
2 LAMP ON2 6
9
LAMP ON3 7
5
LDSNC-1 8
10 CN12
1 +24V RED LDSNC-2 9
CN6
2 GND BLK FAN2 1 +24V_GND LDSNC-3 10
2 +24V_GND +5V_GND 11
3 +24V +24V_TSW 12
5AT
A31 4 +24V_GND
B FANG4H 13
5 +24V FANG4L 14
FUOPEN3 FUOPEN1 15
7 FUOPEN2 FUOPEN2 16
SNS12A 8 FUOPEN1 FUOPEN3 17
+24V 18
CN6 9 FANG4L
1 +5VINV 10 FANG4H +24V_GND 19
1.5AT 2 STBL 1L +24V 20
11 +24V_TSW
A32
3 ONL 1L 12 +5V_GND +24V_GND 21
4 FAN3ONL 13 LDSNC-3 +24V_GND 22
5 FAN4ONL 14 LDSNC-2
6 LAMPREOH 15 LDSNC-1 CN2
7 LDSN1H 16 LAMP ON3
+5VINV 1
STBL1L 2
ONL1L 3
10 FAN3REOH 19 LAMP STB3 FAN3ONL 4
11 FAN3ERRH 20 LAMP STB2 FAN4ONL 5
12 FAN4ERRH 21 LAMP STB1 LAMPREQH 6
13 THB1ERRH 22 +5V
LDSN1H 7
14 HTMPERRH LDSN2H 8
15 TSWB1ERRH LDSN3H 9
16 GND FAN3REQH 10
17 STBL2L FAN3ERRH 11
18 ONL2L FAN4ERRH 12
19 STBL3L THB1ERRH 13
20 ONL3L HTMPERRH 14
21 TSWB1ERRH 15
22 GND 16
23 STBL2L 17
24 ONL2L 18
25 STBL3L 19
26 ONL3L 20
D FR6H2512.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 134
10.6 LED12A Board and Barcode Fuses [4] Fuse Locations
MTH12A board
[1] Analysis Flow
B11 A41
FUSE5 FUSE4
START C11
FUSE7
B21
N FUSE6
Fuse to be checked Replace the fuse. C31 C21
normal?
“Checks, Replacement and FUSE12 FUSE8
and Fuse Locations” A31 J11
Load protected by fuse N FUSE1 FUSE10
Restore the load.
normal?
“13.2. Checking the Barcode Reader”
Y [3], [5] K11 H11
FUSE11 FUSE9
A21
FUSE2
END
Return to the error

code analysis flow. FR6H2151.EPS A11
FUSE3

FR6H2507.EPS
SNS12A board
A35 A34
F1 F2
Fuse
FR6H2143.EPS
A33 A32
F3 F4


FR6H2509.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 135
[5] Block Diagram

Power supply unit
: For board operation MTH12A or DRV12A
α 400 A1 MTH12A CPU12A
1 +5
+5V 2 +5V-GND A
CN9 5AT
A2 1
A31
1 +5V 3
SNS12A LED12A
TB1 +5V 2 +5V-GND 2 CN5 CNA4 CN1
1 4 1 +5VLED 1 +5VLED +5VLED 1
2 1.5AT 2 LED1L 2 LED1L LED1L 2
3 A33 3 LED2L 3 LED2L LED2L 3
4 LED3L 4 LED3L LED3L 4
AC IN 5AT 5 LED4L 5 LED4L LED4L 5
85–265V A41 6 LED5L 6 LED5L LED5L 6
7 +5VLED 7 +5VLED +5VLED 7
10 SW1L 10 SW1L SW1L 10
11 BUZZ ON L 11 BUZZ ON L BUZZ ON L 11
12 GND 12 GND GND 12
CN6
1
CNBCR1
RTS 1 (CTS) BLU
1AT GND 2 GND PUR
A34 21 TXD NC 3 NC
22 RST +5VBCR 4 +5VBCR RED BCR
23 (CTS) RXD 5 TXD GRN
D
1 24 RXD NC 6 NC
+24V 2 25 GND (CTS) 7 RTS GRAY
26 +5VBCR TXD 8 RXD WHT
CN2 DRV12A
1
2 3AT
D41
8
FR6H2513.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 136
10.7 Board Check Pin Fuses [5] Block Diagram
INV12B INV12A MTH12A CPU12A

CN5 CN6 CN1 CN7
+24V
[1] TP4 24V Error on the INV12B Board (C21 on the MTH12A Board) TP4
A11 +5V
TP1
“10.5 Erasure Lamp and Cooling Fan Fuses”
Power supply unit
[2] TP3 24V/15V Error on the DRV12A Board (D41 on the DRV12A Board) SCN12A
α 400 A1
Replace the DRV12A board. 1 +5
+5V 2 +5V-GND
“Checks, Replacement, and Adjustment of Parts volume: 11.6 DRV12A Board” CN9
A2 1
AC IN 1 +5V 3 C21
TB1 85–265V +5V 2 +5V-GND 2
[3] TP2 15V/-15V/24V Error on the SCN12A Board (H11, J11, K11 on the MTH12A Board) 4
1
“10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses” B
2 1 +24V +15V
3 +24V 2 +24V-GND TP2
CN8 -15V
1 +24V
[4] TP1 5V Error on the CPU12A Board (A11 on the MTH12A Board) C 6
1 +24V
2
“10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses” +24V 2 +24V-GND
7
H 3 H11 SNS12A
1 +15V 8
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4 J11
9
J 5
1 -15V K11
10
-15V 2 -15V-GND
K
1 +24V
+24V 2 +24-GND
L
1 +15V
+15V 2 +15V-GND DRV12A
E CN2
1 +24V 1
+24V 2 +24V-GND 2
+24V
3 D41
D 4
1 +24V TP3
5 +15V
+24V 2 +24V-GND
6
: Regulator FR6H2528.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 137
[2] Monitoring the Sensor in M-Utility

11. Checking the Sensors
◆ NOTE ◆
11.1 Checking SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4, SA5, and SB1 If “Confir m” is clic ked upon occurrence of a f atal error , the sensor status indicates CLOSE: X. Thus,
chec k the sensor status bef ore clic king “Confir m”.
[1] Analysis Flow (1) Start the M-Utility.

(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [3][ENT] to check the sensor status.
START
(3) Perform the procedures described in [4] to turn ON/OFF the sensor, and verify that the on-
screen sensor status indication changes accordingly.
Repeat sensor monitoring N SNS12A board LED N Reseat the SNS12A/ Y An on-screen display example is shown below where the status of the SA1 and SA2 sensors
five times in M-Utility. lighting status normal? CPU12A board and has changed.
The result normal? check if the error If the error recurs, replace
Y Y [3]
occurs again. the boards in the order named. MU>SNS>3
[2]
1. SNS12A board replacement Open:o/Close:x
2. CPU12A board replacement
1 3. MTH12A board replacement
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL
AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD
END 12345112342345SSS
N
Return to the error Cable normal? Repair or replace. NNN
code analysis flow. 123
Y
[5]
ooxxxoxxooxoxoxxx
Repeat SNS12A board
LED lighting status checks N xxxxxoxxooxoxoxxx
five times to check if the
error recurs. The status of SA1 and SA2 has changed.
Y FRMT0406.EPS
Replace the sensor.

FRMT0374.EPS
010-051-06 CR-IR346RU Service Manual [11.1] MT - 137

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 138
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status ● SA3

(1) Remove the lower light protect plate.
(1) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [2][ENT] to stop SolA1.
(2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
(2) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
(3) Turn ON/OFF the relevant sensor in accordance with the procedures described in [4] and (3) Perform the procedures described in [2] to execute sensor monitoring.
verify that the LED on the SNS12A board changes its indication accordingly.
(4) Access the hole in the right-hand side cover to push the cassette release pin.
Location I/O No. Monitoring description LED ON OFF
(6) Verify that the status of SA3 changes.
(7) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive SolA1.
SA1 Monitors the cassette ejection detection. CLOSE OPEN
● SA4
SA2 Monitors the cassette IN detection. CLOSE OPEN
SNS12A board (1) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “IP
FEED/LOAD (MA1, MB1)”.
SA3 Monitors the cassette hold detection. CLOSE OPEN (2) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
(3) Perform the procedures described in [2] to execute sensor monitoring.
SA4 Monitors the suction cup HP detection. CLOSE OPEN (4) Verify that the status of SA4 is CLOSE.
(6) Type in [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive MA1 until SA4
SA5 Monitors the suction detection. CLOSE OPEN
becomes OPEN.
SB1 Monitors the cassette inlet IP detection. CLOSE OPEN (8) Perform the procedures described in [2] to execute sensor monitoring.
(9) Verify that the status of SA4 is OPEN.
TR6H2004.EPS
[4] ON/OFF of Each Sensor (11) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “IP
FEED/LOAD (MA1, MB1)”.
● SA1 and SA2
(1) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive SolA1.
(3) Perform the procedures described in [2] to executing sensor monitoring.
(4) Insert a cassette into the cassette set unit and then pull it out.
(5) Verify that the status of SA1 and SA2 changes.
(7) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [2][ENT] to stop SolA1.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 139
● SA5 and SB1 ● Block Diagram

(1) Make the RU ready for reading.
B
A
(2) Start the M-Utility. Power supply unit CNA1
1 +5VSA1
+5VSA1 1
SA1
(3) Manipulate the CL software to make the RU ready for reading. 2 SINSA1H SINSA1H 2
1 +5 3 GND
+5V 2 +5V-GND GND 3
(4) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility. CN9 4 +5VSA2
1 5AT 5 SINSA2H
(5) Type in [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [4][ENT] to start “MONITOR READING & ERASURE”. A2
1 +5V 3
A31
6 GND +5VSA2 1
SA2
SNS12A CN4 7 +5VSA3 SINSA2H 2
+5V 2 +5V-GND 2
(6) Put a cassette into the cassette set unit. TB1
4
1 +5VSA1
8 SINSA3H GND 3
1 0.5A 2 SINSA1H
9 GND
(7) As the cassette is loaded and the sensor status is displayed on the front panel, check to 2 A35 3 GND
+5VSA3 1
3 4 +5VSA2 SA3
ensure that the status of SA5 and SB1 has changed. 5 SINSA2H SINSA3H 2
AC IN GND 3
6 GND
(8) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility. 85–265V +5VSA3
7
CNA2
8 SINSA3H
GND 1 +5VSA4 +5VSA4 1
9
[5] Checking the Cable 10 +5VSA4 2 SINSA4H SINSA4H 2
SA4
SINSA4H 3 GND GND 3

(1) Power OFF the machine. 11
4 N.C
12 GND
5 SINSA5H
(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the connectors. 13 NC(+5VSA5)
SINSA5H 6 GND SINSA5H 1 SA5
14
GND GND 2
15
SA4 16 +5VSB1
M 17 SINSB1H
CNB1
SA1 18 GND
1 +5VSB1 +5VSB1 1
2 SINSB1H SB1
M SINSB1H 2
50 3 GND GND 3
Symbol Name Type

FR6H2026.EPS
SB1
SA3 SA2 SA1 Cassette ejection sensor PI(5mm)
Check point: Pins 1-18 on CN4 of the SNS12A board
SA2 Cassette IN sensor PI(5mm)
FRONT SA3 Hold sensor PI(5mm)
● Connector Pin Numbers
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor PI(5mm)
SB1 IP sensor PI(19mm)
SA1~4,SB1 CNA1
FR6H0409.EPS
SA5
1
SA4
CNA2 1
3
(3) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. CNA1
SB1 SA5
1. The connector should be securely connected.
CNB1 2
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater. SA1
SA2 1
9
SA3
CNA2
CN9 (MTH12A)
1
CN9
4
6
1 CNB1
CN4 CN4 (SNS12A)

2 1
ONT
FR 1 3
50
49 FR6H2406.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 140
11.2 Checking SC1, SC2, SC3, and SC4 [2] Monitoring the Sensor in M-Utility
◆ NOTE ◆
[1] Analysis Flow If “Confir m” is clic ked upon occurrence of a f atal error , the sensor status indicates CLOSE: X. Thus,
START
Repeat sensor monitoring N SNS12A board LED N Reseat the SNS12A/ Y (3) Perform the procedures described in [4] to turn ON/OFF the sensor, and verify that the on-
five times in M-Utility. lighting status normal? CPU12A board and screen sensor status indication changes accordingly.
The result normal? check if the error If the error recurs, replace
Y Y [3]
occurs again. An on-screen display example is shown below where the status of the SC1, SC2, SC3, and
[2] the boards in the order named. SC4 sensors has changed.
1. SNS12A board replacement
1 3. MTH12A board replacement MU>SNS>3
Open:o/Close:x
END
N SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL
Return to the error Cable normal? Repair or replace. AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD
code analysis flow. Y 12345112342345SSS
[5]
NNN
Repeat SNS12A board
123
LED lighting status checks N
five times to check if the ooxxxoxxooxoxoxxx
error recurs.
xxxxxoooxxxoxoxxx
Y
The status of SC1, SC2, SC3, and SC4 has changed.
FRMT0418.EPS
Replace the sensor.
FRMT0407.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 141
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status ● SC2

(1) Perform the procedures described in [2] to execute sensor monitoring, and check the status
(2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. of SC2.
(3) Turn ON/OFF the relevant sensor in accordance with the procedures described in [4] and (2) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
verify that the LED on the SNS12A board changes its indication accordingly. (3) Type in [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [2][ENT] → 100[ENT] → [1][ENT] →
[4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute 100-pulse driving for the motor MC2.
Location I/O No. Monitoring description LED ON OFF (4) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
SC1 Monitors the side-positioning HP detection. CLOSE OPEN (6) Compare the status of SC2 against the status at step (1) above to verify that the status has
changed.
SC2 Monitors the grip release HP detection. CLOSE OPEN
(8) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “SIDE-
SNS12A board POSITIONING GRIP (MC2)”.
SC3 Monitors the side-positioning IP detection. CLOSE OPEN (9) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
● SC3 and SC4

SC4 Monitors the erasure positioning IP detection. CLOSE OPEN
(1) Have a cassette on hand.
TR6H2006.EPS
Have a cassette on hand which may be erased.
[4] ON/OFF of Each Sensor
Manipulate the CL to make the RU ready for reading (with the cassette loading lamp
● SC1 illuminated).
(3) Type in [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [4][ENT].
of SC1. The machine is ready for IP conveyance.
(2) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility. (4) Set the cassette in position.
(3) Type in [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute reference-pulse IP conveyance and erasure are performed, while, at the same time, the sensor status is
driving for the motor MC1. displayed. Verify that the status of SC3 and SC4 has changed.
(4) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility. (5) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
(6) Compare the status of SC1 against the status at step (1) above to verify that the status has
changed.
POSITIONING (MC1)”.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 142
[5] Checking the Cable ● Block Diagram

B
Power supply unit
(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the connectors.
+5VSC1 1
SC4 1 +5 SC1
+5V SINSC1H 2
2 +5V-GND
CN9
5AT
A GND 3
A2 1
A31
1 +5V 3 CNC1
+5V 2 +5V-GND 2 SNS12A CN4 +5VSC2 1
SC2
TB1 1 1 +5VSC1 SINSC2H 2
1 4 2 SINSC1H
0.5A GND 3
2 A35 19 +5VSC1 3 GND
M SC2 3 20 SINSC1H 4 +5VSC2
+5VSC4 1
M 21 GND 5 SINSC2H SC4
AC IN SINSC4H 2
22 +5VSC2 6 GND
SC1 Symbol Name Type 85–265V GND 3
23 SINSC2H 7 +5VSC4
Side-positioning HP sensor PI(5mm) 24 GND 8 SINSC4H
SC1
25 +5VSC4 9 GND
M SC2 Grip HP sensor PI(5mm) SINSC4H
26 10 +5VSC3
M GND
M SC3 IP sensor PI(19mm) 27 11 SINSC3H
28 +5VSC3 12 GND +5VSC3 1
SC3
SC4 IP sensor PI(19mm) 29 SINSC3H SINSC3H 2
30 GND GND 3
SC3
FR6H0410.EPS
50 Check point: Pins 19-30 on CN4 of the

(3) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. SNS12A board FR6H2028.EPS

2. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater. ● Connector Pin Numbers
CN-SC1–4 CNC1
1 2
3 1
12
11
SC4
CN9 (MTH12A) CN4 (SNS12A)
SC1
SC2 2
4
SC3 1
50
1
CN9 CNC1
49
CN4
T
ON
FR
FR6H2408.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 143
11.3 Checking SZ2, SZ3, SZ4, and SZ5 [2] Monitoring the Sensor in M-Utility
◆ NOTE ◆
[1] Analysis Flow If “Confir m” is clic ked upon occurrence of a f atal error , the sensor status indicates CLOSE: X. Thus,
START (1) Start the M-Utility.

(3) Perform the procedures described in [4] to turn ON/OFF the sensor, and verify that the on-
Repeat sensor monitoring N SNS12A board LED N Reseat the SNS12A/ Y
five times in M-Utility.
screen sensor status indication changes accordingly.
lighting status normal? CPU12A board and
The result normal? check if the error If the error recurs, replace An on-screen display example is shown below where the status of the SZ2, SZ3, SZ4, and
Y Y [3]
occurs again. the boards in the order named. SZ5 sensors has changed.
[2]
1. SNS12A board replacement
2. CPU12A board replacement MU>SNS>3
1 3. MTH12A board replacement Open:o/Close:x
END SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL
N AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD
Return to the error Cable normal? Repair or replace.
code analysis flow. 12345112342345SSS
Y
[5] NNN
123
Repeat SNS12A board
ooxxxoxxooxoxoxxx
error recurs. xxxxxoooxxoxoxxxx
Y
The status of SZ2, SZ3, SZ4 and SZ5 has changed.
FRMT0419.EPS
Replace the sensor.

FRMT0408.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 144
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status [4] ON/OFF of Each Sensor
● SZ2 and SZ3
(3) Turn ON/OFF the relevant sensor in accordance with the procedures described in [4] and (1) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “SUB
verify that the LED on the SNS12A board changes its indication accordingly. READING GRIP DRIVE (MZ2)”.
(2) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears.

● SZ4
SZ2 Monitors the driving-side grip release HP detection. CLOSE OPEN
of SZ4.
SZ3 Monitors the driven-side grip release HP detection. CLOSE OPEN (2) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
SNS12A board (3) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the IP stopper solenoid (SOLZ1).
SZ4 Monitors the IP stopper HP detection. CLOSE OPEN Verify that the status of SZ4 changes.
SZ5 Monitors the dust removal HP detection. CLOSE OPEN
(6) Compare the status of SZ4 against the status at step (1) above to verify that the status has
TR6H2005.EPS
changed.
(8) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] to stop the IP stopper solenoid.
● SZ5
(1) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [7][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for
“SCANNER CLEANING (MZ3)”.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 145
[5] Checking the Cable ● Block Diagram

(1) Power OFF the machine. B
Power supply unit
(2) Check the locations of the sensors and remove the covers to gain access to them.
1 +5
+5V +5VSZ2 1
2 +5V-GND SZ2
CN9
5AT
A SINSZ2H 2
SZ5 A2 1 GND 3
SZ2 SZ3 A31
1 +5V 3 CN4 CNZ1
SNS12A
TB1 +5V 2 +5V-GND 2 1 1 +5VSZ2 +5VSZ3 1
1 4 SZ3
0.5A 2 SINSZ2H SINSZ3H 2
2 A35 31 +5VSZ2 3 GND GND 3
M 3 32 SINSZ2H 4 +5VSZ3
M 33 GND 5 SINSZ3H
+5VSZ4 1
AC IN 34 +5VSZ3 6 GND SZ4
Symbol Name Type 85–265V 35 SINSZ3H 7 +5VSZ4
SINSZ4H 2
GND GND 3
SZ2 Driving-side grip operation sensor PI(5mm) 36 8 SINSZ4H
37 +5VSZ5 9 GND
M SZ3 Driven-side grip operation sensor PI(5mm) +5VSZ5
38 SINSZ5H 10 +5VSZ5 1
M SZ5
M IP stopper HP sensor PI(5mm) 39 GND 11 SINSZ5H SINSZ5H 2
SZ4
40 +5V OK 12 GND GND 3
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor PI(5mm) 13
46 +5VSZ4
SZ4 FR6H0411.EPS 47 SINSZ4H 22
48 GND
49
(3) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. 50 N.C
1. The connector should be securely connected. FR6H2027.EPS
● Connector Pin Numbers
4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. SZ2~5
CN9 (MTH12A)
SZ3
SZ2
4
SZ5
1
CNZ1 CN4 (SNS12A)
CN9
2 2
CNZ1 1 1
50
SZ4
22
CN4
21 49
T
ON
FR
FR6H2407.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 146
[2] Checking Motor Operation in M-Utility

12. Checking the Motors
● Checking MA1 operation
12.1 Checking MA1 and MB1
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the suction cup driving
[1] Analysis Flow motor (MA1).
(3) Make sure there is nothing abnormal with driving sound of the motor.
START (4) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
(5) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” FOR “IP
FEED/LOAD (MA1)”.
Actuate the motor in N DRV12A board LED N Reseat the DRV12A/ N
M-Utility. The result lighting status normal? CPU12A board and check
1 (6) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
normal? if the error occurs again.
Y
Y [3]
[2] Y ● Checking MB1 operation
1 (1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the IP transport motor
N (MB1).
END The resistance value of Repair or replace.
the motor normal? (3) Make sure there is nothing abnormal with driving sound of the motor.
Y (4) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
[4]
N
Cable normal? Repair or replace.
Y
[5]
Repeat DRV12A board

LED lighting status checks
error recurs.
If the error recurs, replace

the boards in the order named.
1. DRV12A board replacement
3. MTH12A board replacement
FR6H0408.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 147
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status [4] Measuring the Motor Resistance Value
(1) Remove the lower light protect plate. (1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. (2) Remove the covers to gain access to the motor.
(3) Start the M-Utility. (3) Measure the winding resistance of the motor.
(4) Perform the procedures described in [2] to drive the relevant motor, and verify the LED Check the connector pin numbers by way of cable colors, and make sure that the winding
lighting status. resistance value of the motor is held within its reference levels.
Location I/O No. Monitoring description LED ON OFF ● Terminal numbers and locations
Latch
MA1 Monitors the suction cup driving motor control signal. Drive Stop Terminal No. Motor cable color
6 5 4 1 Red
DRV12A board MB1 Monitors the IP transport motor control signal. Drive Stop 3 2 1 2 Black
FRMT0433.EPS 3 Yellow
TR6H2010.EPS
4 Blue
(5) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the motor, and verify the LED lighting status. 5 White
6 Orange
TR6H2551.EPS
● Winding resistance value of the motor (common to MA and MB1)
Measurement position Reference

resistance value
1 (red) 2 (black)
3 (yellow) 2 (black)
0.8 – 1.3Ω
4 (blue) 5 (white)
6 (orange) 5 (white)
TR6H2552.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 148
[5] Checking the Cable ● Connector Pin Numbers

(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the connectors. CNA10
MA1 CN3 (DRV12A),
(3) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. CNC10
1. The connector should be securely connected. 12
3. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2Ω or greater. 6
4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. MB1
7
1
● Block Diagram
A B
Power supply unit CN2 (DRV12A)
CNA10 CNMA1
α 400 MTH12A CPU12A 1 1 RED MA1A
4 4 BLU MA1B 8
2 2 BLK +24V
5 5 WHT +24V MA1
3 3 YEL MA1AL 4
AC IN 6 6 ORN MA1BL 5
SNS12A
TB1 85–265V CN2 1
1
D
2 1 CN3
3 +24V CNMB1
2
1 RED MB1A CNA10,
CN2 DRV12A CN3 4 BLU MB1B CNMA1,
+24V 1 1 MA1A 2 BLK +24V CNMB1
7 MA1B 5 WHT +24V MB1 T
2 ON
3 2 +24V 3 YEL MB1AL FR 4
D11 6 ORN MB1BL
PGND 4 8 +24V
5 3 MA1AL 1
6 9 MA1BL 6
7 4 MB1A
8 10 MB1B
3
FR6H2412.EPS
5 +24V
D51
11 +24V
6 MB1AL
12 MB1BL
FR6H2032.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 149
12.2 Checking MC1, MC2, and MC3 [2] Checking Motor Operation in M-Utility
● Checking MC1 operation

[1] Analysis Flow
START POSITIONING (MC1)”.
(3) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears and that there is nothing abnormal with driving sound
of the motor.
Y ● Checking MC2 operation
Y [3]
[2] Y
1 (2) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “SIDE-
POSITIONING GRIP (MC2)”.
END The resistance value of N
Repair or replace. of the motor.
the motor normal?
Y
[4]
● Checking MC3 operation
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [6][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “TRANSFER
N
Cable normal? Repair or replace. MOTOR UNLIMITED DRIVE (MB1, MC3)”.
Y (3) Make sure there is nothing abnormal with driving sound of the motor.
[5]
(4) Type in [2][ENT].
The motor stops.
Repeat DRV12A board

error recurs.

FR6H0415.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 150
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status [4] Measuring the Motor Resistance Value
(1) Remove the lower light protect plate. (1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board. (2) Remove the covers to gain access to the motor.
(3) Start the M-Utility. (3) Measure the winding resistance of the motor.
(4) Perform the procedures described in [2] to drive the relevant motor, and verify the LED Check the connector pin numbers by way of cable colors, and make sure that the winding
lighting status. resistance value of the motor is held within its reference levels.
Location I/O No. Monitoring description LED ON OFF ● Terminal numbers and locations
Latch
MC1 Monitors the side-positioning motor control signal. Drive Stop Terminal No. Motor cable color
6 5 4 1 Red
DRV12A board MC2 Monitors the grip release motor control signal. Drive Stop 3 2 1 2 Black
FRMT0433.EPS 3 Yellow
MC3 Monitors the IP transport motor control signal. Drive Stop 4 Blue
TR6H2009.EPS
5 White
6 Orange
(5) As the motor automatically stops 30 seconds later, verify the LED lighting status. TR6H2551.EPS
● Winding resistance value of the motor (common to MC1, MC2, and MC3)

resistance value
1 (red) 2 (black)
3 (yellow) 2 (black)
0.8 – 1.3Ω
4 (blue) 5 (white)
6 (orange) 5 (white)
TR6H2552.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 151

(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the connectors. CN5 (DRV12A),
CNC10
(3) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following.
12
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater. 6
7
4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. 1
● Block Diagram
CN2 (DRV12A)
Power supply unit MC1
MC3 8
α 400 MTH12A CPU12A
A B CNC10
MC2
4
CNC10 CNMC1
1 1 RED MC1A 5
AC IN
1
SNS12A 7 4 BLU MC1B
TB1 85–265V 2 2 BLK +24V
1
E 8 5 WHT +24V MC1
2 1 3 3 YEL MC1AL CN2 CN4 (DRV12A),
3 +24V 2 9 6 ORN MC1BL CN5 CNMC1,2,3
4 CN4
CN2 DRV12A CN5 10 CNMC2
+24V 1 3AT 1 MC1A 5
4
E11 1 RED MC1A
PGND 2 7 MC1B 11 4 BLU MC1B
+24V 3 2 +24V 6 2 BLK +24V O NT 1
4 8 +24V 12 5 WHT MC2 FR 6
+24V
5 3 MC1AL 3 YEL MC1AL
6 9 MC1BL 3
3AT 6 ORN MC1BL
7 4 MC2A FR6H2411.EPS
E51
8 10 MC2B
5 +24V
11 +24V
6 MC2AL
12 MC2BL
CN4 CNMC3
3AT 1 MC3A 1 RED MC1A
E21
4 MC3B 4 BLU MC1B
2 +24V 2 BLK +24V
5 +24V 5 WHT +24V MC3
3 MC3AL 3 YEL MC1AL
6 MC3BL 6 ORN MC1BL
FR6H2031.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 152
12.3 Checking MZ2 and MZ3 [2] Checking Motor Operation in M-Utility
● Checking MZ2 operation

[1] Analysis Flow
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for “SUB
START READING GRIP DRIVE (MZ2)”.
of the motor.
Y
Y [3]
[2] Y ● Checking MZ3 operation
1 (1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [7][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “HOME POSITION” for
N “SCANNER CLEANING (MZ3)”.
END The resistance value of Repair or replace.
the motor normal? (3) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears and that there is nothing abnormal with driving sound
Y of the motor.
[4]
N
Y
[5]
Repeat DRV12A board

error recurs.

FR6H0418.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 153
[3] Checking the LED Lighting Status

(4) Perform the procedures described in [2] to drive the relevant motor, and verify the LED
lighting status.
MZ2 Monitors the grip release motor drive signal. Drive Stop
DRV12A board MZ3 Monitors dust removal motor drive signal. Drive Stop
TR6H2008.EPS
[4] Measuring the Motor Resistance Value

(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the motor.
(3) Measure the winding resistance of the motor.
Check the connector pin numbers by way of cable colors, and make sure that the winding
resistance value of the motor is held within its reference levels.

resistance value
1 (red) 2 (black) 0.8 – 1.3Ω
TR6H2553.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 154

CN2 (DRV12A) ,
CN6 (DRV12A)
8
1
● Block Diagram CNZ11
MZ2
Power supply unit MZ3
B 6
α 400 MTH12A CPU12A
A CNMZ2 3
MZ2+15V 1 RED CNZ11 4
CNZ11 PGND 2 BLK MZ2 1
1
AC IN SNS12A 4
TB1 85–265V 2 CNMZ2
1 5 CNMZ3 CN2 CNMZ3
2 3 MZ3+15V1 1 RED
3 MZ3+15V2 2 BLK MZ3
6 CN6
CN2 DRV12A CN6
+15V 1 2A 1 MZ2+15V
L21 T
2 5 PGND ON 2
3AT FR
3 2 MZ3+15V1 1
L31
PGND 4 6 MZ3+15V2 FR6H2410.EPS
+15V 5
PGND 6 8
7
L 8
1
+15V 2
FR6H2030.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 155
12.4 Checking MZ1 (FFM Motor) [2] Checking the LED Lighting Status
[1] Analysis Flow
START (4) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [9][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive “MZ1
(FFM)” at “READING SPEED”.
(5) Make sure that the LED is illuminated.
Activate the motor to be N Fuse on L11 of the N Replace the fuse.
checked. M-Utility DRV12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Location I/O No. Monitoring description LED ON OFF
indication and DRV12A Adjustment of Parts volume:
board LED lighting Y 12. Fuse Replacement and
“10.2 Motor-Related
normal? Fuse Locations”
Fuses” FFM Monitors the FFM motor drive signal. Drive Stop
Y
[2] N
1 Cable normal? Repair or replace. TR6H2022.EPS
DRV12A board
Y
[3]
END
Return to the error
code analysis flow. Reseat the DRV12A/ N
CPU12A board and check 1 (6) Hit [2][ENT] to stop the motor.
if the error occurs again.
(7) Make sure that the LED turns OFF, with “RESULT: OK” displayed.
Y
If the error recurs, replace the boards

in the order named.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 156

CN2 (DRV12A)
4
● Block Diagram CN2 CNZ10

CN1
Power supply unit
α 400 A B
MTH12A CPU12A 1
CNZ1 CNZ1
FFM12A
1
4
13 SUP OK 1 CN2
14 OK L 2 CN1 (FFM12A)
15 +5VSEN 3 CN2
SNS12A CN4
1 16 START L 4 CN8
17 CW L 5
18 MO L 6
CN4 1
40 SUP OK
41 OK L
42 +5VSEN 22
START L T
43 ON
44 CW L FR
45 MO L 4
AC IN
TB1 85—265V 50 CNZ10 CN4 (SNS12A) CN2 (FFM12A)
1 1 YEL +15V 1 CN1
2 2 YEL PGND 2 2 1
3 3 YEL +5V 3
4 YEL PGND 4
CN2 DRV12A CN8 1
1 1 PGND
50
2 2 +5V
3 3 PGND 6
PGND 4 4 +15V 49
L11
+15V 5
PGND 6 CNZ1
7
L 8 2
1
+15V 2
1
15V → 5V regulator FR6H2033.EPS
22
21 FR6H2413.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 157
[2] Checking Actuator Operation in M-Utility

13. Checking the Actuators
● Checking SOLA1 operation
[1] Analysis Flow (1) Start the M-Utility.
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the cassette hold
solenoid (SOLA1).
START
By listening to its driving sound, verify that the solenoid is operating.
(3) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the cassette hold solenoid (SOLA1).
Activate the actuator in N DRV12A board LED N Reseat the DRV12A/ Y
(4) Hit [0][ENT].
normal?
Y
if the error occurs again. If the error recurs, replace the (5) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears.
[3]
N boards in the order named.
Y
[2] 3. MTH12A board replacement ● Checking PA1 operation
1
END The resistance value of N (2) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [5][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the suction pump
the actuator normal? Repair or replace.
(PA1).
Y [4] By listening to its driving sound, verify that the pump is operating.
(3) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the suction pump (PA1).
(4) Hit [0][ENT].
N
Y [5] (6) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utility.
● Checking SVA1 operation

Repeat SNS12A board
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the leak valve (SVA1).
1 By listening to its driving sound, verify that the valve is operating.
error recurs.
(3) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the leak valve (SVA1).
Y [3]
(4) Hit [0][ENT].
If the error recurs, replace the

boards in the order named.
3. MTH12A board replacement FR6H2141.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 158
● Checking CLA1 operation [3] Checking the LED Lighting Status

(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the cassette extrusion clutch
(CLA1). (3) Start the M-Utility.
By listening to its driving sound, verify that the clutch is operating. (4) Perform the procedures described in [2] to drive the relevant actuator, and verify the LED
lighting status.
(3) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the cassette extrusion clutch (CLA1).
(4) Hit [0][ENT].
(6) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utilit
SolA1 Monitors the cassette hold solenoid control signal. Drive Stop
● Checking SOLZ1 operation
(1) Start the M-Utility. DRV12A board PA1 Monitors the suction pump drive signal. Drive Stop
(2) Type in [6][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] to drive the IP stopper solenoid (SOLZ1).
By listening to its driving sound, verify that the solenoid is operating. SVA1 Monitors the IP leak valve drive signal. Drive Stop
(3) Type in [2][ENT] to stop the IP stopper solenoid (SOLZ1).
(4) Hit [0][ENT].
CLA1 Monitors the clutch drive signal. Drive Stop
(6) Navigate the menu to return to the initial screen of the M-Utilit
SolZ1 Monitors the stopper driving solenoid control signal. Drive Stop
TR6H2007.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 159
[4] Measuring the Actuator Resistance Value ■ For PA1

■ For SOLA1 and SOLZ1
(2) Check the location of PA1, and remove the covers to gain access to it.
(3) Measure the resistance value of PA1.
(2) Check the locations of SOLA1 and SOLZ1, and remove the covers to gain access to them.
Check the connector pin numbers by way of cable colors, and make sure that the resistance
(3) Measure the resistance value of SOLA1 and SOLZ1. value of PA1 is held within its reference levels.
value of SOLA1 and SOLZ1 is held within their reference levels.
● Terminal numbers and locations
Latch
● Terminal numbers and locations Terminal No. Actuator cable color
Latch 3 4 1 Red
Terminal No. Actuator cable color
2 Not connected
3 4 1 2
1 Red
FRMT0442.EPS 3 Black
1 2 2 Not connected
4 Not connected
FRMT0442.EPS 3 Yellow TR6H2557.EPS
4 Black
● Resistance value of the actuator (common to SOLA1 and SOLZ1)
TR6H2554.EPS
Reference
● Resistance value of the actuator (common to SOLA1 and SOLZ1) Measurement position resistance value
1 (red) 3 (black) 1Ω or less

resistance value TR6H2558.EPS
1 (red) 3 (yellow) 13.5 – 16.5Ω

1 (red) 4 (black) 134 – 154Ω ■ For SVA1
TR6H2555.EPS (1) Power OFF the machine.
(2) Check the location of SVA1, and remove the covers to gain access to it.
■ For CLA1
(3) Measure the resistance value of SVA1.
(2) Check the location of CLA1, and remove the covers to gain access to it. value of SVA1 is held within its reference levels.
(3) Measure the resistance value of CLA1.
Reference
Check the connector pin numbers by way of cable colors, and make sure that the resistance Measurement position resistance value
value of CLA1 is held within its reference levels. 1 (red) 2 (black) 65 – 95Ω
TR6H2559.EPS

resistance value
1 (red) 2 (black) 110 – 150Ω
TR6H2556.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 160

(2) Remove the covers to gain access to the connectors. SVA1 CN2 (DRV12A) , CNSVA1,
PA1 CN6 (DRV12A) CNCLA1
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater. CLA1
4
5 2
SolA1 1
● Block Diagram CN7 (DRV12A)
A 10
MTH12A CPU12A
CNSOLA1
Power supply unit 1 RED SolZ1 5
3 YEL
α 400 2 BLK SolA1 6
4 1
SNS12A
CNPA1
RED
CN2 CNSolA1,
AC IN 1
3 BLK CN7 CNPA1,
TB1 85–265V
1 2 PA1 CN6 CNSolZ1,
D CN2 DRV12A CN7
2 3AT NC 4
1 +24V 1 1 +24V
3 +24V D21
2 PGND 2 6 +24VH T
+24V 3 2 NC CNSVA1 ON 4
E FR
PGND 4 7 +24VL 1 RED
1 BLK SVA1
2A 3 +24VPA1 2
+24V 2
D31
2
8 8 PGND 3
4 +24VSVA1 1 FR6H2409.EPS
9 PGND CNCLA1
2A 5 +24VCLA1 1 RED
E41
10 PGND 2 BLK CLA1
CN6
1
CNSOLZ1
3 +24V 1 RED
E31
7 +24VH 3 YEL
4 NC 2 BLK SolZ1
8 +24VL 4
FR6H2029.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 161
[2] Checking Laser ON in M-Utility

14. Checking the Scanner I/O
(1) Remove the front cover and lower light protect plate.
14.1 Checking the Laser (LDD) (2) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A board.
(4) Type in [5][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] to turn ON the laser.
[1] Analysis Flow
(5) Check the result for “RESULT: ”.
START “RESULT: OK” → The troubleshooting procedure is completed.
“RESULT: XXXXX” → See the error code table to perform troubleshooting as appropriate.
Laser ON operation N N N Replace the power (6) Check to see if the LED on the SCN12A board is normal.
TP2 voltage on the Voltage on the power supply
normal in M-Utility? supply unit.
SCN12A board normal? unit normal? [GOOD indication]
Y Y Y
[2] “9.1 Checking the Voltage “9.2 Checking the Adjustment of Parts volume: ◆ NOTE ◆
1 on the Board Test Pins Voltage on the Power 11.8 Power Supply”
(Connectors)” Supply Unit” Because the “HVOK” LED indication varies depending on the position of the HV switch, check
the position of the HV switch.
END • High-voltage switch in the ON position → LED ON
Return to error code Power OFF • High-voltage switch in the OFF position → LED OFF
analysis flow
Fuses H13 and J12 on the N Replace the fuse. Polygon ON

SCN12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: Quasi-reading LED ON
12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses” Quasi-reading PMT
Y
“10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses” Data issuance
N Check unnecessary
Cable normal? Restore the cable.
POLLOCK
ON
LD11DLE
PMTD1G
Y
POLON
[3]
ZLCLK
LD10N
LD20N
LD10K
LIGHT
HVOK
PCLK
FCLK
Blinking
SOH
SOS
N
Error recurs? 1 OFF
Y
Controller front view

SCN12A and CPU12A
N
boards tested in M-Utility Replace the error-causing board.
normal? “Checks, Replacement and S1
HVON
Y “11.3 SCN12A Board” CN5
“11.2 CPU12A Board” CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CN4 S1
N
SCN12A
FR6H2039.EPS
Error recurs? 1
Y
[NG indication]
Replace the scanning optics unit. All other than GOOD indication.
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit” FR6H2103.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 162

(2) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. MTH12A-CN8
10

1
● Block Diagram MTH12A-CN9
MTH12A CPU12A
CNE1 4
A Scanning optics unit
1
Power supply unit
SCN12A LDD12A
α400 A1 CN1 CNE1
CN9
5A 1.5A CN1
1 +5 1 +15AS 1 +15AS
+5V H11 H13 1 CN8
2 +5V-GND 2 AG 2 AG
CN9 3 +15AS 3 +15AS 2
A2 1
4 AG 4 AG
AC IN 1 +5V 3 CN1
5 +15AS 5 +15AS
TB1 85-265V +5V 2 +5V-GND 2
6 AG 6 AG
1 4
B 7 +15AS 7 +15AS
2 1 +24V 8 AG 8 AG
3 5A 1.5A
+24V 2 +24V-GND CN8 9 -15AS 9 -15AS
J11 J12 T
1 10 AG 10 AG ON
C 6 11 -15AS 11 -15AS FR
1 +24V 12 AG 12 AG
2
+24V 2 +24V-GND 13 LD1IDH 13 LD1IDH
7 19
H 3 14 LD1IDL 14 LD1IDL 20 SCN12A-CN1 CNE1
1 +15V 8 15 15 LD1ONH
NC
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4 16 16 LD1ONL
9 17 LD1ONH 17 LD1OKH 2
J 5 18 LD1ONL 18 LD1OKL 20
1 -15V 19 19 LDIFH
10 NC
-15V 2 -15V-GND 20 20 LDIFL 1
21 LD1OKH 40 19
K LD1OKL
1 +24V 22
+24V 2 +24-GND 23 LDIFH
24 LDIFL
2
40 39 1
FR6H2403.EPS
Error detection signal: LD1IDH, LD1IDL, LD1ONH, LD1ONL, LD1OKH, LD1OKL FR6H2023.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 163
14.2 Checking the Polygonal Mirror (POL) [2] Checking Laser ON in M-Utility
[1] Analysis Flow
START (4) Type in [5][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] to turn ON the laser.
Laser ON operation N TP2 voltage on the N Voltage on the power supply

N Replace the power “RESULT: OK” → The troubleshooting procedure is completed.
supply unit.
normal in M-Utility? SCN12A board normal? unit normal? “RESULT: XXXXX” → See the error code table to perform troubleshooting as appropriate.
Y Y Y
[2] “9.1 Checking the Voltage “9.2 Checking the Adjustment of Parts volume: (6) Check to see if the LED on the SCN12A board is normal.
1 on the Board Test Pins Voltage on the 11.8 Power Supply”
(Connectors)” Power Supply Unit” [GOOD indication]
END
◆ NOTE ◆
Return to error code
Because the “HVOK” LED indication varies depending on the position of the HV switch, check
Power OFF
analysis flow the position of the HV switch.
N • High-voltage switch in the ON position → LED ON
Cable normal? Restore the cable. • High-voltage switch in the OFF position → LED OFF
Y
[3]
N Polygon ON
Error recurs? 1 Quasi-reading LED ON
Y Quasi-reading PMT
Data issuance
Check unnecessary
SCN12A and CPU12A N
POLLOCK
ON
LD11DLE
PMTD1G
POLON
ZLCLK
LD10N
LD20N
LD10K
LIGHT
HVOK
PCLK
FCLK
Adjustment of Parts volume: Blinking
SOH
SOS
Y “11.3 SCN12A Board”
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility” “11.2 CPU12A Board” OFF
N
Error recurs? 1 Controller front view
Y
S1
Replace the scanning optics unit.
HVON
FR6H2130.EPS
“Checks, Replacement and CN5

Adjustment of Parts volume: CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CN4 S1
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit” SCN12A
FR6H2040.EPS
[NG indication]
All other than GOOD indication.

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 164

(2) While referring to the block diagram and connector pin numbers, check the following. MTH12A-CN8
10

1
● Block Diagram MTH12A-CN9
CNE2
4
POL12A
CN1
1
Power supply unit 8
NC 7 CN9 SCN12A-CN3
α400 A1 MTH12A CPU12A PIDXL 6
1 +5 GND-P 5 CN8
+5V 2 +5V-GND PONL
CN9 4 1
POKL 3
A2 1
GND-P 2
AC IN 1 +5V 3 CN3
+5V 2 +5V-GND 2 +24PS 1
TB1 85-265V 6
1 4
B SCN12A CNE2
2 1 +24V
3 2 +24V-GND T
+24V CN8 ON
1 FR
C
1 +24V
6
2
A 1
+24V 2 +24V-GND
7
H 3 6
1 +15V 8 CN3 CNE2 FR6H2405.EPS
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4 1 PIDXL 1 +24PS

9 2 GND-P 2 GND-P
J 5 3 PONL 3 POKL
1 -15V 4 POKL 4 PONL
10
-15V 2 -15V-GND 5 GND-P 5 GND-P
2A 6 +24PS 6 PIDXL
K K11
1 +24V
+24V 2 +24-GND
The cable connection
between the connectors
is crossed.
Error detection signal: POKL, PONL FR6H2025.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 165
14.3 Checking the Start-Point Sensor (SYN) [2] Checking Laser ON in M-Utility
[1] Analysis Flow
normal in M-Utility? supply unit.
SCN12A board normal? unit normal?
Y Y Y
Adjustment of Parts volume: (6) Check to see if the LED on the SCN12A board is normal.
[2] “9.1 Checking the Voltage “9.2 Checking the
1 on the Board Test Pins Voltage on the
(Connectors)” Power Supply Unit” [GOOD indication]
END ◆ NOTE ◆
Return to error code Power OFF
• High-voltage switch in the ON position → LED ON
Fuses H12, H14, J12, and N Replace the fuse. • High-voltage switch in the OFF position → LED OFF
A22 on the SCN12A board “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume:
normal? 12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses”
Y
“10.4 Scanner-Related Fuses” Polygon ON
Quasi-reading LED ON
N
Cable normal? Restore the cable. Quasi-reading PMT
Data issuance
Y
[3] Check unnecessary
N
POLLOCK
ON
LD11DLE
1
PMTD1G
Error recurs?
POLON
ZLCLK
LD10N
LD20N
LD10K
LIGHT
HVOK
PCLK
FCLK
Blinking
SOH
SOS
Y
OFF
SCN12A and CPU12A N
normal? “Checks, Replacement and Controller front view
“8. Board Tests in M-Utility” “11.2 CPU12A Board”
S1
HVON
N CN5
Error recurs? 1 CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CN4 S1
Y SCN12A
FR6H2044.EPS
Replace the scanning optics unit.

“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: [NG indication]

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 166

MTH12A-CN8
MTH12A-CN9
● Block Diagram
4
Power supply unit
1
α400 A1 MTH12A CPU12A CN1
1 +5 CN9
+5V 2 +5V-GND SYN12A-CN1
A2 1
CN9
5A
A21
A
1 +5V 3 CN8
AC IN
TB1 85–265V +5V 2 +5V-GND 2
4 Scanning optics unit 1
1
B
CN1
2 SCN12A
1 +24V
3 +24V 2 +24V-GND CN8 5A 1.5A CN1 SYN12A
1 H11 H12 1
C 6 CN1 10
1 +24V +15VAS T
+15VAS
2 +24V-GND
2 25 10 ON SCN12A-CN1
+24V
7 26 AG AG 9 FR
1.5A +5VAS +5VAS
H 3 27 8
1 +15V 8
H14
28 AG AG 7
2
5A 1.5A -15VAS
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4 29 -15AVS 6
J11 J12
9 30 AG AG 5
J 5 31 +5VDS +5VDS 4 1
1 -15V 1.5A GND DG
40
10 A22 32 3
-15V 2 -15V-GND
33 SSL SSL 2
K 34 SSH SSH 1
1 +24V
+24V 2 +24-GND 40 NC
39
FR6H2401.EPS
Error detection signal: SSL, SSH : 15V → 5 V regulator FR6H2021.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 167
14.4 Checking the Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) [2] Checking Laser ON in M-Utility
[1] Analysis Flow
START
(4) Type in [5][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] to turn ON the laser.
“RESULT: OK” → The troubleshooting procedure is completed.
N Replace the power
Laser ON operation normal N TP2 voltage on the N Voltage on the power supply
in M-Utility? SCN12A board normal? unit normal? supply unit. (6) Check to see if the LED on the SCN12A board is normal.
“Checks, Replacement and [GOOD indication]
Y Y Y
◆ NOTE ◆
(Connectors)” Power Supply Unit”
the position of the HV switch.
END
Power OFF
• High-voltage switch in the OFF position → LED OFF
Fuse A22 on the SCN12A N Replace the fuse.

board normal?
“Checks, Replacement and Polygon ON
Y Adjustment of Parts volume: Quasi-reading LED ON
12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses” Quasi-reading PMT
Data issuance
N
Cable normal? Restore the cable. Check unnecessary
POLLOCK
Y ON
LD11DLE
PMTD1G
POLON
[3]
ZLCLK
LD10N
LD20N
LD10K
LIGHT
HVOK
PCLK
FCLK
Blinking
SOH
SOS
N
Error recurs? 1 OFF
Y

SCN12A and CPU12A N
boards tested in M-Utility
normal? S1
HVON
Y CN5
SCN12A
N FR6H2043.EPS
Error recurs? 1
Y
[NG indication]
If the error recurs, replace the scanning All other than GOOD indication.
optics unit.
FR6H2131.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 168

MTH12A-CN8 SED12A-CN1
3. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2Ω or greater. 5 4

4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. 6 1
1
● Block Diagram
Power supply unit MTH12A-CN9

CN8
α400 A1 MTH12A CPU12A
1 +5 CN9
+5V 2 +5V-GND 4
CN9
1 5A
A2 A21 1
AC IN
+5V
1 +5V
2 +5V-GND
3
2
A
TB1 85-265V
1 4 CN2 CN1
B SCN12A SCN12A-CN2
2 1 +24V
3 SED12A
+24V 2 +24V-GND CN8 CN2
1 1 GND CN1 1
C 6 2 VCC GND 1
1 +24V NT
2 3 SED1L VCC 2 O
+24V 2 +24V-GND
7 4 SED2L SED1L 3 FR
4
H 3 SED2L 4 FR6H2402.EPS
1 +15V 8
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4
9
J 5
1 -15V 1.5A
10 A22
-15V 2 -15V-GND
K
1 +24V
+24V 2 +24-GND
Error detection signal: SED1L, SED2L FR6H2022.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 169
14.5 Checking the Light-Collecting Unit (PMT) [2] Checking the Light-Collecting Unit in M-Utility
[1] Analysis Flow
supply unit.
normal in M-Utility? SCN12A board normal? unit normal? “RESULT: XXXXX” → See the error code table to perform troubleshooting as appropriate.
Y Y Y
Adjustment of Parts volume: (6) Check to see if the LED on the SCN12A board is normal.
(Connectors)” Power Supply Unit”
[GOOD indication]
END
◆ NOTE ◆
Return to error code
Power OFF
N
Fuses H12 and J12 on the Replace the fuse.
• High-voltage switch in the OFF position → LED OFF
SCN12A board normal? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
Polygon ON
N Quasi-reading LED ON
Cable normal? Restore the cable. Quasi-reading PMT
Y Data issuance
[3]
Check unnecessary
N
1
POLLOCK
Error recurs? ON
LD11DLE
PMTD1G
POLON
ZLCLK
LD10N
LD20N
LD10K
LIGHT
HVOK
Y
PCLK
FCLK
Blinking
SOH
SOS
OFF
SCN12A and CPU12A N
Adjustment of Parts volume” Controller front view
S1
HVON
N
Error recurs? 1 CN5
Y
SCN12A
FR6H2041.EPS
Replace the PMT12A board.

“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: [NG indication]

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 170

MTH12A-CN8
Check the following between the portions <A> in the block diagram. 10

1
4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1Ω or less. CN1 MTH12A-CN9
● Block Diagram
CN2
4
MTH12A CPU12A
CN8 1
A CN9
SCN12A-CN5,
Power supply unit PMT12A PMT12A-CN2
SCN12A
α400 A1 CN4 CN1
1 +5 1 HVVOKH HVVOKH 1
+5V 2 +5V-GND 2 HVVOKL HVVOKL 2
CN9 5A 1.5A
3 +15VOKH +15VOKH 3 CN5
A2 1 H11 H12
1 +5V 3 4 +15VOKL +15VOKL 4 CN4 SCN12A-CN4,
AC IN HVSH 5
TB1 85-265V +5V 2 +5V-GND 2 PMT12A-CN1
4 7 NC HVSL 6
1 NC 7
B
2 1 +24V 9 +15AS 8
NC T
5A 1.5A
3 +24V 2 +24V-GND +15AS 9 ON
1
CN8 J11 J12
11 +15AS AG(HV) 10 FR 2
C 6 +15AS 11
1 +24V
2 13 +15AS AG(HV) 12 1
+24V 2 +24V-GND
7 +15AS 13
H 3 15 +15AS AG(HV) 14
1 +15V 8 +15AS 15
+15V 2 +15V-GND 4 17 NC AG 16 34
9 NC 17
J 5 19 +15AS NC 18
33
1 -15V +15AS 19 FR6H2404.EPS
10
-15V 2 -15V-GND 21 NC 20
AG
NC 21
K
1 +24V 23 -15AS NC 22
+24V 2 +24-GND -15AS 23
25 -15AS AG 24
-15AS 25
AG 26
33 VIONH ERSH 27
34 VIONL ERSL 28
LEDSIGH 29
LEDSIGL 30
LEDONH 31
LEDONL 32
VIONH 33
VIONL 34
CN5 CN2
Photomultiplier
Error detection signal: HVOKH, HVOKL, +15VOKH, 15VOKL, VIONH, VIONL FR6H2024.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 171
15. Bootup Failure Analysis Flow A
15.1 RU Bootup Failure N Set the IP addresses of the RU and CL.

IP address normal?
“15.4 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU”
Y
[1] Analysis Flow “15.3 Checking the IP Address”
START N Set RU NAME for RU and CL.

RU NAME normal?
“15.6 Checking RU NAME”
Y
1 “15.6 Checking RU NAME”
N Update the RU application.

MECH initialization executed N If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
when RU is powered ON? “15.5 Action to be Taken When the LED on the CPU12A Board normal?
RU Application Software is Damaged” “15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board”
Y Y
✼ By checking whether pulse motor “15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board”
sound or the like is heard or not,
it is judged whether MECH initialization
has been executed or not. N Restore the RU application software.
Can M-Utility be entered?
“15.5 Action to be Taken When the RU Application
Isn’t communication with the N Y Software is Damaged”
The troubleshooting procedure is completed.
RU displayed on the CL screen?
Y CPU12A board tested in M-Utility N Reseat the CPU12A board and N
✼ If “RU: ” is displayed on the CL screen,
normal? check if the error occurs again. 1
communication with the RU has taken place.
Y Y
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
N N Parts volume: 11.2 CPU12A Board”
Ping normal? I/F cable connection normal? Repair or replace.
Y Y N N
“Maintenance Utility Volume:
Error occurs? Bootup failure recurs? 1
2.1 CONNECTION TEST” Y Y
N Set the IP addresses of the RU and CL.
IP address normal?
“15.4 Initializing and Setting Reseat the CPU12A board and N
Y the IP Address of CL/RU”
Y
Check the error code table Replace the CPU12A board.
1. CPU12A
2. CNN12A and troubleshoot. “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
“2. Error Code Table” Parts volume: 11.2 CPU12A Board” FR6H2529.EPS
“11.10 CNN12A Board”
A FR6H2522.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 172
15.2 Checking the LED on the CPU12A Board [2] LED Check
Ethernet operation LED

[1] Analysis Flow
CPU operation LED
START LINK (green) COL (orange)

TP
HV
TP1 voltage on the CPU12A board N Voltage on the power supply unit N Replace the power Handle Handle
normal? normal? supply unit.
100/10 (green) Sub CPU LED Main CPU LED
FDPOL (green)
Y Y RX (green) TX (green)
“9.1 Checking the Voltage “9.2 Checking the Voltage 11.8 Power Supply”
on the Board Test Pins (Connectors)” on the Power Supply Unit” Meanings of Ethernet operation LED illumination Meaning of CPU operation LED illumination
LINK COL FDPOL RX TX 100/10 Main CPU LED Sub CPU LED
Fuse A11, A41 on the MTH12A N Replace the fuse. Link established Collision occurred In operation Packet receiving Packet sending Connected at 100Mbps Indicate operating status Indicate operating status
1 Adjustment of Parts volume: FR6H2526.EPS
Y
12. Fuse Replacement and Fuse Locations”
“10.7 Board Check Pin Fuses” [3] LED Indication
Replace the boards in the order named. [GOOD indication]
1. CPU12A
2. MTH12A
“11.7 MTH12A Board” CPU operation LED
N N Lit
Main CPU LED normal? Reseat the CPU12A board and 1
check if the error occurs again.
Y
[2] Y
Adjustment of Parts volume: Sub CPU LED Main CPU LED
N N FR6H2524.EPS
Ethernet LED normal? Cable connection normal? Repair or replace.
Y Y [NG indication]
[3]
1. CPU12A • When the network cable is not connected
2. CNN12A
“Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: CPU operation LED
“11.2 CPU12A Board” Unlit
“11.10 CNN12A Board”
N
Error recurs? 1
Y
Sub CPU LED Main CPU LED

1. If the error recurs, replace ✼ When both of the main and sub CPUs are not operating, all the bits of the LED are lit or unlit.
the CPU12A board.
FR6H2525.EPS
2. Troubleshoot with reference to
the CL Service Manual.

“CL Service Manual: Error Information/Service Parts” FR6H2523.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 173
15.3 Checking the IP Address [2] Checking Ping with RU Network Cable Disconnected
[GOOD indication]
[1] Analysis Flow Pinging 172.16.1.10 with 32 bytes of data:
START Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255

Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
IP addresses of the RU N Set the IP addresses of the RU and CL. Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
and CL normal? “15.4 Initializing and Setting
“CL Service Manual: the IP Address of CL/RU” Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10:
Y
Installation 2.5 Checking Packets: Sent = 4,Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Connection with the Target Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Equipment” Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
FR6H2531.EPS
Disconnect the RU
N Set the IP addresses of the RU and CL.
NETWORK cable.
Ping results in NG “15.4 Initializing and Setting [NG indication]
indication? the IP Address of CL/RU”
Y [2] Pinging 172.16.1.10 with 32 bytes of data:
Destination host unreachable.

Connect the RU NETWORK cable.
END
FR6H2527.EPS
Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10:
Packets: Sent = 4,Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
FR6H2530.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386
MT - 174
15.4 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU (4) Make sure that the IP address of the RU is at its default, and then start the M-Utility.
If it is not at its default, enter the default value, and then start the M-Utility.
To set the IP addresses of the CL and RU, first initialize their IP addresses before changing the
#1 [Check] RU IP ADDR
user settings of the RU and CL in the order named.
CAUTIONS
Make sure that devices that are set as shown below are not connected over the same network:
“Device where ‘ru0’ is used as the RU host name” #2 [Click]

“Device where the IP address is used by its default setting”
If any such device as described above is connected over the same network, disconnect that device FR6H2543.EPS
from the same network by powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable. 15.4.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL
Unless such a device is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that device will be
automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
REFERENCE
To switch the CL screen to the desktop screen, hold down the <SHIFT> key and select “Shut
Down” from the “FUJI FILM” menu.
15.4.1 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the RU The <SHIFT> key need be kept pressed until the CL software program is terminated.
Otherwise, the Windows will be quit, and the CL power will be automatically turned OFF.
(1) Make sure that devices that are set as shown below are not connected over the same
network:
(1) Select [Set] from the [Start] menu.
• Device where ‘ru0’ is used as the RU host name
• Device where the IP address is used by its default setting
➮ If any such device is connected over the same network, disconnect that device from the (2) Double-click .
same network by powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable.
(3) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold down
the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks (once).
(3) Double-click .
➮ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.

FUJI FUJI FILM
(4) Double-click .
[Press] Erasure ➮ The “Local Area Connection” window opens.

process switch
Blink REFERENCE
FR6H2542.EPS
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the display if your PC is
not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable.
(5) Click .

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 175
(6) Choose and then click . 15.4.3 Procedures of Changing IP Address of the CL/RU to User Settings
➮ The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
(7) Perform the following setup steps: CAUTION
Be sure to change the IP address of the RU first when changing the IP address to the user setting.
Otherwise, the CL cannot be connected with the RU.
FR6H2548.EPS (1) Change the IP address of the RU to the user setting.

➮ “15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”
(8) Click . volume
➮ You are returned to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window. (2) Change the IP address of the CL to the user setting.
(9) Click . ➮ “15.1.3 Changing the IP address of CL-PC” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts” volume
➮ The system returns to the desktop screen.
(10) Reboot the CL terminal.
◆ NOTE ◆
User settings come into effect when the CL terminal is rebooted.
(11) The CL application automatically starts up. Click the upper left and the upper right in order
on the screen within 5 seconds since the initial screen appears.
Click the upper left, and then upper right.
FR6H2J03.EPS
➮ Service Utility boots up and “IIP Service Utility” screen is displayed.

REFERENCE
If the operation in the procedure (11) cannot be done within 5 seconds on the initial screen and
the AP boots up, follow the procedures below to display the desk top screen.
To terminate the AP, click [System exit] in (or ) menu while pressing
the <SHIFT> key. Click in the exit window while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
(12) Click [Exit Service Utility] button to return to the desk top screen.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 176
15.5 Action to be Taken When the RU Application Software is (4) Set the IP address of the RU to its default.
#1 [Set] RU IP ADDR “172.16.1.10”
Damaged
Update the RU application through the network.
Use this function when the RU application on the FLASH ROM is corrupted and the RU cannot
boot.
CAUTIONS
• Do not power OFF the RU and CL during RU application update. If power is turned OFF during
update, the machine will no longer boot up.
• When the M-Utility can be started (can be logged in), the procedures described in this section
should not be performed.
If the procedures are inadvertently performed under condition where the M-Utility can be started,
the CPU12A board should be replaced with a new one.
• Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below, connected over the
same network. FR6H4D75.EPS
(5) Insert the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

“Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name”
(6) [Struggle] → [Rescue APPL via Network (Soft Update)]
“Machine that uses the IP address by its default (172.16.1.10)”
If such a machine is connected over the same network, disconnect it from the network by
powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable.
Unless such a machine is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that machine
will be automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
REFERENCE
FR6H4D28.EPS
Execution of “soft update” writes the application software and configuration data of the default value
into the FLASH ROM. (7) After verifying that the RU where soft update is to be performed has been booted, click on the
[EXECUTE] button.
(1) Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below, connected over
the same network.
• Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name.
• Machine that uses the IP address by its default (172.16.1.10).
FR6H4D74.EPS
➮ If such a machine is connected, isolate it from the network by powering it OFF or The update of the RU application starts.
disconnecting its I/F cable.
(8) Make sure that "Write OK" appears.
(2) Set the IP address of the CL to “172.16.1.20” (default value).
“15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL” in the “Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts” volume
(3) Start the PC-MUTL. Wait approx. 30 seconds.
“1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
Wait approx. 30 seconds.
[Check]
FR6H3339.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 177
(9) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold down
#2 [Input/ENT]
the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks.
#3 [Input/ENT]
FUJI FUJI FILM
[Press] Erasure
process switch #4 [Input/ENT]
Blink
FR6H4D77.EPS
(10) Set the IP address of the RU to its default, and click on the [PING] button.
#5 [Input/ENT]
Referring to the DOS prompt window displayed, make sure that the result is 100%
successful.
(11) Click on the [MUTL] button.
(10) #1 Enter the default IP address
(172.16.1.10)
#6 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#7 [Input/ENT]
• • •
(11) Click (10) #2 Click #8 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#9 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#10 [Input/ENT]
• • •
FR6H4D76.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
In an N-to-N connection setup, if the RU software is to be updated, be sure to execute “PING”,
before version update, to ensure that the RU has been connected. If the RU has not been
connected, the RU software cannot be updated.
#11 [Check] User setting value
(12) Using TEMPORARY SETTING of SOFTWARE UTILITY, change the following items to
the user settings that have been noted before the procedure. FR6H4D09.EPS
REFERENCE
(Example) When the user settings are as shown below: Input nothing and press [Enter] key if the NETMASK, ROUTE, SEC.ADDR and SET.NET values
RUNAME : ru2 are not to be changed.
RU IP ADDR :172.16.1.12
CL IP ADDR :172.16.1.22 ◆ NOTE ◆
FTP-SERV. :172.16.1.22 Input the IP addresses of the FTP-SERV and INFO-HOST same as the IP addresses input in
INFO-HOST :172.16.1.22 the CL IP ADDR.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 178
(13) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU and then back ON. (16) Restore the HISTORY LOG and SCN ALL DATA which have been backed up.
◆ NOTE ◆ “21.2 RESTORE Procedures”
By turning ON/OFF the RU power switch, the user settings come into effect. (17) Start the CL application.
(18) Check image/conveyance and confirm the following two points:
(14) Set the IP address of the CL to the user setup value. • No unevenness is present.
“15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC” • No error occurs.
(15) Start “EDIT CONFIGURATION”, set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF”, and click the [SET] button. “19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window

CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru2 LIST OF EXISTING RU
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 12 ru2 172.16.1.12 #1
MUTL PING
[Slect/click]
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION #2

BACKUP (RU→HD→FD) RESTORE (FD→HD→RU) [Slect/click]
ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION
EXECUTE EXECUTE
ALL RUs SETTING
UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP
EDIT CONFIGURATION window

OFF
FR6H4F17.EPS
➮ RU and CL operate as follows.
Start write of
Config data
Wait 2 minutes. RU panel RU alarm
Blinks. Rings (once).

5 seconds
5 seconds
5 seconds
Wait 30 seconds.
PC-MUTL screen
is displayed.
TR6H4D56+.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 179
15.6 Checking RU NAME 15.6.2 RU NAME of CL Configuration
For RU NAME, the names described in “15.6.1 RU NAME on RU Memory”, “15.6.2 RU NAME of (1) Exit the CL software.
CL Configuration”, and “15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server” must be all identical. (2) Start the IIP Service Utility.
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
15.6.1 RU NAME on RU Memory (4) Check the setting of “NETWORK CONFIG”.

(3) Type in [7][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] to execute “DISPLAY CONFIGURATION” and display
the content of “IRSET.CFG”.
(4) Check “RU HOST NAME (SET)” (RU NAME) that is set in “IRSET.CFG”.
Because the on-screen display differs depending on the version of the RU application,
reference should be made to the following according to the version used.
“2.1.5 RENAME: Changing RU NAME” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
● On-screen display example
ru0
ru0 (5) Check the setting of “CONNECTING EQUIPMENT”.
Make sure that all the RU’s connected have been set.
FRMT3340.EPS
(5) If any of the names described in “15.6.1 RU NAME on RU Memory”, “15.6.2 RU NAME of CL
Configuration”, and “Folder Name of FTP Server” is different, perform the procedures
described in “15.6.4 Correcting RU NAME” to make all the names identical.
Configuration”, and “15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server” is different, perform the procedures

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 180
15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server 15.6.4 Correcting RU NAME

(1) Exit the CL software. If any of the names described in “15.6.1 RU NAME on RU Memory”, “15.6.2 RU NAME of CL
(2) Using Explorer, check the folder name of the RU in the SYSTEM folder. Configuration”, and “15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server” is different, perform the procedures
■ To Change RU NAME for 15.6.1 and 15.6.3

REFERENCE
If version 1.2 or later of PC-MUTL is used, RU NAME may be changed by using the RENAME
function of PC-MUTL, instead of the procedures described below.
“2.1.5 RENAME: Changing RU NAME” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume

(3) Uninstall the RU application.
“2.7 UNINSTALL” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
(4) Install the RU application.
“20. Installing procedure of RU software” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts” volume
(5) Change RU NAME to the user setting.
■ To Change RU NAME for 15.6.2

Configuration”, and “15.6.3 Folder Name of FTP Server” is different, perform the procedures
de5scribed in “15.6.4 Correcting RU NAME” to make all the names identical.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 181
■ Cassette Set Unit

16. Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks in
the IP Conveyance Direction
Scratches or streaks may occur on the IP due to IP conveyance roller edges or guides. If such
scratches or streaks are found on the IP, measure the distance from the edge of the IP (reference
side for IP conveyance) to the scratch or streak, and analyze the possible cause(s).
16.1 Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks on the IP

Fluorescent Face (White)
Top
Cassette set unit
Erasure conveyor Rubber roller
F
R
O
N
T
View from top Unit: mm

Front IP edge
(Reference side for FR6H2533.EPS
IP conveyance)
Subscanning unit
FRONT
Black portion: Part that may cause scratches

or streaks on the IP fluorescent
face (white) FR6H2532.EPS
: IP conveyance path

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 182
■ Erasure Conveyor ■ Side-Positioning Conveyor
Guide plate
Guide
Rubber roller
Rubber roller
Acrylic
filter
Rubber roller
Roller
Roller
Antistatic
brush Unit: mm
Unit: mm View from front
View from front
IP edge
(reference side for IP conveyance)
IP edge FR6H2535.EPS

FR6H2534.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 183
■ Subscanning Unit
Rubber roller
Antistatic brush
Roller
F
R
O
N
T
Unit: mm
View from top
IP edge
FR6H2536.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 184
16.2 Troubleshooting Based on Scratches or Streaks on the IP Back ■ Cassette Set Unit
Face (Black)
Top
Cassette set unit
Erasure
conveyor
Suction cup
Lid-opening bracket
Side-positioning
Front
conveyor
F
R
O
N
T
Subscanning unit View from top Unit: mm
M
IP edge
FR6H2538.EPS
FRONT
Black portion: Part that may cause scratches or

streaks on the IP back face (black)
: IP conveyance path FR6H2537.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 185
■ Erasure Conveyor ■ Side-Positioning Conveyor
Guide
Rubber roller
Plastic roller
Guide Rubber roller
Rubber roller
Guide Guide
Guide
Rubber roller
Antistatic brush
(front side)
Rubber roller
Antistatic brush
Unit: mm View from front

View from front
Unit: mm
IP edge
(reference side for IP conveyance) IP edge
FR6H2539.EPS (reference side for IP conveyance)
FR6H2540.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 186
■ Subscanning Unit
Rubber roller
Guide plate
Guide
F
R
O
N
T
Guide
Unit: mm
IP edge
View from top FR6H2541.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 187
17. Image Troubleshooting Flow

17.1 Vertical Streaks
START Peculiar events

• Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
1 • Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating?
Check the frequency of occurrence • Does this image abnormality occurs depending on the processing size?
of abnormal image.
✼ Subsequent check procedures
differ depending on the frequency
of occurrence.
Any peculiar event found when N

abnormal image occurs?
N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y
Quasi-data output from the N Reseat the CPU12A board and N

CPU12A board normal? check if the error occurs again. 1
Troubleshoot the peculiar event
or check the RU machine. Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y
[4-3-3] OUTPUT PATTERN IMAGE”
Quasi-data output from the N Reseat the SCN12A board and N XX3XX error occurs? N Replace the CPU12A board.
SCN12A board normal? check if the error occurs again. 1 “Checks, Replacement and
Y
Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y Adjustment of Parts” volume:
[5-12-3] SCN12A INPUT” Check the error code table 11.2 CPU12A Board”
Replace the boards in the order named. and troubleshoot.
1. SCN12A “Error Code Table”
2. MTH12A
3. CPU12A

Quasi-data output from the LOG N N
Photomultiplier (PMT) normal? If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
amp on the PMT12A board normal?
Y “14.5 Checking the Light-Collecting Unit (PMT)”
Y “Maintenance Utility volume:
[5-12-2] LOG AMP”
Quasi-data output from the LED N Replace the light-collecting unit.

Reseat the PMT12A and SCN12A N
lighting on the PMT12A board “Checks, Replacement and boards and check if the error occurs 1
normal? Adjustment of Parts volume: again.
Y “Maintenance Utility volume: 9.1 Light-Collecting Unit”
Y
[5-12-1] LIGHT”
Error recurs after the photomultiplier N 1. PMT12A
(PMT), light-collecting mirror, 2. SCN12A
scanning optics unit, and exit glass “Checks, Replacement and
are cleaned?
Y “9.2 PMT12A Board”
Replace the parts in the order named. “11.3 SCN12A Board”
END
2. SCN12A
3. PMT12A
4. Light-collecting mirror
“10.13 Light-Collecting Mirror” FR6H2153.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 188
17.2 Horizontal Streaks

Peculiar events
START • Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
• Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating?
1 • Does this image abnormality occurs depending on the processing size?
Check the frequency of occurrence of abnormal image.

✼ Subsequent check procedures differ depending on the frequency of occurrence.

N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y
Isn’t RU placed at location N Move the RU to a location that

irradiated by X-rays? is not irradiated by X-rays.
Troubleshoot the peculiar
event or check the RU machine. Y
Isn’t error code 12261-12264 N Is the version of the scanning N Replace the scanning optics unit with a new one of version F or later.
or 13264 logged? optics unit F or later? 1 “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y Y 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”

Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y
XX3XX error occurs? N
Quasi-data output from the N Reseat the SCN12A board and N
1 “Checks, Replacement and
SCN12A board normal? check if the error occurs again. Adjustment of Parts volume:
Y
Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y 11.2 CPU12A Board”
Replace the boards in the “Checks, Replacement and Check the error code table
[5-12-3] SCN12A INPUT”
order named. Adjustment of Parts” volume: and troubleshoot.
1. SCN12A “11.3 SCN12A Board”
“Error Code Table”
2. MTH12A “11.7 MTH12A Board”
3. CPU12A “11.2 CPU12A Board”
Quasi-data output from the LOG N N
Photomultiplier (PMT) normal? If not, troubleshoot as appropriate.
amp on the PMT12A board normal?
Y “14.5 Checking the
[5-12-2] LOG AMP”
Light-Collecting Unit (PMT)”
Quasi-data output from the LED N Replace the light-collecting unit.

Reseat the PMT12A and N
lighting on the PMT12A board “Checks, Replacement and 1
normal? Adjustment of Parts volume: SCN12A boards and check
9.1 Light-Collecting Unit” if the error occurs again.
[5-12-1] LIGHT” Y
Replace the FFM motor. Horizontal N

Troubleshooting is completed. Replace the boards in the order named.
streaks occur again?
1. PMT12A
Y “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: 2. SCN12A
10.5 Motor (MZ1)”
N
Mechanism normal? If not, troubleshoot as appropriate. “11.3 SCN12A Board”
Y “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:

“10.1 Subscanning Unit”
“10.9 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm”
“10.10 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm”
N
Horizontal streaks recur? 1
Y Replace the parts in the order named. “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
1. Scanning optics unit “8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
FR6H2154.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 189
17.3 Other Abnormal Image

START Peculiar events
• Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
1 • Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating?
• Does this image abnormality occurs depending on the processing size?
Check the frequency of
occurrence of abnormal image.
✼ Subsequent check procedures differ depending
on the frequency of occurrence.

N Perform printer
Y Printer normal?
troubleshooting.
Y
Isn’t it IP irradiated twice by N
Expose it again.
X-rays?
Troubleshoot the peculiar event Y
or check the RU machine.
Is the version of the RU N Update the version of the RU software.
software A07 or later? “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume: 13. Version Updating Procedures”
Y

Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y
Quasi-data output from the N Reseat the SCN12A board and N N Replace the CPU12A board.
SCN12A board normal? check if the error occurs again. 1 XX3XX error occurs?
Y “Maintenance Utility volume: Y Replace the boards Y Adjustment of Parts volume:
“Checks, Replacement and 11.2 CPU12A Board”
[5-12-3] SCN12A INPUT” in the order named. Adjustment of Parts” volume:
1. SCN12A Check the error code table
2. MTH12A and troubleshoot.
3. CPU12A “11.2 CPU12A Board” “Error Code Table”
Quasi-data output from the

N N If not, troubleshoot
LOG amp on the PMT12A Photomultiplier (PMT) normal?
board normal? as appropriate.
Y “14.5 Checking the
[5-12-2] LOG AMP” Light-Collecting Unit (PMT)”
Quasi-data output from the N Replace the light-collecting unit. Reseat the PMT12A and N
LED lighting on the PMT12A “Checks, Replacement and SCN12A boards and check if 1
board normal? the error occurs again.
Y “Maintenance Utility volume: 9.1 Light-Collecting Unit” Y
[5-12-1] LIGHT”

N N 1. PMT12A
XX3XX error occurs? Error recurs? 1 2. SCN12A
Y “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
Y “9.2 PMT12A Board”
and troubleshoot. Replace the parts in the order named. “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume:
1. Scanning optics unit “8.1 Scanning Optics Unit”
“Error Code Table” FR6H2155.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 190
[IP halt location]

18. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code is
Undetectable and Processing Freezes
18.1 Processing Freezes Before IP Reading
[Phenomenon]
The bootup sequences of the CL and RU are completed normally; however, after a cassette is
inserted under condition where reading operation is possible, the IP comes to a halt before its
reading is initiated.
This phenomenon is characterized by the following.
● The M-Utility of the RU cannot be started from the CL. Side-positioning conveyor
● Error codes for the RU are not logged.
✼
● The IP halts at a location before its reading is initiated. The IP halts prior to
“IP halt location” the reading start position.
● The LED on the CPU12A board indicates the RUN status.
M
● When the RU is powered OFF and then back ON, the IP is ejected and it starts up normally.
Subscanning unit
● When the barcode reader test is performed in the M-Utility, “RESULT: OK” appears.
[Cause] FRONT
Large numbers of interrupts from the barcode reader are issued to the CPU12A board, so that the
processing freezes and does not proceed any further.
FRMT0448.EPS
[Action]
Replace the barcode reader.

09.25.2004 FM4338
MT - 191
(2) Put a new floppy diskette into the FD drive of the CL.
19. Gathering Various Data When Trouble Occurs
◆ NOTE ◆
When a trouble occurs, back up the four sets of log data shown below into a floppy diskette. Never write any data into the machine-specific data floppy diskette bundled with the machine.
- ERROR LOG
- TRACE LOG (3) From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data backup, and back up the "ERROR
LOG", "TRACE LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and "CONFIGURATION" data.
- HISTORY LOG
- CONFIGURATION
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU
#1 LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU IP ADDR
[Select] RU NAME IP ADDRESS
◆ NOTE ◆
ru0 172.16.1.11
If the log data capacity is too large, back up the data in two separate floppy disks. BACKUP RESTORE
ALL RUs SETTING
(1) Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog opens, type ["C:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK ] button.
Windows Update BACKUP

#2 [Select] ERROR LOG
Programs (P)
Favorites (A) EXECUTE #3 [Click]

Documents (D)
Settings (S)
Search (C) BACKUP

Help (H)
#4 [Select] TRACE LOG
#1
Run (R)...
[Click]
EXECUTE #5 [Click]
LogRun
Off Administrator... ?
Shut Down... Type the name of a program, folder, document, or

Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you. BACKUP
Open: "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type] #6 [Select] HISTORY LOG
#3 [Click] OK Cancel Browse... EXECUTE #7 [Click]
BACKUP
#8 [Select] CONFIGURATION
EXECUTE #9 [Click] FR9H2J02.EPS
REFERENCE
For details on the backup procedure, see the "Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts"
volume.
“21. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedures" in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts” volume
(4) Remove the floppy diskette from the FD drive of the CL.
FR6H2J01.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MT1 - 1
Appendix 1 Display Format of Older Versions
■ Display Format of Error Log

The display format of an error log differs depending on the RU software version. The formats of the
RU software of versions A02 to A04 are mentioned here.
● When the employed software version is A02

*** ERROR LOG ALL ***CODE DATE
[13603] 2000/08/25 14:51:45 00DC05 toammoni_:3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258
FR6H2565.EPS
● When the employed software version is A03 or A04

*** ERROR LOG ALL ***CODE DATE
[13603] 2000/08/25 14:51:45 00DC05 <SR> T02:3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258
FR6H2566.EPS
■ Display of Detail Code of Scanner Error

The display format of a detail code of a scanner error differs depending on the RU software version.
The format of the RU software of versions A04 or earlier is mentioned here.
The detail code of the scanner error is displayed in the position shown below. Refer to the related
section for the meaning of a 6-digit detail code.
“3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors, ■ Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code”
Error code
12256 2000.10.07 13:12:19 00257D tiphscan____
3D0004 ScnCmFnc.c 2817
12255 2000.10.07 13:12:10 00258D tiphscan____
3D0004 400000,00 00 00 609C 6098
Detail code
FR6H2521.EPS
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MT1 - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MT2 - 1
■ Checking If the FTP Server Can Be Accessed on the CL

Appendix 2 Checking FTP Server (for PC-MUTL 1.1 or
Earlier) (2) Using Explorer, check the name of the folder where the RU data reside on the Local Disk,
and verify that it matches RU NAME.
The way of checking the FTP server differs depending on the version of the PC-MUTL. The way of
checking the FTP server of versions 1.1 or earlier is mentioned here.
(Folder path) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR346\SYSTEM\ru0
■ Checking If the FTP Server Can Be Accessed from RU
(1) Exit the CL software. If the folder name is not matched, correct RU NAME.
(2) Start the PC-MUTL. “15.6 Checking RU NAME”
(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
FRMT0431.EPS
FR6H3321.EPS

(5) Type in [3][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [4][ENT] to perform FTP server access test.
(6) Hit [0][ENT].
(7) Make sure that “SYSTEM/ru0/config” (“ru0” represents the RU name to be checked) is
displayed.
(8) If “RESULT: OK” does not appear, perform the procedures described in “7.3 Checking the
Setting of the FTP Server,” “7.4 Checking the IP Address of the FTP Server,” and “15.6.4
Correcting RU NAME.”
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MT2 - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MT 3 - 1
(6) Type in “cr-ir346”.

Appendix 3 Countermeasure when RU Application
“->” appears on screen.
Software Is Corrupted (for PC-MUTL 1.1 or (7) Type in “softupdate”.
Earlier) All the panel indicators on the RU are illuminated for about two minutes (with no audible
alarm).
The procedures of updating the RU application differ depending on the version of the PC-MUTL.
The procedures for the versions 1.1 or earlier are mentioned here.
FR6H2567.EPS
■ Procedures
(1) Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below, connected over REFERENCES
the same network. • By performing “soft update”, the application software and the configuration data of default
• Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name. values are written into the flash ROM. (Step (7))
• Once the configuration data is overwritten, the IP address of the RU is changed to the user
• Machine that uses the IP address by its default. setting. Thus, it is necessary to change the IP address of the CL to the user setting. (Steps
➮ If such a machine is connected, isolate it from the network by powering it OFF or (10 and 11))
(2) Set the IP address of the CL to “172.16.1.20” (default value). (8) Make sure that “Write OK” appears on screen.
“15.4 Initializing and Setting the AP Address of CL/RU”
(3) Start “Command Prompt” from the [Start] menu.
[Type]
Wait approx. 30 seconds

[Click]
(5) [Type]
(6) [Type] cr-ir346
(7) [Type]
(8) [Check]
FR6H3097-8.EPS
(9) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU and then back ON.
FR6H3095.EPS (10) Using TEMPORARY SETTING of SOFTWARE UTILITY, change the IP address to the user
setting.
“c:\>” appears on screen. “11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [4] Change the memory on the CPU12A board to
(4) Type in the IP address of the RU, “telnet 172.16.1.10” (default value). the user settings” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
“Vx works login” appears on screen.
“Password:” appears on screen.
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MT 3 - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MT 3 - 2
(11) Set the IP address of the CL to the user setup value.

“15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC” in the “Checks, Replacement and
(12) Click . Select [Programs] → [Fuji Film] → [FCR] to start the CL software.
• No unevenness is present.
• No error occurs.
“19. Checking the Image/Conveyance” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts” volume

09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MT 3 - 3
BLANK PAGE

09.25.2004 FM4338
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Control Sheet MC - 1
Control Sheet
08/30/2001 01 Support for software version A05 MC–2–4, 6, 8, 21, 32, 33,
(FM3058) 59.1–59.4, 63, 122, 134, 138,
139, 150, 151, 151.1–151.4,
152–157, 164, 165.1–165.4, 178,
186–251
CR-IR346RU Service Manual 12/20/2001 03 Changes in the procedures (FM3277) MC–1, 6, 186, 187, 194–199,
203–211, 241, 243, 245, 252–259
02/20/2002 05 Support for software version A07 MC–1, 132, 133, 151, 151.2, 163,
(FM3328) 165, 165.1, 165.2, 178, 179,
186–189, 194–281
09/25/2004 08 Corrections (FM4338) MC–1, 6, 7, 29, 38, 39, 54, 91,
134, 135, 140, 141, 143, 152–317,
Appx MC 1-1–Appx MC 1-10,
Appx MC 4-1–Appx MC 4-4
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment

of Parts (MC)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 2 MC - 3
◆ INSTRUCTIONS ◆
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit
• Never remove the rubber belt of the subscanning unit, except for its replacement.
Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment
• In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require special Rubber belt
attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal procedures for
such components, refer to the Parts List Volume.
• When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the following
precautions should be observed.
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the procedures. HHS Label No.2
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the “Safety Precautions.” FR6H4104.EPS
• The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.

When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
CAUTIONS
• When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may ◆ NOTE ◆
cause damage to electronic parts on the board. The TP screw used to secure the ground wire is similar in shape to a DT screw.
• Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit. When attaching the screw, check its shape to avoid confusing it with a wrong one.
• Never remove the red-painted screws.
DT screw TP screw
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators
as needed.
FR6H4105.EPS
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators.
• Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the

installation location when the part or component removed is
to be reinstalled.
This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts the
CHECK procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant “■ Check/
Adjustment Procedures.”
• Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when

installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 2 010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 3

08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 4 MC - 5
2. Table of Contents 6. Erasure Conveyor 6. Removing and Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor MC-60
6.1 Erasure Conveyor MC-60
6.2 Lamp Assembly MC-62
6.3 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) MC-66
3. Covers 3. Removing and Reinstalling the Covers MC-8
6.4 Lamp MC-68
3.1 Covers MC-8 6.5 Lamp Socket MC-72
6.6 Thermistor MC-76
6.7 Duct Box MC-78
6.8 Cleaning Roller Assembly MC-80
6.9 Timing Belt MC-82
6.10 Motor (MB1) MC-84
6.11 Rubber Rollers A and B MC-86
6.12 Rubber Rollers C and D MC-88
6.13 Rubber Rollers E and F MC-90
6.14 Rubber Rollers G and H MC-94
6.15 Guides A and B MC-98
6.16 Guide C MC-100
6.17 Guide D MC-102
4. Housings 4. Removing and Reinstalling the Housings MC-10

7. Side-Positioning Conveyor 7. Removing and Reinstalling the Side-Positioning
4.1 INV12B Board MC-10
4.2 Inverter Assembly MC-12 Conveyor MC-104
4.3 Fan (FAN4) MC-14 7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor MC-104
4.4 INV12A Board MC-16 7.2 Timing Belt MC-106
4.5 Fan (FAN3) MC-18 7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side) MC-108
7.4 Grip Mechanism (Right-Hand Side) MC-110
7.5 Upper Grip Roller MC-112
7.6 Lower Grip Roller MC-114
7.7 Motor (MC2) MC-118
7.8 Motor (MC3) MC-119
7.9 Latch Driver MC-120
7.10 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) MC-124
7.11 Latch Assembly (Right-Hand Side) MC-126
7.12 Movable Guide MC-128
7.13 Upper-Stage Guide MC-130
5. Cassette Set Unit 5. Removing and Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit MC-20
5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly MC-20
5.2 Shutter MC-22 8. Scanning Optics Unit 8. Removing and Reinstalling the Scanning
5.3 Cassette Set Unit MC-24 Optics Unit MC-132
5.4 Wrong-Insertion Prevention Bracket Assembly MC-26
5.5 Solenoid (SolA1) MC-28 8.1 Scanning Optics Unit MC-132
5.6 Hold Pin MC-30
5.7 Inch/Metric Changeover Guide MC-32
5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5) MC-34
5.9 Suction Cup MC-36
5.10 IP Removal Arm MC-40
5.11 Motor (MA1) MC-42
5.12 Roller MC-44
5.13 Guide Plate MC-48
5.14 Stopper MC-50
5.15 Actuator (Cassette IN Detection) MC-52
5.16 Sensor (SA2) MC-54
5.17 Roller Assembly MC-56 9. Light-Collecting Unit 9. Removing and Reinstalling the Light-Collecting
5.18 Movable Guide Assembly MC-58 Unit MC-136
5.19 Sensor (SA3) MC-59.1 9.1 Light-Collecting Unit MC-136
9.2 PMT12A Board MC-142
FR6H4101.EPS
FR6H4102.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 6 MC - 7
10. Removing and Reinstalling the Subscanning

10. Subscanning Unit 16. Format Adjustment 16. Format Adjustment MC-284
Unit MC-144
10.1 Subscanning Unit MC-144 16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment MC-284
10.2 Kapton® Belt MC-146 16.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment MC-287
10.3 Flywheel MC-148 16.3 Optic Setting MC-290
10.4 Solenoid (SolZ1) MC-150
10.5 Motor (MZ1) MC-154
10.6 Motor (MZ2) MC-160
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction 17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction MC-294
10.7 Motor (MZ3) MC-164 17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction MC-294
10.8 Sensor (SZ5) MC-168 17.2 Shading Correction MC-297
10.8.1 Removal Procedures (Sensor (SZ5)) MC-168 17.3 Sensitivity Correction MC-299
10.8.2 Installing Procedures (sensor (SZ5)) MC-170
10.9 Driving-Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-174
10.10 Driven-Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-178 18. Backing Up the Scanner Data 18. Backing Up the Scanner Data MC-302
10.11 Driving-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-182
10.12 Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-185
10.13 Light-Collecting Mirror MC-188 19. Checking the Image/Conveyance 19. Checking the Image/Conveyance MC-304
10.14 Light-Collecting Shaft MC-192 19.1 Check Before Procedures MC-304
19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance MC-305
11. Controller 11. Removing and Reinstalling the Controller Unit MC-194
11.1 Controller MC-194
11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board MC-198 20. Installing Procedures of RU 20. Installing Procedures of RU Software MC-308
11.3 SCN12A Board MC-220 Software
11.4 SND12A Board MC-222
11.5 SNS12A Board MC-224
11.6 DRV12A Board MC-225 21. BACKUP/RESTORE procedures 21. BACKUP/RESTORE procedures MC-314
11.7 MTH12A Board MC-226
11.8 Power Supply MC-228 21.1 BACKUP Procedures MC-314
11.9 Reset Switch MC-230 21.2 RESTORE Procedures MC-316
11.10 CNN12A Board MC-232
11.11 Power Supply Socket MC-234 FR6H4E01.EPS
11.12 Breaker MC-236
11.13 Fans (FAN1 and FAN2) MC-240
12. Fuses 12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-242
12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses MC-244
12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses MC-245
12.3 SNS12A Board Fuses MC-246
12.4 DRV12A Board Fuses MC-247
13. Procedure of Updating 13. Procedures of Updating Software Version MC-248

Software Version 13.1 Procedures of Updating Software Version
(for 1:1 Connection) MC-248
13.2 Procedures of Updating Software Version
(for N:N Connection) MC-252
13.3 Procedures for Updating MAIN CPU (OS) Version MC-260
13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL
Software MC-264
13.4.1 Uninstallation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software MC-264
13.4.2 Installation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software MC-266
14. Restore Procedure of FLASH 14. Restore Procedure of FLASH ROM

ROM Application Software Application Software MC-268
15. Change of IP Address of CL 15. Change of IP Address of CL and RU MC-274

and RU 15.1 Procedure of Changing the IP Address of the CL and
RU to a User-Specified Value MC-274
15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU MC-274
15.1.2 Changing the IP Address Using Service Utility of
CL MC-277
15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC MC-279
15.2 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU MC-281
15.2.1 Procedures of initializing IP Address of the RU MC-281
15.2.2 Procedures of initializing IP Address of the CL MC-282
FR6H4103.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 8 MC - 9
■ Reinstallation Procedures
3. Removing and Reinstalling the Covers
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3.1 Covers
FR6H4350.EPS
■ Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the covers.
#3
[Remove] T4x8 (x4)
Top cover
Upper rear cover
#6
[Loosen] T4x12 (x4) #7
[Remove] DT3x6 (x4)
X
#3
[Remove] T4x6 (x4)
#4
[Remove] T4x6 (x6)
#2
Upper light [Remove] T4x12 (x6)
protect
plate
Right-hand side cover

HHS Label
No.2
Lower light protect plate
#5
#1 [Remove] T4x6 (x4)
[Remove] Front cover FR6H4302.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 10 MC - 11
(2) Remove the INV12B Board.
4. Removing and Reinstalling the Housings
4.1 INV12B Board
FR6H4B51.EPS
INV12B board
#3
CAUTION [Remove] BR3x6 (x4)
When ser vicing an y pr inted circuit board, be sure to w ear an anti-static wr istband to
CN5
ground y our body . If your body is not g rounded, static electr icity b uilt on y our body ma y CN14
cause damage to electr ic par ts on the board.
CN2 INV12B board
#2
[Disconnect]
■ Removal Procedures Connector
CN3
• Front cover
• Left-hand side cover
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers”
Light protect
INV12A board plate #1
FRONT [Remove] T4x6 (x2)
FR6H4B05.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 12 MC - 13
4.2 Inverter Assembly (2) Remove the inverter assembly.
FR6H4B52.EPS
CAUTION
When ser vicing the in ver ter assemb ly, be sure to w ear an anti-static wr istband to g round
your body . If your body is not g rounded, static electr icity b uilt on y our body ma y cause
damage to electr ic par ts on the board mounted in the in ver ter assemb ly. Inverter assembly
■ Removal Procedures #3
[Remove] DT3x6
(1) Remove the covers. INV12B board
• Front cover
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” CN14
CN2 #2
[Disconnect] Connector
CN3
Light protect plate

#1
CN1 CN13 CN12 CN11 [Remove] T4x8 (x2)
INV12A board
FRONT
FR6H4B01.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 14 MC - 15
4.3 Fan (FAN4) (2) Remove the fan.
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
Fan
Label
FR6H4B53.EPS
[Disconnect] #4
(1) Remove the inverter assembly. Connector CN4 [Remove] S3x35 (x2)
“4.2 Inverter Assembly”
#3
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2) Inverter assembly
FR6H4B03.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the fan, make sure that the label of the fan is oriented as shown in the
illustration above.

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 16 MC - 17
4.4 INV12A Board (2) Remove the INV12A board.

#2
[Remove] BR3x6
INV12B
Bracket
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector CN6
FR6H4B55.EPS
CAUTION
When ser vicing an y pr inted circuit board, be sure to w ear an anti-static wr istband to
ground y our body . If your body is not g rounded, static electr icity b uilt on y our body ma y
cause damage to electr ic par ts on the board mounted in the in ver ter assemb ly.
(1) Remove the fan (FAN4).
INV12A board
“4.3 Fan (FAN4)” #3
[Remove] BR3x6 (x4)
FR6H4B04.EPS
■ Reinstallation Procedure

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 18 MC - 19
4.5 Fan (FAN3) (3) Remove the fan.
Fan
FR6H4B54.EPS
Label
(1) Remove the inverter assembly.
“4.2 Inverter Assembly” [Remove] BR4x50 (x2)
• Front cover
• Upper light protect plate
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” Guard
HHS Label No.2
FR6H4B02.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the fan, make sure that the label of the fan is oriented as shown in the
illustration above.

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 20 MC - 21
■ Exploded View
5. Removing and Reinstalling the Cassette Set
BR3x6 (x5)
Unit
5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly
BR3x6 (x7)
Panel assembly BR3x6 (x6)
Name plate
FR6H4442.EPS
LED12A
(1) Remove the covers. Base
Key top Cover
• Front cover
• Right-hand side cover
Name plate
• Top cover
(2) Remove the shelf cover assembly. Name plate
#1 FR6H4466.EPS
[Disconnect] PS3x8 (x4)
Connector
CNLED2 ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (x4)
#1
[Disconnect] Connector CNSA1
Shelf cover assembly

FR6H4423.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 22 MC - 23
5.2 Shutter ■ Reinstallation Procedures

■ Check/Adjustment Procedures
• Make sure that the sensor (SA1) and shutter do not interfere with each other.
Sensor (SA1)
FR6H4469.EPS
(1) Remove the shelf cover assembly.
“5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly” Shutter FR6H4425.EPS
(2) Remove the shutter.
#1
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
[Remove]
Hook
Shelf cover
Torsion coil spring

CHECK
#3
[Remove] Shutter
PUSH
FR6H4424.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 24 MC - 25
5.3 Cassette Set Unit (3) Remove the cassette set unit.
Cassette set unit
#1
[Remove] BR4x8 (x4)
FR6H4443.EPS
“5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly” #2
[Remove] BR4x8
(2) Disconnect the connectors.
DETAIL A
Cassette set unit
FRONT
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
#2 Positioning bracket FR6H4435.EPS
[Disconnect]
Connector CNCLA1 ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#2
[Disconnect] ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Connector CNSOLA1 When installing the cassette set unit, align the cassette set unit against the positioning
bracket to position it as appropriate, and then tighten the screws in reverse order of
#2 #1 [Unclamp] Clamp removal.
[Disconnect]
Connector CNPA1 #2
#2 [Disconnect] Connector CNA10 For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
[Disconnect] Connector CNSVA1
A
Cassette set unit
#3
[Disconnect] Connector CNA2
#3
#3
FR6H4429.EPS
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 24 010-051-00

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 26 MC - 27
5.4 Wrong-Insertion Prevention Bracket Assembly ■ Exploded View
Wrong-insertion
prevention bracket
Plain bearing Guide
BR3x6
Shaft
Plain bearing FR6H4467.EPS
FR6H4464.EPS
(1) Remove the cassette set unit.
“5.3 Cassette Set Unit”
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
To remove the wrong-insertion prevention bracket assembly, access it from behind the
cassette set unit.
(2) Remove the cover.

(3) Remove the wrong-insertion prevention bracket assembly.
(2) (3)
[Remove] DT3x6 (BLK) [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
Bracket
Compression
coil spring
Cover
Wrong-insertion prevention
bracket assembly
T
ON
FR T
O
P
FR6H4434.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
MC - 28 MC - 29
5.5 Solenoid (SolA1) (2) Remove the solenoid (SolA1).
Solenoid (SolA1)
#3
FR6H4462.EPS
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x2)
◆ NOTE ◆
To remove the solenoid (SolA1), access it from behind the cassette set unit.
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
T
O
P
#2
[Disconnect] Connector CNSOLA1
FR6H4432.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 30 MC - 31
5.6 Hold Pin (2) Remove the hold pin.
#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring
#3
[Remove] Hold pin
Solenoid arm
#2
FR6H4463.EPS
[Remove] DT3x6
(1) Remove the solenoid (SolA1).
“5.5 Solenoid (SolA1)”
T
O
P
FR6H4433.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 32 MC - 33
5.7 Inch/Metric Changeover Guide ■ Reinstallation Procedures

• The changeover guide mounting location differs depending on whether the inch or metric
setting is used. Install the inch/metric changeover guide as instructed in the illustration below
according to the setting selected.
Inch setting Metric setting

Inch/metric changeover
Inch/metric changeover
guide
guide
I
M
FR6H4455.EPS
• Front cover I M I M

• Left-hand side cover Threaded hole Threaded hole
used used
• Top cover
FR6H4415.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
Move the IP removal arm to its home position before performing the procedures.
• Set the DIP switches on the CPU12A board as appropriate.
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit
FRONT
FR6H4411.EPS
(2) Remove the inch/metric changeover guide.
#1
Inch/metric changeover [Remove] BR3x6 S1
guide
#2
[Remove]
BR3x6 CPU12A board
Stopper ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
I
M
ON: Metric setting
OFF: Inch setting

FR6H4470.EPS
FR6H4446.EPS

08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 34 MC - 35
5.8 Suction Sensor (SA5) (2) Remove the suction sensor (SA5).
#1 #4
[Remove] Hose [Disconnect]
Connector SA5-2
#3
[Disconnect]
Connector SA5-1
#2
FR6H4465.EPS
[Remove]
■ Removal Procedures A2.6x16 (x2)
(1) Remove the covers. Suction

sensor (SA5)
• Front cover T
ON
FR
T
• Left-hand side cover ON
FR
FR6H4416.EPS
• Top cover
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” ■ Reinstallation Procedures
◆ NOTE ◆ ◆ NOTE ◆
To remove the FASTON terminal, push the shaded portion of the terminal illustrated
To attach the FASTON terminal, insert it all the way to secure it in place.
below to detach it.
Push
FR6H0001.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 36 MC - 37
5.9 Suction Cup (2) Remove the suction cup assembly.
#2
[Remove]
DT3x6 (x2)
Suction cup assembly

FR6H4453.EPS
PUSH
IP removal arm
• Front cover PUSH
• Right-hand side cover #1 [Remove] Lid-opening bracket

• Top cover
FR6H4408.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing or removing the suction cup assembly, perform the procedures while
supporting the IP removal arm by hand.
If you try to perform the procedures without supporting the IP removal arm, the IP removal
arm may be bent.
◆ NOTE ◆
Move the IP removal arm to its IP suction position before performing the procedures.
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit
FRONT
FR6H4407.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 38 MC - 39
(3) Remove the suction cup. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#2 For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
#1 [Remove] Retainer
Insulock
[Unclamp] Clamp
Pipe joint
Packing #3
[Remove] Suction cup
T
ON
FR #2
Pipe joint
[Remove]
Packing Retainer
FR6H4410.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
While keeping the pipe joint in place by use of a wrench or the like, remove the suction
cup with a Phillips screwdriver.
Pipe joint
Insulock
Suction cup
Retaining screw
Wrench FR6H4409.EPS
REFERENCE
If a resin joint (Part No. 372N0098) is used, replace it with a metallic joint (Part No.
372Y0004).
“03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1” in the “Service Parts List” volume

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 40 MC - 41
5.10 IP Removal Arm (2) Remove the support plate.
Support plate
#1
[Remove] Arm
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (x4)
FR6H4454.EPS
(1) Remove the suction cup assembly.
“5.9 Suction Cup”
◆ NOTE ◆
Move the IP removal arm to its home position before performing the procedures.
#1
IP removal arm [Remove] Arm
Cassette set unit
FR6H4436.EPS
FRONT (3) Remove the IP removal arm.
FR6H4411.EPS
IP removal arm
#1
[Remove] Plain bearing
Bearing
#1
[Remove] Plain bearing
Bearing
FR6H4412.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 42 MC - 43
5.11 Motor (MA1) ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When attaching the bracket, make sure that the pawl of the bracket is engaged into the U-
shaped notch of the solenoid clutch.
FRONT
Pawl
FR6H4451.EPS
Bracket
• Front cover
Solenoid
• Right-hand side cover clutch
• Left-hand side cover U-shaped
notch
• Top cover
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” FR6H4403.EPS
(2) Remove the motor (MA1).

Screw position FRONT
• Make sure that the pawl of the bracket is engaged into the U-shaped notch of the solenoid
Motor (MA1)
clutch.
Spur gear • Make sure that the motor (MA1) is installed in its correct orientation.
#5 Motor (MA1)
[Remove] E4
#4
[Remove] BR4x12 (x2)
#1 FRONT
[Unclamp] Clamp #3 Cable
#2 [Remove] DT3x6 (x3)
[Disconnect]
Connector CNMA1
Bracket FRONT
FR6H4438.EPS
#1
[Unclamp] CHECK
Clamp FR6H4401.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 44 MC - 45
5.12 Roller (3) Remove the bracket.
#2
[Remove]
Extension coil spring
L = 116 mm
FR6H4452.EPS
Gear assembly
Bearing
■ Removal Procedures Gear

Bracket
• Front cover
• Top cover #1
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” DETAIL A [Remove]
DT3x6 (x3)
(2) Remove the solenoid clutch.
CHECK
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
Gear #3
[Remove]
Solenoid clutch Leaf spring
#4
[Remove]
L = 104 mm
FR6H4405.EPS
#1 #3
[Unclamp] Clamp [Loosen] WP3x5 (x2)
#2
[Disconnect] Connector CNCLA1
FR6H4404.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 46 MC - 47
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ ■ Reinstallation Procedures

When removing the roller, make sure that the edges of the side plates do not interfere ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
with the roller.
The extension coil springs differ in size depending on where they are attached. Use care
not to confuse their locations..
(4) Remove the roller.
[Remove] Housing (large) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Housing (small)
• Make sure that the pawl of the bracket is engaged into the U-shaped notch of the
Edge
solenoid clutch.
FRONT
Pawl
Roller Bracket
Solenoid
clutch
U-shaped
Housing (small) notch
[Remove]
FR6H4403.EPS
Housing (large)
FR6H4406.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 48 MC - 49
5.13 Guide Plate (4) Remove the guide plate (large) and guide plate (small).
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (BLK) (x4)
#1
[Remove]
DT3x6 (BLK) (x2)
FR6H4459.EPS
Guide plate (small)
REFERENCE
When only the guide plate (large) is to be removed, the motor (MA1) need not be
removed. CHECK
Guide plate (large)
(1) Remove the shelf cover assembly. CHECK
“5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly” FR6H4427.EPS
(2) Remove the motor (MA1). ■ Reinstallation Procedures

“5.11 Motor (MA1)” For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(3) Remove the roller.
“5.12 Roller” ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures
• Make sure that the guide plate is not lifted.
◆ NOTE ◆
Move the IP removal arm to its home position before performing the procedures. Guide plate
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit There shall be no gap.
FRONT FR6H4444.EPS
FR6H4411.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 50 MC - 51
5.14 Stopper (2) Remove the stopper (left) and stopper (right).
Support plate
#2
#2 [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2) Stopper (right)
Stopper (left)
FR6H4456.EPS
• Front cover
• Top cover
#1
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” [Remove] DT3x6 (x4)
◆ NOTE ◆
Move the IP removal arm to its IP suction position before performing the procedures.
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit
FR6H4418.EPS
FRONT
FR6H4407.EPS For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 52 MC - 53
5.15 Actuator (Cassette IN Detection) ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The actuator should be installed properly.
OK NG
Actuator
Actuator
FR6H4457.EPS
“5.1 Shelf Cover Assembly”
FR6H4421.EPS
(2) Remove the guide plate (large).
“5.13 Guide Plate”
(3) Remove the stopper (right).
“5.14 Stopper”
(4) Remove the actuator.
Actuator [Remove]
Actuator
FR6H4420.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 54 MC - 55
5.16 Sensor (SA2) ◆ NOTES ◆

• To remove the sensor (SA2), access it from behind the cassette set unit.
• Move the IP removal arm to its home position before performing the procedures.
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit
FRONT
FR6H4411.EPS
FR6H4461.EPS (4) Remove the sensor (SA2).

(2) Remove the actuator (cassette IN detection).
“5.15 Actuator (Cassette IN Detection)
(3) Attach the support plate.
T
ON
FR T
Support plate O
P
#2
[Remove]
Sensor (SA2)
T
#1 ON
FR
[Disconnect]
Connector CNSA2
FR6H4430.EPS
[Secure]
DT3x6 (x4) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
FR6H4437.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 56 MC - 57
5.17 Roller Assembly ■ Reinstallation Procedures

FR6H4458.EPS
• Front cover
• Top cover
(2) Remove the roller assembly.
Roller assembly
PUSH
Support plate
#2
[Remove] Roller assembly
#1
[Remove]
DT3x6 (x4)
FR6H4422.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 58 MC - 59
5.18 Movable Guide Assembly ■ Exploded View

BR3x6
Guide
BR3x6
Plain Stopper
bearing
Bracket
FR6H4460.EPS
Shaft
■ Removal Procedures Plain bearing
(1) Remove the guide plate.
Bracket
“5.13 Guide Plate” DT3x6
(2) Remove the roller assembly.

“5.17 Roller Assembly”
(3) Remove the movable guide assembly. Compression coil spring
#1 #2 Bracket
[Remove] [Remove]
Roller assembly
Roller DT3x6 (x2)
PUSH assembly (x2) FR6H4468.EPS
Movable
guide ■ Reinstallation Procedures
assembly For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
FR6H4428.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 59.1 MC - 59.2
5.19 Sensor (SA3) (2) Remove the sensor (SA3).
#2
[Raise]
Bracket
FR6H4471.EPS
#1
■ Removal Procedures #3 [Disconnect]
[Remove] Connector
(1) Remove the guide.
Sensor (SA3)
FR6H4473.EPS
#3
#2 [Remove] Guide
[Remove] Arm
#1
[Remove] Tension coil spring FR6H4472.EPS
010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 59.1 010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 59.2
08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 59.3 MC - 59.4
010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 59.3 010-051-01 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MC - 59.4
08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 60 MC - 61
(5) Remove the erasure conveyor.
6. Removing and Reinstalling the Erasure
#2
Conveyor [Remove] BR4x8 (x6) Erasure conveyor
#1
6.1 Erasure Conveyor [Disconnect]
Connector
CNBCR
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNMB1
FR6H4567.EPS
(1) Remove the cassette set unit. #1
“5.3 Cassette Set Unit” [Disconnect]
Connector CNB1
(2) Remove the rear cover.
(3) Remove the lamp assembly.
“6.2 Lamp Assembly”
(4) Remove the duct box.
“6.7 Duct box”
FR6H4529.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the erasure conveyor, align it against the positioning bracket.
Machine top view F

R
O
N
T
Erasure conveyor
Positioning bracket
FR6H4530.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 62 MC - 63
6.2 Lamp Assembly (2) Remove the box.

INV12B board
CN14
(3) #3
[Disconnect]
Connector
FR6H4551.EPS
REFERENCE
The lamp assembly is mounted along with rail. (3) #2 CN13 CN12 CN11
[Unclamp] Clamp
■ Removal Procedures INV12A board

(1) Remove the covers. FRONT
• Front cover
T
• Left-hand side cover ON
FR
• Top cover
(3) #4
[Remove] BR3x6
Light protect
plate
(3) #1
Yellow filter
[Remove]
T4x8 (x2)
Lamp assembly (2)
[Remove]
BR4x8
Box
FR6H4501.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 64 MC - 65
■ Exploded View ■ Reinstallation Procedures

Socket For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Holder plate
Filter
T3x6 (x2) DT3x6 (x2)

Cord clamp
Thermistor T3x6
(x2)
Bracket
Fluorescent
Thermal
Bracket Bushing lamp
switch
Bushing
Socket
DT3x6
(x2)
Holder plate
Cord clamp Reflection plate
DT3x6 (x2) Bracket

Bracket
DT3x6 (x3) FR6H4532.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 66 MC - 67
6.3 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) (2) Remove the filter.

(3) Remove the thermal switch (TSWB1).
(2)
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
Holder plate Yellow filter
Filter
(3) #3 Thermal switch
[Remove] T3x6 (x2) (TSWB1)
FR6H4555.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆ (2)
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
below to detach it.
T
ON
FR
Push Holder plate
FR6H0001.EPS
(3) #2
(3) #1 [Remove] FASTON terminal
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
TSWB1-1 cable (red)
■ Removal Procedures Thermal switch
(1) Remove the lamp assembly. (TSWB1)
TSWB1-2 cable (black)

FR6H4507.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
To attach the FASTON terminal, insert it all the way to secure it in place.

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 68 MC - 69
6.4 Lamp ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ NOTES ◆
• After installing the filter, wipe the filter with a moistened cloth.
• To install the filter, put the filter under the rib of the lamp assembly.
Lamp assembly
Rib T
ON
FR
FR6H4552.EPS
(2) Remove the lamps. FR6H4541.EPS
Holder plate
T
ON
FR
#1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
Yellow filter
#3
[Remove] Lamp
#2
[Remove] Filter
Holder plate
#1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2) FR6H4540.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 70 MC - 71
■ Check/Adjustment Procedures BLANK PAGE

• Reset the erasure lamp lightening time.
(1) Open the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.

(2) Open the EDIT HISTORY window.
(3) Reset the erasure lamp lightening time.
MAINTENANCE UTILITY window

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR ru0 172.16.1.10 (2) #1 [Select/Click]
MUTL PING (2) [Click]
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION
BACKUP (RU->HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU)

EXECUTE EXECUTE EDIT HISTORY window

ALL RUs SETTING PROCESSING AND WARNING COUNTER
INSTALL RESET
PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP SINCE 2000 10 10
TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER

18*24 cm 0 08*10 inch 12
24*30 cm 0 10*12 inch 1
14*14 inch (35*35 cm) 2
14*17 inch (35*47 cm) 1
All IP SIZES 16
SCN READ PROCESSING COUNTER 5

WARNING COUNTER
IP READ&HANDLING 0
CASSETTE SET OPERATION 0
ERASURE LAMP
(3) #1 [Click] RESET SINCE 2000 10 10
TOTAL TIME FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING 0 HOURS
CANCEL RESET ALL SET
(3) #2 [Click]
FR6H4568.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 72 MC - 73
6.5 Lamp Socket (3) Remove the lamp socket (right-hand side).
(4) Remove the lamp socket (left-hand side).
(3) #2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x3)
Lamp assembly
L1
L2
FR6H4553.EPS (3) #1
L3
■ Removal Procedures [Unclamp] Clamp
T
(1) Remove the lamp. ON
CHECK FR
“6.4 Lamp”
Lamp socket (4) #1
(2) Remove the bracket. (right-hand side) [Unclamp] Clamp
L1
L2
L3
Lamp socket
(right-hand side) cable (4) #2
#1 [Remove]
[Unclamp] Clamp CHECK BR3x6 (x3)
Lamp socket
(left-hand side) FR6H4503.EPS
Bracket #3
[Unclamp] Clamp
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
T
ON
FR
FR6H4502.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 74 MC - 75
■ Reinstallation Procedures REFERENCE

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ Cable route
When installing the lamp sockets, they should be installed in place as illustrated below. Lamp socket (left-hand side) cable
Lamp assembly
L1
L2
L3 Lamp socket (right-hand side) cable FR6H4546.EPS
T
ON
Lamp socket FR For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(right-hand side)
L1
• Make sure that the lamp sockets are installed in their proper position.
L2
L3
Lamp socket
(left-hand side) FR6H4534.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
• After installing the filter, wipe the filter with a moistened cloth.
• To install the filter, put the filter under the rib of the lamp assembly.
Lamp assembly
Rib T
ON
FR
FR6H4541.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 76 MC - 77
6.6 Thermistor (3) Remove the thermistor.
FR6H4554.EPS
Thermistor
(1) Remove the lamp.
“6.4 Lamp” [Remove] T3x6 (x2)
(2) Remove the bracket. O NT
FR
FR6H4506.EPS
Thermistor cable
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
#3
Bracket
[Unclamp] Clamp
#2
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
T
ON
FR FR6H4505.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 78 MC - 79
6.7 Duct Box (2) Remove the duct box.
FR6H4556.EPS
• Front cover
• Top cover T [Remove]
ON DT3x6 (x2)
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” FR Stepped DT
Duct box
FR6H4509.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 80 MC - 81
6.8 Cleaning Roller Assembly ■ Exploded View
#3
[Remove] Spur gear
Anti-static material Bearing #4
[Remove] E6
Plain bearing
#1
[Remove] DT3x6
Cleaning roller
Bracket
FR6H4557.EPS
DT3x6 (x3)
#2
■ Removal Procedures [Remove] DT3x6

#4
• Front cover Bracket [Remove] E6
Plain bearing
• Top cover Box
FR6H4533.EPS
(2) Remove the cleaning roller assembly. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
Cleaning roller assembly
[Remove] BR4x8
FR6H4510.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 82 MC - 83
6.9 Timing Belt (4) Remove the timing belt.
#2
[Loosen/Secure]
DT3x6
FR6H4558.EPS
“6.2 Lamp Assembly” #1
(3) Remove the cleaning roller assembly. [Remove]
Spur gear
“6.8 Cleaning Roller Assembly”
#3
[Remove] Timing belt
FR6H4511.EPS
• Make sure that the timing belt is mounted in its proper position.
Timing belt
FRONT
FR6H4550.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 84 MC - 85
6.10 Motor (MB1) (5) Remove the motor (MB1).
FR6H4563.EPS
■ Removal Procedures CHECK (5) #4

(1) Remove the lamp assembly. [Remove] BR4x8 (x2)

(5) #5 Bracket
(2) Remove the rear cover. [Remove]
E4
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” Motor (MB1)
(3) Loosen the belt tension.

“6.9 Timing Belt” Timing belt pulley
(4) Remove the reflection bracket. (5) #1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNMB1 (5) #3
Reflection bracket [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
(5) #2
(4) [Disconnect] Connector CNMB1
• Make sure that the motor (MB1) is mounted in its proper position.
Motor (MB1)
Cable
FRONT
FR6H4531.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 86 MC - 87
6.11 Rubber Rollers A and B (3) Remove the rubber roller B.
#1
■ Rubber Roller Locations [Remove] E6
Rubber roller B Timing belt pulley
Rubber roller A Bearing
#3
[Remove] Housing
FRONT
FR6H4542.EPS
FR6H4559.EPS
Bearing #3
REFERENCE [Remove] Housing
To remove the rubber roller B, the rubber roller A should be removed first. #2
The rubber roller B cannot be removed alone. [Remove]
Rubber roller B Spur gear
(1) Remove the timing belt.
“6.9 Timing Belt”
T
ON
(2) Remove the rubber roller A. FR FR6H4536.EPS
#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring ■ Reinstallation Procedures
L = 90 mm
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The extension coil springs and rubber rollers differ in size depending on where they are
attached. Use care not to confuse their locations.
#3
[Remove] Housing Bearing
#1
L = 102 mm
Rubber roller A
Bearing #2
[Remove] Spur gear
#3
[Remove] Housing
T
ON
FR
FR6H4512.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 88 MC - 89
6.12 Rubber Rollers C and D (3) Remove the rubber roller D.

#1 Gear
■ Rubber Roller Locations [Remove] E6
Rubber roller D #2
[Remove] E6
Rubber roller C
Timing belt pulley
#3 Bearing
[Remove] Housing
FRONT
FR6H4543.EPS
Bearing
FR6H4560.EPS
#5
[Remove] Housing
REFERENCE
To remove the rubber roller D, the rubber roller C should be removed first.
The rubber roller D cannot be removed alone. Rubber roller D #4
[Remove]
Spur gear
(1) Remove the timing belt. T
ON
“6.9 Timing Belt” FR
FR6H4537.EPS
(2) Remove the rubber roller C.

#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
L = 90 mm
#3
[Remove] Housing For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Bearing
#1
Rubber roller C L = 102 mm
#2
[Remove] Spur gear
#3
T [Remove] Housing
ON
FR Bearing FR6H4515.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 90 MC - 91
6.13 Rubber Rollers E and F (5) Remove the reflection bracket.

(6) Remove the guide roller assembly.
■ Rubber Roller Locations
Rubber roller F
Rubber roller E
FRONT
FR6H4544.EPS
FR6H4561.EPS
REFERENCE
To remove the rubber roller F, the rubber roller E should be removed first.
The rubber roller F cannot be removed alone.
(6)
■ Removal Procedures Guide roller assembly [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)

(2) Remove the duct box. (5)
“6.7 Duct Box” [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
(3) Loosen the timing belt. Reflection bracket

FR6H4513.EPS
“6.9 Timing Belt”


10.10.2000 FM2887 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 92 MC - 93
(7) Remove the rubber roller E. (8) Remove the rubber roller F.
#3
[Remove] Housing
Bearing
#2 #1
[Remove] Spur gear [Remove] Spur gear
#2
[Remove] Housing
#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring Bearing
L = 90 mm
#4
[Remove]
Bearing
Housing
Rubber roller F Bearing
#3 Timing belt pulley

Rubber roller E [Remove] Housing
#3
#1
[Remove] E6
[Remove] Extension coil spring FR6H4538.EPS
L = 103 mm
FR6H4518.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
010-051-00
10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 94 MC - 95
6.14 Rubber Rollers G and H (5) Remove the reflection bracket.

(6) Remove the rail.
■ Rubber Roller Locations
Reflection bracket
Rubber roller G (5)

Rubber roller H [Remove]
FRONT
FR6H4545.EPS DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4562.EPS
REFERENCE
To remove the rubber roller H, the rubber roller G should be removed first.
The rubber roller H cannot be removed alone. (6) #1
[Remove] DT3x6
■ Removal Procedures Anti-static brush assembly

“6.2 Lamp Assembly” Rail
(2) Remove the duct box.

“6.7 Duct Box”
(6) #2
(3) Loosen the timing belt. [Remove]
“6.9 Timing Belt” DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4520.EPS


10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 96 MC - 97
(7) Remove the rubber roller G. (8) Remove the rubber roller H.
#2 #1
[Remove] Spur gear [Remove]
Bearing Spur gear
#1
[Remove]
L = 79 mm
#3 #2 Bearing
[Remove] Housing [Remove]
Housing
Bearing
#3
Rubber roller G
[Remove] Housing
#3
Rubber roller H
Bearing [Remove]
#1 E6
L = 93 mm FR6H4521.EPS
#4
[Remove] Housing
Timing belt pulley FR6H4539.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
• Make sure that the anti-static brush is brought into contact with the roller.
Roller
Anti-static brush
FR6H4522.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 98 MC - 99
6.15 Guides A and B ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ NOTE ◆
■ Guide Locations The guides A and B differ in shape.
Guides A and B
When attaching them, use care not to confuse their locations.
FRONT
FR6H4547.EPS
FR6H4564.EPS
(1) Remove the rubber rollers A and B.
“6.11 Rubber Rollers A and B”
(2) Remove the guides A and B.
Guide A
[Remove] DT3x6 (BLK)
Guide A
[Remove] DT3x6 (BLK) Guide B
FR6H4525.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 100 MC - 101
6.16 Guide C ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ NOTE ◆
■ Guide Locations
The guide roller assembly should be installed as illustrated below.
Guide C
Guide roller assembly

FRONT
FR6H4548.EPS
FR6H4565.EPS
Half punch
• Front cover
FRONT
• Top cover FR6H4527.EPS

(2) Remove the guide C.
T
ON
FR
#2
Guide C
#1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4526.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 102 MC - 103
6.17 Guide D ■ Reinstallation Procedures

■ Guide Locations
Guide D
FRONT
FR6H4549.EPS
FR6H4566.EPS
• Front cover
• Right- and left-hand side covers
• Top cover
• Rear cover
(2) Remove the guide D.
T
ON
FR
#1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
Reflection bracket
Guide D FR6H4528.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 104 MC - 105
(2) Remo ve the side-positioning con veyor.
7. Removing and Reinstalling the Side-
Positioning Conveyor DETAIL A DETAIL B
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor
#2
[Remove]
#2 BR4x8 (x2)
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x2)
#1
FR6H4651.EPS [Disconnect]
Connector CNC1
(1) Remove the covers. #1
[Disconnect] Connector CNMC3
• Front cover #1
[Disconnect] Connector CNC10
• Rear cover
HHS Label No.2
Side-positioning conveyor FR6H4601.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 106 MC - 107
7.2 Timing Belt ■ Reinstallation Procedures

• Check the mounting position of the timing belt.
FR6H4552.EPS Timing belt
“7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor”
(2) Remove the timing belt.
FRONT
FR6H4603.EPS
#1
CHECK
#2
[Shift] Arm assembly
#3
[Remove] Timing belt FR6H4602.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 108 MC - 109
7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side) (2) Remo ve the grip release cam assemb ly.
Cam A Cam B
Grip release
cam assembly
#2 Cam B
FR6H4653.EPS E4
[Remove] E4
Bearing
■ Grip Mechanism Locations
Left-hand side grip mechanism Right-hand side grip mechanism
CHECK Cam A
CHECK
#1 Grip release cam assembly
[Remove] E5 E4
Bearing Spacer #3 FR6H4605.EPS
[Remove] E4
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
cams, use care not to confuse their locations.

FR6H4604.EPS
■ Removal Procedures ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures

(1) Remove the timing belt. • Make sure that the cams are attached correctly .
“7.2 Timing Belt” Narrow Wide

Cam B
Grip release cam
Cam A
Grip release cam
Wide
Narrow
FR6H4606.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 110 MC - 111
7.4 Grip Mechanism (Right-Hand Side) (3) Remo ve the grip release cam assemb ly.
Cam A Cam B
Grip release
Cam A cam assembly
FR6H4654.EPS E4 #2
Bearing [Remove] E4
■ Grip Mechanism Locations
“7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side)”
CHECK
Spacer
CHECK
(2) Remove the bracket.
Bearing
Cam B
Grip release cam assembly E4
#3 #1
[Remove] E4 [Remove] Gear
FR6H4608.EPS
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2) ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the
cams, use care not to confuse their locations.
• Make sure that the cams are attached correctly .
Gear (small) Wide Narrow

Cam A
Gear (large) Grip release cam
Bracket FR6H4607.EPS
Grip release cam Cam B
Wide
Narrow
FR6H4609.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 112 MC - 113
7.5 Upper Grip Roller ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The upper grip rollers differ in length depending on where they are attached. When
attaching the upper grip rollers, use care not to confuse their locations.
• Check the attachment locations of the upper grip rollers.
• Make sure that the upper grip roller (short) is fitted into the notch of the arm.
FR6H4655.EPS
Arm
(1) Remove the grip mechanism (left-hand side).
“7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side)”
(2) Remove the grip mechanism (right-hand side)
“7.4 Grip Mechanism (Right-Hand Side)”
(3) Remove the upper grip roller (long) and upper grip roller (short).
DETAIL A #1
L = 160 mm (x2)
Timing belt pulley
Spacer Upper grip roller (short)
Ball bearing (small)
Housing
#2
[Remove] E4 (x2)
Ball bearing (mid)
Spacer
CHECK
A Ball bearing (large)
FR6H4611.EPS
Upper grip roller (long)
Ball bearing (mid)

Housing
Ball bearing (large)
#1
CHECK [Remove] Extension coil spring
L = 160 mm (x2)
Upper grip roller (short) Spacer #2

Ball bearing (small) [Remove] E4 (x2)
FR6H4610.EPS
010-051-00
10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 114 MC - 115
7.6 Lower Grip Roller (4) Remove the lower grip roller (short).
#1
DETAIL A [Remove] Extension coil spring (L = 116 mm)
#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring (L = 160 mm)
Timing belt pulley
Spacer
#2
Housing
[Remove] E4 (x2)
Ball bearing (mid)
Spacer
FR6H4656.EPS

(1) Remove the grip mechanism (left-hand side).
“7.3 Grip Mechanism (Left-Hand Side)” A
(2) Remove the grip mechanism (right-hand side)
(3) Remo ve the shoc k absorber-attached roller .
Ball bearing (mid)
Housing
Lower grip roller (short) Ball bearing (small)
CHECK
Shock absorber-attached roller
Spacer
Discharge bracket assembly #1

[Remove] Extension coil spring (x2)
(L = 160 mm) #2
[Remove] E4 (x2)
FR6H4613.EPS
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2) FR6H4612.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 116 MC - 117
◆ NOTE ◆ ■ Reinstallation Procedures

The lower-stage guides should be removed in accordance with their removal direction. ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The extension coil springs and lower grip rollers differ in length depending on where they
(5) Remove the lower-stage guides (large) and (small). are attached. When attaching the extension coil springs and lower grip rollers, use care
(6) Remove the lower grip roller (long). not to confuse their locations.
◆ NOTE ◆
Bracket When attaching the shock absorber-attached roller, ensure that the notch of the discharge
bracket assembly is fitted into the slit.
(5) #2
(5) #1
Shock absorber-attached roller Slit
Lower-stage guide
(small)
Lower-stage guide
removal direction
Discharge bracket assembly

FR6H4615.EPS
Lower-stage guide (large) ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures

CHECK • Check the attachment locations of the lower grip rollers.
• Make sure that the latch of the lower-stage guide is locked to the bracket.
CHECK
Lower grip roller (long)
FR6H4614.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 118 MC - 119
7.7 Motor (MC2) 7.8 Motor (MC3)
■ Removal Procedures ■ Removal Procedures

(1) Remo ve the side-positioning con veyor. (1) Remove the timing belt.
“7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor” “7.2 Timing Belt”
(2) Remove the motor (MC2). (2) Remove the motor (MC3).
#2
#3
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x3)
#3
[Remove] BR4x8 (x4)
T
N
O
FR
Spur gear
FRO Timing belt pulley
NT
#4
#2 [Remove] E4
#4
[Remove] E4 #1
#1
Motor (MC2) [Unclamp] Clamp FR6H4616.EPS
[Unclamp] Clamp
Motor (MC3)
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. FR6H4617.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 120 MC - 121
7.9 Latch Driver (3) Remo ve the latch dr iver.
DETAIL B DETAIL A
FRONT FRONT
B
FR6H4659.EPS
■ Removal Procedures #6 #6
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2) [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
(1) Remove the motor (MC2).
(2) Remove the motor (MC3).
◆ NOTE ◆
To remove the latch driver, manually rotate the gear until the latches of the latch assembly Latch driver
are positioned inside the side plate of the machine. A
#5
[Disconnect]
Connector CNC10
Latch
Latch driver
#1
[Rotate] Gear [Unclamp]
#2 Clamp #4
[Disconnect] [Unclamp] Clamp
Connector SC1
Latch assembly Connector bracket
#3
Side plate FR6H4618.EPS [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4619.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 122 MC - 123
■ Exploded View ■ Reinstallation Procedures

(1) While man ually rotating the gear in the direction of the arro w, attach the latch
Bearing assemb ly.
Roller DETAIL B
Bearing
Roller
Shaft
0
Bearing Bearing
Shaft
T
Latch ON
FR
Latch driver
BR3x6 Identification mark: 0
Latch Guide #1 Latch
DETAIL C [Rotate] Gear
Guide
Extension
coil spring
Extension Latch assembly
BR3x6 coil spring
DT3x6
Bearing Bearing Retaining
1
ring
Bracket
DT3x6 (BLK) (x2)
Bearing
B Shaft
Shaft
Identification mark: 1
DT3x6 (BLK) (x2) Bracket
Bearing
Ball bearing Latch assembly
(right-hand side) Latch
C 2-DT3x6(BLK)
O NT
Arm Bearing
FR
Compression Latch driver
A Spur gear Bearing coil spring
Bearing
Compression #2
E6 (x2) coil spring Bearing [Rotate] Gear
Bearing E6
Latch assembly
DT3x6 (x2)
E6
Spur gear
Clamp
E4
Spur gear
DETAIL A Clamp Shaft

Latch assembly
Bracket (right-hand side)
Bushing
DT3x6
Photo sensor
Clamp Frame Latch driver T
ON
FR
#3
[Rotate] Gear
WB4x10 (x4) Motor
FR6H4629.EPS
Latch assembly
FR6H4620.EPS
(2) Press the latch driver to the half punch and snap it into place.
08.30.2001 FM3058 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 124 MC - 125
7.10 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) (2) Remo ve the latch assemb ly.
#1
[Remove] #3
E6 (x4) [Remove] B3x6
Bracket
Latch driver
FR6H4660.EPS
Latch assembly
(1) Remo ve the latch dr iver.
“7.9 Latch Driver
REFERENCE
To remove the latch assembly, slide the latch assembly in the direction of the arrow as
illustrated below to facilitate access to the E-rings that retain the shaft. Bearing
E-ring
Latch driver
#2
F [Pullout] Shaft assembly
R
O
N
T
Latch driver
E-ring Latch assembly FR6H4623.EPS
#4
[Remove] Latch assembly
FR6H4624.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 126 MC - 127
7.11 Latch Assembly (Right-Hand Side) (2) Remo ve the latch assemb ly.
#3
[Remove] E4
Latch
CHECK
#2
[Remove]
Extension coil
spring
FR6H4661EPS
■ Removal Procedures Shaft
(1) Remove the grip mechanism (right-hand side). Bracket

◆ NOTE ◆ Latch assembly
To remove the latch assembly (right-hand side), manually rotate the gear in the direction
of the arrow to shift the shafts of the latch driver away from the latch assembly (right-hand
side).
Shaft
#1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4625.EPS
Latch assembly
(right-hand side)
T ■ Reinstallation Procedures
ON
FR
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Latch driver
The extension coil spring should be attached properly.
[Rotate] Gear
Extension coil Extension coil

spring spring
FR6H4630.EPS
Latch assembly
Bracket Bracket
OK NG
FR6H4626.EPS
• Make sure that the e xtension coil spr ing is attached correctly .

10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 128 MC - 129
7.12 Movable Guide ■ Reinstallation Procedures

• Make sure that the lower grip roller is fitted into the notch of the arm.
Arm
FR6H4662.EPS
“7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor
(2) Remove the movable guide.
Upper grip roller (short)
CHECK
Movable guide
FR6H4611.EPS
#2
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x2)
#1
[Remove]
FR6H4627.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 130 MC - 131
7.13 Upper-Stage Guide ■ Reinstallation Procedures

FR6H4663.EPS
(1) Remo ve the upper g rip roller .
“7.5 Upper Grip Roller”
(2) Remove the movable guide.
“7.12 Movable Guide”
(3) Remove the upper-stage guide.
Upper-stage guide
[Remove]
DT3x6 (BLK)
Upper-stage guide
FR6H4628.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 132 MC - 133
◆ NOTES ◆
8. Removing and Reinstalling the Scanning
• The TP screw used to secure the ground wire for mounting the scanning optics unit of
Optics Unit VER: F or earlier is similar in shape to a DT screw.
When attaching the screw, check its shape to avoid confusing it with a wrong one.
8.1 Scanning Optics Unit
DT screw TP screw
FR6H4105.EPS
• No ground wire is provided for scanning optics units of VER: G or later.
(2) Remove the scanning optics unit.
FR6H4751.EPS
WARNING
#3
The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a service engineer [Remove] BR4x12 (x4)
who has been trained to do so. Skip this step for the
scanning optics unit of VER:
CHECK G or later.
#2
CAUTIONS
[Remove] TP4x6
• When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause Top cover
damage to electronic parts on the board.
• The procedures for removing and reinstalling the scanning optics unit differ depending on the Ground wire
version (VER:) of that unit. Before performing the procedures, check the revision of the
scanning optics unit.
HHS label No. 2
#1
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ CNE2
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
SYN12A board
(1) Remove the covers. #1 [Disconnect] Connector
[Disconnect] Connector CNE1
• Front cover CN1
ONT
• Right-hand side cover FR FR6H4701.EPS
02.20.2002 FM3328 02.20.2002 FM3328
MC - 134 MC - 135
■ Reinstallation Procedures ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the scanning optics unit, press the positioning brackets of the scanning optics When the scanning optics unit is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the
unit against the frame of the subscanning unit to secure it in place. machine-specific data bundled therewith.
Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.
(1) Set a machine-specific data floppy diskette into the FD drive.
(2) Open the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window and select the relevant RU
from [LIST OF EXISTING RU].
(3) Install the machine-specific data for the scanning optics unit.

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 (2) [Select/Click]
MUTL PING

(3) #1
Align the knob and two positioning BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD) [Select]
brackets of the scanning optics unit
Scanning optics unit ERROR LOG SCN OPTICAL DATA SCN OPTICAL DATA
in the direction of the arrow as shown
below to position it as appropriate. EXECUTE EXECUTE (3) #2
[Click]
HHS label No. 2 Frame of subscanning unit
ALL RUs SETTING
Scanning optics
unit
F
R Positioning brackets CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
O
N and knob Insert the SCN data FD that is attached to the
T Reader Unit When it is slipped from
T factory. The data will be loaded into the
ON
FR Reader Unit
FR6H4703.EPS
CANCEL OK (3) #3
[Click]
■ Combination of Scanning Optics Unit Version and CR-IR346RU Software Version
When updating the version of the scanning optics unit, check the version combination table
below and update the version of the CR-IR346RU software as well. CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
Completed
Scanning optics unit version CR-IR346RU software version
– 839Y0035A/B – A02
839Y0035C – A02 –
TR6H4902.EPS
OK (3) #4
[Click] FR6H4704.EPS
● For 1:1 connection

“13.1 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for 1:1 Connection)” (4) Start the CL application.
● For N:N connection (5) Check the image/conveyance.
“13.2 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for N:N Connection)” “19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 136 MC - 137
9. Removing and Reinstalling the Light-Collecting
(3) Remove the after-reading conveyor cover.
Unit
PMT12A board
9.1 Light-Collecting Unit (2)
[Disconnect]
Connector PMT2
(2)
[Disconnect] Connector PMT1
FR6H4850.EPS
Spacer HHS Label

CAUTION No.2
After-reading
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are wearing conveyor cover
gloves.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ Spacer
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
(1) Remove the covers. (3) #2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
• Front cover (3) #1
• Right-hand side cover [Remove] BR3x8 (x2)
• Left-hand side cover FR6H4806.EPS
• Top light protect plate

010-051-00
10.10.2000 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
MC - 138 MC - 139
(4) Remove the light-collecting unit. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the light-collecting unit, mount it along the rail.
When screwing down the light-collecting unit, secure it in place while pushing it in the
direction of the arrow as illustrated below.
(1) Reinstall the light-collecting unit.
#4 PMT12A board
[Connect]
Connector PMT2
#4 Light-collecting unit
[Connect] Connector PMT1
A
#2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
A
Rail
B
DETAIL A #3
[Secure]
BR3x6 (x2)
#1 [Remove] BR3x10 HHS Label No.2
B
Peep hole
DETAIL A
DETAIL B #2
#1 [Remove] BR3x10 (x2)
[Secure] BR3x10 HHS Label No.2
CHECK
Screw position FRONT
DETAIL B #1 [Secure] BR3x10 (x2)

DETAIL B
FR6H4801.EPS
FRONT
DETAIL B
FR6H4802.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3058 08.30.2001 FM3058
MC - 140 MC - 141
■ Check/Adjustment Procedures (4) Install the machine-specific data for the light-collecting unit.
(1) While looking into the peep hole, verify that the φ4 mm hole is visible. MAINTENANCE UTILITY window
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
HHS Label RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW
No.2 RU NAME IP ADDRESS
MUTL PING

(4) #1 [Select]
BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD) SCN LIGHT
ERROR LOG SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA COLLECTING DATA
EXECUTE EXECUTE (4) #2
Peep hole [Click]
φ4 mm hole ALL RUs SETTING
FR6H4807.EPS UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When the light-collecting unit is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the
machine-specific data bundled therewith. Take the following steps to install the machine-
specific data. Insert the SCN light collecting system unit data
FD. The data will be loaded into the Reader
Unit.
(2) Set a machine-specific data floppy diskette into the FD drive.
(3) Open the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window and select the relevant RU
from [LIST OF EXISTING RU]. CANCEL OK (4) #3
[Click]

Completed
OK (4) #4
(5) Start the CL application.

(6) Check the image/conveyance.
“19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 142 MC - 143
9.2 PMT12A Board (3) Remove the PMT12A board.
[Remove] BR3x6 (x4)
PMT12A board
FR6H4851.EPS Shield material
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the board.
FR6H4804.EPS
• Front cover ■ Reinstallation Procedures
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the PMT12A board, together with the shield material, to the light-
(2) Remove the PMT12A board together with the shield material. collecting guide assembly, ensure that the socket of the PMT12A board is parallel to the
connector portion of the light-collecting guide assembly.
#1
[Disconnect] Connector PMT2 Shield material
#2
[Disconnect] BR3x6 (x3)
PMT12A board Parallel

Socket
Light-collecting
guide assembly
#1 Shield material
[Disconnect] PMT12A board Light-collecting
Connector PMT1 guide assembly FR6H4805.EPS
CHECK
(1) Make sure that the light-collecting guide assembly is parallel to the socket of the
PMT12A board.
FR6H4803.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 144 MC - 145
(4) Remove the subscanning unit.
10. Removing and Reinstalling the Subscanning
Unit DETAIL A HHS Label No.2
10.1 Subscanning Unit

#2
[Remove] BR4x8 (x3) #1
[Disconnect]
Connector CNZ10
#1
[Disconnect]
Connector
CNSOLZ1
HHS Label No.2
#1
Positioning pin [Disconnect]
Connector CNZ11
#3
FR6H4963.EPS
DETAIL B #5 [Disconnect]
[Remove] BR4x8 (x2) Connector CNE3
Disconnect]
(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor. Connector CNE1
#4
[Remove] #3
“7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor” [Disconnect]
BR4x8 (x2)
(2) Remove the light-collecting unit. Connector CN1
“9.1 Light-Collecting Unit”

(3) Install the after-reading conveyor cover. #3
[Disconnect]
Connector CNZ1
CAUTION #4
[Remove] BR4x8 (x2) HHS Label No.2
When removing or installing the subscanning unit, exercise due care about your posture
to avoid lower-back pain.
A
◆ NOTE ◆
HHS Label No.2
When lifting up the subscanning unit, grasp the locations illustrated below.
Subscanning unit
HHS Label No.2
HHS Label
No.2
Subscanning unit
Grasp this. HHS Label No.2
HHS Label No.2

B FR6H4929.EPS
Grasp this.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
HHS Label No.2
While aligning the subscanning against the positioning pins, secure it in place.
FR6H4928.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
MC - 146 MC - 147
10.2 Kapton ® Belt ■ Reinstallation Procedures

• The Kapton® belt should be mounted with its date indicating side up, so that the arrow
mark faces the side plate.
• After mounting the Kapton® belt, manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the Kapton®
belt does not come off.
Side plate
5
FR6H4951.EPS
3 09 Rotation mark
0 00
• Front cover Date
Kapton® belt
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” FR6H4902.EPS
®
(2) Remove the Kapton belt.
• Make sure that the Kapton® belt has been mounted in a proper orientation.
• Manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the Kapton® belt does not come off.
HHS Label No.2
#1
Kapton® belt
#2
[Shift] Bracket
CHECK
FR6H4901.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 148 MC - 149
10.3 Flywheel ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ NOTES ◆
• Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton® belt.
• Before reinstalling the flywheel, clean the Kapton® belt contacting surface with ethanol.
Flywheel
[Clean] Ethanol
FR6H4952.EPS Contact surface
FR6H4935.EPS
(1) Remove the Kapton® belt.
“10.2 Kapton® Belt” For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
◆ NOTE ◆
Insert an Allen wrench into the hole of the driving shaft to secure the shaft in place, and
then remove the nut.
(2) Remove the flywheel.
Driving shaft
HHS Label
No.2
Allen wrench
Flywheel
#1
[Remove] Na20
FR6H4903.EPS
10.10.2000 FM2887 10.10.2000 FM2887
MC - 150 MC - 151
10.4 Solenoid (SolZ1) (4) Remove the solenoid.

◆ NOTE ◆
During removal and reinstallation of the solenoid assembly, use care to avoid contact
between the side of the solenoid and the side plate of the subscanning unit.
HHS Label
No.2
(4) #4
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x2)
Shaft
FR6H4959.EPS
■ Removal Procedures (4) #3 (4) #1

(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor. [Remove] [Remove] Clamp
Washer
“7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor” Solenoid
(2) Remove the flywheel. (4) #2

[Disconnect]
“10.3 Flywheel” Connector
(3) Remove the solenoid assembly.
Solenoid
assembly
(3) #1
[Disconnect]
CHECK Connector
(3) #2
[Remove]
Solenoid assembly DT3x6 (x2) FR6H4919.EPS
08.30.2001 FM3058 02.20.2002 FM3328
MC - 152 MC - 153
■ Exploded View ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures

Bracket • Make sure that the actuator of the solenoid assembly blocks the light path of the
Bushing BR3x6 (x2)
sensor (SZ4).
BR3x6 (x2)
HHS Label
Solenoid No.2
Arm Actuator
BR3x6 (x2)
Extension
coil spring Spacer
Washer
Arm Sensor (SZ4)
Shaft
FR6H4940.EPS
FR6H4937.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆
• Measure the resistance value at the connector terminal of the solenoid to verify that
• When installing the solenoid assembly, raise the stoppers to gain access to the threaded the measured resistance value is correct.
holes.
HHS Label
No.2
Push
Stopper
Threaded hole FR6H4934.EPS
• Make sure that the tip of the arm extends through the guide, and push the bracket of the
4 3
solenoid assembly against the bump to screw it down. Hi
1
Bracket Lo
Bump Terminal Resistance

Hi 1 (Red)-3 (Yellow) 13.5–16.5Ω
Lo 1 (Red)-4 (Black) 127–156Ω
FR6H4970.EPS
Guide FR6H4976.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 154 MC - 155
10.5 Motor (MZ1) (3) Remove the motor (MZ1).
#1 [Disconnect] Connectors x2
Connector
CN2
HHS Label No.2
Connector
CN1
FR6H4964.EPS
CAUTIONS
• When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may
cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
• When removing or installing the motor (MZ1), do not use any magnet screwdriver.
• Do not touch the magnet portion of the motor (MZ1).
Motor (MZ1)
Subscanning unit
HHS Label No.2
Magnet portion FR6H4941.EPS
Cover
REFERENCE
The screws that retain the motor (MZ1) have different lengths depending on the version of
the light-collecting guide assembly.
Light-collecting guide assembly 606Y0055 (#20669 or earlier): BR3x6 (x5)
Light-collecting guide assembly 606Y0055A (#20670 or later): BR3x10 (x5)
Motor (MZ1)
#2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x5)/
■ Removal Procedures BR3x10 (x5)
(1) Remove the subscanning unit.
“10.1 Subscanning Unit”
FR6H4931.EPS
(2) Remove the Kapton® belt.

“10.2 Kapton® Belt”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 156 MC - 157
■ Reinstallation Procedures ● Preparation for output image (exposure)

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ (1) Perform primary erasure on the IP to be used for subscan length check.
When installing the motor (MZ1), loosely tighten the five screws and then securely tighten “RU Instruction Manual/2.4 When Only Image Erasure is to be Performed (Primary
them in order illustrated below. Erasure)”
Motor (MZ1) ◆ NOTES ◆

• The IP type to be used should be the VI type.
#2
• Make sure that no important image data has been exposed on the IP to be used.
#1
[Secure] BR3x6/BR3x10 [Secure] BR3x6/BR3x10
(2) Place a steel rule and expose it at 1 mR.
#4 Cassette
[Secure] BR3x6/BR3x10
#3
#5
FR6H4932.EPS
Steel rule
■ Check/Adjustment Procedures FR6H4965.EPS
If the motor is replaced, perform the following check procedures.

• DIP switch setting REFERENCE
• Preparation for output image (exposure) If the IP cannot be exposed at 1 mR, it should be exposed at 1 mR, with reference to the
following exposure conditions.
• Subscan length check
Note, however, that those conditions are for standard IP setup reference.
Distance: 1.8 m
If subscan length adjustments are needed, make subscan length adjustments as Voltage: 80 kV
appropriate with reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1). Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 0.013 sec
• Subscan length adjustment
● DIP switch setting

(1) Check the DIP switch setting before replacement, and make the same setting.
Motor (MZ1)
Example of DIP
switch setting: ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
FR6H4933.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 158 MC - 159
● Subscan length check ● Subscan length adjustment

(1) Output the image exposed at 1 mR. (1) With reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1), change the DIP switch setting.
CL exposure menu selection screen: [TEST] [Image Format] REFERENCE
“RU Instruction Manual/2. Operating Procedures” Changing the “speed fine-adjustment setup factor” in the positive (+) direction will cause
(2) Calculate the length (theoretical value) of the steel rule on the film. the F value to decrease, while changing it in the negative (-) direction will cause the F
value to increase.
Example of reduction factor indication:
F value
Measure
FR6H4967.EPS
DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1) 0: Switch ON, 1: Switch OFF

Switch Speed fine-adjustment
S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 setup factor (%)
Reduction factor: 86% 0 0 0 1 1 0 -1.6
1 0 0 1 1 0 -1.5
0 1 0 1 1 0 -1.4
Formula: Length (theoretical value) of the steel rule on the film = Length of the steel rule x reduction factor
1 1 0 1 1 0 -1.3
0 0 1 1 1 0 -1.2
Example of calculation: 175 mm x 0.86 (86% reduction factor) = 150.5 mm
FR6H4966.EPS
1 0 1 1 1 0 -1.1
0 1 1 1 1 0 -1.0
1 1 1 1 1 0 -0.9
(3) Calculate the allowable value of the subscan length. 0 0 0 0 0 1 -0.8
1 0 0 0 0 1 -0.7
0 1 0 0 0 1 -0.6
Formula: Allowable value of the subscan length = Length of the steel rule (theoretical value) x specified value (±0.6%) 1 1 0 0 0 1 -0.5
0 0 1 0 0 1 -0.4
Example of calculation: 150.5 mm x 0.006 (±0.6%) = ±0.9 mm 1 0 1 0 0 1 -0.3
0 1 1 0 0 1 -0.2
1 1 1 0 0 1 -0.1
0 0 0 1 0 1 0
149.6 mm ≤ Allowable value ≤ 151.4 mm FR6H4968.EPS
1 0 0 1 0 1 +0.1
0 1 0 1 0 1 +0.2
1 1 0 1 0 1 +0.3
(4) Measure the length of the steel rule (actual measurement) of the calipers on the output 0 0 1 1 0 1 +0.4
film, and verify that it is within the allowable value calculated. 1 0 1 1 0 1 +0.5
0 1 1 1 0 1 +0.6
1 1 1 1 0 1 +0.7
149.6 mm ≤ Actual measurement ≤ 151.4 mm 0 0 0 0 1 1 +0.8
1 0 0 0 1 1 +0.9
0 1 0 0 1 1 +1.0
◆ NOTE ◆ 1 1 0 0 1 1 +1.1
If the subscan length is beyond the allowable value, make subscan length adjustments 0 0 1 0 1 1 +1.2
1 0 1 0 1 1 +1.3
(i.e., change the DIP switch setting), as appropriate.
0 1 1 0 1 1 +1.4
1 1 1 0 1 1 +1.5
0 0 0 1 1 1 +1.6
TR6H4901.EPS
(2) Check the subscan length.

“● Subscan length check”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 160 MC - 161
10.6 Motor (MZ2) (3) Remove the motor (MZ2) assembly.
HHS Label No.2
Motor (MZ2) assembly
CHECK
[Remove]
DT3x6 (x2)
FR6H4962.EPS
(1) Remove the scanning optics unit.
(2) Remove the sensor bracket. FR6H4927.EPS
(4) Remove the motor (MZ2).

#2 #2
[Disconnect] [Disconnect] #3
Connector CNSZ2 Connector CNSZ3 Bracket [Disconnect] Connector CNMZ2
#2
#2
[Disconnect]
[Unclamp] Clamp
Connector CNMZ2
Cam Shaft
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp #5
[Remove] #1
Hexagon-headed screw (3B) Motor (MZ2)
[Remove] BR3x6 (BLK) (x2)
#4
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
#2
[Disconnect] Connector CNMZ3 Cover FR6H4936.EPS
Sensor bracket
Bearing
#3
[Remove] Spring
#4
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
FR6H4926.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 162 MC - 163
■ Reinstallation Procedures BLANK PAGE

REFERENCE
The threaded holes for mounting the motor (MZ2) assembly are adjacent to the threaded
holes for mounting the sensor bracket.
With reference to the illustration below, install the motor (MZ2) assembly and sensor
bracket as appropriate.
Threaded hole Threaded hole for bracket

for motor (MZ2)
FR6H4938.EPS
• Make sure that the bearing for the driving-shaft grip release arm is brought into contact
with the outer periphery of the cam A and B.
Cam B
Bearing
Bearing
HHS Label No.2

Cam A
Driving-shaft
grip release arm
FRONT
Driven-shaft
grip release arm
FR6H4909.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 164 MC - 165
10.7 Motor (MZ3) ■ Reinstallation Procedures

(1) Apply Molykote to the worm gear.
When mounting the MZ3, use Molykote as indicated below.
• Made by Dow Corning
• Type
JPN/USA Molykote (EM30L GREASE)
Europe Molykote (PG30L GREASE)
[Apply] Molykote
FR6H4653.EPS
(1) Remove the flywheel. Worm gear
FR6H4D63.EPS
“10.3 Flywheel”
(2) Remove the motor (MZ3). ◆ NOTE ◆
When mounting the MZ3, apply a grain size of Molykote to the worm gear. Otherwise, an
HHS Label No.2
error (13395) might occur.
(2) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK
Motor (MZ3) Motor (MZ3)
#2
[Remove]
#1 TP3x6 (x2)
[Disconnect]
Connector CNMZ3
FR6H4904.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 166 MC - 167

(1) Check the engagement between the gear (large) and the worm gear of the motor
(MZ3).
GOOD: There should be some backlash (about 0.3 mm).
NG: There is no backlash (the gear (large) and the worm gear of the motor (MZ3)
move).
If the engagement between the gears is inappropriate, loosen the screws (BR3x6 (x2))
that retain the motor (MZ3), and adjust the engagement as appropriate.
Sensor
(SZ5) Screw (TP3x6 (x2))
0.3 mm approx.
FRONT
Gear (large)
FR6H4971.EPS
(2) Power ON the CL/RU, and verify that a dust removal operation failure or dust removal
function lock error does not occur.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 168 MC - 169
10.8 Sensor (SZ5) (4) Remove the sensor (SZ5) assembly.
HHS Label
No.2
FR6H4954.EPS
#1
10.8.1 Removal Procedures (Sensor (SZ5)) [Disconnect] Sensor (SZ5) assembly
Connector
(1) Remove the cover. CNSZ5
Spacer
• Right-side cover
Gear
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” (large)
(2) Remove the motor (MZ3).
“10.7 Motor (MZ3)”
(3) Remove the spring and loosen the screw.
#2
Gear (small) [Remove] BR3x12
FR6H4942.EPS
(5) Remove the sensor (SZ5).

#2
[Loosen]
BR3x6
Sensor (MZ5) assembly
#1
[Remove] [Remove] Sensor (SZ5)
Spring
FR6H4907.EPS
FR6H4E14.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 170 MC - 171
10.8.2 Installing Procedures (Sensor (SZ5)) (2) Install the sensor (SZ5) assembly.
(1) Install the sensor (SZ5).

HHS Label
No.2
[Install] Sensor (SZ5)
FR6H4E09.EPS
#1
[Install]
Sensor (SZ5)
assembly
Insert inside the
flange.
FR6H4E11.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the sensor assembly, ensure that the bracket of the sensor assembly is
located between the flange of the bearing and the side plate.
Flange
Light-collecting
shaft
E-ring
Bearing
Side plate
Bracket
FR6H4906.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 172 MC - 173
(3) Install the gear. (4) Install the spring and secure the screw.
HHS Label
No.2
#1
[Secure] BR3x6
#2
[Install]
Spring
#1
Sensor (SZ5) Spacer
[Connect]
Connector assembly Gear
(large)
CNSZ5
#2
Gear (small) [Secure] BR3x12
FR6H4E10.EPS
FR6H4E12.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ (5) Install the motor (MZ3).

Refer to the illustration below when mounting the gear (large) and gear (small). “10.7 Motor (MZ3)”
(6) Install the cover.
Sensor (SZ5) Gear (large)
• Right-side cover
FRONT
Slit (small)
Slit (large)
Pinionless section
D-shaped cut surface

Gear (small)
of light-collecting shaft
FR6H4914.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 174 MC - 175
10.9 Driving-Shaft Grip Release Arm (4) Remove the driving-shaft grip release arm.
#1
[Remove] Spring L = 20 mm
CHECK
#2
[Remove] DT3x6
Arm
HHS Label
FR6H4960.EPS No.2
(1) Remove the covers. Bearing
• Front cover
(2) Remove the flywheel.
Bearing
“10.3 Flywheel”
HHS Label
No.2 Driving-shaft grip release arm #3
[Remove] BR4x12 (x2)
FR6H4922.EPS
Spacer ■ Exploded View

After-reading
conveyor cover
Shaft
Spacer BR3x6 (x2)
Bracket Fork
BR3x6 Fork
#2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2) CHECK
#1
[Remove] DT3x8 (x2)
BR3x6 (x2)
FR6H4921.EPS
Arm
CHECK BR3x6
FR6H4943.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 176 MC - 177

with the outer periphery of the cam A.
HHS Label
No.2 Cam B
Bearing
Bearing
Cam A
Driving shaft
grip release arm
FRONT
Driven shaft grip release arm
FR6H4939.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When the fork for the driving-shaft grip release arm is removed and then reinstalled, make
sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.
Bracket Bracket
Fork
Fork
GOOD NG
Bracket Fork
Driving-shaft grip release arm
Fork
Bracket FR6H4946.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 178 MC - 179
10.10 Driven-Shaft Grip Release Arm ■ Exploded View

E3
Bearing
Shaft
Arm
BR3x6 (x2) Fork
BR3x6
FR6H4955.EPS Fork
■ Removal Procedures CHECK Arm
(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor. BR3x6 (x2)

BR3x6
(2) Remove the driven-shaft grip release arm.
CHECK FR6H4944.EPS
DETAIL A ■ Reinstallation Procedures

Driven-shaft
grip release arm with the outer periphery of the cam B.
Cam B
Bearing
#1 Bearing
[Remove]
Extension coil spring L = 20 mm
Bearing
CHECK
A HHS Label No.2
Cam A
Driving-shaft
grip release arm
FRONT
Driven-shaft
Driven-shaft grip release arm
grip release arm
Bearing
FR6H4909.EPS
#2
HHS Label No.2 [Remove]
B4x12 (x2)
FR6H4908.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 180 MC - 181

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When the fork for the driven-shaft grip release arm is removed and then reinstalled, make
sure that there is no gap between the arm and fork.
Arm Arm
Fork Fork
GOOD NG
Arm
Fork
Driven-shaft grip release arm
Arm
Fork FR6H4947.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 182 MC - 183
10.11 Driving-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) (3) Remove the driving-shaft grip roller (upper).
HHS Label
No.2
Reference side
FR6H4961.EPS
[Move]
(1) Remove the light-collecting unit. #2 Grip roller (upper)
[Remove]
“9.1 Light-Collecting Unit” Grip roller (upper)
(2) Remove the hook.
HHS Label
No.2
Reference side FR6H4E08.EPS
#2
[Remove] ■ Exploded View
Hook
Shaft
PG3x4 (3B) Bearing
Shaft
#1
[Remove]
Extension
coil spring
L=50mm
Rubber roller
FR6H4E07.EPS
Bearing
Shaft PG3x4 (3B)
FR6H4945.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 184 MC - 185
■ Reinstallation Procedures 10.12 Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)

• The extension coil springs differ in size depending on where they are attached. Use
care not to confuse their locations.
• To install the hook, snap it securely into the groove of the side plate.
FR6H4956.EPS
(1) Remove the side-positioning conveyor.
Hook
Groove of side plate “7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor”
(2) Remove the antistatic material assembly.
FR6H4925.EPS #1
[Loosen] DT3x6 (x2)
• After mounting the hooks, make sure that both right and left hooks are securely
attached.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Antistatic material

assembly
FR6H4910.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 186 MC - 187
(3) Remove the hook. ■ Exploded View
HHS Label No.2
Reference side Shaft
PG3x4 (3B) Bearing
#2
[Remove] Shaft
Hook
Rubber roller
#1
[Remove]
Extension
coil spring
L=50mm Bearing
Shaft PG3x4 (3B)
HHS Label No.2
FR6H4945.EPS
FR6H4E05.EPS
(4) Remove the driven-shaft grip roller (upper). ■ Reinstallation Procedures
HHS Label No.2

Reference side • The extension coil springs differ in size depending on where they are attached. Use
care not to confuse their locations.
#1
[Move]
Grip roller (upper)
#2 Hook
[Remove] Groove of side plate
Grip roller (upper)
FR6H4925.EPS
FR6H4E06.EPS
attached.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 188 MC - 189
10.13 Light-Collecting Mirr or (2) Remove the spring.
[Remove]
Spring
FR6H4957.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When handling the light-collecting mirror, pay attention to the following points.
• Wear gloves.
However, never touch the reflection surface of the light-collecting mirror even when you
are wearing the gloves.
• Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light-collecting mirror.
(1) Remove the driven-shaft grip roller (upper).
“10.12 Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)”
FR6H4E04.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 190 MC - 191
(3) Rotate the light-collecting mirror. (4) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the guide A in the direction of the arrow Remove the screw while holding the guide A, to prevent the light collecting mirror from
as illustrated below to facilitate access to the screw that retains the light-collecting mirror. rotating.
#1
[Hold]
#1 Guide A
[Rotate] Guide A
HHS Label No.2
#2
[Remove] V3x6 (BLK)
HHS Label No.2
FR6H4912.EPS #4
[Remove]
Light-collecting #3
mirror [Remove]
V3x6 (BLK)
FR6H4E03.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 192 MC - 193
10.14 Light-Collecting Shaft ■ Reinstallation Procedures

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Install the guide in the orientation illustrated below.
FRONT
Guide
FR6H4958.EPS
(1) Remove the sensor (SZ5) assembly.
D-shaped cut surface
“10.8 Sensor (SZ5)” of light-collecting shaft
(2) Remove the light-collecting mirror. FR6H4917.EPS
“10.13 Light-Collecting Mirror”

(3) Remove the light-collecting shaft.
■ Check/Adjustment Procedure
• Make sure that the guide is mounted in its correct orientation.
HHS Label No.2
Bearing
Guide
#2
[Remove]
E4
CHECK
Bearing
#1
[Remove]
E4
Light-collecting
shaft
#3
[Remove]
V3x4 (BLK) (x3)
Cleaning brush
FR6H4916.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 194 MC - 195
(3) Remove the support plate (board retainer).
11. Removing and Reinstalling the Controller
11.1 Controller
Support plate
(board retainer)
FR6H4A56.EPS
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, turn OFF the breaker of the machine and unplug the [Unclamp]
power cable from the outlet before performing the procedures. Clamp (x2)
(1) Unplug the cables.
• Power cable [Remove] BR3x6 FR6H4A37.EPS
• I/F cable
#2
[Unplug] I/F cable
#1
[Unplug] Power cable
FR6H4A12.EPS

• Front cover
• Lower light protect plate
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 196 MC - 197
(4) Remove the controller. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#1 [Disconnect] Connectors Front view CHECK ■ Check/Adjustment Procedure

• Make sure that the connectors are connected to their correct locations.
CN8 CN3 CN7 CN5 CN6 CN4
DRV12A board
Breaker
cable CN6 CN4 CN5
SNS12A board
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN5 CN4

SCN12A board
Controller
#2
[Remove] BR4x8 (x3)
FR6H4A13.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 198 MC - 199
11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board A replacement flow for the CPU12A board is presented below.
START
[1] Check the IP Address/NET MASK of the CL and RU
[2] Check the Software Version and Back Up HISTORY LOG/ Create “Backup” floppy disk.
SCN ALL DATA
FR6H4A51.EPS
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the CPU12A Board

CAUTIONS
• When the manganese lithium battery is completely drained, replace the board as a whole.
• Return the old board replaced to the Service Parts Center (manufacturer’s factory). [4] Change the Memory on the CPU12A Board to the User Settings
• Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
[5] Check the Version of the PC-MUTL
• When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause
[6] Install the Application Software
• When replacing the CPU12A board, do not power OFF the CL/RU unless otherwise instructed
in this manual.
• Make sure that devices that are set as shown below are not connected over the same [7] Restore HISTORY LOG Use the “Backup” floppy disk
network:
“Device where ‘ru0’ is used as the RU host name”

“Device where the IP address is used by its default setting (172.16.1.10)” [8] Restore SCN ALL DATA Use the “Backup” floppy disk
If any device of such specifications is connected over the same network, disconnect that
device from the same network by powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable.
Unless such a device is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that device [9] Image Checks
will be automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
◆ NOTE ◆ END
FR6H4A64.EPS
The replacement procedures of the CPU12A board differ depending on the version of the PC-
MUTL. Refer to the appendix for the procedures for the PC-MUTL of versions 1.1 or earlier.
“Appendix 1 Replacement of CPU12A board (for PC-MUTL versions 1.1 or earlier)”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 200 MC - 201
[1] Check the IP Address/NET MASK of the CL and RU

RU SERVICE UTILITY window
◆ NOTE ◆ CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
EACH RU SETTING
When the CPU12A board is replaced, the IP address of a new CPU12A board is at its default CONNECTION TEST
setting, so that it cannot be connected to the CL. Here, check to see whether the user is using RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
the default setting (RU IP address: 172.16.1.10 and CL IP address: 172.16.1.20). If the default ru0 172.16.1.12
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 12 #4 [Select/Click]
setting is not used, it is necessary to take note of the user’s setting. MUTL PING
(1) Exit the CL application.

REFERENCE
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION #5 [Select/Click]
BACKUP (RU→HD→FD) RESTORE (FD→HD→RU)
To quit the CL application, hold down the <SHIFT> key and choose “Shut Down” from the ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION
“FUJI FILM” menu.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
(2) Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
ALL RUs SETTING
Press UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP
(3) Boot the PC-MUTL, and display the EDIT CONFIGURATION screen.
Windows Update
Programs EDIT CONFIGURATION window
Favorites IP address of RU
Documents
IP address of CL
Settings
Search
Help
Run...
#1
[Click]
Log Off Administrator...
Shut Down...
Run ?
Type the name of a program, folder, document, or Internet resource, and

Windows will open it for you.
Open: "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type] FR6H4A66.EPS
(4) Verify the IP address/NET MASK of the RU and CL.

#3 [Click] OK Cancel Browse...
(5) If the default setting is not used, take note of the values for “RU IP ADDR”, “CL IP
ADDR”, and “NET MASK”.
FR6H4A65.EPS
REFERENCE
Recorded “RU IP ADDR”, “CL IP ADDR” and “NET MASK” values are used in “[4] Change
the memory on the CPU12A board to the user settings” to be mentioned.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 202 MC - 203
[2] Check the Software Version and Back Up HISTORY LOG/ (4) Back up SCN DATA.
SCN ALL DATA MAINTENANCE UTILITY window

EACH RU SETTING
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ CONNECTION TEST
Back up HISTORY DATA and SCN ALL DATA on the CPU12A board. Execute the backup in RU NAME IP ADDRESS
accordance with the instructions presented below.
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 #1 [Select/Click]
MUTL PING
(1) Insert a blank floppy disk into the FD drive. INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION
(2) Open the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window and select a relevant RU BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD)
from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”. #2 SCN ALL DATA SCN ALL DATA
(3) Back up HISTORY LOG. [Select] #3 [Click] EXECUTE EXECUTE
SCN ALL DATA
ALL RUs SETTING
EACH RU SETTING UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
MUTL PING
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION History data will be saved into a FD. Inset a
formatted FD.
BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD)
(3) #1 HISTORY LOG SCN ALL DATA
[Select] (3) #2 [Click] EXECUTE EXECUTE CANCEL OK #4
HISTORY LOG
[Click]
ALL RUs SETTING

Completed

History data will be saved into a FD. Inset a
formatted FD. OK #5
CANCEL OK (3) #3 (5) Power OFF the RU.

[Click]

Completed
OK (3) #4
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 204 MC - 205
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the CPU12A Board ■ DIP Switch Settings
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
■ Removal Procedures If the CPU12A board is replaced, make DIP switch settings as appropriate.
CN1 CN2
• Front cover
• Lower light protect plate
BT1
“11.1 Controller”
(3) Remove the CPU12A board.
Rail
J4
S3
CN6 CN5 TP1
S1
S2
CN6 ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Remote Local
#1 OFF
S1 settings
[Unplug] LAN cable
Default
bit Description ON OFF
(factory preset)
1 Service terminal connection enable/disable — — ON (fixed)

2 For design analysis — — OFF (fixed)
OFF
#2 (It varies depending
[Remove] CPU12A board 3 Cassette type selection Metric INCH
on the specifications
FR6H4A02.EPS
prior to shipment.)
4 Barcode reader availability selection With BCR Without BCR ON
6 Not used OFF (fixed)
S2 settings
Description Remote Local Default
Interlink with CL — — Local (fixed)
FR6H4A03.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 206 MC - 207
■Reinstallation Procedures [4] Change the Memory on the CPU12A Board to the User
◆ NOTES ◆ Settings
• When installing the CPU12A board, mount it along the rail.
• When installing the CPU12A board, push white portions on both sides and securely install the (1) Turn ON the power switch of the RU.
CPU12A board to the depth. (2) Set the IP address of the RU to its default, and click on the [PING] button.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. successful.
■ Check/Adjustment Procedure
• Make sure that the connector is connected to its correct location. (2) #1 Enter the default IP address
Front view
DRV12A board
SNS12A board (3) Click (2) #2 Click
SCN12A board
CN6
FR6H4A34.EPS
FR6H4D10.EPS
(4) Change the following values to the user-specified values recorded in “[1] Check the IP
Address/NET MASK of the CL and RU” by using temporary setting of the software
utility.
(Example) When the user settings are as shown below:

RUNAME : ru2
RU IP ADDR :172.16.1.12
CL IP ADDR :172.16.1.22
FTP-SERV. :172.16.1.22
INFO-HOST :172.16.1.22
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 208 MC - 209
#1 [Input/ENT] (5) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU and then back ON.
#2 [Input/ENT] ◆ NOTE ◆
#3 [Input/ENT] Unless the power switch of the RU is turned OFF and then back ON, the user settings will
not become effective.
(6) Boot the “EDIT CONFIGURATION” screen.

(7) Set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF”, and click the [SET] button.
OFF
#4 [Input/ENT]
#5 [Input/ENT]
FR6H4D20.EPS
Start write of
Config data
#6 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#7 [Input/ENT] Wait 2 minutes RU panel RU alarm

• • •
#8 [Input/ENT] Blinks Rings (once)

• • •
5 seconds
#9 [Input/ENT] Blinks Rings (once)
• • •
#10 [Input/ENT] 5 seconds

Blinks Rings (once)
• • •
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
Wait 30 seconds
PC-MUTL screen
is displayed
TR6H4D56+.EPS
#11 [Check] User setting value
FR6H4D09.EPS
REFERENCE
Input nothing and press [Enter] key if the NETMASK, ROUTE, SEC.ADDR and SET.NET
values are not to be changed.
◆ NOTE ◆
Input the IP addresses of the FTP-SERV and INFO-HOST same as the IP addresses
input in the CL IP ADDR.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 210 MC - 211
[5] Check the Version of the PC-MUTL [6] Install the Application Software
Make sure that the PC-MUTL is of versions 1.2 or later. The RU application software is installed in this section for the PC-MUTL of versions 1.2 or
later.
REFERENCE
Although the displayed screen of the PC-MUTL differs depending on the version of the PC- ◆ NOTE ◆
MUTL, the way of checking the version is common. Refer to the appendix if the PC-MUTL version confirmed in the procedure of [5] is 1.1 or
earlier.
“Appendix 1 Replacement of CPU12A board (for PC-MUTL versions 1.1 or earlier)”
■ Checking the Display (Example: for PC-MUTL Version 1.4)
PC-MUTL 1.4 [Check] CAUTION

Do not power OFF the RU while the software is being installed.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that the
RU will no longer boot up.
(1) Select the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click the [FTP] button.
ru1 172.16.1.1 #1 [Select]
FR6H4D11.EPS
#2 [Click]
FR6H4D79.EPS
● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL
RU NAME
HISTORY.LOG
FR6H4D14.EPS
● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed from the RU
RESULT: OK
FR6H4D15.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 212 MC - 213
(2) Make sure that the FTP server is normal. (5) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU.
◆ NOTE ◆
[Checkpoints]
Installation is not normally done if the power of the RU is turned ON before the CL is
(a) RU NAME – Make sure that RU NAME is the one that has been set. booted up.
(b) HISTORY.LOG – Make sure that the capacity is not zero bytes.
(c) RESULT: OK – Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
If any of the three checkpoints (a), (b), and (c) results in “NG”, verify the IP address and Click . Then select [Programs] → [Fuji Film] → [FCR].
RU NAME.
→ The CL-AP boots up approx. 1 minute later.
“Appendix 3. Checking RU/CL Software Setting” in the “Installation” volume
The RU initialization message is displayed on the CL monitor, and the RU is put into
commission.
CAUTION (7) Turn ON the power switch of the RU.

Do not power OFF the RU while the software is being installed. (8) Verify that the RU call lamp is illuminated, with [11024] displayed on the CL screen,
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that and restart the RU from the CL screen.
the RU will no longer boot up.
REFERENCE
(3) Boot the “EDIT CONFIGURATION” screen. The following screen is not displayed when the version of the RU software installed in the
CL’s FTP server is the same as that of the RU software of the mounted CPU12A board.
(4) Set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF”, and click the [SET] button. Proceed to procedure (9).
OFF
When it is restarted, the RU is power OFF and then back ON with all indicators on the
panel illuminated, and an audible alarm (three short beeps) is generated.
RU panel CL screen
(CALL lamp)
ID
FR6H4D20.EPS
#1 [Check]
Start write of
Config data
Wait 2 minutes RU panel RU alarm
Blinks Rings (once)

5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds [11024] [11024] RU: APPLICATION SOFTWARE UPDATE. Reboot the RU. #1 [Check]
Blinks Rings (once)
REBOOT #2 [Click]
Wait 30 seconds
FR6H4973.EPS
PC-MUTL screen
is displayed
TR6H4D56+.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 214 MC - 215
(9) Select the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click the [VER] button. (11) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU where the backup memory is to be
cleared.
ru1 172.16.1.10 #1 [Select]
#2 [Click]
FR6H4D27.EPS
(10) Confirm the RU software version. FR6H4D70.EPS
(12) [Easy-Operation] → [Clear Backup Data]

A dialog box appears to ask whether to execute clear.
FR6H4D71.EPS
(13) Click on the [EXECUTE] button.

RU software version
FR6H4D72.EPS
A DOS prompt appears.
FR6H4D73.EPS

FR6H4D22.EPS
REFERENCE
To quit the CL application, hold down the <SHIFT> key and choose “Shut Down” from the
“FUJI FILM” menu.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 216 MC - 217
(16) Boot the “EDIT CONFIGURATION” screen. [7] Restore HISTORY LOG
(17) Set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF” and click on the [SET] button.
(1) Put into the FD drive the floppy disk containing HISTORY LOG that has backed up
OFF
before replacing the CPU12A board.
(2) Open the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window and select a relevant RU
from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
(3) Restore HISTORY LOG.

FR6H4D20.EPS
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
➮ RU and CL operate as follows. RU NAME IP ADDRESS
MUTL PING
Start write of
Config data
(3) #1
Wait 2 minutes RU panel RU alarm BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD) [Select]
ERROR LOG HISTORY LOG HISTORY LOG
Blinks Rings (once) EXECUTE EXECUTE (3) #2
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
[Click]
ALL RUs SETTING
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once) UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
Wait 30 seconds
PC-MUTL screen CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY

is displayed History data will be loaded from the FD to
TR6H4D56+.EPS Reader Unit. Insert the FD.
◆ NOTE ◆ CANCEL OK (3) #3

Be sure to set “AUTO UPDATE” to OFF, if (Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving [Click]
changes) is set to ON.
(18) Make confirmation after the RU software is installed. CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
Completed
“Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version”
OK (3) #4
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 218 MC - 219
[8] Restore SCN ALL DATA [9] Image Checks

(1) Put the machine-specific data floppy disk into the FD drive. (1) Start the CL application.
(2) Open the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window and select a relevant RU
Click on and then sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
(3) Restore SCN ALL DATA. REFERENCE
MAINTENANCE UTILITY window Bootup of the CL application causes the RU to be initialized.
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME ru0 LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW “19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 (2) [Select/Click] (3) Restore the RU/CL that has been disconnected from the network to its connected state
MUTL PING (i.e., power it ON or connect its I/F cable).

(3) #1
BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD) [Select]
ERROR LOG SCN ALL DATA SCN ALL DATA
EXECUTE EXECUTE (3) #2
[Click]
ALL RUs SETTING

Insert the SCN data FD that is attached to the
Reader Unit When it is slipped from
factory. The data will be loaded into the
Reader Unit
CANCEL OK (3) #3
[Click]
(3) #4
[Click]

Completed
OK (3) #5
[Click] FR6H4A38.EPS
(4) Click on to quit the PC-MUTL.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 220 MC - 221
11.3 SCN12A Board (4) Remove the SCN12A board.
Rail
FR6H4A52.EPS
CN1
CN6
CN2
CAUTION CN3
CN5
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground CN4
#1
[Disconnect] Connectors
(1) Remove the covers. [Remove] SCN12A board
FR6H4A07.EPS
• Front cover
• Lower light protect plate ■ Reinstallation Procedures
◆NOTE ◆
When installing the SCN12A board, mount it along the rail.
(3) Disconnect the SNS12A board connectors. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
SNS12A board (1) Make sure that the connectors are connected to their correct locations.
Front view
CN6
CN4 CN6 CN4 CN5

SNS12A board
CN5 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN5 CN4

SCN12A board
FR6H4A35.EPS
FR6H4A05.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 222 MC - 223
11.4 SND12A Board (3) Remove the SND12A board.
#2
[Remove] SND12A board
CN2
CN8
CN3
CN6 CN7
CN5
#1 CN6
FR6H4A53.EPS [Disconnect] Connectors CN4
CN4
CAUTION CN5
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage #1
to electronic parts on the board. [Disconnect] Connectors
REFERENCE FR6H4A09.EPS
The SNS12A board and DRV12A board are screwed together, and installed as the SND12A
board to the machine. ■ Reinstallation Procedures
◆ NOTE ◆
When installing the SND12A board, mount it along the rail.
• Front cover
• Lower light protect plate ■ Check/Adjustment Procedure
“3.1 Removing and Reinstalling the Covers” • Make sure that the connectors are connected to their correct locations.
Front view SND12A board
CN2 CN8 CN3 CN7 CN5 CN6 CN4

DRV12A board
CN6 CN4 CN5

SNS12A board
FR6H4A36.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 224 MC - 225
11.5 SNS12A Board 11.6 DRV12A Board
FR6H4A54.EPS FR6H4A55.EPS
CAUTION CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage
to electronic parts on the board. to electronic parts on the board.

(1) Remove the SND12A board. (1) Remove the SND12A board.
“11.4 SND12A Board” “11.4 SND12A Board”
(2) Remove the SNS12A board. (2) Remove the DRV12A board.
DRV12A board
DRV12A board
[Remove]
B3x6 (x6)
SNS12A board
SNS12A board
FR6H4A11.EPS
[Remove] B3x6 (x6)

FR6H4A10.EPS
■ Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 226 MC - 227
11.7 MTH12A Board (4) Remove the MTH12A board together with the board retaining bracket.
MTH12A board
Bracket
Board retaining bracket
FR6H4A57.EPS
#2
[Remove] BR3x8 (x2)
CAUTION #1
[Remove] BR3x6
Bracket
(1) Remove the controller.
(2) Remove the boards. #1
• CPU12A board [Remove] BR3x6
#2
• SCN12A board [Remove] BR3x8 (x2)
• SND12A board FR6H4A30.EPS
“11.2 CPU12A Board”, “11.3 SCN12A Board”, “11.4 SND12A Board”

(5) Remove the MTH12A board.
Board retaining bracket

#2
MTH12A board
CN1
CN7
#1
[Unclamp] Clamps
CN8
CN10
CN9
CN12
MTH12A board
#2 [Remove] BR3x6 (x9) FR6H4A31.EPS
[Disconnect]
Connectors
FR6H4A29.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 228 MC - 229
11.8 Power Supply

CAUTION
The cable connected to the power supply (marked by CAUTION in the illustration below)
should not be detached.
◆ NOTE ◆
below to detach it.
FR6H4A58.EPS
Push
FR6H0001.EPS

(3) Remove the power supply.
◆ NOTE ◆ DETAIL A
The TP screw used to secure the ground wire is similar in shape to a DT screw. #1
When attaching the screw, check its shape to avoid confusing it with a wrong one. Power supply
[Remove]
FASTON terminal
DT screw TP screw A Power supply
CAUTION
N L
TB2 cable TB1 cable #3

FR6H4105.EPS
(white) (black) [Remove] B4x6 (x4)
#1
[Unclamp] Clamps SW4
W4
MTH12A board
Bracket
CN8
CN9
CN2
#2
[Remove] BR3x8 (x2)
#3
FR6H4A17.EPS
[Remove] #1
TP3x6 #4 [Unclamp] Clamps
[Disconnect] ■ Reinstallation Procedures
#2
Connector
[Disconnect] Connector ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
DRV12A board
Connect the FASTON terminal to its correct location.
FR6H4A15.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 230 MC - 231
11.9 Reset Switch ■ Reinstallation Procedures

FR6H4A59.EPS
(2) Remove the reset switch.
#2 CN10
#3
[Remove] BR3x6 #1
Bracket
[Remove] Clamp
Reset switch
Anti-vibration
#5
[Remove] Nut
#4
[Remove] Switch cover
FR6H4A18.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 232 MC - 233
11.10 CNN12A Board (2) Remove the CNN12A board.
FR6H4A60.EPS
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground #2
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage [Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
CNN12A board
(1) Remove the controller. CN1
“11.1 Controller” CN2
◆ NOTE ◆
To remove the CNN12A board, take the following steps in the illustration below.
#1
CNN12A [Unplug] LAN cable CN2
board
FR6H4A20.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
FR6H4A19.EPS
The CNN12A board should be installed in the orientation as illustrated below.
CNN12A board
CN1
CN2
FR6H4A33.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 234 MC - 235
11.11 Power Supply Socket (2) Remove the power supply socket.
PUSH
#2
[Remove]
#1 [Remove] FAST-ON terminal Power supply socket
PUSH
L cable
(black)
FR6H4A61.EPS
■ Removal Procedures FG cable

(green) N cable
(1) Remove the controller. (white)
◆ NOTE ◆
below to detach it.
Push
FR6H0001.EPS
FR6H4A22.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 236 MC - 237
11.12 Breaker ◆ NOTE ◆

below to detach it.
Push
FR6H0001.EPS
(3) Remove the breaker.

FR6H4A62.EPS
DETAIL A
■ Removal Procedures #1 [Remove] FASTON terminal Breaker
“11.1 Controller
(2) Remove the bracket. OUT-N cable (white) OUT-L cable (black)
#2
[Disconnect] Connector IN-L cable (black)
IN-N cable (white)
#3 #2
[Remove] [Disconnect] Connector
BR3x6 (x2)
#1
[Unclamp] Clamp
Bracket
A
PUSH
Controller
FR6H4A23.EPS
#2
[Remove] Breaker
PUSH
FR6H4A25.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 238 MC - 239
WARNING
Before installing the breaker, put the breaker switch in the OFF position.
GOOD NG
Breaker Breaker
OFF position ON position

Breaker FR6H4A32.EPS
CAUTION
The breaker should be mounted in its correct orientation.
T
O
P
Breaker
FR6H4A26.EPS
• Make sure that the breaker is installed in its OFF position.
• Make sure that the breaker is mounted in its correct orientation.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 240 MC - 241
11.13 Fans (FAN1 and FAN2) (3) Remove the fan (FAN2).
#3
[Remove] B3x35 (x2)
Cover #2
Fan (FAN2) [Disconnect] Connector
#1
[Remove] Clamp
CN11
Label
FR6H4A63.EPS
(2) Remove the fan (FAN1).
#2
#1
[Remove] Clamp FR6H4A27.EPS
CN12
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
When installing the fan, orient its label as shown in the illustration.
For installation, reverse the removal steps.
Label
Fan (FAN1)
Cover
#3
[Remove] B3x35 (x2) FR6H4A28.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 242 MC - 243
■ List of Fuses
12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations
Board Code No. Type Rating (A) Fuse number ✼
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ MTH12A 137S2097 Slow blow (T) 5 A11, A21, A31, A41, H11, J11
137S2096 Slow blow (T) 4 B11, B21, C11
There are two fuse types: normal-blow type and slow-blow type 137S2094 Slow blow (T) 3 C21, C31
The slow-blow type fuse has a mark “T” silk-screened on it. 137S2092 Slow blow (T) 2 K11
When replacing the fuse, check its type. SCN12A 137S2084 Slow blow (T) 1.5 A22, H12, H13, H14, J12
SNS12A 137S2084 Slow blow (T) 1.5 A32, A33
● Example of silk-screened marks 137S2083 Slow blow (T) 1 A34
137S1219 Normal blow 500 m A35
Normal-blow type Slow-blow type DRV12A 137S2094 Slow blow (T) 3 D11, D21, D41, D51, E11, E21,
E31, E51, L31
LE 137S2092 Slow blow (T) 2 L11
137S1220 Normal blow 2 D31, E41, L21
2A
LE T ✼ Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram. Tbl_MC213_LB.EPS
2A
LE ■ Fuse Replacement Procedures
2A
CAUTIONS
FR6H4C13.EPS
• When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground
your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause
REFERENCE • When replacing the fuse, check the type and rating (A) of the fuse to be replaced, and replace
The fuse (1A-5A) installed prior to shipment and a new replacement fuse (1A-5A) may it with a fuse of the same type.
have different silk-screened marks. At the same time, check the rating (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
• To replace the fuse, use tweezers and exercise care not to damage the rib of the fuse holder.
● Example of silk-screened marks
(1) Remove the board.

Fuse installed prior Replacement fuse
to shipment “11. Removing and Reinstalling the Controller”
(2) Pull out the fuse and replace it with a new one.
LE LE
2A 2A
Tweezer
FR6H4C14.EPS
[Pull out] Fuse
Fuse box
Board
Fuse holder latch
FR6H4301.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 244 MC - 245
12.1 MTH12A Board Fuses 12.2 SCN12A Board Fuses

(1) Remove the MTH12A board. (1) Remove the SCN12A board.
“11.7 MTH12A Board” “11.3 SCN12A Board”
(2) Replace the fuse. (2) Replace the fuse.
“■ Fuse Replacement Procedures” “■ Fuse Replacement Procedures”
■ Fuse Locations ■ Fuse Locations

MTH12A board SCN12A board
FUSE5 FUSE4
FUSE7
FUSE6
FUSE12 FUSE8
FUSE1 FUSE10
FUSE11 FUSE9
FUSE2
F5 F6 F7 F10 F8
FUSE3
FUSER6H4C03.EPS
FR6H4C03.EPS
■ Fuse Information
Board indications Type Rating (A) Fuse number ✼ FR6H4C02.EPS
5 A31
FUSE1 Slow blow (T) ■ Fuse Information
FUSE2 Slow blow (T) 5 A21
FUSE3 Slow blow (T) 5 A11 Board indications Type Rating (A) Fuse number ✼
FUSE4 Slow blow (T) 5 A41 F5 Slow blow (T) 1.5 A22
FUSE5 Slow blow (T) 4 B11 F6 Slow blow (T) 1.5 H14
FUSE6 Slow blow (T) 4 B21 F7 Slow blow (T) 1.5 H12
FUSE7 Slow blow (T) 4 C11 F8 Slow blow (T) 1.5 H13
FUSE8 Slow blow (T) 3 C21 F10 Slow blow (T) 1.5 J12
FUSE9 Slow blow (T) 5 H11 ✼ Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.
Tbl_MC215_LB.EPS
FUSE10 Slow blow (T) 5 J11
FUSE11 Slow blow (T) 2
Slow blow (T)
K11
FUSE12 3 C31
✼ Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram.
Tbl_MC214_LB.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 246 MC - 247
12.3 SNS12A Board Fuses 12.4 DRV12A Board Fuses

(1) Remove the SNS12A board. (1) Remove the DRV12A board.
“11.5 SNS12A Board” “11.6 DRV12A Board”
(2) Replace the fuse. (2) Replace the fuse.
“■ Fuse Replacement Procedures” “■ Fuse Replacement Procedures”
■ Fuse Locations ■ Fuse Locations
SNS12A board DRV12A board
F1 F3 F2 F4
F13
F10 F9 F14
F4 F7 F6 F12 F3
F11 F1 F2
F5
FR6H4C05.EPS
FR6H4C04.EPS
Board indications Type Rating (A) Fuse number ✼
Board indications Type Rating (A) Fuse number ✼ F1 Slow blow (T) 3 D11
F1 Normal blow 500 m A35 F2 Slow blow (T) 3 E21
F2 Slow blow (T) 1.5 A34 F3 Slow blow (T) 3 E11
F3 Slow blow (T) 1 A33 F4 Slow blow (T) 3 D41
F4 Slow blow (T) 1.5 A32 F5 Slow blow (T) 3 E31
F6 Slow blow (T) 3 D21
Tbl_MC216_LB.EPS F7 Slow blow (T) 2 L11
F9 Normal blow 2 E41
■ Reinstallation Procedures F10 Normal blow 2 D31
F11 Slow blow (T) 3 D51
F12 Slow blow (T) 3 E51
F13 Normal blow 2 L21
F14 Slow blow (T) 3 L31
Tbl_MC217_LB.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 248 MC - 249
13. Procedures of Updating Software Version
13.1 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for 1:1 (4) Make sure that the PC-MUTL version is 1.4 or later.
Connection) ◆ NOTE ◆
Update the PC-MUTL version to 1.4 or later if the version is 1.3 or earlier, before taking
the procedures below. Otherwise, the RU software might not be version-updated
CAUTIONS normally.
• Refer to the appendix if the PC-MUTL version 1.1 or earlier or the RU software version A04 or “13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL Software”
earlier is to be updated to versions A05 or later. The version cannot be normally updated by
the procedure below. (5) Select the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click the [FTP] button.
“Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version Update
(for PC-MUTL Software Versions 1.1 or Earlier)”
• Terminate all of the application programs on the CL before updating the version.
ru1 172.16.1.1 #1 [Select]
REFERENCE
If the RU displayed in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” is not connected, or an error occurs during the
version update, the FTP server is updated but the FLASH ROM is not updated.
#2 [Click]
FR6H4D79.EPS
(1) Exit the CL application. ● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL
CAUTION
If installation or version update is done while the CL application is running, the CPU12A
board may be corrupted. RU NAME
REFERENCE
When the power of the CL is not turned ON, follow the procedures below to display the HISTORY.LOG
desk top screen.
Click the upper left and the upper right in order on the screen within 5 seconds since
the initial screen appears. FR6H4D59.EPS

FR6H4F09.EPS
➮ Service Utility boots up and the “IIP Service Utility” screen appears. RESULT: OK
Click the [Exit Service Utility] button to return to the desk top screen.
FR6H4D60.EPS
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
(6) Make sure that the FTP server is normal.
REFERENCE [Checkpoints]
When the power of the RU is turned ON, proceed to step (3).
(a) RU NAME - Make sure that RU NAME is the one that has been set.
(b) HISTORY.LOG - Make sure that the capacity is not zero bytes.
(c) RESULT: OK - Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 250 MC - 251
(7) Click on the “VERSION UP” button.
CAUTION
Do not turn OFF the power of the CL/RU during version update. If the power is turned OFF
during the update, the machine will not start up.
(11) Click on the [OK] button.

FR6H3170.EPS
The dialogue requesting the insertion of the CD-ROM appears.

(8) Put the Ver.up CD-R into the CL, and click on the [OK] button.
FR6H4D67.EPS
FR6H4D64.EPS
A dialog box appears to check the version of the software to be installed. The PC-MUTL window appears back on screen.
(9) Select the desired version of the software, and click on the [OK] button. ◆ NOTE ◆
Click the [OK] button, and do not turn OFF the power of the RU machine until the PC-
MUTL screen is displayed. Otherwise, the FLASH ROM of the CPU12A board may be
corrupted.
(12) Select the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, and click the
[VER] button.
FR6H4D65.EPS
A window appears to confirm the execution of version update.
(10) Click on the [OK] button. ru1 172.16.1.10 #1 [Select]
#2 [Click]
FR6H4D27.EPS
FR6H4D66.EPS (13) Check the RU software virsion.

➮ The RU software starts to be version-updated.
RU and CL operate as follows.
RU software version
Start of version
update
RU panel RU alarm
Wait 1 minutes
Blinks Rings
30 seconds
(30 seconds) (30 seconds)
FR6H4D62.EPS
Wait 2 minutes
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds (15) Check the image/conveyance.
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds “19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
Wait 30 seconds
END TR6H4D57.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 252 MC - 253
13.2 Procedures of Updating Software Version (for N:N (1) Exit the CL application.
Connection)
CAUTION
If installation or version update is done while the CL application is running, the CPU12A
CAUTIONS board may be corrupted.
• Refer to the appendix if the PC-MUTL version 1.1 or earlier or the RU software version A04 or
earlier is to be updated to versions A05 or later. The version cannot be normally updated by
the procedure below. REFERENCE
“Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version Update When the power of the CL is not turned ON, follow the procedures below to display the
(for PC-MUTL Software Versions 1.1 or Earlier)” desk top screen.
• Terminate all of the application programs on the CL before updating the version.
Click the upper left and the upper right in order on the screen within 5 seconds since
the initial screen appears.
REFERENCES
• If the RU displayed in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” is not connected, or an error occurs during the Click the upper left, and then upper right.
version update, the FTP server is updated but the FLASH ROM is not updated.
• In updating the version of the RU software for N:N connection, update the RUs one at a time
in the order they are registered in [LIST OF EXISTING RU].
Example: If the RUs are registered in the order of ru2 and ru1 in two-unit connection, the RUs
are installed in the order of ru2 and then ru1.
CR-IR346CL
Straight cable FR6H4F09.EPS
➮ Service Utility boots up and the “IIP Service Utility” screen appears.
Switching hub Click the [Exit Service Utility] button to return to the desk top screen.
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Network REFERENCE
When the power of the RU is turned ON, proceed to step (3).
Switching hub Switching hub
Straight cable
ru1 ru2
(4) Make sure that the PC-MUTL version is 1.4 or later.
◆ NOTE ◆
FR6H3200.EPS
Update the PC-MUTL version to 1.4 or later if the version is 1.3 or earlier, before taking
normally.
“13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL Software”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 254 MC - 255
(5) Select the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, and click the (7) Select the second or later RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL,
[FTP] button. and click the [FTP] button.
ru1 172.16.1.1
ru1 172.16.1.1 #1 [Select] #1 [Select]
ru2 172.16.1.2
ru2 172.16.1.2
#2 [Click]
#2 [Click] FR6H4D81.EPS
FR6H4D80.EPS
RU NAME
RU NAME
HISTORY.LOG
HISTORY.LOG
FR6H4D59.EPS
● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed from the RU FR6H4D84.EPS
RESULT: OK
FR6H4D60.EPS RESULT: OK
(6) Make sure that the FTP server is normal.
FR6H4D60.EPS
[Checkpoints] (8) Make sure that the FTP server is normal.
(a) RU NAME - Make sure that RU NAME is the one that has been set. [Checkpoints]
(b) HISTORY.LOG - Make sure that the capacity is not zero bytes. (a) RU NAME - Make sure that RU NAME is the one that has been set.
(c) RESULT: OK - Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (b) HISTORY.LOG - Make sure that the capacity is not zero bytes.
(c) RESULT: OK - Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
REFERENCE
If a third RU is registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, follow the
procedures (7) and (8). Then check that the FTP server works normally for the third RU.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 256 MC - 257
(9) Click on the [VERSION UP] button. (12) Click on the [OK] button.
FR6H3170.EPS
FR6H4D66.EPS
The dialogue requesting the insertion of the CD-ROM appears. ➮ The RU software starts to be version-updated.
◆ NOTE ◆ RU and CL operate as follows.
Clicking [VERSION UP] updates the version of all RUs registered in “LIST OF EXISTING
Start of version
RU”. update
(10) Put the Ver.up CD-R into the CL, and click on the [OK] button. RU panel RU alarm
Wait 1 minutes
Blinks Rings
30 seconds
(30 seconds) (30 seconds)
Wait 2 minutes
FR6H4D64.EPS Repeat the
same operation Blinks Rings (once)
A dialog box appears to check the version of the software to be installed. for the second 5 seconds
and later units. Blinks Rings (once)
(11) Select the desired version of the software, and click on the [OK] button. 5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
Version update of the RUs is completed.

Wait 30 seconds
FR6H4D65.EPS END TR6H4D58.EPS
A window appears to confirm the execution of version update.

CAUTION
Do not turn OFF the power of the CL/RU during version update. If the power is turned
OFF during the update, the machine will not start up.
FR6H4D67.EPS
The PC-MUTL window appears back on screen.

◆ NOTE ◆
Click the [OK] button, and do not turn OFF the power of the RU machine until the PC-
MUTL screen is displayed. Otherwise, the FLASH ROM of the CPU12A board may be
corrupted.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 258 MC - 259
(14) Select the RU from “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, and click on the [VER] BLANK PAGE
button.
Example: Selecting ru2
ru1 172.16.1.1
ru2 172.16.1.2 #1 [Select]
#2 [Click]
FR6H4D83.EPS
(15) Check the RU software version.
RU software version
FR6H4D62.EPS
(16) Follow the steps (14) and (15) for all RUs registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the
PC-MUTL.
(19) Check the PC-MUTL version.
“Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL version”
◆ NOTE ◆
If the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier is used under multi-unit-connected environments,
the RU message file displayed on the CL may not appear normally. Follow the
procedures in “Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL version” without fail.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 260 MC - 261
13.3 Procedures for Updating MAIN CPU (OS) Version ===============MAIN_IPL_UPDATE.BAT================

This is a batch program to upgrade the MAIN_IPL software of RU.
At first, automatically check the version of the RU's application. (8) Press the ENT key.
■ Combination of RU Application and MAIN CPU IPL (OS) --- Are you ready? (Escape character is [CTRL]+C) ----
Press any key to continue ..
Wait for a while....
PC application MAIN CPU IPL (OS)
–04 A01 CR-IR346RU Application Software : 114Y5436002A07 (9) Check the software version.
A05– A02
TR6H4D55.EPS
Confirm the version A05 or later (see an underline-part above).
Never turn the RU OFF while updating, or you will loose the CPU12A board.
---- Are you ready? (Escape character is [CTRL]+C) ----
CAUTION Press any key to continue .. (10) Press the ENT key.
Do not power OFF the RU while data is being written into the flash ROM of the CPU12A board. RU[ru2] login: cr-ir346
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM will be corrupted, so that it is necessary Password:
to replace the CPU12A board with a new one. -> mutl
MAINTENANCE UTILITY FOR CR-IR346.
Escape INPUT/AUTO mode: [CTRL+C] [ENTER]
0.QUIT
(2) Check the IP address of the RU. 1.LOG
(3) Put the Ver.up CD-R (114Y5436002A05 or later) into the CL. 2.VERSION
3.TEST
(4) Select a patch file. 4.ELECTRICAL
5.SCANNER
6.MECHANICAL
7.SOFTWARE UTILITY
8.BACKUP MEMORY
>2
(5) Point the cursor to this. 0.QUIT
1.DISPLAY VERSION
(6) Enter the RU IP address. 2.DETAIL
Type in 172.16.1.10. >2
0.QUIT
1.LOAD SOFTWARE FROM FTP-SERV
2.LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM FTP-SERV
3.COMPARE SOFTWARE WITH FTP-SERV
(7) Click VER>DTL>LDSFT>1
0.QUIT
1.MAIN CPU IPL
2.MAIN CPU APPL
3.MAIN CPU FT
4.SUB CPU IPL REFERENCE
5.SUB CPU APPL A "beep" sounds while the flash
FR6H4D30.EPS
VER>DTL>LDSFT>3 ROM is being written
ARE YOU SURE ? (for about 20 seconds).
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : 1
"Input example": If the RU IP address is its default value (172.16.1.10): WAIT FOR A WHILE. IT TAKES FROM 3 TO 180 SECONDS.
~ BAT 172.16.1.10 NEVER TURN OFF THE RU UNTIL "RESULT" IS INDICATED !!!
RESULT : OK
◆ NOTE ◆ FR6H4D31.EPS
The underlined portion represents an input item. It is not an underbar entry.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 262 MC - 263
0.QUIT
BLANK PAGE
1.MAIN CPU IPL
2.MAIN CPU APPL
3.MAIN CPU FT
4.SUB CPU IPL
5.SUB CPU APPL
VER>DTL>LDSFT>3
ARE YOU SURE ?
1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : 1
WAIT FOR A WHILE. IT TAKES FROM 3 TO 180 SECONDS. REFERENCE
NEVER TURN OFF THE RU UNTIL "RESULT" IS INDICATED !!! A "beep" sounds while the flash
RESULT : OK ROM is being written
(for about 20 seconds).
0.QUIT
1.MAIN CPU IPL
2.MAIN CPU APPL
3.MAIN CPU FT
4.SUB CPU IPL (11) Check "OK".
5.SUB CPU APPL
VER>DTL>LDSFT>0
VER>DETAIL> Press any key to continue ... (12) Press the ENT key.
FR6H4D32.EPS
(13) Click "EXIT".
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 264 MC - 265
13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL

Software
The version update of the PC-MUTL software can be implemented by uninstalling the
current version of the software and then installing a newer version.
The current version can be uninstalled by use of a newer version of the Ver.up CD-R.
13.4.1 Uninstallation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software

(1) Set the Ver.up CD-R in the CL and uninstall the software as instructed on the CL
screen.
#3
[Click]
Remove
#1
[Click]
UNINSTALL
#4
[Click]
Finish FR6H4979.EPS
(2) Install the PC-MUTL software of a new version.

“13.4.2 Installation procedures of PC-MUTL software”
#2
[Click]
Next FR6H4978.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 266 MC - 267
13.4.2 Installation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software

(1) Install the software as instructed on the CL screen.
#1
[Click]
INSTALL
#4
[Click]
Finish
#2
#5
[Click]
Next [Click]
EXIT
FR6H4981.EPS
#3
[Click]
Install
FR6H4980.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 268 MC - 269
(4) Set the IP address of the RU to its default.
14. Restore Procedure of FLASH ROM Application
#1 [Set] RU IP ADDR Ò172.16.1.10Ó
Software
Update the RU application through the network.
Use this function when the RU application on the FLASH ROM is corrupted and the RU
cannot boot.
CAUTIONS
• Do not power OFF the RU and CL during RU application update. If power is turned OFF
during update, the machine will no longer boot up.
• When the M-Utility can be started (can be logged in), the procedures described in this
section should not be performed.
If the procedures are inadvertently performed under condition where the M-Utility can be
started, the CPU12A board should be replaced with a new one.
• Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below, connected FR6H4D75.EPS
over the same network.
(5) Insert the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
“Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name” (6) [Struggle] → [Rescue APPL via Network (Soft Update)]
Unless such a machine is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that
machine will be automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
REFERENCE FR6H4D28.EPS
Execution of “soft update” writes the application software and configuration data of the
default value into the FLASH ROM. (7) After verifying that the RU where soft update is to be performed has been booted, click
on the [EXECUTE] button.
■ Procedures
(1) Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below,
connected over the same network. FR6H4D74.EPS
• Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name. The update of the RU application starts.
• Machine that uses the IP address by its default (172.16.1.10). (8) Make sure that "Write OK" appears.
➮ If such a machine is connected, isolate it from the network by powering it OFF or
“15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL” Wait approx. 30 seconds

[Check]
FR6H3339.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 270 MC - 271
(9) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold #1 [Input/ENT]
down the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks.
#2 [Input/ENT]
#3 [Input/ENT]
FUJI FUJI FILM
[Press] Erasure
process switch
Blink #4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H4D77.EPS
(10) Set the IP address of the RU to its default, and click on the [PING] button.
Referring to the DOS prompt window displayed, make sure that the result is 100% #5 [Input/ENT]
successful.
(10) #1 Enter the default IP address
(172.16.1.10)
#6 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#7 [Input/ENT]
• • •
(11) Click (10) #2 Click #8 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#9 [Input/ENT]
• • •
#10 [Input/ENT]
• • •
FR6H4D76.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
In an N-to-N connection setup, if the RU software is to be updated, be sure to execute
“PING”, before version update, to ensure that the RU has been connected. If the RU has
not been connected, the RU software cannot be updated. #11 [Check] User setting value
FR6H4D09.EPS
the user settings that have been noted before the procedure.
REFERENCE
(Example) When the user settings are as shown below: Input nothing and press [Enter] key if the NETMASK, ROUTE, SEC.ADDR and SET.NET
values are not to be changed.
RUNAME : ru2
RU IP ADDR :172.16.1.12
CL IP ADDR :172.16.1.22 ◆ NOTE ◆
FTP-SERV. :172.16.1.22 Input the IP addresses of the FTP-SERV and INFO-HOST same as the IP addresses
input in the CL IP ADDR.
INFO-HOST :172.16.1.22
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 272 MC - 273
(13) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU and then back ON. (16) Restore the HISTORY LOG and SCN ALL DATA which have been backed up.
◆ NOTE ◆ “21.2 RESTORE Procedures”
By turning ON/OFF the RU power switch, the user settings come into effect. (17) Start the CL application.
(14) Set the IP address of the CL to the user setup value. • No unevenness is present.
“15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC” • No error occurs.
(15) Start “EDIT CONFIGURATION”, set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF”, and click the [SET] “19. Checking the Image/Conveyance”
button.
RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY window
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 12 ru2 172.16.1.12 #1
MUTL PING
[Slect/click]
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION #2

BACKUP (RU→HD→FD) RESTORE (FD→HD→RU) [Slect/click]
EXECUTE EXECUTE
ALL RUs SETTING

OFF
FR6H4F17.EPS
Start write of
Config data
Wait 2 minutes RU panel RU alarm
Blinks Rings (once)

5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks Rings (once)
Wait 30 seconds
PC-MUTL screen
is displayed
TR6H4D56+.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 274 MC - 275
(3) Click the host name of the RU for specifying a config file from the “LIST OF EXISTING
15. Change of IP Address of CL and RU RU”.
RU host name
15.1 Procedures of Changing the IP Address of the CL and RU
to a User-Specified Value
Examples of changing the IP address as shown below are described.
IP address of RU: 172.16.1.10 → 172.16.1.12
IP address of CL: 172.16.1.20 → 172.16.1.22
15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU FR6H4F04.EPS
➮ Characters of “EDIT CONFIGURATION” turns from gray to black.

(1) Terminate the CL application program.
(2) Boot the PC-MUTL in the following procedure. (4) Click .
◆ NOTE ◆
➮ The “READER UNIT SETTING” screen appears.
Make sure that an application program such as Explorer is not running. If running,
(5) Make the following settings.
terminate the program.
III. Specify a file.
I
II
III
IV
IV. Click
II. Click
FR6H4F05.EPS
I. Click FR6H4F03.EPS I. Input the IP address of the RU after change. (Example: 172.15.1.12)
II. Input the IP address of the CL after change. (Example: 172.15.1.22)
➮ The RU M-Utility main menu appears.
III. Input the IP address of the FTP server (same as that of the CL).
(Example: 172.15.1.22)
IV. Input the net mask.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 276 MC - 277
15.1.2 Changing the IP Address Using Service Utility of CL

(6) Click .
(1) Select [Programs] → [Fuji Film] → [FCR] from the [Start] menu.
➮ Installation of the RU-Config starts.
➮ The CL-AP boots up.
(7) Click if the following screen appears. (2) Click the upper left and the upper right in order on the screen within 5 seconds since
the initial screen appears.
FR6H6086.EPS
REFERENCES FR6H4F09.EPS
• Clicking the [BACK] button brings back to step (5). Again repeat from step (5). ➮ Service Utility boots up and the “IIP Service Utility” screen appears.
• The above screen appears if the CL IP ADDR and FTP-SERV IP ADDR values are
changed in the EDIT CONFIGURATION screen. If the CL IP ADDR and FTP-SERV IP REFERENCE
ADDR values are not changed, the above screen is not displayed. Proceed to step (8). If the operation in procedure (2) cannot be done within 5 seconds in the initial screen and
the AP has booted, take the following procedures to start the Service Utility.
(8) Make sure that the RU panel lights four times and an alarm sounds.
1. To terminate the AP, click [System exit] in (or ) menu while
The screen returns to the PC-MUTL screen approx. 1 minute later.
pressing the <SHIFT> key. Click in the exit window while pressing the
CAUTION <SHIFT> key.
The RU panel lights up during the installation of the RU-Config. Never turn off the power 2. Select [Programs] → [Fuji Film] → [FCR] from the [Start] menu.
of the RU or press the reset switch. Otherwise, the CPU board of the RU may be 3. Click the upper left and the upper right in order on the screen within 5 seconds since
damaged. the initial screen appears.
(3) Click [Setup Configuration Item].
FR6H4F10.EPS
➮ The “Setup Configuration Item” screen appears.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 278 MC - 279
(4) Click in . 15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC

(5) Click in and then select .
If a plurality of CLs are connected in the same network, the IP address of the CL need to be
➮ The “Host Name” screen appears on the right-hand side. changed to another IP address from the factory default value (172.16.1.20). Follow the
(6) Input the IP address of the RU after change (example: 172.16.1.12) in procedures below if a subnet mask is to be changed from the factory default value
(255.255.0.0) to another subnet mask.
. (1) Select the [Setting] from [Start] menu.
(7) Click . (2) Double-click .
(8) Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu.

➮ The screen for confirming the save appears.
(9) Click .
(3) Double-click .
➮ The specified contents are stored.
(10) Select “Close” from the “Config (F)” menu. ➮ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens.
➮ The display returns to the “IIP Service Utility” screen.
(11) Click [Exit Service Utility].
➮ The display returns to the desk top screen. (4) Double-click .

REFERENCE
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the display if
your PC is not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable.
(5) Click .
(6) Choose and then click .

(7) Select .
(8) Make the following settings.
I
172 16 1 22
II FR6H4F11.EPS
I. Input the IP address of the CL after change (example: 172.15.1.22).

II. Input the subnet mask.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 280 MC - 281
(9) Click . 15.2 Initializing and Setting the IP Address of CL/RU

➮ You are returned to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
To set the IP addresses of the CL and RU, first initialize their IP addresses before changing
(10) Click . the user settings of the RU and CL in the order named.
CAUTIONS
(11) Click . Make sure that devices that are set as shown below are not connected over the same
◆ NOTE ◆ network:
When the screen for prompting reboot, click [Yes]. The CL-AP automatically starts up “Device where ‘ru0’ is used as the RU host name”
after the OS boots up. “Device where the IP address is used by its default setting”
(12) Reboot the CL terminal. If any such device as described above is connected over the same network, disconnect that
device from the same network by powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable.
◆ NOTE ◆ Unless such a device is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that device
The user settings do not come into effect unless the CL terminal is rebooted. will be automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
(13) The CL application automatically starts up. Click the upper left and the upper right in
order on the screen within 5 seconds since the initial screen appears. 15.2.1 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the RU
(1) Make sure that devices that are set as shown below are not connected over the same
5network:
• Device where ‘ru0’ is used as the RU host name
• Device where the IP address is used by its default setting
➮ If any such device is connected over the same network, disconnect that device from
the same network by powering it OFF or unplugging its I/F cable.
FR6H4F09.EPS
(3) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold
➮ Service Utility boots up and ìIIP Service Utilityî screen is displayed. down the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks (once).
REFERENCE FUJI FUJI FILM
If the operation in the procedure (13) cannot be done within 5 seconds on the initial
screen and the AP boots up, follow the procedures below to display the desk top screen.
To terminate the AP, click [System exit] in (or ) menu while

[Press] Erasure
pressing the <SHIFT> key. Click in the exit window while pressing the Blink process switch FR6H2542.EPS
<SHIFT> key. (4) Make sure that the IP address of the RU is at its default, and then start the M-Utility.
If it is not at its default, enter the default value, and then start the M-Utility.
#1 [Check] RU IP ADDR
#2 [Click]
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 282 MC - 283
15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL (9) Click .

REFERENCE
(10) Reboot the CL terminal.
To switch the CL screen to the desktop screen, hold down the <SHIFT> key and select
“Shut Down” from the “FUJI FILM” menu. ◆ NOTE ◆
The <SHIFT> key need be kept pressed until the CL software program is terminated. The user settings do not come into effect unless the CL terminal is rebooted.
(1) Select the [Setting] from [Start] menu. order on the screen within 5 seconds since the initial screen appears.

(2) Double-click .
(3) Double-click .
➮ The “Network and Dial-up connection” window opens. FR6H4F09.EPS
➮ Service Utility boots up and [IIP Service Utility] screen is displayed.

(4) Double-click .
REFERENCE
If the operation in the procedure (11) cannot be done within 5 seconds on the initial
REFERENCE screen and the AP boots up, follow the procedures below to display the desk top screen.
On Windows 2000, the “Local Area Connection” icon may not appear on the display if
your PC is not connected to other equipment (RU) with a network cable. To terminate the AP, click [System exit] in (or ) menu while
(5) Click .
<SHIFT> key.
(6) Choose and then click .

(7) Perform the following setup steps:
FR6H2548.EPS
(8) Click .
➮ You are returned to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 284 MC - 285
(6) Enter the reading start position (e.g.,“10 ”) calculated at step (3).
16. Format Adjustment
◆ NOTES ◆
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ • After entering the reading start position, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If the RU
is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained.
Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment. • Values of -70 to 70 can only be input to “INPUT MAIN SCAN LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
VALUE”.
16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment

REFERENCE
(1) Expose IPs of 14 ” x 14 ” (35cm x 35cm) or 14 ” x 17 ” (35cm x 43cm) size with the The white blank portion of the output image expands when a negative quantity (-) value is
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. entered, while it narrows when a positive quantity (+) value is entered.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
>5 (5. SCANNER UTILLTY)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
(2) Start the CL application program. Read one of IPs prepared in step (1) using “TEST”, #1 [Input/ENT]
“SENSITIVITY” and “SINGLE” in the menu, and output the image.
“19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance”
FR6H3G06.EPS
b
>SCN>8 (8. FORMAT)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
Direction #2 [Input/ENT]
of IP
conveyance
b
x10 = Adjustment value
Reduction FR6H3G07.EPS
factor (PIXEL)
>SCN>FMT>3 (3. PIXEL ADJUST)
FR6H3G01.EPS Telnet 172.16.1.10
---Example ---
If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) size is #3 [Input/ENT]
outputted to a 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(1/1 x 10)=10 (PIXEL) FR6H3G11.EPS
Thus, “Input range” is +10. Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT MAIN SCAN LENGTH ADJUSTMENT VALUE.

INPUT (-70 - +70): 10
#4 [Input/ENT]
(5) Start the CL application program.
FR6H3G12.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
#5 [Check/ENT]
FR6H3G10.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 286 MC - 287
REFERENCE 16.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment

The commands input in #3 are as follows:
2. FREQ ADJUST: Main scan length adjustment ◆ NOTE ◆
3. PIXEL ADJUST: Main scan position adjustment
4. OPTIC FORMAT: Optical system replacement To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other thin
article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the actual size
Correction data need be backed up after the adjustment of “2. FREQ ADJUST: Main
scan length adjustment” and “3. PIXEL ADJUST: Main scan position adjustment”. so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted.
(1) Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17”
(7) Click to terminate the M-Utility.
(35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
(8) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step
(1), and generate an image output. ◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
“19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance” At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
(9) Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
(2) Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format -2”, and “SINGLE”, read one
◆ NOTE ◆ of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output.
If anything abnormal is found with the image; “19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance”
“Troubleshooting”
(3) Measure a misalignment of the reading width.
Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank
(10) Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.
portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown
“18. Backing Up the Scanner Data” below.
◆ NOTE ◆
Always save the backup of the adjusted data in a floppy disk. If the machine power is
Actual size of a
turned OFF without saving the backup data in the floppy disk, the correction results are –
steel rule Reduction factor
lost.
Actual size of steel rule
Direction
of IP a x100=Adjustment value (%)
conveyance
Measure “a” on the output film. FR6H3G03.EPS
---Example ---
If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm)
size is outputted to a 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
(175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%)
Thus, “Input range” is + 2.8.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 288 MC - 289
(5) Start the CL application. REFERENCE
(6) Enter the main scan length (e.g., “2.80”) calculated at step (3). The commands input in #3 are as follows:
◆ NOTES ◆ 2. FREQ ADJUST: Main scan length adjustment
3. PIXEL ADJUST: Main scan position adjustment
• After entering the main scan length, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If the RU is 4. OPTIC FORMAT: Optical system replacement
powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained. Correction data need be backed up after the adjustment of “2. FREQ ADJUST: Main
• “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -5 to 5. scan length adjustment” and “3. PIXEL ADJUST: Main scan position adjustment”.
REFERENCE (7) Click to terminate the M-Utility.

The output image reduces in size by inputting a negative (-) value and enlarged by (8) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step
inputting a positive (+) value. (1), and generate an image output.
Telnet 172.16.1.10
(9) Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank
portion, and verify that there is no misalignment.
#1 [Input/ENT] (10) Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette.

“18. Backing Up the Scanner Data”
◆ NOTE ◆
FR6H3G06.EPS Always save the backup of the adjusted data in a floppy disk. If the machine power is
turned OFF without saving the backup data in the floppy disk, the correction results are
lost.
>SCN>8 (8. FORMAT)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
#2 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G07.EPS
>SCN>FMT>2 (2. FREQ ADJUST)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
#3 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G08.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT MAIN SCAN LENGTH ADJUSTMENT VALUE.

INPUT(-5.00 - +5.00): 2.80
#4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G09.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
#5 [Check/ENT]
FR6H3G10.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 290 MC - 291
16.3 Optic Setting (4) Input the value of “100frq0 (main scan length)” recorded in step (1).

Telnet 172.16.1.10
◆ NOTE ◆
Only when the machine-specific data bundled with the machine is not available and you want to
reset the machine to its factory default state, the following procedures should be performed. #1 [Input/ENT]
(1) Check the value written on the top of the scanning optics unit, and write it down on
your notepad. FR6H3G06.EPS
>SCN>8 (8. FORMAT)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
pix0 :173 #1
100frq0 :-1.5 [Check]
#2 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G07.EPS
>SCN>FMT>4 (4. OPTIC FORMAT)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
FR9H3G05.EPS

“1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume #3 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G13.EPS
>SCN>FMT>OPT>1 (1. OPTICAL FREQ)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
#4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G14.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT OPTICAL SCAN LENGTH ADJUSTMENT VALUE.

INPUT(-5.00 - +5.00): -1.5
#5 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G15.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
#6 [Check/ENT]
FR6H3G19.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 292 MC - 293
(5) Input the value of “pix0 (main scan position)” recorded in step (1). BLANK PAGE
>SCN>FMT>4 (4. OPTIC FORMAT)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
#1 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G16.EPS
>SCN>FMT>OPT>2 (2. OPTICAL PIXEL)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
#2 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G17.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT OPTICAL PIXELS ADJUSTMENT VALUE.

INPUT(+100 - +200): 173
#3 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3G18.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
#4 [Check/ENT]
FR6H3G20.EPS

(7) Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17”
(35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
(8) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step
(5), and generate an image output.
(9) Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
If there is any white blank portion on the image or if the image is cut off, perform the
procedures described in “16.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment.”
(10) Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and white blank portion, and
make sure that there is no misalignment.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
If there is any image misalignment,perform the procedures described in “16.2
Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment.”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 294 MC - 295
(5) Make preparations for correction.
17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
◆ NOTES ◆ Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step (1) into the field of shading/
sensitivity correction.
• Format adjustment should be done before shading/sensitivity correction. If there is any white
blank portion on the exposed image, error is likely to occur.
• Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be used for adjustment. If IPs of a REFERENCE
smaller size are employed, unusual nonuniformity is likely to occur. If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is "0.92".
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is "1.11".
REFERENCE
Telnet 172.16.1.10
Reference conditions for exposure

X-ray tube: Tungsten
Distance: 1.8m
Voltage: 80Kv #1 [Input/ENT]
Amperage: 50mA
Time: 0.013 sec
FR6H3H02.EPS
>SCN>9 (9. SHADING / SENSITIVITY)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction

◆ NOTES ◆ #2 [Input/ENT]
Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate correction for
sensitivity could not be achieved.
FR6H3H03.EPS
>SCN>SS>2 (2. CALCULATION)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
• The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
• The correction procedures, from exposure to reading,should be done within 10 to 11 minutes.
#3 [Input/ENT]
(1) Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose, and write it down on your
notepad.
(2) Expose an IP of 14"x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR. FR6H3H04.EPS

>SCN>SS>CAL>1 (1. SHADING,POLYGON AND
Telnet 172.16.1.10
SENSITIVITY)
#4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H05.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT DOSAGE VALUE.

INPUT(0.50 - 9.99): 0.92
#5 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H08.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 296 MC - 297
REFERENCE 17.2 Shading Correction

If the task is to be interrupted during execution, enter [Ctrl]+[C] and press the [Enter] key
while “COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS, INTERUUPTION: HIT [^C] + ENT KEY” is (1) Expose an IP of 14"x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14" x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size with the
displayed on the command prompt screen. The task will be interrupted. tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
(6) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE” read the IP provided at step (2) “1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
within 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure, and generate an image output.
"19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance"
(4) Make preparations for correction.
(7) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.

Telnet 172.16.1.10
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
[Check/ENT] #1 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H01.EPS

FR6H3H02.EPS
notepad.
>SCN>9 (9. SHADING / SENSITIVITY)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
(10) Expose an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17” (35cm x 43cm) size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
#2 [Input/ENT]
(11) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE”, read the IP provided at step (10)
Verify the S value and check for unusual nonuniformity.
FR6H3H03.EPS
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
Telnet 172.16.1.10
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.

#3 [Input/ENT]
“18. Backing Up the Scanner Data” FR6H3H04.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
>SCN>SS>CAL>2 (2. SHADING AND POLYGON)
Telnet 172.16.1.10
lost. #4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H06.EPS
REFERENCE
If the task is to be interrupted during execution, enter [Ctrl]+[C] and press the [Enter] key
while “COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS, INTERUUPTION: HIT [^C] + ENT KEY” is
displayed on the command prompt screen. The task will be interrupted.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 298 MC - 299
(5) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE” read the IP provided at step (1) 17.3 Sensitivity Correction
"19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance" ◆ NOTE ◆
(6) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Unless the IP is read within 10 to 11 minutes after X-ray exposure, appropriate correction for
Telnet 172.16.1.10
sensitivity could not be achieved.
>RESULT: OK
[Check/ENT]
• The calibrated X-ray dosimeter should be used to measure the X-ray dose.
FR6H3H01.EPS
• The correction procedures, from exposure to reading, should be done within 10 to 11 minutes.
notepad.
(2) Expose an IP of 14"x 14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x 17" (35cm x 43cm) size with the
Check for unusual nonuniformity.
◆ NOTE ◆
lost.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 300 MC - 301
(5) Make preparations for correction. (6) Using menus “TEST”, “Sensitivity”, and “SINGLE” read the IP provided at step (2)
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of sensitivity
adjustment. (7) Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>RESULT: OK
REFERENCE
If the measure value of the X-ray dose is 0.92 mR: The value to be entered is “0.92”.
If the measured value of the X-ray dose is 1.11 mR: The value to be entered is “1.11”. [Check/ENT]
FR6H3H01.EPS

Telnet 172.16.1.10

#1 [Input/ENT] notepad.
FR6H3H02.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
>SCN>9 (9. SHADING / SENSITIVITY) Verify the S value and check for unusual nonuniformity.
REFERENCE
#2 [Input/ENT] For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
FR6H3H03.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10

#3 [Input/ENT] ◆ NOTE ◆
lost.
FR6H3H09.EPS
>SCN>SS>CAL>4 (4. SENSITIVITY ONRY)

Telnet 172.16.1.10
#4 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H07.EPS
Telnet 172.16.1.10
INPUT DOSAGE VALUE.

INPUT(0.50 - 9.99): 0.92
#5 [Input/ENT]
FR6H3H10.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 302 MC - 303
(4) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its data backup, and back up the
18. Backing Up the Scanner Data “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA” data.
(1) Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
LIST OF EXISTING RU
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
#1 ru0 172.16.1.11
Press [Select]
Configuration(C)
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
LIST OF EXISTING RU
(2) Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows, and type
RU NAME
RU IP ADDR
[“C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe”] and display the MAINTENANCE

BACKUP RESTORE
UTILITY window.
ALL RUs SETTING
Windows Update
Programs BACKUP
Favorites #2 [Select] CONFIGURATION
Documents EXECUTE #3 [Click]
Settings
Search
Help
#1 BACKUP
Run...
[Click] #4 [Select] SCN ALL DATA
Log Off Administrator... EXECUTE #5 [Click] FR6H3J05.EPS
Shut Down...
REFERENCE
For details on the backup procedure, see under “21.BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” in
the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
“21. BACKUP/RESTORE procedures”
Run ?
(5) Remove the floppy diskette from the FD drive of the CL.
Type the name of a program, folder, document, or Internet
resource, and Windows will open it for you.
"C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type]

Open:

FR6H3J04.EPS
(3) Put a new floppy diskette into the FD drive of the CL.
◆ NOTE ◆
Never write any data into the machine-specific data FD bundled with the machine.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 304 MC - 305
19. Checking the Image/Conveyance 19.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
The following checks are made in this section. ◆ NOTES ◆

• Conveyance checks • The film to be output is used in checking nonuniformity, sensitivity and format.
• Cancel the trimming function.
• Image checks “FR: Function-specific Reference, Print Output Functuin, 2. Setup Necessary When
Editing the Film Annotation Character Format” in the “CR-IR346CL Service Manual”
19.1 Check Before Procedures
(1) On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add Exposure Menu]
◆ NOTES ◆ button.
• Use IPs of all sizes used in the hospital for checking the image/conveyance. #1
Note, however, that the IP type to be used should be the VI type. [Click]
• Make sure that no important data has been exposed on the IP to be used.
(1) Erase the natural radiation and image accumulated on the IP to be used.
“RU Instruction Manual/2.4 When Only Image Erasure is to be Performed
FRE6H3J06.EPS
(Primary Erasure)”
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions. (2) Select [Sensitivity] from [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK ] button.
• X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
#1
• Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
[Select]
• Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size
• Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kV
Amperage 50 mA #2
Time 0.013 sec [Select]
Sensitivity
#3
[Click]
FR6H3J07.EPS
(3) Click on [Start Study].
#1
[Click]
Start Study
FR6H3J08.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 306 MC - 307
(4) Click on [SINGLE]. (9) Check that there is no unusual nonuniformity on the output film and the image on the
image monitor.
#1
[Click] ◆ CHECK ◆
There is no unusual nonuniformity.
If anything abnormal is found;
“Troubleshooting" volume
FR6H3J10.EPS (10) Check the image format.

(5) Click on [IP#]. Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the output film.
#1
[Click]
◆ CHECK ◆
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less.
FR6H3J09.EPS
Measure
Image frame
(6) Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.
#1
[Input]
White blank
portion
FR6H3J11.EPS
(7) Press the [ENTER] key. FR6H6018.EPS
The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.

◆ CHECK ◆
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending on
the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using the
distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the actual
size on the IP according to the following equation.
Actual size on IP = Measured value x
100
Reduction factor (%)
FR6H3L05.EPS
FR6H3J12.EPS
(8) Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
FR9H3J13.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 308 MC - 309
20. Installing Procedures of RU Software
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL. (5) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold
down the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks.
order on the screen within 5 seconds since the initial screen appears.
Click the upper left, and then upper right. FUJI FUJI FILM
[Press] Erasure
process switch
Blink
FR6H4D77.EPS
FR6H4F09.EPS
“15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL”
➮ Service Utility boots up and [IIP Service Utility] screen is displayed.
Click the [Exit Service Utility] button to return to the desk top screen. CAUTIONS
If two or more RUs are connected with one CL, all of the connected RU software versions
REFERENCE should be the same. If RU software programs of different versions are installed, the
operation of the CL and RU is not guaranteed.
If the operation in the procedure (2) cannot be done within 5 seconds on the initial screen
and the AP boots up, follow the procedures below to display the desk top screen.
(7) Click the [NEW] button.
To terminate the AP, click [System exit] in (or ) menu while “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR” are cleared.
(8) Input the name of the RU to be installed in “RU NAME” of the PC-MUTL.
(9) Input the default value (172.16.1.10) of the IP address of the RU in “RU IP ADDR” of
<SHIFT> key. the PC-MUTL.
(3) Set the Ver.up CD-R in the CL. Install the PC-MUTL software according to the (7) [Click]
instructions on the CL screen.
“13.4.2 Installation Procedures of PC-MUTL Software”
◆ NOTE ◆ (8) [Input]
• If the PC-MUTL software has been installed into the CL, proceed to procedure (4) (9) [Input]
instead of procedure (3).
• Update the PC-MUTL version to 1.4 or later if the version is 1.3 or earlier, before taking FR6H3160.EPS

(10) Click the [PING] button.
normally.
“13.4 Procedures for Updating the Version of the PC-MUTL Software” Check that the procedures are 100% successfully done on the command prompt
screen which is displayed.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 310 MC - 311
(11) Click the [INSTALL] button. (14) Set “AUTO UPDATE” to “OFF” and click the [SET] button.
OFF
FR6H3162.EPS
The dialogue requesting the insertion of a CD-ROM is displayed. FR6H4D20.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆ ➮ The installation of the RU software starts.
Proceed to procedure (14) if the EDIT CONGIFUGRATION screen appears instead of the The RU and CL operate as follows.
dialogue requesting the insertion of the CD-ROM.
Installation
starts
(12) Insert the Ver.up CD-ROM in the CL and click the [OK] button.
RU panel RU alarm
Wait 1 minutes
Blinks Rings
30 seconds
FR6H3117.EPS (30 seconds) (30 seconds)
Wait 2 minutes
The dialogue for confirming the version of the software to be installed appears.
(13) Select the version of the software and click the [OK] button. Blinks. Rings (once)
5 seconds
Blinks. Rings (once)
5 seconds
5 seconds
Wait 30 seconds
FR6H3118.EPS
The EDIT CONFIGURATION screen appears. END TR6H4D59.EPS
CAUTION
Do not turn OFF the power of the RU during the installation. If turned OFF, the contents
of the FLASH ROM of the RU are corrupted and the RU will not boot.
REFERENCE
The default setting of “AUTO UPDATE” differs depending on the version of the RU
software.
(15) Click the [OK] button.
FR6H4D67.EPS
The display returns to the PC-MUTL screen, and the RU which has been installed is
displayed in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 312 MC - 313
(16) Select the RU to be confirmed from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click the [VER] (19) When a plurality of RUs are connected with the CL, repeat steps (5) to (18) for the
button. second and subsequent RUs.
◆ NOTE ◆
ru1 172.16.1.10 #1 [Select] Keep the IP address of the CL to be the default value (172.16.1.20) until the procedures
(5) to (18) are completed for all of the RUs connected with the CL.
Otherwise, the RU software cannot be installed normally.
#2 [Click]
REFERENCE
When only one RU is connected with the CL, proceed to step (21).
FR6H4D27.EPS
(17) The command prompt is displayed. Make sure that the installed version is displayed. (20) Exit the PC-MUTL.
(21) Change the IP address of the CL to a user-specified value.
“15.1.3 Changing the IP Address of CL-PC”
(22) Change the IP address of the CL application program to a user-specified value.
“15.1.2 Changing the IP Address Using Service Utility of CL”
◆ NOTE ◆
The settings do not come into effect unless the CL terminal is rebooted.
(23) Check the RU/CL software setting.

“Appendix 3. Checking RU/CL Software Setting” in the “Installation” volume
(25) Check image/conveyance.
“19. Image/Conveyance Checks”
RU software version
(26) Check the PC-MUTL version.
“Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL version”
◆ NOTE ◆
If the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier is used under multi-unit-connected environments,
the RU message file displayed on the CL might not appear normally. Follow the
procedures in “Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version” without fail.
FR6H3124.EPS
(18) Change the IP address of the RU to a user-specified value.

“15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 314 MC - 315
(5) From the BACKUP pull-down menu, select an item to be backed up.
21. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedures
Click .
This section describes the procedures for backing up and restoring the CONFIGURATION
information and error log data.
21.1 BACKUP Procedures

The following seven items of data can be backed up:
FR6H3205.EPS
• ERROR LOG (6) Click on the [EXECUTE] button.
• CONFIGURATION A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert a formatted floppy diskette.
• TRACE LOG (7) Put a formatted floppy diskette into the CL, and click on the [SAVE] or [OK] button.
• HISTORY LOG
• SCN ALL DATA
• SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA or
• SCN OPTICAL DATA
FR6H3206.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆ The backup starts, and when it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
When “SCN ALL DATA”, “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”, or “SCN OPTICAL DATA” is (8) Click on the [OK] button, and take out the floppy diskette.
backed up, the flash ROM of the RU is accessed, so that the RU should not be powered
OFF during that time.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that
the RU will no longer boot up.
FR6H3207.EPS

(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be backed up.
ru1 172.16.1.1
FR6H3327.EPS
(4) Click on the [FTP] button.

On the DOS prompt window displayed, check “RU NAME”, “HISTORY.LOG”, and
“RESULT: OK”.
REFERENCE
Refer to the Maintenance and Utility volume for the details of checking the RU’s FTP
server.
“2.1.4 FTP: Checking the FTP Server of the RU” in the “Maintenance Utility” volume
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MC - 316 MC - 317
21.2 RESTORE Procedures (5) Click on the [EXECUTE] button.
The following seven items of data can be restore:

• ERROR LOG
• CONFIGURATION
• TRACE LOG
• HISTORY LOG
• SCN ALL DATA
• SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA FR6H3332.EPS
• SCN OPTICAL DATA A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the floppy diskette that contains the data
to be resorted.
◆ NOTE ◆ (6) Put into the CL the floppy diskette used for backup, and click on the [OK] button.
When “SCN ALL DATA”, “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”, or “SCN OPTICAL DATA” is The restore starts, and when it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
restored, the flash ROM of the RU is accessed, so that the RU should not be powered OFF
during that time. (7) Click on the [OK] button, and take out the floppy diskette.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that the
RU will no longer boot up.
(1) Exit the CL application. FR6H3333.EPS

(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be restored.
ru1 172.16.1.1
FR6H3327.EPS
(4) From the RESTORE pull-down menu, select an item to be restored.

Click .
FR6H3L01.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MC 1 - 1 Appx MC 1 - 2
Appendix 1 Replacement of CPU12A Board (For [6] Install the Application Software Procedure for Installing
PC-MUTL Versions 1.1 or Earlier) PC-MUTL Version 1.1 or Earlier
(RU Software Version A06 or Earlier)
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
If the RU software version is A02 or earlier, update the version to A03 or later before replacing CAUTION
the CPU12A board. Do not power OFF the RU while the software is being installed.
“Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version Update (For PC-MUTL Software If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that the
Versions 1.1 or Earlier)” RU will no longer boot up.
The replacement procedures [1] to [5] and [7] to [9] are the same as those in this manual. ◆ NOTES ◆
• If the software versions are identical between the flash ROM of the CPU12A board and the
[1] Check the IP Address/NET MASK of the CL and RU FTP of the CL, step (4) for installing the application software is not performed.
• If the contents are identical between the flash ROM of the CPU12A board and the FTP of the
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [1] Check the IP Address/NET MASK of the CL and CL, step (5) for installing the configuration data is not performed.
RU”
(1) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU.
[2] Check the Software Version and Back Up HISTORY LOG/ (2) Start the CL software.
SCN ALL DATA
Click on and then sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [2] Check the Software Version and Back Up
HISTORY LOG/SCN ALL DATA” REFERENCE
If the RU is powered ON before booting up the CL, the “reboot” screen will not appear.
[3] Removing and Reinstalling the CPU12A Board
(3) Turn ON the power switch of the RU.
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [3] Removing and Reinstalling the CPU12A board”
REFERENCE
When the RU is powered OFF and then back ON, the installation of the application
[4] Change the Memory on the CPU12A Board to the User software and configuration data from the CL is initiated.
Settings At this time, all the indicators on the panel of the RU are illuminated, and an audible alarm
is generated.
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [4] Change the Memory on the CPU12A Board to
the User Settings”
[5] Check the Version of the PC-MUTL

FR6H4D04.EPS
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [5] Check the V-ersion of the PC-MUTL”
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MC 1 - 1 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MC 1 - 2
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(4) Verify that the RU call lamp is illuminated, with [11024] displayed on the CL screen, (6) Exit the CL software.
and restart the RU from the CL screen. (7) Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
Press
RU panel CL screen
(CALL lamp)
ID (8) Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows, and type
[“C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe”] to open the MAINTENANCE
#1 [Check] UTILITY, and start M-Utility.
Windows Update
Programs (P)
Favorites (A)
Documents (D)
Settings (S)
Search (C)
Help (H)
Run...
#1
[Click]
Log Off Administrator (L)...
[11024] [11024] RU: APPLICATION SOFTWARE UPDATE. Reboot the RU. #1 [Check]
Shut Down (U)...
REBOOT #2 [Click]
FR6H4973.EPS
(5) Verify that the RU call lamp is illuminated, with [11025] displayed on the CL screen,
and restart the RU from the CL screen.
When it is restarted, all the indicators on the panel are illuminated, and an audible Run ?
alarm is generated.
Type the name of a program, folder, document, or
Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you.
RU panel CL screen
(CALL lamp) Open: "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type]
ID
#1 [Check] #3 [Click] OK Cancel Browse...
FR6H4982.EPS
[11025] [11025] RU: CONFIGURATION UPDATE. Reboot the RU. #1 [Check]

Alarm stop REBOOT #2 [Click]
FR6H4D23.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(9) Select VERSION to confirm the version of the CR-IR346RU application software.
Example: When the version is updated to A03 or A04 screen.
RU MAINTENANCE screen
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST 0. QUIT
NEW 1. LOG
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 #4 [Select/Click] 2. VERSION
#5 [Click] MUTL PING
3. TEST
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
EXECUTE EXECUTE 8. BACKUP MEMORY
ALL RUs SETTING

9. HV OFF
> 2 #2 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY VERSION
2. DETAIL
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe VER > 1 #3 [Type/ENT]
_
[Ru0] login : cr ir346 #6 [Type/ENT]
Password : #7 [Type/ENT] CR-IR346RU Application Software : 114Y5436002A 04 #4 [Confirm]
_
[cr ir346]
Version of CR-IR346RU
#8 [Type/ENT] -> mutl Software Resouce Version
application
MAIN CPU IPL : Z45N5436001A01
0. QUIT MAIN CPU APPL : Z45N5436002A03
1. LOG SUB CPU IPL : Z45N5436103A01
2. VERSION SUB CPU APPL : Z45N5436103B02
3. TEST SUB CPU APPL : Z45N5436202A00
4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY Hardware Type<VER_REC>
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY CPU12A : 00 [02.00]
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY SNS12A : 00 [00]
8. BACKUP MEMORY DRV12A : 00
9. HV OFF SCN12A : 00 [00]
FR6H4984.EPS
>
FR6H4983.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(10) Select “BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE” and initialize the backup memory. (11) Select “LOG” and initialize the error log.
For software version of A05 or later C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
0. QUIT
0. QUIT 1. LOG
1. LOG 2. VERSION
2. VERSION 3. TEST
3. TEST 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5. SCANNER UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY 8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 9. HV OFF
9. HV OFF > 1 #1 [Type/ENT]
> 8 #1 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
ARE YOU SURE ? 1. ERROR LOG
1.YES 2.NO ( DEFAULT=2 ) : 1 #2 [Type/ENT] 2. TRACE LOGS
RESULT : OK LOG > 1 #2 [Type/ENT]
For software version of A04 or earlier

0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY
0. QUIT
2. SAVE TO FTP-SERV
1. LOG
3. CLEAR
2. VERSION
LOG > ELG > 3 #3 [Type/ENT]
3. TEST
ARE YOU SURE ?
5. SCANNER UTILITY
1.YES 2.NO ( DEFAULT=2 ) : 1 #4 [Type/ENT]
RESULT : OK
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
FR6H4D68.EPS
8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE

9. HV OFF
> 8 #1 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
1. INITIALIZE
BMEM > 1 #2 [Type/ENT]
ARE YOU SURE ?

RESULT : OK
FR6H4985.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(12) Select “LOG” and initialize the trace log. [7] Restore HISTORY LOG
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [7] Restore HISTORY LOG”
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
[8] Restore SCN ALL DATA
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 2 #1 [Type/ENT] “11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [8] Restore SCN ALL DATA”
0. QUIT [9] Image Checks

1. DISPLAY
“11.2 Replacing the CPU12A Board, [9] Image Checks”
2. SAVE ALL TRACE LOGS TO FTP-SERV
3. CLEAR ALL TRACE LOGS
LOG > TRC > 3 #2 [Type/ENT]
ARE YOU SURE ?

RESULT : OK
FR6H4987.EPS
(13) Click on to exit the PC-MUTL.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
■ Version Update Procedures

Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version
Update (For PC-MUTL Software CAUTIONS
• Do not power OFF the CL/RU during version update. If it is powered OFF during version
Versions 1.1 or Earlier) update, the machine will not boot up.
• Before performing the install procedures, quit all the applications running on the CL.
• If the RU application software is to be updated all at once from any version earlier than A04 to
■ Combination of CR-IR346RU Software Version and Scanning Optics Unit Version version A05 or later, be sure to initialize the backup memory/error log/trace log. If they are not
When updating the version of the CR-IR346RU software, check the version combination initialized, an error may occur during operation of the RU.
table below and replace the scanning optics unit as well.
CR-IR346RU software version Scanning optics unit version
–A02 –839Y0035A/B
(2) Set the Ver.up CD-R in the CL and observe the on-screen instructions of the CL to
perform version update.
A02– 839Y0035C
TR6H4904.EPS CL version update start window
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTL ENTRY
■ Combination of RU Application and MAIN CPU IPL (OS)
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY TOOL
PC application MAIN CPU IPL (OS)

MAINTENANCE UTL
–04 A01
A05– A02 START #1 [Click]
TR6H4D55.EPS
UNINSTALL TOOL INSTALL TOOL
◆ NOTES ◆
BATCH EXECUTION MAINTENANCE UTILITY window
• For combinations other than above, “13802 checksum error” occurs. CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
• If the version of the MAIN CPU IPL (OS) is A01, a connection failure between the RU and CL EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
may occur, so that its version should be updated to A02. RU NAME ru0
EXECUTE LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
EXIT
MUTL PING
BACKUP (RU->HD->FD or HD->FD) RESTORE (FD->HD->RU or FD->HD)

EXECUTE EXECUTE
ALL RUs SETTING
UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP #3 [Click]
CD-ROM confirmation window

CR-IR346 RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY
Insert the CD-ROM into adrive.
CANCEL OK #4 [Click]
FR6H4D02.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(4) Take out the Ver.up CD-R.
Version selection window CAUTION

Do not power OFF the CL/RU during version update.
A04 #5 [Select/Click] If it is powered OFF during version update, the machine will not boot up.
If two or more Reader Units are set up, REFERENCE

be Sure to Select the same software
Versions. When the RU is powered OFF and then back ON, the installation from the CL starts.
At this time, all the indicators on the panel of the RU are illuminated, and an audible alarm
CANCEL OK #6 [Click] is generated.
Version confirmation window FR6H4D04.EPS

Version up/down to [A04] OK?
wait a while.
and restart the RU from the CL screen.
CANCEL OK #7 [Click]
RU panel CL screen
(CALL lamp)
ID
CL version update completed window
Completed. #1 [Check]
OK #8 [Click]
FR6H4D03.EPS
(3) Start the CL software.
[11024] [11024] RU: APPLICATION SOFTWARE UPDATE. Reboot the RU. #1 [Check]
REBOOT #2 [Click]
FR6H4D05.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(6) Verify that the RU call lamp is illuminated, with [11025] displayed on the CL screen, (7) Exit the CL software.
and restart the RU from the CL screen. (8) Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
When it is restarted, all the indicators on the panel are illuminated, and an audible
alarm is generated.
Press
RU panel CL screen [“C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe”] to open the MAINTENANCE
(CALL lamp) UTILITY, and start M-Utility.
ID
Windows Update
#1 [Check] Programs (P)
Favorites (A)
Documents (D)
Settings (S)
Search (C)
Help (H)
Run...
#1
[Click]
Log Off Administrator (L)...
Shut Down (U)...

REBOOT #2 [Click]
Run ?
Type the name of a program, folder, document, or

Install completed Internet resource, and Windows will open it for you.
RU panel CL screen
(Cassette loading lamp) Open: "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type]
ID
FR6H4982.EPS
Illuminated
RU:
RU:
Illuminated FR6H4D06.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(10) Select VERSION to confirm the version of the CR-IR346RU application software.
Example: When the version is updated to A03 or A04
RU MAINTENANCE screen
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST 0. QUIT
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS 1. LOG
#5 [Click] MUTL PING 2. VERSION
3. TEST
5. SCANNER UTILITY
ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
EXECUTE EXECUTE
8. BACKUP MEMORY
ALL RUs SETTING 9. HV OFF
UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP > 2 #2 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY VERSION
2. DETAIL
VER > 1 #3 [Type/ENT]
_
[Ru0] login : cr ir346 #6 [Type/ENT]
Password : #7 [Type/ENT] CR-IR346RU Application Software : 114Y5436002A 04 #4 [Confirm]
_
[cr ir346]
#8 [Type/ENT] -> mutl Version of CR-IR346RU
Software Resouce Version
application
0. QUIT MAIN CPU APPL : Z45N5436002A03
1. LOG SUB CPU IPL : Z45N5436103A01
2. VERSION SUB CPU APPL : Z45N5436103B02
3. TEST SUB CPU APPL : Z45N5436202A00
5. SCANNER UTILITY Hardware Type<VER_REC>
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY CPU12A : 00 [02.00]
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY SNS12A : 00 [00]
8. BACKUP MEMORY DRV12A : 00
9. HV OFF SCN12A : 00 [00]
> FR6H4984.EPS
FR6H4983.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(11) Select “BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE” and initialize the backup memory. (12) Select “LOG” and initialize the error log.
For software version of A05 or later C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe

0. QUIT
0. QUIT
1. LOG
1. LOG
2. VERSION
2. VERSION
3. TEST
3. TEST
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY 5. SCANNER UTILITY

6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY 7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE
9. HV OFF 9. HV OFF
> 8 #1 [Type/ENT] > 1 #1 [Type/ENT]
ARE YOU SURE ?

0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
RESULT : OK
2. TRACE LOGS
For software version of A04 or earlier LOG > 1 #2 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT 0. QUIT
1. LOG
1. DISPLAY
2. VERSION
2. SAVE TO FTP-SERV
3. TEST
3. CLEAR
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY ARE YOU SURE ?
8. BACKUP MEMORY INITIALIZE 1.YES 2.NO ( DEFAULT=2 ) : 1 #4 [Type/ENT]

9. HV OFF RESULT : OK
> 8 #1 [Type/ENT] FR6H4986.EPS
0. QUIT
1. INITIALIZE
BMEM > 1 #2 [Type/ENT]
ARE YOU SURE ?

RESULT : OK
FR6H4985.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(13) Select “LOG” and initialize the trace log. BLANK PAGE
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 2 #1 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY
2. SAVE ALL TRACE LOGS TO FTP-SERV
3. CLEAR ALL TRACE LOGS
LOG > TRC > 3 #2 [Type/ENT]
ARE YOU SURE ?

RESULT : OK
FR6H4987.EPS
(14) Click on to quit the PC-MUTL.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appendix 3 Procedures for Restoring Application (8) Make sure that “Write OK” appears on screen.
Software of FLASH ROM (for PC-MUTL

Software Versions 1.1 or Earlier)
(4) [Type] FR6H3097.EPS
(1) Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below,
connected over the same network. (5) [Type]
• Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name. (6) [Type] cr-ir346
• Machine that uses the IP address by its default (172.16.1.10). (7) [Type]
➮ If such a machine is connected, isolate it from the network by powering it OFF or
disconnecting its I/F cable. (8) [Check] FR6H3098.EPS

(9) Turn OFF and then back ON the power switch of the RU, and, at the same time, hold
“15.2.2 Procedures of Initializing IP Address of the CL down the erasure process switch until the erasure process indicator blinks.
(3) Start “Command Prompt” from the [Start] menu.
FUJI FUJI FILM
[Click]
[Press] Erasure
process switch
Blink
FR6H4D77.EPS

FR6H4D08.EPS (11) Set the IP address of the RU to its default, and click on the [PING] button.
“c:\>” appears on screen. successful.
(4) Type in the IP address of the RU, “telnet 172.16.1.10” (default value). (12) Click on the [MUTL] button.
“Vx works login” appears on screen. (11) #1 Enter the default IP address
“Password:” appears on screen.
“->” appears on screen.
(7) Type in “softupdate”. (12) Click (11) #2 Click
All the panel indicators on the RU are illuminated for about two minutes (with no
audible alarm).
FR6H2567.EPS
REFERENCE
By performing “soft update”, the application software and the configuration data of default
FR6H4D78.EPS
values are written into the flash ROM.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
◆ NOTE ◆ (14) Turn OFF the power switch of the RU and then back ON.
In an N-to-N connection setup, if the RU software is to be updated, be sure to execute ◆ NOTE ◆
“PING”, before version update, to ensure that the RU has been connected. If the RU has
Unless the power switch of the RU is turned OFF and then back ON, the user settings will
not been connected, the RU software cannot be updated.
not become effective.
(15) Set the IP address of the CL to the user setup value.
the user settings that have been noted before the procedure.
“7.3 Procedures for Changing the IP Address of the CL, ■ Changing the CL (IP
(Example) When the user settings are as shown below:
Address/NET MASK) (from Default Setting to User Setting)” in the
RUNAME: ru2 “Troubleshooting” volume
RU IP ADDR: 172.16.1.12 (16) Click on and then sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
CL IP ADDR: 172.16.1.22 ➮ The CL-AP starts up in about one minutes.
FTP-SERV.: 172.16.1.22 A RU boot-up message appears on the monitor of the CL, and after about one minute
INFO-HOST: 172.16.1.22 has passed, the RU becomes ready for operation.
and reboot the RU from the CL screen, and the RU boots up.
When it is rebooted, all the panel indicators are illuminated, with an audible alarm
generated.
RU panel CL screen
(CALL lamp)
ID
#1 [Check]
#1 [Type/ENT]
#3 [Check] Ensure that they have been

#2 [Type/ENT] changed to the default values.

Alarm stop #2 [Click]
REBOOT
FR6H4D29.EPS
#4 [Type] User setup values
FR6H4D09.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
■ Check Flow
Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version
Check along the following flow.
The version of the RU software need be confirmed after the software is installed or version
START
updated.
Confirm the PC-MUTL version, the RU software version, and connection environments
between the CL and RU. Reinstall the RU software of other devices (CR-IR362/363/364)
when necessary. Is PC-MUTL version 1.4 or Y
later? END
● Confirming the PC-MUTL version (example of display for the PC-MUTL version N
1.4)
The PC-MUTL version can be checked on the title bar.
The RU software which has been Y
PC-MUTL 1.4 [Check]
installed or version-updated is END
A09 or later?
Is another device (CR-IR362/363/ N

364) connected to the CL under END
N:N connection environments?
Reinstall the RU software for

FR6H4D11.EPS other devices (CR-IR362/363/364)
connected with the CL.
● Recommended combination of the PC-MUTL and RU software
Recommended combination of the PC-MUTL and RU software versions is shown
below. END
FR6H4F18.EPS
CR-IR346RU PC-MUTL RU
software version software version message file ◆ NOTE ◆
A01–A04 1.0 Reinstallation of the RU software for other devices (CR-IR362/363/364) may be needed
A05–A06 1.1 Only CR-IR346 due to the following reasons:
supported • The message file of the RU software version A08 or earlier does not support the device
A08 1.3 (CR-IR362/363/364).
A09 1.4 CR-IR346/362/364 supported • If the PC-MUTL version is 1.3 or earlier, the RU message file is unconditionally
FR6H4E02.EPS
rewritten.
“2.1.3 Mechanism of Installing the RU Message File” in the “Machine Description”
volume
Without the reinstallation, messages of other devices cannot be displayed on the CL
software.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Maintenance Utility (MU) Control Sheet MU - 1
Control Sheet
08/30/2001 01 Revisions associated with release of All pages
version A05 (FM3058)
version A07 (FM3328)
CR-IR346RU Service Manual version A08 (FM4338)
Maintenance Utility (MU)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MU - 11

09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 2 MU - 3
1. Overview of RU Service Utility 1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility
1.1 Features CAUTIONS

• The M-Utility must be activated after routine conveyance is completed.
■ Improved Ease of Maintenance • After exiting the M-Utility, be sure to reboot the machine. If the machine is not rebooted, the
operation of routine conveyance may not be performed normally.
Ease of maintenance is improved in the following points, as compared to the FCR5000 • Before booting the M-Utility, quit all the application software programs running on the CL. If
Series. the PC-MUTL and the CL software program are concurrently booted, the PC-MUTL cannot
operate normally.
● Simplified software installations and version updates • Do not overlay the PC-MUTL startup image displays. Otherwise, the screen is not displayed
normally.
Because of the GUI (graphical user interface) installer, software installations and version
updates are simplified.
Configuration settings that must be made during installation are also stripped down to a
■ Starting the M-Utility
minimum needed.
(1) Power ON the RU and CL.
● Addition of self-diagnostics function for each board
Because self-diagnostic function is added for each board, it is easy to isolate any defective (2) Exit the CL software.
board. Select “System exit” in the “FUJI FILM” menu while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
Furthermore, all diagnostics items may be executed repeatedly, so that self-diagnostics can REFERENCE
be performed for the board under its loaded condition.
The <SHIFT> key need be kept pressed until the CL software program is terminated.
● Enhanced functionality for mechanical utility Otherwise, the Windows will be quit, and the CL power will be automatically turned OFF.
Because conveyance tests can be conducted while tracing changes in the I/O status, a point (3) Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows.
of defect or failure for mechanical control may be readily identified.
Additionally, parameters are preset for commands that activate the motors, so that operation
Press
tests can be conducted by selecting the “DRIVE” menu.
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MU - 2 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual MU - 3

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 4 MU - 5
[“C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe”] to open the MAINTENANCE
UTILITY. C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
_
RU [ru0] login : cr ir346 #3 [Type/ENT]
Windows Update
Password : #4 [Type/ENT]
_
Programs (P) [cr ir346]
Favorites (A) #5 [Type/ENT] -> mutl
Documents (D)
0. QUIT
Settings (S) 1. LOG
Search (C) 2. VERSION
Help (H) 3. TEST
Run (R)...
#1 4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY
[Click] 5. SCANNER UTILITY
LogRun
Off Administrator... ? 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
Open: "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type]
>

FR6H3076.EPS
FR6H3075.EPS
REFERENCES
• In the field of “RU[ru0] login:”, “cr-ir346” should be entered within 15 seconds. If 15 seconds
(5) Start the M-Utility. have elapsed, the system returns to the “RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY” window.
• After having entered the “RU[ru0] login:” field, enter “Password:” within 15 seconds. If 15
seconds have passed, the system returns to the MAINTENANCE UTILITY window.
■ Exiting the M-Utility

#1 [Click] (1) Close the DOS prompt window.
#2 [Click]
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe [Click]
_
RU[ru0] login : cr ir346
Password :
-> mutl
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
FR6H3097.EPS
3. TEST
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
>
FR6H3077.EPS
(2) Power OFF the RU.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 6 MU - 7
1.3 Maintenance Utility Command Tree Diagram A1
Shaded ( ) portions are intended to offer functions for design analysis. Thus, they should not be [ 4 ] ELECTRICAL UTILITY
M - UTILITY used in the market (for ordinary servicing purposes).
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] AUTO MODE [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] ALL
[ 1 ] LOG
[ 2 ] CPU12A
[ 0 ] QUIT [ 3 ] SCN12A
[ 1 ] ERROR LOG [ 0 ] QUIT [ 4 ] INV12A
[ 1 ] DISPLAY [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 5 ] SND12A
[ 1 ] ALL [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 6 ] SUB CPU
[ 1 ] FATAL
[ 2 ] BOARD TEST [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] WANING
[ 1 ] CPU12A [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 3 ] BOTH
[ 1 ] BACKUP MEMORY TEST
[ 2 ] SUMMARY [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] SDRAM TEST
[ 2 ] SAVE TO FTP-SERV [ 1 ] FATAL
[ 2 ] WARNING [ 3 ] MAIN IPL CHECK SUM TEST
[ 3 ] CLEAR
[ 3 ] BOTH [ 4 ] MAIN APPL CHECK SUM TEST
[ 2 ] TRACE LOGS [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 5 ] MAIN APPL ROM R/W TEST
[ 6 ] INTERRUPT TEST
[ 1 ] NETWORK LOG
[ 7 ] REGISTER(ETH) TEST
[ 2 ] IP HANDLING LOG
[ 3 ] SED LOG [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] SCN12A [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 4 ] ISC LOG [ 1 ] MFC
[ 1 ] REGISTER TEST
[ 5 ] OPERATION LOG [ 2 ] IPH
[ 2 ] VERSION [ 2 ] INTERRUPT TEST
[ 2 ] SAVE ALL TRACE LOGS TO FTP-SERV. [ 3 ] UTL
[ 0 ] QUIT [ 3 ] CLEAR ALL TRACE LOGS [ 3 ] H8 COMMUNICATION TEST
[ 4 ] COM
[ 1 ] DISPLAY VERSION [ 3 ] SND12A [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] DETAIL [ 0 ] QUIT [ 1 ] REGISTER TEST
[ 1 ] LOAD SOFTWARE [ 0 ] QUIT [ 2 ] SENSOR TEST
FROM FTP-SERV. [ 1 ] MAIN CPU IPL [ 3 ] LED TEST
[ 2 ] MAIN CPU APPL [ 4 ] SOLENOID TEST
[ 3 ] SUB CPU IPL [ 5 ] PULSEMOTOR TEST
[ 4 ] SUB CPU APPL [ 6 ] INTERRUPT TEST
[ 2 ] LOAD [ 0 ] QUIT [ 4 ] INV12A [ 0 ] QUIT
CONFIGURATION
[ 3 ] TEST FROM FTP-SERV.
[ 1 ] ALL(IRSET, IRSTATUS, NETMASK,
[ 1 ] REGISTER TEST
ROUTE)
[ 0 ] QUIT [ 3 ] COMPARE SOFTWARE WITH FTP-SERV
[ 2 ] LAMP TEST
[ 1 ] ROUTINE [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] READING & ERASURE [ 3 ] SUB CPU TEST [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] PRIMARY ERASURE [ 1 ] SDRAM TEST
[ 3 ] SECONDARY ERASURE [ 2 ] FIFO TEST
[ 4 ] MONITOR READING & ERASURE [ 3 ] OUTPUT PATTERN IMAGE [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] AUTO MODE [ 0 ] QUIT [ 4 ] RE-OUTPUT IMAGE [ 1 ] 14'X17'
[ 1 ] READING & ERASURE
[ 4 ] POWER SUPPLY [ 2 ] 14'X14'
[ 2 ] PRIMARY ERASURE MONITOR [ 3 ] 10'X12'
[ 3 ] SECONDARY ERASURE A2
[ 5 ] DISPLAY HARDWARE SWITCH [ 4 ] 8'X10'
[ 3 ] SCANNER CLEANING
[ 6 ] BARCODE TEST [ 0 ] QUIT [ 5 ] 24X30
[ 4 ] NETWORK [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] COMMUNICATION [ 6 ] 18X24
[ 1 ] PING(AUTO)
[ 2 ] READ TEST FR6H3014.EPS
[ 2 ] PING(MANUAL)
FTP-SERV [ 1 ] ~cr-ir346/
[ 2 ] ~cr-ir346/SYSTEM
[ 3 ] ~cr-ir346/SYSTEM/COMMON
A1
[ 4 ] ~cr-ir346/SYSTEM/[RuName]/CONFIG
[ 5 ] ~cr-ir346/SYSTEM/[RuName]/MACHINE
FR6H3013.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 8 MU - 9
A2 A3 B1
[ 10 ] DATA MANAGEMENT
[ 5 ] SCANNER UTILITY
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] SAVE SCN DATA [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] INITIALIZE
FROM RAM TO
FLASH&FTP-SERV [ 1 ] ALL
[ 2 ] POLYGON [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] OFF
[ 2 ] SHADING & POLYGON DATA
[ 2 ] ON
(SCN_SHDG.DAT & SCN_POLY.DAT)
[ 3 ] LASER [ 0 ] QUIT [ 3 ] SENSITIVITY DATA(SCN_ISEN.DAT)
[ 1 ] OFF
[ 2 ] ON [ 4 ] FORMAT DATA
(SCN_IFMT.DAT & SCN_OFMT.DAT)
[ 4 ] SAVE INITIAL [ 0 ] QUIT
LDIF [ 5 ] LD INITIAL DATA(SCN_LDIF.DAT)
[ 1 ] GET DATA FROM SCN,
SAVE TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV [ 2 ] LOAD SCN DATA [ 0 ] QUIT
FROM FTP-SERV
[ 2 ] SAVE DEFAULT DATA TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV [ 1 ] ALL
TO RAM & FLASH
[ 5 ] HV STATUS [ 2 ] LIGHT COLLECT UNIT DATA
(SCN_SHDG.DAT & SCN_ISEN.DAT)
[ 6 ] HV ON/OFF [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] OFF [ 3 ] OPTICAL UNIT DATA
[ 2 ] ON (SCN_POLY.DAT & SCN_OFMT.DAT
& SCN_LDIF.DAT)
[ 7 ] HV DATA
[ 3 ] DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 8 ] FORMAT [ 1 ] DEFAULT [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] PIXEL AND FREQ [ 1 ] DISPLAY CURRENT DATA
[ 2 ] PIXEL ONLY
[ 2 ] DISPLAY CURRENT ERROR DATA
[ 3 ] FREQ ONLY [ 11 ] DIAGNOSTIC
[ 2 ] FREQ ADJUST [ 3 ] CONFIRM SAVED FILE LIST
[ 12 ] VIRTUAL IMAGE [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 3 ] PIXEL ADJUST
[ 4 ] OPTIC FORMAT [ 0 ] QUIT [ 1 ] LIGHT
[ 1 ] OPTICAL FREQ
[ 2 ] OPTICAL PIXEL [ 2 ] LOG AMP
[ 9 ] SHADING/ [ 0 ] QUIT [ 3 ] SCN12A INPUT

SENSITIVITY [ 6 ] MECHANICAL UTILITY
[ 1 ] SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] CALCULATION [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] MOTOR [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] SHADING, POLYGON
AND SENSITIVITY [ 1 ] DRIVE/STOP [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 2 ] SHADING AND [ 1 ] ROTATION DIRECTION.
[ 2 ] PARAMETER
POLYGON
[ 2 ] TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES.
[ 3 ] LOAD PARAMETER
[ 3 ] POLYGON ONLY
FROM FTP-SERV [ 3 ] HI-SPEED.
[ 4 ] SENSITIVITY ONLY [ 4 ] LOW-SPEED.
[ 3 ] SENSITIVITY DATA [ 5 ] SLEW UP TIME.

[ 2 ] ACTUATOR [ 0 ] QUIT [ 6 ] SLEW DOWN TIME.
[ 4 ] HV DATA
[ 1 ] DRIVE [ 7 ] POWER-DOWN DELAY TIME.
[ 5 ] PMT DATA
[ 2 ] STOP [ 8 ] MAGNETIC PHASE.
[ 9 ] MOVE AND MODE.

[ 10 ] STOP MODE.
A3 B1
FR6H3015.EPS A4 B2
FR6H3016.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 10 MU - 11
A4 B2 BLANK PAGE
[ 3 ] SENSOR [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] MONITOR
[ 2 ] MONITOR ALL
[ 3 ] REAL-TIME MONITOR ALL
[ 4 ] UNIT [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] IP FEED/LOAD(MA1,MB1) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] HOME POSITION
[ 2 ] FEED
[ 3 ] LOAD
[ 2 ] SIDE-POSITIONING GRIP(MC2) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] HOME POSITION
[ 3 ] SIDE-POSITIONING(MC1) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] HOME POSITION
[ 4 ] SUB READING GRIP DRIVE(MZ2) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] HOME POSITION
[ 5 ] SUB READING DRIVE(MZ1) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] DRIVE
[ 6 ] TRANSFER MOTOR UNLIMITED
DRIVE (MB1, MC3)
[ 7 ] SCANNER CLEANING (MZ3) [ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] HOME POSITION
[ 7 ] SOFTWARE UTILITY [ 2 ] LOCK(ref. service manual)
[ 0 ] QUIT
CONFIGURATION [ 1 ] IRSET.CFG
[ 2 ] IRSTATUS.CFG
[ 3 ] NETMASK
[ 4 ] ROUTE
[ 2 ] TEMPORARY SETTING
[ 0 ] QUIT
[ 1 ] READER UNIT NAME
[ 2 ] READER UNIT IP ADDR
[ 3 ] HOST(CL) IP ADDR
[ 4 ] INFO-HOST IP ADDR
[ 5 ] FTP-SERV IP ADDR
[ 6 ] NETMASK
[ 7 ] ROUTE(GATEWAY)
[ 8 ] BACKUP MEMORY [ 0 ] QUIT

[ 1 ] INITIALIZE
[ 9 ] HV ON / HV OFF FR6H3017.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 12 MU - 13
● 1 CONNECTION TEST
2. Functions of the PC-MUTL
“2.1 CONNECTION TEST”
● 2 INSTALL
CAUTIONS “2.2 INSTALL”
Note the following three items for the PC-MUTL, depending on the version to be used: ● 3 EDIT HISTORY
• Combination of PC-MUTL and RU software program
The PC-MUTL and the RU software program do not work normally if their versions do not “2.3 EDIT HISTORY”
conform with each other. ● 4 EDIT CONFIGURATION
“Appendix 2.1 Combination of the PC-MUTL and the RU Software Programs” “2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION”
• When the PC-MUTL 1.3 or earlier is to be used:
The mechanism of installing the RU message file differs between the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or ● 5 BACKUP
earlier and the PC-MUTL version 1.4 or later. “2.5 BACKUP”
“Appendix 2.2 Cautions in Using the PC-MUTL Version 1.3 or Earlier”
• Combination of the PC-MUTL and the Windows OS of the CL terminal
● 6 RESTORE
The Windows OS to be supported depends on the PC-MUTL version. “2.6 RESTORE”
“Appendix 2.3 Combination of the PC-MUTL Version and the Windows OS” ● 7 UNINSTALL
“2.7 UNINSTALL”
REFERENCE ● 8 PREVIOUS VERSION/VERSION UP
Image displays and function of the PC-MUTL differ depending on the PC-MUTL version. “2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/VERSION UP”
Refer to the Appendix for details of the displays and functions of the PC-MUTL version 1.2 or
earlier. ● 9 ERROR DB
“Appendix 1.4 PC-MUTL Displayed Screen and Functions” “2.9 ERROR DB”
● 10 I/O TRACE EXPERT
■ PC-MUTL window “2.10 I/O TRACE EXPERT”
11 12 13 1 ● 11 FTP Server Specification Screen

“2.11 FTP Server Specification Screen”
● 12 Clear Backup Data
“2.13 Clear Backup Data”
3
● 13 Rescue APPL via NetWork (Soft up date)
“2.14 Rescue APPL via NetWork (Soft up date)”
2
6
5
9
10
7 8 FR6H3999.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 14 MU - 15
2.1 CONNECTION TEST 2.1.2 PING: Procedures for Confirming Network Connection
In the CONNECTION TEST area of the PC-MUTL window are located the buttons to use the (1) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to confirm its connection.
function for starting the M-Utility of the RU and use the function for confirming the network
connection with the RU. With PC-MUTL version of 1.2 or later, the buttons are added to
check the version of the RU software and verify the operating status of the FTP server
running on the CL.
■ Functions of the Buttons

● [MUTL] button
Used to start the M-Utility of the RU.
● [PING] button
FR6H3321.EPS
Used to check the network connection with the RU.

● [VER] button (2) Click on the [PING] button.
Used to check the software version of the RU. A DOS prompt window appears to display the test results.
● [FTP] button
Used to access the FTP server used by the RU, either on the CL or from the RU, to check its [GOOD indication]
operating status. If messages shown below appear, the result is normal.
2.1.1 Procedures for Starting the M-Utility | Pinging 172.16.1.2 with 32 bytes of data: |
| |
When the “MUTL” button is clicked, the M-Utility command window opens to start the M- | Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255 |
Utility. | Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255 |
“1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility” | Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255 |
| |
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.2: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
| Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: |
| Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 10ms, Average = 2ms |
REFERENCES
• Digits for XXX in TTL=”XXX” vary depending on the environment in which the command
is executed.
• “LOST=(0% loss)” indicates that no problem occurs as a result of executing the PING
command. Anything displayed other than “LOST=(0% loss)” indicates that there is
some problem.
[NG indication]
Other than the above.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 16 MU - 17
2.1.3 VER: Procedures for Checking the Software Version of the RU 2.1.4 FTP: Checking the FTP Server of the RU
(1) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to check the version of the software. (1) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to confirm the FTP server.
(2) Click on the [FTP] button.

(2) Click on the [VER] button.
A prompt appears to display the software version of the RU.
[Screen display]
RU NAME
HISTORY.LOG
FR6H3329.EPS
RU software version
RESULT: OK
FR6H3330.EPS
FR6H3099.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 18 MU - 19
2.1.5 RENAME: Changing RU NAME ● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed from the RU
(Implemented with RU Software Version of A07 or Later, or PC-
MUTL 1.2 or Later)
■ Procedure for RENAME

◆ NOTE ◆
For the RU whose RU NAME has been changed by use of RENAME, PREVIOUS VERSION
cannot be executed. RESULT: OK
(1) Exit the CL software. FR6H3203.EPS
Select “System exit” in the “FUJI FILM” menu while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
(5) Click on the [RENAME] button.
REFERENCE

(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to execute RENAME.
(4) Click on the [FTP] button. FR6H3138.EPS
“RESULT: OK”. A dialog box appears to prompt you to enter a new RENAME.
● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL (6) Type in a new RU NAME and click on the [SET] button.
RUNAME
FR6H3140.EPS
A DOS prompt appears, and after a while, all the panel indicators on the RU blink four
HISTORY.LOG times, with an audible alarm generated.
FR6H3142.EPS
FR6H3202.EPS
This process will end after about one minute has passed, and the PC-MUTL window
appears.
CAUTION
Never power OFF the RU until the RENAME process ends completely (i.e., until the
PC-MUTL window appears).

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 20 MU - 21
(7) Click on the [FTP] button. 2.1.6 Errors That May Occur during RENAME and Their Probable Causes
“RESULT: OK”. ● RU is not connected
● Screen display where the FTP server is accessed on the CL If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
RUNAME
FR6H3148.EPS
HISTORY.LOG
● RU name designated is incorrect or FTP server is not set up
If the RU name designated is incorrect or if the FTP server has not been set up, the following
message appears.
FR6H3202.EPS In that case, click on the [Back] or [CONTINUE] button to go back to the previous screen,
and perform the procedures all over again after checking the IP address and FTP server.
FR6H3342.EPS
FR6H3343.EPS
RESULT: OK
FR6H3203.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 22 MU - 23
2.2 INSTALL ■ Error Occurring in the Installation and Its Cause

● RU is not connected
This function installs the RU software contained in the CD-ROM. If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
REFERENCE the RU, the following error message appears.
The timing of writing the RU software into a flash ROM of the RU during installation differs In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
depending on the PC-MUTL software version.
• For the PC-MUTL software version 1.2 (RU software version A07) or later:
“■ Timing of Updating the Flash ROM during Installation”
• For the PC-MUTL software version 1.1 (RU software version A06) or earlier:
“Appendix 1.2 Timing of Updating Flash ROM during Installation (for PC-MUTL
Software Version 1.1 or Earlier)”
◆ NOTE ◆ FR6H3120.EP
Be sure to execute “PING” to the RU to be installed to ensure that a network connection has ● RU name designated is incorrect or FTP server is not set up
been established.
If the RU name designated is incorrect or if the FTP server has not been set up, the following
Although RU software may be installed to the CL without a network connection established,
the backup memory of the RU will not be overwritten, so that a connection with the RU message appears.
cannot be established. In that case, click on the [Back] or [CONTINUE] button to go back to the previous screen,
■ Timing of Updating the Flash ROM during Installation

Upon installation, the RU software is written into both the CL’s FTP server and the RU flash
ROM. Refer to the Machine Description volume for the data flow during the installation.
“2.1.1 RU Software and Data Flow, ■ Data Flow in Installing the RU Software” in the
“Machine Description” volume
■ Procedures
FR6H3342.EPS
FR6H3343.EPS
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for details of procedures
for installing the RU software.
“20. Installing Procedure of RU Software” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts” volume

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 24 MU - 25
2.3 EDIT HISTORY 2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION

This function displays and edits the RU processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time. This function writes a portion of the configuration information of the RU into the FTP server,
as well as into the flash ROM of the RU.
■ EDIT HISTORY Window ◆ NOTE ◆
When it is clicked, the range “A” is cleared. While the flash ROM of the RU is being updated, the panel indicators on the RU are lit,
EDIT HISTORY window
during which the RU should not be powered OFF.
Count start date or reset date
PROCESSING AND WARNING COUNTER If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so that the
for the range “A”
RESET SINCE 2000 10 10 RU will no longer boot up.
18*24 cm 0 08*10 inch 12 IP processing counter REFERENCE
24*30 cm 0 10*12 inch 1
The timing of writing the configuration information into the FTP server and a flash ROM of
14*14 inch (35*35 cm) 2
the RU differs depending on the PC-MUTL software version. Refer to the Appendix for
14*17 inch (35*47 cm) 1 Total IP processing counter details of the PC-MUTL software version 1.1 (RU software version A06) or earlier.
A
All IP SIZES 16
“Appendix 1.1 Timing of Updating Flash ROM of Configuration Information (for PC-
IP reading counter MUTL Software Version 1.1 or Earlier)”
WARNING COUNTER Warning counter
IP READ&HANDLING 0
■ EDIT CONFIGURATION Window
The image displays and functions of EDIT CONFIGURATION differ depending on the PC-
Count start date or MUTL version. Refer to the Appendix for details of the displays and functions of the PC-
ERASURE LAMP
reset date for the erasure MUTL software version 1.2 or earlier.
RESET SINCE 2000 10 10 lamp lighting time
“Appendix 1.3 Image Display on EDIT CONFIGURATION”
Erasure lamp lighting time

IP address of the RU
IP address of the CL
When it is clicked, the erasure lamp When it is clicked, the range "A", as well
as the erasure lamp lighting time IP address of the FTP server
lighting time and date are cleared.
and date, is cleared. FR6H3005.EPS Subnet mask
Route address
● IP processing counter telnet-connectable IP address

telnet-connectable net mask
Indicates the number of IPs that have undergone routine reading, primary erasure, and Identification code of the RU
secondary erasure, on an IP size-by-size basis. Erasure mode
● IP reading counter Erasure mode setup cancel time

IP barcode availability or type
Indicates the number of IP reading operations performed for routine reading and primary Alarm setting for cassette setting
erasure. Alarm setting for erasure processing
Alarm setting for overexposed IP
● Warning counter
Setting of AUTO UPDATE
Indicates the number of events that have not been processed due to occurrence of error
(warning level).
REFERENCE
When it is clicked, any change When it is clicked, the setup content
Values in the fields displayed on the “EDIT HISTORY” window represent cumulative to the setup content is undone. is made effective. FR6H3104.EPS
values starting from the count start date or the date when the values are cleared
(“SINCE” date).

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 26 MU - 27
● FTP server address ● IP barcode availability or type

The IP address of the FTP server is set. The erasure time for “no barcode” is set.
• “6” (default): Erase with an erasure time for type 6 IP.
● telnet-connectable IP address
• “5, 6”: Erase with an erasure time for type 5 IP.
The IP address that permits a connection with the RU via telnet is set.
◆ NOTES ◆
When it is set to “0.0.0.0”, a connection can be established regardless of the IP address.
• If type 5 IP is processed with “IP barcode availability or type” set to “6” (default), erasure
failure will occur.
● telnet-connectable net mask
• When “IP barcode availability or type” is set to “5, 6”, type 6 IP takes as much erasure
The network address that permits a connection with the RU via telnet is set. time as type 5 IP, so that the resulting processing time for type 6 IP becomes longer
than specified.
When it is set to “0.0.0.0”, a connection can be established from any network.
● Identification code of the RU ● Alarm setting for cassette setting

When multiple units of the RU are used, an identification code (alphanumerical A setting is made to determine whether or not to sound an alarm when a cassette is set
characters) is set to allow the user to confirm, on the film, the RU that has performed under condition where the CL screen does not allow cassette processing.
image reading. • “ON” (default): An alarm is sounded.
• “OFF”: An alarm is not sounded.
Identification code
● Alarm setting for erasure processing
04001676 A0000 A020 A setting is made to determine whether or not to sound an alarm when the erasure SW of
the RU is pressed.
04001676 A0000 A020
• “ON” (default): An alarm is sounded.
• “OFF”: An alarm is not sounded.
● Alarm setting for overexposed IP
A setting is made to determine whether or not to generate a log and/or display a
message, when an overexposed IP is processed.
• “LOG&MESSAGE” (default): A log is generated and a message is displayed.
• “LOG”: A log is generated and an alarm is not sounded.
FR6H3081.EPS
• “NONE”: A log is not generated and an alarm is not sounded.

● Erasure mode ● Setting of AUTO UPDATE
An erasure mode that is selectable by the erasure mode SW of the RU is set. Upon bootup of the RU, the contents of the software and configuration files are compared
Example) When “ERASE1, ERASE2” is set: between the RU and FTP server. If their dates are different, the contents of the RU are
automatically updated with the contents of the FTP server.
By pressing the erasure mode SW, either primary erasure or secondary
erasure may be selected. • “ON”: The date is checked upon RU bootup, and auto update is performed.
• “OFF (default)”: Auto update is not performed even if the dates are different.
● Erasure mode setup cancel time
◆ NOTE ◆
The time, from changing the erasure mode setting to returning to the default erasure Set to OFF, as a rule.
mode, is set in seconds. If this feature is turned ON, installation is initiated automatically upon daylight saving change.
When it is set to “0”, the setting remains changed. If the user powers OFF the RU during that time, the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted,
so that the RU will no longer boot up. If installation is done with AUTO UPDATE set to ON,
the automatic update function will work during the installation, causing the contents in the
flash ROM of the CPU12A board to be corrupted.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 28 MU - 29
2.5 BACKUP 2.5.2 Procedures for BACKUP
This function copies the configuration information and error log data from the RU to the FTP Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for procedures of BACK
server, and from the FTP server to a floppy diskette (FD). UP.
“21.1 BACKUP Procedures” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”
RU CL volume
Flash ROM RU message file
Basic part 2.5.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable Causes
RU OS
● RU is not connected
Application part FTP server
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
RU application COMMON
the RU, the following error message appears.
• RU OS
Backup memory In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
• RU application
• Log data
RU-specific data
• Trace log data
• History data • Log data
FD
• Trace log data
SDRAM • History data
• Configuration data
• Scanner data
• Scanner data
FR6H3009.EPS FR6H3158.EPS FR6H3208.EPS
2.5.1 Backup Items
● “ERROR LOG”:
Log data is backed up.
● “CONFIGURATION”:
Configuration data is backed up.
● “TRACE LOG”:
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.
● “HISTORY LOG”:
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.
● “SCN ALL DATA”:

All scanner data is backed up.
● “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”:

Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.
● “SCN OPTICAL DATA”:

Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 30 MU - 31
2.6 RESTORE 2.6.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable Causes
This function installs the configuration information and machine-specific data from the floppy ● RU is not connected
diskette (FD) into the RU-specific data area of the FTP server and copies it from the FTP If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
server to the flash ROM of the RU. the RU, the following error message appears.
RU CL In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.

Basic part
RU OS
Application part FTP server

RU application COMMON
• RU OS FR6H3158.EPS FR6H3208.EPS
Backup memory • RU application
• Log data
RU-specific data
• Trace log data
• History data • Log data FD
• Trace log data
SDRAM • History data
• Scanner data
• Scanner data
FR6H3010.EPS
2.6.1 Restore Items
● “CONFIGURATION”:
Configuration data is restored.
● “HISTORY LOG”:
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
● “SCN ALL DATA”:

All scanner data is restored.
● “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”:

Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is restored.
● “SCN OPTICAL DATA”:

Of the scanner data, optical data is restored.
2.6.2 Procedures for RESTORE

Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for procedures of
RESTORE.
“RESTORE Procedures” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”
volume

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 32 MU - 33
2.7 UNINSTALL ■ Procedures

This function removes the RU software from the FTP server. (2) Start the PC-MUTL.
Once the removal is completed, the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” list box and “RU IP ADDR” (3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, select a desired RU.
become empty.
◆ NOTES ◆
• When a plurality of RUs are registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, execution of
UNINSTALL causes all of the RU software programs and configuration data to be deleted
from the FTP server.
• Be sure to execute INSTALL after UNINSTALL has been performed.
■ Uninstalling the RU software FR6H3130.EPS
When the RU software is uninstalled, the contents in the “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR- (4) Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled.
IR346\SYSTEM” directory on the CL are deleted.
◆ NOTE ◆
CAUTIONS When a plurality of RUs are registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, back up the following
files for each of the RUs.
• Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings) of
the RU, CL, and FTP server.
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost. - CONFIGURATION
• For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. - HISTORY LOG
Those files must be resorted after installation.
- CONFIGURATION - SCN ALL DATA
- HISTORY LOG REFERENCE
- SCN ALL DATA
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for procedures of
For multiple RUs, it is necessary to identify which file belongs to which RU.
BACK UP.
“21.1 BACKUP Procedures” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts”
volume
(5) Click on the [UNINSTALL] button.

The uninstall of the RU software starts, and when it is completed, the following window
appears.
FR6H3334.EPS

The PC-MUTL window appears back on screen, where all the RUs registered in “LIST
OF EXISTING RU” have been cleared.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 34 MU - 35
2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/VERSION UP 2.8.1 VERSION UP Procedures
Execution of the VERSION UP command version-updates all of RUs registered in “LIST OF Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for procedures of
EXISTING RU”. VERSION UP.
Execution of the PREVIOUS VERSION command recovers all of RUs registered in “LIST OF “13. Procedures of Updating Software Version” in the “Checks, Replacement and
EXISTING RU” to the state before the version update. Adjustment of Parts” volume
REFERENCE
Only when VERSION UP has been executed, the RU software can be returned to the state
2.8.2 PREVIOUS VERSION Procedures
before the version update by executing PREVIOUS VERSION.
◆ NOTES ◆
(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, select a desired RU.
• If the RU indicated in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” is not connected, or if an error occurs
during version update, the FTP server will be version-updated but the flash ROM will not.
• Do not power OFF the CL/RU during version update. If power is turned OFF during
version update, the machine will no longer boot up.
• Before performing the install procedures, quit all the applications running on the CL.
• In an N-to-N connection setup, if PREVIOUS VERSION/VERSION UP is executed, the RU
software will be sequentially downdated for the RUs connected, one after another. It takes
about one and one-half minutes for a single unit.
Do not power OFF the CL and RUs until the installation is completed for all the RUs. After
the installation, be sure to check the software versions for all the RUs to verify that the FR6H3328.EPS
version downdate has been completed.

Example: In a two-unit connection setup, if ru2 and ru1 have been registered in order (4) Click on the [PING] button.
named in “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, then installation is performed for ru2 and ru1 Referring to the DOS prompt window displayed, verify that the result is 100%
in that order named. successful.
CR-IR346CL (5) For all the RUs connected to the CL, repeat steps (3) and (4).
(6) Click on the [PREVIOUS VERSION] button.
Straight cable
A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the CD-ROM.
Switching hub
Network
FR6H3196.EPS
Switching hub Switching hub
The version update of the RU software starts.
Straight cable When it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
ru1 ru2 (8) Click on the [OK] button.
FR6H3200.EPS
• If the name of the RU is changed by using the [RENAME] button, PREVIOUS VERSION
FR6H3194.EPS
can no longer be executed.
The PC-MUTL window appears back on screen.
(9) Exit the PC-MUTL.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 36 MU - 37
(10) Start the CL software. 2.8.3 Errors That May Occur during Version Up and Their Probable
The version update of the RU software starts for the first RU. Causes
During that time, all the panel indicators on the first RU are lit, with an audible alarm
generated. ● RU is not connected
After about two minutes have passed, the version update is completed for the first RU, If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
and a message appears on the screen of the CL to prompt you to reboot the RU. the RU, the following error message appears.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
CAUTION
While the version update is being executed, do not power OFF the RU.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM of the RU will be corrupted, so
that the RU will no longer boot up.
(11) Click on “Reboot”. FR6H3180.EPS
A RU boot-up message appears on the monitor of the CL, and after about one minute
has passed, the first RU becomes ready for operation. ● RU name designated is incorrect or FTP server is not set up
The process then starts for RU software version update for the next RU. If the RU name designated is incorrect or if the FTP server has not been set up, the following
Click on “Reboot” the number of times corresponding to the number of RUs. message appears.
In that case, click on the [Back] or [CONTINUE] button to go back to the previous screen,
FR6H3342.EPS
FR6H3343.EPS
FR6H3182.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 38 MU - 39
2.9 ERROR DB (6) Close the ERROR DB window.
This function enables you to check error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the
error log data of the RU. It also allows for adding memos to error messages and viewing the
detail information and analysis flows.
CAUTIONS
• Do not install software programs, such as Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0, on the PC that is
used as the CL or FTP server. If such programs are installed, the CL or FTP server may
not function normally. FR6H3220.EPS
• It is a new feature added to software version A05 or later.
(7) Click on the [ERROR DB] button.
2.9.1 Procedures for Starting ERROR DB

Select “System exit” in the “FUJI FILM” menu while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
REFERENCE
Otherwise, the Windows will be quit, and the CL power will be automatically turned OFF. The latest error logs are presented.

(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU” of the PC-MUTL, select a desired RU.
(4) Click on the [ERROR DB] button.
(5) Click on the [UPDATE] button. (8) Click on the error code.
An explanation for the error code selected is presented.
Error code
FR6H3219.EPS
FR6H3212.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 40 MU - 41
2.9.2 ERROR-DB Window ● 7 “Error Code” text box

1 2 3 4 5 The error code of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is
6
displayed.
● 8 “Error Name” text box

The error name of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list box
is displayed.
● 9 “Meaning” text box

8
10 The occurrence condition of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error mes-
sage list box is displayed.
7 11
● 10 “Details Info.” Button
The detail information on the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message
9 list box is displayed.
12
● 11 “Analysis Flow” button
The analysis flow for the error message selected (highlighted) in the error message list
box is displayed.
● 12 “Memo.” text box

13 14 A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted) in the error message list
FR6H3091.EPS
box.
◆ NOTE ◆ Up to seven memos may be entered.
To view the most up-to-the-minute error log, it is necessary to click on the “UPDATE” button
● 13 “Author” text box
and close the window once, and then open it again.
The name of the person (author) who entered text in the “Memo.” text box is entered.
● 1 “SELECT” button ● 14 “SAVE” button

A error log file to be viewed is selected. The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved. To delete them, erase them by use of
the Delete key and press the “SAVE” button again.
● 2 “FATAL button
Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
● 3 “WARNING” button
Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are displayed.
● 4 “BOTH” button
Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are displayed.
● 5 “UPDATE”
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU12A board of the RU to the FTP server of
the CL.
● 6 Error message list box

The contents of the error log file selected are displayed.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 42 MU - 43
2.10 I/O TRACE EXPERT ● 1 “FILE OPEN” button

The file displayed in “2. File name text box” is opened.
This function displays the I/O trace data in the form of phase chart or timing chart.
Note, however, that only I/O trace data may be displayed but communication-related trace ● 2 File name text box
data cannot be displayed.
The complete path of the file to be opened is entered.
CAUTION
● 3 “Timing Chart” button
It is a new feature added to software version A05 or later.
◆ NOTE ◆
Never use this button because it is reserved for future use.
2.10.1 PhaseChart Window

1 2 4 ● 4 “Scale” button
The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed.
5
3
● 5 “Scroll” button
6 The display range for the time base is shifted horizontally.
A ● 6 Chart display area

The phase chart is displayed with three colored bands. Meanings of the three colors are
as follows.
• Green: Normal phase
• Red: Phase where an error occurred
• Light green: Location (phase) where the timing chart is displayed.
By clicking on the band (A) in the phase chart, the timing chart for that phase is displayed.
FR6H3092.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 44 MU - 45
2.10.2 TimingChart Window ● 1 “Reference (Normal Case)” button

1 2 3 4 5 6 • OFF: The contents of the I/O trace log are displayed.
• ON: In addition to the contents of the I/O trace log, the timing charts for normal opera-
tion are displayed in blue color.
● 2 “No” text box

The phase number for the phase whose timing chart is displayed is indicated.
7
● 3 “Phase” text box
8 The phase name for the phase whose timing chart is displayed is indicated.
● 4 “IP Size” text box

The IP size detected when I/O trace was conducted is indicated.
● 5 “Scale” button
The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed.
The display range for the time base is shifted horizontally.
● 7 I/O name display text box

The I/O name is displayed.
● 8 Chart display area

9 A B A-B 10
FR6H3093.EPS The timing chart is displayed.
When the number of I/Os exceeds 15, the display area is shifted vertically.
● 10 “Measure Point (Unit: msec)” area

By putting the mouse pointer in the chart area and pressing the left or right button of the
mouse, the following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B fields.
• A: Elapsed time, from powering ON to the position pointed by the left-mouse pointer.
• B: Elapsed time, from powering ON to the position pointed by the right-mouse pointer.
• A-B: Difference in time between positions A and B
Note that when the “CLEAR” button is clicked, the values in the A, B, and A-B fields are all
cleared.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 46 MU - 47
2.11 FTP Server Designation Window 2.12 Installing I/O Trace Log and Error DB Software
The FTP server for multiple units of RU may be managed in a centralized manner. To view the I/O trace log, error DB analysis flow, or detail information, it is necessary not only
to install the software to the service engineer’s PC but also to install the log data and service
manual PDF data as well.
Install procedures are described here.
CAUTION
The service engineer’s PC should run on Windows 2000 or NT.
■ Procedure
FR6H2558.eps
(1) Put the CD bundled with the RU into the service engineer’s PC.
The install start window opens.
(2) Click “EXIT”.
[Click]
FR6H2553.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 48 MU - 49
(3) Start the Explorer and copy the folder named “FCR” from the CD-R onto the desktop. (4) Open the folder copied and click “ERROR-DB.exe” to check whether the ERROR-DB
windows opens or not.
(114Y5436002A05): \Disk1\Program files\FujiFilm\FCR
[Start] → [Explorer] → [114Y5436002A05] → [Disk1] → [Program files] → [FujiFilm] → [FCR] → [ERROR-DB.exe]
[FCR]
FR6H2555.EPS
FR6H2554.EPS
FR6H2556.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
If the ERROR-DB windows does not open but an error is indicated, perform the procedures
set forth below.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 50 MU - 51
■ Error Indication 2.13 Clear Backup Data
CAUTION
If the software is to be updated from any version earlier than A04 to version A05 or later, be
FR6H2557.EPS
sure to clear the backup memory data. If it is not cleared, a software error will occur, so that the
RU will hang up.
Start the Explorer, double-click the batch file (Toolreg.batl), and restart the PC.
■ Procedures for Clear Backup Data
(114Y5436002A05) :\ETC\BATCH\TOOLREG.BAT (1) Exit the CL software.
[Start] → [Explorer] → [114Y5436002A05] → [ETC] → [BATCH] → [TOOLREG.BAT] Select “System exit” in the “FUJI FILM” menu while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
REFERENCE

(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU where the backup memory is to be
cleared.
FR6H2558.EPS
FR6H3132.EPS
(4) [Easy-Operation] → [Clear Backup Data]

A dialog box appears to ask whether to execute clear.
(5) Click on the [EXECUTE] button.
FR6H3134.EPS
A DOS prompt appears.
FR6H3136.EPS

“1.2 Starting and Exiting the M-Utility”
(7) [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [3][ENT]
Make sure that the error log has been cleared.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 52 MU - 53
2.14 Rescue APPL via Network (Soft Update) BLANK PAGE
This function updates the RU application via the network.

This function should be used when the RU does not boot up due to a corrupted RU
application on the flash ROM.
CAUTIONS
• Do not power OFF the RU and CL during RU application update. If power is turned OFF
during update, the machine will no longer boot up.
• When the M-Utility can be started (can be logged in), the procedures described in this
section should not be performed.
If the procedures are inadvertently performed under condition where the M-Utility can be
started, the CPU12A board should be replaced with a new one.
• Make sure that there is no machine that has been set up as described below, connected
over the same network.
“Machine that uses ru0 as the RU host name”

Unless such a machine is disconnected, the application and configuration data of that
machine will be automatically updated as well when the application of the RU is updated.
REFERENCE
By performing “soft update”, the application software and the configuration data of default
values are written into the flash ROM.
■ Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting volume for details of procedures of Rescue APPL via NetWork
(Soft up date).
“15.5 Action to be Taken When the RU Application Software Is Damaged” in the
“Troubleshooting” volume

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 54 MU - 55
[1-1-1] DISPLAY
3. Details of M-Utility
Displays the contents of the error log on screen.
[1] LOG REFERENCE
When the RU’s CPU memory becomes full, the oldest error log information is deleted to
Displays the error log or trace log or saves the error log or trace log stored in the RU’s CPU store the newest error log information. To back up the contents of the error log, execute “[1-
memory into the CL’s FTP server. Note that the trace log is for design analysis use. 1-2] SAVE TO FTP-SERV” and then copy the FTP server data onto a floppy disk or other
media.
[1-1] ERROR LOG

■ ALL: Displays all the logged error events in chronological order.
Displays the contents of the error log or saves the error log stored in the RU’s CPU memory
into the CL’s FTP server. LOG>ELG>DSP>ALL> 1
*** ERROR LOG ALL ***

CODE DATE
10921 2000.08.25 14:50:33 00C015 toamerrsnd_
0 microotfnc.c2138
10921 2000.08.25 14:50:33 00C015 toamerrsnd_
0 microotfnc.c2138
FR6H3052.EPS
[1] FATAL: Displays logged error events at levels 0 and 9 only.

[2] WARNING: Displayed logged error events at levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 only.
[3] BOTH: Displays all error events.
■ SUMMARY: Displays the number of error events of each error code.
LOG>ELG>DSP>SML> 3
*** ERROR LOG SUM ***

CODE DATE COUNT
10921 2000.08.25 14:50:33 0512 Number of error events
12992 2000.08.25 13:06:40 0001
FR6H3053.EPS
[1] FATAL: Displays the number of logged error events at levels 0 and 9 after grouping
them according to error codes.
[2] WARNING: Displays the number of logged error events at levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 after
grouping them according to error codes.
[3] BOTH: Displays the total number of logged error events after grouping them
according to error codes.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 56 MU - 57
■ Procedure: Example where FATAL error is to be displayed [1-1-2] SAVE TO FTP-SERV.

(1) [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
The error log appears on the display. A prompt appears, asking whether you want to Saves the error log stored in the RU’s CPU memory into the CL’s FTP server.
display the next data.
■ Flow of data
(2) To display the next data, choose “1”.
The next data appears on the display. RU CL
(3) Choose “0”. CD-ROM
The error log display process terminates.
Basic part
■ Display
The image display of the error log differs depending on the RU software version. Application part FTP server
Refer to the Appendix for the displays of the RU software versions A02 to A04. COMMON
“Appendix 3 Details of the M-Utility of Older Version” FD

Backup memory
Log data
|LOG>ELG>DIS>ALL>1 ......................................... (1) | RU-specific data
|*** ERROR LOG ALL *** | Log data

|CODE DATE | SDRAM
|[13603] 2000/08/25 14:51:45 00DC05 <SR> T02 |
| :3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 |
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:50:33 00C014 T99 | FR6H3061.EPS
| :0 microtfnc,c 2138 |
| • | ■ Procedures
| • | (1) [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
| • | A message appears, asking whether you really want to start execution.
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:45:25 00C013 T99 | (2) Choose “1” (YES).
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 1 ............................... (2) |
The system then performs the data copy process. When the process ends normally,
|CODE DATE | the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
|[13603] 2000/08/25 14:20:15 00DC05 <SW> T02 |
| :3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 | ■ Display
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:05:01 00C014 T99 |
| :0 microtfnc,c 2138 | |LOG>ELG>2 ................................................. (1) |
| • | |ARE YOU SURE? |
| • | |1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : 1 ................................. (2) |
| • | |RESULT : OK |
|[10921] 2000/08/25 13:50:30 00C013 T99 |
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 0 ............................... (3) |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 58 MU - 59
[1-1-3] CLEAR [1-2] TRACE LOGS
Deletes the error log from the RU’s CPU memory. [1-2-1] DISPLAY
■ Procedures Displays the trace logs on screen.

(1) [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [3] [ENT]
A message appears, asking whether you really want to start execution. CAUTION
(2) Choose “1” (YES). This feature is for design analysis only. Do not use this feature in the market (for regular
servicing purposes).
The system then deletes the error log. When the deletion process ends normally, the
display reads “RESULT: OK”.
[1-2-2] SAVE ALL TRACE LOGS TO FTP-SERV.
■ Display
Saves the trace logs stored in the RU’s CPU memory into the CL’s FTP server.
|LOG>ELG>3 ................................................. (1) |
|ARE YOU SURE? | ■ Procedures
|1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : 1 ................................. (2) | (1) [1] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
|RESULT : OK | A message appears, asking whether you really want to start execution.
(2) Choose “1” (YES).
The system then performs the trace log copy process. When the process ends
normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display
|LOG>TLG>2 ................................................. (1) |

|ARE YOU SURE? |
|1.YES 2.NO(DEFAULT=2) : 1 ................................. (2) |
|RESULT : OK |
[1-2-3] CLEAR ALL TRACE LOGS
Deletes the trace logs from the RU’s CPU memory.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 60 MU - 61
[2] VERSION [2-1] DISPLAY VERSION
Displays the version information about the RU software on screen or loads the RU software Displays the version information about the RU software.
or configuration information from the CL’s FTP server into the RU.
■ Procedure
■ Flow of data (1) [2] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
The following data flow diagram shows how data is loaded from the CL’s FTP server to the The version information then appears on the display.
RU.
RU CL ■ Display
CD-ROM
Flash ROM RU message file VER> 1 (1)
Basic part CR-IR346RU Application Software : 114Y5436002A00
RU OS Software Resource Version RU software version
Application part FTP server RU control software
MAIN CPU APPL : Z45N5436002A00
• RU application COMMON SUB CPU IPL : Z45N5436101A01
• Configuration data RU image software
• RU OS SUB CPU APPL : Z45N5436102B02
• RU application FD
SCN CPU APPL : Z45N5436202A00 Scanner software
Backup memory RU-specific data
Configuration data
Hardware Type(VER_REG)
CPU12A : 00 [01,00]
SDRAM
SNS12A : 00 [00]
DRV12A : 00
SCN12A : 00 [00]
FR6H3062.EPS
PC board installation program
FR6H3054.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 62 MU - 63
[2-2] DETAIL [2-2-2] LOAD CONFIGURA TION FROM FTP-SERV
Loads the RU software or configuration data from the CL’s FTP server into the RU. Loads the RU configuration data (IRSET, IRSTATUS, NETMASK, and ROUTE) from the CL’s
FTP server into the flash ROM on the RU’s CPU12A board.
[2-2-3] COMPARE SOFTW ARE WITH FTP-SERV
CAUTION
Compares the version of the software that is loaded in the flash ROM of the RU with the
This feature is for design analysis only. Do not use this feature in the market (for regular
version of the RU software on the FTP server of the CL.
The following software is to be compared:
Menu item Software to be compared
[1] MAIN CPU IPL Main CPU IPL (OS)
[2-2-1] LOAD SOFTW ARE FROM FTP-SERV.
[2] MAIN CPU APPL Main CPU application
Loads the RU software from the CL’s FTP server into the flash ROM on the RU’s CPU12A [3] SUB CPU FT ✻✻✻✻✻
board.
CAUTION
While the main CPU or sub-CPU OS is being loaded, do not turn OFF the power or perform
a reset because the flash ROM on the CPU12A board becomes damaged, resulting in the
RU’s inability to start up.
The following software is to be loaded:

Menu item Software to be loaded
[1] MAIN CPU IPL Main CPU OS
[2] MAIN CPU APPL Main CPU application
[3] SUB CPU IPL Sub-CPU OS
[4] SUB CPU APPL Sub-CPU application

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 64 MU - 65
[3] TEST [3-1] ROUTINE
Conducts an IP conveyance/image reading test in the utility mode, removes dust from the Performs an IP conveyance/image read operation in the utility mode. Also allows you to
scanner unit, or checks the network connection. perform a read/erasure/image output process while displaying the sensor status (open or
closed) and other information on screen.
■ Functions REFERENCE
● ROUTINE: Image reading and IP conveyance test When “READING & ERASURE” and “MONITOR READING & ERASURE” are to be
executed, it is necessary to make the RU ready for reading (with the cassette loading lamp
Performs a regular IP read/erasure process and outputs an image. Also allows you to illuminated).
perform a read/erasure/image output process while displaying the sensor status (open or Unless the RU is ready for reading, IP conveyance will not start even when a cassette is set
closed) and other information on screen. in position.
● AUTO MODE: Conveyance test repetition

Performs a regular IP read/erasure process and outputs an image. When an IP returns to [3-1-1] READING & ERASURE
the cassette, it is fed into the machine again and subjected to a read/erasure process. Use
this mode to check for improper IP conveyance. Performs a regular image read operation, outputs an image, and deletes an image from the
IP. Use this menu item when conducting IP conveyance and image read operations
● SCANNER CLEANING: Light-collecting guide cleaning simultaneously for testing purposes.
Rotates the light-collecting mirror to clean the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting
■ Procedures
guide.
● NETW ORK: Checks for access to the FTP ser ver. Have an exposed cassette on hand, depending on what to be checked.
Checks the network connection and access to the FTP server. (2) Make the RU ready for reading.
illuminated).
(3) [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT]
The machine is made ready for IP conveyance and reading.
(4) Set the cassette in position.
IP conveyance and reading are performed.
When the cassette is set again, IP conveyance and reading are performed
successively.
(5) [Ctrl] + [C] → [ENT]
The menu then closes.
■ Display
|TST>RTN> 1 ................................................ (3) |

| |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS. ................................... (4) |
|INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY. ......................... (5) |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 66 MU - 67
[3-1-2] PRIMARY ERASURE [3-1-4] MONITOR READING & ERASURE
Performs a regular image read operation to detect the dose received by the IP and effects IP Performs the “READING & ERASURE” operation while displaying the sensor status (open or
erasure in accordance with the received dose. Since this menu item performs an image closed) and other information on screen. Use this menu item to locate a fault.
read operation to detect the amount of IP consumption, it does not output an image. Use
this menu item when you check an image-reading conveyance operation only. ■ Procedures
■ Procedures
Have on hand a cassette to be erased.
Have on hand a cassette to be erased.
(2) [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [2][ENT] illuminated).
The machine is ready for IP conveyance and erasure. (3) [3][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [4][ENT]
(3) Set the cassette in position. The machine is made ready for IP conveyance and erasure.
IP conveyance and erasure are performed. (4) Set the cassette in position.
When the cassette is set again, IP conveyance and erasure are performed IP conveyance and erasure are performed, and a new line is displayed whenever the
successively. sensor status changes.
(4) [Ctrl] + [C] → [ENT] (5) [Ctrl] + [C] → [ENT]
The menu then closes. The menu then closes.
■ Display ■ Display
|TST>RTN> 1 ................................................ (2) | TST>RTN>4 (3)

| | Open:o/Close:x
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL
AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD
12345112342345SSS
NNN
[3-1-3] SECONDARY ERASURE 123
Conveys the IP through the image read section without performing an image read operation ooxxxoxxooxoxoxxx ←Sensor status after RU bootup
and merely subjects the IP to secondary erasure. Use this menu item when you check the xxxxxoxxooxoxoxxx (4)
IP conveyance mechanism only.
The status is changing
FR6H3083.EPS
REFERENCE
The sensor state can be displayed concurrently while conveying the IP.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 68 MU - 69
[3-2] AUTO MODE [3-2-2] PRIMARY ERASURE
Repeatedly performs an IP conveyance/image read operation in the utility mode. When an Performs an image read operation to detect the dose received by the IP and effects IP
IP returns, the system concludes that the cassette is newly set in position, and automatically erasure in accordance with the received dose. Since this menu item performs an image
repeats an IP conveyance operation a preselected number of times. read operation to detect the amount of IP consumption, it does not output an image.
■ Procedures
[3-2-1] READING & ERASURE (1) Have a cassette on hand.
(2) [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [2][ENT]
Performs a regular read operation, outputs an image, and deletes an image from the IP.
Since the same IP is repeatedly conveyed, however, the machine reads an erased IP on the The display then prompts you to enter the number of times you want to perform IP
second and subsequent cycles. conveyance and erasure.
(3) [5][ENT]
REFERENCE
The machine is then ready for performing IP conveyance and erasure five times.
When “READING & ERASURE” is to be executed, it is necessary to make the RU ready for
reading (with the cassette loading lamp illuminated). (4) Set the cassette in position.
Unless the RU is ready for reading, IP conveyance will not start even when a cassette is set IP conveyance and erasure are performed the number of times (five times) that has
in position. been set in step (3).
(5) [Ctrl] + [C] → [ENT]
◆ NOTE ◆ The menu then closes.
If the CL-RU connection is set to N-to-N, the program will not work normally. Be sure to set ■ Display
the CL-RU connection to 1-to-1.
|TST>AUTO>2 ................................................ (2) |
■ Procedures | |
(1) Have a cassette on hand. |INPUT THE NUMBER OF CONVEYANCES. |
(2) Make the RU ready for reading. |INPUT(0 - 99999):5 ........................................ (3) |
| |
illuminated).
(3) [3][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT]
The display then prompts you to enter the number of times you want to perform IP
conveyance and reading. [3-2-3] SECONDARY ERASURE
(4) [5][ENT]
Conveys the IP without performing an image read operation and merely subjects the IP to
The machine is then ready for performing IP conveyance and reading five times.
secondary erasure.
IP conveyance and reading are performed the number of times (five times) that has
[3-3] SCANNER CLEANING
been set in step (4).
(6) [Ctrl] + [C] → [ENT] Rotates the light-collecting mirror axis to clean the light-collecting surface of the light-
The menu then closes. collecting guide. The function of this menu is the same as the scanner cleaning function in
the User Utility.
■ Display
■ Procedure
|TST>AUTO>1 ................................................ (3) | (1) [3] [ENT] → [3] [ENT]
| | The machine then performs a scanner cleaning operation.
|INPUT THE NUMBER OF CONVEYANCES. |
■ Display
|INPUT(0 - 99999):5 ........................................ (4) |
| | |TST>3 ..................................................... (1) |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS. ................................... (5) | |COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS. |
|INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY. ......................... (6) | |RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 70 MU - 71
[3-4] NETWORK [4] ELECTRICAL UTILITY
Checks the network connection. Runs diagnostics to check whether the electrical components are normal.
■ Functions
[3-4-1] PING (AUTO)
● AUTO MODE/BO ARD TEST/SUB CPU TEST:
CAUTION Conducts memory and interrupt control tests of RU PC boards. You can execute a series of
With software version A02 or earlier, this feature is not implemented, so it should not be used. tests automatically or conduct preselected tests.
● POWER SUPPLY MONITOR:

Transmits a message to all IP addresses entered in the configuration file to verify the
network connection. Checks all RU PC boards for blown fuses.
● DISPLAY HARDWARE SWITCH:

[3-4-2] PING (MANUAL)
Displays the CPU12A board’s DIP switch setup.
Transmits a message form the CPU12A board of the RU to a specified address to verify the
● BARCODE TEST:
network connection.
Performs a barcode reader test.
■ Procedures
(1) [3] [ENT] → [4] [ENT]
The display then prompts you to specify the IP address.
(2) Enter an IP address.
The system then checks the connection to the entered IP address.
[3-4-3] DISPLAY FTP-SERV
CAUTIONS
• With software version A02 or earlier, this feature is not implemented, so it should not be used.
• This feature is for design analysis only. Do not use this feature in the market (for regular
Accesses the CL’s FTP server to verify that files can be accessed.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 72 MU - 73
[4-1] AUTO MODE [4-1-1] ALL
Runs self-diagnostic checks on the PC boards by conducting a series of PC board tests. Runs all the self-diagnostic checks between [4-1-2] and [4-1-6] (CPU12A, SCN12A, INV12A,
SNS12A, DRV12A, and SUBCPU).
■ Procedures You can repeat execution within a range of 1 to 99999.
(1) [4] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
The display then prompts you to enter the number of times you want to repeat the [4-1-2] CPU12A
testing cycle.
(2) Enter “3” (for performing the testing process three times). Runs diagnostic checks on the following parts of the CPU12A board. You can repeat
The system then repeats the PC board testing cycle the specified number of times execution within a range of 1 to 99999.
(three times). When the testing process ends normally, the display reads “RESULT:
OK”.
CPU12A board Backup circuit FIFO/SRAM
To abort the testing process during its execution, press the [Ctrl] and [C] keys
simultaneously and then press the [ENT] key.
Appl-ROM
■ Display
|EU>AT> 2 .................................................. (1) |

Image ROM
| |
|INPUT REPEAT TIMES. |
|INPUT(0 - 99999):3 ........................................ (2) | Boot-ROM
| |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS. |
|INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY |
| |
|COUNT : 00001 |
|COUNT : 00002 |
|COUNT : 00003 |
| |
|RESULT : OK |
Main CPU/FPGA section FR6H3055.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 74 MU - 75
[4-1-3] SCN12A [4-1-5] SND12A
Runs diagnostic checks on the following parts of the SCN12A board. You can repeat Runs diagnostic checks on the following parts of the SND12A board. You can repeat
execution within a range of 1 to 99999. execution within a range of 1 to 99999.
DRV12A board Pulse motor

SCN12A board Host bus buffer section
DRV12A board
DC motor solenoid
SNS12A board SNS control FPGA
H8CPU FR6H3056.EPS
[4-1-4] INV12A
Pulse motor control

Runs diagnostic checks on the following parts of the INV12A board. You can repeat
execution within a range of 1 to 99999.
Sensor/LED/driver section
FR6H3063.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 76 MU - 77
[4-1-6] SUB CPU [4-2] BOARD TEST
Runs self-diagnostic checks on the following parts of the sub-CPU. You can repeat Conducts various PC board tests on an individual basis for self-diagnostic checkout of each
execution within a range of 1 to 99999. functional block.
FIFO/SRAM
CPU12A board [4-2-1] CPU12A
Runs a self-diagnostic check on each functional block of the CPU12A board.

[ 1 ] BACKUP MEMORY TEST:
Tests the backup memory.
[ 2 ] SDRAM TEST:
Tests the main memory.
[ 3 ] MAIN IPL CHECK SUM TEST:
Compares the IPL program on the board with the program of the FTP server (CL) for
checkout purposes.
[ 4 ] MAIN APPL CHECK SUM TEST:
Compares the application program on the board with the program of the FTP server
(CL) for checkout purposes.
[ 5 ] MAIN APPL ROM R/W TEST:
Tests the main application ROM.
[ 6 ] INTERRUPT TEST:
Tests the interrupt control.
Image processing CPU/FIFO/FPGA section
[ 7 ] REGISTER (ETH) TEST:
Image SDRAM section FR6H3070.EPS Conducts a register test.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 78 MU - 79
[4-2-2] SCN12A [4-2-4] INV12A
Runs a self-diagnostic check on each functional block of the SCN12A board. Runs a self-diagnostic check on each functional block of the INV12A board.
[ 1 ] REGISTER (ETH) TEST: [ 1 ] REGISTER TEST:
Conducts a register test. Conducts a register test.
[ 2 ] INTERRUPT TEST: [ 2 ] LAMP TEST:
Tests the interrupt control. Checks for erasure lamp illumination.
[ 3 ] H8 COMMUNICATION TEST:
Communicates with the CPU (H8) on the SCN12A board to verify the normal return. [4-3] SUB CPU TEST
[4-2-3] SND12A Tests the SDRAM and FIFO memory of the sub-CPU (digital data processing CPU) on the
CPU12A board. Also allows you to output a pattern image or generate an image re-output.
Runs a self-diagnostic check on each functional block of the SND boards (SNS12A and [ 1 ] SDRAM TEST:
DRV12A boards). Tests the SDRAM.
[ 1 ] REGISTER (ETH) TEST: [ 2 ] FIFO TEST:
Conducts a register test. Tests the FIFO memory.
[ 2 ] SENSOR TEST:
Tests the control signal output to a sensor. [4-3-1] SDRAM TEST
[ 3 ] LED TEST:
Tests the control signal output to an LED. Tests the SDRAM of the sub-CPU.
[ 4 ] SOLENOID TEST:
Tests the control signal output to a solenoid. [4-3-2] FIFO TEST
[ 5 ] PULSEMOTOR TEST:
Tests the control signal output to a motor. Tests the FIFO memory.
[ 6 ] INTERRUPT TEST:
Tests the interrupt control.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 80 MU - 81
[4-3-3] OUTPUT PATTERN IMAGE ■ Example where a Pattern Image of 14"x14" Size is Outputted
(For 1-to-1 Connection)
Outputs pattern images of various IP sizes. ◆ NOTE ◆
The flow of pattern image generation is shown below: For a 1-to-1 connection setup, the following errors may occur.
The error code to be displayed differs depending on the RU software version.
CPU12A board SCN12A board • If the command is executed while the cassette loading lamp is not illuminated:
Image bus/buffer section → Error code 13011: RU software A04 or earlier
Main CPU/FPGA section
→ Error code 11401: RU software A05 or later
• If the command is executed without the examination menu registered, the error code
11401 is displayed in the case of the RU software version A05 or later.
● Procedures
(3)
(1) Register the examination menu.
Select the menu on the CL and register it.
(1)
illuminated).
(3) [4][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [3][ENT]
A menu then opens, prompting you to select an output image size.
(4) Enter “2” (14"x14").
(2)
(4)
The system then outputs an image presented below. When the image output process
ends normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
(5) Select the “IP# Input” button.
Image processing CPU/FIFO/FPGA section

A dialog box appears to enter the barcode.
Ethernet section
(6) Enter the barcode that has been registered in step (1).
Image SDRAM section FR6H3071.EPS
(1) The main CPU generates image data.

(2) The main CPU sends the image data to the SDRAM of the sub-CPU.
The image data is sent to the sub-CPU SDRAM via the system bus.
(3) The sub-CPU sends the image data to the SCN board.
The image data is sent to the SCN board via the image bus.
(4) The system generates an image output.
The image data fed from the SCN12A board is transferred out via the network.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 82 MU - 83
■Display (5) Enter the barcode that has been registered in step (1).
The system then outputs an image presented below. When the image output process
|EU>SBCPU>3 ................................................ (2) | ends normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
| |
|0.QUIT |
|1.14"x17" |
|2.14"x14" |
|3.10"x12" |
|4.8"x10" |
|5.24x30 |
|6.18x24 |
|EU>SBCPU>IMGOUT>2 ......................................... (3) |
| |
|RESULT : OK |
■ Example where a Pattern Image of 14"x14" Size is Outputted

(For N-to-N Connection)
◆ NOTE ◆
For an N-to-N connection setup, the following error may occur.
• If the command is executed while the CL is not ready for processing: ● Display
• If the command is executed while the examination menu has not been registered:
• If the command is executed while the barcode has not been entered:
→ Error code 11404 |EU>SBCPU>3 ................................................ (2) |
| |
|0.QUIT |
● Procedures |1.14"x17" |
(1) Register the examination menu and barcode. |2.14"x14" |
Select the menu on the CL and manually register the barcode. It should be noted that |3.10"x12" |
any barcode might be registered for this purpose. |4.8"x10" |
(2) [4][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [3][ENT] |5.24x30 |
A menu then opens, prompting you to select an output image size. |6.18x24 |
(3) Enter “2” (14"x14"). |EU>SBCPU>IMGOUT>2 ......................................... (3) |
| |
A message appears on the CL to prompt you to enter the barcode.
(4) Select the “IP# Input” button.
|RESULT : OK |
A dialog box appears to enter the barcode.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 84 MU - 85
[4-3-4] RE-OUTPUT IMA GE ■ Example where Image is Re-outputted in N-to-N Connection

◆ NOTE ◆
Re-outputs an image.
For an N-to-N connection setup, the following error may occur.
◆ NOTE ◆ • If the command is executed while the CL is not ready for processing:
After bootup, if “RE-OUTPUT IMAGE” is executed without performing the reading operation • If the command is executed while the examination menu has not been registered:
at all, the following error will occur. • If the command is executed while the barcode has not been entered:
→ Error code: 13011 → Error code 11404
(1) Register the examination menu and barcode.

■ Example where Image is Re-outputted in 1-to-1 Connection Select the menu on the CL and manually register the barcode. It should be noted that
◆ NOTE ◆ any barcode might be registered for this purpose.
For a 1-to-1 connection setup, the following errors may occur. (2) [4][ENT] → [3][ENT] → [4][ENT]
The error code to be displayed differs depending on the RU software version. The system then outputs an image.
• If the command is executed while the cassette loading lamp is not illuminated:
→ Error code 13011: RU software A04 or earlier
→ Error code 11401: RU software A05 or later [4-4] POWER SUPPLY MONITOR
• If the command is executed without the examination menu registered, the error code
11401 is displayed in the case of the RU software version A05 or later. Automatically checks all PC boards for blown fuses. Note, however, that this menu item may
not work if the CPU12A board is faulty.
● Procedures ■ Procedure
(1) Cancel the ready-for-reading state of the RU. (1) [4] [ENT] → [4] [ENT]
Manipulate the CL to cancel the ready-for-reading state of the RU (with the cassette The system then checks for blown fuses. When the fuse checkout process ends
loading lamp not illuminated). normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
(2) [4] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [4][ENT]
■ Display
The system then outputs an image.
● Display |EU>4 ...................................................... (1) |

|RESULT : OK |
|EU>SBCPU>4 ................................................ (1) |

| |
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 86 MU - 87
[4-5] DISPLAY HARDWARE SWITCH [4-6] BARCODE TEST
Displays the settings of the DIP and slide switches on the CPU12A board. ◆ NOTE ◆
If you conduct the “[4-6] BARCODE TEST” when the CPU12A board DIP switch is set so as
■ Procedure not to use the optional barcode reader, the display always reads “RESULT: OK”.
(1) [4] [ENT] → [5] [ENT]
The system then checks and displays the switch settings.
[4-6-1] COMMUNICATION
■ Display Sends a control command to the barcode reader to check for a response.
|EU>5 ...................................................... (1) | ■ Procedures

| | (1) [4] [ENT] → [6] [ENT]
|Slide-Sw on CPU12A |
(2) Choose “1” (COMMUNICATION).
|(Left:REMOTE/Right:LOCAL) : Right |
The system then checks for a response from the barcode reader. When the checkout
| | process ends normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
|DIP-SW on CPU12A |
| No.1— IMPOSSIBLE TO READ (FOR ONLY HARD SETTING) — | ■ Display
| No.2(0:NORMAL/1:DEBUG) : 0 |
| No.3(0:INCH/1:METRIC) : 1 | |EU>6 ...................................................... (1) |
| No.4(0:NONE/1:BCR SETTING) : 1 | | |
| No.5(0:NORMAL/1:DRAM TEST) : 0 | |0.QUIT |
| No.6(RESERVE) : 0 | |1.COMMUNICATION |
| No.7(RESERVE) : 0 | |2.READ TEST |
| No.8(0:NORMAL/1:FT BOOT) : 0 | |EU>BCR>1 .................................................. (2) |
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 88 MU - 89
[4-6-2] READ TEST BLANK PAGE

Checks whether the barcode can be read normally.
REFERENCE
When “READ TEST” is to be executed, it is necessary to make the RU ready for reading
(with the cassette loading lamp illuminated).
Unless the RU is ready for reading, barcode reading will not be performed.
The procedure and image display of READ TEST differ depending on the RU software
version. Refer to the Appendix for the procedure and displays of the RF software version
A02.
“Appendix 3 Details of the M-Utility of Older Version”
■ Procedures
illuminated).
(2) [4][ENT] → [6][ENT]
(3) Select “2” (READ TEST).
(4) Set a barcode-ready IP cassette into the IP set unit.
The IP is fed, and when the barcode is read normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
REFERENCE
If “READ TEST” is executed with such DIP switch setting on the CPU12A board as not
to use the barcode, the display always reads “RESULT: OK”, no matter whether the
barcode is available or not.
■ Display
|EU>6 ...................................................... (2) |

| |
|0.QUIT |
|1.COMMUNICATION |
|2.READ TEST |
|EU>BCR>2 .................................................. (3) |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS : OK |
|INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY. |
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 90 MU - 91
[5] SCANNER UTILITY [5-1] INITIALIZE
Sets the scanner unit and checks its operation. Initializes the scanner.
In the initialization process, the main-scanning parameters for the scanner are downloaded
■ Functions from the CPU12A board flash memory into the SDRAM and then downloaded from the
CPU12A board into the SCN12A board. Further, the laser and polygon are turned OFF in
● INITIALIZE: Initializes the scanner.
this initialization process.
● POLYGON: Checks the operation of the polygon.
■ Procedure
● LASER: Checks the operation of the laser.
(1) [5] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
● SAVE INITIAL LDIF: Shall not be used because it is intended for design analysis The system then performs the scanner initialization process. When the process ends
purposes. normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
● HV STATUS: Displays the status of the HV switch.
■ Display
● HV ON/OFF: Turns ON and OFF the HV switch (software switch).
● HV DATA: Checks the HV voltage command value that is outputted from the SCN12A |SCN>1 ..................................................... (1) |
board. | |
● FORMAT: Fine-tunes the read start position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ). |COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS |
|RESULT : OK |
● SHADING/SENSITIVITY: Makes shading and sensitivity corrections.
● DATA MANAGEMENT: Saves the scanner data into the FTP server (CL) and loads the
saved scanner data.
● DIAGNOSTIC: Starts the polygon and runs a self-diagnostic check on the scanner.
● VIRTUAL IMAGE: Causes the light-collecting section to generate image data.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 92 MU - 93
[5-2] POLYGON [5-3] LASER
Turns ON and OFF the polygon. Turns ON and OFF the laser.
When the polygon ON signal is generated, the polygon ON signal LED on the SCN12A When the laser turns ON, the system turns ON the polygon and runs a diagnostic check on
board comes on. the polygon and laser.
CAUTION CAUTION
If the cover must be removed to gain access to the LED on the SCN12A board, turn OFF the While the laser is ON, do not turn OFF the polygon. If you turn OFF the polygon with the laser
HV switch before removing the cover. turned ON, the laser light may fall upon a single spot, causing a risk of machine failure or fire.
If the cover is removed with the HV switch in the ON position, the photomultiplier will be
damaged.
■ Procedures
(1) [5] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
■ Procedures
This causes the laser and polygon to turn ON, and the display reads one of the
(1) [5] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] following values and “RESULT: OK”.
The polygon then turns ON and then the display reads “RESULT: OK”. If the polygon • LDIFINT: LD amperage value at the time of shipping from factory
ON signal LED on the SCN12A board does not come on in this instance, the SCN12A
board is faulty. • LDIFNOW: Current LD amperage value
• LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value indicative of how much the amperage value has dropped,
Illuminated when since shipping from factory until now.
the polygon turns ON
REFERENCE
When the value of LDIFNOW/LDIFINT drops below 0.6, an error code is displayed.
PMTD1G
(2) [1] [ENT]

POLON
LIGHT
The laser and polygon then turn OFF.
■ Display
|SCN>LZR>2 ................................................. (1) |
| |
CN5
|Laser ON |
CN1 CN6 CN2 CN3 CN4 S1 |LDIFINT : 127.66 |
SCN12A |LDIFNOW : 127.33 |
FR6H3082.EPS
|LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0.99 |
(2) [1] [ENT]
|RESULT : OK |
The polygon then turns OFF.
| |
■ Display |0.QUIT |
|1.OFF |
|SCN>POLY>2 ................................................ (1) | |2.ON |
|RESULT : OK | |SCN>LZR>1 ................................................. (2) |
| | |RESULT : OK |
|0.QUIT |
|1.OFF |
|2.ON |
|SCN>POLY>1 ................................................ (2) |
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 94 MU - 95
[5-4] SAVE INITIAL LDIF [5-5] HV STATUS
Displays the HV switch setting.

CAUTION
REFERENCE
servicing purposes). If it is used inadvertently, install the machine shipment control data for the The display reads “OFF” when either the software switch or the hardware switch is OFF.
optical system.
■ Procedure
[5-4-1] GET DATA FROM SCN, SAVE TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV
(1) [5] [ENT] → [5] [ENT]
Acquires machine shipment control data from the scanner and sets the acquired values in This causes the display to show the HV switch setting and then the message
the SDRAM, flash memory, and FTP server. “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display
[5-4-2] SAVE DEFAULT DATA TO RAM & FLASH & FTP-SERV
|SCN>5 ..................................................... (1) |
Restores the machine shipment control data in the SDRAM, flash memory, and FTP server |HV ON |
to the default values.
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 96 MU - 97
[5-6] HV ON/OFF [5-7] HV DATA
Turns ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). When you enter an HV voltage value between 255 and 667 V, the system checks whether
When you execute “[5-6] HV ON/OFF”, the system checks the HV switch setting and then the command value output from the SCN12A board is equal to the entered value.
turns ON or OFF the HV switch. REFERENCE
When the system turns ON the HV switch, it checks the response from the photomultiplier If the HV switch (software or hardware switch) is OFF, the displays reads “HV OFF” and
board and then displays the result. “RESULT: OK” even when you enter an HV voltage value.
CAUTION
Before turning ON the HV switch (software switch), check to see whether the cover is installed. ■ Procedures
If the HV switch is turned ON with the cover removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged. (1) [5] [ENT] → [7] [ENT]
A message then appears to prompt for the input of an HV voltage value. If the HV
switch is OFF in this instance, the display reads “HV OFF” and then “RESULT: OK”.
■ Procedure
(2) Enter the value “300” (HV voltage).
(1) [5] [ENT] → [6] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
This causes the display to show the HV switch setting and then the message ■ Display
“RESULT: OK”.
|SCN>7 ..................................................... (1) |
■ Display
| |
|INPUT HIGH-VOLTAGE’S DA DATA |
|SCN>HV>2 .................................................. (1) |
|INPUT(250 - 667[V]):300 ................................... (2) |
|HV ON |
|RESULT : OK |
|RESULT : OK |
REFERENCE
If the HV switch (hardware switch) on the SCN12A board is OFF, the displays reads “HV
OFF and “RESULT: OK” even when the HV software switch turns ON.
|SCN>HV>2 |
|HV OFF |
|RESULT : OK |

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 98 MU - 99
[5-8] FORMAT [5-8-1] DEFAULT
Use the “FORMAT” menu when the format needs to be fine-tuned in situations where the Restores the current settings for the read start position (PIXEL) and read width (FREQ) to
machine shipment control data is installed. You should also use this menu when inter-unit the default values.
adjustments are needed due, for instance, to simultaneous replacement of the subscanning
REFFERENCE
unit and side-positioning conveyor.
When you select the default settings, the system adjusts the output image position to make
IP edges visible, indicating that the default settings are used.
◆ NOTES ◆
• Be sure to turn ON the HV switch before format adjustment. The format cannot be [ 1 ] PIXEL AND FREQ:
adjusted with the HV switch set to OFF.
Restores both the read start position and read width to the default values.
• Once the setting is changed, the result of that change becomes effective immediately.
• Because the value that has been changed becomes ineffective when the machine is [ 2 ] PIXEL ONLY:
rebooted, you must perform “BACKUP” of the configuration if you want to keep the setup Restores only the read start position to the default value.
value effective after reboot or to save the setup value.
[ 3 ] FREQ ONLY:
“2.5 BACKUP”
Restores only the read width to the default value.
■ Procedure: Example where both the read start position and read width are restored
■ Functions
to the default values
● DEFAULT: Restores the settings of the read width (FREQ) and read start position (PIXEL) (1) [5] [ENT] → [8] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
to their default values.
The system restores the read start position and read width to their default values and
● FREQ ADJUST: Fine-tunes the read width (FREQ). the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
It makes fine adjustments when the size of the output image is enlarged or reduced in the
■ Display
horizontal (main scan) direction.
● PIXEL ADJUST: Fine-tunes the read start position (PIXEL). |SCN>FMT>DEF>1 ............................................. (1) |
It fine-tunes the image output position to the right or left when any horizontal white blank |RESULT : OK |
appears on the output image or when the image is cut off (when there is some non-
outputted portion).
REFERENCE
When both the read width (FREQ) and read start position (PIXEL) are to be adjusted, the
read width should be first adjusted. If the read start position is first adjusted, it may be
necessary to adjust the read start position again as a result of the read width adjustment.
■ Procedures
of format adjustment.
“16. Format Adjustment” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 100 MU - 101
[5-8-2] FREQ ADJUST [5-8-3] PIXEL ADJUST
Fine-adjusts the output image when it is shifted in the horizontal direction (main scanning
■ Functions direction), that is, a white blank portion occurring in the horizontal direction, or part of the
Fine-adjusts the output image when it is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal direction image cut off.
(main scanning direction). Adjustment is available in a range of -999 to 999 pixels. Inputting a negative (minus signed)
Adjustment is available in a range of -5 to 5%. Inputting a negative (minus-signed) value value enlarges the white blank portion, and inputting a positive (plus signed) value reduces
enlarges the image, and inputting a positive (plus-signed) value reduces the image. How to the portion. How to calculate the adjustment value is as follows:
calculate the adjustment value is as follows:
b
Actual size of a
Direction steel rule Reduction factor
of IP Actual size of steel rule
conveyance
a x100=Adjustment value (%)
Measure “a” on the output film. b

FR6H4599.EPS
Reduction factor
x10 = Adjustment value
(PIXEL)
■ Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for details of procedures Direction
of FREQ ADJUST (main scan length adjustment). of IP
conveyance
“16.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment” in the “Checks, Replacement and
FR6H45A0.EPS
■ Procedures
of PIXEL ADJUST (main scan direction adjustment).
“16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts” volume
[5-8-4] OPTIC FORMAT
Inputs adjustment values for the main scan length and the main scan position mentioned on
the upper face label of the optics unit. Inputting the adjustment value rewrites the machine
shipment control data.
CAUTION
Use “OPTIC FORMAT” only when you manually enter the machine shipment control data
indicated on the scanning optics unit.
■ Procedures
of OPTIC FORMAT (optics unit replacement setting).
“16.3 Optic Setting” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts” volume
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 102 MU - 103
[5-9] SHADING/SENSITIVITY [5-9-2] CALCULATION
Makes shading and polygon corrections, or allows for the adjustment of indication of Calculates data (correction value) to be used in correcting the shading, polygon and
sensitivity data (S value). sensitivity.
REFERENCE During normal reading, the image is output after the nonuniformity due to the shading and
polygon and the sensitivity are corrected.
The value that has been set in the “SHADING/SENSITIVITY” menu becomes ineffective
when the machine is rebooted. You must perform “BACKUP” of the light-collecting data if The CALCULATION command calculates the necessary correction value for eliminating
you want to keep the setup value effective after reboot. (correcting) the nonuniformity on the read image data.
CAUTION
Exercise care in the following points in calculating the correction data for shading and polygon.
[5-9-1] SHADING/POLYGON CORRECTION • Before performing any correction, remove the cassette from the RU. If the cassette remains
loaded, no correction will be performed (regular reading is performed).
Enables or disables shading and polygon corrections. • To perform corrections, be sure to use an IP of either 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17"
ON: Normal state. When a uniformly exposed IP is read by means of the correction data, (35cm x 43cm) size. If an IP of any other size is used, an error results.
an image free from nonuniformity is output. • For IPs used for corrections, be sure to use IPs that have been exposed at a dose indicated in
the Procedure.
OFF: When a uniformly exposed IP is read, an image with nonuniformity is output by means If an IP that has not been exposed is used, an error results.
of the default data.
REFERENCE
If the image read from the IP is output as it is, the nonuniform image is obtained due to ■ Procedures
physical solid characteristics of the light collecting guide or the polygon. The RU usually Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts volume for details of procedures
corrects the solid characteristics and outputs a uniform image. When nonuniformity is found, of CALCULATION.
this command is used to intentionally output an uncorrected image so as to identify the
“17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
cause for the nonuniformity. (Set to OFF.)
Parts” volume
■ Procedures
(1) [5] [ENT] → [9] [ENT] → [1][ENT]
(2) Choose “1” (ON).
The system then checks the setup. When the checkout process ends normally, the
display reads “RESULT: OK”.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
Once the setup has been completed, perform “BACKUP” of the light-collecting data to save
the data that has been changed in a floppy disk.
If the machine is powered OFF without saving, the setup that has been done will be lost.
■ Display
|SCN>SS>1 .................................................. (1) |

| |
|0.QUIT |
|1.OFF |
|2.ON |
|SCN>SS>COL>1 .............................................. (2) |
| |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 104 MU - 105
[5-9-3] SENSITIVITY DATA [5-9-4] HV DATA
Adjusts the S value indicated on the film.

CAUTION
When the S value of the IP exposed at 1mR reads “195” on the film, adjustments are made
so that it reads “200”. This feature is for design analysis only. Do not use this feature in the market (for regular
FUJI FILM HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
Outline of skull Enters an HV voltage value.
L 4.0S200C*1.2*1.0AP
[5-9-5] PMT DATA
S value
CAUTION
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
XXXXX
L 4.0S200C*1.2*1.0AP 0000000001Fuji Hanako
Date of
exposure1992. 11. 27 [17:43]
[F] 23
Reduction :50% RT-04
FR9H45A5.EPS
Enters PMT data.

■ Procedures: Example where when the S value of the IP exposed at the reference
dose reads “25”, adjustments are made so that it reads “30”
(1) Have on hand an IP exposed at such a dose that the S value reads “25”.
Check the dose at the time of exposure by use of a calibrated dosimeter.
(2) [5][ENT] → [9][ENT] → [3][ENT]
A message then appears to prompt for the input of the S value.
(3) Enter the S value of the output image (for example, “25”).
A message then appears again to prompt for the input of the S value.
(4) Enter the S value to be expected (for example, “30”).
The sensitivity data is then adjusted, and when it ends normally, the display reads
“RESULT: OK”.
To abort the process during its execution, press the [Ctrl] and [C] keys simultaneously
and then press the [ENT] key.
(5) Read the IP provided in step (1).
Make sure that the S value on the output film reads “30”.
■ Display
|SCN>SS>3 .................................................. (2) |

| |
|INPUT CURRENT S VALUE. |
|INPUT(1 - 999):25 ......................................... (3) |
| |
|INPUT EXPECTED S VALUE. |
|INPUT(1 - 999):30 ......................................... (4) |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 106 MU - 107
[5-10] DATA MANAGEMENT [5-11] DIAGNOSTIC
Saves the scanner data into the FTP server (CL) or loads the saved scanner data. Starts the polygon and runs a diagnostic check on the scanner.
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
CAUTION
Execute “[5-1] INITIALIZE” before executing “[5-11] DIAGNOSTIC”.
Never reset the RU or power it OFF while any submenu of “DATA MANAGEMENT” is being
executed.
During its execution, the RU panel blinks with an audible “beep, beep, beep, ...” alert sounded. ■ Procedure
(1) [5] [ENT] → [11] [ENT]
[5-10-1] SAVE SCN DATA FROM RAM TO FLASH & FTP-SERV The self-diagnostics result is displayed.
■ Display
Saves the scanner data stored in the main memory into the flash memory and FTP server
(CL). The image display of DIANOSTIC differs depending on the RU software version. Refer to
the Appendix for the display of the RU software versions A01 to A04.
[5-10-2] LOAD SCN DATA FROM FTP-SERV TO RAM & FLASH
Loads the scanner data stored in the flash memory and FTP server into the main memory.
[5-10-3] DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC
Displays a list of files that have been saved in the FTP server (CL) during the time interval
between machine power ON and “[10-3] DISPLAY SCN DATA ETC” execution.
■ Procedure
(1) [5] [ENT] → [10] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [3] [ENT]
A file list then appears on the display.
■ Display Detail code

Error code FR6H3090.EPS
|SCN>DTM>DISP>3 |
| |
|SCN_SHDG.DAT |
|SCN_POLY.DAT |
|SCN_ISEN.DAT |
|SCN_IFMT.DAT |
|SCN_OFMT.DAT |
|SCN_LDIF.DAT |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 108 MU - 109
[5-12] VIRTUAL IMAGE ■ Display: Example where “LIGHT” is used to generate ima ge data (For 1-to-1
Connection)
Causes image data to be generated.
■ Functions
● LIGHT:
Inputs the light of the LED on the PMT12A board through the light-collecting guide to output
an image.
It can be checked to see whether or not the cause of image abnormality is due to a failure of
the scanner optics unit.
● LOG AMP:
Causes the LOG AMP on the PMT board to generate and output image data.
By using “LIGHT” and “SCN12A INPUT” in combination, it can be checked to see whether or
not the cause of image abnormality is due to a failure of the light-collecting unit.
● SCN12A INPUT :
Cause the scanner board to generate image data and send the image data to the sub-CPU
on the CPU12A board.
It can be checked to see whether or not the cause of image abnormality is due to an image
processing error on the CPU board.
■ Procedures: Example where “LIGHT” is used to generate ima ge data (For N-to-N
■ Procedures: Example where “LIGHT” is used to generate image data (For 1-to-1 Connection)
Connection) ◆ NOTE◆
(1) Register the examination menu. For an N-to-N connection setup, the following error will occur if the following procedure is
Select the menu on the CL and register it. executed without inputting the barcode.
(2) Make the RU ready for reading. → Error code 11404
illuminated). (1) Register the examination menu.
(3) [5][ENT] → [12][ENT] → [1][ENT] Select the menu on the CL and register it.
A menu then appears to prompt you to select the LED’s luminescence quantity. (2) Make the RU ready for reading.
(4) [1][ENT] Manipulate the CL to make the RU ready for reading (with the cassette loading lamp
illuminated).
(3) Using the barcode reader of the CL, enter the barcode.
An image that is similar in cases where an IP exposed at the “Signal Level” dose
displayed on screen is read is outputted, and when the process ends normally, the (4) [5][ENT] → [12][ENT] → [1][ENT]
display reads “RESULT: OK”. A menu then appears to prompt you to select the LED’s luminescence quantity.
Output example: Uniform gray image (5) [1][ENT]
The display reads “RESULT: OK”.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 110 MU - 111
(6) Set the cassette in position. [5-12-1] LIGHT
An image similar in cases where an IP exposed at the “Signal Level” dose displayed on
the screen is read is output. Directs the PMT12A board LED light toward the reader and reads the LED light entered from
Output example: Uniform gray image the light-collecting guide to generate an image.
After the light is collected by a photomultiplier, the system performs image processing in the
same manner as for a regular read operation.
[5-12-2] LOG AMP
Causes the logarithmic amplifier on the PMT board to generate image data and send the
image data to the scanner board.
The scanner board and subsequent sections perform image processing in the same manner
as for a regular read operation.
[5-12-3] SCN12A INPUT
■ Display: Example where “LIGHT” is used to generate image data (For N-to-N Causes the scanner board to generate image data and send the image data to the sub-CPU
Connection) on the CPU12A board.
The sub-CPU and subsequent sections perform image processing in the same manner as
for a regular read operation.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 112 MU - 113
[6] MECHANICAL UTILITY The image display of the procedure for driving and stopping the motor differs depending on
the RU software version. Refer to the Appendix for the procedure and display of the RU
software versions A02 to A04.
[6-1] MOTOR
Runs and stops a motor.
You can use the factory default parameter settings (rotation direction, rotation speed, stop [6-1-1] Motor drive and stop
mode, etc.) or change such default settings.
The motor names and mounting locations are indicated below: Drives and stops a motor.
MA1 Suction cup drive motor
■ Procedures
MB1 Conveyance motor
(1) [6] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
MC1 Side-positioning motor
The display then prompts for the selection of a motor.
MC2 Grip release motor
(2) Choose “1'” (MA1).
MC3 Conveyance motor
(3) Choose “1'” (DRIVE).
Suction cup drive motor Cassette set unit Motor drives.
MA1 Unit A
(4) [2] [ENT]
Motor stops.
M (5) [0] [ENT]
MB1: CW rotation for feed conveyance
CCW ■ Display
M
Conveyance motor | MU>MTR>1 .............................................. (1) |
CW
CW MB1
| |
| INPUT THE NUMBER OF DRIVE MOTOR. |
| 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 |
FRONT Erasure conveyor | INPUT(0 - 5):1 ........................................ (2) |
Unit B
| 0.QUIT |
CW
| 1.DRIVE |
| 2.STOP |
| INPUT(0 - 2):1 ........................................ (3) |
| 0.QUIT |
CCW | 1.DRIVE |
Side-positioning
CW | 2.STOP |
conveyor Unit C
O NT | INPUT(0 - 2):1 ........................................ (4) |
FR MC3: CW rotation for
Latch drive feed conveyance | RESULT : OK |
Latch CW
Gear
CCW
CCW
Latch assembly
M
M
Conveyance motor
MC3
Grip release motor
MC2
FR6H3057.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 114 MU - 115
[6-1-2] Parameter setup ■ Procedures

(1) [6] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
Sets the ten motor drive parameters. The display then prompts for the selection of a motor.
(2) Choose “1'” (MA1).
Menu item Setup item The display then prompts for the selection of a parameter.
[1] ROTATION DIRECTION Direction of rotation (CW or CCW) (3) Choose “1'” (rotation direction).
[2] TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES Total pulse count The display then prompts for the input of a rotation direction.
[3] HI-SPEED High-speed value (4) Choose “1” (CW).
[4] LOW-SPEED Low-speed value The display then reads “RESULT: OK”, and the parameter that has been set becomes
[5] SLEW UP TIME Rise time effective.
[6] SLEW DOWN TIME Fall time (5) [0] [ENT]
[7] POWER-DOWN DELAY TIME Power-down delay time
[8] MAGNETIC PHASE Phase excitation type
■ Display
[9] MOVE AND MODE Operation/stop mode
| MU>MTR>1 .............................................. (1) |
[10] STOP MODE Stop mode
| |
| INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR. |
REFERENCES | 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 |
• The motor drive parameters can be variously set for all motors. The entered settings | INPUT(0 - 5):1 ........................................ (2) |
remain effective while the power is ON. | |
• When you choose “[6-1-2] DRIVE”, the system drives a motor in accordance with the | 1.ROTATION DIRECTION |
parameter settings.
| 2.TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES |
• The parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by turning OFF the power or
executing “[6-1-4] LOAD PARAMETER FROM FTP-SERV.”. | 3.HI-SPEED |
| 4.LOW-SPEED |
| 5.SLEW UP TIME |
| 6.SLEW DOWN TIME |
| 7.POWER-DOWN DELAY TIME |
| 8.MAGNETIC PHASE |
| 9.MOVE AND MODE |
| 10.STOP MODE |
| >MCN>MTR>PRM>MTR>PRM>1 ................................ (3) |
| |
| INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION. |
| 1.CW |
| 2.CCW |
| INPUT(1 - 2):1 ........................................ (4) |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 116 MU - 117
[6-1-3] Parameter initialization [6-2] ACTUATOR
Restores the parameters to the factory default settings. Drives and stops solenoids, pump, clutch, erasure lamps, and subscanning unit motors on
an individual basis.
REFERENCE
The names and operating states of the actuators are shown below:
The parameters can also be initialized by turning OFF the power.
Name DRIVE STOP
CLA1 Cassette extrusion clutch Clutch ON Clutch OFF
■ Procedures SVA1 Leak valve IP suction released Stopped
(1) [6] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [4] [ENT] SOLZ1 IP stopper solenoid Stopper protruding Stopper retracted
A prompt then appears on the display, asking whether you want to download the SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid Cassette released Cassette held
factory default settings for the parameters. PA1 Suction pump IP vacuum-retained Stopped
(2) Choose “1'” (YES). LAMP Erasure lamps Lamps illuminated Lamps extinguished
FAN Erasure unit cooling fan (FAN3) Driven Stopped
The system then downloads the default parameter settings and the display reads
MZ1 Subscanning motor Driven Stopped
“RESULT: OK”.
MZ2 Grip drive motor Driven Stopped
■ Display MZ3 Dust removal motor Driven Stopped
|MU>MTR>4 .................................................. (1) |

FR6H3072.EPS
| |
|ARE YOU SURE DOWN-LOAD THE MOTOR CONTROL PARAMETER? |
|1.YES 2.NO(DEFFAULT=2):1 .................................. (2) |
| |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 118 MU - 119
The actuator mounting locations are shown below: [6-2-1] Actuator drive
Cassette set unit Drives an actuator.

Unit A
Leak valve
Cassette extrusion clutch
SVA1
■ Procedures: Example where the cassette e xtrusion clutch (CLA1) is to be driven
CLA1
Suction pump
(1) [6] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
M PA1 The display then prompts for the selection of an actuator.
(2) Choose “1'” (CLA1).
M The system then drives the selected actuator and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
Cassette hold solenoid SolA1 OFF (3) [2] [ENT]
After a little while, the selected actuator comes to a stop.
FRONT Erasure conveyor • Be sure to execute “STOP” before executing “DRIVE”.
Unit B • The actuator will not operate even if you execute “DRIVE” in succession after executing
“DRIVE”.
• Be sure to execute “STOP” after executing “DRIVE”.
Grip drive motor MZ2 Erasure lamps LAMP
(The rotation direction
(CW or CCW) can be
confirmed by noting
REFERENCE
the cam.) The erasure lamp automatically turns OFF 20 seconds after driving.
Subscanning motor Unit C
MZ1
Dust removal motor

CW ■ Display
M
MZ3 CCW
M
MZ3 | MU>ACT>4 ........................................... (1) |
| |
CW
| INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR. |
M
CCW CCW M | 0.QUIT 1.CLA1 2.SVA1 |
CCW M | 3.SOLZ1 4.SOLA1 5.PA1 6.LAMP |
CW
FRONT
| 7.MZ3 8.MZ2 9.MZ1(FFM) 10.FAN 11.ALL |
| INPUT(0 - 10) ...................................... (2) |
| |
Subscanning unit IP stopper solenoid IP conveyance
path surface | RESULT : OK |
Unit Z SolZ1
Sol : OFF
SolZ1 SZ4
FR6H3058.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 120 MU - 121
[6-3] SENSOR The sensor mounting locations are shown below:
Monitors a sensor and displays its status (open or closed). Cassette set unit Cassette IN sensor Suction cup HP sensor
Unit A SA2 SA4
You can monitor a specific sensor individually or all sensors simultaneously.
The names and OPEN/CLOSE states of the sensors are indicated below:
Name On-screen indication: CLOSE On-screen indication: OPEN Cassette ejection sensor M
SA1
SA1 Cassette ejection sensor The shutter is closed. The shutter is open. Suction sensor
SA2 Cassette IN sensor The cassette is set in position. The cassette is not set in position. SA5
M
SA3 Hold sensor The cassette is unlocked. The cassette is locked.
SA4 Suction cup HP sensor The home position is reached. The home position is not reached.
SA5 Suction sensor An IP is vacuum-retained. No IP is vacuum-retained. Hold sensor IP sensor
SB1 IP sensor An IP is present. No IP is present. SA3 SB1
SC1 Side-positioning HP sensor The home position is reached. The home position is not reached.
SC2 Grip release HP sensor The home position is reached. The home position is not reached. Unit B
SC3 IP sensor An IP is present. No IP is present.
SC4 IP sensor An IP is present. No IP is present.
SZ2 Driving-side grip release HP sensor The grip is released. The grip is activated. IP sensor
SZ3
SC4
SZ3 Driven-side grip release HP sensor The grip is activated. The grip is released.
SZ4 IP stopper HP sensor The home position is reached. The home position is not reached. Driving-side grip release HP sensor
SZ2
SZ5 Dust removal sensor The dust remover is operating. The dust remover is stopped. Side-positioning conveyor
LDSN Lamp illumination failure sensors The lamps are illuminated. The lamps are extinguished. Unit C
1-3
FR6H3060.EPS Grip release HP sensor
M SC2
M
SC1
Dust removal sensor
SZ5 M
M
M
Subscanning unit
Unit Z IP stopper HP sensor IP sensor
SZ4 SC3
LDSN1-LDSN3: Lamp illumination failure circuitry

(mounted on the INV12A board) FR6H3059.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 122 MU - 123
[6-3-1] Individual sensor monitoring [6-3-2] Overall sensor monitoring
Monitors a specified sensor on an individual basis. Monitors all the sensors simultaneously.
REFERENCE
■ Procedures: Example where the cassette ejection sensor (SA1) is to be monitored
This menu item monitors the sensor status that prevails when the monitoring command is
(1) [6] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] issued. To monitor sensor state transitions in real time, execute “[6-3-3] REAL-TIME
The display then prompts for the selection of a sensor. MONITOR ALL”.
(2) Choose “1'” (SA1).
The system then indicates the status of the selected sensor (SA1) and displays the
message “RESULT: OK”. ■ Procedure
(1) [6] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
■ Display The system then presents the status information about all sensors and displays the
message “RESULT: OK”.
| MU>SNS>1 .............................................. (1) |
| | ■ Display
| INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR. |
| 0.QUIT 1.SA1 2.SA2 3.SA3 4.SA4 5.SA5 | | MU>SNS>2 .............................................. (1) |
| 6.SB1 7.SC1 8.SC2 9.SC3 | | Open:o/Close:x |
| 10.SC4 11.SZ2 | | ———————————————–– |
| 12.SZ3 13.SZ4 | | SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL |
| 14.SZ5 15.LDSN1 16.LDSN2 17.LDSN3 | | AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD |
| INPUT(0 - 17):1 ....................................... (2) | | 12345112342345SSS |
| | | NNN |
| Open | | 123 |
| RESULT : OK | | ————————————————– |
| ooxoxoxxooxoxooo |
| |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 124 MU - 125
[6-3-3] REAL-TIME MONITOR ALL [6-4] UNIT
Monitors the state transitions of all sensors in real time. Runs operational checkout on the following units:
The on-screen indication changes when the monitored sensor status changes or when the ● Cassette set unit: IP feed/load operation
sensor light path is intentionally blocked.
● Side-positioning conveyor: Side-positioning and side-positioning grip operation
REFERENCES
• A regular reading operation is not performed even when a cassette is inserted after the ● Subscanning unit: Subscanning grip operation, subscanning read operation, and IP
monitoring is initiated. conveyance operation
• If you want to convey the IP while monitoring the sensor, execute “[3-1-4] MONITOR The associated unit locations and operating I/Os are shown below:
READING & ERASURE”.
Suction cup drive motor Cassette set unit Suction cup HP sensor
MA1 Unit A SA4
■ Procedures: Example where the cassette IN sensor (SA2) is to be monitored Leak valve
SVA1
(1) [6] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [3] [ENT]
Suction pump
The display then presents the status information about all sensors. M PA1
(2) [Ctrl]+[c]+[ENT] Suction sensor
SA5
The monitoring ends. M
Conveyance motor
■ Display MB1
IP sensor
MU>SNS>3 (1) SB1
Open:o/Close:x
Unit B
SSSSSSSSSSSSSSLLL
AAAAABCCCCZZZZDDD
12345112342345SSS
NNN
123
ooxxxoxxooxoxoxxx ←Sensor status after RU bootup Side-positioning conveyor

Unit C
xxxxxoxxooxoxoxxx ←Sensor status upon cassette insertion
M
The status is changed. M
FR6H3078.EPS
M
M
M
Subscanning unit
Unit Z IP stopper solenoid IP stopper HP sensor
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 126 MU - 127
[6-4-1] IP feed/load operation checkout [6-4-2] Side-positioning grip operation checkout
Performs an IP feed operation, IP load operation, and MA1/MB2 home-positioning operation Returns the side-positioning conveyor grip mechanism to its HP.
for operational checkout purposes. The associated unit location and operating I/Os are shown below:
■ Procedures: Example where IP feed operation is to be checked

(1) Set a cassette in position.
(2) [6] [ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [1] [ENT] → [2] [ENT]
After a little while, the IP feed operation is executed, and the display reads “RESULT: Unit C
OK”.
■ Display FRONT
| MU>UNIT>IFL>2 ......................................... (2) | SC1
| COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS |
| INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY. | M MC1
| RESULT : OK | M
FR6H3065.EPS
■ Procedure
(1) [6] [ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [2] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
The system then returns the side-positioning conveyor grip mechanism to its HP and
the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display
| MU>UNIT>SPG>1 ......................................... (1) |

| |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 128 MU - 129
[6-4-3] Side-positioning operation checkout [6-4-4] Subscanning grip operation checkout
Returns the side-positioning mechanism of the side-positioning conveyor to the HP.

CAUTION
The associated unit location and operating I/Os are shown below:
With software version A02 or earlier, this feature is not implemented, so it should not be used.
Returns the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit to the HP.

The associated unit location and operating I/Os are shown below:

SZ3
O NT
FR Driving-side grip release HP sensor FRONT
MC1
SZ2
SC1 Grip drive motor

MZ2
FR6H3074.EPS
M
M
■ Procedure
(1) [6] ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [3] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
The system then returns the side-positioning mechanism of the side-positioning
conveyor to the HP and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display
Subscanning unit
Unit Z FR6H3066.EPS
| MU>UNIT>SPU>1 ......................................... (1) |
| |
| COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS | ■ Procedure
| RESULT : OK | (1) [6] [ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [1] [ENT]
The system then returns the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit to the HP and
the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display
| MU>UNIT>SRG>1 ......................................... (1) |

| |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 130 MU - 131
[6-4-5] Subscanning read operation checkout [6-4-6] IP conveyance operation checkout
Causes the erasure conveyor and side-positioning conveyor to perform an IP conveyance

CAUTION operation.
With software version A04 or earlier, this feature is not implemented, so it should not be used. The associated unit locations and operating I/Os are shown below:
If it is used, an error results, with error code “13011” displayed.
Cassette set unit
Unit A
Causes the subscanning unit to perform a read operation.
The associated unit locations and operating I/Os are shown below:

M
SZ3 FRONT
Driving-side grip release HP sensor M

SZ2
Conveyance motor
Grip drive motor MB1
Unit C
MZ2
Subscanning motor M
MZ1
M
Unit B
M
M
M
Conveyance motor
MC3
Subscanning unit
Unit Z Side-positioning conveyor
IP sensor
Unit C
SC3 FR6H3067.EPS
■ Procedure
(1) [6] ENT] → [4] [ENT] → [5] [ENT]
The subscanning unit then performs a read operation and the display reads “RESULT:
OK”.
M
■ Display M
M
Conveyance motor
MC3
|MU>UNIT>SRD>1 ............................................. (1) |
FR6H3068.EPS
| |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS | The image display and procedure for checking the IP conveyance differ depending on the
RU software version. Refer to the Appendix for the procedure and display of the RU
|RESULT : OK |
software versions A02 to A04.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 132 MU - 133
■ Procedures [6-4-7] SCANNER CLEANING (MZ3)

(1) [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [6][ENT]
The display then prompts you to specify the direction of motor rotation. CAUTION
(2) Select “1” (FEED).
With software version A04 or earlier, this feature is not implemented, so it should not be
The display then prompts you to specify the operation (drive or stop). used.
(3) Select “1” (DRIVE).
The IP conveyance operation is then started. Causes the axis of the light-collecting mirror to be rotated, thereby cleaning the light-
(4) Select “2” (STOP). collecting face of the light-collecting guide.
The IP conveyance operation is then stopped. The function of this menu is the same as the scanner cleaning function in the User Utility.
(5) [0][ENT] ■ Functions

■ Display ● HOME POSITION
Cleans the light-collecting face of the light-collecting guide by rotating the light-collecting
|MU>UNIT>6 ................................................. (1) | mirror, and performs home-positioning operation.
| | ● LOCK (ref. service manual)
|INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION. | Rotates the light-collecting mirror to move it to a locked position. Use this function when
|0.QUIT | moving the RU on a bumpy floor by use of the casters.
|1.FEED | If this menu is executed, the RU will not work normally. To reset the locked condition, power
|2.LOAD | OFF the RU and then back ON.
|INPUT(1 - 2):1 ............................................ (2) |
■ Procedure for HOME POSITION
|0.QUIT |
|1.DRIVE | (1) [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [7][ENT] → [1][HOME POSITION]
|2.STOP | Cleaning is then performed.
|INPUT(0 - 2):1 ............................................ (3) |
■ Display of HOME POSITION
|0.QUIT |
|1.DRIVE |
|MU>UNIT>SCH>1 ............................................. (1) |
|2.STOP |
| |
|INPUT(0 - 2):2 ............................................ (4) |
|COMMAND IS IN PROGRESS |
|0.QUIT |
|RESULT : OK |
|1.DRIVE |
|2.STOP |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 134 MU - 135
■ Procedures for LOCK (ref. service manual) [7] SOFTWARE UTILITY

(1) [6][ENT]→[4][ENT]→[7][ENT]→[2][LOCK]
The light-collecting mirror is locked. Displays configuration information and temporarily changes information required for network
connection.
[7-1] DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
◆ NOTE ◆
If “LOCK” is executed, the RU will not work normally. Thus, power OFF the RU immediately. Displays the contents of configuration information in the flash memory on the CPU12A
board.
■ Display of LOCK (ref. service manual) ■ Functions
● IRSET.CFG: Displays the setup contents of IRSET.CFG
● IRSTATASUS.CFG: Displays the setup contents of IRSTATASUS.CFG.
● NETMASK: Displays the setup contents of NETMASK.
● ROUTE (GATEWAY): Displays the setup contents of ROUTE (GATEWAY).
■ Procedure: Example where “IRSET.CFG” is to be displayed

(1) [7][ENT] → [1][ENT] → [1][ENT]
The setup contents of IRSET.CFG are displayed.
■ Display: Example of “IRSET.CFG” display

The image display of DISPLAY CONFIGURATION differs depending on the RU software
FR6H3345.EPS version. Refer to the Appendix for the display of the RU software version A04 or earlier.
FR6H3340.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 136 MU - 137
[7-2] TEMPORAR Y SETTING ■ Display: Example where the unit name of the RU is temporarily changed
Sets information required for network connection with the CL and FTP. By restarting the RU,
the setup contents temporarily become effective.
CAUTION
When you change the IP address, connection between the RU and CL will not be
established unless the CL has the same IP address as that of the RU.
■ Functions
● READER UNIT NAME: Temporarily changes the unit name of the RU.
● READER UNIT IP ADDR: Temporarily changes the IP address of the RU.
● HOST (CL): Temporarily changes the IP address of the CL.
● INFO-HOST IP ADDR: Temporarily changes the IP address of the host.
● FTP-SERV IP ADDRESS: Temporarily changes the IP address of the FTP server.
● NETMASK: Temporarily changes the net mask.
● ROUTE (GATEWAY): Temporarily changes the IP address of the gateway.
The procedure and image display of TEMPORARY SETTING differ depending on the RU
software version. Refer to the Appendix for the procedure and display of the RU software
version A04 or earlier. FR6H3096.EPS
■ Procedures: Example where the unit name of the RU is to be temporarily changed

(1) [7][ENT] → [2][ENT]
The setup content for each item is displayed.
(2) Enter a new unit name (for example, “ru6”) in the “Input menu TEMP. SETTING” field.
The content entered is then displayed in the “Current TEMP. SETTING” field.
(3) To update the values in the FLASH-ROM, restart the RU.
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
MU - 138 MU - 139
[8] BACKUP MEMORY [9] HV ON/HV OFF
Initializes the backup memory located on the CPU board of the RU.
CAUTION
■ Functions Before turning ON the HV switch (software switch), check to see whether the cover is installed.
Initializes the following three types of information. If the HV switch is turned ON with the cover removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
● Scanner information
Turns ON and OFF the HV switch (software switch).
Set “HV ON/OFF data (soft setup information)” and “Scanner initial drive current value
(LDIF)” to their soft default values. When “[9] HV ON/OFF” is executed, the system checks the status of the HV switch before
turning ON or OFF the HV switch.
When it is turned ON, the system checks a response from the photomultiplier board and
● Mech information displays the result.
Set “FFM speed data” to its soft default value. Also initialize “HISTORY LOG” collected since
power-ON. ■ Meaning of Display
Display Status
● Soft information HV ON → The HV switch is OFF.
Set “RU HOST NAME (SET)”, “RU IP ADDRESS”, “HOST (CL) IP ADDRESS”, “FTP- HV OFF → The HV switch is ON.
SERVER IP ADDRESS”, “INFO-HOST IP ADDRESS”, and “NETMASK” to their soft default
values.
■ Procedures
(1) [8][ENT] → [1][ENT]
The display prompts you to confirm whether the backup memory is to be initialized or
not.
(2) [1][ENT]
The backup memory is initialized.
■ Display
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx MU 1 - 1 Appx MU 1 - 2
Appendix 1 Outline of Older Software 1.2 Timing of Updating Flash ROM during Installation (for PC-
MUTL Software Version 1.1 or Earlier)
Various versions with different specifications of the RU service utility have been released
according to change in specification of the machine or the release of a new type reader unit. Executing installation writes the RU software into the CL’s FTP server. The RU software is
installed into the RU flash ROM by the automatic update function when the CL or the RU is
The RU service utility consists of the RU application programs and the PC-MUTL, which
rebooted thereafter.
have been issued in respective versions. Their usable combinations are limited.
REFERENCE
1.1 Timing of Updating Flash ROM of Configuration Refer to the Appendix of the Machine Description volume for details of the automatic update
function.
Information (for PC-MUTL Software Version 1.1 or Earlier) “Appendix 1 Mechanism of Automatic Updating” in the “Machine Description” volume
When the configuration information is changed by using the PC-MUTL, the contents of the
CL’s FTP server and the RU flash ROM are updated. The timing when the contents of the
RU flash ROM is updated differs depending on the software version.
REFERENCE
In the PC-MUTL version 1.1 (RF software version A06) or earlier, the configuration
information is written only into the CL’s FTP server, and written into the RU flash ROM by the
automatic update function when the power of the CL or the RU is turned ON. Refer to the
Appendix of the Machine Description volume for details of the automatic update function.
“Appendix 1 Mechanism of Automatic Updating” in the “Machine Description” volume
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MU 1 - 1 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx MU 1 - 2
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
1.3 Image Display on EDIT CONFIGURATION ■ PC-MUTL Version 1.1 (Window for RU Software Version A05 and A06)
The image displays and functions of EDIT CONFIGURATION differ depending on the PC- IP address of the RU
MUTL version (RU software version). Described in this section are examples of the PC- IP address of the CL
MUTL versions 1.0 and 1.1. Refer to “2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for settings in respective IP address of the FTP server
items. Subnet mask
“2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION” Route address
telnet-connectable IP address
■ PC-MUTL Version 1.0 (Window for RU Software Version A01 to A04) telnet-connectable net mask
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY Identification code of the RU
READER UNIT SETTING
IP address of the RU Erasure mode
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10
IP address of the CL Erasure mode setup cancel time
CL IP ADDR 172 16 1 10
Subnet mask IP barcode availability or type
NET MASK 255 255 0 0
Alarm setting for cassette setting
Route address
ROUTE 0 0 0 0 Alarm setting for erasure processing
Identification code of the RU
EQUIPMENT CODE A Alarm setting for overexposed IP
Erasure mode
RANGE OF ERASE MODE ERASE1,ERASE2 Setting of AUTO UPDATE
IP barcode availability or type
IP ERASE TYPE (FOR NO BARCODE) 6
Alarm setting for cassette setting
ALARM (CASSETTE SET) ON
Alarm setting for erasure processing
ALARM (MODE SWITCH) ON
Alarm setting for overexposed IP
WARNING OF OVERXRAY LOG&MESSAGE to the setup content is undone. is made effective. FR6H3104.EPS
CANCEL SET

to the setup content is undone. is made effective.
FR6H3006.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
1.4 PC-MUTL Displayed Screen and Functions ■ Window for RU Software Version A07 to A08 (PC-MUTL Version 1.2)
2.11 FTP Server Designation window
Image displays and functions of the PC-MUTL differ depending on the PC-MUTL version.
2.13 Clear Backup Data
Refer to the related sections for details of the function of each item.
2.14 Rescue APPL via NetWork (Soft up date)
■ Window for RU Software Version A01 to A04 (PC-MUTL Version 1.0) 2.1 CONNECTION TEST
RU SERVICE UTILITY window 2.2 INSTALL 2.1 CONNECTION TEST
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10 2.3 EDIT HISTORY 2.3
MUTL PING EDIT HITORY
2.4
2.4 EDIT CONFIGURATION 2.2 EDIT
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION INSTALL CONFIGURATION
BACKUP (RU→HD→FD) RESTORE (FD→HD→RU) 2.5 2.6 RESTORE
ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION 2.6 RESTORE BACKUP
2.10 2.9
EXECUTE EXECUTE I/O TRACE ERROR DB
EXPERT
ALL RUs SETTING
UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP 2.7 UNINSTALL 2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/

VERSION UP FR6H3098.EPS
CAUTION
2.7 UNINSTALL 2.5 BACKUP 2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/
VERSION UP
The PC-MUTL includes different cautions depending on the software version to be used.
FR6H3007.EPS
Refer to following for the details of cautions for each version.
■ Window for RU Software Version A05 to A06 (PC-MUTL Version 1.1) “Appendix 2 Cautions for Each of PC-MUTL Versions”
2.11 FTP Server Designation window 2.1 CONNECTION TEST
2.3
EDIT HITORY
2.4
2.2
EDIT
INSTALL
CONFIGURATION
2.5 2.6
BACKUP RESTORE
2.10 2.9
I/O TRACE ERROR DB
EXPERT
2.7 UNINSTALL 2.8 PREVIOUS VERSION/

VERSION UP FR6H3094.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appendix 2 Cautions for Each of PC-MUTL Versions 2.3 Combination of the PC-MUTL Version and the Windows OS
The Windows OS to be supported differs depending on the PC-MUTL version.
The PC-MUTL includes different cautions depending on the software version to be used.
The following three items are to be noticed depending on the PC-MUTL version. • PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier: supports only Windows 2000.
• Combination of the PC-MUTL and the RU software programs • PC-MUTL version 1.4 or later: supports Windows 2000 and XP.
• Cautions in using the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier
• Combination of the PC-MUTL version and the Windows OS ◆ NOTE ◆
If the CL terminal is of the Windows XP, the PC-MUTL version 1.4 or later should be used.
2.1 Combination of the PC-MUTL and the RU Software If the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier is used, the following error is resulted when executing
the INSTALL or VERSION UP command.
Programs → “Error code: 31346”
The RU application program and the PC-MUTL serve as the RU service utility in conjunction
with each other. If their versions do not conform to the specifications, they do not work
normally as the RU service utility.
Usable combinations are as follows
CR-IR346RU PC-MUTL
application software version
A01–A04 1.0
A05–A06 1.1
A07 1.2
A08 1.3
A09 1.4
FR6H43A18.EPS
2.2 Cautions in Using the PC-MUTL Version 1.3 or Earlier

When the PC-MUTL version 1.3 or earlier is to be used, the mechanism of installing the RU
message file differs from that for the PC-MUTL version 1.4 or later. Cautions need be used
when installing or version-updating by means of the PC-MUTL version or earlier. Refer to
the following for details of cautions.
■ Mechanism of the RU Message File

“2.1.3 Mechanism of Installing the RU Message File” in the “Machine Description”
volume
■ Checking when Iinstalling or Version-Updating

“Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version” in the “Checks, Replacement and
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appendix 3 Details of the M-Utility of Older Version [1] LOG
The M-Utility commands differ in the functions and image displays depending on the PC- [1-1-1] DISPLAY
MUTL software version. Described in this section is only the difference from the current
version. Refer to “3. Details of M-Utility” for the functions and displays not mentioned here. The image display of the error log differs depending on the RU software version. Mentioned
in this section are the displays for the RU software versions A02 to A04.
“3. Details of M-Utility”
■ Display: For Version A02
|LOG>ELG>DIS>ALL>1 ......................................... (1) |

|*** ERROR LOG ALL *** |
|CODE DATE |
|13603 2000.08.25 14:51:45 00DC05 toammoni_ |
| 3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 |
|10921 2000.08.25 14:50:33 00C014 toamerrsnd_ |
| 0 microtfnc,c 2138 |
| • |
| • |
| • |
|10921 2000.08.25 14:45:25 00C013 toamerrsnd_ |
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 1 ............................... (2) |
|CODE DATE |
|13603 2000.08.25 14:20:15 00DC05 toammoni_ |
| 3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 |
|10921 2000.08.25 14:05:01 00C014 toamerrsnd_ |
| 0 microtfnc,c 2138 |
| • |
| • |
| • |
|10921 2000.08.25 13:50:30 00C013 toamerrsnd_ |
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 0 ............................... (3) |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
■ Display: For Versions A03 and A04 [4] ELECTRICAL UTILITY
|LOG>ELG>DIS>ALL>1 ......................................... (1) | [4-6-2] READ TEST

|*** ERROR LOG ALL *** |
|CODE DATE | The procedure and image display of READ TEST differ depending on the RU software
|[13603] 2000/08/25 14:51:45 00DC05 toammoni_ | version. Mentioned in this section are the procedure and displays for the RU software
| :3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 | versions A02 to A04.
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:50:33 00C014 toamerrsnd_ |
■ Procedures
| :0 microtfnc,c 2138 |
| • |
| • | Manipulate the CL to make the RU ready for reading (with the cassette loading lamp
illuminated).
| • |
(2) [6][ENT]→[4][ENT]→[1][ENT]→[2][ENT]
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:45:25 00C013 toamerrsnd_ |
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 1 ............................... (2) | The system then executes IP feed of the MECHANICAL UTILITY.
|CODE DATE | (3) Set a barcode-ready IP cassette into the IP set unit.
|[13603] 2000/08/25 14:20:15 00DC05 toammoni_ | The IP is fed.
| :3D0004 commonitar_Op.c 258 | (4) [0][ENT]→[0][ENT]→[0][ENT]
|[10921] 2000/08/25 14:05:01 00C014 toamerrsnd_ | The MECHANICAL UTILITY then closes with the IP feed in progress.
| :0 microtfnc,c 2138 | (5) [4][ENT]→[6][ENT]
| • |
(6) Select “2” (READ TEST).
| • |
(7) Remove the IP set unit cover and manually rotate the conveyance roller and so forth to
| • | convey the IP that has been fed, to a position where the barcode reader is located.
|[10921] 2000/08/25 13:50:30 00C013 toamerrsnd_ |
When the barcode is read normally, the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
|0.END 1.NEXT(DEFAULT=1) : 0 ............................... (3) |
If the barcode cannot be read even under condition where the barcode is located at
the barcode reading position, the barcode reader is faulty.
■ Display
|EU>6 ...................................................... (5)|

| |
|0.QUIT |
|1.COMMUNICATION |
|2.READ TEST |
|EU>BCR>2 .................................................. (6)|
|INTERRUPTION : HIT[^C] + ENT KEY. |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
[5] SCANNER UTILITY [6] MECHANICAL UTILITY
[5-11] DIAGNOSTIC [6-1] MOTOR
The image display of DIAGNOSTIC differs depending on the RU software version. [6-1-1] Parameter setup (For version A02 through A04)
Mentioned in this section are the image displays for the RU software versions A01 to A04.
Sets the ten motor drive parameters.
■ Display
Menu item Setup item
[1] ROTATION DIRECTION Direction of rotation (CW or CCW)
[2] TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES Total pulse count
[3] HI-SPEED High-speed value
Error code Detail code [4] LOW-SPEED Low-speed value
[5] SLEW UP TIME Rise time
[6] SLEW DOWN TIME Fall time
[7] POWER-DOWN DELAY TIME Power-down delay time
[8] MAGNETIC PHASE Phase excitation type
[9] MOVE AND MODE Operation/stop mode
[10] STOP MODE Stop mode
REFERENCES
• The motor drive parameters can be variously set for all motors. The entered settings
remain effective while the power is ON.
• When you choose “[6-1-2] DRIVE”, the system drives a motor in accordance with the
parameter settings.
FR6H3084.EPS • The parameters can be restored to the factory default settings by turning OFF the power or
executing “[6-1-4] LOAD PARAMETER FROM FTP-SERV.”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
■ Procedures [6-1-2] Motor drive (for version A02 through A04)

(1) [6] [ENT]→[1] [ENT]→[1] [ENT]
The display then prompts for the selection of a motor. Drives a motor.
(2) Choose “1'” (MA1). REFERENCES

The display then prompts for the selection of a parameter. • The system drives a motor in accordance with the parameters, if they are set as described
under “[6-1-1] Parameter setup”, or in accordance with the factory default parameters, if
(3) Choose “1'” (rotation direction).
they are not set. The parameters that have been set remain effective until the system is
The display then prompts for the input of a rotation direction. powered OFF or reset.
(4) Choose “1” (CW). • If you want to forcefully stop the motor during its driving, select “[6-1-3] STOP”.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”, and the parameter that has been set becomes
effective.
■ Procedures
(5) [0] [ENT]
(1) [6] [ENT]→[1] [ENT]→[2] [ENT]
■ Display The display then prompts for the selection of a motor.
(2) Choose “1” (MA1).
| MU>MTR>1 .............................................. (1) | When the motor drives and stops in accordance with the parameters, the display reads
| | “RESULT: OK”.
| INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR. | If you want to forcefully stop the motor as in cases where the motor is driving for a long
| 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 | time with any of the parameters changed, enter “[3][ENT]”.
| INPUT(0 - 5):1 ........................................ (2) | (3) [3] [ENT]
| | The motor then comes to a stop.
| 1.ROTATION DIRECTION |
| 2.TOTAL NUMBER OF PULSES | ■ Display
| 3.HI-SPEED |
| 4.LOW-SPEED | | MU>MTR>2 .............................................. (1) |
| 5.SLEW UP TIME | | |
| 6.SLEW DOWN TIME | | INPUT THE NUMBER OF DRIVE MOTOR. |
| 7.POWER-DOWN DELAY TIME | | 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 |
| 8.MAGNETIC PHASE | | INPUT(0 - 5):1 ........................................ (2) |
| 9.MOVE AND MODE | | RESULT : OK |
| 10.STOP MODE |
| >MCN>MTR>PRM>MTR>PRM>1 ................................ (3) |
| |
| INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION. |
| 1.CW |
| 2.CCW |
| INPUT(1 - 2):1 ........................................ (4) |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
[6-1-3] Motor stop (for version A02 through A04) [6-1-4] Parameter initialization (for version A02 through A04)
Stops a motor. Restores the parameters to the factory default settings.

REFERENCE
■ Procedures: Example where the rotating motor (MA1) is to be stopped
The parameters can also be initialized by turning OFF the power.
(1) [3] [ENT]
The display then prompts for the selection of a motor.
(2) Choose “1'” (MA1). ■ Procedures
The motor then comes to a stop and the display reads “RESULT: OK”. (1) [6] [ENT]→[1] [ENT]→[4] [ENT]
A prompt then appears on the display, asking whether you want to download the
■ Display factory default settings for the parameters.
(2) Choose “1'” (YES).
The system then downloads the default parameter settings and the display reads
| 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 | “RESULT: OK”.
| INPUT(0 - 5):1 |
| RESULT : OK | ■ Display
| |
| 0.QUIT | |MU>MTR>4 .................................................. (1)|
| 1.PARAMETER | | |
| 2.DRIVE | |ARE YOU SURE DOWN-LOAD THE MOTOR CONTROL PARAMETER? |
| 3.STOP | |1.YES 2.NO(DEFFAULT=2):1 .................................. (2)|
| 4.LOAD PARAMETER FROM FTP-SERV | | |
| MU>MTR>3 ...................................... (1) | |RESULT : OK |
| |
| 0.QUIT 1.MA1 2.MB1 3.MC1 4.MC2 5.MC3 6.ALL |
| INPUT(0 - 6):1 ...................................... (2) |
| |
| RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
[6-4-6] IP conveyance operation checkout [7] SOFTWARE UTILITY
[7-1] DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

■ Procedures: For Version A03 and A04
(1) [6] [ENT]→[4] [ENT]→[6] [ENT]
The display then prompts you to specify the direction of motor rotation. ■ Display: Example of “IRSET.CFG” display (For Version A04 or Earlier)
(2) Choose “1'” (CW).
The erasure conveyor and side-positioning conveyor then perform an IP conveyance
operation and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
■ Display: For Version A03 and A04
|MU>UNIT>6 ................................................. (1)|

| |
|INPUT THE ROTATION DIRECTION. |
|1.CW |
|2.CCW |
|INPUT(1 - 2):1 ............................................ (2)|
| |
|RESULT : OK |
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
[7-2] TEMPORARY SETTING BLANK PAGE
■ Procedures: Example where the unit name of the RU is to be temporarily changed

(for version A04 or earlier)
(1) [7][ENT] → [2][ENT] → [1][ENT]
The display prompts for the input of a unit name of the RU.
(2) Enter a new unit name (for example, “ru1”).
The unit name of the RU is temporarily changed.
■ Display: Example where the unit name of the RU is temporarily changed (for version
A04 or earlier)
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Service Parts List Control Sheet SP - 1
Control Sheet
10.10.2000 00 New release（FM2753） All pages
06.20.2001 02 Corrections（FM3057） 1, 2, 4 ∼ 11, 13, 15 ∼ 17, 19, 23, 25,
27, 29, 31 ∼ 33, 35, 37, 39 ∼ 49, 51,
CR-IR346RU Service Manual 02.20.2002 05 Corrections（FM3327）

53, 54, 56 ∼ 67
1, 13, 17, 21, 25, 31, 38, 39, 41, 53,
56 ∼ 67
06.20.2004 08 Corrections（FM4337） 1, 5, 7, 9, 11 ∼13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23,
25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39, 41, 43,
45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 54, 56∼67, 70, 71
Service Parts List（SP）
010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337
CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 1
Service Parts List SP - 2 Service Parts List SP - 3
■ REF.NO. ■ REFER TO
How to Use Service
REF. NO. is a parts number indicated in the The "REFER TO" column shows the reference
Parts List Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts sections concerning the registered parts whose
having different functions, they are clearly removal/installation procedures are set forth
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL in the "Check, Replacement, and Adjustment"
■ RANK NUMBER columns. volume (MC).
As regards the parts whose information is set
● Handling RANK characters (parts that are
■ PART NUMBER forth in the "Check, Replacement, and
handled in a special manner during parts
PART NUMBER is a code number that is Adjustment" volume (MC), the associated
operation, such as replacement)
information about screws, E-rings, and the like
unique to each parts.
It is assigned only to applicable parts. is not presented within parts illustrations.
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty
An alphabetic letter at the right-most position To confirm the information about screws,
R Must be returned. Repairable
of the code number has the following mean- E-rings, and the like, refer to the "Check,
Must be returned.
ing. Replacement, and Adjustment" volume (MC).
Q Not repairable
(We use for analysis.)
❍ For hardware
Must be returned.
The alphabet denotes the version number of a ■ Quantities of recommended spare parts
(Consumable part.
T Not repairable
Not applicable for free part. If parts have different version numbers, It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in
of change.)
they are upward-compatible. stock a certain quantity of parts according to
without
R, Q, T
Must Not be returned. Not repairable ❍ For software the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the parts,
as follows. For periodically replaced parts,
TR1Z0002.EPS
The alphabet denotes a difference in the hold them in stock separately.
● Export regulation-applicable character specifications. Parts differing in the suffix are
(Parts without the following character are not compatible with each other. Although the Adjust the stock quantity of service parts
not controlled by Export regulation.) version is indicated by a number, it is omitted. depending on the number of working units
(N).
Character Significance
■ PART NAME Quantity used in a single system : Q
+ Parts applicable to export regulations.
PART NAME represents a general name of a
❍ N=1
TR1Z0003.EPS
part.
● Fault RANK characters (which provide Rank A = 1 + Q x 0.3
reference for determining the recom- ■ QTY.
Rank C = 1 + Q x 0.05
mended stock quantity) ❍ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used in Rank D = 1 + Q x 0.02
All parts are assigned either A through E. each unit. ❍ 2≤N≤10
❍ A parts with -S assigned to the end of the Rank A = 2 + N x Q x 0.3
Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts that will be
quantity represents a small part that is Rank C = 2 + N x Q x 0.05
A
replaced at short intervals. shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a part Rank D = 1 + N x Q x 0.02
Parts that may become faulty accidentally is ordered in quantity of 1 , a pack con-
B
and have a relatively high failure rate. ❍ 11≤N≤300
taining 50 pieces of that part is supplied.)
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, Rank A = 3 + N x Q x 0.3
C but are expected to have a relatively high
failure rate.
■ REMARKS Rank C = 3 + N x Q x 0.05
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, The REMARKS column indicates a unique Rank D = 3 + N x Q x 0.02
D
but are expected to become faulty.
name of a part of its relevant information of
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis,
note. ■ Precautions to be Observed When Re-
or parts that may be needed in case of
E unexpected accidents such as man-induced turning Parts in Need of Repair
damage. ■ SERIAL NUMBER When returning a component in need of
TR1Z0004.EPS
The units may contain different parts depend- repair, pack it in the same manner as for the
<The RANK guide>
ing on their shipment control number. SE- supplied substitute, using the substitute
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control packing materials.
RANK characters, and Export regulation- number to which the relevant parts are appli- The use of different packing materials or
applicable character are assigned in that cable. If the SERIAL NUMBER column is packing methods may incur damage to
order. blank, the parts are applicable to all the packed component during transit.
Thus, at leaset one character or up to three relevant units.
characters are assigned in the RANK The shipment control number is represented
column. by lower five disits of eight-disit number
indicated on the ratings name plate.
010-051-02 010-051-00
CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 2 CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 3
06.20.2001 FM3057 10.10.2000 FM2753
サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 4 サービスパーツリスト編／ Service Parts List SP - 5
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15

● カバー ● フレーム ● カセッテセット部 ● ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表 ● 消耗品一覧表 ● オプション
COVER FRAME CASSETTE SET UNIT TABLE OF SCREWS / LIST OF QUICK WEARING OPTION
WASHERS INDICATION PARTS
SYMBOLS
FR6H5006.EPS
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06

● 消去搬送部 ● 幅寄搬送部 ● 光学部
ERASURE CONVEYOR SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR SCANNING OPTICS UNIT

● 副走査部 ● 集光部 ● 制御部
SUBSCANNING UNIT LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT CONTROLLER

● ケーブル ● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表
CABLE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
FR6H5005.EPS
010-051-02 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057
CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 4 06.20.2004 FM4337
カバー 1 カバー 1
01A COVER 1 COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1
E 1 350Y1519 ネジカバー Screw Cover 4
E 2 350Y1496 上カバー Top Cover 1 3.1
E 3 356N8225B ブラケット Bracket 1
2
FR6H5051.EPS E 5 356N8171A ブラケット Bracket 2
E 6 350N2244B 背面上カバー Upper Rear Cover 1 3.1
E 7 350N2245B/C 背面下カバー Lower Rear Cover 1
D 8 345N1493 シールド材 Shielding Tape 1
21 D 9 345N1494A シールド材 Shielding Tape 1
X
2-BR4x8 E 10 352N0493A パネル Panel 1
2-BR4x8
6 右側面カバーアセ Right-Hand Side Cover
19 20 5 E 11 350Y1483 1 3.1
3 ンブリ Assembly
3-BR4x8
5 E 12 405N1770A 銘板 Label 1
E 13 356N8602 ブラケット Bracket 2
4 E 14 898Y0713 キット Kit 1 Option
3-BR4x8 E 15 350Y1530 前面カバー Front Cover 1 3.1
D 16 316S3098 ラッチ Latch 2
メカニカルフィル
18 D 17 376N0198A Mechanical Filter 1
タ
22
D 18 345N1280A ルーバ Louver 1
E 19 350N2059A カバー Cover 4 3.1
10 E 20 350N2243B 左側面カバー Left-Hand Side Cover 1 3.1
2-DT3x6
左側面カバーアセ Left-Hand Side Cover
17 E 21 350Y1482 1 3.1
ンブリ Assembly
6-DT3x6
E 22 308S0062 特殊ネジ Screw 1
8 X
12
7
9
DT3x8
16
16 DT3x8
W12
W12
13 W12
13
14
11
15 FR6H5902.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 6 010-051-08
CR-IR346RU Service Manual CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 7
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
カバー 2 カバー 2
01B COVER 2 COVER 2 01B
C 1 352Y0058B パネルアセンブリ Panel Assembly 1 5.1
E 2.1 405Y0157C 銘板 Label 1 5.1
E 2.2 405Y0166 銘板 Label 1 Japan Only(346V) 5.1
E 3.1 405N2644 銘板 Label 1 INC 5.1
FR6H5052.EPS E 3.2 405N2645 銘板 Label 1 MET 5.1
1
2 E 4 357N1271C 台 Base 1 5.1
D 5 113Y1469B ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 LED12A 5.1
D 6 340N0170D キートップ Key Top 1 5.1
3
D 7 350N2387C カバー Cover 1 5.1
D 8 382N1221A テープ Tape 2 W10 x L476
4 5 D 9 382N1222A テープ Tape 7 W10 x L171
7
6 D 10 382N1225A テープ Tape 2 W10 x L424
28 D 11 382N1315A テープ Tape 1 W10 x L429

D 12 382N1219A テープ Tape 4 W10 x L396
8
D 13 382N1220A テープ Tape 8 W10 x L333
D 14 382N1217A テープ Tape 4 W10 x L475
13 D 15 382N1218A テープ Tape 2 W10 x L580

10 D 16 382N1224A テープ Tape 1 W10 x L214
29
10 D 17 382N1223A テープ Tape 2 W10 x L164
27
D 18 345N1481 シールド材 Shielding Tape 1
メカニカルフィル
D 19 376N0215B Mechanical Filter 1 T5 x W94 x L134
12 9 タ
9 8 メカニカルフィル
D 20 376N0198A Mechanical Filter 2
13 タ
D 21 343N0048 フック Hook 1 3.1
12
14 11 E 22 345N1406D 上側遮板 Upper Light Protect Plate 1 3.1
13
9 D 23 345N1490A シールド材 Shielding Tape 1 3.1
15 E 24 345N1491C 下側遮板 Lower Light Protect Plate 1 3.1
9 16 E 25 350N2390C カバー Cover 1 3.1
9
E 26 350N2389C カバー Cover 1
13
4.1
E 27 345N1478B 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 4.2
BR4x8
19 6.2
20
13
E 28 405N2762B/C/D 銘板 Label 1 5.1
17 14
E 29 405N2643 銘板 Label 1
12
21 13
14 12 9
15
13
18 14
22 13
17
9
26
23
20
24
25 FR6H5901.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 8 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
フレームフレーム
02 FRAME FRAME 02
E 1 364S0006 ガード Guard 1 4.3
D 2 119S0006 ファン Fan 1 FAN4 4.3
E 3 356N6923B ブラケット Bracket 1 4.3
4.1
C 4 113Y1471D INV12B INV12B 1 INV12B
FR6H5055.EPS 4.4
2-DT3x6 3-DT3x6
E 5 356N6928E ブラケット Bracket 1 4.4
BR3x6
蛍光灯安定器 4.1
7 C 6 109N0016C Lamp Stabilizer 1 INV12A
4.4
2 8
DT3x6
3 D 8 387N0130D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 6.1
25 10 8 D 9 363N2242B ガイド板 Guide plate 1 6.1
1
D 10 387N0131B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 6.1
25 21 12 10
4 DT3x6
11 ***
D 12 386S0028 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 6.1
22
D 13 382N1398 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 3
9 E 14 375N0078 シール Seal 6
23 D 15 367S2027 アジャスター Adjuster 4
24
12
23 D 16 367S1087 キャスター Caster 4
D 17 119S0009 ファン Fan 1 FAN3 4.5
5
E 18 364S0001 ガード Guard 2 4.5
6 E 19 138S0345 フェライトコア Ferrite Bead 1
E 20 318F0172 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 7
E 21 318S1164 ブッシュ Bushing 6
21
25 E 22 318S1174 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 8
E 23 318F0174 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 3 EDS17L
25
20 E 25 316S1037 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 31
22
25 13
21 A 14
25
18 25
17
18
20 20
DETAIL A Na12
19
16
15
FR6H5903.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 10 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
カセッテセット部 1 カセッテセット部 1
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 03A
DT3x6 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DETAIL A 1
5.9
23
2 ********
22
21 23 A 3 375S0040 パッキン Packing 2 5.9
22 E 4 315G311017 止め具 Clamp 2 5.9
3
4 21 FR6H5351.EPS E 5 356N8167C ブラケット Bracket 1 5.9
A 6 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 5.9
10 5 3
C 4 D 7 388Y0014 板バネ Leaf Spring 2
E 8 341N0938H アーム Arm 1 5.10
E 9 356Y0187 ブラケット Bracket 1 5.9
10
D 10 322SF178 軸受 Bearing 4 5.10
7
8 D 11 327N1103610D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2
7 6 D 12 322N0037D すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 5.10
E 13 341N0937B アーム Arm 2 5.10
6 18 19 20 D 14 388N3082C ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1
10
9 5.10
B E 15 346N1078D 補助板 Plate Support 1 5.14
5.17
10
5.10
E 16 319N3604A 軸 Shaft 1 5.14
5.17
15 5.10
11 E 17 322SF149 軸受 Bearing 2 5.14
5.17
14
17 E 19 318S1174 ブッシュ Bushing 1
BR3x6
E 20 316S2028 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 1
16
D 21 372S0049 管継手 Joint 2 5.9
D 22 372S0050 管継手 Joint 2 5.9
D 23 372Y0004 管継手 Joint 2 5.9
C
13
12
17 11
BR3x6
13
12
FR6H5020.EPS
010-051-08 SP - 12 010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337 06.20.2004 FM4337
03B CASSETTESET UNIT 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 03B
ブラケット 5.11
E 1 356N6832F Bracket 1
5.12
D 2 327N1103802 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 5.12

D 3 106Y0005B 電磁クラッチ Electromagnetic Clutch 1 CLA1 5.12
FR6H5352.EPS D 4 327N1101904 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 5.12
D 5 322SY065 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 5.12
D 6 322N0038A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 5.12
E 7 356N6831C ブラケット Bracket 1 5.12
D 8 327S1104002A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 5.15
D 9 327N0155A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 5.12
8 14 D 10 327N0144A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 5.12
4 9 D 11 388N2450B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L=116mm 5.12
10
D 12 360N0360A ハウジング Housing 2 5.12
1 D 13 360N0363 ハウジング Housing 2 5.12
2
D 14 334N0034E ローラ Roller 1 5.12
3 D 16 118SX063 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MA1 5.11
5
6 D 17 388N2485A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L=104mm 5.12
7 D 18 388N1192A 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 5.12
6 11
12 13
15
16
13
12
17
18
FR6H5021.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 14 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 03C
D 1 363N2243D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 5.13
D 2 363N2062G ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 5.13
D 3 332N0522D/E ストッパ Stopper 1 5.14
D 4 332N0523D/E ストッパ Stopper 1 5.14
FR6H5355.EPS E 5 366N0055E アクチュエータ Actuator 1 5.15
1 D 6 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 3 SA2,SA3,SA4 5.16

D 7 388N2451 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1
E 8 356N6829C ブラケット Bracket 1
2 E 9 341N0940B アーム Arm 1
ガイド板 5.17
D 10 363N2065D Guide Plate 4
5.18
ゴムローラ 5.17
D 11 334N3513B Rubber Roller 8
5.18
D 12 363N2388 ガイド Guide 1 #450 or later
4
5
A 6
11
11
6
6
12 DT3x6
10 7
8
DETAIL A 9
FR6H5022.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 16 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 03D
1 2-DT3x6
DETAIL A D 1 387N0130D 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 5.2
D 2 388N3081B ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 5.2
D 3 398N0059D シャッタ Shutter 1 5.2
D 4 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 1 SA1 5.1
2-DT3x6 FR6H5353.EPS E 5 345N1404D 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 5.1
D 6 134Y0056B 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 1 SVA1
E 7 356N8168A ブラケット Bracket 1
D 8 370N0256B ホース Hose 1 5.8
6 A 9 133Y1031A/B 電動ポンプ Pump 1 PA1
9 D 10 128S0392 スイッチ Switch 1 SA5 5.8
8 2-BR3x10
2 D 11 372S0050 管継手 Joint 1
7 D 13 372S0049 管継手 Joint 1
3 DT3x6
1 D 14 372S0053 管継手 Joint 1
4 10
E 15 316S0146 止め具 Clamp 1
D 16 370N0255B ホース Hose 1
11
B3x4
5
12
DT3x6
15
14
13
16
A
FR6H5023.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 18 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 03E
ガイド 5.7
1 D 1 363N2076C Guide 1
5.18
すべり軸受 5.4
D 2 322SY066 Plain Bearing 6
5.18
3
FR6H5354.EPS 5.7
2 D 3 332N0521B ストッパ Stopper 1
4 5.18
E 4 356N6823D ブラケット Bracket 1 5.18

2 E 5 319N3601B 軸 Shaft 1 5.18
D 7 388N1157A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 5.18
6
E 9 350N2496A カバー Cover 1 5.4
E 10 319Y1161A 軸 Shaft 1 5.6
7
5 E 12 341N0936E アーム Arm 1 5.6
8 D 13 388N2449 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 5.6
D 14 107Y0169A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SolA1 5.5
D 16 363N1788A ガイド Guide 1 5.4
E 17 319N3602B 軸 Shaft 1 5.4
D 18 388N1158A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 5.4
20 9
10
2
12
2
14 11
13
15 16
2
17
2
18
19 FR6H5026.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 20 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
消去搬送部 1 消去搬送部 1
04A ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 ERASURE CONVEYOR 1 04A
1 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 358N0163D ボックス Box 1 6.2
E 2 358N0165F ボックス Box 1 6.7
D 3 345N1502 ルーバ Louver 1
6.2
FR6H5450.EPS A 4 603N0182E フィルタ Filter 1 6.3
6.4
ソケット 6.2
D 5 120Y0078D Socket 1
6.5
蛍光ランプ 6.2
A 6 123N0007B/C Fluorescence Lamp 3
6.4
ソケット 6.2
D 7 120Y0079D Socket 1
18 6.5
6.2
2 E 8 401N0778B 押え板 Counter Plate 2 6.3
6.4
A
サーミスタ 6.2
D 9 115Y0035B Thermo Switch 1 THB1
6.6
D 10 407N0113F 反射板 Reflective Plate 1 6.2

16 TSWB1 6.2
D 11 115S0094 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1
2-BR3x10
05EP-4183 65⬚C 6.3

16 3 6.2
6.6
DETAIL A 8
E 16 308S0082 特殊ネジ Screw 2 M3 x 6 6.7
4
19
9
12
6
11
15 18
18 17
17
19 10
14 13
FR6H5301.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 22 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
04B ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 ERASURE CONVEYOR 2 04B
帯電防止材 6.8
D 1 387N0138C Antistatic Brush 9
6.14
3 10
2 2-DT3x6 E 2 356N6930D ブラケット Bracket 1 6.8
D 3 327N1122415 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 6.8
11 FR6H5451.EPS D 4 322SY121 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 6.8
4 5 D 5 322SY122 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 6.8
7
E 6 356N8470A ブラケット Bracket 1 6.8
E 7 319N3620B 軸 Shaft 1 6.16
1 E 8 358N0164C ボックス Box 1 6.8
2-BR3x6
31
A D 9 334N5022A ブラシローラ Brush Roller 1 6.8
12
D 10 327N1123202A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 6.12
6 31 13 D 11 852N0019A/B 読取部 Bar Code Reader 1
9
5
A E 12 356N6839C ブラケット Bracket 1
8 14 E 13 313N1081E ステー Stay 1 6.16
14 14 D 14 334N2366B 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 6.16
D 15 363N2072B ガイド Guide 4 6.16
14
15 E 16 356N8471B ブラケット Bracket 2
15
15 1 DT3x6
タイミングベルト
D 19 324N3041E Timing Belt Pulley 1 6.10
15 車
16 D 20 363N2070B ガイド Guide 2 6.15

16
1 D 21 363N2071B ガイド Guide 1 6.15
DT3x6 D 22 118SX167 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MB1 6.10
DT3x6
23 6.10
1
17 1 ガイド板 6.13
D 23 363N2068C Guide plate 1
DT3x6
6.14
6.17
2-DT3x6
17
1 20 D 24 363N2241C ガイド Guide 4 6.17
24 D 25 113Y1466 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 1 SB1
DT3x6 2-DT3x6 E 26 356N6844C ブラケット Bracket 1
19
20 24 E 27 356N6847C ブラケット Bracket 1
4-DT3x6 DT3x6 24 D 29 363N2244B ガイド Guide 1 6.14
21 DT3x6
E 30 313N1083D ステー Stay 1 6.1
DT3x6 4
BR3x6
DT3x6
18 1 25
DT3x6
2-BR3x10
26
27
29
1
DT3x6
DT3x6
28
30
FR6H5302.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 24 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
04C ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 04C
DETAIL A RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
A
3 6.11
4 タイミングベルト 6.12
D 1 324N3038C Timing Belt Pulley 4
1 車 6.13
6.14
2 FR6H5452.EPS
6.11
3 5 D 2 388N2475C 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 3 Lⱌ90mm 6.12
DETAIL B 4
6.13
B
3 6.11
4 D 3 360N0360A ハウジング Housing 12 6.12
4 6.13
7 6
1 3
7 6.11
8 D 4 322SF145 軸受 Bearing 12 6.12
2 6.13
3 9
4
DETAIL C 4 ゴムローラ 6.11
D 5 334N3507E Rubber Roller 2
3 6.13
C 7
10
6.11
3 D 6 334N3508D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3 6.12
4 4 6.13
1 6 3
7
6.11
平歯車 6.12
D 7 327N1121608A Spur Gear 9
3 6.13
4 5 6.14
4
DETAIL D 3
D 7 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring Lⱌ101mm 6.11
D 8 388N2484C 2
8 6.12
12
13 6 D 9 334N3512E ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 6.12
4
1 3 D 10 388N2476C 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 Lⱌ102mm 6.13
7
D 11 388N2498A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 Lⱌ91mm 6.14
11
E B 17 12 D 12 360N0364A ハウジング Housing 4 6.14
A 13
14 4 D 13 322SF157 軸受 Bearing 4 6.14
3 D 14 334N3509D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 6.14
C 7
E 2 D 15 334N3510D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 6.14
15
E D 17 323S3251 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 6.9
DT3x6 13
12 D 18 322SF146 軸受 Bearing 10 6.9
21 7 タイミングベルト
D D 19 324N1026A Timing Belt Pulley 5 6.9
車
20
E 13 E 20 356N6926D ブラケット Bracket 1 6.9
12
7
16
E
B
DETAIL E C
E4
18
D
19
18 A
FR6H5303.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 26 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
幅寄搬送部 1 幅寄搬送部 1
05A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 05A
D 1 323S3234 タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 7.2
カム 7.3
D 2 329N0149A Cam 2
1 7.4
2
カム 7.3
D 3 329N0146A Cam 2
FR6H5401.EPS
7.4
DT3x6
(BLK)
6 ころがり軸受 7.3
D 4 322SF146 Ball Bearing 4
8 7.4
7
4
9 7.3
D 5 329N0148B カム Cam 2
4 7.4
DT3x6
(BLK)
レバー 7.3
E 6 342N0105D Lever 2
7.4
3 E6
スペーサ 7.3
5 10 E 7 347N1625A Spacer 2
7.4
レバー 7.3
2-DT3x6 E 8 342N0106B Lever 2
7.4
カム 7.3
11 D 9 329N0145A Cam 2
7.4
14
ころがり軸受 7.3
T 13 12 D 10 322SF149 Ball Bearing 2
ON 7.4
FR
軸 7.3
2-DT3x6 E 12 319N3625B Shaft 1
7.4
15
モータ 7.7
D 13 118SX167 Motor 2 MC2,MC3
7.8
タイミングベルト
D 14 324N3041E Timing Belt Pulley 1 7.8
車
D 16 327S1103002A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 7.4
D 19 327N0143C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 7.4
E 21 316S1122 クランプ Clamp 1 7.4
A
10
NT 16 3 5
O
FR E6
4
8
13
DT3x6
6 (BLK)
17
18 9 19
7 21
DT3x6
(BLK)
4 A
2
20
FR6H5015.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 28 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
05B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 05B
1
2
3 7.5
4 D 1 388N2472B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 7 Lⱌ160mm
5 7.6
6
16 タイミングベルト 7.5
D 2 324N3038C Timing Belt Pulley 2
車 7.6
10 7
FR6H5502.EPS
1 4 スペーサ 7.5
E 3 347N1669A Spacer 2
5 7.6
6
ころがり軸受 7.5
15 D 4 322SF147 Ball Bearing 12 F-W678AZZ1
4 7.6
5 4
スペーサ 7.5
6 E 5 347N1624A Spacer 8
15 7.6
4 8 7.5
2 D 6 322SY233 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 8 628ZZST
3 7.6
4
5 7.5
6 D 7 322SF153 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 F-W688AT2ZZ1
7.6
16
9 ゴムローラ 7.5
7 D 8 334N3511D Rubber Roller 2
9 7.6
ゴムローラ 7.5
D 9 334N3524C Rubber Roller 2
7.6
T D 10 388N2473B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 Lⱌ116mm 7.6
ON
FR
D 11 363N2114C ガイド Guide 3 7.6
8 D 12 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 7.6
D 14 363N2110B ガイド Guide 1 7.6
ブッシュ 7.5
E 15 318N1065C Bushing 4
7.6
ニップローラ配置
ブッシュ 7.5
E 16 318N1066A Bushing 4
7.6
FRONT
9 8
9
8
7
16
6
5
4
4
1
13
14 11 15 6
5
7 4
11 16
6
11 5
12 4
DT3x6
T
ON 4
FR 15
6
5
4 FR6H5016.EPS
1
010-051-00 SP - 30 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
05C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 05C
DETAIL D
D 1 322SY093 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 80B0605 7.9
D 2 334N0041A ローラ Roller 2 7.9
E 3 319N3624B 軸 Shaft 2 7.9
0 D 4 363N2115 ガイド Guide 1 7.9
FR6H5505.EPS D 5 388N2447B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 Lⱌ32mm 7.9
ブラケット 7.9
E 6 356N8212B Bracket 1
7.10
識別印表示：0
D 7 328N0041C 爪 Claw 1 7.9
DETAIL E D 8 328N0042C 爪 Claw 1 7.9
D 9 363N2073B ガイド Guide 1 7.9
E 10 322N0052 軸受 Bearing 2 7.9
1 D 11 315S0013 止め輪 Nut 2 7.9
D 12 322N0050 軸受 Bearing 1 7.9
T D 13 322N0051 軸受 Bearing 1 7.9
ON
FR
E 14 319N3623B 軸 Shaft 2 7.9
識別印表示：1
軸受 7.9
D 15 322SY063 Bearing 4 80F-0808
7.10
DETAIL A 1
2
圧縮コイルバネ Lⱌ57mm 7.9
2 D 16 388N1156B Compression Coil Spring 2
1 7.10
E4 B
ブラケット 7.9
1 E 17 356N6848D Bracket 1
1 E4
7.10
7
ころがり軸受 F-FLWA
3 D 18 322SF148 Ball Bearing 1 7.9
676AT2ZZ1
8 E 19 341N0943C アーム Arm 1 7.9

4
9 5 A D 21 322SY232 軸受 Bearing 2 7.9
D 22 327N0139B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 7.9
5 6
11 D 23 327N0138A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 7.9
12 10
D 24 328N0043C 爪 Claw 2 7.11
10
14 E 26 356N6850C ブラケット Bracket 2 7.11
D
E 27 319N3627B 軸 Shaft 2 7.11
17 D 28 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 1 SC1 7.9
18 13
E4
C DETAIL B
E 19
D 30 118SX164 モータ Motor 1 MC1 7.9
15 E 31 355N0550D フレーム Frame 1 7.9
E3
20 16
21 15 E 32 316S1037 ブッシュ Bushing 3 7.9
15
16 24 E 33 318F0174 コードクランプ Cord Clamp 1 EDS17L 7.9
22 15 E6
34 E4 E 34 318S1164 ブッシュ Bushing 3 7.9
E6
23
25
DETAIL C 34
33 29
31
28
32 27
30 26
FR6H5013.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 32 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
05D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 05D
D 1 322SY249 軸受 Bearing 2 80B-0505 7.12
D 2 363N2113D ガイド Guide 1 7.12
E 3 341N0955B アーム Arm 1 7.12
E4 1 E 5 319N3629 軸 Shaft 1 7.12
2 FR6H5503.EPS
BR3x6
D 6 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 7.12
D 7 363N2109C ガイド Guide 4 7.13
D 8 113Y1466 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 2 SC3,SC4 7.1
3 D 10 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 1 SC2 7.4
4
1 E 12 313N1085B ステー Stay 2 7.1
E4
D 13 363N2075B ガイド Guide 4 7.1
D 14 387N0136B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 7.1
6
5 BR3x6
D 15 363N2111B ガイド Guide 1 7.1
E 16 313N1086B ステー Stay 2 7.1
6
DT3x6
16
BR4x8
8
7
DT3x6
(BLK)
BR4x8
DT3x6 2-BR3x10
BR4x8
(BLK)
15
9 DT3x6
13 10
13
T BR4x8
ON
FR 3-DT3x6
14
12
2-DT3x6
2-BR3x10
8
11 17
17
FR6H5017.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 34 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
05E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 05E
5 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
9 E 1 367S0045 ゴム脚 Rubber Ring 2 7.1
5
10 E4
1 B3x8
8
E6 FR6H5503.EPS D 5 322SF146 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 7.2
D 6 324N1032A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 7.2
12
7 D 7 322SY063 軸受 Bearing 2 80F-0808 7.2
2-DT3x6
7 E 8 341N0944C アーム Arm 1 7.2
D 9 324N1026A 平ベルト車 Flat Belt Wheel 1 7.2
2 D 10 388N2474A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 Lⱌ56mm 7.2
E4 D 11 334Y0085 ローラ Roller 1 7.6
5 12 E 13 318S1164 ブッシュ Bushing 14
6 13
5
4-DT3x6
DT3x6 13
3
T
ON
FR
4
B3x8
1
13
12
W5
E4
13
11
E4
13
T
ON W5
FR
13
13
13 FR6H5018.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 36 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
光学部光学部
06 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 06
DR 1 839Y0035F/G/H/J/K/L 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1 8.1
E 2 308S0062 特殊ネジ Screw 1 M4 x 6 8.1
FR6H5650.EPS
VER : G∼
1
∼VER : F
TPネジ
1
FR6H5501.EPS
VER : G以降の光学ユニットには、アース線が付いていない。
No ground wire is provided for scanning optics units of VER: G or later.
010-051-05 SP - 38 010-051-08
02.20.2002 FM3327 06.20.2004 FM4337
副走査部 1 副走査部 1
07A SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 SUBSCANNING UNIT 1 07A
1 2 RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350N2533A/B カバー Cover 1 10.5
D 2 118YX214A モータ Motor 1 MZ1 10.5
E 3 323N0033 ベルト Belt 1 10.2
4
D 4 305S0077 ナット Nut 1 10.3
FR6H5751.EPS D 5 337N0059C ホイール Flywheel 1 10.3
3 5 10.11
D 6 343N0039C フック Hook 4
10.12
6
6 7 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring Lⱌ39mm 10.11
D 7 388N2496 2
10.12
E5
12 D 8 322SF168 軸受 Bearing 2 10.2
11 E 9 341N0968C アーム Arm 1 10.2
12
13 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 10.2
E5 D 10 388N2434A 1
10.5
8 7 D 11 388N1073 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 10.2
D 12 322SF149 軸受 Bearing 2 10.2
10 D 13 337N0044 ホイール Wheel 1 10.2

9 8
10.11
E 14 319N3618 軸 Shaft 4
10.12
14
PG3x4(3B) 15 10.11
16 DETAIL A D 15 322SF156 軸受 Bearing 4
10.12
PG3x4(3B) 10.11
E 16 319N3598B 軸 Shaft 2
14 10.12
15
16 10.11
D 17 334N3506C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2
10.12
D 18 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2

E 19 401N0777C 押え板 Counter Plate 1
17 10.11
D 20 388N2495 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 Lⱌ50mm
10.12
E 21 323N0040 ベルト Belt 1

15 PG3x4(3B)
17
＊参考：（3Ｂ）はネジゆるみ止め接着剤を使用する箇所である。
A PG3x4(3B)
＊REMARKS：
（3B）indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
15
14
22
BR3x6
BR3x6
18
19
6 20
BR3x6
20
6
21 FR6H5601.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 40 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
07B SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 SUBSCANNING UNIT 2 07B
D 1 118YX245 モータアセンブリ Motor Assembly 1 MZ3 10.7
2 ****
3 ****
4 ****
歯車 10.8
D 5 327N0135E Gear 1
FR6H5752.EPS 10.13
17 DETAIL B
17 軸 10.8
18 E 6 319N3619 Shaft 1
10.13
1 3
2
PK2.5x3(3B) 歯車 10.8
17 D 7 327N0136B Gear 1
4 10.13
19
10 10.8
17 D 8 322SF155 軸受 Bearing 2 10.13
3 12
10.14
11
10 D 9 360N0362D ハウジング Housing 1 10.8
5
6 20 10.6
7 14 D 10 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 3 SZ2,SZ3,SZ5
8 13 10.8
9 E3
D 11 388N2477 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 10.6
15
DT3x6 E 12 356N6819C ブラケット Bracket 1 10.6
(BLK)
軸受 10.9
D 13 322SF149 Bearing 5
10.10
軸受 10.9
D 14 322SF154 Bearing 2
16 10.10
スペーサ 10.9
E 15 347N1700B Spacer 1
10.10
アーム 10.9
E 16 341N0934C Arm 1
10.10
24
十字穴付き小ネジ Cross-recessed Screw 10.13
E 17 301S4990306 5
10.14
帯電防止材 10.13
D 18 387N0119C Antistatic Brush 1
13 21 10.14
軸 10.13
E 19 319N3599G Shaft 1
23 10.14
22
ミラーアセンブリ Mirror Assembly 10.13
25 D 20 602Y0123 1
10.14
B D 21 329N0144C カム Cam 1 10.6
13 26
E 22 310S8002516 スプリングピン Pin 1 10.6
E 23 319N3616B 軸 Shaft 1 10.6
E 24 356N6820E ブラケット Bracket 1 10.6
27 D 25 118YX216B モータ Motor 1 MZ2 10.6

E3 BR3x6 28 E 26 350N2534 カバー Cover 1 10.6
14
11
A 13
ガイド 10.13
D 29 363N2060C Guide 1
10.14
32
E 30 341N0942B アーム Arm 1 10.10
33 8
E 31 341N0941B アーム Arm 1 10.9
32 29
13 10.9
E 32 344N0002B フォーク Fork 4
35 10.10
33 10.9
E 33 319N3600B 軸 Shaft 2
10.10
32 30
E 34 341N0935D アーム Arm 1 10.10
＊参考：（3Ｂ）はゆるみ止め接着剤を使用する箇所である。
DETAIL A 31
＊REMARKS：
（3B）indicates to use screw locking adhesive.
FR6H5602.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 42 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
07C SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 SUBSCANNING UNIT 3 07C
16 スペーサ 9.1
E 2 347N1730 Spacer 2
10.9
D 3 309N0080 座金 Washer 2 10.1

FR6H5753.EPS E 4 356N8123A ブラケット Bracket 1 10.1
16 E 6 356N6834B ブラケット Bracket 1
D 7 113Y1457C ボードアセンブリ Board Assembly 1 SED12A
ガイド 9.1
D 10 363N2057C Guide 4
10.9
16 ローラ 9.1
D 11 334Y0084 Roller 1
10.9
14
16
ガイド 9.1
D 12 363N2056F Guide 1
10.9
銘板 9.1
E 13 405N2670 Label 1
10.9
1 E 14 318F0145 ブッシュ Bushing 2
ガイド #20061 or
D 17 363N2346A Guide 9
later
14
3-BR4x8
2 ガイドアセンブリ Guide Assembly 9.1
D 18 363Y0408 1 Without REF.13
10.1
3 BR4x8
B 16
4 16
2-BR3x6
6
18 BR4x8 A 16
15
BR3x6
17 3-BR4x8 16
BR4x8
E4 1 3 16
E4 2 9 8 7
BR3x6
BR4x8
5
BR3x6 16
DT3x6
B
10
E4
11
13
A
E4
12
A FR6H5603.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 44 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
07D SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 SUBSCANNING UNIT 4 07D
FR6H5754.EPS E 5 405N1770A 銘板 Label 3
E 6 341N0933B アーム Arm 3 10.4
E 7 347N1731A スペーサ Spacer 6 10.4
1 E 8 356N6833F ブラケット Bracket 1 10.4
2-DT3x6 E 9 341N0932E アーム Arm 1 10.4
2-DT3x6
E 11 319N3890 軸 Shaft 1 10.4
D 12 107Y0168 ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SolZ1 10.4
D 13 146S0029 フォトセンサ Photo Sensor 1 SZ4
3
D 14 386Y0029 防振ゴム Rubber Vibration Isolator 1 10.1
E 15 318S1164 ブッシュ Bushing 1 10.4
D 16 309S0037 ワッシャ Washer 1 10.4
15 8 6 3-DT3x6
7 4
6 DT3x6
7
5
12 A 6
7
A 10
DETAIL A 9
16
5-BR4x8
11
13
FR6H5604.EPS
14
010-051-02 SP - 46 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
集光部集光部
08 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 08
シールド材 9.1
E 1 345N1419B Cover 1
9.2
9.1
C 2 113Y1456C PMT12A PMT12A 1
9.2
1
FR6H5350.EPS E 3 356N6990A ブラケット Bracket 2 9.1
E 4 347N1598A スペーサ Spacer 4 9.1
E 5 356N8389 ブラケット Bracket 1 9.1
E 6 347N1599 スペーサ Spacer 2 9.1
E 7 345N1532 シールド材 Cover 1 9.1
E 8 345N1456B シールド材 Cover 1 9.1
3 E 9 356N8388 ブラケット Bracket 1 9.1
4
BR3x12 5 集光ガイドアセン Light-collecting Guide
D 10 606Y0055A 1 9.1
BR3x12 6 ブリ Assembly
2 E 11 405N0192 銘板 Label 1
7
D 12 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1
4
A
6
4
3
BR3x12
4
BR3x12
3-BR3x6
9
2-BR3x6
2-BR3x10
10
A
11
12
DT3x6 FR6H5701.EPS
010-051-02 SP - 48 010-051-08
06.20.2001 FM3057 06.20.2004 FM4337
制御部 1 制御部 1
09A CONTROLLER 1 CONTROLLER 1 09A
E 1 346N1095C 補助板 Plate Support 1 11.1
E 2 346N1136B 補助板 Plate Support 1 11.1
C 3 113Y1470A CNN12A CNN12A 1 11.10
D 4 119S0008 ファン Fan 2 FAN1,FAN2 11.13
FR6H5950.EPS E 5 364N0092C ガード Guard 2 11.13
BR3x6 D 7 128Y0271C スイッチ Switch 1 11.9
D 9 340N0171C キートップ Key Top 1 11.9
2-BR3x6
2 E 10 356N6801D ブラケット Bracket 2 11.1
5 E 11 356N6997D ブラケット Bracket 1 11.12
ブレーカ SER-F-11-61-
4 D 12 128Y0280 Breaker 1 11.12
10A-G
D 14 128N0067 ブレーカ Breaker 1 11.12
E 15 405N2766 銘板 Label 1
BR3x6 E 16 346N1127B 補助板 Plate Support 1 11.7
A 16
E 19 318F0172 ブッシュ Bushing 2 LWS-8SL-2.5W 11.1
17
18 4
19
5
BR3x6
15
DETAIL A DETAIL B
11 6
7
8
12 9
13
14
10
10
BR3x6
BR3x6
FR6H5A01.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 50 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
制御部 2 制御部 2
09B CONTROLLER 2 CONTROLLER 2 09B
C 1 352N0458D パネル Panel 1 11.7
C 2 113Y1450D MTH12A MTH12A 1 11.7
C 3 113Y1552A/B DRV12A-1 SND12A 1 11.4
C 4 113Y1453D/E DRV12A DRV12A 1 11.6
FR6H5951.EPS C 5 113Y1452D SNS12A SNS12A 1 11.5
C 6 113Y1449G/H SCN12A SCN12A 1 11.3
13
CR 7 113Y1451H/K CPU12A CPU12A 1 11.2
1 With Cable
10 CR 8 125Y0062G 電源 Power Supply 1 11.8
Assembly
2
補助板 11.7
13 E 9 346N1096C Plate Support 2
3 11.8
4
E 10 316S0125 止め具 Clamp 6 11.7
DETAIL A E 11 308S0051 特殊ネジ Screw 1 M3 x 6
5 E 12 308S0062 特殊ネジ Screw 1 M4 x 6
E 13 318S1174 ブッシュ Bushing 8 LWS-3S-2W
E 14 316S1187 クランプ Clamp 4
AT 15 137S2097 ヒューズ Fuse R452005 5A For

SLOT1 1
6 MTH12A

8 1
MTH12A
SLOT2 R452003 3A For

AT 17 137S2094 ヒューズ Fuse 1 MTH12A
7 DRV12A
R452002 2A For
AT 18 137S2092 ヒューズ Fuse 1 MTH12A
SLOT3 DRV 12A
12
R45201.5 1.5A
AT 19 137S2084 ヒューズ Fuse 1 For SCN12A
A SNS12A
14 9
1
SNS12A

14 1
DRV12A
13
AT 22 137S1219 ヒューズ Fuse R451.500 0.5A
1
For SNS12A
14 E - 114Y5436002A CDR CDR 1
REF.15∼22の
9 ヒューズで各2個
AT 23 898Y1000 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1 ／ Two fuses
13 each in REF.15
A through 22.
11 13
13
FR6H5A02.EPS
010-051-00 SP - 52 010-051-08
10.10.2000 FM2753 06.20.2004 FM4337
サービスパーツリスト編 SP - 55
ケーブル
10 CABLE
BLANK PAGE
10
RANK REF. QTY. CONNECTION
PART NO. PART NAME REMARKS
DIAGRAM
E 1 136N0362/A ケーブル Cable 1 JPN,USA

E 2 136N0363/0376 ケーブル Cable 1 BSI
E 3 136N0364/0377 ケーブル Cable 1 CEE
E 4 136N0365 ケーブル Cable 1 3/9
E 5 136Y6773D ケーブル Cable 1 3/9
E 6 136Y6774C ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 7 136Y6775E ケーブル Cable 1 9/9
E 8 136Y6776F ケーブル Cable 1 3/9
E 9 136Y6777E ケーブル Cable 1 3/9
E 10 136Y6780F ケーブル Cable 1 Including Ferrite 8/9

Bead
E 11 136Y6787C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 12 136Y6792D ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 13 136Y6793D ケーブル Cable 1 3/9
E 14 136Y6796C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 15 136Y6799E ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 16 136Y6805C ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 17 136Y6816C ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 18 136Y6817D ケーブル Cable 1 8/9
E 19 136N0371 ケーブル Cable 1 Japan 3/9
E 20 136Y8545A ケーブル Cable 1 Japan 3/9
E 21 136Y6795 ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
E 22 858Y0252J ケーブル Cable 1 7/9
010-051-08 SP - 54 010-051-00
06.20.2004 FM4337 10.10.2000 FM2753
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11
A A
CR-IR346RU Service Manual
B B
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
回路図
MTH12A
113Y1450
DRV12A
113Y1453
C C
CN 1 CN 1
SNS12A
113Y1452
CN 2 CN 2
D CN 3 CN11 D
SCN12A
113Y1449
CN12
CN 4
E E
CN 5 CN1
CPU12A
113Y1451
CN 6 CN2
F F
G G
機種 5436 ユニット -
-
名称補助名称
回路図 CCR
SP - 56
H 対応コード - H
コード Z22Y0005436 Rev. 6

頁
2
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MTH12A
CNN12A External
A A
Ethernet cable
１１３Y１４５０
１1３Y1470 機外イーサネット
Internal （PC）
CPU１２A Ethernet cable CN-2 .
CN 5
α４００機内イーサネット
１1３Y１４５１ CN-6 . . CN-1
136Y6825
125N0112 CN 6
136N0365 External
UL１０１５ AWG１6 Internal Serial cable
＊α４００電源に使用する端子は全て Serial cable
136Y6770 機外シリアル
機内シリアル（PC）
＃２５０ファストン＋５V 1 A1 （+5V）
CN-5 . . .
. メイテンロック
B １７５０２３−１ 2
.
A1-GND （+5V-GND） 1- 480702-0 898Y0714 B
350550-3(接触子）
スリーブ DF1E-2S-2.5C UL１０６１ AWG２６
RED 赤（+5V） 1 CN-９ CN-10 DF1B2428SCA
174817-1 BLK 黒（+5V-GND）
.
3
128Y0271 MS1
. 1 EXTRSTL赤RED 半田 COM NO
＋５V 1 A2 （+5V） BLK 黒（+5V-GND） 2 . . リセットスイッチ
. . 2 GND_+5V黒BLK 半田
2 A2-GND （+5V-GND） RED 赤（+5V） 4 . . Reset switch
. .
＋２４V 1 B (+24V)
C . C
2 B-GND (+24V-GND) ５５５７−１0Ｒ
. ５５５６PBTL CN-11 1 RED 赤+２４V 119S0008
. .
CN-8 2 BLK 黒 GND FANG1 基板冷却
. .
ORN 橙 (+24V) 1
. Board cooling fan
BLK 黒 (+24V-GND) 6
.
＋２４V 1 C (+24V) ORN 橙 (+24V) 2
. .
2 C-GND (+24V-GND) BLK 黒 (+24V-GND) 7
. .
BRN 茶 (+15V) 3
. CN-12 1 RED 赤+２４V
BLK 黒 (+15V-GND) 8 . . 119S0008
2 BLK 黒 GND FANG2
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
.
BLU 青 (-15V) 4 . . 基板冷却
.
D
＋１５V 1 H (+15V) GRY 灰 (- 15V-GND) 9 Board cooling fan D
. .
2 H-GND (+15V-GND) RED 赤 (+24V) 5
. .
BLK 黒 (+24V-GND) 10
.
５５５７−０8Ｒ５５５９−０8P ５５５７−０8Ｒ

−１５V 1 J (-15V) ５５５６PBTL ５５５８PBTL CNG-11 ５５５６PBTL
.
2 J- GND (- 15V-GND)
. CN-7 1 +24V 赤 RED RED 赤 1 赤 RED
. . .
5 GND 黒 BLK BLK 黒 5 黒 BLK
L⇒ファストンスリーブの色は、黄色 . . .
N・E⇒ファストンスリーブの色は、青 2 +24V 赤 RED RED 赤 2 赤 RED
. . .
＊インレットのL・Nの表示が有るので 6 GND 黒 BLK BLK 黒 6 黒 BLK
注意する事。＋２４V 1 K (+24V) . . .
E . 3 +24V 赤 RED RED 赤 3 赤 RED E
2 K-GND (+24V-GND) . . .
#187ポジティブロック . 7 GND 黒 BLK BLK 黒 7 黒 BLK
. . .
173724-1 4 +24V 赤 RED RED 赤 4 赤 RED
（ライン174737-2（スリーブ） . . .
ニュートラル・アース間174737−１（スリーブ））ﾕﾆﾊﾞｰｻﾙユニバーサル 8 GND 黒 BLK BLK 黒 8 黒 BLK
中継 1-480699-0 コネクタ 1-480698-0 136Y6771 . . .
128N0067 接触子接触子 UL１０１５ AWG１８

３５０５５１−３３５０５５２−３ - MTH12A-INV12A9
コンセントPlug インレットInlet NFB１ CN 136Y6773 858Y0253
1 1 L L LINE . LOAD
L 1 UL１０１５ AWG１８ UL１０１５ AWG１８
. . . . . .
回路図
2 2 N N LINE . LOAD
N 2 ＋１５V 1 L (+15V) 茶 YEL
. . . . . . .
3 3 E 2 L- GND (+15V-GND)黒 BLK
F . . . . F
#２５０ポジティブロック
１７５０２３−１ 136Y6793
（ニュートラル
136N0362 174817-1（スリーブ）
136Y6777
国内・欧米ライン174817-2(スリーブ））
シールド線＋２４V 1 D (+24V) 黄 YEL
JAPAN・USA AWG１４ .
UL1015AWG14 2 D-GND (+24V-GND)黒 BLK
136N0377 .
欧州 TB1
Europe L 1
丸端子ＦＶ２- 4（ＪＳＴ) .
136N0376 N 2
.
英国 E 3
G England . ＋２４V 1 E (+24V) 黄 YEL UL１０１５ AWG１８ G
インレットエコー電子 .
AC-PO03CS05 2 E-GND (+24V-GND)黒 BLK 136Y6772
898Y0814 136Y6776 .
ＡＣＩＮ
国内（患者環境）インレットASSYInlet Assy. シールド線 AWG１４ 85∼２６５V - 400-DRV12A 8
JAPAN #２５０ポジティブロック
１７５０２３−１
（ニュートラル
11
174817-1（スリーブ）
ライン174817-2(スリーブ））
回路図
名称補助名称 CCR
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SP - 57
コード Rev.
Z22Y0005436 6
頁
3
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11
1
.
A 2 A
113Y1449 . . .
3
. . .
4
. . .
5
. . .
6
.
7
. . .
8
. . .
9
. . .
10
. . .
11
.
B . 12 B
SCN12A .
. 13
.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
回路図
. 14
+15AS 1 2 AG . 1 1
+15AS 3 4 AG . 15 . .
. 2 2
+15AS 5 6 AG CNE1 16 . .
. 3 3
+15AS 7 8 AG . 17 . .
-15AS 9 10 AG . 4 4
. +15AS 1 2 AG 18 . .
-15AS 11 12 AG +15AS 3 4 AG . 5 5
LD1IDH 13 14 LD1IDL . 19 . .
+15AS 5 6 AG . 6 6
NC 15 16 NC .
+15AS 7 8 AG 20 . .
LD1ONH 17 18 LD1ONL . 7 7
-15AS 9 10 AG 8
. .
8
NC 19 20 NC -15AS 11 12 AG . .
C C
LD1OKH 21 22 LD1OKL LD1IDH 13 14 LD1IDL
LDIFH 23 24 LDIFL LD1ONH 15 16 LD1ONL
+15VAS 25 26 AG LD1OKH 17 18 LD1OKL
+5VAS 27 28 AG LDIFH 19 20 LDIFL
-15VAS 29 30 AG
+5VDS 31 32 GND
SSL 33 34 SSH
NC 35 36 NC
NC 37 38 NC
NC 39 40 NC
1
.
D
2 D
.
3
.
4
1 .
1 . . 5
. 2 .
2 . . 6
. 3 .
3 . . 7
. 4 .
4 . . 8
. 5 .
5 . . 9
. 6 .
6 . . 10
. .
E E
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
.
5
F . F
6
.
.
7
.
8
.
1 GND
.
2 VCC
.
3 SED１L
.
4 SED２L
.
G G
.
.
回路図
SP - 58
コード Rev.
Z22Y0005436 6
頁
4
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
B ＰＭＴ１２A B
113Y1456
SCN12A
113Y1449
UL2651簾ストレート(沖）
858Y0252
Signal Signal
C description description C
SCN12A←→PMT-CN1
HVVOKH HVVOKL
+15VOKH 3 4 +15VOKL HVVOKH CN-1
CN-4 HVVOKH HVSH 5 6 HVSL .
.
NC 7 8 NC HVVOKH
HVVOKH .
. +15AS 9 10 AG(HV) +15VOKL
+15VOKL 注釈 .
. +15AS 11 12 AG(HV) N.Cはハーネスが接続 +15VOKL
+15VOKL +15AS 13 14 AG(HV) .
. されている
+15AS 15 16 AG
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
NC 17 18 NC .
D
. +15AS 19 20 AG LEDONL
LEDONL . D
NC 21 22 NC VIONH
信号名 No.
.
VIONH -15AS 23 24 AG .
. VIONL
VIONL -15AS 25 26 AG .
.
ERSH 27 28 ERSL
LEDSIGH 29 30 LEDSIGL
HIF3BA-34D−2.54R
1 2
HIF3BA-34D-2.54R LEDONH 31 32 LEDONL
VIONH 33 34 VIONL
信号名
E E
回路図
UL1553-1.5D-2V
F 日立電線 F
UM-QP-1.5CR3(02) 858Y0252 UM-QP-1.5CR3(02)

CN-２
CN-５ . .
.
.
G G
11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SP - 59
コード Rev.
Z22Y0005436 6
頁
5
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11
A A
SNS12A - SNS12A-INV12B9
113Y１４５２ CN-6 1 +5VINV
. 858Y0252
2 STBL1L
. UL1061AWG26(単線黄色）YEL
3 ONL1L
.
4 FAN3ONL
B . B
5 FAN4ONL
.
6 LAMPREQH
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
回路図
.
7 LDSN1H
.
8 LDSN2H
.
9 LDSN3H
.
10 FAN3REQH
.
11 FAN3ERRH
.
12 FAN4ERRH
.
13 THB1ERRH
.
14 HTMPERRH
C . C
15 TSWB1ERRH
.
16 GND
.
17 STBL2L
.
18 ONL2L
.
19 STBL3L
. CNBCR-1
20 ONL3L
.
21 TXD RTS 1 （ＣＴＳ）青 BLU BCR
. . .
22 RST ＧＮＤ 2 ＧＮＤ紫 VIO
. . .
23 （ＣＴＳ） NC 3 NC ８５２N0019
. . .
24 RXD ＋５VBCR 4 ＋５VBCR 赤 RED
. . .
D 25 ＧＮＤ RXD 5 TXD 緑 GRN D
. . .
26 ＋５VBCR NC 6 NC
. . .
（ＣＴＳ） 7 RTS 灰 GRY
. .
TXD 8 RXD 白 WHT
HIF3BA-26D-2.54C . .
HIF3-2428SCA
DF1B−８EP−2.5RC
DF1-PD2428SCB
E E
UL1061AWG26（単線黄色）YEL UL1061AWG26（単線黄色）YEL
858Y0252 858Y0255
LED12A
113Y1469
CNA-4 CN-１
CN-5 1 +5VLED 1 +5VLED +5VLED 1
. . . .
. . . .
F 3 LED2L 3 LED2L LED2L 3 F
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
7 +5VLED 7 +5VLED +5VLED 7
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
10 SW1L 10 SW1L SW1L 10
. . . .
11 BUZZ ON L 11 BUZZ ON L BUZZ ON L 11
. . . .
12 GND 12 GND GND 12
. . . .
G DF１B-12DEP DF１B-12DES DF１B-12S-2.5R G
DF１B-12DS-2.5RC DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA DF1B-2428SCA

DF1B-2428SCA
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SP - 60
コード Rev.
Z22Y0005436 6
頁
6
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11
G
C
H
A
F
11
11
10
10
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
G
C
H
A
F
010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DRV12A CNA-10 CN-MA1
11
113Y１４５３５５５７−１２R 1 1 赤 RED MA1A
５５５６PBTL .
4
.
136Y6817
.
4
. .
青 BLU MA1B
1 MA1A . . . . .
A . 2 UL1007AWG22（単線） 2 黒 BLK COM A
CN3 7 MA1B 118SX167
CN-2 2
.
.
COM
５５５７−０６R
.
.
5
3
.
. ５５５９−０６P
５５５８PBTL
５５５７−０６R.
.
５５５６PBTL .
5
3
.
.
黄
.
白 WHT COM
.
YEL MA1AL
MA1 吸盤駆動モーター
3 400-DRV12A - 8 COM ５５５６PBTL . . . .
+24V 1 . UL1007AWG22（単線） 6 6 橙 ORN MA1BL
. 3 MA1AL . . . . .
PGND 2 . 858Y0253
. 9 MA1BL Suction cupdriving motor
+24V 3 .
５５５７−０8R . 4 MB1A CN-MB1
５５５６PBTL PGND .
4
10
.
MB1B 1 赤 RED MB1A
Transport motor
+15V 5 . . . .
. 5 COM 4 青 BLU MB1B

PGND 6 . . . .
. 11 COM 2 黒 BLK COM
7 ５５５７−０６R
B
.
.
8
6
12
.
.
MB1AL
MB1BL
５５５６PBTL
.
.
5
3
.
.
白 WHT
黄 YEL
.
COM
.
MB1AL
ＭＢ１ 118SX167
IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ
CN-MC1 B
. . . . 1 赤 RED MC1A
6 橙 ORN MB1BL . . .
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
回路図
. . . 4 青 BLU MC1B
５５５７−１２R . . .
UL1007 ５５５６PBTL 2 黒 BLK COM
118SX164
AWG18（黒）
BLK
ＣＮ５1
.
MC1A CNC-10 ５５５７−０６R
５５５６PBTL
.
.
5
.
.
.
白 WHT
.
COM
MC1
.
FGG1 7 MC1B 1 3 黄 YEL MC1AL 幅寄せﾓｰﾀ

. . . . . .
2 COM ５５５７−１２R 7 ５５５９−１２P 6 橙 ORN MC1BL
（制御ラック） Board rack . ５５５６PBTL . . ５５５８PBTL . . .
8 COM 2
丸端子（JST) . UL1007AWG22（単線） . . Side-positioning motor
FV1.25-4 3 MC1AL 8 CN-MC２
. 858Y0253 . .
9 MC1BL 3 UL1007AWG22（単線） 1 赤 RED MC2A
. . . . . .
4 MC2A 9 136Y6816 4 青 BLU MC2B
C C
. . . . . .
10 MC2B 4 2 黒 BLK COM
118SX167
5
11
.
.
COM
COM
.
10
.
5
.
.
.
.
5
3
.
.
.
白 WHT
.
黄 YEL
COM
MC2AL
MC２ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除ﾓｰﾀ
. . . . . .
6 MC2AL 11 ５５５７−０６R 6 橙 ORN MC2BL
12
.
MC2BL
.
6
. ５５５６PBTL . . .
. . . Grip motor
12
５５５７−０６R . .
５５５６PBTL CN-MC３
CN4 1 MC3A 1 赤 RED MC3A
. . . .
4 MC3B 4 青 BLU MC3B
. 858Y0253 . . .
2 COM 2 黒 BLK COM
D UL1007AWG22（単線） 118SX167 D
5
3
.
.
COM
MC3AL
５５５７−０６R
５５５６PBTL
.
.
5
3
.
.
.
白 WHT
.
黄 YEL
COM
MC3AL
MC３ IP搬送ﾓｰﾀ
. . . .
6 MC3BL 6 橙 ORN MC3BL
. UL1007AWG20(単線） . . .
５５５７−10R 858Y0253
５５５６PBTL Transport motor
CN-7 1 +24V
. CN-SOLA1
6 DRVH
. +24V 1 赤 RED
2 ＮＣ . . .
107Y0169
. DRVH 3 黄 YEL
7 DRVL . . . SOLA1 ｶｾｯﾃﾎｰﾙﾄﾞ
. ＮＣ 2 BLK
3 DRVPA1 . . .
E . DRVL 4 黒 E
8 PGND . .
. Cassettehold solenoid
4 DRVSVA1 ５５５７−０４R
9
.
PGND ５５５６PBTL
. CN-PA1
5 DRVCLA1
. DRVPA1 1 赤 RED 133Y1031
10 PGND . . .
. PGND 3 黒 BLK ＰＡ１ IP吸着
. . .
2
CN-MZ2 ５５５７−０４R . .
UL1007AWG20(単線） MZ2DRV 1 赤 RED ５５５６PBTLＮＣ 4

.
Suction pump
.
. . . 118YX216
136Y6792 PGND 2 黒 BLK ＭＺ２ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除
CNZ-11 . . .
UL1007AWG20(単線） CN-SVA1
F 1 F
５５５７−０８R 858Y0253 . . Grip driving motor DRVSVA1 1 赤 RED 134Y0056
５５５６PBTL 4 ５５５７−０２R . . .
. . ５５５６PBTL PGND 2 黒 BLK ＳＶＡ１IPﾘｰｸ
2 . . .
CN-6 1 MZ2DRV . .
. 5 ５５５７−０２R
5 PGND . . CN-MZ3 ５５５６PBTL Leak valve
. 3 CN-CLA1
2 MZ3DRV1 . . MZ3DRV1 1 赤 RED 118SX217
. 6 RED . . . DRVCLA1 1 赤 RED 106Y0005
6 MZ3DRV2 . . MZ3DRV2 2 黒 BLK ＭＺ３ほこり除去
. . .
. YEL . . . PGND 2 黒 BLK CLA1 クラッチ
3 +24V . . .
. BLK
7 DRVH ５５５７−０6R ５５５９−０6P Dust removal motor ５５５７−０２R
. ５５５６PBTL ５５５８PBTL ５５５７−０２R ５５５６PBTL Cassette ejection clutch
4 ＮＣ５５５６PBTL
. CN-SOLZ1
8 DRVL
G . +24V 1 赤 RED G
. . .
DRVH 3 黄 YEL 107Y0168
. . . SOLZ1 ｽﾄｯﾊﾟｰ駆動
2
. . .
DRVL 4 黒 BLK
. . IP stopper solenoid
DF1E−4S-2.5C ５５５７−０4R ５５５９−０４P
DF1B-2428SCA ５５５６PBTL ５５５８PBTL
CN-8 1 PGND FFM12A
. UL1007AWG24 PHR-4(日圧) 機種ユニット
2 +5V SPH-002T-P0.5L 118YX214 5436 -
. 136Y6780
3 PGND CNZ-10 回路図
. 名称補助名称 CCR
4 +15V 1 黄 YEL +15V 1 CN-1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SP - 62
. . . . -
H 2 黄 YEL PGND 2 対応コード H
. . .
3 黄 YEL +5V 3 コード Rev.
858Y0253
.
4
.
黄 YEL PGND
.
4 Z22Y0005436 6
UL1007AWG24
. . . 頁
DF1B−４EP-2.5RC DF1B−４ES-2.5RC 8
DF1-PD2428SCB DF1B-2428SCA 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
06.20.2004 FM4337
010-051-08
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
INV12A 120Y0079
５５５７−１０R
５５５６PBTL
104N0016
５５５７−０８R
3 MTH12A-INV12A - ５５５６PBTL CN-11 1 L1-1 白 WHT
CN-１ .
6 L1-2 白 WHT
.
RED +24V 赤 1 2
. .
BLK GND 黒 5 7 N.C
B . . B
RED +24V 赤 2 3 L2-1 白 WHT
. .
BLK GND 黒 6 8 L2-2 白 WHT
. .
RED +24V 赤 3 4
. .
BLK GND 黒 7 9 N.C FX-1000 FX-1000 FX-1000
. .
RED +24V 赤 4 5 L3-1 白 WHT
. . L1-1 L2-1 L3-1
BLK GND 黒 8 10 L3-2 白 WHT 1. 1. 1.
. . L1-2 LAMB１ L2-2 LAMB２ L3-2 LAMB3
2. 123N0007
2. 123N0007
2. 123N0007
L1-3 L2-3 L3-3
INV12B 1. 消去ランプ 1. 消去ランプ 1. 消去ランプ
UL1061 AWG22 CN-12 1 L1-3 白 WHT L1-4 (蛍光面) L2-4 (蛍光面) L3-4 (蛍光面)
. 2. 2. 2.
C 104N1471 1 +24V_GND +5V 1
4
.
L1-4 白 WHT
FX-1000 FX-1000 C
. . 136Y6775 . . 2 L2-3 白 WHT Erasure lamp FX-1000 Erasurelamp Erasurelamp
2 +24V_GND LAMP STB1 2 .
CN-5 . . . . CN-6 5 L2-4 白 WHT
3 +24V LAMP STB2 3 .
. . . . 3 L3-3 白 WHT
4 +24V_GND LAMP STB3 4 .
. . . . 6 L3-4 白 WHT
5 +24V LAMP ON1 5 . 120Y0078
. . . .
6 FUOPEN3 LAMP ON2 6
. . . .
7 FUOPEN2 LAMP ON3 7
. . . . ５５５７−０６R
8 FUOPEN1 LDSNC-1 8 ５５５６PBTL
. . . .
9 FANG4L LDSNC-2 9
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
. . . .
10 FANG4H LDSNC-3 10
. . . .
D 11 +24V_TSW +5V_GND 11 D
. . . .
12 +5V_GND +24V_TSW 12
. . . .
13 LDSNC-3 FANG4H 13
. . . . CN-４ 1 +24V 赤 RED 赤 +24V
14 LDSNC-2 FANG4L 14 . . 119S0006
. . . . 2 GND 黒 BLK 黒 GND FANG4
15 LDSNC-1 FUOPEN1 15 . . 消去冷却
. . . .
16 LAMP ON3 FUOPEN2 16 Inverter cooling fan
. . . .
17 LAMP ON2 FUOPEN3 17 DF3AA-2EP-2C
6 SNS12A-INV12B - . . . . DF3-EP2428PC
18 LAMP ON1 +24V 18
. . . .
19 LAMP STB3 +24V_GND 19 ＃１８７ポジティブロック
.
20
.
LAMP STB2 +24V
.
20
. １７３７２３−１（AMP)
. . . . 136Y6774 TSWB−１ 174737-1（スリーブ）
E 21 LAMP STB1 +24V_GND 21 E
CN-2 . . . . 115S0094
YEL黄 +5VINV 1 22 +5V +24V_GND 22 CN-13 1 赤 UL1007AWG20 RED 赤 NC COM
. . . . . . . . 感熱スイッチ
YEL黄 STBL1L 2 3 黒 BLK 黒
. . Safety thermostat
YEL黄 ONL1L 3 2 黒 BLK 黒
. XADRP-22V(日圧） XADRP-22V(日圧） . 近接導体用（丸端）
YEL黄 FAN3ONL 4 SXA-001GW-P0.6 SXA-001GW-P0.6 4
. . N.C SRA-21T-4(JST)
YEL黄 FAN4ONL 5
.
YEL黄 LAMPREQH 6
. 5557-04R
YEL黄 LDSN1H 7 5556PBTL
.
YEL黄 LDSN2H 8
回路図
.
YEL黄 LDSN3H 9
.
F YEL黄 FAN3REQH 10 F
.
YEL黄 FAN3ERRH 11
. CN-１４
YEL黄 FAN4ERRH 12
. 1 黄
YEL黄 THB1ERRH 13 . . 115Y0035
. 2 黄 THB1S 消去温度検出
YEL黄 HTMPERRH 14 . .
.
YEL黄 TSWB１ERRH 15 DF1E-２S Lamp temperature
YEL黄 GND
.
16 DF1B−2428SCA sensor
.
YEL黄 STBL2L 17
.
YEL黄 ONL2L 18
.
YEL黄 STBL3L 19
.
G YEL黄 ONL3L 20 G
.
CN-3
XADRP-20V(日圧）
SXA-001GW-P0.6 1 +24V 赤 RED 赤 +24V
. . 119S0009
2
.
GND 黒 BLK 黒 GND
.
FANG3 消去冷却
11
Erasure unit cooling fan
DF3AA-2EP-2C
DF3-EP2428PC 機種 5436 ユニット -
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SP - 63
コード Rev.
Z22Y0005436 6
頁
9
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
部品番号検索表部品番号検索表
12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE 12
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
106Y0005B 03B-3 136Y6774C 10-6 316S0125 09B-10 319N3625B 05A-12 324N3041E 04B-19 334Y0084 07C-11
107Y0168 07D-12 136Y6775E 10-7 316S0146 03D-15 319N3627B 05C-27 324N3041E 05A-14 334Y0085 05E-11
107Y0169A 03E-14 136Y6776F 10-8 316S1037 02-25 319N3629 05D-5 327N0135E 07B-5 337N0044 07A-13
109N0016C 02-6 136Y6777E 10-9 316S1037 04A-17 319N3890 07D-11 327N0136B 07B-7 337N0059C 07A-5
113Y1449G/H 09B-6 136Y6780F 10-10 316S1037 04B-31 319Y1161A 03E-10 327N0138A 03B-15 340N0170D 01B-6
113Y1450D 09B-2 136Y6787C 10-11 316S1037 05C-32 322N0037D 03A-12 327N0138A 05C-23 340N0171C 09A-9
113Y1451H/K 09B-7 136Y6792D 10-12 316S1122 02-24 322N0038A 03B-6 327N0139B 05C-22 341N0932E 07D-9
113Y1452D 09B-5 136Y6793D 10-13 316S1122 05A-21 322N0050 05C-12 327N0140A 05C-20 341N0933B 07D-6
113Y1453D/E 09B-4 136Y6795 10-21 316S1187 09B-14 322N0051 05C-13 327N0141A 05A-18 341N0934C 07B-16
113Y1456C 08-2 136Y6796C 10-14 316S2028 03A-20 322N0052 05C-10 327N0142A 05A-17 341N0935D 07B-34
113Y1457C 07C-7 136Y6799E 10-15 316S3098 01A-16 322SF145 04C-4 327N0143C 05A-19 341N0936E 03E-12
113Y1466 04B-25 136Y6805C 10-16 318F0145 07C-14 322SF146 04C-18 327N0144A 03B-10 341N0937B 03A-13
113Y1466 05D-8 136Y6816C 10-17 318F0172 02-20 322SF146 05A-4 327N0155A 03B-9 341N0938H 03A-8
113Y1469B 01B-5 136Y6817D 10-18 318F0172 09A-19 322SF146 05E-5 327N1101904 03B-4 341N0940B 03C-9
113Y1470A 09A-3 136Y8545A 10-20 318F0174 02-23 322SF147 05B-4 327N1103610D 03A-11 341N0941B 07B-31
113Y1471D 02-4 137S1219 09B-22 318F0174 03E-20 322SF148 05C-18 327N1103802 03B-2 341N0942B 07B-30
113Y1552A/B 09B-3 137S1220 09B-21 318F0174 04A-19 322SF149 03A-17 327N1121608A 04C-7 341N0943C 05C-19
114Y5436002A 09B-23 137S2083 09B-20 318F0174 05C-33 322SF149 05A-10 327N1122415 04B-3 341N0944C 05E-8
115S0094 04A-11 137S2084 09B-19 318F0174 05E-12 322SF149 07A-12 327N1123202A 04B-10 341N0955B 05D-3
115Y0035B 04A-9 137S2092 09B-18 318F0174 07C-15 322SF149 07B-13 327S1103002A 05A-16 341N0968C 07A-9
118SX063 03B-16 137S2094 09B-17 318N1065C 05B-15 322SF153 05B-7 327S1104002A 03B-8 342N0105D 05A-6
118SX164 05C-30 137S2096 09B-16 318N1066A 05B-16 322SF154 07B-14 328N0041C 05C-7 342N0106B 05A-8
118SX167 04B-22 137S2097 09B-15 318S1164 02-21 322SF155 07B-8 328N0042C 05C-8 343N0039C 07A-6
118SX167 05A-13 138S0345 02-19 318S1164 03A-18 322SF156 07A-15 328N0043C 05C-24 343N0048 01B-21
118YX214A 07A-2 146S0029 03C-6 318S1164 04A-18 322SF157 04C-13 329N0144C 07B-21 344N0002B 07B-32
118YX216B 07B-25 146S0029 03D-4 318S1164 05C-34 322SF168 07A-8 329N0145A 05A-9 345N1280A 01A-18
118YX245 07B-1 146S0029 05C-28 318S1164 05D-17 322SF178 03A-10 329N0146A 05A-3 345N1404D 03D-5
119S0006 02-2 146S0029 05D-10 318S1164 05E-13 322SY063 05C-15 329N0148B 05A-5 345N1406D 01B-22
119S0008 09A-4 146S0029 07B-10 318S1164 07C-16 322SY063 05E-7 329N0149A 05A-2 345N1419B 08-1
119S0009 02-17 146S0029 07D-13 318S1164 07D-15 322SY065 03B-5 332N0521B 03E-3 345N1456B 08-8
120Y0078D 04A-5 301S4990306 07B-17 318S1174 02-22 322SY066 03E-2 332N0522D/E 03C-3 345N1478B 01B-27
120Y0079D 04A-7 305S0077 07A-4 318S1174 03A-19 322SY093 05C-1 332N0523D/E 03C-4 345N1481 01B-18
123N0007B/C 04A-6 308S0051 09B-11 318S1174 09B-13 322SY121 04B-4 334N0034E 03B-14 345N1490A 01B-23
125Y0062G 09B-8 308S0062 01A-22 318S3060 07A-22 322SY122 04B-5 334N0041A 05C-2 345N1491C 01B-24
128N0067 09A-14 308S0062 06-2 319N3598B 07A-16 322SY232 05C-21 334N2366B 04B-14 345N1493 01A-8
128S0392 03D-10 308S0062 09B-12 319N3599G 07B-19 322SY233 05B-6 334N3506C 07A-17 345N1494A 01A-9
128Y0271C 09A-7 308S0082 04A-16 319N3600B 07B-33 322SY249 05D-1 334N3507E 04C-5 345N1502 04A-3
128Y0280 09A-12 309N0080 07C-3 319N3601B 03E-5 323N0033 07A-3 334N3508D 04C-6 345N1532 08-7
133Y1031A/B 03D-9 309S0037 07D-16 319N3602B 03E-17 323N0040 07A-21 334N3509D 04C-14 346N1078D 03A-15
134Y0056B 03D-6 310S8002516 07B-22 319N3604A 03A-16 323S3234 05A-1 334N3510D 04C-15 346N1095C 09A-1
136N0362/A 10-1 313N1081E 04B-13 319N3616B 07B-23 323S3251 04C-17 334N3511D 05B-8 346N1096C 09B-9
136N0363/0376 10-2 313N1083D 04B-30 319N3618 07A-14 324N1026A 04C-19 334N3512E 04C-9 346N1125B 09A-18
136N0364/0377 10-3 313N1085B 05D-12 319N3619 07B-6 324N1026A 05E-9 334N3513B 03C-11 346N1127B 09A-16
136N0365 10-4 313N1086B 05D-16 319N3620B 04B-7 324N1032A 05E-6 334N3524C 05B-9 346N1128B 09A-17
136N0371 10-19 315G311017 03A-4 319N3623B 05C-14 324N3038C 04C-1 334N5022A 04B-9 346N1136B 09A-2
136Y6773D 10-5 315S0013 05C-11 319N3624B 05C-3 324N3038C 05B-2 334S0009 15-2 347N1598A 08-4
010-051-08 SP - 64 010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337 06.20.2004 FM4337
部品番号検索表部品番号検索表
12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE 12
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
347N1599 08-6 356N6840B 04A-13 356Y0187 03A-9 370N0256B 03D-8 388N2435 07B-28 858Y0252J 10-22
347N1624A 05B-5 356N6842D 04A-14 357N1271C 01B-4 372S0049 03A-21 388N2436 07D-10 898Y0713 01A-14
347N1625A 05A-7 356N6843B 04B-18 358N0163D 04A-1 372S0049 03D-13 388N2447B 05C-5 898Y1000 09B-23
347N1669A 05B-3 356N6844C 04B-26 358N0164C 04B-8 372S0050 03A-22 388N2448A 05C-25
347N1700B 07B-15 356N6845B 04A-12 358N0165F 04A-2 372S0050 03D-11 388N2449 03E-13
347N1730 07C-2 356N6847C 04B-27 360N0360A 03B-12 372S0053 03D-14 388N2450B 03B-11
347N1731A 07D-7 356N6848D 05C-17 360N0360A 04C-3 372Y0004 03A-23 388N2451 03C-7
350N2059A 01A-19 356N6849C 05C-29 360N0362D 07B-9 375N0078 02-14 388N2471A 05D-4
350N2243B 01A-20 356N6850C 05C-26 360N0363 03B-13 375S0040 03A-3 388N2472B 05B-1
350N2244B 01A-6 356N6871B 07B-27 360N0364A 04C-12 376N0198A 01A-17 388N2473B 05B-10
350N2245B/C 01A-7 356N6923B 02-3 363N1788A 03E-16 376N0198A 01B-20 388N2474A 05E-10
350N2387C 01B-7 356N6926D 04C-20 363N2056F 07C-12 376N0215B 01B-19 388N2475C 04C-2
350N2389C 01B-26 356N6927B 02-7 363N2057C 07C-10 382N1217A 01B-14 388N2476C 04C-10
350N2390C 01B-25 356N6928E 02-5 363N2060C 07B-29 382N1218A 01B-15 388N2477 07B-11
350N2496A 03E-9 356N6930D 04B-2 363N2062G 03C-2 382N1219A 01B-12 388N2484C 04C-8
350N2533A/B 07A-1 356N6990A 08-3 363N2065D 03C-10 382N1220A 01B-13 388N2485A 03B-17
350N2534 07B-26 356N6995C 09A-13 363N2068C 04B-23 382N1221A 01B-8 388N2493A 04C-21
350Y1482 01A-21 356N6996C 09A-8 363N2070B 04B-20 382N1222A 01B-9 388N2495 07A-20
350Y1483 01A-11 356N6997D 09A-11 363N2071B 04B-21 382N1223A 01B-17 388N2496 07A-7
350Y1496 01A-2 356N8121A 07C-1 363N2072B 04B-15 382N1224A 01B-16 388N2497A 04C-16
350Y1519 01A-1 356N8122A 07C-5 363N2073B 05C-9 382N1225A 01B-10 388N2498A 04C-11
350Y1530 01A-15 356N8123A 07C-4 363N2075B 05D-13 382N1315A 01B-11 388N3081B 03D-2
352N0458D 09B-1 356N8126B 07C-9 363N2076C 03E-1 382N1398 02-13 388N3082C 03A-14
352N0493A 01A-10 356N8167C 03A-5 363N2109C 05D-7 386N1097 15-1 388Y0014 03A-7
352Y0058B 01B-1 356N8168A 03D-7 363N2110B 05B-14 386S0028 02-12 392N0009A 03A-6
355N0550D 05C-31 356N8169B 05A-15 363N2111B 05D-15 386Y0029 07D-14 398N0059D 03D-3
356N6801D 09A-10 356N8170D 05E-4 363N2113D 05D-2 387N0119C 07B-18 401N0777C 07A-19
356N6813C 07D-1 356N8171A 01A-5 363N2114C 05B-11 387N0120C 07D-3 401N0778B 04A-8
356N6819C 07B-12 356N8212B 05C-6 363N2115 05C-4 387N0130D 02-8 405N0192 08-11
356N6820E 07B-24 356N8213C 05D-9 363N2241C 04B-24 387N0130D 03D-1 405N1770A 01A-12
356N6823D 03E-4 356N8214B 05E-2 363N2242B 02-9 387N0131B 02-10 405N1770A 07D-5
356N6824C 03E-8 356N8215B 05A-11 363N2243D 03C-1 387N0136B 05D-14 405N2643 01B-29
356N6825D 03E-15 356N8216C 05D-11 363N2244B 04B-29 387N0137C 07D-2 405N2644 01B-3.1
356N6826B 03E-19 356N8217C 05A-20 363N2346A 07C-17 387N0138C 04B-1 405N2645 01B-3.2
356N6828B 03E-6 356N8225B 01A-3 363N2388 03C-12 387N0138C 05B-12 405N2670 07C-13
356N6829C 03C-8 356N8226B 01A-4 363S0097 15-3 387N0138C 05D-6 405N2762B/C/D 01B-28
356N6829C 03E-11 356N8315A 03D-12 363Y0408 07C-18 387N0138C 05E-3 405N2766 09A-15
356N6830B 03A-1 356N8388 08-9 364N0092C 09A-5 387N0138C 07A-18 405Y0157C 01B-2.1
356N6831C 03B-7 356N8389 08-5 364S0001 02-18 387N0138C 07D-4 405Y0166 01B-2.2
356N6832F 03B-1 356N8470A 04B-6 364S0006 02-1 387N0138C 08-12 407N0113F 04A-10
356N6833F 07D-8 356N8471B 04B-16 366N0055E 03C-5 388N1073 07A-11 602Y0123 07B-20
356N6834B 07C-6 356N8472B 04B-28 367S0040 15-4 388N1156B 05C-16 603N0182E 04A-4
356N6836B 07B-35 356N8473B 04B-17 367S0045 05E-1 388N1157A 03E-7 606Y0055A 08-10
356N6837B 07C-8 356N8476B 05B-13 367S1087 02-16 388N1158A 03E-18 839Y0035F/G/H
356N6838C 04A-15 356N8487A 09A-6 367S2027 02-15 388N1192A 03B-18 /J/K/L 06-1
356N6839C 04B-12 356N8602 01A-13 370N0255B 03D-16 388N2434A 07A-10 852N0019A/B 04B-11
010-051-08 SP - 66 010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337 06.20.2004 FM4337
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表消耗品一覧表
13 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS 14
Table of Screws/Washers Indication Symbols List Of Quick Wearing Parts
Symbol in the
No. Part name Shape
Indication dissassembly
No. Part name Size Shape
Symbols chart
(example)
1 Fixing plug
1. 2. 3.
1 Cross-recessed flat-head screw S S3 x 10 M3 x 10 1. 2.

2 Binding band
Fixing plug Binding band N.K. clamp
2 Cross-recessed truss-head screw T ✶T4 x 8 M4 x 8 Flat-head screw Truss-head screw
S T 3 N.K. clamp
4. 5.
Cross-recessed pan-head screw 3. 4.
3 with spring washer A A3 x 6 M3 x 6 4 Edging
Pan -head screw with Pan-head screw with Edging Edge saddle
spring washer spring and plain washers 5 Edge saddle
FR1Z0076.EPS
Cross-recessed pan-head screw A B
4 with spring and plain washers B B3 x 16 M3 x 16 TR1Z0042.EPS
5. 6.
Cross-recessed hexagon-
Hexagon-headed screw Hexagon-headed bolt
5 headed screw with spring BR BR 4 x 25 M4 x 25 Q
and plain washers with spring and plain washer
BR
7. 8.
6 Hexagon-headed bolt Q Q3 x 20 M3 x 20
Hexagon-Headed bolt Deltight screw*

with spring and plain washer DT
Hexagon-Headed bolt with
7 spring and plain washer BQ BQ4 x 10 M4 x 10 BQ
9. 10.
8 Deltight screw* DT DT4x8 M4 x 8 Hexagon-headed set

Plax
Ps screw WP
Nominal
9 Plax Ps Ps3 x 6 diameter 3 x 6
11. 12.
10 Hexagon-headed setscrew WP WP4 x 6 M4 x 6
Hexagon nut Plain washer
(double-point) WP4 x 8 M4 x 8 Na W
11 Hexagon nut Na Na3 M3 13. 14.
12 Plain washer W W4 M4 Spring washer

E ring
SW
E
13 Spring washer SW SW3 M3
Nominal
14 E ring E E6 diameter 6
* : Self-tapping screw with a noncircular end
✶: Stainless-made
: Painted black TR1Z0041.PCT
010-051-00 010-051-00
CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 68 CR-IR346RU Service Manual SP - 69
10.10.2000 FM2753 10.10.2000 FM2753
オプションオプション
15 OPTION OPTION 15
D 1 386N1097 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2
D 2 334S0009 ローラー Roller 2
D 3 363S0097 ガイド Guide 4
D 4 367S0040 ゴム足 Rubber 2
Pillar(right)
Pillar(left)
1
1
10mm
10mm
3
4
2
3
4
3
FR6H5C01.EPS
010-051-08 SP - 70 010-051-08
06.20.2004 FM4337 06.20.2004 FM4337
Preventive Maintenance (PM) Control Sheet PM - 1
Control Sheet
08/30/2001 01 Support for software version A05 (FM3058) PM-1, 2, 5, 8, 10–13, 15–17, 19,
25, 32–36, 44, 49, 50, 56
09/25/2004 08 Corrections (FM4338) PM-1–5, 11–67
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PM - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 2 PM - 3
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notations of Intervals

In this volume, either of the following symbols is indicated for each maintenance program.
1.1 Preventive Maintenance Program List
Before initiating any maintenance operation, you should become familiar with the following
The interval requirements that presume the standard count processed (100 films per day) symbols.
are listed below.
Interval Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed every year of
requirements Periodic machine use or whenever a process count of about 30,000 is reached.
Reference Time 1Y
section Maintenance program requirements replacement Remarks
Interval Count parts
processed
2.2 Checking the error log 1Y Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed every two
3 Checking the image/conveyance 1Y years of machine use or whenever a process count of about 60,000 is reached.
2Y
4 Pulling out the machine 1Y
5 Removing the covers 1Y

6 Cleaning the air filters 1Y 30,000
REFERENCE
Replacing the air filters 2Y 60,000 Air filter
The above process counts are based on a maximum daily process count of 150.
7 Turning OFF the high-voltage switch 1Y
8.2 Cleaning the suction cups 1Y 30,000
8.3 Cleaning the rollers
9.2 Cleaning the reflection guide 1Y
9.3 Cleaning the guide roller assembly 1Y

9.4 Cleaning the cleaning rollers 1Y
Replacing the cleaning rollers 2Y 60,000 Cleaning roller
9.5 Cleaning the erasure lamps/filter 1Y
Replacing the erasure lamps 2Y Erasure lamp 1800 h

9.6 Cleaning the conveyance rollers 1Y
10.2 Removing the shock absorbers 1Y
10.3 Cleaning the guides/conveyance rollers 1Y

11.1 Cleaning the cleaning brushes 1Y
11.2 Cleaning the driven-shaft side guide/roller 1Y

11.3 Cleaning the Kapton® belt/flywheel 1Y
Cleaning the light-collecting mirror/lower

11.4 1Y
rollers/guides
11.5 Cleaning the light-collecting guide 1Y

11.6 Cleaning the rubber belt 1Y
11.7 Cleaning the driving-shaft side guide/rollers 1Y

12 Cleaning inside the machine 1Y
13 Turning ON the high-voltage switch 1Y
14 Reinstalling and cleaning the covers 1Y

16 Checking the image/conveyance 1Y
17 Checking the error log 1Y
18 Resetting the erasure lamp lighting time 2Y
TR6H6004.EPS
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PM - 2 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PM - 3

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 4 PM - 5
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Flow A

Removal only
START 10.2 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Removing the Shock Absorbers) for maintenance
after first year
1Y of operation
2.1 Opening the MAINTENANCE UTILITY Window
10.3 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Cleaning the Guides/Conveyance Rollers)
2.2 Checking the Error Log

11.1 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Cleaning Brushes)
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time

11.2 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driven-Shaft Side Guide/Roller)
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance

11.3 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Kapton® Belt/flywheel)
4.1 Powering OFF
11.4 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Mirror/Lower

4.2 Unlocking the Retainers
Rollers/Guides)
4.3 Disconnecting the Cables 11.5 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide)
5. Removing the Covers 11.6 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Rubber Belt)
6. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filters Cleaning Replacement 11.7 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driving Shaft Side Guide/Rollers)
1Y 2Y
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch

12. Cleaning Inside the Machine
8.2 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Suction Cups)

13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
8.3 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Rollers)

14. Reinstalling and Cleaning the Covers
9.2 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Reflection Guide)

15.1 Connecting the Cables
9.3 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Guide Roller Assembly)

15.2 Securing the Machine
9.4 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Cleaning Rollers) Cleaning Replacement
1Y 2Y
9.5 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Erasure Lamps/Filter) Cleaning Replacement
1Y 2Y
17. Checking the Error Log
9.6 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Conveyance Rollers)
18. Resetting the erasure lamp lighting time

A
FR6H6059.EPS
END
FR6H6060.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 6 PM - 7
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures [“C:¥ProgramFiles¥FujiFilm¥FCR¥Tool¥cr346uty.exe”] to open the RU MAINTE-
NANCE UTILITY window.
2.1 Opening the MAINTENANCE UTILITY Window
Windows Update
(1) Power ON the CL.
Programs
Favorites
(2) Power ON the RU.
Documents
Settings
(3) Press the [Windows] key to display the Start menu of Windows. Search
Help
Press Run...
#1
[Click]
Log Off Administrator...
Run ?

Open: "C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\cr346uty.exe" #2 [Type]
RU SERVICE UTILITY window

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10
MUTL PING

EXECUTE EXECUTE
ALL RUs SETTING
FR6H6011.EPS
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PM - 6 010-051-00

010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PM - 7
10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000
10.10.2000 FM2887
FM2887 (3)
(1)
PM - 8 PM - 9
2.2 Checking the Error Log REFERENCE

If no error logs exist, the following message appears.
THE LOG IS EMPTY.
■ Opening the WINNT\System32\telnet.exe Window RESULT: OK
(2) Select the log to check the error log.
EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS 0. QUIT
RU IP ADDR 172 16 1 10 ru0 172.16.1.10
1. LOG
#1 [Click] MUTL PING
2. VERSION
3. TEST
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION 4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
BACKUP (RU→HD→FD) RESTORE (FD→HD→RU) 5. SCANNER UTILITY
ERROR LOG CONFIGURATION 6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
EXECUTE EXECUTE
8. BACKUP MEMORY
ALL RUs SETTING 9. HV OFF
> 1 #1 [Type/ENT]
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 1 #2 [Type/ENT]
_
[Ru0] login : cr ir346 #2 [Type/ENT] 0. QUIT
Password : #3 [Type/ENT] 1. DISPLAY
_
[cr ir346] 2. SAVE TO FTP-SERV
#4 [Type/ENT] -> mutl 3. CLEAR

0. QUIT
0. QUIT
1. LOG
1. ALL
2. VERSION
2. SUMMARY
3. TEST
LOG > ELG > DSP > 1 #4 [Type/ENT]
5. SCANNER UTILITY 0. QUIT
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY 1. FATAL
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY 2. WARNING
8. BACKUP MEMORY 3. BOTH
9. HV OFF
LOG > ELG > DSP > ALL > 3 #5 [Type/ENT]
>
***ERROR LOG ALL***
CODE DATE
TR6H6080.EPS
11311. 2000.01.01. ----------------------------------- #6 [Check]
0. END (DEFAULT=0) :
TR6H6015.EPS
010-051-01
08.30.2001 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM3058 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
PM - 10 PM - 11
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
The following checks are made in this section.
• Check for nonuniformity, sensitivity, and conveyance
• Check for format
• Check for output characters
(3) Check the erasure lamp lighting time.
MAINTENANCE UTILITY window 3.1 Check Before Procedures

EACH RU SETTING ◆ NOTES ◆
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW • Use IPs of all sizes used in the hospital for checking the image/conveyance.
RU NAME IP ADDRESS Note, however, that the IP type to be used should be the VI type.
MUTL PING (2) #2 [Click]
INSTALL EDIT HISTORY EDIT CONFIGURATION (1) Erase the natural radiation and image accumulated on the IP to be used.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions.
CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY • X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
RESET VERSION UP SINCE 2000 10 10
UNINSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION • Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size
TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER • Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
18*24 cm 0 08*10 inch 12 Voltage 80 kV
24*30 cm 0 10*12 inch 1 Amperage 50 mA
14*14 inch (35*35 cm) 2 Time 0.013 sec
14*17 inch (35*47 cm) 1
All IP SIZES 16

WARNING COUNTER
IP READ&HANDLING 0
ERASURE LAMP
(3)#1 RESET SINCE 2000 10 10

[Check]
(3) #2 [Click]
FR6H6079.EPS
010-051-01
08.30.2001 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM3058 (1) 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 12 PM - 13
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance (5) Click on [SINGLE].
#1
◆ NOTES ◆ [Click]
• The film to be output is used in checking nonuniformity, sensitivity and format.
“FR: Function-specific Reference, Print Output Functuin, 2. Setup Necessary When
Editing the Film Annotation Character Format” in the “CR-IR346CL Service Manual”
FR6H6A07.EPS

(6) Click on [IP#].
(2) On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add Exposure Menu]
button. #1
#1 [Click]
[Click]
FR6H6A08.EPS
FRE6H6A04.EPS
(7) Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.
(3) Select [Sensitivity] from [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK ] button.
#1 #1
[Select] [Enter]
#2 FR6H6A09.EPS
[Select]
(8) Press the [ENTER] key.
Sensitivity The examination reservation is completed,and the following screen appears.
#3
[Click]
FR6H6A05.EPS

FR6H6A10.EPS
#1 (9) Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

[Click] The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
Start Study
FR6H6A06.EPS
FR9H6A11.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 14 PM - 15
3.3 Checking Nonuniformity/Sensitivity 3.5 Checking the Output Characters

(1) Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity found on the output film and on the Make sure that the film character format information that was set in “Outputting the Film for
image displayed on the image monitor. Image Check” is displayed on the output film. Also verify that none of the characters look
blurred or broken.
◆ CHECKS ◆
There should be no unusual nonuniformity.
If anything abnormal is found; (1) Check the output characters.
“Troubleshooting" volume ◆ CHECKS ◆
Run the following checks;
• Make sure that the character format information that was set is correct.
3.4 Checking the Format • Check for anything abnormal, such as blurred or broken characters.
For this check, the format misalignment is verified. “Troubleshooting" volume
(1) Using the output film, measure the white blank portion.
◆ CHECK ◆ REFERENCE
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less. The details of output characters and the character display locations are as follows.
If anything abnormal is found; (1) Hospital name (medical institution name)
FUJI HOSPITAL 04001676 A0000 A020
(12) IP barcode No.
Measure (2) EDR mode and menu code
Image frame (3) System ID and image No.
White blank
portion
FR6H6A12.EPS (4) Patient ID

(5) Patient name (10) Film mark
◆ CHECK ◆ (13) Image processing conditions
(7) Sex
(8) Age or date of birth
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 R->L G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using SKULL GENERAL
L 4.0 S200C✼1.2✼1.0AP 0000000001 John Smith [M] 23
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the 1992. 11. 27 [17:43] SCALE: 50% RT-04
actual size on the IP according to the following equation. (14) Exposure menu (9) Set processing information
(15) Standardization conditions (11) Reduction ratio
100 (17) Exposure time
and correction item
Reduction factor (%) (16) Image reversal mark
(6) Date of exposure FR6H6084.EPS
FR6H6A13.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 16 PM - 17
■ When the Machine Is Secured by the Retainers

4. Pulling Out the Machine
4.1 Powering OFF
#1
(1) Power OFF the CL. [Remove] Bolt 12x20, W12 (x2)
#3
(2) Power OFF the RU. [Move] Machine
4.2 Unlocking the Retainers

The procedures for unlocking the retainers vary depending on how the machine is retained.
Take steps with reference to the relevant procedures.
■ When the Machine Is Secured by the Adjustable Feet
Mashine
Machine
#2
[Loosen] Adjustable foot
Caster 4 or 2-Na12
[Loosen]
Na12 (x4)
Caster
Adjustable foot
FR6H6065.EPS
Adjustable foot
FR6H6069.EPS ◆ NOTES ◆
When securing the adjustable feet, pay attention to the following points.
• The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded.
However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installa-
tion place to secure the adjustable feet on the rear side, the two adjustable feet on
the front side should be secured in place. In this case, the two adjustable feet and
two casters should be evenly loaded.
• When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from the floor.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 18 PM - 19
■ When the Machine Is Secured by the Table 4.3 Disconnecting the Cables
Table (1) Disconnect the power cable and interface cable.
#3
[Move] Machine
#2
#1 [Disconnect]
[Remove] T6x12 (x2) Interface cable
#1
[Disconnect] Power cable
FR6H6068.EPS
Bracket
Machine
#2
[Loosen] Adjustable foot
Caster
4 or 2-Na12
Adjustable foot
FR6H6066.EPS
◆ NOTES ◆

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 20 PM - 21
5. Removing the Covers 6. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filters

#3 Clean or replace the air filters.
[Remove] T4x8 (x4)
Top cover Should be cleaned at intervals of one year or a process count of 30,000.
Upper rear cover 1Y
X Should be replaced at intervals of two years or a process count of 60,000.

2Y
#6
[Loosen] #7
T4x12 (x4) [Remove] DT3x6 (x4)
Sponge filter
X [Clean] [Replace]
#3
[Remove] T4x6 (x4) 1Y 2Y
#4
[Remove] T4x6 (x6)
Upper #2
light protect [Remove] T4x12 (x6)
plate
[Clean/Replace]
Air filter
Right-hand side cover

HHS Label
No.2
[Clean]
Lower light protect plate Air filter
#5
#1 [Remove] T4x6 (x4)
[Remove] Front cover FR6H6020.EPS
HHS Label
No.2
FR6H6021.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 22 PM - 23
7. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch 8. Cassette Set Unit

(1) Turn OFF the high-voltage switch. To gain access to the locations to be cleaned, the suction cup assembly should be removed.
8.1 Removing the Cassette Set Unit

(1) Remove the suction cup assembly.
SCN12A board LED is lit when in the CAUTION

ON position. When installing or removing the suction cup assembly, support the IP removal arm by
High-voltage hand.
switch S1 If the procedures are performed without supporting it, the IP removal arm may be bent
S1 or otherwise damaged.
ON OFF
■ S1 REFERENCE
Move the IP removal arm to the IP suction position before proceeding to the next step.
FR6H6022.EPS
IP removal arm
Cassette set unit
FRONT
FR6H6076.EPS
#2 [Remove]
DT3x6 (x2)
PUSH Suction cup assembly

IP removal arm
PUSH
#1 [Remove] Lid opening bracket
FR6H6024.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 24 PM - 25
8.2 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Suction Cups) 9. Erasure Conveyor
(1) Clean the suction cups (suction surfaces) with a moistened cloth.
To gain access to the locations to be cleaned, each section of the erasure conveyor should
be removed.
9.1 Removing the Erasure Conveyor

Suction cup assembly
(1) Remove the guide roller assembly.
Joint
(2) Remove the reflection plate bracket.
[Clean] Moistened cloth
Suction cup (suction surface)
(3) Remove the cleaning roller assembly.
FR6H6025.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
If a resin joint (Part No. 372N0098) is used, replace it with a metallic joint (Part No.
372Y0004).
“03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4" in the “Service Parts List” volume
(2)
8.3 Cassette Set Unit (Cleaning the Rollers) [Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
T
ON
(1) Clean the rollers and guide rollers with a moistened cloth. FR
Cleaning roller
assembly

Guide roller Guide roller assembly
Reflection plate bracket

(3)
(1)
[Remove] BR4x8
Roller [Remove] DT3x6 (x2) FR6H6028.EPS

Guide roller
FR6H6010.EPS
8.4 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit

(1) For reinstallation, reverse the procedures described in “8.1 Removing the Cassette Set
Unit.”

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 26 PM - 27
(4) Remove the box. 9.2 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Reflection Guide)
(5) Remove the light protect plate. (1) Clean the reflection surface of the reflection guide, as well as the guides attached
thereto, with a moistened cloth.
(6) Disconnect the connectors. Reflection guide
INV12B board
CN14
(6) #2
[Disconnect]
Connector
#1
[Remove] Guide (x4) #3
#2 [Clean] Moistened cloth
(6) #1 [Clean] Moistened cloth Reflection surface
[Release] CN13 CN12 CN11 FR6H6030.EPS
Clamp
INV12A board (2) Reinstall the guides.

FRONT
9.3 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Guide Roller Assembly)

T
ON (1) Clean the rollers and guides of the guide roller assembly with a moistened cloth or
FR
(7) ethanol.
[Remove] BR3x6
Light protect [Clean] Moistened cloth or ethanol

plate Guide (x4)
(5)
Yellow filter
[Remove]
T4x6 (x2)
Lamp assembly (4) [Clean] Moistened cloth or ethanol
[Remove] Roller (x4)
BR4x8
FR6H6070.EPS
Box
SFR6H6029.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 28 PM - 29
9.4 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Cleaning 9.5 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning and Replacing the Erasure
Rollers) Lamps and Filter)
(1) Clean or replace the cleaning rollers. (1) Clean the erasure lamps with a moistened cloth.
Should be cleaned at intervals of one year or a process count of 30,000. Should be cleaned at intervals of one year or when the lamps have been lit for
1Y 1Y about 900 hours
[Clean] Cleaning roller Should be replaced at intervals of two years or when 1,800 hours have been
2Y exceeded
If the lamp-on time has exceeded 1,800 hours or if two years have passed since the
start of use, the lamps should be replaced with new ones.
(2) Clean the filter with an ethanol-moistened cloth.

FR6H6078.EPS
Rib
Should be replaced at intervals of two years or a process count of 60,000.
Holder plate Filter
2Y
ONT
#3 FR
[Remove] Spur gear #5
[Replace] Cleaning roller
E6
Bearing
#1
[Remove] DT3x6
Bearing
Antistatic brush (1) #1
[Remove] DT3x6 (x2)
Bracket
Box
#2 Bearing Yellow filter

[Remove] DT3x6
#4
[Remove] E6 (1) #3
(2) [Remove] Lamp
FR6H6031.EPS [Clean] Ethanol (1) #4
(2) Reassemble the cleaning roller assembly. (1) #2
[Remove] Filter [Clean]
When the cleaning roller is replaced, reverse its removal procedures. Moistened cloth Holder plate
(3) Make sure that the removed screws have been secured without slacks. (1) #1
(3) Reassemble the erasure lamp assembly by reversing the procedures of step (2).

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 30 PM - 31
9.6 Erasure Conveyor (Cleaning the Conveyance Rollers) 9.7 Reinstalling the Erasure Conveyor
(1) Remove the antistatic bracket assembly. (1) Reinstall the lamp assembly.
#3 Antistatic bracket assembly (2) Connect the connector.

[Remove] DT3x6
#2 (3) Reinstall the light protect plate.

CNBCR
(4) Reinstall the box.
#1
[Remove] DT3x6
INV12B board
CN14
(2) #1
[Connect]
Connector
FR6H6033.EPS
(2) #2
(2) Clean the conveyance rollers [Secure] CN13 CN12 CN11
Clamp
FRONT
INV12A board
[Clean] Moistened cloth (1)

T
Conveyance roller ON [Secure] BR3x6
FR
Light protect
plate
Yellow filter (3)

[Secure]
T4x6 (x2)
Lamp assembly
(4)
[Secure]
BR4x8
Box
FR6H6034.EPS
FR6H7820.EPS
(3) Reinstall the antistatic bracket assembly by reversing the procedures of step (1).
(4) Make sure that the removed screws have been secured without slacks.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 32 PM - 33
(5) Reinstall the cleaning roller assembly.
10. Side-Positioning Conveyor
(6) Reinstall the reflection plate bracket. 10.1 Removing the Side-positioning Conveyor
(7) Reinstall the guide roller assembly. DETAIL A DETAIL B
#2
[Remove]
#2 BR4x8 (x2)
[Remove] BR4x8 (x2)
(6)
[Secure] DT3x6
(x2) T
ON
FR
Cleaning roller #1
assembly [Disconnect]
Connector CNC1
#1
Guide roller assembly [Disconnect] Connector CNMC3
#1
Reflection plate bracket [Disconnect] Connector CNC10
(7) (5)
[Secure] BR4x8
[Secure] DT3x6
(x2)
FR6H7819.EPS
Hold this position.
HHS Label No.2
Side-positioning conveyor FR6H6037.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 34 PM - 35
10.2 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Removing the Shock 10.3 Side-Positioning Conveyor (Cleaning the Guides and
Absorbers) Conveyance Rollers)
(1) Remove the shock absorbers. (1) Remove the movable guide.
When one year has passed since installation

1Y → The shock absorbers should be removed.
Movable guide
P
TO
#2
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x2)
#1
[Peel] Shock absorber [Remove]
FR6H6075.EPS
FR6H6040.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 36 PM - 37
(2) Release the grip of the conveyance rollers. (4) Clean the conveyance rollers and guides with a moistened cloth.
[Clean] Moistened cloth [Clean] Moistened cloth

Guide Roller
Grip release cam
[Rotate] Gear
Grip release cam

FR6H6041.EPS
(3) Remove the cloth roller.

FR6H6042.EPS
#2
Cloth roller
Anti-static bracket assembly
#1
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x2)
FR6H6039.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 38 PM - 39
10.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor BLANK PAGE
(1) Reverse the procedures for removing the movable guide.

◆ NOTE ◆
Make sure that the upper grip roller (short) is fitted in the notch of the arm.
Arm
Upper grip roller (short)
FR6H6083.EPS
(2) Reverse the procedures for removing the cloth roller.

REFERENCE
The side-positioning conveyor should be reinstalled after the preventive maintenance
for the subscanning unit has been completed.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 40 PM - 41
11. Subscanning Unit 11.2 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driven-Shaft Side Guide/
Roller)
11.1 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Cleaning Brushes)
HHS Label No.2
■ Procedures on the Driven Shaft Side (Machine Rear Side) Reference side
(1) Remove the cleaning brush assembly. #2
[Remove]
Hook
(2) Clean the cleaning brushes.
(1)
[Loosen] DT3x6 (x2) HHS Label No.2
Cleaning brush
assembly #1
[Remove]
Extension coil
spring L=50mm
HHS Label No.2
FR6H6090.EPS
(2) (2) Remove the driven-shaft grip roller (upper).

[Clean] Vacuum cleaner
HHS Label No.2
Cleaning brush (x2) Reference side
HHS Label No.2
FR6H6044.EPS
#1
[Move]
Grip roller (upper)
#2
[Remove]
Grip roller (upper)
FR6H6091.EPS
(3) Clean the driven-shaft grip roller with a moistened cloth.

Grip roller (upper)
FR6H6A03.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 42 PM - 43
11.3 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Kapton® Belt/Flywheel) (3) Install the Kapton® belt and extension coil spring.
(1) Remove the Kapton® belt. • The Kapton® belt should be mounted with its date indicating side up, so that the
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ arrow mark faces the side plate.
• After mounting the Kapton® belt, manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the
When cleaning the Kapton® belt, ethanol should not be used. If ethanol is used, the
Kapton belt does not come off.
date and other markings on the Kapton® belt will be wiped out.
(2) Clean the Kapton® belt and flywheel. Side plate

5
3 09 Rotation mark
0 00
HHS Label No.2 Date
Kapton® belt
FR6H6062.EPS
#1
[Remove] Extension coil spring 76 mm
#3
[Clean]
Moistened cloth
Kapton® belt
#2
[Shift] Bracket
FR6H6502.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 44 PM - 45
11.4 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Mirror/ (2) Rotate the light-collecting mirror.
Lower Rollers/Guides) REFERENCE

When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the guide A in the direction of the
11.4.1 Cleaning Procedures of the Light-Collecting Mirror/Lower Rollers/ arrow as shown below to facilitate access to the screw that retains the light-collecting
Guides mirror.
(1) Remove the spring.
[Rotate] Guide A
HHS Label No.2
#1
[Remove]
Spring
HHS Label No.2
FR6H6046.EPS
(3) Remove the light-collecting mirror.
REFERENCE
Remove the screws while manually holding the guide A to prevent the light collecting
mirror from rotating.
#1
[Press]
Guide A
FR6H6098.EPS
#2
[Remove] V3x6 (BLK)
#4
[Remove]
Light-collecting #3
mirror [Remove]
V3x6 (BLK)
FR6H6099.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 46 PM - 47
(5) Reinstall the light-collecting mirror.
CAUTIONS
REFERENCE
• Do not wipe the light-collecting mirror with a dry cloth. If so, the light-collecting mirror Remove the screws while manually holding the guide A to prevent the light collecting
may be scratched or otherwise damaged. mirror from rotating.
• If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
• Wipe the light-collecting mirror until the lens cleaning paper becomes no longer
soiled.
(4) Using the lens cleaning paper moistened with ethanol, clean the reflection surface of
the light-collecting mirror.
#1
Light-collecting mirror
[Press]
Guide A
[Clean] Ethanol
#3
Reflection surface [Secure] V3x6 (BLK)
FR6H6047.EPS
#2
[Reinstall]
Light-collecting #4
mirror [Secure]
V3x6 (BLK)
FR6H6A18.EPS
REFERENCE
To clean the light-collecting mirror, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be folded (6) Rotate the light-collecting mirror.
in four and then moistened with ethanol. REFERENCE
When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the guide A in the direction of the
arrow as shown below to facilitate access to the screw that retains the light-collecting
mirror.
[Rotate] Guide A
HHS Label No.2
HHS Label No.2
FR6H6046.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 48 PM - 49
(7) Reinstall the spring. (8) Using a moistened cloth, clean the driven-shaft grip roller (lower) and the IP running
surface (guide) on the driven-shaft side.

HHS Label No.2
IP running surface (guide)
#1
[Install]
Spring

Driven-shaft grip roller (lower)
FR6H6048.EPS
FR6H6A19.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 50 PM - 51
11.4.2 Procedure of Installing Driven-Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)/Cleaning (3) Install the hook.
Brush HHS Label No.2
Reference side
(1) Install the driven-shaft grip roller (upper).
#1
HHS Label No.2
Reference side [Install]
Hook
#1
[Insert] #2
Grip roller (upper) [Install]
#2 Extension coil spring
[Install] L=50mm
Grip roller (upper)
HHS Label No.2
FR6H7814.EPS
FR6H6A14.EPS • To install the hook, snap it securely into the groove of the side plate.
(2) Install the driven-shaft grip roller (upper) on the hook on the side opposite to the
reference.
#2 Opposite to the reference side
[Install]
HHS Label No.2
Grip roller (upper)
Hook
Groove of side plate
#1
[Raise]
FR6H4925.EPS
Hook
attached.
FR6H6A15.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 52 PM - 53
(4) Install the cleaning brush assembly. 11.5 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide)
#2
[Secure] DT3x6 (x2) HHS Label No.2
Spacer
After-reading HHS Label No.2
conveyor cover
#1
[Install]
Cleaning
brush assembly
HHS Label No.2

Spacer
#2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
#1
FR6H7815.EPS
[Remove]
BR3x8 (x2)
(5) Make sure that the removed screws have been secured without slacks. FR6H6054.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 54 PM - 55
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
The light-collecting guide should be removed along the rails. CAUTIONS
• Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-collecting guide
(2) Remove the light-collecting guide. may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
• If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
• Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens cleaning
#1 PMT12A board paper becomes no longer soiled.
[Disconnect]
Connector PMT2
REFERENCE
To clean the light-collecting guide, two sheets of lens cleaning paper should be folded
in four and then moistened with ethanol.
Light-collecting section #1
Light-collecting (3) Clean the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide.
[Disconnect]
guide assembly
Connector PMT1
FRONT
Light-collecting guide assembly
A [Clean] Ethanol
Light-collecting surface
FR6H6050.EPS
#2
[Remove] BR3x6 (x2)
DETAIL A
B
#3 [Remove] BR3x10
HHS Label No.2
DETAIL B #4 [Remove] BR3x10 (x2)
FRONT
FR6H6086.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 56 PM - 57
11.6 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Rubber Belt) 11.7 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Driving-Shaft Side Guide/
Rollers)
CAUTION
The rubber belt should not be removed.
HHS Label
No.2
(1) Clean the rubber belt.
Reference side
#2
[Clean] Moistened cloth [Remove]
Rubber belt
Hook
#1
[Remove]
Extension
coil spring
L=50 mm
FR6H6063.EPS
HHS Label No.2 Antistatic brush
(2) Remove the driving-shaft grip roller (upper).
Moistened cloth
HHS Label
While rotating the rubber belt Screwdriver No.2
by hand, clean the inner side

of the rubber belt with a
moistened cloth.
FR6H6061.EPS
Reference side
#1
[Move]
#2 Grip roller (upper)
[Remove]
Grip roller (upper)
FR6H6A01.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 58 PM - 59
(3) Clean the driving-shaft grip roller (upper) with a moistened cloth. (5) Install the driving-shaft grip roller (upper).
[Clean] Moistened cloth HHS Label
Grip roller (upper) No.2
FR6H6A03.EPS Reference side
(4) Using a moistened cloth, clean the driving-shaft grip roller (lower) and the IP running
surface (guide) on the driving-shaft side.
HHS Label
#2
[Install]
No.2 Grip roller (upper)
IP running surface (guide)
#1
[Insert]
Grip roller (upper)

Driving-shaft grip roller (lower)
FR6H6A16.EPS
(6) Install the driving-shaft grip roller (upper) on the hook on the side opposite to the
reference.
Opposite to the
FR6H6055.EPS
reference side HHS Label
#2 No.2
[Install]
Grip roller (upper)
#1
[Raise]
Hook
FR6H6A17.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 60 PM - 61
(7) Install the hook. 11.8 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit
HHS Label
No.2 (1) Reinstall the light-collecting guide.
◆ NOTE ◆
While looking into the peep hole, verify that the φ4 mm hole is visible.
Reference side
HHS Label
No.2
#1
[Install]
Hook
Peep hole
φ 4mm hole
#2
FR6H6082.EPS
[Install]
Extension
coil spring
L=50mm
PMT12A board
FR6H7818.EPS
#4 [Connect]
Connector PMT2
Light-collecting section
#4 [Connect] Light-collecting
guide assembly
Connector PMT1
A HHS Label No.2
Hook
Groove of side plate
#3
[Secure] BR3x6 (x2)
DETAIL A HHS Label

HHS LabelNo.2
No.2
FR6H4925.EPS
#2 [Secure]
attached.
BR3x10
B
DETAIL B #1 [Secure]
BR3x10
(x2)
FRONT
FR6H6049.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 62 PM - 63
(3) Reinstall the after-reading conveyor cover.
12. Cleaning Inside the Machine
“11.5 Subscanning Unit (Cleaning the Light-Collecting Guide), ■ Removal
Procedures”
(1) Using a vacuum cleaner, remove dust deposited inside the machine.
(4) Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor in reverse order of removal.
13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch

(1) Turn ON the high-voltage switch.
A
B SCN12A board
LED is lit when in the
ON position.
High-voltage
S1 switch S1
HHS Label No.2 ON OFF
Side-positioning unit
■ S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B FR6H6057.EPS
14. Reinstalling and Cleaning the Covers
CAUTION
#1
[Secure] Before reinstalling the covers, make sure that the high-voltage switch of the SCN12A
BR4x8 (x2) board is in the ON position.
(1) Reinstall the covers by reversing their removal procedures.

“5. Removing the Covers”
#2
[Connect] (2) Make sure that the removed screws have been secured without slacks.
Connector CNC1 #1 [Secure]
BR4x8 (x2)
(3) Clean the covers.
#2
[Connect] Connector CNMC3
#2
[Connect] Connector CNC10
FR6H6056.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 64 PM - 65
15. Securing the Machine 15.2 Securing the Machine

(1) Secure the machine by reversing the procedures for unlocking the retainers.
15.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance
Value
“4.1 Unlocking the Retainers”
WARNING
Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is unplugged
from the outlet.
(1) Connect the power cable.
(2) Place the breaker switch in the ON position.

17. Checking the Error Log
“2.2 Checking the Error Log”
(1)
[Connect]
Power cable
(2)
ON
CHECK
Breaker switch
FR6H7638.EPS
(3) Measure the resistance value.

(Reference value)
Terminal L–N L–E N–E
Resistance value 100 k Ω – ∞ ∞
<For use in Japan and the US> <For use in Europe> <For use in the UK, etc.>
E E
E
L N
N L N
L
FR6H7007.EPS
(4) Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.
(5) Make sure that the power supply cable has been connected with the machine body
without slacks.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
PM - 66 PM - 67
BLANK PAGE
18. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time
When the erasure lamps are replaced, be sure to reset the erasure lamp lighting time.
(3) Reset the erasure lamp lighting time.

EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
RU NAME LIST OF EXISTING RU NEW
RU NAME IP ADDRESS
MUTL PING (2) #2 [Click]


UNINSTALL RESET
PREVIOUS VERSION VERSION UP SINCE 2000 10 10

18*24 cm 0 08*10 inch 12
24*30 cm 0 10*12 inch 1
14*14 inch (35*35 cm) 2
14*17 inch (35*47 cm) 1
All IP SIZES 16

WARNING COUNTER
IP READ&HANDLING 0
ERASURE LAMP
(3)#1 RESET SINCE 2000 10 10

[Check]
(3) #2 [Click]
FR6H6079.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Installation (IN) Control Sheet IN - 1
Control Sheet
08/30/2001 01 Support for software version A05 (FM3058) IN-5, 6, 12–14, 17–19, 21.1–21.2,
23, 24–29, 31–35, 38
12/20/2001 03 Corrections (FM3277) IN-1, 9
02/20/2002 05 Corrections (FM3328) IN-1, 4, 5
Appx IN-1-1–Appx IN-1-3
CR-IR346RU Service Manual 04/20/2002

09/25/2004
06
08
Corrections (FM3386)
Corrections (FM4338)
IN-1, 7–14
IN-1, 5, 14, 16, 22-41
Appx IN-1-1–Appx IN-1-4,
Appx IN-2-1–Appx IN-2-6,
Appx IN-3-1–Appx IN-3-10
Installation (IN)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual IN - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 2 IN - 3
■ Installation Space
1. Specifications of Machine
REFERENCE
The machine may be installed with its left/right sides and its rear adjacent to the wall.
■ Product Code Note, however, that adequate space around the machine should be required so that the
CR-IR346RU distance from its front to the wall is 1,000 mm or greater and there is enough room to allow the
machine to rotate.
■ Dimensions ● Space required for servicing ● Space required for rotation
W550 x D515 x H1065 (mm)
800 800
Machine
800 Machine 800
1065
800
1,000
● Minimum space for installation ● Minimum space for table (full option)
installation
550
515
Unit: mm
FR6H7645.EPS
Machine Machine
■ Weight
155 kg approx.
■ Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine

• Moving : Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4 Table Table
1,000 1,000
• Fixing : • Adjustable foot x4
• Machine retainer x2
✻ : Make sure that servicing space is secured. ✻ : Make sure that servicing space is secured. Unit: mm
• Table x1 (optional) FR6H7004.EPS
• Table x1 and table retainer x2 (optional)
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual IN - 2 010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual IN - 3

10.10.2000 FM2887 (2)
(1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
IN - 4 IN - 5
2. Installation Work Flowchart A
8. Installing the Cover

■ Workflow for First-Time Installation
START
9. CL Installation Procedures
CL Service Manual
3. Preparation for Installation 9.1 CL Installation “Chapters 3 through 7” in
“Installation (IN-A) -
Connecting a Single RU”
3.2 Unloading
9.2 Checking RU/CL Software Setting "Appendix 3 Checking
RU/CL Software Setting"
3.3 Transfer
10. Final Placement
3.4 Temporary Placement

10.1 Securing the Machine with the Adjustable Feet
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied

10.2 Securing the Machine with the Retainers and Table
4. Installation Procedures
11. Powering ON the CL/RU
4.1 Removing the Machine-Wrapping Packing Materials

4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates
4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members
12.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
5. Installing the Options

13. Powering OFF the CL/RU
5.1 Assembling the Table
14. Cleaning the CL/RU

6. Setting the CPU12A Board
15. Attaching the Cassette Handling Precaution Label

7. Connecting the Cables
END
FR6H7005.EPS
7.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value
7.2 Connecting the Interface Cable
■ Workflow for On-Site Relocation

A When the CR-IR346RU is to be relocated within the institution, reference should be made to
FR6H7001.EPS
"Appendix 1. On-Site Relocation".

“Appendix 1. On-Site Relocation”

02.20.2002 FM3328 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 6 IN - 7
3. Preparation for Installation 3.2 Unloading
3.1 Precautions Regarding Installation CAUTION

When unloading or transferring the machine, use care not to incline the machine.
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in “Getting
Because the machine is not fixed to the carrier pallet, the machine may topple down.
Started” and “■ Installation Site Requirements”.
Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary construction work,
electrical work, and air-conditioning system installation. ◆ NOTE ◆
Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
■ Installation Site Requirements
Avoid the following installation sites: (1) Move down the machine together with the carrier pallet from the load-carrying platform
• Places where the temperature changes drastically. of the truck.
• Places near heat sources such as heaters. (2) Remove the three slats from the top of the crate.
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
• Places where corrosive gas may be generated.
[Remove] Slat x3
• Dusty places. Nail
• Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.

• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
■ Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit F

R
When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body. If you body is O
N
not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the electronic parts. T
T
ON
FR FR6H7815.EPS
010-051-01
08.30.2001 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM3058 (1) 04.20.2002 FM3386
IN - 8 IN - 9
(3) Remove the six slats from the right- and left-hand sides of the crate. (5) Remove the machine-wrapping protective material (reinforced corrugated board).
[Remove] Slat x6
Nail
#3
[Remove] Top machine-wrapping protective material
#1
#4 [Remove] PP band (x4)
[Remove] Tray
DO NOT ROLL UNSTABLE

#2
[Remove] Slope
VORSICHT
O NT
FR FRONT
FR6H7816.EPS
#5 [Remove]
(4) Remove the front and rear ends of the crate. Machine-wrapping protective material
Machine-wrapping
protective material
[Remove] Crate x2
Carrier pallet
FR6H7E01.EPS
◆ INSTRUCTION ◆
During the winter season, allow the machine to stand under its packaged condition for
sufficient time before unpacking it.
If the machine is unpacked immediately after it is carried into the room, moisture
condensation may occur on the machine.
Nail
NT
F RO FRONT
FR6H7819.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386 04.20.2002 FM3386
IN - 10 IN - 11
(6) Remove the vinyl cover. (8) Attach the displacement prevention member.
Machine Fitting
#3
#1 [Secure] Na6
Displacement
[Remove] Na6
[Remove] Vinyl cover prevention
member
Slope
Slope #2
Carrier pallet [Shift] Fitting
Na6 removed at #1 should be used at #3.
FR6H7619.EPS
(9) Slide the position of the fitting of the slope.

FR6H7652.EPS
CAUTION T
ON
To remove the four nuts that secure the machine retaining base and carrier pallet, FR
loosen the four nuts evenly one by one, and then remove them.
(7) Lower the machine onto the carrier pallet. [Attach] Slope
As the four nuts are loosened, the machine retaining base is lowered, so that the
machine rests down on the carrier pallet.
Machine Carrier pallet
Nut
Machine retaining base
#4 Machine retaining
[Remove] base
Na10 (x4) Carrier pallet
FR6H7606.EPS
REFERENCE
The slope may be attached only to the front side of the machine.
T #3
ON #1
FR [Remove] PP band [Remove] Machine retaining
#2 corrugated board
[Remove] Displacement prevention member FR6H7602.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386 04.20.2002 FM3386
IN - 12 IN - 13
3.4 Temporary Placement

WARNING
When unloading the machine from the carrier pallet, two persons should cooperate to (1) Secure space required for installation procedures and temporarily place the machine.
do so using care to prevent it from toppling down.
In this case, the two persons should be positioned, one at the right-hand side and the Space required for installation
other at the left-hand side of the machine.
800
CAUTION
The adjustable feet should be raised all the way up to their upper limit.
(10) Lower the machine from the carrier pallet. Rear

800
T 800 800
ON Machine
FR
Front
800
Space required for rotation

1,000
Slope
Unit : mm
FR6H7006.EPS
Carrier pallet REFERENCE

When there is enough space (800 mm around the machine) to allow the machine to
rotate, installation procedures may be performed only if 1,000 mm or greater in space
is secured on one side of the machine.
FR6H7605.EPS
(2) Secure the machine with the adjustable feet in place.
3.3 Transfer
CAUTIONS
Machine
• When transferring the machine by use of its casters, raise the adjustable feet of the
machine all the way up to their upper limit.
• When bringing the machine into the installation place, support it so that it will not [Secure] Na12 (x4)
topple down.
• When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as slowly as
Caster
possible to avoid shock to it. Note that the step over which the machine may move is
about 10 mm high at most.
(1) Transfer the machine into the installation place. Adjustable foot
FR6H7013.EPS

04.20.2002 FM3386 04.20.2002 FM3386
IN - 14 IN - 15
3.5 Checking the Items Supplied 4. Installation Procedures

Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that is
contained in each carton.
4.1 Removing the Machine-Wrapping Packing Materials
◆ NOTE ◆ (1) Remove the packing materials.
The Test Result Sheet contained should be kept by the service engineer.
■ Machine Main Body #1

[Remove] Tape
Check Item Qty. Remarks
Machine main body 1
#2
TR6H7002.EPS
[Remove] Retaining member
■ Accessories
#3
[Remove] Tape
[Specifications for use outside Japan] #5
#4 [Remove] Tape
Check Item Qty. Remarks [Remove] Tape (x2)/front cover
Instruction Manual 1
Test Result Sheet 1
Machine-specific data floppy
1 3.5-inch/1.44 MB
diskette
For backup
CD-ROM (for RU) 1
(Installed prior to shipment)
One set (RU exposure marker
1 caution label)
Label
1 One set (Inch/metric label)
Fuse set 1 Spare
Ferrite bead 1 E04SR301334
#6
Used only for direct connection [Remove] Tape
CL/RU connection cable 1 without hub
Category 5 cable (cross, UTP type), 1.95 m
FR6H7607.EPS
TR6H7010.EPS
■ Optional Items
[Specifications for use outside Japan]

Check Item Qty. Remarks
Retainer 1 For retaining the machine
• 100-120 V: U.S., Canada, etc.
• 200-230 V: Germany, France,
RU power cable 1 Spain, Sweden, etc.
• 240 V: U.K.
TR6H7011.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
IN - 16 IN - 17
4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates 4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members
(1) Remove the top light protect plates. REFERENCE
The retaining members may be removed along the rope.
(1) Reposition the retaining members.
[Remove] T4x6 (x6)
[Reposition] Retaining member
#1 [Reposition]
[Remove/Secure] Retaining member
Upper light BR4x10 (x3)
protect plate
FR6H7657.EPS
Retaining member
#3 #5
[Loosen] BR4x10 [Secure]
BR4x10 (x2)
#2 #4
[Remove] BR4x10 [Reposition] Retaining member
FR6H7609.EPS
REFERENCE
One screw for each of the right and left retaining members removed at step #2 should
be used at step #5.
(2) Attach the upper light protect plate.

“4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates”
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual IN - 16 010-051-00

09.25.2004 FM4338 10.10.2000
08.30.2001 FM2887
FM3058 (1)
IN - 18 IN - 19
5. Installing the Options 10. Shock absorbing material (x2) 11. Cover (x10)
5.1 Assembling the Table
■ Composition of Optional Parts FR6H7748.EPS
REFERENCES ● Parts used to secure the machine

• Those shown in illustration Nos. 12 and 15 are used for installation with the table.
"10.3 Securing the Table and Machine Together" 12. Bracket 13. Retainer (x2)
• Those shown in illustration Nos. 12-17 are used for table installation.
"10.4 Securing the Machine with the Retainers and Table"
● Parts used to assemble the table
1. Pillar (left) 2. Pillar (right)

14. Na12 (x4) 15. T6x12 (x2)
16. Bolt 12x20 (x4), W12 (x4) 17. Bolt 10x20 (x4)
FR6H7710.EPS
3. Rear pipe 4. Top plate
5. Shelf 6. Bracket
7. T6x35 (x8) 8. T6x12 (x4) 9. T4x6 (x4)
FR6H7701.EPS
010-051-01
010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual IN - 18 010-051-00
08.30.2001 FM2887
10.10.2000 FM3058 (1) 10.10.2000
08.30.2001 FM2887
FM3058 (1)
IN - 20 IN - 21
■ Assembly Procedures (3) Attach the bracket.

(1) Attach the rear pipe.
Rear pipe
[Secure] T6x35 (x8) [Secure] T4x6 (x4)
Pillar (left)
Bracket
FR6H7719.EPS
(4) Attach the shelf.
Pillar (right)
FR6H7717.EPS [Attach] Shelf
(2) Attach the top plate.

Top plate
Shelf
[Secure] T6x12 (x4)
FR6H7720.EPS
FR6H7718.EPS

10.10.2000 FM2887 (1) 10.10.2000 FM2887 (1)
IN - 22 IN - 23
(5) Attach the shock absorbing materials. BLANK PAGE
Pillar (right)
Pillar (left)
Shock
Shock absorbing
absorbing material
material
10mm
10mm
FR6H7749.EPS
(6) Attach the covers.
[Insert] Cover (x10)
FR6H7750.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 24 IN - 25
(2) Set the DIP switches as appropriate.
6. Setting the CPU12A Board
CN1 CN2
The DIP switches on the CPU12A board should be set only when the cassette type is to be
changed or when the barcode reader availability setting is to be changed.
CAUTION
BT1
Before handling the board, wear the wristband.
J4
S3
CN6 CN5 TP1
S1
S2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Remote Local
OFF
S1 settings
Default
bit Description ON OFF
(factory preset)
1 Service terminal connection enable/disable – – ON (fixed)
Lower light protect plate
2 For design analysis – – OFF (fixed)
OFF
(It varies depending
3 Cassette type selection Metric INCH on the specifications
prior to shipment.)
4 Barcode reader availability selection With BCR Without BCR ON
[Remove] T4x6 (x4) 5 For design analysis – – OFF (fixed)
FR6H7658.EPS
8 For design analysis – – OFF (fixed)
S2 settings
Description Remote Local Default
Interlink with CL – – Local (fixed)
FR6H7659.EPS
(3) Attach the lower light protect plate.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 26 IN - 27
7. Connecting the Cables 7.2 Connecting the Interface Cable
7.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance

CAUTION
Value A telephone cable should not be plugged into the I/F cable connector.
The type of cable compatible with this machine is an IEC950/UL1950-listed cable only.
WARNING
Before measuring the resistance value, make sure that the power plug is unplugged ◆ NOTES ◆
from the outlet. • Either the UTP type or STP type of the I/F cable may be connected to the CR-
IR346RU. However, even when the I/F cable is of shielded type (STP type), a ferrite
(1) Connect the power cable. bead should be attached to it.
• Make sure that 50 to 80 mm of the cable protrudes from the ferrite bead (on the side
you will install into the RU).
(2) Place the breaker switch in the ON position.
(1)
[Connect]
Power cable
(2)
ON
CHECK
Breaker switch
FR6H7638.EPS
(3) Measure the resistance value.

(Reference value)
Terminal L–N L–E N–E
Resistance value 100 k Ω – ∞ ∞
<For use in Japan and the US> <For use in Europe> <For use in the UK, etc.>
E E
E
L N
N L N
L
FR6H7007.EPS
(4) Place the breaker switch in the OFF position.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 28 IN - 29
7.2.1 Direct Connection of the CL/RU 7.2.2 Network Connection
◆ NOTE ◆ ◆ NOTE ◆
For the I/F cable used for direct connection, a cross cable should be used. For the I/F cable used for network connection, a straight cable should be used.
(1) Attach a ferrite bead to the I/F cable. (1) Attach a ferrite bead to the I/F cable.
To do so, wrap the cable once completely around the ferrite bead and tie the cable and To do so, tie the cable and its loop together.
its loop together.
I/F cable I/F cable
#2 #2
[Secure] Cable tie [Secure] Cable tie
50–80mm 50–80mm
#1 #1
[Attach] Ferrite bead FR6H7810.EPS
[Attach] Ferrite bead FR6H7810.EPS
(2) Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the RU. (2) Connect the I/F cable to the I/F cable connector of the RU.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
The I/F cable should be connected with its ferrite bead end on the RU side. The I/F cable should be connected with its ferrite bead end on the RU side.
Ferrite bead
I/F cable I/F cable

connector
Ferrite bead
I/F cable
I/F cable connector
Power cable
Ferrite bead
FR6H7725.EPS I/F cable Switching hub

(100 BASE - TX)
Network FR6H7725.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
Always use a 100BASE switching hub.
If a 10BASE switching hub is used, an error in image transfer may result.

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 30 IN - 31
8. Installing the Cover 9. CL Installation Procedures

(1) Install the front cover. 9.1 CL Installation
(1) Perform the CL installation procedures.
CL Service Manual, “Chapters 3 through 7” in “Installation (IN-A) - Connecting a
Single RU”
9.2 Checking RU/CL Software Setting

(1) Check the set items for the RU/CL software.
[Install] Front cover “Appendix 3. Checking RU/CL Software Setting"
FR6H7801.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 32 IN - 33
10. Final Placement 10.2 Securing the Table and Machine Together
Consult with the user for his request before final placement, and then fix the machine ◆ NOTES ◆
according to the following methods. • The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded.
If the machine is to be fixed by means of anchor nuts, refer to “Appendix 2 Fixing the However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installa-
machine with anchor nuts”.
“Appendix 2. Fixing the Machine with Anchor Nuts" two casters should be evenly loaded.
10.1 Securing the Machine with the Adjustable Feet • After securing the bracket, make sure that the bracket does not interfere with the
machine. If they interfere with each other, adjust the position of the machine as
appropriate.
(1) Install the four adjustable feet down onto the floor.
◆ NOTES ◆ (1) Secure the machine to the table.
However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installa- Table
#2
• When the adjustable feet are secured, the casters should be detached from the floor. [Move] Machine
(2) Secure the adjustable feet.
Machine
#4
[Secure] T6x12 (x2)
[Secure] Na12 (x4)
Caster
#1
Bracket [Secure] Adjustable foot
Adjustable foot
Bracket Bracket
FR6H7724.EPS
#3
[Secure] Na12
(x4 or x2)
F
R
O
N
T Adjustable foot (machine)
FR6H7617.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 34 IN - 35
11. Powering ON the CL/RU 12. Checking the Image/Conveyance

(1) Power ON the CL. The following checks are made in this section.
• Conveyance checks
• Image checks

CL
◆ NOTES ◆
ON • Use IPs of all sizes used in the hospital for checking the image/conveyance.
Note, however, that the IP type to be used should be the VI type.
FR6H7747.EPS
(2) Power ON the RU.

(1) Erase the natural radiation and image accumulated on the IP to be used.
(2) Expose the IP under the following conditions.

• X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
• Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size
• Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
ON Voltage 80 kV
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
FR6H7746.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 36 IN - 37
12.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance (4) Click on [SINGLE].

#1
◆ NOTES ◆ [Click]
• The film to be output is used in checking nonuniformity, sensitivity and format.
“CL service manual function reference (FR), 2. Settings for edition of the film character
format”
FR6H7832.EPS
(1) Start the CL application. (5) Click on [IP#].

#1 #1
[Click] [Click]
FR6H7829.EPS
FR6H7833.EPS
(2) Select [Sensitivity] from [TEST] menu, and click on the [OK ] button. (6) Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.
#1 #1
[Select] [Enter]
#2
FR6H7834.EPS
[Click]
(7) Press the [ENTER] key.
Sensitivity
The examination reservation is completed,and the following screen appears.
#3
[Click]
FR6H7830.EPS

FR6H7835.EPS
#1 (8) Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.

[Click] The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
Start Study
FR6H7831.EPS
FR6H7836.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 38 IN - 39
(9) Check the S value.
13. Powering OFF the CL/RU
REFERENCE
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000. (1) Shut down the system of the CL.
(10) Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity found on the output film and on the
image displayed on the image monitor.
◆ CHECK ◆
There should be no unusual nonuniformity.
(11) Check the image format.

Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the output film.
◆ CHECK ◆
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less.
OFF
“Troubleshooting" volume FR6H7656.EPS
Measure
Image frame
14. Cleaning the CL/RU
(1) Clean the monitor and covers of the CL with a dry cloth.
(2) Clean the covers of the RU with a moistened cloth.

White blank
portion
FR6H7837.EPS
◆ CHECK ◆
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
actual size on the IP according to the following equation.

100
Reduction factor (%)
FR6H7838.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
IN - 40 IN - 41
BLANK PAGE
15. Attaching the Cassette Handling Precaution
Label
◆ NOTE ◆
Before attaching the cassette handling precaution label, consult with the user regarding the
following points.
• Check to see whether the label is to be attached or not.
• Location where the label is to be attached.
(1) Attach the cassette handling precaution label above the cassette size indication.
MAKE SURE TO REMOVE ALL EXPOSURE MARKERS

USED AT THE TIME OF EXPOSURE BEFORE
INSERTING THE CASSETTE.
[Attach] Label
FR6H7644.EPS

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appx IN 1-1 Appx IN 1-2
Appendix 1. On-Site Relocation 1.1 Preparation Prior to Relocation

1.1.1 Securing the Light-Collecting Mirror
The procedures described in this appendix are applicable only when the CR-IR346RU is to
be relocated within the institution.
◆ NOTES ◆
CAUTIONS • Take note of the product serial number of the machine to be relocated.
• Back up "CONFIGURATION" and "HISTORY.LOG" onto a floppy diskette.
• The procedures described in this appendix should be used only for on-site relocation and
not for purposes of moving the machine out of the institution by use of a truck or the like.
• When the machine is to be moved out of the institution by use of a truck or the like, use
appropriate clamping materials to pack the machine and transport it under the same CAUTION
condition as when it was originally shipped. If it were transported under different If shocks or vibrations caused by any bump on the floor are possibly transmitted to the
conditions than when it was shipped, the machine would be damaged or its quality could machine during its transfer, be sure to secure the light-collecting mirror in place. Otherwise,
not be guaranteed. the light-collecting mirror might be broken by such vibrations.
◆ NOTE ◆ (1) Start the M-Utility.

The procedures described in this appendix are based on the assumption that RU software (2) [6][ENT] → [4][ENT] → [7][ENT] → [2][ENT]
version A07 or later (PC-MUTL software version 1.2 or later) is used. The light-collecting mirror is locked.
■ Workflow for On-Site Relocation
START
1.1 Preparation Prior to Relocation
1.1.1 Securing the Light-Collecting Mirror
1.1.2 Disconnecting the Cables
1.2 Relocating the Machine
1.3 Installation after Relocation

FR6H7813.EPS
(3) Power OFF the RU and CL.

1.3.1 Connecting the Cables
◆ NOTE ◆
Once "LOCK" is executed, the RU no longer works properly, so that power of the RU
1.3.2 Final Placement
should be turned OFF immediately.
1.3.3 Powering ON the CL/RU
1.3.4 Checking the Image/Conveyance 1.1.2 Disconnecting the Cables
1.3.5 Powering OFF the CL/RU

(1) Disconnect the power and interface cables.
1.3.6 Cleaning the CL/RU
END
FR6H7811.EPS
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx IN 1-1 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual Appx IN 1-2
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
1.2 Relocating the Machine BLANK PAGE
CAUTIONS
• When relocating the machine by use of its casters, raise the adjustable feet of the machine all
the way up to their upper limit.
• When moving the machine, support it so that it will not topple down.
• When the machine should be moved over some step or bump, move it as slowly as possible
to avoid shock to it.
• If a step or bump over which the machine should be moved is 10 mm or higher, place a rigid
steel plate or the like over such a step or bump.
(1) Raise the adjustable feet of the machine.
(2) Relocate the machine.
1.3 Installation after Relocation

1.3.1 Connecting the Cables
"7. Connecting the Cables"
1.3.2 Final Placement

"10. Final Placement"
1.3.3 Powering ON the CL/RU

"11. Powering ON the CL/RU"
1.3.4 Checking the Image/Conveyance

"12 Checking the Image/Conveyance"
1.3.5 Powering OFF the CL/RU

"13. Powering OFF the CL/RU"
1.3.6 Cleaning the CL/RU

"14. Cleaning the CL/RU"
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(2) Drill holes for embedding the anchor nuts and then embed the anchor nuts.
Appendix 2. Fixing the Machine with Anchor Nuts
#2
[Embed] Anchor nut
Follow the procedure below to fix the CR-IR346RU on the floor surface using anchor nuts.
18φ
#1 [Attach]/#3 [Remove]
2.1 Securing the Machine with the Retainers Bolt 12x20 (x4)
Anchor nut W12 (x4)
Na12
◆ NOTE ◆ 52mm
Before drilling holes for embedding the anchor nuts, wear protective goggles.
REFERENCE
When determining the locations for embedding the anchor nuts, temporarily install the
machine and retainers in place, and then mark the locations. FR6H7723.EPS
At that time, adjust the height of the adjustable foot so that the positional relationship
between the retainer and the adjustable foot nut and spacer is as shown below.
(3) Secure the machine in place.
◆ NOTES ◆
Nut
Retainer • The four adjustable feet should be evenly loaded.
Spacer However, if there is too little space on the right and left sides in the machine installa-
Adjustable foot the front side should be secured in place. In this case, the two adjustable feet and
FR6H7600.EPS
#4
(1) Determine the locations for embedding the anchor nuts. [Secure] Bolt 12x20, W12 (x2)
#3
614 mm (reference value) [Move] Machine #2
[Secure] Bolt 12x20, W12 (x2)
Machine 398 mm (reference value) #1

[Secure] Adjustble foot
Marking location Na12 (x4 or x2)
x4
F
R
O
N FR6H7614.EPS
T
Retainer FR6H7613.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
2.2 Securing the Machine with the Retainers and Table (2) Determine the locations for embedding the anchor nuts.
525.2 (reference value)
REFERENCE Table leg
The adjustable feet attached on the table should be removed in advance.
98.5
244
Retainer
Marking location x4
Unit: mm
Table FR6H7612.EPS
[Remove] (3) Drill holes for embedding the anchor nuts, and then embed the anchor nuts.
Adjustable foot (x4)
#2
FR6H7610.EPS
[Embed] Anchor nut
18φ
(1) Attach the retainers to the table. #1 [Attach]/#3 [Remove]
Bolt 12x20 (x4)
Anchor nut W12 (x4)
Na12
52mm
[Secure] Bolt 10x20 (x4)

FR6H7723.EPS
(4) Secure the table in place.
Table
Table
Retainer
FR6H7611.EPS [Secure] Bolt 12x20 (x4)
◆ NOTE ◆
Before drilling holes for embedding the anchor nuts, wear protective goggles.
REFERENCE
When determining the locations for embedding the anchor nuts, perform temporary
installation with the retainers attached to the table, and then mark the locations.
FR6H7615.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
(5) Secure the machine to the table. BLANK PAGE
◆ NOTES ◆
• After securing the bracket, make sure that the bracket does not interfere with the
machine. If they interfere with each other, adjust the position of the machine as
appropriate.
Table
#1
[Move] Machine
#3
[Secure] T6x12 (x2)
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
#2
[Secure]
Adjustable foot
Na12 (x4 or x2)
F
R
O
N
T
Adjustable foot (machine)
FR6H7616.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Appendix 3. Checking RU/CL Software Setting 3.1 Checking the CL Configuration (Network Information)
(1) On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate “CONFIG” → “NETWORK CONFIG”
Make sure that the following seven items set by the RU/CL software have been correctly set. → “ALL OTHER NODES”, and make sure that the IP address of the installed RU is a
user-specified value.
1. Checking the CL Configuration (Network Information)
“Appendix 3.1 Checking the CL Configuration (Network Information)”
2. Checking the CL Configuration (Machine Information)

“Appendix 3.2 Checking the CL Configuration (Machine Information)”
[Check]
3. Checking the CL Configuration (Connection Scheme)

“Appendix 3.3 Checking the CL Configuration (Connection Scheme)”
FR6H4G01.EPS
4. Checking the CL’s FTP (FTP Server Setting)
“Appendix 3.4 Checking the CL’s FTP (FTP Server Setting)” (2) On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate “CONFIG”→“NETWORK
CONFIG”→”ALL OTHER NODES”, and make sure that the “FRUP Setup” settings of
5. Checking the CL’s FTP (User Name and Password) the RU installed are as follows.
“Appendix 3.5 Checking the CL’s FTP (user name and password)”
6. Checking the RU Setting (EDIT CONFIGURATION)

“Appendix 3.6 Checking the RU Setting (EDIT CONFIGURATION)”
7. Checking the CL Configuration (Shared Patient Information)

“Appendix 3.7 Checking the CL Configuration (Shared Patient Information)”
REFERENCE
Described in this section is the procedure of checking with the following settings as an
example. #1
HostName: XG-1 [Check]
RU’s IP address: 172.16.1.10
CL’s IP address: 172.16.1.21
#2
[Check]
FR6H4G03.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
If the settings are not correct, make settings referring to the CL service manual.
“IN-B: Installation, 4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility ■ Registering
the Network Information” in the “CR-IR346CL Service Manual”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
3.2 Checking the CL Configuration (Machine Information) ◆ NOTES ◆

• When a plurality of RUs are registered, make sure that the RUs are registered in
(1) On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate “CONFIG”→“CONNECTING order from “Equipment #1” to “Equipment #2”. If the RU is selected in “Equipment #2”
EQQè MENT”, and make sure that the RU has been registered in the “READER” with nothing selected in “Equipment #1”, the registered RU cannot be recognized
attribute. normally.
[NG]
[Check]
FR6H4G04.EPS
(2) On the Setup Configuration Item screen, navigate “CONFIG” → “CONNECTING

EQUIPMENT”, and make sure that the RU has been selected in “Equipment #1”X
[Check]
FR6H4G02.EPS
• If the settings are not correct, make settings referring to the CL service manual.
“IN-B: Installation, 4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility ■ Registering
the Equipment Information (CONNECTION EQUIPMENT)” in the “CR-IR346CL
Service Manual”
FR6H4G09.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
3.3 Checking the CL Configuration (Connection Scheme) 3.4 Checking the CL’s FTP (FTP Server Setting)
(1) On the Setup Configuration Item screen, make sure that “CONFIG” → “1. IMAGE (1) Navigate the “Start” menu → “Setting” → “Control panel” → “Management tool” →
MODALITY” → “21. Connecting Between Reader and Console” is as follows. “Internet service manager” on the Windows, and boot the “Internet information
• For 1-to-1 connection: “0:1-1” service”.
• For N-to-N connection: “1:N-N”
(2) Right-click on the “Existing FTP site” folder, and select the property.
Example: N-to-N connection ➮ The “Existing FTP site property” dialogue appears.
(3) Select the “Home directly” tab, and click on the [Reference] button.
➮ The “Folder reference” dialogue appears.
[Check]
FR6H4G10.EPS (4) A directory of each RU is created in the home directory. Make sure that each path has
been specified.
(2) #1 [Select]
→ [Right-click]
→ [Property]
(3)#1 [Select]
(3) #2
[Click]
(4)#1 [Check]
FR6H4G06.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
“RI: Reinstalling the Software, 16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server” in the “CR-
IR346CL Service Manual”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
3.5 Checking the CL’s FTP (User Name and Password) 3.6 Checking the RU Setting (EDIT CONFIGURATION)
(1) Start “EDIT CONFIGURATION” from the PC-MUTL. Check “IP address of the RU”, “IP
■ For Windows 2000 address of the CL” and “IP address of the FTP server” set in the RU.
(1) From the “Start” menu of Windows, navigate “Settings”→“Control Panel”→“Users and
Passwords”, and make sure that user names and passwords have been set to allow
EDIT CONFIGURATION windows
the RU to automatically access the FTP.
[Check]
[Check]
FR6H4G07.EPS
■ For Windows XP
(1) From the “Start” menu of Windows, navigate “Control Panel”→“User Accounts”, and
make sure that user names and passwords have been set to allow the RU to
automatically access the FTP.
FR6H4G08.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
If the settings are not correct, make setting referring to the Checks, Replacement and
Adjustment of Parts volume.
“15.1.1 Changing IP Address of RU” in the “Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
[Check] of Parts” volume
FR6H4G11.EPS
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
3.7 Checking the CL Configuration (Shared Patient BLANK PAGE

Information)
(1) If multiple CL’s are registered and image reading is performed with a specific RU, make
sure that the CL has been set to “IDT CONNECTING”.
[Check]
FR6H4G05.EPS
◆ NOTE ◆
“MU: Maintenance Utility, 3.12 MAC Address Manual Input” in the “CR-IR346CL
Service Manual”
09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338
Performance Check (PC) Control Sheet PC - 1
Control Sheet
Performance Check (PC)
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PC - 1

09.25.2004 FM4338
PC - 2 PC - 3
❐ 9 CL Installation Procedures
CR-IR 346RU Performance Check List
❐ 9.1 CL Installation
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of CR-IR 346RU installation to ❐ 9.2 Checking RU/CL Software Setting
record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based on the ❐ Appendix 3.1 Checking the CL Configuration (Network Information)
instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace the ❐ Appendix 3.2 Checking the CL Configuration (Machine Information)
installation steps set forth in the CR-IR 346RU Service Manual but is to be followed
concurrently. ❐ Appendix 3.3 Checking the CL Configuration (Connection Scheme)
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking the ❐ Appendix 3.4 Checking the CL’s FTP (FTP Server Setting)
system connection and output image quality (section 12), and then pass the equipment over ❐ Appendix 3.5 Checking the CL’s FTP (User Name and Password)
to the customer. ❐ Appendix 3.6 Checking the RU Setting (EDIT CONFIGURATION)
❐ Appendix 3.7 Checking the CL Configuration (Shared Patient Information)
Installation Information
❐ 10 Final Placement
Serial Number: _____________ Software Ver.: ______________
❐ 10.1 Securing the Machine with the Adjustable Feet
Site Name: ________________ Installed by: ________________
❐ 10.2 Securing the Table and Machine Together
Site Number: ______________ Signature: _________________
Room Name: ______________
❐ 12 Checking the Image/Conveyance
Installation Date/Servicing Date: ______________
❐ 12.1 Check Before Procedures
❐ 12.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
Checklist
X-ray dose: _____ mR ‘S’ value: _____ ❐ OK ❐ NG
❐ 3 Preparation for Installation Image irregularities ❐ OK ❐ NG
❐ 3.5 Checking the Items Supplied Shading check ❐ OK ❐ NG
❐ 4 Installation Procedures Image format check ❐ OK ❐ NG
❐ 4.1 Removing the Machine-Wrapping Packing Materials
❐ 4.2 Removing the Light Protect Plates ❐ 13. Powering OFF the CL/RU
❐ 4.3 Repositioning the Retaining Members ❐ 14. Cleaning the CL/RU
❐ 6 Setting the CPU12A Board
❐ 7 Connecting the Cables Summary Test Pass/Fail ❐ OK ❐ NG
❐ 7.1 Connecting the Power Cable and Checking Resistance Value
Resistance between L and N: __________Ω ❐ Film output must be stored as the record of performance check.
Resistance between L and E: __________Ω Test equipment: _______ Model: _______ S/N: _______ Calibration Due: _______
Resistance between N and E:__________Ω Test equipment: _______ Model: _______ S/N: _______ Calibration Due: _______
❐ 7.2 Connecting the Interface Cable Test equipment: _______ Model: _______ S/N: _______ Calibration Due: _______
Test equipment: _______ Model: _______ S/N: _______ Calibration Due: _______
010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PC - 2 010-051-08 CR-IR346RU Service Manual PC - 3

09.25.2004 FM4338 09.25.2004 FM4338

FCR Xg-1: CR-IR346RU

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCR Xg-1: CR-IR346RU

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0.

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation,

FCR® is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>

Copyright© 2000-2004 by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored

Document No. 010-051-08

Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

◆ INSTRUCTION ◆ ● Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration

■ Notation in the Manual

010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.2 010-051-00

Upper light protect plate

2.3 Safety Labels and Other Labels

■ Precaution Label Attachment Locations

HHS Certification and

HHS Label #2 FR6H0007.EPS

HHS Label #1 ● Scanning Optics Unit

■ List of Precaution Labels ● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 3B Panel Label

● HHS Certification and Identification Label

FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

MODEL CR-IR 346RU

This product complies with

● EN 60825-1: 1996 Class 1 Product Label ● EN 60825-1: 1996 Warning Label

2.3.2 Other Labels ■ List of Other Labels

● Ratings Indication Label

FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY

Ratings Indication Label • For use outside Japan

3. Specifications of the Machine 3.2 List of Optional Components

■ Dimensions ■ Moving Means

• Four adjustable feet • One table (optional)

■ Weight adjustable feet

010-051-00 CR-IR346RU Service Manual 0.16 010-051-01

3.5 Environmental Requirements 3.6 Electrical Specifications

■ Atmospheric Requirements ■ Frequency

The above environmental requirements during non-operation ■ Power Capacity

■ Grounding (in Japan)

■ Grounding (outside Japan)

3.7 Other Specifications 3.8 Installation and Servicing Spaces

● When the machine is secured by the retainers

200 or more 200 or more

Space required for servicing

Machine 500 800

110 or more 110 or more

CR-IR346RU Service Manual – Contents

2.2 RU Error Handling............................................................................................... MD-23 5.1.9 Remaining IP Processing .......................................................................... MD-84

5.3 Secondary Erasure Flow ...................................................................................... MD-180

Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)

20. Installing Procedure of RU Software ......................................................................... MC-308

21. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedures ................................................................................ MC-314

Appendix 2 Procedures for Software Version Update (For PC-MUTL Software

Appendix 3 Procedures for Restoring Application Software of FLASH ROM

Appendix 4 Checking PC-MUTL Version ................................................................... Appx MC 4-1

Maintenance Utility (MU)

2. Functions of the PC-MUTL ........................................................................................... MU-12 3. Details of M-Utility ......................................................................................................... MU-54

[4] ELECTRICAL UTILITY......................................................................................... MU-71 [5] SCANNER UTILITY.............................................................................................. MU-90

Service Parts List (SP)

Preventive Maintenance (PM)

Performance Check (PC)

BLANK PAGE BLANK PAGE

CR-IR346RU Service Manual 09/25/2004 08 Revised (FM4338) MD-1, 3, 13–26, 39.1

Machine Description (MD)